VT Trader 2.

0 Help Manual
© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC
VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the
written permission of the publisher.

Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered trademarks of the
respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks.

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no
responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this
document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and
the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused
directly or indirectly by this document.

Printed: May 2011

 Contents 3

Table of Contents

Part I Getting Started with VT Trader 2.0 17

1 PC System
...................................................................................................................................
Requirements 17
2 How to
...................................................................................................................................
intall VT Trader... 17
3 How to
...................................................................................................................................
login to VT Trader... 23

Part II VT Trader 2.0's Interface 26

1 Docking
...................................................................................................................................
- How it works... 27
2 Fluent...................................................................................................................................
UI Ribbon 30
Environm ent Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Desktop Workspaces
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 33
Window s Group
......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Client Files .........................................................................................................................................................
Group 34
Options Group......................................................................................................................................................... 34
My Account Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Account Actions
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 35
Account Summary
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 36
Reports Group......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Trading Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 37
Place New .........................................................................................................................................................
Orders(s) Group 37
Close Group ......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Dealing Rates.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 38
Trading Window
.........................................................................................................................................................
s Group 39
Messages .........................................................................................................................................................
Group 39
Trading Tools.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 40
Alerts Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 40
Price Alerts.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 40
Chart Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 41
Open Chart.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 41
Chart Templates
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 41
Active Chart .........................................................................................................................................................
Group 42
Show /Hide.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 43
Zoom Group ......................................................................................................................................................... 44
Axes Group ......................................................................................................................................................... 45
Print Group......................................................................................................................................................... 46
Technical Analysis
..........................................................................................................................................................
Tab 46
Analysis Tools
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 46
Draw ing Tools
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 47
Indicators Group
......................................................................................................................................................... 49
Trading Systems
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 50
Fundam ental Analysis
..........................................................................................................................................................
Tab 51
New s Group ......................................................................................................................................................... 51
Forex Resources
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 51
Help Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 52
Support Resources
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 52
Troubleshooting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 52

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

3
 4 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Contact Us.........................................................................................................................................................
Group 53
Version Group
......................................................................................................................................................... 53
3 VT Trader
...................................................................................................................................
Button 54
4 Quick...................................................................................................................................
Access Toolbar 55
5 VT Trader
...................................................................................................................................
Status Bar 58
6 VT Trader
...................................................................................................................................
Notification Icon 58
7 Options
...................................................................................................................................
(User Preferences) 59
General .......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Instruments......................................................................................................................................................... 60
Trading ......................................................................................................................................................... 62
Desktop Workspaces
......................................................................................................................................................... 64
Print Page Setup
......................................................................................................................................................... 66
Miscellaneous
......................................................................................................................................................... 68
Com m unication
.......................................................................................................................................................... 70
Common ......................................................................................................................................................... 70

Part III Task Windows 73

1 Accounts
...................................................................................................................................
Summary 74
Account Inform..........................................................................................................................................................
ation 74
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 76
Properties ......................................................................................................................................................... 77
Account Inform..........................................................................................................................................................
ation Status Bar 79
Currency Portfolio
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 80
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 82
Properties ......................................................................................................................................................... 83
Reports .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
2 Dealing
...................................................................................................................................
Rates 89
Quotes Board..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 89
Instrument .........................................................................................................................................................
Panel 90
Contextual Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 92
Advanced Rates..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 94
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 97
Properties ......................................................................................................................................................... 98
3 Trading
................................................................................................................................... 101
Open Positions
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 101
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 104
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 106
Pending Orders
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 108
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 111
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 111
Trading Activity
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 114
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 117
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 117
4 Trading
...................................................................................................................................
Tools 120
Currency Calculator
.......................................................................................................................................................... 120
Pip Calculator
.......................................................................................................................................................... 120
5 Chart
...................................................................................................................................
Window 121
Chart Window..........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar 124
Customize...
......................................................................................................................................................... 127
Contextual Menu
.......................................................................................................................................................... 128

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Contents 5

Chart Properties
.......................................................................................................................................................... 131
Chart ......................................................................................................................................................... 133
Show /Hide......................................................................................................................................................... 135
Miscellaneous
......................................................................................................................................................... 137
High/Low .........................................................................................................................................................
Zone 138
Cross Hair......................................................................................................................................................... 140
Chart Types .......................................................................................................................................................... 142
6 Desktop
...................................................................................................................................
Workspaces Management 150
7 Chart
...................................................................................................................................
Templates Management 152
8 Technical
...................................................................................................................................
(Chart) Analysis 154
Data Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 154
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 157
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 158
9 Fundamental
...................................................................................................................................
Analysis 161
Market Com m ..........................................................................................................................................................
entaries Window 161
Conextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 163
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 164
Dow Jones New..........................................................................................................................................................
s Window 166
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 168
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 169
Econom ic Calendar
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 172
10 Alerts
................................................................................................................................... 174
Alerts Activity
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 174
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 176
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 177
Price Alert Window
.......................................................................................................................................................... 179
Active Price Alerts
..........................................................................................................................................................
Sum m ary Window 180
11 Active
...................................................................................................................................
Trading Systems Summary 181
12 Indicators
...................................................................................................................................
Builder 182
Indicator Editor
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window 184
Indicator Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar 184
Editor Options ......................................................................................................................................... 186
Code Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 187
Code Completion ................................................................................................................................... 191
General Tab......................................................................................................................................................... 192
Input Variable(s)
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tab 195
Type ......................................................................................................................................... 198
Output Variable(s)
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tab 200
Horizontal.........................................................................................................................................................
Line(s) Tab 202
Formula Tab......................................................................................................................................................... 204
13 Trading
...................................................................................................................................
Systems Builder 205
Trading System
..........................................................................................................................................................
Editor Window 207
Trading System
.........................................................................................................................................................
Editor Toolbar 207
Editor Options ......................................................................................................................................... 209
Code Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 210
Code Completion ................................................................................................................................... 213
General Tab
......................................................................................................................................................... 214
Input Variable(s)
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tab 216
Type ......................................................................................................................................... 218
Output Variable(s)
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tab 221
Output Variable.........................................................................................................................................
Editor Window 223

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

5
 6 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name Tab ................................................................................................................................... 223

Graphic Tab ................................................................................................................................... 225
Highlights Tab ................................................................................................................................... 227
Trends Tab ................................................................................................................................... 227
Indicator Output...................................................................................................................................
Tab 229
Alerts Tab ................................................................................................................................... 230
Trading Tab ................................................................................................................................... 232
Formula Tab
......................................................................................................................................................... 233
14 Quick
...................................................................................................................................
Lists 235
Configure Indicators
..........................................................................................................................................................
Quick List 235
Configure Trading
..........................................................................................................................................................
System s Quick List 236

Part IV Drawing Tools 239

1 Data...................................................................................................................................
Analysis 240
Cross Hair Tool
.......................................................................................................................................................... 240
Copy Prices ..........................................................................................................................................................
Tool 241
Com m ents Tool
.......................................................................................................................................................... 243
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 245
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 246
Sym bols Tool.......................................................................................................................................................... 246
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 249
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 250
2 Lines
................................................................................................................................... 250
Vertical Lines.......................................................................................................................................................... 250
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 252
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 253
Horizontal Lines
.......................................................................................................................................................... 253
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 255
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 256
Trend Lines .......................................................................................................................................................... 256
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 258
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 259
Trend Lines ..........................................................................................................................................................
by Angle 259
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 261
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Linear Regression
..........................................................................................................................................................
Lines 263
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 264
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 265
3 Channels
................................................................................................................................... 265
Standard Deviation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Channels 265
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 267
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 268
Standard Error..........................................................................................................................................................
Channels 269
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 270
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 271
Raff Regression
..........................................................................................................................................................
Channels 272
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 274
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 275
Equidistant Channels
.......................................................................................................................................................... 276
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 277
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 278
Andrew s' Pitchforks
.......................................................................................................................................................... 279

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Contents 7

Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 280
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 281
4 Shapes
................................................................................................................................... 282
Ellipses .......................................................................................................................................................... 282
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 283
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 285
Rectangles .......................................................................................................................................................... 286
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 287
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 288
Triangles .......................................................................................................................................................... 290
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 291
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 292
5 Fibonacci
................................................................................................................................... 293
Fibonacci Retracem
..........................................................................................................................................................
ents 293
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 294
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 295
Fibonacci Expansions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 297
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 299
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 300
Fibonacci Tim..........................................................................................................................................................
e Extensions 301
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 303
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 304
Fibonacci Channels
.......................................................................................................................................................... 305
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 307
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 308
Fibonacci Fans
.......................................................................................................................................................... 309
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 311
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 312
Fibonacci Arcs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 313
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 315
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 316
6 Gann
................................................................................................................................... 317
Gann Lines .......................................................................................................................................................... 317
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 319
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 320
Gann Fans .......................................................................................................................................................... 321
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 322
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 323
Gann Grids .......................................................................................................................................................... 324
Contextual.........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 326
Properties......................................................................................................................................................... 327

Part V VT Trader Scripting Language 329

1 Comments
................................................................................................................................... 330
2 Punctuators
................................................................................................................................... 331
3 Operators
................................................................................................................................... 331
Mathem atical..........................................................................................................................................................
Operators 331
Relational Operators
.......................................................................................................................................................... 332
Logical Operators
.......................................................................................................................................................... 332
4 Constants
................................................................................................................................... 333
5 Predefined
...................................................................................................................................
Data Arrays 334

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

7
8 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6 Functions
................................................................................................................................... 334
Absolute Value
.......................................................................................................................................................... 338
Account Status
.......................................................................................................................................................... 338
Arc Tangent .......................................................................................................................................................... 339
Aroon Dow n.......................................................................................................................................................... 339
Aroon Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 340
Average True..........................................................................................................................................................
Range 340
Bar Count .......................................................................................................................................................... 341
Bar Index .......................................................................................................................................................... 341
Bars Since .......................................................................................................................................................... 342
Bollinger Bands
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Bottom Band) 342
Bollinger Bands
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Top Band) 342
Bollinger Bands
.......................................................................................................................................................... 343
Buy Position..........................................................................................................................................................
Count 344
Ceiling .......................................................................................................................................................... 344
Com m odity Channel
..........................................................................................................................................................
Index 345
Cosine .......................................................................................................................................................... 346
Cross .......................................................................................................................................................... 346
Cum ulate .......................................................................................................................................................... 348
Day Of Month.......................................................................................................................................................... 348
Day Of Week .......................................................................................................................................................... 349
Detrended Price
..........................................................................................................................................................
Oscillator 349
Error .......................................................................................................................................................... 350
Event Count .......................................................................................................................................................... 351
Exponent .......................................................................................................................................................... 354
FAMA .......................................................................................................................................................... 354
Floor .......................................................................................................................................................... 355
Fraction .......................................................................................................................................................... 355
Gap Dow n .......................................................................................................................................................... 356
Gap Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 356
Highest .......................................................................................................................................................... 357
Highest Bars..........................................................................................................................................................
Ago 357
Highest High..........................................................................................................................................................
Value 358
Highest High..........................................................................................................................................................
Value Bars Ago 359
Highest Since
.......................................................................................................................................................... 359
Highest Since
..........................................................................................................................................................
Bars Ago 360
Hour .......................................................................................................................................................... 360
IF() .......................................................................................................................................................... 360
Inside .......................................................................................................................................................... 362
Integer .......................................................................................................................................................... 362
IsDefined .......................................................................................................................................................... 362
IsUndefined .......................................................................................................................................................... 363
Linear Regression
..........................................................................................................................................................
Indicator 363
Linear Regression
..........................................................................................................................................................
Slope 364
Logarithm .......................................................................................................................................................... 364
Low est .......................................................................................................................................................... 364
Low est Bars..........................................................................................................................................................
Ago 364
Low est Low ..........................................................................................................................................................
Value 365
Low est Low ..........................................................................................................................................................
Value Bars Ago 366
Low est Since
.......................................................................................................................................................... 366
Low est Since
..........................................................................................................................................................
Bars Ago 367
MACD .......................................................................................................................................................... 367
MAMA .......................................................................................................................................................... 367
Maxim um .......................................................................................................................................................... 368

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Contents 9

Median Price.......................................................................................................................................................... 368

Midpoint .......................................................................................................................................................... 369
Minim um .......................................................................................................................................................... 369
Minute .......................................................................................................................................................... 369
Modulus .......................................................................................................................................................... 370
Month .......................................................................................................................................................... 370
Moving Average
.......................................................................................................................................................... 371
Negative .......................................................................................................................................................... 371
Outside .......................................................................................................................................................... 371
Parabolic SAR.......................................................................................................................................................... 372
Peak Bars .......................................................................................................................................................... 372
Peak Value .......................................................................................................................................................... 373
Position Count
.......................................................................................................................................................... 373
Pow er .......................................................................................................................................................... 373
Precision .......................................................................................................................................................... 374
Prev .......................................................................................................................................................... 374
Rally .......................................................................................................................................................... 376
Random .......................................................................................................................................................... 376
Rate of Change
.......................................................................................................................................................... 376
Reaction .......................................................................................................................................................... 377
Reference .......................................................................................................................................................... 377
Relative Strength
..........................................................................................................................................................
Index 379
Round .......................................................................................................................................................... 379
Sell Position..........................................................................................................................................................
Count 379
Signal Flag .......................................................................................................................................................... 380
Signal Hold .......................................................................................................................................................... 382
Signal Rem ove
.......................................................................................................................................................... 384
Signal Rem ove
..........................................................................................................................................................
Span 387
Sine .......................................................................................................................................................... 389
Square Root .......................................................................................................................................................... 389
Standard Deviation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 389
Standard Error
.......................................................................................................................................................... 390
Stochastic Mom
..........................................................................................................................................................
entum Index 390
Stochastic Oscillator
.......................................................................................................................................................... 391
Sum m ation .......................................................................................................................................................... 392
Sym bol Digits
.......................................................................................................................................................... 392
Sym bol Point.......................................................................................................................................................... 394
Trough Value.......................................................................................................................................................... 396
Trough Bars .......................................................................................................................................................... 397
Typical Price.......................................................................................................................................................... 397
Ultim ate Oscillator
.......................................................................................................................................................... 397
Value When .......................................................................................................................................................... 398
Vertical Horizontal
..........................................................................................................................................................
Filter 398
Weighted Close
.......................................................................................................................................................... 399
Wilder's Sm oothing
.......................................................................................................................................................... 399
William s' %R.......................................................................................................................................................... 399
Year .......................................................................................................................................................... 400
Zli .......................................................................................................................................................... 400
7 Functions
...................................................................................................................................
(Reserved for Future Use) 400

Part VI Technical Indicators 404

1 Aroon
...................................................................................................................................
Indicator 408
2 Aroon
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator 410

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

9
10 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3 Average
...................................................................................................................................
Directional Movement Index (ADX) 412
4 Average
...................................................................................................................................
Directional Movement Index Rating (ADXR) 415
5 Average
...................................................................................................................................
True Range (ATR) 417
6 Balance
...................................................................................................................................
of Power 419
7 Bollinger
...................................................................................................................................
Bands 422
8 Bollinger
...................................................................................................................................
Bands - Fibonacci Ratios 424
9 Bollinger
...................................................................................................................................
Bandwidth 428
10 Bollinger
...................................................................................................................................
Percent B (%b) 432
11 Chaikin's
...................................................................................................................................
Volatility 434
12 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
Dynamic Momentum Index 436
13 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
Momentum Oscillator (CMO) 440
14 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
QStick 442
15 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
Range Action Verification Index (RAVI) 445
16 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
TrendScore 446
17 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
Variable Index Dynamic Average (VIDYA) 448
18 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Accelerator Oscillator 450
19 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Alligator Indicator 453
20 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Awesome Oscillator 456
21 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Fractals 459
22 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Gator Oscillator 462
23 Choppiness
...................................................................................................................................
Index 465
24 Commodity
...................................................................................................................................
Channel Index (CCI) 467
25 Coppock
...................................................................................................................................
Curve 471
26 Darvas
...................................................................................................................................
Box 473
27 DeMark's
...................................................................................................................................
DeMarker I 475
28 DeMark's
...................................................................................................................................
Projected Range 478
29 DeMark's
...................................................................................................................................
Range Expansion Index (REI) 480
30 Detrended
...................................................................................................................................
Price Oscillator (DPO) 482
31 Directional
...................................................................................................................................
Movement Index 484
32 Directional
...................................................................................................................................
Movement System 486
33 Disparity
...................................................................................................................................
Index 490
34 Donchian
...................................................................................................................................
Channel 492
35 Double
...................................................................................................................................
Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) 494
36 Double
...................................................................................................................................
Stochastic Oscillator 496
37 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
Fisher Transform 499
38 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
Laguerre Relative Strength Index 502
39 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
MESA Adaptive Moving Average (MAMA and FAMA) 504
40 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
Relative Vigor Index (RVI) 506
41 Elder-Ray
...................................................................................................................................
Bear Power 509

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Contents 11

42 Elder-Ray
...................................................................................................................................
Bull Power 512
43 Elliot...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator 516
44 Gann
...................................................................................................................................
HiLo Activator 519
45 Gann
...................................................................................................................................
Swing Oscillator 520
46 Gann
...................................................................................................................................
Trend Oscillator 522
47 Hull ...................................................................................................................................
Moving Average (HMA) 525
48 Ichimoku
...................................................................................................................................
Kinko Huo 527
49 Inertia
................................................................................................................................... 531
50 Kase...................................................................................................................................
CD 533
51 Kase...................................................................................................................................
DevStop II 536
52 Kase...................................................................................................................................
Peak Oscillator 538
53 Kaufman's
...................................................................................................................................
Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) 540
54 Kaufman's
...................................................................................................................................
Efficiency Ratio 543
55 Keltner
...................................................................................................................................
Bands (Based on ATR) 545
56 Keltner
...................................................................................................................................
Channels 548
57 Kurtosis
...................................................................................................................................
Indicator 550
58 Linear
...................................................................................................................................
Regression Acceleration 553
59 Linear
...................................................................................................................................
Regression Indicator 556
60 Linear
...................................................................................................................................
Regression Slope 558
61 MACD
................................................................................................................................... 561
62 MACD-Histogram
................................................................................................................................... 565
63 MACD-Line
................................................................................................................................... 568
64 Mass...................................................................................................................................
Index 571
65 McClellan
...................................................................................................................................
Histogram 574
66 McClellan
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator 576
67 McClellan
...................................................................................................................................
Summation Index 579
68 McGinley
...................................................................................................................................
Dynamic 581
69 Momentum
................................................................................................................................... 583
70 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Average 585
71 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Average Envelope 588
72 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Averages of RSI 592
73 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Slope Rate of Change 595
74 Parabolic
...................................................................................................................................
SAR 597
75 Percentage
...................................................................................................................................
Price Oscillator 599
76 Pivot...................................................................................................................................
Points - 24-Hour Cycle 603
77 Pivot...................................................................................................................................
Points - 24-Hour Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios 609
78 Pivot...................................................................................................................................
Points - Monthly Cycle 613
79 Pivot...................................................................................................................................
Points - Monthly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios 619
80 Pivot...................................................................................................................................
Points - Weekly Cycle 623

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

11
 12 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

81 Pivot...................................................................................................................................
Points - Weekly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios 629
82 Polarized
...................................................................................................................................
Fractal Efficiency 634
83 Quantitative
...................................................................................................................................
Qualitative Estimation 636
84 Rainbow
...................................................................................................................................
Charts 640
85 Rainbow
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator 644
86 Rate...................................................................................................................................
of Change (ROC) 648
87 Recursive
...................................................................................................................................
Moving Trend Average 651
88 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Momentum Index 653
89 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Strength Index (RSI) 656
90 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Volatility Index (RVI) 658
91 R-Squared
................................................................................................................................... 661
92 Schaff
...................................................................................................................................
Trend Cycle 664
93 Stochastic
...................................................................................................................................
Momentum Index 666
94 Stochastic
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator (Fast) 669
95 Stochastic
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator (Full) 672
96 Stochastic
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator (Slow) 675
97 Stochastic
...................................................................................................................................
RSI Oscillator 678
98 Stoller
...................................................................................................................................
Average Range Channels (STARC Bands) 682
99 Support
...................................................................................................................................
and Resistance 685
100 T3 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Average 688
101 Trailing
...................................................................................................................................
Stoploss Levels (Volatility-Based) 690
102 Trailing
...................................................................................................................................
Stoploss Reversal Level 692
103 Trend
...................................................................................................................................
Continuation Factor 695
104 Trend
...................................................................................................................................
Intensity Index (TII) 698
105 Trend
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator (tosc) 700
106 Trend
...................................................................................................................................
Trigger Factor (TTF) 702
107 Triple
...................................................................................................................................
Exponential Average (TRIX) 704
108 Triple
...................................................................................................................................
Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) 706
109 True...................................................................................................................................
Strength Index 708
110 Ulcer...................................................................................................................................
Index 712
111 Ultimate
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator 714
112 Volatility
...................................................................................................................................
Quality Index 717
113 Williams
...................................................................................................................................
Percent Range (%R) 719

Part VII Trading Systems 723

1 Aroon
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator Cross System 727
2 Balance
...................................................................................................................................
of Power Cross System 730
3 Bollinger
...................................................................................................................................
Bands Breakout System 734
4 Bollinger
...................................................................................................................................
Bands Reversal System 738
5 Bull ...................................................................................................................................
/ Bear Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks Reversal System 742

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Contents 13

6 Bull ...................................................................................................................................
/ Bear Japanese Candlesticks Reversal System 745
7 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
Dynamic Momentum Index Cross System 749
8 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
Dynamic Momentum Index Reversal System 753
9 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
QStick Cross System 757
10 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
Trend Momentum System 761
11 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
TrendScore Trend Surfing System 765
12 Chande's
...................................................................................................................................
VIDYA Cross System 769
13 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Accelerator Oscillator Cross System 773
14 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Accelerator Oscillator Reversal System 777
15 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Awesome Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System 781
16 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Awesome Oscillator / Zero Cross System 785
17 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Awesome Oscillator Reversal System 789
18 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Fractals Breakout System 793
19 Chaos
...................................................................................................................................
Fractals Reversal System 797
20 Commodity
...................................................................................................................................
Channel Index (CCI) Complex Cross System 801
21 Commodity
...................................................................................................................................
Channel Index (CCI) Cross System 805
22 Commodity
...................................................................................................................................
Channel Index (CCI) Reversal System 809
23 Complex
...................................................................................................................................
Trend System #1 (Fast MA / Slow MA / RSI / MACD) 813
24 Darvas
...................................................................................................................................
Box Breakout System 817
25 Detrended
...................................................................................................................................
Price Oscillator (DPO) Cross System 821
26 Directional
...................................................................................................................................
Movement Index "Extreme Point Rule" System 825
27 Directional
...................................................................................................................................
Movement Index Cross System 829
28 Disparity
...................................................................................................................................
Index Cross System 833
29 Disparity
...................................................................................................................................
Index Reversal System 837
30 Donchian
...................................................................................................................................
Channel Breakout System 841
31 Double
...................................................................................................................................
Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) Cross System 845
32 Double
...................................................................................................................................
Stochastic Oscillator Cross System 849
33 Double
...................................................................................................................................
Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System 852
34 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
Fisher Transform Cross System 856
35 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
Laguerre Relative Strength Index Cross System 860
36 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
Laguerre Relative Strength Index Reversal System 864
37 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
MAMA / FAMA Cross System 868
38 Ehlers
...................................................................................................................................
Relative Vigor Index Cross System 871
39 Gann
...................................................................................................................................
Basic "Swing Chartist" System 875
40 Hull ...................................................................................................................................
Moving Average Cross System 879
41 Ichimoku
...................................................................................................................................
Kinko Huo "Strong Signals" System 883
42 Inertia
...................................................................................................................................
Cross System 888
43 Kase...................................................................................................................................
CD Cross System 891
44 Kase...................................................................................................................................
Peak Oscillator Cross System 895

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

13
14 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

45 Kaufman's
...................................................................................................................................
Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) Cross System 899
46 Kaufman's
...................................................................................................................................
Efficiency Ratio UpTrend / DownTrend System 903
47 Keltner
...................................................................................................................................
Bands Breakout System 907
48 Keltner
...................................................................................................................................
Bands Reversal System 911
49 Keltner
...................................................................................................................................
Channels Breakout System 915
50 Keltner
...................................................................................................................................
Channels Reversal System 919
51 Kurtosis
...................................................................................................................................
Cross System 923
52 Linear
...................................................................................................................................
Regression Cross System 927
53 Linear
...................................................................................................................................
Regression Reversal System 931
54 Linear
...................................................................................................................................
Regression Slope Cross System 934
55 Linear
...................................................................................................................................
Regression Slope High / Low Breakout System 938
56 Linear
...................................................................................................................................
Regression Slope Tops / Bottoms Reversal System 942
57 MACD
...................................................................................................................................
Fast Line / Signal Line Cross System 946
58 MACD
...................................................................................................................................
Fast Line / Zero Cross System 950
59 MACD
...................................................................................................................................
Histogram High / Low Breakout System 954
60 MACD
...................................................................................................................................
Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal System 958
61 McClellan
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator Cross System 962
62 McClellan
...................................................................................................................................
Summation Index Cross System 966
63 McGinley
...................................................................................................................................
Dynamic Cross System 970
64 Momentum
...................................................................................................................................
Cross System 974
65 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Average Envelope Breakout System 978
66 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Average Envelope Reversal System 982
67 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Averages Cross System 986
68 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Averages Double Cross System 991
69 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Slope Rate of Change Cross System 995
70 Parabolic
...................................................................................................................................
SAR Reversal System 999
71 Percentage
...................................................................................................................................
Price Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System 1003
72 Percentage
...................................................................................................................................
Price Oscillator / Zero Cross System 1007
73 Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram High / Low Breakout
System
................................................................................................................................... 1011
74 Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal
System
................................................................................................................................... 1015
75 Polarized
...................................................................................................................................
Fractal Efficiency Cross System 1019
76 Quantitative
...................................................................................................................................
Qualitative Estimation (QQE) Cross System 1023
77 Rate
...................................................................................................................................
of Change (ROC) Cross System 1029
78 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Momentum Index Cross System 1032
79 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Momentum Index Reversal System 1036
80 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Strength Index (RSI) Cross System 1040
81 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Strength Index (RSI) Reversal System 1044
82 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Volatility Index (RVI) Cross System 1048

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Contents 15

83 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Volatility Index (RVI) Reversal System 1052
84 RSI...................................................................................................................................
Bollinger Bands Breakout System 1056
85 RSI...................................................................................................................................
Bollinger Bands Reversal System 1060
86 RSI...................................................................................................................................
Moving Averages Cross System 1064
87 Schaff
...................................................................................................................................
Trend Cycle Double Reversal System 1070
88 Schaff
...................................................................................................................................
Trend Cycle Reversal System 1073
89 Slow
...................................................................................................................................
Stochastic Oscillator Cross System 1077
90 Slow
...................................................................................................................................
Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System 1080
91 STARC
...................................................................................................................................
Bands Reversal System 1084
92 Stochastic
...................................................................................................................................
Momentum Index Cross System 1088
93 Support
...................................................................................................................................
and Resistance Breakout System 1092
94 T3 Moving
...................................................................................................................................
Average Cross System 1096
95 Trailing
...................................................................................................................................
Stoploss Reversal Level Cross System 1100
96 Trend
...................................................................................................................................
Continuation Factor Cross System 1104
97 Trend
...................................................................................................................................
Continuation Factor Strong Trend System 1108
98 Trend
...................................................................................................................................
Trigger Factor (TTF) Reversal System 1112
99 Triple
...................................................................................................................................
Exponential Average (TRIX) Cross System 1116
100 Triple
...................................................................................................................................
Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) Cross System 1119
101 True
...................................................................................................................................
Strength Index Cross System 1123
102 Ultimate
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System 1126
103 Ultimate
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator Cross System 1130
104 Ultimate
...................................................................................................................................
Oscillator Reversal System 1134
105 Williams
...................................................................................................................................
Percent Range (%R) Cross System 1138
106 Williams
...................................................................................................................................
Percent Range (%R) Reversal System 1142

Part VIII Automated Trading FAQ for Trading

Systems 1148

Part IX Requesting Orders and Supported Order

Types 1153

Part X "How To" Tutorials 1158

1 How
...................................................................................................................................
To Build An Indicator 1158
2 How
...................................................................................................................................
To Build A Trading System 1167

Index 1184

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

15
Getting Started with VT Trader 2.0

Part

I
 Getting Started with VT Trader 2.0 17

1 Getting Started with VT Trader 2.0

Thank you for your interest in VT Trader, a world-class electronic FOREX trading platform brought to you
Capital Market Services, LLC and Visual Trading Systems, LLC. Please take a few moments to
thoroughly read through this entire help manual to better familiarize yourself with the VT Trader software.

This manual (released in May 2011) is a guide for the use of VT Trader 2.0's interface, features, and
functionality. It is up-to-date with the most current VT Trader 2.0 release version. It is best viewed with a
screen resolution of 1280 pixels or wider.

1.1 PC System Requirements

For VT Trader 2.0 to function properly the following guidelines should be followed:

Minimum System Requirements:

Microsoft Windows XP (or Windows Vista or Windows 7) operating system

Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo e4300 1.80 GHz processor (or equivalent processor)
1.0 gigabyte of RAM
200 megabytes of free hard disk space
Internet Explorer 5.0 (or higher)
Monitor that supports 1024x768 with a color depth of 32 bits (16,777,216 colors) or higher resolution
A high-speed (broadband) Internet connection such as DSL or a cable modem is vital for online
currency trading

Recommended System Requirements:

Microsoft Windows XP (or Windows Vista or Windows 7) operating system

Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo e6600 2.4 GHz (or faster) processor (or equivalent processor)
2.0+ gigabytes of RAM
200+ megabytes of free hard disk space
Internet Explorer 6.0 (or higher)
Monitor that supports 1024x768 with a color depth of 32 bits (16,777,216 colors) or higher resolution

A high-speed (broadband) Internet connection such as DSL or a cable modem is vital for online
currency trading

1.2 How to intall VT Trader...

To install VT Trader on your computer you must first download the VT Trader executable file to your
computer's hard drive. Then, run the executable file by double-clicking it with the left mouse button.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation; you may click the [Cancel] button at any
time to abort the installation process

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

18 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Before choosing your installation options, you must agree to the End User License Agreement. Please
read through the agreement and then select the radio button next to, "I accept the terms of the License
Agreement" to proceed.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Getting Started with VT Trader 2.0 19

Click the [Next >] button to proceed. Choose the type of installation you want to perform for VT Trader
2.0. You can choose to a Standalone installation or a Portable installation.

The Standalone installation distributes VT Trader's files into 2 directory structures - a read-only program
files directory and an additional Data directory. The standalone installation also creates a VT Trader
desktop shortcut and VT Trader Start Menu program group. The read-only program files typically install
to C:\Program Files\VT Trader\ (or C:\Program Files (x86)\VT Trader\ if you're using a 64-bit Windows
operating system). You can change this installation directory in the next step of installation process if
you choose to. The additional Data directory installs under the Users directory tree.

In Windows® XP variants, the Data directory installs to:

C:\Documents and Settings\<Windows User Account Name>\My Documents\VTSystems\VT

Trader\<Unique # Generated By VT Trader>

In Windows® Vista and Windows® 7 variants, the Data directory installs to:

C:\Users\<Windows User Account Name>\Documents\VTSystems\VT Trader\<Unique # Generated

By VT Trader>

Note: In order to utilize VT Trader 2 as a COM server, you must choose a Standalone installation.

The Portable installation distributes VT Trader's files into only 1 directory. It will not install a VT Trader
desktop shortcut or Start Menu program group, will not affect the registry, and can be uninstalled by
simply deleting its directory. You can create a Portable installation at any location on your hard drive or
even on a removable USB drive. However, your Windows user account must have read and write file
privileges to the installation location you choose in order for VT Trader to function properly. By default, a
Portable installation of VT Trader will create its directory on your Windows Desktop. You can change

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

20 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

this installation directory in the next step of installation process if you choose to.

Click the [Next >] button to proceed. Choose an installation location for VT Trader. If the default
Destination Folder is acceptable then change nothing. If you want to change the Destination Folder you
can do so by clicking the [Browse...] button and selecting an alternate install location.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Getting Started with VT Trader 2.0 21

Click the [Next >] button to proceed. If you chose the Portable installation type, [Next >] copies the VT
Trader files onto your computer's hard drive. If you chose the Standalone installation type, choose the
Start Menu Folder.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

22 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

If you chose the Standalone installation type, click the [Install] button to copy the VT Trader files onto
your computer's hard drive.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Getting Started with VT Trader 2.0 23

Click the [Finish] button to complete the installation process.

1.3 How to login to VT Trader...

Once VT Trader has been properly installed 17 , it can be launched by double-clicking the VT Trader
desktop icon with the left mouse button or by selecting the VT Trader link from the VT Trader program
group in the Windows Start Menu.

VT Trader checks for updates and prompts you to install any new updates if a new version is available. If
an update is available you can install the update, choose to skip it and install it at a later time, or
choose not to install it at all and to not be notified about it again. However, if the available update is
required you will not be able to access your trading account until you install the update.

Next, the Login window is shown. Type your Login and Password. Choose the type of account to login
to from the Account Type selection menu.

The following command buttons are all available at different times during the login process:

[OK]

This command continues the login process by verifying the current VT Trader version, login name,

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

24 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

and password to connect you to your broker's trading and charting services. VT Trader's interface
will load in a few moments if the login is successful.

[Work Offline]

The command loads VT Trader's interface without connecting to your broker's services. In this
Offline mode of operation your account and trading-related data will not be accessible, no
connections to the broker's services are active, and no trading actions can be conducted. Only
instruments and chart intervals previously opened in VT Trader while it was connected to the broker's
charting service will be cached and available for viewing in Offline mode.

[Exit]

This command cancels the login process and shuts down VT Trader.

If the login process fails or is canceled, the following buttons become available:

[Retry]

This command returns you to the Login window.

[Cancel]

This command Immediately stops the login process.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

VT Trader 2.0's Interface

Part

II
 26 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

2 VT Trader 2.0's Interface

Fluent User Interface

The Fluent user interface (UI) makes finding VT Trader's commands easier than ever before by better
organizing them based on the common tasks you are most likely to perform while using VT Trader. The
Fluent UI includes the Ribbon, the VT Trader Button, and the Quick Access Toolbar.

The Ribbon is the wide band running across the top of the main VT Trader program window which
contains the majority of VT Trader's commands. The common tasks are divided up into tabs according to
the types of commands they represent. The tabs are then further divided into groups of related
commands. The VT Trader Button and the Quick Access Toolbar are located in the upper, left corner
of VT Trader's main program window providing you with convenient access to a few of the most
commonly used commands in VT Trader.

Please click on these links to learn more about the Fluent 30 UI Ribbon 30 , VT Trader Button 54 ,
and the Quick Access Toolbar 55 .

"Docked" Windows Concept

VT Trader 2.0's intuitive docking approach allows windows to be docked into simple or complex
configurations or remain as separate windows. This new functionality allows you to create an almost
infinite number of "docked" and "floating" window arrangements which can be conveniently saved as
Desk top Work spaces.

However, unlike most traditional docking interfaces, VT Trader's interface shows dock ing zone selectors
as a window is being moved indicating every possible location that the active window can be docked to
inside VT Trader's main docking site. You can dock any window to any side of any other window - top,
bottom, left, or right. Windows can even be "docked" together in the same location to create tabbed
panels.

Docked windows also have special caption buttons and contextual menus available allowing you to auto-
hide windows(s), "undock" windows, maximize windows within their docking panel, quickly locate and
make tabs active, and reposition the tabs in a tabbed panel. To make working with your Desk top
Work space(s) even easier, "floating" windows have their own Windows Taskbar buttons; this allows you
to quickly and easily minimize any "floating" window(s) you do not wish to remain visible while working in
VT Trader's main program window and restore them only when necessary.

Please click here 27 to learn more about how VT Trader 2.0's docking concepts works.

Task Windows

VT Trader's UI is centered around the use of task windows. The general purpose of these windows is to
provide you with up-to-the-second, real-time account information, trading information, alerts, news
events, and important announcements. The main task windows have been divided into groups based on
the type(s) of general task(s) they help you perform.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 27

Please click here 73 to learn more about each of the task windows included in VT Trader.

Main Program Window Status Bar and VT Notification Icon

VT Trader 2.0's UI also includes a new Status Bar shown across the bottom of the main program
window and a dedicated VT Trader Notification Icon shown in the Windows operating system's
Notification Area (the area in the task bar where the computer's local time is shown).

Please click on these links to learn more about the Status Bar 58 and VT Notification Icon 58 .

2.1 Docking - How it works...

As mentioned in the interface introduction, VT Trader 2 uses a sophisticated and intuitive "docking"
concept to create Desk top Work spaces. You simply drag a window to the desired location, which can
be a docking site or another window, and drop it there.

Dock ing zone selectors are shown as a window is being moved indicating every possible location that
the active window can be docked to. You can dock any window inside the platform's main docking site
and/or to any side of any other window - top, bottom, left, or right. Windows can even be docked
together in the same location to create tabbed panels.

While dragging, the highlighted dock ing zone indicates the location that the window will have when
released. A hint window specifying the target location is also shown. Note: Pressing and holding down
the Ctrl key while dragging the window will prevent it from docking when released; this lets you easily

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

28 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

move windows around without accidentally docking them.

Docked windows, tabbed panels, and window tabs have some special contextual menus and caption
buttons allowing you to further customize the arrangement of your Desk top Work spaces.

Docked windows have a special contextual menu that is activated by clicking the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over the window's caption bar. You can Hide (i.e. close) or Undock the
window from this menu. It is also possible to quickly undock a window by simply double-clicking the left
mouse button while the cursor is positioned over the window's caption bar; the newly "floating" window
can then be quickly docked back into its original location by following the same procedure. Additionally,
depending on the window's location within the main docking site, you may also be able to Restore,
Maximize, or Auto-Hide the window.

Auto-Hiding a window means that only its window caption will be visible in a tab along one of the sides of
the main docking site. Only windows that are docked to the main docking site or in a tabbed panel that
is docked to the main docking site can be auto-hidden. Window that can be auto-hidden will have an
additional Auto-Hide button shaped like a pushpin in their caption bar and the Auto-Hide option in their
caption bar's contextual menu.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 29

Tabbed panels have a special Switch Tabs caption button at their top-right corner that looks like an
upside-down triangle; it shows a selection menu of the windows currently located in the tabbed panel.
Selecting a window from the Switch Tabs selection menu makes the window in that tab visible.

Window Tabs located in a tabbed panel also have a special contextual menu that is activated by clicking
the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned over the tab's caption. You can Hide (i.e. close) the
active tab, choose a different tab from the Tabs submenu, or reposition the window tabs at the Top or
Bottom of the tabbed panel. You can also rearrange the order of the tabs in a tabbed panel by
positioning the cursor over the tab's caption, clicking (and holding down) the left mouse button, and
dragging the tab to its new location.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 30 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Along with "docked' windows, you can also have "floating" windows in your Desk top Work spaces.
"Floating" windows look and function just like ordinary application windows; they have their own Minimize
, Maximize, and Close caption buttons. However, "floating" windows also have their own Windows
Taskbar buttons. Thanks to this added functionality, you can quickly and easily minimize any "floating"
window(s) you do not wish to remain visible while working in VT Trader's main program window and
restore them only when necessary.

2.2 Fluent UI Ribbon

The Ribbon is the wide band (which can be minimized using the Quick Access Toolbar's contextual
menu 55 ) running across the top of VT Trader's main application window. It contains the majority of VT
Trader's commands. The common tasks are divided up into tabs according to the types of commands
they represent. The tabs are then further divided into groups of related commands.

The Fluent UI Ribbon is divided into the following menu tabs:

Environment Menu

The Environment menu contains all of the commands that affects VT Trader's overall "look and feel"

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 31

and general functionality. Click on the group's name to learn more about its commands. The groups
included in this menu are:

Desktop Workspaces 33
Windows 33
Client Files 34
Options 34

My Account Menu

The My Account menu contains commands that are related to your trading account. Click on the
group's name to learn more about its commands. The groups included in this menu are:

Account Actions 35
Account Summary 36
Reports 36

Trading Menu

The Trading Terminal menu will likely be one of your most commonly used menus. It contains all of
the commands that will help you while you are performing trading actions. Click on the group's name to
learn more about its commands. The groups included in this menu are:

Place New Order(s) 37

Close 38
Dealing Rates 38
Trading Windows 39
Messages 39
Trading Tools 40

Alerts Menu

You can create and modify price alerts using the commands in the Alerts menu. Click on the group's
name to learn more about its commands. The groups included in this menu are:

Price Alerts 40

Chart Menu

You can quickly and easily open new charts or manipulate the active chart using the commands
provided in the Chart menu. Click on the group's name to learn more about its commands. The groups
included in this menu are:

Open Chart 41
Chart Templates 41

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

32 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Active Chart 42
Show/Hide 43
Zoom 44
Axes 45
Print 46

Technical Analysis Menu

While analyzing charts, you may rely on various tools to assist you in the analysis process. The
Technical Analysis menu provides you convenient access to all of VT Trader's technical analysis tools
including (but not limited to): data inspection, chart patterns, symbols, lines, channels, shapes,
Fibonacci, Gann, 100+ commonly used indicators, and 100+ basic trading systems. You can also
create your own custom indicators and trading systems using VT Trader's two specially-designed
"builder" tools. Click on the group's name to learn more about its commands. The groups included in this
menu are:

Analysis Tools 46
Drawing Tools 47
Indicators 49
Trading Systems 50

Fundamental Analysis Menu

You can keep up-to-date with real-time streaming news, Forex market highlights, as well as
accompanying market experts' commentary by using the resources provided in the Fundamental
menu. Click on the group's name to learn more about its commands. The groups included in this menu
are:

News 51
Forex Resources 51

Help Menu

The Help menu provides you with access to VT Trader's help materials, troubleshooting tools, and
version information. It also allows you to communicate directly with your broker's dealing support
department and customer service department via chat. Click on the group's name to learn more about its
commands. The groups included in this menu are:

Support Resources 52
Troubleshooting 52
Contact Us 53
Version 53

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 33

2.2.1 Environment Tab

2.2.1.1 Desktop Workspaces Group

The Desktop Workspaces group contains the following commands:

Save

Saving the active desktop workspace preserves the location and configuration of windows (including
"floating" windows) and any custom properties, drawing tools, indicators, and trading systems
attached to open chart windows.

Save As...

This command saves the active desktop workspace as a new file. The location and configuration of
windows (including "floating" windows) and any custom properties, drawing tools, indicators, and
trading systems attached to open chart windows are saved. Desktop workspace files are saved into
VT Trader's Data -> Desk tops folder. All available desktop workspaces are shown in the Switch
command's selection menu.

Switch

You can load (view) any of your saved desktop workspaces by using the Switch command's
selection menu.

Manage Desktop Workspaces

This command opens the Desktop Workspaces Management window. Please click here 150 to
learn more about the Desktop Workspaces Management window.

2.2.1.2 Windows Group

The Windows group contains the following commands:

Switch Windows

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 34 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

All of the application's open windows are shown in this command's selection menu. Choosing a
window makes it the active window. If the chosen window was hidden behind other windows or
minimized it will be brought to the front.

Close All Windows

This command closes all of the application's open windows.

2.2.1.3 Client Files Group

The Client Files group contains the following commands:

Import Environment

You can select any combination of items to import from a previously created VT Trader environment
archive (.vtenv file extension) using the Import Environment command. You can import: Options
(User Preferences), Desk top Work spaces, Chart Templates, Custom Indicators, and Custom
Trading Systems. You can choose to Ignore, Rename, or Replace duplicate files during the import
process.

Export Environment

You can select any combination of items to export to an existing (or new) VT Trader environment
archive (.vtenv file extension) using the Export Environment command. You can export: Options
(User Preferences), Desk top Work spaces, Chart Templates, Custom Indicators, and Custom
Trading Systems.

2.2.1.4 Options Group

The Options group contains the following commands:

Skin

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 35

This command contains a selection menu that includes all skins available for use by VT Trader. The
active (in use) skin's name is shown. Choosing a different skin changes the appearance of VT
Trader's interface.

Language

This command contains a selection menu that includes all available languages supported by VT
Trader. The active (in use) language is shown. Choosing a different language changes the language
throughout VT Trader's interface.

Options

You can open the Options window using this command. Please click here 59 to learn more about
the Options window.

2.2.2 My Account Tab

2.2.2.1 Account Actions Group

The Account Actions group contains the following commands:

Login

This command is only enabled if there is currently no connection to your broker's services (for
example, if you are work ing in Offline Mode).

Logout

This command disconnects you from your broker's services and shifts VT Trader into Offline mode.
While Offline, your account and trading-related data will not be accessible, no connections to the
broker's services are active, and no trading actions can be conducted. Only instruments and chart
intervals previously opened in VT Trader while it was connected to the broker's charting service will
be cached and available for viewing in Offline mode.

Change Password...

This command allows you to change the password that is assigned to your account.

Fund Your Account

If you are logged into a live trading account, this command opens a new Internet browser window
with instructions for adding and withdrawing funds from your account. However, if you are logged into

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 36 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

a practice trading account this command opens a new Internet browser window that provides you
with an application to request a live trading account from your broker.

2.2.2.2 Account Summary Group

The Account Summary group contains the following commands:

Account Profile

This command opens a new Internet browser window showing Forex.com's MyAccount website
section. You can review your account summary information, account profile, various detailed
account/trading reports, access Forex.com's market research resources, and much more.

Account Information

This command opens the Account Information window. Please click here 74 to learn more about
the Account Information window.

Currency Portfolio

This command opens the Currency Portfolio window. Please click here 80 to learn more about
the Currency Portfolio window.

2.2.2.3 Reports Group

Each report opens a new Internet browser window Forex.com's MyAccount website Reports section
showing that report's detailed information. Reports can be exported to Microsoft Excel or printed for your
convenience.

The Reports group contains the following commands:

Account Summary

This report provides the current account balance as well as all deposits, withdrawals, interest
earned, and fees charged (if any) for any selected month.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 37

Transaction History

This report provides complete trade details for any selected date range, including the deal date/time,
instrument, trade direction (buy or sell), contract size, and executed deal rate.

Open Positions

This report provides a summary of all open positions, including contract size, USD value, average
rate of open positions, current market rate, and unrealized profit/loss.

Order History

This report provides details of all order activity for a selected data range, including the order entry
date/time, its reference number, and any action details for the order.

Rollover History

This report provides rollover details for any transaction held open past 17:00 EST for any selected
date range, including the rollover date, rollover rate, and USD value.

Realized Profit/Loss

This report provides complete trade details with profit/loss for any selected date range, including the
deal date/time, instrument, trade direction (buy or sell), contract size, and executed deal rate.

2.2.3 Trading Tab

2.2.3.1 Place New Orders(s) Group

The Place New Order(s) group contains the following commands:

Buy Market Order

This command requests a Buy market order at the instrument's current Ask price.

Sell Market Order

This command requests a Sell market order at the instrument's current Bid price.

Conditional Buy

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 38 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with five commands: Entry Stop, Entry
Limit, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO. Entry Stop requests an Entry Stop
Buy order. Entry Limit requests and Entry Limit Buy order. One Cancels Other (OCO) requests a
One Cancels Other (OCO) order with Buy order bias. If/Then requests an If/Then order with Buy
order bias. If/Then OCO requests an If/Then OCO order with Buy order bias.

Conditional Sell

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with five commands: Entry Stop, Entry
Limit, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO. Entry Stop requests an Entry Stop
Sell order. Entry Limit requests and Entry Limit Sell order. One Cancels Other (OCO) requests a
One Cancels Other (OCO) order with Sell order bias. If/Then requests an If/Then order with Sell
order bias. If/Then OCO requests an If/Then OCO order with Sell order bias.

2.2.3.2 Close Group

The Close group contains the following commands:

Close All Positions

This command closes all of the account's open positions at the instruments' current market prices.

Remove All Orders

This command cancels (removes) all of the account's orders.

2.2.3.3 Dealing Rates Group

The Dealing Rates group contains the following commands:

Quotes Board

This command opens the Quotes Board window. Please click here 89 to learn more about the
Quotes Board window.

Advanced Rates

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 39

This command opens the Advanced Rates window. Please click here 94 to learn more about the
Advanced Rates window.

2.2.3.4 Trading Windows Group

The Trading Windows group contains the following commands:

Open Positions

This command opens the Open Positions window. Please click here 101 to learn more about the
Open Positions window.

Pending Orders

This command opens the Pending Orders window. Please click here 108 to learn more about the
Pending Orders window.

2.2.3.5 Messages Group

The Messages group contains the following commands:

Trading Activity

This command opens the Trading Activity window. Please click here 174 to learn more about the
Trading Activity window.

Trading Log

This command opens the Trading Log window. Please click here 114 to learn more about the
Trading Log window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 40 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

2.2.3.6 Trading Tools Group

The Trading Tools group contains the following commands:

Currency Calculator

This command opens a Currency Calculator tool. The Currency Calculator allows you to convert
an amount of one currency into the value of another currency. Please click here 120 to learn more
about the Currency Calculator tool.

Pip Calculator

This command opens the Pip Calculator tool. The Pip Calculator allows you to calculate the value
of 1 pip respective to the selected currency pair. Please click here 120 to learn more about the Pip
Calculator tool.

2.2.4 Alerts Tab

2.2.4.1 Price Alerts Group

The Price Alerts group contains the following commands:

New

This command opens the Price Alert window. Please click here 179 to learn more about the Price
Alert window.

Active Price Alerts Summary

This command opens the Active Price Alerts Summary window. Please click here 180 to learn
more about the Active Price Alerts Summary window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 41

2.2.5 Chart Tab

2.2.5.1 Open Chart Group

The Open Chart group contains the following commands:

Open Chart

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the instruments available in VT Trader.
You can quickly open a new chart window by choosing your desired instrument. The new chart
opens based on your settings for the Chart Interval and Chart Type options in the Options window ->
General section -> Miscellaneous subsection.

Recently Viewed

This command contains a selection menu that includes your ten mostly recently viewed charts. You
can quickly reopen one of these charts by choosing your desired chart.

Clone Chart

You can quickly create a new, duplicate chart window of the active chart window by using the Clone
Chart command.

2.2.5.2 Chart Templates Group

The Chart Templates group contains the following commands:

Manage Chart Templates

This command opens the Chart Templates Management window. Please click here 152 to learn
more about the Chart Templates Management window.

Load...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 42 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

You can load (apply) any of your saved chart templates to the active chart window by using the
Load... command's selection menu.

Save As...

This command saves the active chart window's properties configuration as a new chart template 152
file. All properties included in the Chart Properties 131 window are included in the chart template.
Once saved, the new chart template is shown in the Load... command's selection menu. Chart
template files are saved into VT Trader's Data -> ChartTemplates folder.

2.2.5.3 Active Chart Group

The Active Chart group contains the following commands:

Instrument

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the trading instruments available in VT
Trader. You can change the chart window's current instrument by choosing your desired instrument
from the selection menu.

Interval

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the chart intervals available for use in
the chart window. You can change chart window's current interval by choosing your desired interval
from the selection menu. The following chart intervals are currently available in VT Trader:

Tick (each incoming price is a "tick "; a "tick " is the smallest possible interval)
1-Minute
5-Minute
10-Minute
15-Minute
30-Minute
1-Hour
2-hour
4-Hour
Daily (each new day starts at 5:00 PM ET)
Weekly (each new week starts at 12:00 AM (00:00) ET on Monday)
Monthly

Bid/Ask

A trading instrument typically have two possible prices at any given time - its bid price and its ask

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 43

price (a.k .a. the bid/offer spread, bid/ask spread, or buy/sell spread). You sell at the bid price and
you buy at the ask price. An instrument's chart is constructed using either its bid or ask prices; this
command lets you choose that bias.

Type

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the types of charts available for use in
the chart window. You can change the chart window's current chart type by choosing your desired
type from the selection menu. The following chart types are currently available in VT Trader:

Japanese Candlesticks (Filled)

Japanese Candlesticks (Hollow)
Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks
Bars (O/H/L/C)
Bars
Line
Point and Figure
Renko

2.2.5.4 Show/Hide Group

The Show/Hide group contains the following commands:

Cross Hair

This command is a toggle button. It shows or hides the Cross Hair in the active chart window.
Please click here 240 to learn more about the Cross Hair tool.

Grid Lines

This command is a toggle button. It shows or hides the Grid Lines in the active chart window.

Quotes Panel

This command is a toggle button. It shows or hides the Quotes Panel in the active chart window.

Auto-Scroll

This command is a toggle button. It enables or disables the Auto-Scroll to Current Time property of
the active chart window. While enabled, the active chart window will always automatically move the
chart's price data to the instrument's most recent incoming price tick. Disabling this property allows
you to easily perform technical analysis throughout the instrument's historical price data without the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 44 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

chart automatically returning to the most recent price tick.

High/Low Zone

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the High/Low Zone choices available
for use in the active chart window. The choices in the list will vary depending on the active chart's
interval; only intervals larger than the active chart's interval are available to that chart window. The
High/Low Zone's boundaries are defined by the High/Low Zone selections in the chart's (or chart
template's) properties.You can quickly change (or hide) the current High/Low Zone used in the active
chart by choosing your desired High/Low Zone from the selection menu.

Chart Layers

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the Chart Layers it is possible to use
in the active chart window. You can change a layer's visibility and/or its brightness by choosing it
from the selection menu. Any object(s) attached to the active chart window that are part of the
chosen layer will be affected by these changes. For example, if you draw 3 trend lines in the chart
window, choose the Trend Lines layer, and remove the visibility option's check mark, all 3 trend
lines will be hidden from view; to restore them, you must re-enable that layer's visibility option.

2.2.5.5 Zoom Group

The Zoom group contains the following commands:

X-Axis Zoom In

You can increase the horizontal (left-to-right) size of the active chart window's data using this
command.

X-Axis Zoom Out

You can decrease the horizontal (left-to-right) size of the active chart window's data using this
command.

Y-Axis Zoom In

You can increase the vertical (top-to-bottom) size of the active chart window's data using this
command.

Y-Axis Zoom Out

You can decrease the vertical (top-to-bottom) size of the active chart window's data using this

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 45

command.

Area Zoom

This command allows you to define a rectangular portion of the active chart window using the cursor
to automatically zoom in on. The portion of the active chart window within your rectangular selection
area will be magnified to fill the entire viewable area of the chart window.

Undo Zoom

You can undo the most recent action performed with any of the zooming commands by using this
command.

2.2.5.6 Axes Group

The Axes group contains the following commands:

Auto-Size Y-Axis

This command is a toggle button. It enables or disables the Auto-Size Y-Axis property of the active
chart window. While enabled, the active chart window automatically resizes its price data (and
indicator data, if available) so it is shown with the highest high price (or indicator value) and lowest
low price (or indicator value) at the respective top and bottom of the viewable chart area based on
the Auto-Size Y-Axis Min/Max Bounds option's selection in the Chart Properties 131 window (or Chart
Template Properties window, if the chart window has an assigned chart template). Please click here
131 to learn more about the Auto-Size Y-Axis Min/Max Bounds option. Disabling the Auto-Size Y-
Axis property allows you to manually control the scaling (sizing) of the data in the viewable area of
the chart window using the Zoom commands, the Y-Axis's drag-and-drop zooming functionality, or
the Y-Axis's Scale Settings.

Reset X-Axis

You can quickly restore the X-Axis's zoom level back to its default value using this command.

Reset Y-Axis

You can quickly restore the Y-Axis's zoom level back to its default value using this command.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 46 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Reset Axes

You can quickly restore the X-Axis's zoom level and the Y-Axis's zoom level back to their default
values using this command.

2.2.5.7 Print Group

The Print group contains the following commands:

Print

You can print the active chart window by using this command.

Preview

You can view a preview of what the active chart window will like when it is printed by using this
command.

Print Setup...

This command opens the Windows operating system's Print Setup dialog window. You can choose
the printer you want to print with along with the type of paper and paper orientation.

Page Setup...

This command opens VT Trader's Page Setup window. The Page Setup window defines the
document setup and color properties for printing the active chart.

2.2.6 Technical Analysis Tab

2.2.6.1 Analysis Tools Group

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 47

The Analysis Tools group contains the following commands:

Selection Tool

You can use this command to return the cursor to its default arrow pointer cursor type after using
one or more drawing tools while the Auto-Switch to Select Drawing Tool option is disabled.

Data Inspection

This command opens the Data Inspection window. Please click here 154 to learn more about the
Data Inspection window.

Copy Prices

This command contains a selection menu with two options: Select by Date Range and Select Entire
Date Range. Please click here 241 to learn more about the Copy Prices tool.

2.2.6.2 Drawing Tools Group

The Drawing Tools group contains the following commands:

Comments

This command activates the Comments tool. Please click here 243 to learn more about the
Comments tool.

Symbols

This command activates the Symbols tool. Please click here 246 to learn more about the Symbols
tool.

Lines

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the line tools currently available for use
in the chart window. The line tools included in this command's selection menu are:

Trend Line 256

Trend Line By Angle 259
Vertical Line 250
Horizontal Line 253
Regression Line 263

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

48 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Channels

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the channel tools currently available for
use in the chart window. The channel tools included in this command's selection menu are:

Standard Deviation Channel 265

Standard Error Channel 269
Raff Regression Channel 272
Equidistant Channel 276
Andrew's Pitchfork 279

Shapes

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the shape tools currently available for
use in the chart window. The shape tools included in this command's selection menu are:

Ellipse 282
Rectangle 286
Triangle 290

Fibonacci

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the Fibonacci tools currently available
for use in the chart window. The Fibonacci tools included in this command's selection menu are:

Fibonacci Retracement 293

Fibonacci Expansion 297
Fibonacci Time Extension 301
Fibonacci Channel 305
Fibonacci Fan 309
Fibonacci Arc 313

Gann

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the Gann tools currently available for
use in the chart window. The Gann tools included in this command's selection menu are:

Gann Line 317

Gann Fan 321
Gann Grid 324

Delete

You can delete one or more selected tools from the active chart window by using the Delete
command.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 49

2.2.6.3 Indicators Group

The Indicators group contains the following commands:

Indicators Builder

This command opens the Indicators Builder tool. Please click here 182 to learn more about the
Indicators Builder.

Add Indicator...

This command opens the Add Indicator window. You can review categorized lists of indicators,
choose an indicator from one of the lists, review its description, and add it to the chart using the
Add Indicator window.

Indicators Quick List

This command includes a selection menu. The Indicators Quick List can be likened to your
"Favorites" in Internet Explorer or your "Bookmarks" in Mozilla Firefox. You can configure the
Indicators Quick List to include only the indicators that you use most frequently or desire to have
easily available. You may need to configure your Indicators Quick List before it best fits your
needs. Configure Quick List is the first item included in the selection menu. Please click here 235 to
learn more about configuring your Indicator Quick List.

Attached Indicators

This command opens the Attached Indicators window. You can review a summary listing of
indicators currently attached to the active chart window, add additional indicators to the chart,
change the properties of any attached indicator, and delete attached indicators using the Attached
Indicators window. The Attached Indicators window also allows you to directly edit an indicator by
opening it in an Indicator Editor window. Please click here 184 to learn more about editing
indicators using an Indicator Editor window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 50 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

2.2.6.4 Trading Systems Group

The Trading Systems group contains the following commands:

Trading Systems Builder

This command opens the Trading Systems Builder tool. Please click here 205 to learn more about
the Trading Systems Builder.

Add Trading System...

This command opens the Add Trading System window. You can review categorized lists of trading
systems, choose a trading system from one of the lists, review its description, and add it to the
chart using the Add Trading System window.

Trading Systems Quick List

This command includes a selection menu. The Trading Systems Quick List can be likened to your
"Favorites" in Internet Explorer or your "Bookmarks" in Mozilla Firefox. You can configure the
Trading Systems Quick List to include only the trading systems that you use most frequently or
desire to have easily available. You may need to configure your Trading Systems Quick List before
it best fits your needs. Configure Quick List is the first item included in the selection menu. Please
click here 236 to learn more about configuring your Trading Systems Quick List.

Attached Trading Systems

This command opens the Attached Trading Systems window. You can review a summary listing of
trading systems currently attached to the active chart window, add additional trading systems to the
chart, change the properties of any attached trading system, enable or disable Auto-Trading mode
for any attached trading system, and delete attached trading systems using the Attached Trading
Systems window. The Attached Trading Systems window also allows you to directly edit a trading
system by opening it in a Trading System Editor window. Please click here 207 to learn more
about editing trading systems using a Trading System Editor window.

Active Trading Systems Summary

This command opens an Active Trading Systems Summary window that looks and functions
similarly to the Attached Trading Systems window. However, this command's Active Trading
Systems Summary window provides you with a summary list of trading systems currently attached
to every open chart in VT Trader. You can change the properties of any attached trading system,
enable or disable Auto-Trading mode for any attached trading system, and delete attached trading
systems using the Active Trading Systems Summary window. The Active Trading Systems
Summary window also allows you to directly edit a trading system by opening it in a Trading
System Editor window. Please click here 207 to learn more about editing trading systems using a
Trading System Editor window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 51

2.2.7 Fundamental Analysis Tab

2.2.7.1 News Group

The News group contains the following commands:

Dow Jones News

This command opens the Dow Jones News window. Please click here 166 to learn more about the
Dow Jones News window.

Market Commentaries

This command opens the Market Commentaries window. Please click here 161 to learn more about
the Market Commentaries window.

2.2.7.2 Forex Resources Group

The Forex Resources group contains the following commands:

Economic Calendar

This command opens the Economic Calendar window. Please click here 172 to learn more about
the Economic Calendar window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 52 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

2.2.8 Help Tab

2.2.8.1 Support Resources Group

The Support Resources group contains the following commands:

Reference Guide

The VT Trader reference guide is available in 3 formats: Windows Help (.chm file extension),
Portable Document Format (PDF) (.pdf file extension), and Internet-based (no download required; it
can be read online using your Internet browser). This command opens the online version of VT
Trader's comprehensive reference guide. The reference guides are searchable by their table of
contents, index, and even by keyword(s). If you want to print a copy of the reference guide you
should use the PDF format; however, printing is not advisable since the reference guide is very
lengthy and updated frequently.

Video Tutorials

This command opens a new Internet browser window that provides you with links to some VT Trader
Video Tutorials.

Online Forums

This command opens a new Internet browser window that provides you with access to the Online
Support Forums for VT Trader. Note: These support forums are not for reporting issues related to
your (or others') broker(s), trading experiences, order-related questions/concerns/claims, or in any
way not directly related to the functionality of VT Trader and its features.

2.2.8.2 Troubleshooting Group

The Troubleshooting group contains the following commands:

Delete All Chart History

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 53

This command deletes all of the historical chart data saved into VT Trader's Cache -> HistoryCache
folder. This command is useful when you need to force VT Trader to download fresh historical data
for your charts. For example, in the event that VT Trader caches historical chart data that contains
one or more bad ticks, you can use this command to forcefully delete that cached data so that you
can later download fresh historical data without the bad tick(s) once your broker has corrected the
data in their charting service.

2.2.8.3 Contact Us Group

The Contact Us group contains the following commands:

Chart with Dealing Support

This command opens a real-time chat window for direct communication with your broker's dealing
support personnel.

Chat with Customer Support

This command opens a real-time chat window for direct communication with your broker's customer
service personnel.

2.2.8.4 Version Group

The Version group contains the following commands:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 54 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

About

This command opens a splash screen that includes VT Trader's current version information. You can
click once with the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned anywhere within the About
splash screen to close it.

2.3 VT Trader Button

The VT Trader Button includes a few of the most commonly used commands in VT Trader. It is located
in the upper, left corner of VT Trader's main program window.

The VT Trader Button contains the following commands:

Login

This command is only enabled if there is currently no connection to your broker's services (for
example, if you are work ing in Offline mode).

Logout

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 55

This command disconnects you from your broker's services and transitions VT Trader into Offline
mode. While Offline, your account and trading-related data will not be accessible, no connections to
the broker's services are active, and no trading actions can be conducted. Only instruments and
chart intervals previously opened in VT Trader while it was connected to the broker's charting service
will be cached and available for viewing in Offline mode.

Change Password...

This command changes your account's password.

Import Environment

You can select any combination of items to import from a previously created VT Trader environment
archive (.vtenv file extension) using the Import Environment command. You can import: Options
(User Preferences), Desk top Work spaces, Chart Templates, Custom Indicators, and Custom
Trading Systems. You can choose to Ignore, Rename, or Replace duplicate files during the import
process.

Export Environment

You can select any combination of items to export to an existing (or new) VT Trader environment
archive (.vtenv file extension) using the Export Environment command. You can export: Options
(User Preferences), Desk top Work spaces, Chart Templates, Custom Indicators, and Custom
Trading Systems.

Options

This command opens the Options window. Please click here 59 to learn more about the Options
window.

Exit

This command exits (shuts down) VT Trader. Upon exit, the connection to the broker's services is
disconnected and (if selected) all of the changes made to the active desktop workspace are
automatically saved. The state of any trading system(s) left running in Auto-Trade Mode is also
saved.

2.4 Quick Access Toolbar

The Quick Access Toolbar includes some of the most commonly used commands in VT Trader. It is
located in the upper, left corner of VT Trader's main program window directly to the right of the VT
Trader Button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

56 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

However, the Quick Access Toolbar can be relocated into its own panel directly below the Fluent UI
Ribbon by using the Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon command in its contextual menu.

The Quick Access Toolbar's contextual menu can be activated by clicking the left mouse button once
while the cursor is positioned over the upside down triangle graphic at the far right end of the toolbar.
From the contextual menu, it is not yet possible to fully customize the Quick Access Toolbar, but you
can show or hide the commands included in it.

You can also, and perhaps most importantly, minimize the Fluent UI Ribbon using the Quick Access
Toolbar's contextual menu. While the Ribbon is minimized, only its main menu tabs are visible;
clicking on a menu tab temporarily shows its grouped commands.

From...

To...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 57

The Quick Access Toolbar contains the following commands in its default arrangement:

Login

This command is only enabled if there is currently no connection to your broker's services (for
example, if you are work ing in Offline Mode).

Logout

This command disconnects you from your broker's services and transitions VT Trader into Offline
mode. While Offline, your account and trading-related data will not be accessible, no connections to
the broker's services are active, and no trading actions can be conducted. Only instruments and
chart intervals previously opened in VT Trader while it was connected to the broker's charting service
will be cached and available for viewing in Offline mode.

Switch Desktop Workspace

You can load (view) any of your saved desktop workspaces by using the Switch command's
selection menu.

Open New Chart

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the instruments available in VT Trader.
You can quickly open a new chart window by choosing your desired instrument. The new chart
opens based on your settings for the Chart Interval and Chart Type options in the Options window ->
General section -> Miscellaneous section -> New Chart Defaults section.

Switch Windows

All of the application's open windows are shown in this command's selection menu. Choosing a
window makes it the active window. If the chosen window was hidden behind other windows or
minimized it will be brought to the front.

Options

This command opens the Options window. Please click here 59 to learn more about the Options
window.

Reference Guide

The VT Trader reference guide is available in 3 formats: Windows Help (.chm file extension),
Portable Document Format (PDF) (.pdf file extension), and Internet-based (no download required; it
can be read online using your Internet browser). This command opens the online version of VT
Trader's comprehensive reference guide. The reference guides are searchable by their table of
contents, index, and even by keyword(s). If you want to print a copy of the reference guide you
should use the PDF format; however, printing is not advisable since the reference guide is very
lengthy and updated frequently.

About

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 58 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This command opens a splash screen that includes VT Trader's current version information. You can
click once with the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned anywhere within the About
splash screen to close it.

2.5 VT Trader Status Bar

The Status Bar is the small band running across the bottom of the main VT Trader program window. It
contains VT Trader's version information and current date/time. It also contains an icon that allows you
to quickly and easily enable or disable all of VT Trader's sounds.

2.6 VT Trader Notification Icon

The VT Trader Notification Icon is located in the Notification Area at the bottom, right corner of the
Windows taskbar. When you move the mouse cursor over the VT Trader Notification Icon it shows the
name of the broker's service that you are currently connected to. Positioning the mouse cursor over top
of the notification icon and double-clicking the left mouse button will restore VT Trader if it's minimized.

If there is one or more trading systems running in Auto-Trade mode in VT Trader the VT Trader
Notification Icon will show a green, flashing circular LED over top of the icon.

If VT Trader is currently disconnected from your broker's services and running in Offline mode the VT
Trader Notification Icon will show a red, flashing circular LED over top of the icon.

The icon's contextual menu can be opened by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is
hovering over the VT Notification Icon. This menu allows quick, one-click access to VT Trader's online
support materials, version information, and for exiting the platform.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 59

2.7 Options (User Preferences)

The Options window defines all of VT Trader's main application options and connection parameters. It is
divided into the following sections:

General

The General section contains all of the options that affect VT Trader "as a whole". Click on the
subsection's name to learn more about its options. The subsections included in this section are:

Instruments 60
Trading 62
Desktop Workspaces 64
Print Page Setup 66
Miscellaneous 68

Communication

The Communication section contains all of the options that affect VT Trader "as a whole". Click on the
subsection's name to learn more about its options. The subsections included in this section are:

Common 70

Sounds

The Sounds section defines all of the sounds used by VT Trader each time the sound's corresponding
action is performed. Each action can be assigned a standard VT Trader sound or a custom sound of
your choosing (.mp3, .wav, or .wma file formats are acceptable). The actions that can be associated
with sounds are:

General
Startup
Alert
Reconnection
Disconnection

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 60 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Incoming News Headline

Error
Margin Call
Insufficient Funds
Requote Request
Position
Open
Close
Entry Stop Buy Order
Place
Remove
Change
Entry Stop Sell Order
Place
Remove
Change
Entry Limit Buy Order
Place
Remove
Change
Entry Limit Sell Order
Place
Remove
Change
Stop Order
Place
Remove
Change
Limit Order
Place
Remove
Change

2.7.1 General
2.7.1.1 Instruments

The Instruments subsection includes only 1 group: Instruments. The Instruments subsection contains
a list of all of the trading instruments made available to you by your broker. The [^] and [v] buttons
define the order the instruments are shown in throughout VT Trader's interface in menus and windows
that do not specifically allow for column sorting by instrument

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 61

Instruments Group

The Instruments list contains the following options:

Visibility

This option Shows (enables) or Hides (disables) the instrument. You will not receive price updates
for hidden instruments, you cannot perform trading actions against hidden instruments, nor will
hidden instruments be shown anywhere in VT Trader's interface.

Lots (T)

This option defines the default number of lots that is used when requesting buy or sell market orders
for the instrument. This option also applies to the 1-Click Orders (1CO) trading mode.

Lots (O)

This option defines the default number of lots that is used when requesting entry orders for the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 62 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

instrument.

Pips

This option defines the default number of pips away from the current market price used when
requesting entry orders for the instrument. This options does not apply to entry orders requested at
a specific price using an instrument's chart window.

Margin

This option defines the maximum leverage ratio for the instrument. It is a read-only value and cannot
be changed.

2.7.1.2 Trading

The Trading subsection is divided into three groups: Trading, Suggested Stop Rate, and Trading
Disclaimers.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 63

Trading Group

The Trading group contains the following options:

Trading Mode

This option defines how market orders are requested. It is a selection menu with two choices: Order
Request(s) Window and 1-Click Orders (1CO).

Order Request(s) Window

This is the standard trading mode. An order request(s) window opens and you must review the order
information before submission.

1-Click Orders (1CO)

Use this trading mode with caution! Market orders are submitted IMMEDIATELY. You will not have
the opportunity to review or confirm the order information. For your safety, this trading mode imposes

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 64 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

a 2-second mouse click delay between duplicate order requests. Any additional (duplicate) order
request(s) attempted during the 2-second delay period will be ignored.

Rate Format

This option defines how an instrument's "fractional pip" digit (a.k .a. "pipette") is shown throughout
VT Trader's interface. You can hide the fractional pip digit or you can show it appended to the rest of
the digits, in parentheses, or in brackets.

Time Zone

This option defines what time zone is used throughout VT Trader's interface when referencing dates
and times.

Order Confirmations

This option Shows or Hides the Request for Confirmation dialog window that is normally shown when
you submit one or more orders. The Request for Confirmation dialog window gives you an additional
chance to recheck your order information before submission.

Trading Disclaimers Group

The Trading Disclaimers group contains the following options:

Indicator Orders

This option Shows or Hides the disclaimer window that is normally shown each time you submit an
indicator order. If the disclaimer window is shown, you must click [I Agree] to proceed.

1-Click Orders

This option Shows or Hides the disclaimer window that is normally shown each time you choose the
1-Click Orders (1CO) Trading Mode. If the disclaimer window is shown, you must click [I Agree] to
use the 1-Click Orders trading mode.

Trading Systems

This option Shows or Hides the disclaimer window that is normally shown each time you attach a
trading system to a chart. If the disclaimer window is shown, you must click [I Agree] to proceed.

2.7.1.3 Desktop Workspaces

The Desktop Workspaces subsection is divided into two groups: Previous Versions and Auto-Save
Options.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 65

Previous Versions Group

The Previous Versions group contains the following options:

Max # of Previous Versions

VT Trader automatically creates previous version backup files of the active desktop workspace. This
option defines the maximum number of previous versions that VT Trader maintains. All previous
versions created of any desktop workspaces are saved into VT Trader's Data -> Desk tops ->
Back ups folder.

Auto-Save Periodicity (in minutes)

This option defines how frequently (in minutes) VT Trader automatically saves the current state of
the active desktop workspace.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 66 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Save Options Group

The Auto-Save Options group contains the following options:

Auto-Save on Platform Exit

While Yes is chosen, the active desktop workspace is automatically saved when you exit VT Trader.
VT Trader will not automatically save the active desktop workspace (layout template) when you exit
VT Trader if the broker's charting service is unavailable; this helps ensure that you will not lose your
previous chart setups and associated technical analysis to an automatic save when the chart(s)
cannot be loaded.

Auto-Save on Switching Workspaces

While Yes is chosen, the active desktop workspace is automatically saved when you switch to
another desktop workspace.

Auto-Save on Account Login

While Yes is chosen, the active desktop workspace is automatically saved when you use the
Account Login option to login to your account from working in Offline mode.

2.7.1.4 Print Page Setup

The Print Page Setup subsection is divided into two groups: Print Page Setup and Margins.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 67

Print Page Setup Group

The Print Page Setup group contains the following options:

Title Font

This option defines the font attributes of the page title used when printing charts. You can change its
font attributes by using the [...] button.

Print Colors

This option defines if charts will be printed in Black and White or Full Color.

Margins Group

The Margins group contains the following options:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 68 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Units

This option defines the type of measurement units used for the document's page margins. It is a
selection menu with two choices: Centimeters and Inches.

Top

This option defines the document's top page margin for printed charts.

Bottom

This option defines the document's bottom page margin for printed charts.

Left

This option defines the document's left page margin for printed charts.

Right

This option defines the document's right page margin for printed charts.

2.7.1.5 Miscellaneous

The Miscellaneous subsection is divided into two groups: New Chart Defaults and Miscellaneous.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 69

New Chart Defaults Group

The New Chart Defaults group contains the following options:

Chart Interval

This option defines the chart interval used for any new chart window being opened.

Chart Type

This option defines the chart type used for any new chart window being opened.

Max # of Bars

This option defines the number of price bars downloaded from your broker's charting service and
loaded into every open chart window each time VT Trader is started. The minimum amount of price
history that can be loaded is 100 price bars; the maximum number that can be loaded is 5,000 price
bars. Changes made to this option's value are applied only after the next time VT Trader is started.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 70 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Miscellaneous Group

The Miscellaneous group contains the following options:

Auto-Switch to Selection Tool

This option is a selection menu with two choices: Yes and No. While Yes is chosen, the mouse
cursor will automatically switch back to the Selection Tool after you have used one of the other
drawing tools in a chart window. While No is chosen, the mouse cursor will remain as the selected
drawing tool 239 after being chosen (for example, the Fibonacci Fan); you'll be able to use the same
drawing tool 239 on the chart several times in succession without the need to reselect it each time
you want to use it.

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)

This option is a selection menu with two choices: Enabled and Disabled. While enabled, you will be
able to use the sample DDE.xls file distributed with VT Trader. Changes made to this option's value
are applied only after the next time VT Trader is started. VT Trader must remain open and connected
to your brokers services while you are using DDE commands.

Show Trading System Alerts

This option defines in which window the any active trading systems show their message alerts. It is
a selection menu with two choices: In Trading Systems Alerts Window and In Trading Activity
Window. While In Trading Activity Window is chosen, message alerts generated by active trading
systems are shown in the Trading Activity 174 window. While In Trading Systems Alerts Window is
chosen, message alerts generated by active trading systems are shown in the Trading Systems
Alerts window.

Max # of Environment Auto-Backups

VT Trader automatically creates environment backup files each time you start the platform. This
option defines the maximum number of environment backup archives that VT Trader maintains. The
environment backup archives created include all client files just as if you were creating an
environment file for export using the Export Environment 34 command with all options selected. All
environment backup archives created are saved into VT Trader's Data -> StartupBack ups folder.

System Tray Pop-Up Messages

This option is a selection menu with two choices: Show and Hide. While Show is chosen, VT Trader
shows messages (price alerts, drawing tools' alerts, and trading systems' alerts) in small pop-up
windows that appear at the bottom, right side of your computer monitor.

2.7.2 Communication
2.7.2.1 Common

The Common subsection includes only 1 group: Common.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader 2.0's Interface 71

Common Group

The Common group contains the following options:

Price Updates Frequency

This option defines the speed that VT Trader receives price updates for the available trading
instruments. It is a selection menu with several choices ranging from Real-Time to 5 seconds.
While Real-Time is chosen, VT Trader receives price updates as frequently as the broker's service
broadcasts those prices (which could be up to several times per second). While any other selection
is chosen, VT Trader receives price updates from the broker's service at that respective interval.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

Task Windows

Part

III
 Task Windows 73

3 Task Windows

VT Trader's user interface is centered around the use of task windows. The general purpose of these
windows is to provide you with up-to-the-second, real-time account information, trading information,
alerts, news events, and important announcements. The main task windows have been divided into
groups based on the type(s) of general task(s) they help you perform. To learn more about each of the
task windows, please click on their names below:

Account(s) Summary

Account Information Status Bar 79

Account Information 74
Currency Portfolio 80
Reports 89

Dealing Rates

Quotes Board 89
Advanced Rates 94

Trading

Open Positions 101

Pending Orders 108
Trading Activity 114

Trading Tools

Currency Calculator 120

Pip Calculator 120

Desktop Workspaces

Desktop Workspaces Management 150

Chart Window

Chart Window 121

Chart Templates Management 152

Technical (Chart) Analysis

Data (Chart) Inspection 154

Fundamental Analysis

Dow Jones News 166

Market Commentaries 161
Economic Calendar 172

Alerts

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 74 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

New Alert... 179

Active Price Alerts Summary 180
Alerts Activity 174
Trading Systems Alerts

Technical Indicators and Trading Systems

Indicators Builder 182

Indicators Quick List (Configuration) 235
Attached Indicators

Trading Systems Builder 205

Trading Systems Quick List (Configuration) 236
Attached Trading Systems
Active Trading Systems Summary 181

3.1 Accounts Summary

3.1.1 Account Information

The Account Information window provides you with an overview of your account(s)'s status. The
Account Information window's contextual menu 76 provides you with additional account-specific
functionality as well as access to the window's properties 77 .

Explanations of Account Information Data

Account

Account is the name associated with the trading account. It is typically specified by the account's
owner while completing the broker's customer agreement.

Balance

Balance is the sum of all deposits, interest income and realized gains less all withdrawals, realized
losses and incidental fees.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 75

Realized P/L

Realized Profit/Loss is the sum of all gains and losses on positions that have been closed out at
the end of the trading day (17:00 ET).

Unrealized P/L

Unrealized Profit/Loss is the gains and losses of all open positions, calculated at the current
market rate(s).

Equity (a.k.a. Margin Balance)

Equity (or Margin Balance) is the Account Balance plus all current Realized P/L and
Unrealized P/L.

Total Lots Open

Total Lots Open is the cumulative sum of lots open in the account.

Total Amount Open

Total Amount Open is the cumulative sum of currency units open in the account respective to the
total number of lots open.

Appearance Customizations

Each column of data in the Account Information window can be automatically (or manually) resized,
moved, or hidden at your discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the
right mouse button. You may select Size Column to Fit or Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual
menu depending on the action you want to perform.

To manually resize a column, you must click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will
change and appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to
the left or right to resize the column.

It is also possible to change the location of each column respective to the other visible columns. Moving
a column can be accomplished by dragging and dropping the desired column into its new location after

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 76 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

clicking and holding down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over that column's
caption (Information, Value).

To hide one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the right mouse
button. Select any column from the contextual menu that you want to hide. Visible columns have a
check mark next to their caption name while hidden columns do not. To show a hidden column you
simply need to reselect it from the column caption's contextual menu.

You can further customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties
77 .

Contextual Menu

The Account Information window's contextual menu 76 provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 77 . To activate the contextual menu 76 , click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any account's row.

3.1.1.1 Contextual Menu

The Account Information window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 77 . To activate the contextual menu, click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any account-related row.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 77

The Account Information window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Reports

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with several different report types. Each
report opens in a new Internet browser window. Please click here to learn more about the available
reports.

Close All Positions

This command closes all of the account's open positions at the instruments' current market prices.

Remove All Orders

This command cancels (removes) all of the account's orders.

Convert To

This command dynamically converts the account's Balance, Realized P/L, Unrealized P/L, and
Equity into another currency using current market prices.

Properties

This command opens the Account Information properties 77 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Account Information window
back to their default values.

3.1.1.2 Properties

The Account Information properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

Appearance Section

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

78 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Colors Section

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 79

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

3.1.2 Account Information Status Bar

The Account Information status bar provides you with an overview of your account's funds.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 80 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Explanations of Account Information Status Bar Data

Account Balance

Account Balance is the sum of all deposits, interest income and realized gains less all
withdrawals, realized losses and incidental fees.

Realized P/L

Realized Profit/Loss is the sum of all gains and losses on positions that have been closed out at
the end of the trading day (17:00 ET).

Unrealized P/L

Unrealized Profit/Loss is the gains and losses of all open positions, calculated at the current
market rate(s).

Equity (a.k.a. Margin Balance)

Equity (or Margin Balance) is the Account Balance plus all current Realized P/L and
Unrealized P/L.

3.1.3 Currency Portfolio Window

The Currency Portfolio window provides you with per currency lot exposure statistics. The Currency
Portfolio window shows the data in a visually appealing, easy-to-understand bar graph (chart) format.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 81

Explanations of Currency Portfolio Data

Currency

The Currency is one of the two currencies in a currency pair (for example, in EUR/USD currency
pair, EUR is one currency and USD is the other).

Total Buy Lots

Total Buy Lots is the cumulative total number of lots in all open Buy positions in the currency.

Total Sell Lots

Total Sell Lots is the cumulative total number of lots in all open Sell positions in the currency.

Net Exposure

Net Exposure is the cumulative total number of lots in all open Buy positions in the currency minus
the cumulative total number of lots in all open Sell positions in the currency.

Appearance Customizations

You can customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties 83 .

Contextual Menu

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 82 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Currency Portfolio window's contextual menu 82 provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 83 . To activate the contextual menu 82 , click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any part of the bar graph.

3.1.3.1 Contextual Menu

The Currency Portfolio window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality and access
to the window's properties 83 . To activate the contextual menu, click the right mouse button while the
cursor is positioned over any part of the bar graph.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 83

The Currency Portfolio window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Selected Accounts, All Accounts, Select Account(s)...

You can change the data that is calculated in this window by using these menu commands. All
Accounts includes data from all of your accounts. Selected Accounts includes data only from those
accounts that have check marks next to them in the Account(s) Information window. Select
Account(s) shows a dialog window that includes a full list of your accounts. Enabling or disabling
accounts from this dialog window enables or disables those accounts in the Account(s)
Information window.

Properties

This command opens the Currency Portfolio properties 83 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Currency Portfolio window back
to their default values.

3.1.3.2 Properties

The Currency Portfolio properties window is divided into four sections: Show/Hide, Colors, Fonts,
and Indents.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

84 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Show/Hide Section

The Show/Hide section shows or hides the graph's elements.

The Show/Hide section contains the following options:

Captions

This option Shows or Hides the graph's axes captions.

Axes Values

This option Shows or Hides the graph's axes data values (i.e. lot values and instruments).

Total Buy Lots

This option Shows or Hides the graph's Total Buy Lots bars.

Total Sell Lots

This option Shows or Hides the graph's Total Sell Lots bars.

Net Exposure

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 85

This option Shows or Hides the graph's Net Exposure bars.

Data Values

This option Shows or Hides the data values that correspond to each of the graph's bars.

Legend

This option Shows or Hides the graph's Legend.

Colors Section

The Colors section defines the colors of the graph's elements.

The Colors section contains the following options:

Total Buy Lots

This option defines the color of the graph's Total Buy Lots bars. You can change the color by using
the [...] button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

86 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Total Sell Lots

This option defines the color of the graph's Total Sell Lots bars. You can change the color by using
the [...] button.

Net Exposure

This option defines the color of the graph's Net Exposure bars. You can change the color by using
the [...] button.

Window

This option defines the background color of the graph's window. You can change its color by using
the [...] button.

Graph

This option defines the background color of the graph. You can change its color by using the [...]
button.

Grid Lines

This option defines the color of the graph's grid lines. You can change their color by using the [...]
button.

Fonts Section

The Fonts section defines the font attributes used by the graph's text elements.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 87

The Fonts section contains the following options:

Captions

This option defines font attributes for the graph's captions. You can change their font attributes by
using the [...] button.

Data

This option defines font attributes for the data values that correspond to each of the graph's bars.
You can change their font attributes by using the [...] button.

Axes

This option defines font attributes for the graph's axes values. You can change their font attributes
by using the [...] button.

Legend

This option defines font attributes for the graph's legend. You can change its font attributes by using
the [...] button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

88 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Indents Section

The Indents section defines the spacing between the bar graph and the window's edges.

The Indents section contains the following options:

Left

This option defines the graph's left window margin.

Top

This option defines the graph's top window margin.

Right

This option defines the graph's right window margin.

Bottom

This option defines the graph's bottom window margin.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 89

3.1.4 Reports

Each report opens a new Internet browser window Forex.com's MyAccount website Reports section
showing that report's detailed information. Reports can be exported to Microsoft Excel or printed for your
convenience. A description of each report is provided below:

Account Summary

This report provides the current account balance as well as all deposits, withdrawals, interest
earned, and fees charged (if any) for any selected month.

Transaction History

This report provides complete trade details for any selected date range, including the deal date/time,
instrument, trade direction (buy or sell), contract size, and executed deal rate.

Open Positions

This report provides a summary of all open positions, including contract size, USD value, average
rate of open positions, current market rate, and unrealized profit/loss.

Order History

This report provides details of all order activity for a selected data range, including the order entry
date/time, its reference number, and any action details for the order.

Rollover History

This report provides rollover details for any transaction held open past 17:00 EST for any selected
date range, including the rollover date, rollover rate, and USD value.

Realized Profit/Loss

This report provides complete trade details with profit/loss for any selected date range, including the
deal date/time, instrument, trade direction (buy or sell), contract size, and executed deal rate.

3.2 Dealing Rates

3.2.1 Quotes Board Window

The Quotes Board window contains several individual Instrument Panels. Each panel provides you
with a unique overview of that instrument's associated market data. Please click here 90 to learn more
about the Instrument Panels and their contextual menus.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 90 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Appearance Customizations

The instrument panels in the Quotes Board window can be resized by using the Panel Size command
in an instrument panel's contextual menu 92 . Instrument panels can be rearranged at your discretion by
using the [^] and [v] buttons in the Instruments 60 subsection of the Options window.

3.2.1.1 Instrument Panel

Each Instrument Panel in the Quotes Board window provides you with a unique overview of that
instrument's associated market data.

You can create new price alerts and conduct trading actions on any of the available Instruments. Buy
and Sell market orders can be requested by positioning the cursor over the Instrument panel's Bid (Sell)
or Ask (Buy) buttons and clicking the left mouse button. These orders will be requested using the
Trading Mode defined in VT Trader's Options window. You can also request Buy and Sell market
orders, Entry Stop Buy, Entry Limit Buy, Entry Stop Sell, and Entry Limit Sell entry orders, as well as

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 91

One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO orders by using the panel's contextual menu 97 .

Explanations of Instrument Panel Data

Instrument

The Instrument (i.e. currency pairs, CFDs, stock s, indices, etc.) on which trading actions can be
conducted is shown in the upper, left corner of the Instrument Panel. Each time an instrument's
prices are updated, its caption area is highlighted.

Trading Mode Icon

The small icon located between the Instrument and the Time is the Trading Mode icon. This icon
shows the current Trading Mode defined in VT Trader's Options window.

Time

Time is the most recent time that the instrument's price has changed.

Bid (Sell) and Ask (Buy)

The Bid is the price at which you can sell the instrument. The Ask is the price at which you can buy
the instrument. The instrument's prices change as soon as the smallest movement of prices in the
market for the instrument has occurred. When an instrument's Bid/Ask are updated, that
instrument's Bid and Ask buttons change colors. If the new price is higher than the previous price,
the Bid/Ask buttons turn blue; if the new price is lower than the previous price, the Bid/Ask buttons
turn red.

Spread

The small button located between Low and High shows the Spread. An instrument's spread is the
difference between its Ask price and its Bid price. Spread = Ask - Bid. The spread is determined by
your broker. As a general rule the spread typically remains static, but it can change depending on
the volatility in the market. Your broker determines if the spread they offer remains static or changes
dynamically with market volatility.

Low

The lowest Bid price attained by the instrument within the current day is the Low. Each day is
typically started at 5:00 PM ET, however, you should verify the daily rollover time with your broker.

High

The highest Ask price attained by the instrument within the current day is the High. Each day is
typically started at 5:00 PM ET, however, you should verify the daily rollover time with your broker.

Contextual Menu

Each instrument panel's contextual menu 97 provides you with additional functionality. To activate an

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 92 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

instrument panel's contextual menu 97 , click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned over
the panel.

3.2.1.1.1 Contextual Menu

Each Instrument Panel's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality. To activate an
Instrument Panel's contextual menu, click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned over
the panel.

Each Instrument Panel's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Buy

This command requests a Buy market order at the instrument's current Ask price.

Sell

This command requests a Sell market order at the instrument's current Bid price.

Conditional Buy

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 93

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with five commands: Entry Stop, Entry
Limit, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO. Entry Stop requests an Entry Stop
Buy order. Entry Limit requests and Entry Limit Buy order. One Cancels Other (OCO) requests a
One Cancels Other (OCO) order with Buy order bias. If/Then requests an If/Then order with Buy
order bias. If/Then OCO requests an If/Then OCO order with Buy order bias.

Conditional Sell

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with five commands: Entry Stop, Entry
Limit, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO. Entry Stop requests an Entry Stop
Sell order. Entry Limit requests and Entry Limit Sell order. One Cancels Other (OCO) requests a
One Cancels Other (OCO) order with Sell order bias. If/Then requests an If/Then order with Sell
order bias. If/Then OCO requests an If/Then OCO order with Sell order bias.

New Price Alert

This command opens the Price Alert 179 window.

Open Chart

This command opens a new chart window for that instrument.

Detach

This command is only available if the contextual menu is activated while the instrument panel is
attached to the Quotes Board window. It actually creates an additional, duplicate instrument panel
that is detached from VT Trader's main program window.

Panel Size

This command defines the visual size of the instrument panels. You may choose a Large, Medium,
or Small panel size. Every visible instrument panel in the Quotes Board window will be resized
according to your choice. * If the instrument panel is detached from the Quotes Board window, this
command only affects the detached panel.

Add/Remove Instruments

This command is only available if the contextual menu is activated while the instrument panel is
attached to the Quotes Board window. It opens the Instruments 60 subsection of the Options
window.

Opacity

This command is only available if the instrument panel is detached from VT Trader's main program
window. You can change the opacity (a.k .a. transparency) level of the detached panel. 100% makes
the panel completely "solid"; 90% - 10% give the detached panel increasingly greater levels of
transparency as the opacity approaches zero.

Close

This command is only available if the instrument panel is detached from VT Trader's main program
window. This command closes the detached instrument panel.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 94 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Always on Top

This command is only available if the instrument panel is detached from VT Trader's main program
window. While enabled, the detached panel remains visible on top of all other open windows.

3.2.2 Advanced Rates Window

The Advanced Rates window provides you with a detailed overview of your chosen instruments and their
associated market data.

You can create new price alerts and conduct trading actions on any of the available Instruments. Buy
and Sell market orders can be requested by positioning the cursor over the Instrument's Bid (Sell) or
Ask (Buy) cells and clicking the left mouse button. These orders will be requested using the Trading
Mode defined in VT Trader's Options window. You can also request Buy and Sell market orders, Entry
Stop Buy, Entry Limit Buy, Entry Stop Sell, and Entry Limit Sell entry orders, as well as One Cancels
Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO orders by using the window's contextual menu 97 .

Explanations of Advanced Rates Data

Instrument

The Instrument (i.e. currency pairs, CFDs, stock s, indices, etc.) on which trading actions can be
conducted is shown in this column. Each time an an instrument's prices are updated, its cell is
highlighted. The highlighting behavior is defined by the window's properties 98 .

Bid (Sell) and Ask (Buy)

The Bid is the price at which you can sell the instrument. The Ask is the price at which you can buy
the instrument. The instrument's prices change as soon as the smallest movement of prices in the
market for the instrument has occurred. When an instrument's Bid/Ask prices are updated, it is
possible to draw up/down arrow graphics next to the prices and highlight the cells. The graphic
drawing and highlighting behaviors are defined by the window's properties 98 .

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 95

Spread

The difference between the instrument's Ask price and Bid price is its spread. Spread = Ask - Bid.
The spread is determined by your broker. As a general rule the spread typically remains static, but it
can change depending on the volatility in the market. Your broker determines if the spread they offer
remains static or changes dynamically with market volatility.

Time

Time is the most recent time that the instrument's price has changed.

High

The highest Ask price attained by the instrument within the current day is the High. Each day is
typically started at 17:00 ET, however, you should verify the daily rollover time with your broker.

Low

The lowest Bid price attained by the instrument within the current day is the Low. Each day is
typically started at 17:00 ET, however, you should verify the daily rollover time with your broker.

Pip Value

Pip Value is the value of 1 pip. This value is calculated in the account's currency for 1.0 standard
lot of the instrument.

Currency

Currency is the currency in which the instrument's Pip Value is calculated.

Trade Size

The Trade Size is the equivalent number of units of the instrument respective to the Lots (T) value
defined in the Instruments 60 subsection of the Options window.

Order Size

The Order Size is the equivalent number of units of the instrument respective to the Lots (O) value
defined in the Instruments 60 subsection of the Options window.

Margin

Margin is the maximum leverage ratio offered by the broker for the instrument based on your
account type.

Appearance Customizations

Each column of data in the Advanced Rates window can be automatically (or manually) resized,
moved, or hidden at your discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

96 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

right mouse button. You may select Size Column to Fit or Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual
menu depending on the action you want to perform.

To manually resize a column, you must click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will
change and appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to
the left or right to resize the column.

It is also possible to change the location of each column respective to the other visible columns. Moving
a column can be accomplished by dragging and dropping the desired column into its new location after
clicking and holding down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over that column's
caption (Spread, Time, Pip Value, etc.).

To hide one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the right mouse
button. Select any column from the contextual menu that you want to hide. Visible columns have a
check mark next to their caption name while hidden columns do not. To show a hidden column you
simply need to reselect it from the column caption's contextual menu.

You can further customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties
98 .

Contextual Menu

The Advanced Rates window's contextual menu 97 provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 98 . To activate the contextual menu 97 , click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any instrument's row.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 97

3.2.2.1 Contextual Menu

The Advanced Rates window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality and access to
the window's properties 98 . To activate the contextual menu, click the right mouse button while the
cursor is positioned over any instrument's row.

The Advanced Rates window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Buy

This command requests a Buy market order at the instrument's current Ask price.

Sell

This command requests a Sell market order at the instrument's current Bid price.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 98 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Conditional Buy

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with five commands: Entry Stop, Entry
Limit, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO. Entry Stop requests an Entry Stop
Buy order. Entry Limit requests and Entry Limit Buy order. One Cancels Other (OCO) requests a
One Cancels Other (OCO) order with Buy order bias. If/Then requests an If/Then order with Buy
order bias. If/Then OCO requests an If/Then OCO order with Buy order bias.

Conditional Sell

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with five commands: Entry Stop, Entry
Limit, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO. Entry Stop requests an Entry Stop
Sell order. Entry Limit requests and Entry Limit Sell order. One Cancels Other (OCO) requests a
One Cancels Other (OCO) order with Sell order bias. If/Then requests an If/Then order with Sell
order bias. If/Then OCO requests an If/Then OCO order with Sell order bias.

New Price Alert

This command opens the Price Alert 179 window.

Open Chart

This command opens a new chart window for that instrument.

Convert To

This command dynamically converts the instruments' Pip Value into another currency using current
market prices.

Properties

This command opens the Advanced Rates properties 98 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Advanced Rates window back to
their default values.

Add/Remove Instruments

This command opens the Instruments 60 subsection of the Options window.

3.2.2.2 Properties

The Advanced Rates properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

Appearance Section

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 99

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Bid/Ask Arrows

This option Shows or Hides the up/down arrow graphics that can be shown in the window's Bid (Sell)
and Ask (Buy) columns' cells. An up arrow is drawn if the current price is greater than the previous
price while a down arrow is drawn if the current price is less than the previous price. The color of the
arrow graphics are defined by the Bid/Ask Arrow Up and Bid/Ask Arrow Down options.

Bid/Ask Highlights

This option Shows or Hides the highlight (i.e. back ground color of the cell) that can be shown in the
window's Bid (Sell) and Ask (Buy) columns' cells. The Bid/Ask Highlights Up option is used to

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

100 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

define the color the cell if the current price is greater than the previous price and the Bid/Ask
Highlights Down option is used to define the color the cell if the current price is less than the
previous price.

Fresh Rates Highlights

This option Shows or Hides the highlight (i.e. back ground color of the cell) that can be shown in the
window's Instrument column's cells. The cell is highlighted each time updated prices are received for
that instrument. The Fresh Rates Highlights option defines the color of cell when it is highlighted.

Colors Section

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window. You can change

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 101

the color by using the [...] button.

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

Bid/Ask Arrow Up

This option defines the color of the up arrow graphic shown in the Bid (Sell) and Buy (Ask ) columns'
cells if Show is chosen for the Bid/Ask Arrows option. You can change the color by using the [...]
button.

Bid/Ask Arrow Down

This option defines the color of the down arrow graphic shown in the Bid (Sell) and Buy (Ask )
columns' cells if Show is chosen for the Bid/Ask Arrows option. You can change the color by using
the [...] button.

Bid/Ask Highlights Up

This option defines the color of the highlight shown in the Bid (Sell) and Buy (Ask ) columns' cells if
Show is chosen for the Bid/Ask Highlights option. You can change the color by using the [...]
button.

Bid/Ask Highlights Down

This option defines the color of the highlight shown in the Bid (Sell) and Buy (Ask ) columns' cells if
Show is chosen for the Bid/Ask Highlights option. You can change the color by using the [...]
button.

Fresh Rates Highlights

This option defines the color of the highlight shown in the Instrument column's cells if Show is
chosen for the Fresh Rates Highlights option. You can change the color by using the [...] button.

3.3 Trading
3.3.1 Open Positions Window

The Open Positions window shows detailed information about open positions with respect to each
traded instrument. The open position in any given instrument is cumulative; it is a summation of all
individual deals open in that respective instrument. The Open Positions window's contextual menu 104
provides you with additional position-specific and deal-specific functionality as well as access to the
window's properties 106 .

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

102 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Explanations of Open Positions Data

Instrument

This is the Instrument associated with the open position (or deal). This column also shows the
reference number for each open deal in the Instrument.

Lots

Lots is the number of lots currently open in the instrument's cumulative position (or in each open
deal).

Amount

Amount is the number of units of the base currency (i.e. the first currency of the instrument; EUR in
EUR/USD, for example) respective to the number of lots being traded in the instrument's cumulative
position (or in each open deal).

B/S

B/S is the direction of the open position (or deal) in the Instrument. B=Buy and S=Sell.

Open

Open is the Instrument's price (Bid or Ask , respective to B/S) that the position (or deal) was opened
at. For the instrument's cumulative open position, it is the average open price of all open deals.

Close

Close is the Instrument's current price (Bid or Ask , respective to B/S) at which it is possible to
immediately close the open position (or deal(s)).

Stop

If a conditional stop order has been attached to the open position, this column shows its price. If no
conditional stop order is attached to the position, this column will be empty (blank ).

Limit

If a conditional limit order has been attached to the open position, this column shows its price. If no
conditional limit order is attached to the position, this column will be empty (blank ).

Pips P/L

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 103

Pips P/L is the open position's floating profit/loss in pips.

Unrealized P/L

Unrealized P/L is the open position's floating profit/loss. Unrealized P/L is calculated in the
currency shown in the Currency column.

Currency

Currency is the currency in which the position's (or deal's) profit or loss is calculated.

Date/Time

Date/Time is the date and time that the position (or deal) was confirmed by your broker. Date/
Time is shown in the following format: Month/Day/Year Hour:Minute:Seconds AM/PM.

Total Row

This row (in accordance with each column's data) shows a summary status of all open positions.
The values are calculated in the currency shown in the Currency column.

Appearance Customizations

Each column of data in the Open Positions window can be automatically (or manually) resized, moved,
or hidden at your discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the
right mouse button. You may select Size Column to Fit or Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual
menu depending on the action you want to perform.

To manually resize a column, you must click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will
change and appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to
the left or right to resize the column.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 104 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

It is also possible to change the location of each column respective to the other visible columns. Moving
a column can be accomplished by dragging and dropping the desired column into its new location after
clicking and holding down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over that column's
caption (Instrument, B/S, Unrealized P/L, etc.).

To hide one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the right mouse
button. Select any column from the contextual menu that you want to hide. Visible columns have a
check mark next to their caption name while hidden columns do not. To show a hidden column you
simply need to reselect it from the column caption's contextual menu.

You can further customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties
106 .

Contextual Menu

The Open Positions window's contextual menu 104 provides you with additional functionality and access
to the window's properties 106 . To activate the contextual menu 104 , click the right mouse button while
the cursor is positioned over any position's row.

3.3.1.1 Contextual Menu

The Open Positions window's contextual menu provides you with additional position-specific
functionality and access to the window's properties 106 . To activate the contextual menu, click the right
mouse button while the cursor is positioned over any position's row.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 105

The Open Positions window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Close Position

This command closes the selected open position at the instrument's current market price.

Close Deal

This command closes the selected deal at the instrument's current market price. * Note: This
command is only available if your broker supports this functionality.

Close All Positions

This command closes all of the open positions shown in the window at the instruments' current
market prices. * This command is only available if the contextual menu is activated while the cursor
is hovering over the Total row.

Stop

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with three commands: Attach, Edit,
and Remove. Attach adds (attaches) a new stop order to the open position. It is only active if no
existing stop order exists. Edit modifies the existing stop order attached to the open position. It is
only active if an existing stop order is attached. Remove deletes the existing stop order attached to
the open position. It is only active if an existing stop order exists. * This command is only available
for the instrument's cumulative open position row, not for its individual deals.

Limit

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with three commands: Attach, Edit,
and Remove. Attach adds (attaches) a new limit order to the open position. It is only active if no
existing limit order exists. Edit modifies the existing limit order attached to the open position. It is
only active if an existing limit order is attached. Remove deletes the existing limit order attached to
the open position. It is only active if an existing limit order exists. * This command is only available
for the instrument's cumulative open position row, not for its individual deals.

Convert To

This command dynamically converts the Open Positions window's Unrealized P/L values into
another currency using current market prices.

Properties

This command opens the Open Positions properties 106 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Open Positions window back to
their default values.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 106 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.3.1.2 Properties

The Open Positions properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

Appearance Section

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Highlight Method

This option defines how the background colors of the window's rows are determined. It is a selection

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 107

menu with two choices: Back ground and P/L. If Back ground is chosen, the Background (Odd
Row) and Background (Even Row) options are used to color the rows. If P/L is chosen, the
Background (P/L >= 0) and Background (P/L < 0) options are used to dynamically color the rows.

Colors Section

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window while Back ground
is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the color by using the [...] button.

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window while Back ground
is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the color by using the [...] button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 108 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Background (P/L >=0)

This option defines the background color of any row in the window that shows a Net P/L value
greater than or equal to zero while P/L is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the
color by using the [...] button.

Background (P/L < 0)

This option defines the background color of any row in the window that shows a Net P/L value less
than zero while P/L is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the color by using the [...]
button.

3.3.2 Pending Orders Window

The Pending Orders window shows detailed information about pending orders. The Pending Orders
window's contextual menu 111 provides you with additional order-specific functionality and access to the
window's properties 111 .

Explanations of Pending Orders Data

Reference Number

The Reference Number is a unique identification number assigned to the order.

Instrument

This is the Instrument associated with the order.

Type

Type is the type of order requested (i.e. Single, OCO, If Then, If Then/OCO, or Trailing Stop).

Basis

This is the Basis of the order requested (i.e. Stop or Limit)

Buy/Sell

Buy/Sell identifies whether the order is to Buy or Sell the base currency (i.e. the first currency of

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 109

the instrument; EUR in EUR/USD, for example) of the Instrument.

Lots

Lots is the number of lots in the order.

Amount

Amount is the number of units of the base currency (i.e. the first currency of the instrument; EUR in
EUR/USD, for example) respective to the number of lots in the order.

Expiry

Expiry identifies when the order will be automatically canceled if it has not been activated. GTC
=Good Till Canceled and Day=Cancel at End of Day.

Rate

Rate is the instrument's price at which the order will be executed.

Trailing Pips

Trailing Pips is the number of pips away from the current rate that the order will follow behind. This
value is only available for trailing entry stop orders and associated trailing stop orders.

Associated

Associated identifies whether the order is associated (attached) to an open position.

Date/Time

Date/Time is the date and time that the order was initially confirmed (or most recently modified by
you and confirmed) by your broker. Date/Time is shown in the following format: Month/Day/Year
Hour:Minute:Seconds AM/PM.

Appearance Customizations

Each column of data in the Pending Orders window can be automatically (or manually) resized, moved,
or hidden at your discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the
right mouse button. You may select Size Column to Fit or Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual
menu depending on the action you want to perform.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

110 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

To manually resize a column, you must click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will
change and appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to
the left or right to resize the column.

It is also possible to change the location of each column respective to the other visible columns. Moving
a column can be accomplished by dragging and dropping the desired column into its new location after
clicking and holding down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over that column's
caption (Instrument, T, Expiry, etc.).

To hide one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the right mouse
button. Select any column from the contextual menu that you want to hide. Visible columns have a
check mark next to their caption name while hidden columns do not. To show a hidden column you
simply need to reselect it from the column caption's contextual menu.

You can further customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties
111 .

Contextual Menu

The Pending Orders window's contextual menu 111 provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 111 . To activate the contextual menu 111 , click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any position's row.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 111

3.3.2.1 Contextual Menu

The Pending Orders window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality and access to
the window's properties 111 . To activate the contextual menu, click the right mouse button while the
cursor is positioned over any order's row.

The Pending Orders window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Change

This command changes the rate (price) of the selected order.

Remove

This command cancels (removes) the selected order.

Remove All

This command cancels (removes) all of the orders shown in the window.

Properties

This command opens the Pending Orders properties 111 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Pending Orders window back to
their default values.

3.3.2.2 Properties

The Pending Orders properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

112 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Appearance Section

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Highlight Method

This option defines how the background colors of the window's rows are determined. It is a selection
menu with two choices: Back ground and Order Type. If Back ground is chosen, the Background
(Odd Row) and Background (Even Row) options are used to color the rows. If Order Type is
chosen, the order type-specific options are used to dynamically color the rows.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 113

Colors Section

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window while Back ground
is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the color by using the [...] button.

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window while Back ground
is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the color by using the [...] button.

Entry Stop Order

This option defines the background color of any row in the window that shows an entry stop order
while Order Type is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the color by using the [...]

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 114 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

button.

Trailing Entry Stop Order

This option defines the background color of any row in the window that shows a trailing entry stop
order while Order Type is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Entry Limit Order

This option defines the background color of any row in the window that shows an entry limit order
while Order Type is chosen as the Highlight Method. You can change the color by using the [...]
button.

Stop Order

This option defines the background color of any row in the window that shows an associated stop
order while Order Type is chosen as the Highlight Method.

Trailing Stop Order

This option defines the background color of any row in the window that shows an associated trailing
stop order while Order Type is chosen as the Highlight Method.

Limit Order

This option defines the background color of any row in the window that shows an associated limit
order while Order Type is chosen as the Highlight Method.

3.3.3 Trading Activity Window

The Trading Activity window shows trading-related messages sent and received by VT Trader.

Explanations of Trading Activity Data

Date/Time

Date/Time is the date and time of the requested action. Date/Time is shown in the following
format: Month/Day/Year Hour:Minute:Seconds AM/PM.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 115

Type

Type identifies the type of action (Deal or Order) that was requested.

Reference Number

The Reference Number is a unique identification number that identifies the action.

Instrument

This is the Instrument associated with the action.

Basis

Basis identifies the order basis for the action (i.e. Stop or Limit)

Buy/Sell

Buy/Sell identifies the directional bias for the action.

Lots

Lots is the number of lots for the action.

Amount

Amount is the number of units of the base currency (i.e. the first currency of the instrument; EUR in
EUR/USD, for example) respective to the number of lots for the requested action.

Expiry

Expiry identifies the order expiration. GTC=Good Till Canceled and Day=Cancel at End of Day. This
information is only provided for orders.

Rate

Rate is the instrument's price at which the action was requested.

Trailing Pips

Trailing Pips is the number of pips away from the current rate that the order will follow behind. This
value is only available for trailing entry stop orders and associated trailing stop orders.

Action

Action defines the action being requested.

Message

The Message provides details pertaining to the action that generated the message.

Appearance Customizations

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

116 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Each column of data in the Trading Activity window can be automatically (or manually) resized, moved,
or hidden at your discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the
right mouse button. You may select Size Column to Fit or Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual
menu depending on the action you want to perform.

To manually resize a column, you must click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will
change and appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to
the left or right to resize the column.

It is also possible to change the location of each column respective to the other visible columns. Moving
a column can be accomplished by dragging and dropping the desired column into its new location after
clicking and holding down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over that column's
caption (Date/Time, Instrument, Message, etc.).

To hide one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the right mouse
button. Select any column from the contextual menu that you want to hide. Visible columns have a
check mark next to their caption name while hidden columns do not. To show a hidden column you
simply need to reselect it from the column caption's contextual menu.

You can customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties 117 .

Contextual Menu

The Trading Activity window's contextual menu 117 provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 117 . To activate the contextual menu 117 , click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any message's row.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 117

3.3.3.1 Contextual Menu

The Trading Activity window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality. To activate
the contextual menu, click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned over any message's
row.

The Trading Activity window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Clear Log

This command erases the contents of the window.

Save Log

This command saves the contents of the window to a text file.

Properties

This command opens the Trading Activity properties 117 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Trading Activity window back to
their default values.

3.3.3.2 Properties

The Trading Activity properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

118 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Appearance Section

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Auto-Scroll Messages

This option is a selection menu with two choices: Yes and No. While Yes is chosen, the Trading
Log 114 window "jumps" to the newest message received. If you select one or more messages, this
option is temporarily disabled while the message(s) remain selected; this allows you easily view
and/or search through the messages without having to completely disable this option by choosing
No.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 119

Colors Section

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 120 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.4 Trading Tools

3.4.1 Currency Calculator

The Currency Calculator is a very simple, yet useful, tool included in VT Trader.

You can quickly enter the amount of the first currency (the base currency) and convert that amount into
the second currency. In the example below, $100.00 USD (U.S. dollars) has been converted into the
EUR currency (Euro).

3.4.2 Pip Calculator

The Pip Calculator is another very simple, yet useful, tool included in VT Trader. You ca quickly
determine the value of 1 pip of a currency pair based on the trade amount (in Lots) calculated in your
choice of currency.

In the example below, 1 pip of the USD/CHF currency based on a 1 lot trade amount is equal to $8.76
USD (U.S. Dollars).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 121

3.5 Chart Window

Chart windows associated with various instruments and time intervals will be your primary focus while
performing technical analysis in VT Trader. You can also conduct actual trading actions and monitor
trading activity directly from the chart window(s). Each chart window can be manipulated by using the
commands in the Ribbon's 30 Chart menu, its own contextual menu 128 , its custom Chart Properties (or
its assigned Chart Template Properties), and/or its toolbar 124 .

A Chart window can be broken down into several different areas of interest.

Caption Bar

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

122 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Caption Bar shows the instrument chart interval, and Bid/Ask chart type.

Price Frame and Technical Indicator Frame(s)

The price frame along with any technical indicator frames (which can be positioned above and/or
below the main price frame) shows the instrument's price data and any technical indicators' data.
These areas also show many other elements that help define the chart's characteristics and aid in
your technical analysis.

Some of the chart's basic visual elements include: the instruments panel, the X-axis and Y-axis, grid
lines, high/low zone, the current price line and its spread band, and hidden labels. The spread band
is attached to the current price line; it is an area equal to the difference between the Bid/Ask prices
of the instrument. The grid lines are vertical and horizontal lines that are shown in the price frame
(and any visible indicator frame(s)). The vertical grid lines are automatically drawn predefined
increments (based on the chart's Interval). The horizontal grid lines are drawn at predefined price
levels (usually rounded numbers of price such as 1.2000, 1.2050, and 1.2100).

Indicators, indicator labels, trading systems, trading system labels, and price alert labels are also
shown in this area (overlaid in the price frame and in separate frames above and/or below the price
frame). Position-related labels, pending order-related labels, and indicator order-related labels are
shown according to your All Accounts/Position selections if you are conducting trading activities in
the instrument you are analyzing in the chart window.

Any drawing tools you are using in the chart window to assist with your technical analysis will also
be shown in these areas.

Chart elements are shown using layers. Each type of chart element is assigned to a layer. A
particular chart window's various layers can be shown or hidden at your discretion by using the
Ribbon -> Chart menu -> Show/Hide group -> Chart Layers selection menu or the Chart Properties
window (or the Chart Template Properties window if the chart is using a template).

Y-Axis

The Y-axis is located along the right side of the chart window. It shows the instrument's price
values. You can use the Y-axis to adjust the chart's Y-Axis (vertical) zoom level by positioning the
cursor over top of the Y-axis, clicking and holding down the let mouse button, and moving the cursor
to a new location within the Y-axis. Releasing the left mouse button applies the zoom action.
Moving the cursor to a higher location zooms in the Y-axis scale, while moving it to a lower location
zooms out the Y-axis scale.

X-Axis

The X-axis is located along the bottom side of the chart window directly below the instrument data
area. It shows the chart interval's date/time values. You can use the X-axis to adjust the chart's X-
axis (horizontal) zoom level by positioning the cursor over top of the X-axis, clicking and holding
down the let mouse button, and moving the cursor to a new location within the X-axis. Releasing the
left mouse button applies the zoom action. Moving the cursor to the right zooms in the X-axis scale,
while moving it to left zooms out the X-axis scale.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 123

Quotes Panel

The Quotes Panel is located in the top, left corner of the chart window. Its data is specific the
instrument being viewed in the chart window. The Quotes Panel shown in the chart window looks
and functions exactly like its Instrument Panel 90 counterpart in the Quotes Board 89 window.
Please click here 90 to learn more about the Quotes Panel.

Chart Window Toolbar

The chart window's toolbar provides you quick, easy access to a variety of very useful chart-
related commands and drawing tools. Please click here 124 to learn more about the chart window
toolbar's commands.

Status Bar

The Status Bar (from left-to-right) shows the date/time and prices of the selected bar or candle (if
one is selected - not shown in screenshot below), the date/time stamp and price value according to
the cursor's position within the chart, and the current date and time provided by your broker.

Contextual Menu

The chart window's contextual menu 128 provides you with trading-related functionality, technical
analysis-related functionality, access to the window's properties, and more. To activate the
contextual menu 128 , click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned anywhere within the
window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 124 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.5.1 Chart Window Toolbar

The Chart Window Toolbar provides you quick, easy access to a variety of very useful chart-related
commands and drawing tools.

Explanations of Chart Window Toolbar Commands

Instrument

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the instruments available in VT Trader.
You can change the chart window's current instrument by choosing your desired instrument from the
selection menu.

Interval

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the chart intervals available for use in
the chart window. You can change chart window's current interval by choosing your desired interval
from the selection menu. The following chart intervals are currently available in VT Trader:

Tick (each incoming price is a "tick "; a "tick " is the smallest possible interval)
1-Minute
5-Minute

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 125

10-Minute
15-Minute
30-Minute
1-Hour
2-hour
4-Hour
Daily (each new day starts at 17:00 ET)
Weekly (each new week starts at 12:00 AM (00:00) ET on Monday)
Monthly

Bid/Ask

An instrument has two possible prices at any given time - its bid price and its ask price. You sell at
the bid price and you buy at the ask price. VT Trader can construct an instrument's chart using
either its bid or ask prices. You can choose an instrument's bid or ask price bias using the Bid/Ask
command.

Type

This command contains a selection menu that includes all of the types of charts available for use in
the chart window. You can change chart window's current chart type by choosing your desired type
from the selection menu. The following chart types are currently available in VT Trader:

Japanese Candlesticks (Filled)

Japanese Candlesticks (Hollow)
Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks
Bars (O/H/L/C)
Bars
Line
Point and Figure
Renko

Auto-Scroll Chart to Current Time

This command is a toggle button. It enables or disables the Auto-Scroll to Current Time property of
the active chart window. While enabled, the active chart window will always automatically move the
chart's price data to the instrument's most recent incoming price tick. Disabling this property allows
you to easily perform technical analysis throughout the instrument's historical price data without the
chart automatically returning to the most recent price tick.

Auto-Size Y-Axis

This command is a toggle button. It enables or disables the Auto-Size Y-Axis property of the active
chart window. While enabled, the active chart window automatically resizes its pricing data to show
the highest high price and lowest low price at the respective top and bottom of the viewable chart
area. If one or more indicators are shown in the main price frame, the highest high and lowest low
values of the indicator(s) are also considered while auto-sizing. For example, if an attached
indicator's value has a higher high value (and/or a lower low value) than the price bars, then the
indicator's value(s) will be used for the auto-sizing of the viewable data. Disabling this property
allows you to manually control the scaling (sizing) of the data in the viewable area of the chart
window using the Zoom commands, the Y-Axis's drag-and-drop zooming functionality, or the Y-
Axis's Scale Settings.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

126 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Show Grid Lines

This command is a toggle button. It shows or hides the Grid Lines in the active chart window.

Show Cross Hair

This command is a toggle button. It shows or hides the Cross Hair in the active chart window.
Please click here 240 to learn more about the Cross Hair tool.

Show Quotes Panel

This command is a toggle button. It shows or hides the Quotes Panel in the active chart window.

Set All Labels to Default Position

This command quickly resets all of the labels shown in the active chart window back to their default
positions.

Drawing Tool Selection

This command allows you to quickly select any of VT Trader's drawing tools for use. Please click
here 239 to learn more about the drawing tools included in VT Trader.

Clone Chart

You can quickly create a new, duplicate (clone) chart window of the active chart window by using
the Clone Chart command.

Area Zoom

This command allows you to define a rectangular portion of the active chart window using the cursor
to automatically zoom in on. The portion of the active chart window within your rectangular selection
area will be magnified to fill the entire viewable area of the chart window.

X-Axis Zoom Out

You can decrease the horizontal (left-to-right) size of the active chart window's data using this
command.

X-Axis Zoom In

You can increase the horizontal (left-to-right) size of the active chart window's data using this
command.

Y-Axis Zoom In

You can increase the vertical (top-to-bottom) size of the active chart window's data using this
command.

Y-Axis Zoom Out

You can decrease the vertical (top-to-bottom) size of the active chart window's data using this
command.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 127

Undo Zoom

You can undo the most recent action performed with any of the zooming commands by using this
command.

Reset X-Axis

You can quickly restore the X-Axis's zoom level back to its default value using this command.

Reset Y-Axis

You can quickly restore the Y-Axis's zoom level back to its default value using this command.

Reset Axes

You can quickly restore the X-Axis's zoom level and the Y-Axis's zoom level back to their default
values using this command.

Contextual Menu

The Chart Window Toolbar contextual menu's Customize... command allows you add or remove icons
from the toolbar. To activate the contextual menu and customize 127 the toolbar, click the right mouse
button while the cursor is positioned anywhere within the toolbar. Please click here 127 to learn more
about customizing the chart window's toolbar.

3.5.1.1 Customize...

You can customize the commands shown in the chart window toolbar 124 by selecting the Customize...
command from its contextual menu.

Once selected, a Customize Toolbar window is opened...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 128 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

You can use the [Add ->], [<- Remove], [Move Up], and/or [Move Down] buttons to create a unique
arrangement for the chart window toolbar 124 . The [Reset] button returns chart window toolbar 124 back to
its default arrangement. The Available toolbar items selection menu shows the available commands not
included in the chart window toolbar 124 . The Current toolbar items section shows tools that are currently
included in the chart window toolbar 124 .

3.5.2 Contextual Menu

The chart window's contextual menu provides you with trading-related functionality, technical analysis-
related functionality, access to the window's custom properties, and more. To activate the contextual
menu, click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned anywhere within the window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 129

The Chart window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Buy

This command requests a Buy market order at the instrument's current Ask price.

Sell

This command requests a Sell market order at the instrument's current Bid price.

Conditional Buy

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with five commands: Entry Stop, Entry
Limit, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO. Entry Stop requests an Entry Stop
Buy order. Entry Limit requests and Entry Limit Buy order. One Cancels Other (OCO) requests a
One Cancels Other (OCO) order with Buy order bias. If/Then requests an If/Then order with Buy
order bias. If/Then OCO requests an If/Then OCO order with Buy order bias.

Conditional Sell

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with five commands: Entry Stop, Entry
Limit, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then, and If/Then OCO. Entry Stop requests an Entry Stop
Sell order. Entry Limit requests and Entry Limit Sell order. One Cancels Other (OCO) requests a
One Cancels Other (OCO) order with Sell order bias. If/Then requests an If/Then order with Sell
order bias. If/Then OCO requests an If/Then OCO order with Sell order bias.

Price Alert

This command opens the Price Alert 179 window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

130 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Indicator's Order Buy

This command requests an Indicator Order to Buy based on any indicator currently attached to the
chart window. To request an Indicator Order to Buy for an indicator shown in its own frame, you
must activate the contextual menu while the cursor is positioned within the indicator's frame.

Indicator's Order Sell

This command requests an Indicator Order to Sell based on any indicator currently attached to the
chart window. To request an Indicator Order to Sell for an indicator shown in its own frame, you
must activate the contextual menu while the cursor is positioned within the indicator's frame.

Chart Properties...

This command opens the active chart window's custom Chart Properties 131 window. This Chart
Properties 131 window is identical to the Chart Template Properties window except that only the
active chart will be modified if any properties are changed. If any of the active chart window's custom
chart properties are changed while the chart is assigned to a chart template, the chart is
disassociated from the chart template and begins using its custom chart properties.

Chart Template

This command is a selection menu that includes a submenu with two commands: Load
Template... and Save Template As. The Load Template... command loads (applies) any of your
saved chart templates to the active chart window. If the active chart window is currently assigned to
a chart template, that chart template will have a check mark next to its name in this command's
selection menu. The Save Template As command saves the active chart window's properties
configuration as a new chart template file. All properties included in the Chart Properties window
are included in the chart template. The new chart template file is saved into VT Trader's Data ->
ChartTemplates folder. Once saved, the new chart template is shown in the Load Template...
command's selection menu and in the Ribbon -> Chart menu -> Chart Templates group -> Load...
command's selection menu.

Move Frame Up

This command moves the frame up that the cursor was positioned over when the contextual menu
was activated. This command will be available if the contextual menu was activated from within a
frame that had an additional frame directly above it.

Move Frame Down

This command moves the frame down that the cursor was positioned over when the contextual menu
was activated. This command will be available if the contextual menu was activated from within a
frame that had an additional frame directly below it.

Add Indicator...

This command opens the Add Indicator window. You can review categorized lists of indicators,
choose an indicator from one of the lists, review its description, and add it to the chart using the
Add Indicator window.

Indicators Quick List

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 131

This command includes a selection menu. The Indicators Quick List can be likened to your
"Favorites" in Internet Explorer or your "Bookmarks" in Mozilla Firefox. You can configure the
Indicators Quick List to include only the indicators that you use most frequently or desire to have
easily available. You may need to configure your Indicators Quick List before it best fits your
needs. Please click here 235 to learn more about configuring your Indicator Quick List.

Attached Indicators

This command opens the Attached Indicators window. You can review a summary listing of
indicators currently attached to the active chart window, add additional indicators to the chart,
change the properties of any attached indicator, and delete attached indicators using the Attached
Indicators window. The Attached Indicators window also allows you to directly edit an indicator by
opening it in an Indicator Editor window. Please click here 184 to learn more about editing
indicators using an Indicator Editor window.

Add Trading System...

This command opens the Add Trading System window. You can review categorized lists of trading
systems, choose a trading system from one of the lists, review its description, and add it to the
chart using the Add Trading System window.

Trading Systems Quick List

This command includes a selection menu. The Trading Systems Quick List can be likened to your
"Favorites" in Internet Explorer or your "Bookmarks" in Mozilla Firefox. You can configure the
Trading Systems Quick List to include only the trading systems that you use most frequently or
desire to have easily available. You may need to configure your Trading Systems Quick List before
it best fits your needs. Please click here 236 to learn more about configuring your Trading Systems
Quick List.

Attached Trading Systems

This command opens the Attached Trading Systems window. You can review a summary listing of
trading systems currently attached to the active chart window, add additional trading systems to the
chart, change the properties of any attached trading system, enable or disable Auto-Trading mode
for any attached trading system, and delete attached trading systems using the Attached Trading
Systems window. The Attached Trading Systems window also allows you to directly edit a trading
system by opening it in a Trading System Editor window. Please click here 207 to learn more
about editing trading systems using a Trading System Editor window.

3.5.3 Chart Properties

The Chart Properties window defines the main set of properties used by the chart window(s). It is
important to note that each chart window in VT Trader is always operating in one of two different chart
properties modes. Those modes are: Chart Template Mode 152 or the chart window's own Custom Chart
Properties Mode. Chart windows assigned to a chart template will be automatically redrawn each time
that chart template is modified. New chart windows are always opened using the "primary" chart
template. Open chart windows that are using their own custom chart properties will not be affected by

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

132 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

changes made to any chart template.

Effectively, there is a 3-level hierarchy that determines how chart templates 152 , chart properties, and per
chart elements' properties are applied to each chart.

Level 1 (highest level): Chart Template ->

Level 2: Custom Chart Properties ->

Level 3 (lowest level): Per Chart Elements’ Custom Properties

It is easy to determine if the active chart window is assigned to a chart template or if it is using its own
custom chart properties. If it is assigned to a chart template, the Ribbon -> Chart -menu -> Chart
Templates group -> Load... command's selection menu and the chart window contextual menu -> Chart
Template -> Load Template... command's selection menu will have a check mark next to the assigned
chart template's name. If no chart template has a check mark next to its name, the chart window is
using its own custom chart properties. If the active chart window is assigned to a chart template,
however, any time you modify its properties that chart immediately disassociates itself from the chart
template and switches to using its own custom chart properties.

The Chart Properties window is divided into the following sections (and subsections):

Appearance

The Appearance section defines the active chart window's general appearance properties. Click on the
subsection's name to learn more about its options. The subsections included in this section are:

Chart 133
Show/Hide 135
Miscellaneous 137
High/Low Zone 138
Cross Hair 140

Labels

The Labels section defines the default properties for all of the various types of Chart Labels that can be
shown in the active chart window. You can define each label's Label Color, Border Color (position-related
labels have separate Label/Border Colors based on Net Profit/Loss), Font Attributes, and Line Color/
Width/Style. You can also define the Placement (i.e. Chart or Y-Axis) of the Current Rate, High Line,
and Low Line labels. Note: Any label shown in the active chart window can be customized using its own
individual custom properties without affecting these default properties or any other labels (by positioning
the cursor over the label shown in the chart window, click ing the right mouse button, and choosing
"Properties" from its contextual menu).

Layers

The Layers section defines the properties for all of the various Chart Layers that can be shown or hidden
in the active chart window. You can define each layer's visibility and brightness. Any object(s) attached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 133

to the active chart window that are part of the chosen layer will be affected by these properties. For
example, if you draw 3 trend lines in the chart window, choose the Trend Lines layer, and choose No for
the Visibility property, all 3 trend lines are hidden from view; choose Yes to show them again.

Chart Types

The Chart Types section defines the properties for all of the various Chart Types that can be used in the
active chart window. Please click here 142 to learn more about each of the chart types. For candlestick
chart types, you can choose the up/down candle fill colors and the up/down candle border color/width.
For bar and line chart types, you can choose the up/down bar/line colors and bar/line width. For the
Point and Figure chart type, you can choose the up/down X/O colors/width, price array, box size, and
reversal amount. For the Renko chart type, you can choose the up/down brick colors, up/down brick
border colors/width, and box size.

Drawing Tools

The Drawing Tools section defines the basic properties for all of the various Drawing Tools that can be
used in the active chart window. Please click here 239 to learn more about each of the drawing tools.
Note: Any drawing object shown in the active chart window can be customized using its own individual
custom properties without affecting these default properties or any other drawing tools (by selecting the
object in the chart window, click ing the right mouse button, and choosing "Properties" from its
contextual menu).

Attached Indicators

This section is a simple read-only summary list showing the names of any indicators currently attached
to the active chart window. If/when the chart properties are saved (and/or loaded) as a chart template,
each attached indicator's custom properties are also saved (and/or loaded) as part of the chart template.

Attached Trading Systems

This section is a simple read-only summary list showing the names of any trading systems currently
attached to the active chart window. If/when the chart properties are saved (and/or loaded) as a chart
template, each attached trading system's custom properties are also saved (and/or loaded) as part of
the chart template.

3.5.3.1 Chart

The Chart subsection contains two groups: Chart and Axes.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

134 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Chart Group

The Chart group contains the following options:

Spread Band Transparency (%)

This option defines the transparency of the spread band.

Spread Band Color

This option defines the color of the spread band. You can change its color by using the [...] button.

Chart Background Color

This option defines the main background color of the active chart window. You can change its color
by using the [...] button.

High/Low Zone Background Color

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 135

This option defines the color of the high/low zone. You can change its color by using the [...] button.

Grid Lines Color

This option defines the color of the grid lines. You can change its color by using the [...] button.

Grid Lines Style

This option defines the style of the grid lines.

Label Shadow Transparency (%)

This option defines the transparency of the labels' shadows.

Label Alignment

This option is a selection menu with two choices: Left and Right. It defines the default placement of
the labels when they are initially shown in the active chart window.

Axes Group

The Axes group contains the following options:

Background Color

This option defines the background color of the X-Axis and Y-Axis areas. You can change the color
by using the [...] button.

Foreground Color

This option defines the color of the X-Axis date/time marker lines and the Y-Axis price marker lines
on the axes inside edges. You can change the color by using the [...] button.

Font

This option defines the font attributes of the X-Axis and Y-Axis values. You can change their font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Y-Axis Width

This option defines the width (in pixels) of the Y-Axis area.

3.5.3.2 Show/Hide

The Show/Hide subsection only contains one group: Show/Hide.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

136 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Show/Hide Group

The Show/Hide group contains the following options:

Cross Hair

This option shows or hides the cross hair tool 240 in the active chart window.

Quotes Panel

This option shows or hides the instrument panel in the active chart window.

Current Rate Line

This option shows or hides the current rate line in the active chart window.

Grid Lines

This option shows or hides the vertical and horizontal grid lines in the active chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 137

Status Line

This option shows or hides the status line in the active chart window.

Chart Toolbar

This option shows or hides the toolbar 124 in the active chart window.

3.5.3.3 Miscellaneous

The Miscellaneous subsection only contains one group: Miscellaneous.

Miscellaneous Group

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 138 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Miscellaneous group contains the following options:

Auto-Size Y-Axis Min/Max Bounds

This option is a selection menu with two choices: Price and All Data. It defines what data is
considered for auto-sizing while the Auto-Size Y-Axis option is defined as Yes. The Price selection
auto-sizes the Y-Axis based on only the highest high price and lowest low price currently visible in
the active chart window's price frame. The All Data selection auto-sizes the Y-Axis based on the
highest high value and lowest low value of any data array currently visible in the price frame. For
example, if an attached indicator's value has a higher high value (and/or a lower low value) than the
price bars, then the indicator's value is used for the auto-sizing of the viewable data.

Right Margin

This option defines the width of the right margin of the active chart window. The Right Margin is the
offset (distance - in pixels) between instrument's current rate (price) and the right edge of the price
frame.

Auto-Size Y-Axis

This option enables or disables the Auto-Size Y-Axis property of the active chart window. While
Yes is chosen, the active chart window automatically resizes its price data (and indicator data, if
available) so it is shown with the highest high price (or indicator value) and lowest low price (or
indicator value) at the respective top and bottom of the viewable chart area based on the Auto-Size
Y-Axis Min/Max Bounds property. While No is chosen, you can manually control the scaling
(sizing) of the data in the viewable area of the chart window using the Zoom commands, the Y-Axis's
drag-and-drop zooming functionality, or the Y-Axis's Scale Settings.

Scale Price and Time to 1:1 Ratio

The option links the X-Axis and Y-Axis zoom levels in a 1:1 ratio. This means that 1 unit of time is
equal to 1 unit of price; the distance between each bar (or each candle's wick ) in the active chart
window is equal to the distance between each 1 pip of price change. While Yes is chosen, the X-
Axis and Y-Axis Zoom In/Out commands remain active, however, the chart will be zoomed in/out
according to the linked 1:1 ratio. Changing the X-Axis zoom level automatically changes the Y-Axis
zoom level accordingly (or vice versa) to maintain the 1:1 ratio. Additionally, the Area Zoom
command is disabled.

Auto-Scroll to Current Time

This option enables or disables the Auto-Scroll to Current Time property of the active chart
window. While Yes is chosen, the active chart window will always automatically move the chart's
price data to the instrument's most recent incoming price tick. While No is chosen, you can easily
perform technical analysis throughout the instrument's historical price data without the chart
automatically returning to the most recent price tick.

3.5.3.4 High/Low Zone

The High/Low Zone subsection only contains one group: High/Low Zone.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 139

High/Low Zone Group

The High/Low Zone group contains the following options:

Tick

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's Tick interval data.

1-Minute

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's 1-Minute interval data.

5-Minute

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's 5-Minute interval data.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 140 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

10-Minute

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's 10-Minute interval data.

15-Minute

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's 15-Minute interval data.

30-Minute

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's 30-Minute interval data.

1-Hour

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's 1-Hour interval data.

2-Hour

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's 2-Hour interval data.

4-Hour

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's 4-Hour interval data.

Daily

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's Daily interval data.

Weekly

This option defines the default high/low zone selection that is used in the active chart window while
you are viewing an instrument's Weekly interval data.

3.5.3.5 Cross Hair

The Cross Hair subsection is divided into two groups: Cross Hair and Cross Hair Labels.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 141

Cross Hair Group

The Cross Hair group contains the following options:

Horizontal Line Cursor

This option shows or hides the cross hair's horizontal line in the active chart window.

Vertical Line Cursor

This option shows or hides the cross hair's vertical line in the active chart window.

Horizontal Line Label

This option shows or hides the cross hair's horizontal line label in the active chart window.

Vertical Line Label

This option shows or hides the cross hair's vertical line label in the active chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 142 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Line Cursor Style

This option defines the style of the cross hair's horizontal and vertical lines in the active chart
window.

Line Cursor Color

This option defines the color of the cross hair's horizontal and vertical lines in the active chart
window. You can change the color by using the [...] button.

Cross Hair Labels Group

The Cross Hair Labels group contains the following options:

Fill Color

This option defines the color of the cross hair's horizontal line vertical line labels. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

Border Color

This option defines the border color of the cross hair's horizontal line vertical line labels. You can
change the color by using the [...] button.

Border Width

This option defines the border width (in pixels) of the cross hair's horizontal line vertical line labels.

Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the cross hair's vertical and horizontal lines labels.
You can change the font attributes by using the [...] button.

3.5.4 Chart Types

VT Trader supports many of the most commonly used types of charts for performing technical analysis.
Please click on the chart type's name to learn more about it.

Japanese Candlesticks (Filled) 143

Japanese Candlesticks (Hollow) 143
Bars (O/H/L/C) 144
Bars 145
Line 146
Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks 147
Point & Figure 148
Renko 149

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 143

Japanese Candlesticks (Filled)

Japanese Candlesticks charts show price data using the chart intervals Open, High, Low, and Close
prices.

Return to Chart Types 142

Japanese Candlesticks (Hollow)

Japanese Candlesticks charts show price data using the chart intervals Open, High, Low, and Close
prices. Candlesticks with a transparent fill are bull candles (Close>Open) and candlesticks with a color
fill are bear candles (Close<Open).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

144 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Return to Chart Types 142

Bars (O/H/L/C)

O/H/L/C Bar charts show price data using the chart interval's Open, High, Low, Close prices. The small
lines protruding from the left and right sides of each bar represent the Open price (left protrusion) and
Close price (right protrusion).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 145

Return to Chart Types 142

Bars

Bar charts show price data using the chart interval's High and Low prices.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

146 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Return to Chart Types 142

Line

Line charts show price data using only the chart interval's Close prices.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 147

Return to Chart Types 142

Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks

Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks charts (Heik in means "average" or "balance" in Japanese and Ashi means
"foot" or "bar") are modified versions of the Japanese candlesticks chart. They attempt to eliminate
irregularities often found in traditional candlesticks charts thereby offering a better visual representation
of trends and consolidations. Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks charts show price data using formulas based on
the chart interval's Open, High, Low, Close prices. The Heikin-Ashi prices are calculated using the
formulas:

haClose = (O+H+L+C)/4
haOpen = (haOpen (previous bar) + haClose (previous bar))/2
haHigh = Maximum(H, haOpen, haClose)
haLow = Minimum(L, haOpen, haClose)

The "open," "high," "low," and "close" referred to are of the current bar. The prefix ha- indicates the
corresponding Heikin-Ashi modified values. The "ha" values in the Data Inspection window correspond
to the Heikin-Ashi prices. The "ha" values are also visible in the chart window's scroll panel (in place of
the traditional O,H,L,C values) when the Chart Type is set to Heik in-Ashi Candlestick s.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

148 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Return to Chart Types 142

Point and Figure

Point and Figure charts calculate and show price data using the defined Price, Box Size, and Reversal
Amount options. Point & Figure charts do not show time in a linear fashion. Each rising column of X's or
declining column of O's can represent varying amounts of time depending on the price movements.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 149

Return to Chart Types 142

Renko

Renko charts were introduced by Steve Nison. This charting method assumed its name from the
Japanese word "renga" meaning bricks.

Each brick is drawn in the direction of the prior price move only if a fixed amount (i.e. the box size) has
been exceeded. The bricks are always equal in size. For example, in a 10 unit Renko chart, a 40 point
rally is shown as four equally sized, 10 unit high Renko bricks.

To formulate Renko bricks, today's close price is compared with the high and low prices of the previous
brick. When the close price rises above the top of the previous brick by the specified box size or more,
one or more equal height, up bricks are drawn in the next column. If the close price falls below the
bottom of the previous brick by the specified box size or more, one or more equal height, down bricks
are drawn in the next column.

If the market moves up more than the amount required to draw one brick, but less than the amount
required to draw two bricks, only one brick is drawn. For example, in a 10 unit Renko chart, if the base
price is 1.2000 and the market moves to 1.2015, then one brick is drawn from the base price of 1.2000 -
1.2010. The rest of the move -- from 1.2010 to 1.2015 -- is not shown on the Renko chart. The same rule
applies anytime the price does not fall on a box size divisor.

Basic trend reversals are signaled with the emergence of an up or down brick. A new up brick indicates
the beginning of a new uptrend. A new down brick indicates the beginning of a new downtrend. Renko
charts are excellent for helping determine major support and resistance levels since their main purpose
is to define the underlying trend direction by filtering out minor price movements.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 150 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Return to Chart Types 142

3.6 Desktop Workspaces Management

To best utilize the Desktop Managements Management window, it's necessary to first understand
what desk top work spaces are and how they function in VT Trader.

What is a desktop workspace?

Simply defined, a desk top work space is a predefined spatial arrangement of VT Trader windows that is
saved to a file that can then be (re)loaded quickly and easily. Desktop workspaces are saved as .
desktop files and stored in VT Trader's Data -> Desk tops folder.

What is the Desktop Workspaces Management Window?

You can use the Desktop Workspaces Template Management window to load (switch), rename,
clone, delete, restore, import, and export existing desk top work spaces. You can also restore any
existing desktop workspace back to VT Trader's "factory default" desk top work space configuration.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 151

The Desktop Workspaces window contains the following commands:

Switch

You can load (view) any of your saved desktop workspaces by using the Switch command's
selection menu.

Rename

This command allows you to change the name of the selected desk top work space.

Clone

This command creates a copy of the selected desk top work space. You must give the cloned
desk top work space a new name when prompted; it is not possible to save over an existing desk top
work space.

Delete

This command moves the selected desk top work space to the Windows Recycle Bin for deletion.

Restore

VT Trader automatically creates previous version backup files of the active desktop workspace
based on your settings for the Max # of Previous Versions and Auto-Save Periodicity (in minutes)
options in the Options window -> General section -> Desk top Work spaces subsection. You can
restore the active desktop workspace back to one of its previous states or back to VT Trader's
"factory default" state by using this command's selection menu. Only previous versions of the active
desktop workspace are shown in this selection menu. All previous versions created of any desktop
workspaces are saved into VT Trader's Data -> Desk tops -> Back ups folder.

Export

This command exports the selected desk top work space so that it can be saved in a designated
folder on your computer. Desk top Work spaces are saved with a .desktop file extension. An
exported desk top work space can be imported into VT Trader using the Import command.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 152 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Import

This command imports VT Trader desktop workspace files previously saved in the .desktop format.
Note: You cannot import VT Trader 1.x desktop templates into any version of VT Trader 2.

3.7 Chart Templates Management

To best utilize the Chart Templates Management window, it's necessary to first understand what
chart templates are and how they function in VT Trader.

What is a chart template?

Simply defined, a chart template is a predefined set of properties, indicators, and trading systems
associated with a chart that can be saved to a file and then later assigned (loaded or applied) to one or
more chart windows quickly and easily. Please click here 131 to learn more about what chart properties
131 are included in each chart template. Chart templates are saved as .vtcharttpl files (short for "VT
chart template") and stored in VT Trader's Data -> ChartTemplates folder.

How do chart templates function in VT Trader?

There is a 3-level hierarchy that determines how chart templates, chart properties 131 , and per chart
elements' properties are applied to each chart.

Level 1 (highest level): Chart Template ->

Level 2: Custom Chart Properties ->

Level 3 (lowest level): Per Chart Elements’ Custom Properties

Each new chart window is opened with an assigned chart template; the chart template used for this
purpose is the "primary" chart template as defined in the Chart Templates Management window.
However, any time you modify a specific chart window's chart properties 131 that chart immediately
disassociates itself from any chart template and switches to using its own custom chart properties.
Working with drawing objects in a chart window does not affect the chart window's chart template
association should one exist. Additionally, any chart element that has custom properties assigned to it
will not be overwritten should a chart template be assigned to that chart window. For example, if you
change the color of a specific chart label in a chart window, that specific chart label would retain it
custom color if/when that chart window was assigned a chart template.

Please do not worry if this sounds complicated. VT Trader includes several detailed confirmation
messages (and error messages) to help guide your use of chart templates. You will always know
exactly how VT Trader is managing the chart template(s) and any associated chart windows as you
perform chart template-related actions.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 153

What is the Chart Template Management Window?

You can use the Chart Template Management window to rename, edit, clone, delete, import, and
export existing chart templates. You can also restore any existing chart template back to VT Trader's
"factory default" chart template configuration and define any chart template as the "primary" to be
applied to any newly opened any new chart window.

The Chart Template Management window contains the following commands:

Rename

This command allows you to change the name of the selected chart template.

Edit

This command allows you to make changes to the selected chart template's properties. Any
changes made to the selected chart template will be applied to the chart window(s) assigned to that
chart template.

Clone

This command creates a copy of the selected chart template. You must give the cloned chart
template a new name when prompted; it is not possible to save over an existing chart template.

Delete

This command moves the selected chart template to the Windows Recycle Bin for deletion. When
a chart template is deleted, all chart windows assigned to it immediately switch to using their own
custom chart properties 131 .

Export

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 154 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This command exports the selected chart template so that it can be saved in a designated folder on
your computer. Chart templates are saved with a .vtcharttpl file extension. An exported chart
template can be imported into VT Trader using the Import command.

Import

This command imports a chart template file that was previously exported from VT Trader. Importing
a chart template adds it to the Chart Template Management window's list. If a chart template with
the same Name already exists in VT Trader a (1) is appended to the imported chart template's name
to help distinguish it from the existing chart template.

Restore Default

This command modifies the selected chart template by restoring it back to VT Trader's "factory
default" chart template configuration.

Set as Primary

This command sets the selected chart template as the "primary". Each new chart window is opened
with this chart template assigned to it.

3.8 Technical (Chart) Analysis

3.8.1 Data Inspection Window

The Data Inspection window shows date/time, price, indicator data, and trading system data
associated with the active chart window.

This window consists of two columns: the Data column and the Value column. It also consists of
several rows that are visible at all times; the data shown in these rows correspond to the active chart
(type) being viewed. The Data Inspection window also shows the names and values of each indicator's
output variables (and/or Indicator Output Enabled trading system's output variables) currently attached
to the active chart (assuming their Hide In Inspect option is disabled).

Note: If the cursor is positioned over the currently forming candle, bar, Point and Figure X or O, or Renko
box the values in the Data Inspection window automatically update with the new, incoming values as
those new values become available (or are calculated). You do not need to move the cursor away from

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 155

the currently forming bar or candle and then reposition it over top of that bar or candle again to view the
new, updated values.

Japanese Candlestick Charts and Bar Charts

If the active chart is a Japanese Candlestick chart (filled or hollow) or bar chart, the rows that always
remain visible show the following names in the Data column:

Date/Time/Price - shows the date, close time of bar/candle, and price (horizontal cross hair 240 price
value) under the current position of the cursor; the format is month/day/year time price (I.E.: 06/03/07
11:45 1.1234); this data changes as the cursor is moved around within the chart window

Open - shows the open price of the bar/candle under the current position of the cursor in the Value
column

High - shows the high price of the bar/candle under the current position of the cursor in the Value
column

Low - shows the low price of the bar/candle under the current position of the cursor in the Value column

Close - shows the close price of the bar/candle under the current position of the cursor in the Value
column

Heikin-Ashi Candlestick Charts

If the active chart is a Heikin-Ashi Candlestick chart, the rows that always remain visible show the
following names in the Data column:

Date/Time/Price - shows the date, close time of Heikin-Ashi candle, and price (horizontal cross hair 240
price value) under the current position of the cursor; the format is month/day/year time price (I.E.:
06/03/07 11:45 1.1234); this data changes as the cursor is moved around within the chart window

haOpen - shows the Heikin-Ashi open price of the candle under the current position of the cursor in the
Value column

haHigh - shows the Heikin-Ashi high price of the candle under the current position of the cursor in the
Value column

haLow - shows the Heikin-Ashi low price of the candle under the current position of the cursor in the
Value column

haClose - shows the Heikin-Ashi close price of the candle under the current position of the cursor in the
Value column

Point and Figure Charts

If the active chart is a Point and Figure chart, the rows that always remain visible show the following

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

156 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

information in the Data column:

The Data column shows X or O depending on if the cursor is positioned over a column of X’s or O’s in
the active chart. A row will be shown in this window for each X or O in the column. In the Value column,
each X or O row will contain the Date/Time/Price of that X or O. The Value column data will have the
format of Date Time Price (I.E. 08/13/07 11:00 1.3700).

Renko Charts

If the active chart is a Renko chart, the rows that always remain visible show the following names in the
Data column:

Date/Time/Price - shows the date, close time of Renko box, and price (horizontal cross hair 240 price
value) under the current position of the cursor; the format is month/day/year time price (I.E.: 06/03/07
11:45 1.1234); this data changes as the cursor is moved around within the chart window

Box Number - shows the number of the Renko box (numbered from #1 - current number beginning with
left-most box shown in chart window) under the current position of the cursor in the Value column

Box High - shows the high price of the Renko box under the current position of the cursor in the Value
column

Box Low - shows the low price of the Renko box under the current position of the cursor in the Value
column

Appearance Customizations

Each column in the Data Inspection window can be automatically (or manually) resized at your
discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any row and click the right mouse
button. You may select Size Columns to Fit or Auto-Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual menu
157 depending on the action you want to perform.

To manually resize a column, you must ensure the Auto-Size All Columns to Fit command is disabled
in the contextual menu, then click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned
over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will change and

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 157

appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to the left or
right to resize the column.

You can customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties 158 .

Contextual Menu

The Data Inspection window's contextual menu 157 provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 158 . To activate the contextual menu 157 , click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any data row.

3.8.1.1 Contextual Menu

The Data Inspection window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality and access to
the window's properties 158 . To activate the contextual menu, click the right mouse button while the
cursor is positioned over any data row.

The Data Inspection window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Size Columns to Fit

This command sizes the window's columns to accommodate their data. This command is only

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 158 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

enabled if the Auto-Size Columns to Fit command is disabled.

Auto-Size Columns to Fit

This command, while enabled, continuously auto-sizes the window's columns to accommodate their
data.

Properties

This command opens the Data Inspection properties 158 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Data Inspection window back to
their default values.

3.8.1.2 Properties

The Data Inspection properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

Appearance Section

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 159

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Use Colors for Output Variables

This option is a selection menu with two choices: Yes and No. While Yes is chosen, output
variables' names and data values are shown in the Data Inspection window using their own colors.
While No is chosen, output variables' names and data values are shown using the color black.

Data Value Decimal Precision

This option defines the number of decimal places of precision shown in the output variables' data
values. This option applies to the Data Inspection window, indicator labels, and trading system
labels.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

160 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Colors Section

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 161

3.9 Fundamental Analysis

3.9.1 Market Commentaries Window

The Market Commentaries window provides you with actionable analysis of news, events and technical
levels that impact currency prices - as it happens. Updates are published up to 20 times an hour by
Forex.com's senior traders and experienced research team.

You can read the news messages by clicking on the news headlines. The news message will be shown
in the bottom frame of the window or in a separate window if you have the Show Message in Separate
Window command enabled in the window's contextual menu 163 .

Explanations of Commentaries Data

Date/Time

The date and time that the commentary message was sent out is its Date/Time.

Title

The Title is a brief description of the new message's content.

Appearance Customizations

Each column of data in the Market Commentaries window can be automatically (or manually) resized,
moved, or hidden at your discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the
right mouse button. You may select Size Column to Fit or Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual
menu depending on the action you want to perform.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

162 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

To manually resize a column, you must click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will
change and appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to
the left or right to resize the column.

It is also possible to change the location of each column respective to the other visible columns. Moving
a column can be accomplished by dragging and dropping the desired column into its new location after
clicking and holding down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over that column's
caption (Date, Title).

To hide one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the right mouse
button. Select any column from the contextual menu that you want to hide. Visible columns have a
check mark next to their caption name while hidden columns do not. To show a hidden column you
simply need to reselect it from the column caption's contextual menu.

You can further customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties
164 .

Contextual Menu

The Market Commentaries window's contextual menu 163 provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 164 . To activate the contextual menu 163 , click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any news row.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 163

3.9.1.1 Conextual Menu

The Market Commentaries window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 164 . To activate the contextual menu, click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any news row.

The Market Commentaries window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Properties

This command opens the Market Commentaries properties 164 window.

Restore Default

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 164 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Market Commentaries window
back to their default values.

Show Message in Separate Window

This command, while enabled, hides the bottom frame of the Market Commentaries window and
opens each new message you select in its own separate window.

3.9.1.2 Properties

The Market Commentaries properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

Appearance Section

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 165

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Colors Section

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 166 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

New Incoming Headline

This option defines the background color of the most recent news headline's row. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

3.9.2 Dow Jones News Window

The Dow Jones News window provides you with up-to-the-minute, real-time news from the Dow Jones
news service.

You can read the news messages by clicking on the news headlines. The news message will be shown
in the bottom frame of the window or in a separate window if you have the Show Message in Separate
Window command enabled in the window's contextual menu 168 .

Explanations of Dow Jones News Data

Date/Time

The date and time that the news message was sent out is its Date/Time.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 167

Title

The Title is a brief description of the new message's content.

Appearance Customizations

Each column of data in the Dow Jones News window can be automatically (or manually) resized,
moved, or hidden at your discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the
right mouse button. You may select Size Column to Fit or Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual
menu depending on the action you want to perform.

To manually resize a column, you must click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will
change and appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to
the left or right to resize the column.

It is also possible to change the location of each column respective to the other visible columns. Moving
a column can be accomplished by dragging and dropping the desired column into its new location after
clicking and holding down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over that column's
caption (Date, Title).

To hide one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the right mouse
button. Select any column from the contextual menu that you want to hide. Visible columns have a
check mark next to their caption name while hidden columns do not. To show a hidden column you
simply need to reselect it from the column caption's contextual menu.

You can further customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 168 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

169 .

Contextual Menu

The Dow Jones News window's contextual menu 168 provides you with additional functionality and
access to the window's properties 169 . To activate the contextual menu 168 , click the right mouse button
while the cursor is positioned over any news row.

3.9.2.1 Contextual Menu

The Dow Jones News window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality and access
to the window's properties 169 . To activate the contextual menu, click the right mouse button while the
cursor is positioned over any news row.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 169

The Dow Jones News window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Properties

This command opens the Dow Jones News properties 169 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Dow Jones News window back
to their default values.

Show Message in Separate Window

This command, while enabled, hides the bottom frame of the Dow Jones News window and opens
each new message you select in its own separate window.

3.9.2.2 Properties

The Dow Jones News properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

Appearance Section

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

170 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font
attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Colors Section

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 171

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the
[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

New Incoming Headline

This option defines the background color of the most recent news headline's row. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 172 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.9.3 Economic Calendar Window

The Economic Calendar window provides you with a recap of the FX market's weekly highlights and
economic indicator (news) data along with a chart showing round orbs above the candles corresponding
to the dates/times of the respective economic events.

By Clicking the Theme of the Week link, you can read the week's market highlights.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 173

By clicking the Previous Week 's Recap, Next Week 's Outlook , or Select Archive Week links, you can
read the archived market highlights, economic data, and expert commentary for that chosen week.

Clicking the + symbol in front of each economic indicator displays additional information about it.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 174 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.10 Alerts
3.10.1 Alerts Activity Window

The Alerts Activity window shows trading system alert messages if the "In Alerts Activity Window"
selection is chosen in the Show Trading Systems Alerts command in the Options 68 window.

Explanations of Alerts Activity Data

Date/Time

Date/Time is the date and time that the trading system alert was generated. Date/Time is shown
in the following format: Month/Day/Year Hour:Minute:Seconds AM/PM.

Type

Type defines the type of message (Alert) that was generated.

Message

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 175

The Message is the details pertaining to the trading system condition(s) that generated the alert
message. The most recent incoming message is shown using a bold font attribute making it easy to
identify.

Appearance Customizations

Each column of data in the Alerts Activity window can be automatically (or manually) resized, moved, or
hidden at your discretion.

To automatically resize one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the
right mouse button. You may select Size Column to Fit or Size All Columns to Fit from the contextual
menu depending on the action you want to perform.

To manually resize a column, you must click and hold down the left mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the column divider directly to the right of the column you want to resize. The cursor will
change and appear similar to this: <-|->. While the left mouse button is held down, move the mouse to
the left or right to resize the column.

It is also possible to change the location of each column respective to the other visible columns. Moving
a column can be accomplished by dragging and dropping the desired column into its new location after
clicking and holding down the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over that column's
caption (Date/Time, Type, Message).

To hide one or more columns, position the cursor over any column caption and click the right mouse
button. Select any column from the contextual menu that you want to hide. Visible columns have a
check mark next to their caption name while hidden columns do not. To show a hidden column you
simply need to reselect it from the column caption's contextual menu.

You can customize the appearance of the window and its data by using the window's properties 177 .

Contextual Menu

The Alerts Activity window's contextual menu 176 provides you with additional functionality and access
to the window's properties 177 . To activate the contextual menu 176 , click the right mouse button while
the cursor is positioned over any message's row.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 176 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.10.1.1 Contextual Menu

The Alerts Activity window's contextual menu provides you with additional functionality. To activate the
contextual menu, click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned over any message's row.

The Alerts Activity window's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Clear Log

This command erases the contents of the window.

Save Log

This command saves the contents of the window to a text file.

Select All

This command selects all of the messages shown in the window. This command it typically used in
conjunction with the Copy command.

Copy

This command saves the selected message(s) to the computer's clipboard so that you can paste
them into a text file and save them.

Properties

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 177

This command opens the Alerts Activity properties 177 window.

Restore Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used in the Alerts Activity window back to
their default values.

3.10.1.2 Properties

The Alerts Activity properties window is divided into two sections: Appearance and Colors.

Appearance Section

The Appearance section contains the following options:

Caption Font

This option defines the font attributes used for window's column captions. You can change the font

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

178 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

attributes by using the [...] button.

Data Font

This option defines the font attributes used for the the data shown in the window. You can change
the font attributes by using the [...] button.

Auto-Scroll Messages

This option is a selection menu with two choices: Yes and No. While Yes is chosen, the Alerts
Activity 174 window "jumps" to the newest message received. If you select one or more messages,
this option is temporarily disabled while the message(s) remain selected; this allows you easily view
and/or search through the messages without having to completely disable this option by choosing
No.

Colors Section

The Colors section contains the following options:

Selection Highlight

This option defines the color the selected row in the window. You can change the color by using the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 179

[...] button.

Background (Odd Row)

This option defines the background color of all odd-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

Background (Even Row)

This option defines the background color of all even-numbered rows in the window. You can change
the color by using the [...] button.

3.10.2 Price Alert Window

A price alert warns you that an instrument's current market price is interacting with the alert level you
defined. A price alert is shown in an instrument's chart window(s) as a small label attached to a
horizontal line at the price alert level. When a price alert is activated, you are notified by a small dialog
window attached to VT Trader's Notification Icon 58 , by a message shown in the Trading Activity 174
window, and by a sound file being played (if you define a sound file).

You can create new price alerts or edit existing price alerts using the Price Alert window.

The Price Alerts window contains the following options:

Instrument

This is the instrument associated with the price alert.

Price

This is the Instrument's price (bid or ask ) that the price alert is activated at.

Condition

This defines the condition used to activate the price alert as the instrument interacts with the price

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 180 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

alert level. The price alert can be activated using seven different conditions: Price Crosses Level,
Price Crosses Above Level, Price Crosses Below Level, Price > Level, Price >= Level, Price < Level
, and Price <= Level. The cross conditions activate the price alert only for the price ticks that
actually cross above and/or below the alert level. The >, >=, < and <= conditions continuously
activates the price alert for every price tick that satisfies the respective condition.

Sound

This is the sound file that is played when the price alert is activated. You can choose any sound
from the selection menu or you can click the [...] button to choose any custom sound file (.mp3, .
wav, or .wma file formats are acceptable).

Comment

This lets you include additional remarks (comments) in the price alert's message notification.

3.10.3 Active Price Alerts Summary Window

A price alert warns you that an instrument's current market price is interacting with the alert level you
defined. A price alert is shown in an instrument's chart window(s) as a small label attached to a
horizontal line at the price alert level. When a price alert is activated, you are notified by a small dialog
window attached to VT Trader's Notification Icon 58 , by a message shown in the Alerts Activity 174
window, and by a sound file being played (if you define a sound file).

You can quickly review a summary of all of the active pending price alerts, create new price alerts, and
edit (or delete) existing price alerts using the Active Price Alerts Summary window.

Explanations of Active Price Alerts Summary Data

Instrument

This is the instrument associated with the price alert.

Price and Bid/Ask

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 181

This is the Instrument's price (bid or ask ) that the price alert is activated at.

Comment

These are the additional remarks (comments) shown in the price alert's message notification.

Date/Time

This is the date and time that the price alert was created.

3.11 Active Trading Systems Summary

You can quickly review a list of all trading systems currently active (attached to chart windows) across
all of your accounts using the Active Trading Systems Summary window. By selecting an active
trading system and using the command buttons provided, you can adjust its properties 182 , edit 182 it
using a Trading Systems Editor 207 window, delete 182 it from the chart it is attached to, start/stop 182
its Auto-Trade mode, and view its events 182 and enabled parameters 182 .

The Active Trading Systems Summary window includes 5 columns for displaying information related
to the trading systems.

The Status column shows the operational mode of the trading system. Trading systems operating in
Auto-Trade mode show a [ ] icon while systems operating in Recommendation Only mode show a [II]
icon. The Instrument, Interval, and Bid/Ask columns show the instrument, chart interval, and chart
type that the trading system is attached to. The Name column shows the trading system's name and
input properties.

The Active Trading Systems Summary window also includes several command buttons that operate in
conjunction with the selected trading system.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 182 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The [Properties] button opens an additional Trading Systems Properties window that allows you to
adjust the selected trading system's input variables' parameters and auto-trading parameters. This
command is not available if the trading system is operating in Auto-Trade mode.

The [Edit] button opens a Trading Systems Editor 207 window for the selected trading system. This
command is not available if the trading system is is operating in Auto-Trade mode.

The [Delete] button deletes the selected trading system from the chart it is attached to. If the trading
system is operating in Auto-Trade mode when when it is deleted, you will be responsible for managing
any positions that were opened previously (and not closed) by the now deleted trading system.

The [Start/Stop] button enables (starts) or disables (stops) Auto-Trade mode for the selected trading
system. If the selected trading system is operating in Auto-Trade mode (the button label will be [Stop]),
clicking this button will stop the trading system and switch it into Recommendation Only mode.
However, if the trading system is operating in Recommendation Only mode (the button label will be [
Start]), clicking this button will enable (start) Auto-Trade mode.

The [View Events] button opens an additional Trading System Events window that shows the selected
trading system's events that have taken place along with their corresponding dates/times.

The [Params Enabled] button opens an additional Trading Systems Parameters window containing a
list of the selected trading system's output variables and their respective function(s). Using the The
Trading Systems Parameters window, you can temporarily disable an output variable's function by
removing the check mark from its corresponding function column(s).

The [Close] button closes the Active Trading Systems Summary window.

3.12 Indicators Builder

The Indicators Builder is a unique component in VT Trader. Using the Indicators Builder, you can
create new, custom indicators and: edit, clone, delete, import, and export existing indicators. Icons
directly to the left of each indicator's name help you differentiate standard VT Trader indicators from your
custom indicators. Standard indicators included with VT Trader are identified with a gear (or sprock et)
icon. Custom indicators are identified by a gear+person icon.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 183

The Indicators Builder window contains the following commands:

New

This command begins the creation of a new custom indicator by opening an Indicator Editor 184
window.

Edit

This command allows you to make changes to the selected indicator by opening it in an Indicator
Editor 184 window.

Clone

This command creates a copy of the selected indicator and adds it to the indicator list with (2)
appended to the indicator name (to distinguish the copy from the original indicator).

Delete

This command moves the selected indicator to the Windows® Recycle Bin for deletion. If this
command is disabled, you must first edit the indicator by removing the check mark next to the
Protect from deletion option in the General Tab 192 of its Indicator Editor 184 window.

Export

This command exports the selected indicator so that it can be saved in a designated directory on
your computer. Indicators are saved with a .vtscr file extension. An exported indicator can be
imported into VT Trader using the Import command.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 184 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Import

This command imports an indicator file that was previously exported from VT Trader with a .vtsrc file
extension. Importing an indicator adds it to the indicator list using the text in the Name field in the
General Tab 192 of its Indicator Editor 184 window. If an indicator with the same Name already exists
in VT Trader a (2) will be appended to the imported indicator's name to help distinguish it from the
existing indicator.

3.12.1 Indicator Editor Window

You can create new, custom technical indicators or edit existing technical indicators by using Indicator
Editor window. The window caption shows the name of the indicator being created or edited. For ease of
use, the Indicator Editor window consists of the Indicator Editor Toolbar 184 and several separate tabs
containing the various properties of the indicator.

To learn more about each of the Indicator Editor tabs, please click on its name below:

General Tab 192

Input Variable(s) Tab 195
Output Variable(s) Tab 200
Horizontal Line(s) Tab 202
Formula Tab 204

3.12.1.1 Indicator Editor Toolbar

The Indicator Editor Toolbar provides you quick, easy access to a variety of very useful editing-related
commands.

Explanations of Indicator Editor Toolbar Commands

Copy

This command copies the selected text to the PC's clipboard for later pasting.

Paste

This command inserts the contents of PC's clipboard into the active text box.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 185

Cut

This command cuts (removes) the selected text from the active text box and copies it to the PC's
clipboard for later pasting.

Undo

This command reverses the previous action such as deleting a line of code in the Formula tab.

Redo

This command reverses the previous Undo action.

Search

This command finds the partial word or whole word being searched for. For example, searching for H
would would find all occurrences of H and High in the formula code. You can also specify the search
direction (up or down). The search begins at the current cursor location and searches in the
specified direction. Each time an occurrence of the search word is found the window scrolls to the
text's location in the formula code and highlights it. Clicking the [Find Next] button continues
searching for more occurrences of the search word. When the search reaches the ending or
beginning of the formula code an additional dialog window is shown that asks if you want to continue
searching from that location.

Replace

This command extends the Search command's functionality by adding Replace and Replace All
commands. The Replace command find the partial word or whole word being searched for and
replaces it with the specified text. For example, searching for High in the formula code and replacing
the next occurrence with Low is accomplished by clicking the [Replace] button; replacing all
occurrences of High with Low using only one action is accomplished by clicking the [Replace All]
button. The search and replace begins at the current cursor location and searches in the specified
direction. Each time an occurrence of the search word is found the window scrolls to the text's
location in the formula code, highlights it, and replaces it. Clicking the [Find Next] button continues
searching for more occurrences of the search word. When the search reaches the ending or
beginning of the formula code an additional dialog window is shown that asks if you want to continue
searching from that location.

Editor Options

This command opens the Editor Options 186 window.

Save

This command saves any changes made to the indicator.

Close

This command closes and exits the Indicator Editor 184 window. If the indicator has unsaved
changes, you will be prompted to save the indicator before being able to close the window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 186 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.12.1.1.1 Editor Options

The Editor Options window defines the options and properties used by the Indicator Editor 184 . This
window is divided into 3 tabs: General, Display, and Color.

In the General tab, you can enable or disable the Code Parameters and/or Code Completion features
used while typing text in the Indicator Editor's 184 Formula tab. Please click on these links to learn more
about the Code Parameters 187 and Code Completion 191 features.

In the Display tab, you can define the font type used while typing text in the Indicator Editor's 184
Formula tab.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 187

In the Color tab, you can define the font colors and attributes used while typing text in the Indicator
Editor's 184 Formula tab. Each type of text item can its own Back ground Color, Foreground Color, and
Font Attributes assigned to it.

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Editor Options
window without saving your changes.

3.12.1.1.1.1 Code Parameters

The Code Parameters feature shows a "hint" as you are typing the name of a function 329 . The Code
Parameters hint dialog shows which, if any, input types that function 329 requires and the order in which
those parameters should provided to the function 329 .

Using the mov() (moving average) function as an example, once you have typed "mov(" the Code
Parameters hint dialog shows [DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD].

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

188 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

As you type each parameter, the next required parameter is indicated in Bold.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 189

Continuing...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

190 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The hint dialog remains visible until the last required parameter has been typed then disappears allowing
you to continue writing your formula.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 191

3.12.1.1.1.2 Code Completion

The Code Completion feature is activated when you press the CTRL + SPACEBAR keys on your
keyboard. It shows a list of available functions 329 (or data arrays) in a selection menu for you to choose
from while you are typing your formula. The Code Completion feature is best used in conjunction with
the Code Parameters feature.

For example, let's assume that you want to use the mov() (moving average) function, but you cannot
remember the function's full name. Once you have typed "m" you press the CTRL + SPACEBAR keys
to activate the Code Complete feature for assistance. The Code Complete feature shows a list of every
function that starts with the letter "m".

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 192 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once you have made your selection, it is inserted into the formula. The Code Completion dialog then
disappears allowing you to continue writing your formula.

3.12.1.2 General Tab

The Indicator Editor's 184 General tab defines the indicator's basic attributes.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 193

Explanations of General Tab's Items

Name

The Name identifies the indicator throughout VT Trader. The indicator's Name is used in the
Indicators Builder 182 , Indicator Editor 184 window, Indicators Quick List 235 , and in the Add Indicator
window shown when attaching an indicator to a chart window.

Function Name Alias

The Function Name Alias makes it possible to refer to the indicator and its formula from within
other indicators and trading systems. For example, in the formula script of your custom indicator
you could reference the standard RSI indicator using its Function Name Alias of vt_RSI. It's
important when referencing an existing indicator that you provide the function any necessary input
arguments it requires; these arguments are the input variables from the referenced indicator's Input
Variable(s) tab 195 . The vt_RSI() function requires two such arguments: pr (DATA ARRAY type) and
tpr (INTEGER type). The resulting function for a 14-period RSI of close prices when referenced in
your custom indicator's formula looks like this:

vt_RSI(close,14)

The output returned by an indicator's Function Name Alias differs depending on how many output

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

194 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

variables the referenced indicator's Output Variable(s) tab 200 includes. In our example, the standard
RSI indicator only includes one output variable called RSIndex (its Var Name). If the indicator being
referenced by its Function Name Alias has more than one output variable, you need to specify
which output variable you want to reference by including a . (period) after the Function Name Alias
followed by the output variable's Var Name. For example, the standard MACD indicator has three
output variables: FL, SL, and OsMA. To reference the standard MACD's Fast Line (FL) you must
use its Function Name Alias of vt_MACD along with all of its function parameters followed by .FL.
It looks like this:

vt_MACD(C,12,26,E,9,E).FL

Please note: Any function's arguments can be made adjustable by creating the necessary input
variables (of the correct type(s)) in your custom indicator's Input Variable(s) tab 195 and replacing
their non-adjustable argument values in the function with the newly created input variable(s)'s Name
(s).

The Function Name Alias is not case-sensitive; for example, using vt_RSI is the same as using
vt_rsi. It may include only letters and numbers. Use of the underscore ( _ ) character is also
allowed. It may not include any spaces or begin with a number. The Function Name Alias is used
as the actual file name for the indicator when it is saved. If an existing indicator with the same
Function Name Alias is found on the your PC VT Trader shows a warning dialog notifying you of
the conflict when you attempt to save the indicator. You must resolve the naming conflict before you
will be able to save the indicator.

Label Mask

The Label Mask multiple-line text box can be used to help identify the indicator while it is attached
to a chart window. It is possible to include the name of the indicator, the values of input variables,
the current value of output variables, and/or any other desired text in the indicator's label. The Label
Mask can show multiple lines of text; you can use the Enter (or Return) key to separate the
information into multiple lines of text.

To show the value of an input variable in the indicator's label it is necessary to type the input
variable's name (as defined by the Name in the Input Variable(s) tab 195 ) between % characters. To
include the value of an output variable in the indicator's label it is necessary to type the output
variable's name (as defined by the Var Name in the Output Variable(s) tab 200 ) between %
characters.

Placement

The Placement selection menu defines the default placement of the indicator while it is attached to
a chart window. If Price Frame is chosen, the indicator will be shown in the main price area frame. If
New Frame is chosen, the indicator will be shown in a separate, additional frame. If Inquiry for
placement is chosen, you will be prompted to choose the location that the indicator will be shown in
when you attempt to attach it to the chart window. You can choose a separate, additional frame or
an already existing frame. The dialog window's frame list defines all frames that are already shown in
the chart window (the existing frames are numbered Frame 1, Frame 2, Frame 3, etc. from the top-
down as shown in the chart window; the main price frame is labeled as Price Frame).

If Inquiry for placement is defined for a number of indicators those indicators can be shown in the
same frame. This might be useful if/when you want to analyze the same indicator but with different
values of input variables. Additionally, it is possible to show several different indicators in the same
frame, however, it's very important that take into account how each indicator scales. It does not

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 195

make sense to place two or more indicators into one frame if the units of measurement of at least
one of them is incomparable to those of other indicators. For example, the RSI and Slow Stochastic
both scale from 0 -100 so it would be acceptable to show those indicators within the same frame if
you chose to do so. However, displaying the RSI and the MACD in the same frame would be a bad
idea since their scales are very different.

Data Inspection Alias

The Data Inspection Alias identifies the indicator (and its output variable(s)) in the Data Inspection
154 window while the indicator is attached to the chart window.

Protect from Deletion

The Protect from deletion option prevents accidental deletion of the indicator. This option is
enabled by default when a new indicator is created. It is not possible to delete the indicator from the
Indicators Builder 182 while the Protect from deletion option is enabled (the [Delete] button is
disabled while the indicator is selected). Disabling the Protect from deletion option by removing
the check mark next to it allows the indicator to be deleted.

Notes

The Notes provides additional information relating to the indicator. This may be any kind of
information considered useful. Typically, a description of the indicator as well as suggested methods
of use and references to the appropriate documentation will be provided in the Notes.

Password

You may supply a Password (a phrase or combination of letters and numbers) to keep the
indicator's formula and main properties confidential thus protecting it from accidental or purposeful
editing. The Password must confirmed in the Confirm Password text box before it can be applied.
If a Password has been supplied when someone tries to edit the indicator he/she will be prompted
to provide it. If the Password is not typed correctly, it will not be possible to edit the indicator.

Confirm Password

The Password must be successfully retyped in the Confirm Password text box before it can be
applied.

3.12.1.3 Input Variable(s) Tab

To best utilize the Indicator Editor's 184 Input Variable(s) tab, it's necessary to understand what input
variables are and how they are used in VT Trader's scripting language.

What are input variables and how do I use them?

Simply defined, an input variable is a value that you provide to the formula script. VT Trader's scripting
language uses the input variables' values while evaluating expressions and/or performing calculations.
Input variables (and their Default values) are included in the Indicator Properties window. This properties
window is used to modify an indicator's properties while it is attached to a chart window.

Input variables are often used to allow you to change the values of a function's arguments, or perform

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

196 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

actions such as selecting, enabling, or disabling (via enumeration lists) specific parameters or
conditions used by an indicator without the need to edit its formula script. For example, the Relative
Strength Index (RSI) 656 indicator included with VT Trader uses two input variables: Price (Name = pr)
and Periods (Name = tpr). These two input variables allow you to specify the predefined price data array
and number of periods used to calculate the RSI. You provide these values to the formula script from the
RSI's properties window when you add the RSI to the chart window (or change the RSI's properties while
it is attached to the chart window).

What is the Input Variable(s) Tab?

The Indicator Editor's 184 Input Variable(s) tab defines any input variables used in the formula script.
You can create as many new input variables as necessary.

Clicking the [New] button creates a new input variable. Clicking the [Delete] button deletes the selected
input variable. Clicking the [Move Up] or [Move Down] button moves the input variable's respective
position up or down in the tab's variable list as as well as up or down in the indicator's or trading
system's properties window.

Explanations of Input Variable(s) Tab's Items

Read Only

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 197

While enabled, the input variable's value in the indicator's properties window will be a read-only value
that cannot be changed. Enabling this option is useful if you want to see the input variable's Display
Name and Default value in the properties window, but you do not need to be able to change its
value (or you do not want others to be able to change it).

Name

The Name makes it possible to refer to the input variable and its value from within the formula script.
The Name is not case-sensitive; for example, using Periods is the same as using periods. It may
include only letters and numbers. Use of the underscore ( _ ) character is also allowed. It may not
include any spaces or begin with a number. An input variable's Name must not be the same name
as any other existing input variable, existing function 334 or reserved function 400 , constant 333 , or
predefined data array 334 . Additionally, no input variables 195 should have the same Name as any
output variables' 200 Var Name(s) within the same formula script.

Display Name

The Display Name is the text shown in the indicator's properties window to identify the input
variable. This text should be descriptive enough that it is easy to understand what the input variable
is and what Type of value you need to provide when you are attaching the indicator to the chart
window (or changing its properties while it is attached to the chart window).

Type

An input variable must be defined as a certain Type of variable. The Type value defines what type of
data can be used as the input variable's Default value. The variable's Type selection is also used by
the formula script; Type defines what type of data the formula script should expect to process when
the input variable's value is passed into the scripting engine. An input variable can provide the
formula script with any any of the following types of data: integer, integer (with bounds), float, float
(with bounds), price, MA type, Enumeration, and Bars Forward. Please click here 198 to learn more
about each input variable Type.

Default

The Default value is the initial value of the input variable shown in the indicator's properties window;
however, this value can be changed as needed (assuming the input variable's Read-Only option is
disabled). The Default value is provided to the formula script along with the input variable's Type.
The formula script uses this value while evaluating any expressions and/or performing any
calculations that require the input variable's value.

Min Bounds

The Min Bounds value defines the lowest value that can be used for the Default value. Min Bounds
is only available if the integer (with bounds), float (with bounds), or Bars Forward variable Type is
selected.

Max Bounds

The Max Bounds value defines the highest value that can be used for the Default value. Max
Bounds is only available if the integer (with bounds), float (with bounds), or Bars Forward variable
Type is selected.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 198 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.12.1.3.1 Type

An input variable must be defined as a certain Type 195 of variable. The Type 195 of the variable defines
what type of data can be used as the input variable's Default 195 value. The variable's Type 195 selection
is also used by the formula script; Type 195 defines what type of data the formula script should expect to
process when the input variable's value is passed into the scripting engine.

An input variable can provide the formula script with any any of the following types of data: integer,
integer (with bounds), float, float (with bounds), price, MA type, Enumeration, and Bars Forward. Please
continue reading to learn more about each input variable Type 195 .

Explanations of the Types of Input Variables

Integer

An input variable of the Integer Type 195 can be any positive or negative whole number (..., -2, -1, 0,
1, 2, ..., and so on...).

Integer (with bounds)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 199

An input variable of the Integer (with bounds) Type 195 can be any positive or negative whole
number between the defined Min. Bounds 195 and Max. Bounds 195 values.

Float

An input variable of the Float Type 195 can be any positive or negative number rounded out to 5
decimal places.

Float (with bounds)

An input variable of the Float (with bounds) Type 195 can be any positive or negative number
rounded out to 5 decimal places between the defined Min. Bounds 195 and Max. Bounds 195 values.

Price

An input variable of the Price Type 195 can be any of the predefined data arrays 334 : close, open,
low, high, Median Price, Typical Price, Indicator (the value of an Indicator already attached to the
chart window 121 ), Volume, haOpen, haClose, haLow, or haHigh; "ha" values are price values
associated with the Heik in-Ashi Candlestick Chart Type).

MA Type

An input variable of the MA Type Type 195 can be any of the available moving average constants 333 :
Simple, Weighted, Exponential, Sine Weighted, Triangular, End Point, or Volume-Adjusted. The MA
Type selection is often used in conjunction with the built-in moving average function mov() 371 or
when it is desirable to apply a type of data smoothing (averaging) to the data array being analyzed.

Enumeration

An input variable of the Enumeration Type 195 can be any of the predefined values added to a
enumeration (selection) list. Before an enumeration list can be used, it must be populated. The
enumeration list can be populated (or edited) by clicking the [ ... ] button shown directly to the right
of the Default 195 value's text box while the Enumeration Type 195 is selected. An enumeration list
item may include only letters and numbers. Use of the underscore ( _ ) character is also allowed. It
may not include any spaces or begin with a number.

Important Note: Each item in the selection menu is assigned an internal list position number that
corresponds to their location in the list; the first item (top) in the enumeration list is assigned the
position number 0, the second item is assigned 1, the third item is assigned 2, etc. You must use
the list item's number (not its actual name shown in the enumeration list) in the formula script to
when constructing your expressions and conditions.

For example, let's assume that you have an indicator that includes a moving average and a moving
average of the moving average. Let's also assume that you would like to create some logic that
allows you to show (or hide) the moving average of the moving average. You can accomplish this by
using an Enumeration Type 195 input variable 195 called MaDisplay (its Name 195 ; "Display MA of
MA?" will be its Display Name 195 ) that includes two items in the list (from top-down): No, Yes. The
VT Trader formula script written in the Formula tab 204 could potentially look like this:

{5-period simple moving average of close prices}

MA := mov(C,5,S);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 200 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

{If MaDisplay is "Yes" (which has an assigned list position number of

1),
calculate and show a 5-period MA of the 5-period MA of close prices}

MA_of_MA := if(DisplayMA=1, mov(MA,5,S), NULL);

In this example, MA and MA_of_MA would be the output variables 200 defined in the Output Variable
(s) tab 200 .

Another good example demonstrating the use of an enumeration list is found in VT Trader's Rate of
Change (ROC) 648 indicator. Its Calculation Method input variable 195 uses an enumeration list
allowing you to specify if the ROC 648 is calculated in Points or Percent.

Bars Forward

An input variable of the Bars Forward Type 195 can be can be any positive or negative whole
number between the defined Min. Bounds 195 and Max. Bounds 195 values. The Bars Forward Type
195 is used in conjunction with the scripting language's ref() 377 function to visually shift the resulting
calculation plot forward ahead of the current market or backwards behind the current market price by
the number of bars specified. Important Note: The Bars Forward Type 195 should only be used for
visual reference. It is not possible for a trading system to generate alerts in real-time (or request
orders automatically if it's running in Auto-Trade mode) for any condition that uses a variable or value
that has been shifted behind the current market price (i.e. a negative Bars Forward value).

A good example demonstrating the use of the Bars Forward Type 195 is found in VT Trader's
Moving Average 585 indicator. Its Horizontal Shift input variable 195 uses the Bars Forward Type 195
allowing you to visually shift the moving average's plot forward ahead of the current market price.
Another good example demonstrating the use of the Bars Forward Type 195 is the Chaos Alligator
Indicator 453 .

3.12.1.4 Output Variable(s) Tab

To best utilize the Output Variable(s) tab, it's necessary to first understand what output variables are
and how they are used in VT Trader's scripting language 329 .

What are output variables and how do I use them?

Simply defined, an output variable is the resulting calculated value of a statement in the formula script.
Output variables are often, but not always, the final calculation of an indicator.

What is the Output Variable(s) Tab?

Most indicators and trading systems include multiple output variables, some variables' values you might
need to be able to visually examine and others you might not. You can use the Indicator Editor's 184
Output Variable(s) tab to define only those output variables used in the formula script that you need to
see the resulting values of in a chart window and in the Data Inspection 154 window. You can define as
many output variables in the Output Variable(s) tab as necessary.

For example, the Relative Strength Index (RSI) 656 indicator included with VT Trader defines only one

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 201

specific output variable: (RSI) (Var Name = RSIndex). This output variable makes it possible to visually
inspect its resulting calculations in a chart window (according to the indicator's Placement 192 selection)
and in the Data Inspection 154 window (according to its Name and shown next to the indicator's Data
Inspection Alias 192 ).

Clicking the [New] button creates a new output variable. Clicking the [Delete] button deletes the
selected output variable. Clicking the [Move Up] or [Move Down] button moves the output variable's
respective position up or down in the tab's variable list as as well as up or down in the Data Inspection
154 window (relative to the indicator's other output variables shown in that window).

Explanations of Input Variable(s) Tab's Items

Var Name

The Var Name makes it possible to refer to the output variable and its calculated value within the
formula script. The Var Name is not case-sensitive; for example, using Output_Variable is the
same as using output_variable. It may include only letters and numbers. Use of the underscore ( _ )
character is also allowed. It may not include any spaces or begin with a number. An output
variable's Var Name must not be the same name as any other existing output variable, existing
function 334 or reserved function 400 , constant 333 , or predefined data array 334 . Additionally, no
output variables 200 should have the same Var Name(s) as any input variables' 195 Name(s) within
the same formula script.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 202 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name

The Name is the text shown in the Data Inspection 154 window to identify the output variable; it is
shown next to the indicator's Data Inspection Alias 192 . This text should be descriptive enough that it
is easy to understand what information the output variable is providing.

Line Color

The Line Color defines the output variable's default line color while the indicator is attached to the
chart window. It is also the color used to show the output variable's Name and calculated value in
the Data Inspection 154 window (if the "Use Colors for Output Variables" option is enabled for that
window). The Line Color can be changed using the indicator's properties window when you add the
indicator to the chart window (or change the indicator's properties while it is attached to the chart
window).

Line Width

The Line Width defines the output variable's default line width while the indicator is attached to the
chart window. The Line Width may be changed using the indicator's properties window when you
add the indicator to the chart window (or change the indicator's properties while it is attached to the
chart window).

Line Style

The Line Style defines the output variable's default line style while the indicator is attached to the
chart window. This color may be changed using the indicator's properties window when you add the
indicator to the chart window (or change the indicator's properties while it is attached to the chart
window). The Line Style can be changed using the indicator's properties window when you add the
indicator to the chart window (or change the indicator's properties while it is attached to the chart
window).

Hide in Inspect

While enabled, the output variable's Name and corresponding value is not shown in the Data
Inspection 154 window. Enabling this option is useful if you want to see the output variable's value in
the chart window, but you do not need (or want) to see it in the Data Inspection 154 window.

3.12.1.5 Horizontal Line(s) Tab

The Indicator Editor's 184 Horizontal Line(s) tab defines any horizontal levels and their default properties
used in the indicator. You may create as many horizontal lines as is necessary. As a general rule, the
Horizontal Line(s) tab proves most useful for indicators designed to be shown in separate frames in the
chart window. However, horizontal lines can be included in and/or applied to any indicator. For example,
the Relative Strength Index (RSI) 656 indicator included with VT Trader defines 3 default horizontal lines:
+30.00000, +50.00000, and +70.00000.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 203

Clicking the [New] button creates a new horizontal line. Clicking the [Delete] button deletes the
selected horizontal line. Clicking the [Move Up] or [Move Down] button moves the selected horizontal
line's position up or down respectively in the list.

Explanations of Horizontal Line Tab's Items

Value

The Value defines the horizontal line's default placement while the indicator is attached to the chart
window. The Value may be positive or negative number rounded out to 5 decimal places.

Line Color

The Line Color defines the horizontal line's default color while the indicator is attached to the chart
window. The Line Color can be changed using the indicator's properties window when you add the
indicator to the chart window (or change the indicator's properties while it is attached to the chart
window).

Line Width

The Line Width defines the horizontal line's default width while the indicator is attached to the chart
window. The Line Width may be changed using the indicator's properties window when you add the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 204 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

indicator to the chart window (or change the indicator's properties while it is attached to the chart
window).

Line Style

The Line Style defines the horizontal line's default style while the indicator is attached to the chart
window. The Line Style can be changed using the indicator's properties window when you add the
indicator to the chart window (or change the indicator's properties while it is attached to the chart
window).

3.12.1.6 Formula Tab

The Indicator Editor's 184 Formula tab defines the VT Trader scripting language's 329 statements,
expressions, conditions, variables, etc. used in the calculation(s) of the resulting indicator. The Formula
Editor Toolbar 204 and Paste Function window 205 (continue reading below) are available to help aid
in the construction of your formula script. It is also recommended that you enable the Code Parameters
187 and Code Completion 191 features.

The Formula Editor Toolbar allows you to quickly comment 330 (or uncomment) text, insert any of the
scripting language's 329 punctuators 331 and operators 331 into the formula script, and open the Paste
Function window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 205

The Paste Function window includes a full categorical listing of all of the available functions for use in
your formula script. These lists include all of the scripting language's 329 functions 334 as well as the
Function Name Aliases 192 of the standard VT Trader indicators and any of your custom indicators. The
Paste Function window also specifies the selected function's format and its arguments (if any). Lastly,
a full description of each function is also provided. Selecting a function from this window pastes it into
your formula script in the Formula tab.

3.13 Trading Systems Builder

A trading system, simply defined, consists of a concise set of non-emotional, objective rules based on
measurable factors that are used to describe when to buy and sell a trade instrument. A trading system
can generate various types of alerts based on pre-defined conditions and request automated trading
actions *** to be taken on those conditions.

*** Please note: Certain rules and restrictions apply to any trading system started in Auto-Trade
mode. It is STRONGLY recommended that you take a few minutes to read through the Auto-
Trading FAQ by clicking here 1148 . Please do not attempt to use any trading system in VT Trader
in Auto-Trade mode until you are absolutely certain that you fully understand the rules and
restrictions that govern trading systems' auto-trading functionality.

The Trading Systems Builder is a unique and significant component in VT Trader. You can create new
trading systems and: edit, clone, delete, import, and export existing trading systems using it. Icons
directly to the left of each trading system's name help you differentiate the VT Trader sample trading
systems from your custom trading systems. VT Trader sample trading systems are identified with a
gear (or sprock et) icon. Custom trading systems are identified by a gear+person icon.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

206 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Trading Systems Builder window contains the following commands:

New

This command begins the creation of a new custom trading system by opening an Trading System
Editor 207 window.

Edit

This command allows you to make changes to the selected trading system by opening it in an
Trading System Editor 207 window.

Clone

This command creates a copy of the selected trading system and adds it to the trading system list
with (2) appended to the trading system name (to distinguish the copy from the original trading
system).

Delete

This command moves the selected trading system to the Windows® Recycle Bin for deletion. If this
command is disabled, you must first edit the trading system by removing the check mark next to
the Protect from deletion option in the General Tab 214 of its Trading System Editor 207 window.

Export

This command exports the selected trading system so that it can be saved in a designated directory
on your computer. Trading systems are saved with a .vttrs file extension. An exported trading
system can be imported into VT Trader using the Import command.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 207

Import

This command imports a trading system file that was previously exported from VT Trader with a .
vttrs file extension. Importing a trading system adds it to the trading system list using the text in
the Name field in the General Tab 214 of its Trading System Editor 207 window. If a trading system
with the same Name already exists in VT Trader a (2) will be appended to the imported trading
system's name to help distinguish it from the existing trading system.

3.13.1 Trading System Editor Window

You can create new, custom trading systems or edit existing trading systems by using Trading
System Editor window. The window caption shows the name of the trading system being created or
edited. For ease of use, the Trading System Editor window consists of the Trading System Editor
Toolbar 184 and several separate tabs containing the various properties of the trading system.

To learn more about each of the Trading System Editor tabs, please click on its name below:

General Tab 214

Input Variable(s) Tab 216
Output Variable(s) Tab 221
Formula Tab 233

3.13.1.1 Trading System Editor Toolbar

The Trading System Editor Toolbar provides you quick, easy access to a variety of very useful editing-
related commands.

Explanations of Trading System Editor Toolbar Commands

Copy

This command copies the selected text to the PC's clipboard for later pasting.

Paste

This command inserts the contents of PC's clipboard into the active text box.

Cut

This command cuts (removes) the selected text from the active text box and copies it to the PC's

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

208 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

clipboard for later pasting.

Undo

This command reverses the previous action such as deleting a line of code in the Formula tab.

Redo

This command reverses the previous Undo action.

Search

This command finds the partial word or whole word being searched for. For example, searching for H
would would find all occurrences of H and High in the formula code. You can also specify the search
direction (up or down). The search begins at the current cursor location and searches in the
specified direction. Each time an occurrence of the search word is found the window scrolls to the
text's location in the formula code and highlights it. Clicking the [Find Next] button continues
searching for more occurrences of the search word. When the search reaches the ending or
beginning of the formula code an additional dialog window is shown that asks if you want to continue
searching from that location.

Replace

This command extends the Search command's functionality by adding Replace and Replace All
commands. The Replace command find the partial word or whole word being searched for and
replaces it with the specified text. For example, searching for High in the formula code and replacing
the next occurrence with Low is accomplished by clicking the [Replace] button; replacing all
occurrences of High with Low using only one action is accomplished by clicking the [Replace All]
button. The search and replace begins at the current cursor location and searches in the specified
direction. Each time an occurrence of the search word is found the window scrolls to the text's
location in the formula code, highlights it, and replaces it. Clicking the [Find Next] button continues
searching for more occurrences of the search word. When the search reaches the ending or
beginning of the formula code an additional dialog window is shown that asks if you want to continue
searching from that location.

Editor Options

This command opens the Editor Options 209 window.

Save

This command saves any changes made to the trading system.

Close

This command closes and exits the Trading System Editor 207 window. If the trading system has
unsaved changes, you will be prompted to save the trading system before being able to close the
window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 209

3.13.1.1.1 Editor Options

The Editor Options window defines the options and properties used by the Trading System Editor 207 .
This window is divided into 3 tabs: General, Display, and Color.

In the General tab, you can enable or disable the Code Parameters and/or Code Completion features
used while typing text in the Trading System Editor's 207 Formula tab. Please click on these links to
learn more about the Code Parameters 210 and Code Completion 213 features.

In the Display tab, you can define the font type used while typing text in the Trading System Editor's 207
Formula tab.

In the Color tab, you can define the font colors and attributes used while typing text in the Trading
System Editor's 207 Formula tab. Each type of text item can its own Back ground Color, Foreground

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 210 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Color, and Font Attributes assigned to it.

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Editor Options
window without saving your changes.

3.13.1.1.1.1 Code Parameters

The Code Parameters feature shows a "hint" as you are typing the name of a function 329 . The Code
Parameters hint dialog shows which, if any, input types that function 329 requires and the order in which
those parameters should provided to the function 329 .

Using the mov() (moving average) function as an example, once you have typed "mov(" the Code
Parameters hint dialog shows [DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD].

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 211

As you type each parameter, the next required parameter is indicated in Bold.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

212 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Continuing...

The hint dialog remains visible until the last required parameter has been typed then disappears allowing
you to continue writing your formula.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 213

3.13.1.1.1.2 Code Completion

The Code Completion feature is activated when you press the CTRL + SPACEBAR keys on your
keyboard. It shows a list of available functions 329 (or data arrays) in a selection menu for you to choose
from while you are typing your formula. The Code Completion feature is best used in conjunction with
the Code Parameters feature.

For example, let's assume that you want to use the mov() (moving average) function, but you cannot
remember the function's full name. Once you have typed "m" you press the CTRL + SPACEBAR keys
to activate the Code Complete feature for assistance. The Code Complete feature shows a list of every
function that starts with the letter "m".

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 214 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once you have made your selection, it is inserted into the formula. The Code Completion dialog then
disappears allowing you to continue writing your formula.

3.13.1.2 General Tab

The Trading System Editor's 207 General tab defines the indicator's basic attributes.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 215

Explanations of General Tab's Items

Name

The Name identifies the trading system throughout VT Trader. The trading system's Name is used
in the Trading Systems Builder 205 , Indicator Editor 207 window, Trading Systems Quick List 236 , and
in the Add Trading System window shown when attaching an trading system to a chart window.

Function Name Alias

The Function Name Alias is used as the actual file name for the trading system when it is saved. It
is not case-sensitive; for example, using vt_RSI_Trading_System is the same as using
vt_rsi_trading_system. The Function Name Alias may include only letters and numbers. Use of the
underscore ( _ ) character is also allowed. It may not include any spaces or begin with a number. If
an existing trading system with the same Function Name Alias is found on the your PC VT Trader
shows a warning dialog notifying you of the conflict when you attempt to save the trading system.
You must resolve the naming conflict before you will be able to save the trading system.

Label Mask

The Label Mask multiple-line text box can be used to help identify the trading system while it is
attached to a chart window. It is possible to include the name of the trading system, the values of
input variables, the current value of output variables, and/or any other desired text in the trading
system's label. The Label Mask can show multiple lines of text; you can use the Enter (or Return)
key to separate the information into multiple lines of text.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 216 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

To show the value of an input variable in the trading system's label it is necessary to type the input
variable's name (as defined by the Name in the Input Variable(s) tab 216 ) between % characters. To
include the value of an output variable in the indicator's label it is necessary to type the output
variable's name (as defined by the Var Name in the Output Variable(s) tab 221 ) between %
characters.

Protect from Deletion

The Protect from deletion option prevents accidental deletion of the indicator. This option is
enabled by default when a new indicator is created. It is not possible to delete the indicator from the
Indicators Builder 182 while the Protect from deletion option is enabled (the [Delete] button is
disabled while the indicator is selected). Disabling the Protect from deletion option by removing
the check mark next to it allows the indicator to be deleted.

Notes

The Notes provides additional information relating to the trading system. This may be any kind of
information considered useful. Typically, a description of the trading system as well as suggested
methods of use and references to the appropriate documentation will be provided in the Notes.

Password

You may supply a Password (a phrase or combination of letters and numbers) to keep the trading
system's formula and main properties confidential thus protecting it from accidental or purposeful
editing. The Password must confirmed in the Confirm Password text box before it can be applied.
If a Password has been supplied when someone tries to edit the trading system he/she will be
prompted to provide it. If the Password is not typed correctly, it will not be possible to edit the
trading system.

Confirm Password

The Password must be successfully retyped in the Confirm Password text box before it can be
applied.

3.13.1.3 Input Variable(s) Tab

To best utilize the Trading System Editor's 207 Input Variable(s) tab, it's necessary to understand what
input variables are and how they are used in VT Trader's scripting language.

What are input variables and how do I use them?

Simply defined, an input variable is a value that you provide to the formula script. VT Trader's scripting
language uses the input variables' values while evaluating expressions and/or performing calculations.
Input variables (and their Default values) are included in the Trading Systems Properties window. This
properties window is used to modify the trading system's properties while it is attached to a chart
window.

Input variables are often used to allow you to change the values of a function's arguments, or perform
actions such as selecting, enabling, or disabling (via enumeration lists) specific parameters or
conditions used by an indicator or trading system without the need to edit its formula script. You provide

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 217

these values to the formula script from the trading system's properties window when you add it to the
chart window (or change its properties while it is attached to the chart window).

What is the Input Variable(s) Tab?

The Trading System Editor's 207 Input Variable(s) tab defines any input variables used in the formula
script. You can create as many new input variables as necessary.

Clicking the [New] button creates a new input variable. Clicking the [Delete] button deletes the selected
input variable. Clicking the [Move Up] or [Move Down] button moves the input variable's respective
position up or down in the tab's variable list as as well as up or down in the trading system's properties
window.

Explanations of Input Variable(s) Tab's Items

Read Only

While enabled, the input variable's value in the or trading system's properties window will be a read-
only value that cannot be changed. Enabling this option is useful if you want to see the input
variable's Display Name and Default value in the properties window, but you do not need to be able
to change its value (or you do not want others to be able to change it).

Name

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 218 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Name makes it possible to refer to the input variable and its value from within the formula script.
The Name is not case-sensitive; for example, using Periods is the same as using periods. It may
include only letters and numbers. Use of the underscore ( _ ) character is also allowed. It may not
include any spaces or begin with a number. An input variable's Name must not be the same name
as any other existing input variable, existing function 334 or reserved function 400 , constant 333 , or
predefined data array 334 . Additionally, no input variables 216 should have the same Name as any
output variables' 221 Var Name(s) within the same formula script.

Display Name

The Display Name is the text shown in the trading system's properties window to identify the input
variable. This text should be descriptive enough that it is easy to understand what the input variable
is and what Type of value you need to provide when you are attaching the trading system to the
chart window (or changing its properties while it is attached to the chart window).

Type

An input variable must be defined as a certain Type of variable. The Type value defines what type of
data can be used as the input variable's Default value. The variable's Type selection is also used by
the formula script; Type defines what type of data the formula script should expect to process when
the input variable's value is passed into the scripting engine. An input variable can provide the
formula script with any any of the following types of data: integer, integer (with bounds), float, float
(with bounds), price, MA type, Enumeration, and Bars Forward. Please click here 218 to learn more
about each input variable Type.

Default

The Default value is the initial value of the input variable shown in the trading system's properties
window; however, this value can be changed as needed (assuming the input variable's Read-Only
option is disabled). The Default value is provided to the formula script along with the input variable's
Type. The formula script uses this value while evaluating any expressions and/or performing any
calculations that require the input variable's value.

Min Bounds

The Min Bounds value defines the lowest value that can be used for the Default value. Min Bounds
is only available if the integer (with bounds), float (with bounds), or Bars Forward variable Type is
selected.

Max Bounds

The Max Bounds value defines the highest value that can be used for the Default value. Max
Bounds is only available if the integer (with bounds), float (with bounds), or Bars Forward variable
Type is selected.

3.13.1.3.1 Type

An input variable must be defined as a certain Type 216 of variable. The Type 216 of the variable defines
what type of data can be used as the input variable's Default 216 value. The variable's Type 216 selection
is also used by the formula script; Type 216 defines what type of data the formula script should expect to
process when the input variable's value is passed into the scripting engine.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 219

An input variable can provide the formula script with any any of the following types of data: integer,
integer (with bounds), float, float (with bounds), price, MA type, Enumeration, and Bars Forward. Please
continue reading to learn more about each input variable Type 216 .

Explanations of the Types of Input Variables

Integer

An input variable of the Integer Type 216 can be any positive or negative whole number (..., -2, -1, 0,
1, 2, ..., and so on...).

Integer (with bounds)

An input variable of the Integer (with bounds) Type 216 can be any positive or negative whole
number between the defined Min. Bounds 216 and Max. Bounds 216 values.

Float

An input variable of the Float Type 216 can be any positive or negative number rounded out to 5
decimal places.

Float (with bounds)

An input variable of the Float (with bounds) Type 216 can be any positive or negative number

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

220 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

rounded out to 5 decimal places between the defined Min. Bounds 216 and Max. Bounds 216 values.

Price

An input variable of the Price Type 216 can be any of the predefined data arrays 334 : close, open,
low, high, Median Price, Typical Price, Indicator (the value of an Indicator already attached to the
chart window 121 ), Volume, haOpen, haClose, haLow, or haHigh; "ha" values are price values
associated with the Heik in-Ashi Candlestick Chart Type).

MA Type

An input variable of the MA Type Type 216 can be any of the available moving average constants 333 :
Simple, Weighted, Exponential, Sine Weighted, Triangular, End Point, or Volume-Adjusted. The MA
Type selection is often used in conjunction with the built-in moving average function mov() 371 or
when it is desirable to apply a type of data smoothing (averaging) to the data array being analyzed.

Enumeration

An input variable of the Enumeration Type 216 can be any of the predefined values added to a
enumeration (selection) list. Before an enumeration list can be used, it must be populated. The
enumeration list can be populated (or edited) by clicking the [ ... ] button shown directly to the right
of the Default 216 value's text box while the Enumeration Type 216 is selected. An enumeration list
item may include only letters and numbers. Use of the underscore ( _ ) character is also allowed. It
may not include any spaces or begin with a number.

Important Note: Each item in the selection menu is assigned an internal list position number that
corresponds to their location in the list; the first item (top) in the enumeration list is assigned the
position number 0, the second item is assigned 1, the third item is assigned 2, etc. You must use
the list item's number (not its actual name shown in the enumeration list) in the formula script to
when constructing your expressions and conditions.

For example, let's assume that you have an indicator that includes a moving average and a moving
average of the moving average. Let's also assume that you would like to create some logic that
allows you to show (or hide) the moving average of the moving average. You can accomplish this by
using an Enumeration Type 216 input variable 216 called MaDisplay (its Name 216 ; "Display MA of
MA?" will be its Display Name 216 ) that includes two items in the list (from top-down): No, Yes. The
VT Trader formula script written in the Formula tab 233 could potentially look like this:

{5-period simple moving average of close prices}

MA := mov(C,5,S);

{If MaDisplay is "Yes" (which has an assigned list position number of

1),
calculate and show a 5-period MA of the 5-period MA of close prices}

MA_of_MA := if(DisplayMA=1, mov(MA,5,S), NULL);

In this example, MA and MA_of_MA would be output variables 200 (Indicator Output option enabled)
defined in the Output Variable(s) tab 221 .

Another good example demonstrating the use of an enumeration list is found in VT Trader's Rate of
Change (ROC) 648 indicator. Its Calculation Method input variable 216 uses an enumeration list

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 221

allowing you to specify if the ROC 648 is calculated in Points or Percent.

Bars Forward

An input variable of the Bars Forward Type 216 can be can be any positive or negative whole
number between the defined Min. Bounds 216 and Max. Bounds 216 values. The Bars Forward Type
216 is used in conjunction with the scripting language's ref() 377 function to visually shift the resulting
calculation plot forward ahead of the current market or backwards behind the current market price by
the number of bars specified. Important Note: The Bars Forward Type 216 should only be used for
visual reference. It is not possible for a trading system to generate alerts in real-time (or request
orders automatically if it's running in Auto-Trade mode) for any condition that uses a variable or value
that has been shifted behind the current market price (i.e. a negative Bars Forward value).

A good example demonstrating the use of the Bars Forward Type 216 is found in VT Trader's
Moving Average 585 indicator. Its Horizontal Shift input variable 216 uses the Bars Forward Type 216
allowing you to visually shift the moving average's plot forward ahead of the current market price.
Another good example demonstrating the use of the Bars Forward Type 216 is the Chaos Alligator
Indicator 453 .

3.13.1.4 Output Variable(s) Tab

To best utilize the Output Variable(s) tab, it's necessary to first understand what output variables are
and how they are used in VT Trader's scripting language.

What are output variables and how do I use them?

Simply defined, an output variable is the resulting calculated value of a statement in the formula script. In
an indicator, output variables are often, but not always, the final calculation of an indicator. However, in a
trading system, an output variable can have one or more types of final outputs.

What is the Output Variable(s) Tab?

Most trading systems include multiple output variables, some variables' values you might need to be
able to visually examine and others you might not. You can use the Trading System Editor's 207 Output
Variable(s) tab (and its Variable Editor window) to define only those output variables used in the formula
script that are used to alert you to your specified trading conditions and/or that you need to see the
resulting values of in a chart window and in the Data Inspection 154 window. You can define as many
output variables in the Output Variable(s) tab as necessary.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

222 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Clicking the [New] button creates a new input variable. Clicking the [Delete] button deletes the selected
input variable. Clicking the [Move Up] or [Move Down] button moves the input variable's respective
position up or down in the tab's variable list as as well as up or down in the trading system's properties
window.

The Output Variable(s) tab contains the following command buttons:

New

This command creates a new output variable.

Edit

This command opens the Output Variable Editor 223 window. Please click here to learn more about
the Output Variable Editor 223 window.

Delete

This command deletes the selected output variable.

Move Up / Move Down

This command moves the output variable's respective position up or down in the tab's variable list as
as well as up or down in the Data Inspection 154 window (relative to the trading system's other output
variables shown in that window).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 223

3.13.1.4.1 Output Variable Editor Window

The Output Variable Editor window is opened by clicking the [New] button or [Edit] button in the
Output Variable(s) 221 tab of the Trading System Editor 207 window. You can define or edit the default
properties of the selected output variable from this window. The Output Variable Editor window's
caption shows the Name of the trading system followed by the Name of the output variable being created
or edited. For ease of use, the Output Variable Editor window divided into several separate tabs
containing the output variable's various properties.

To learn more about each of the Output Variable Editor window's tabs, please click on its name below:

Name Tab 223

Graphic Tab 225
Highlights Tab 227
Trends Tab 227
Indicator Output Tab 229
Alerts 230
Trading 232

3.13.1.4.1.1 Name Tab

The Output Variable Editor's 223 Name tab defines the output variable's basic attributes and the type(s)
of output the variable provides.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

224 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Output Variable
Editor 223 window without saving your changes.

Explanations of Name Tab's Items

Var Name

The Var Name makes it possible to refer to the output variable and its value from within the formula
script. The Var Name is not case-sensitive; for example, using Buy_Signal is the same as using
buy_signal. It may include only letters and numbers. Use of the underscore ( _ ) character is also
allowed. It may not include any spaces or begin with a number. An output variable's Var Name
must not be the same name as any other existing output variable, existing function 334 or reserved
function 400 , constant 333 , or predefined data array 334 . Additionally, no output variables 221 should
have the same Var Name(s) as any input variables' 216 Name(s) within the same formula script.

Name

The Name identifies the output variable in the Data Inspection 154 window while the trading system
is attached to the chart window 121 .

Description

The Description provides additional information relating to the output variable. This may be any kind
of information considered useful. Typically, this is a description of the output variable (i.e. what it is
used for or what data it provides).

Graphic Enabled

This option shows a graphic in the price frame of the chart window 121 in real-time, with each new
incoming price tick, each time the output variable's 221 conditions are fulfilled according to the
formula script. The graphic is also shown throughout the historical charting data for each bar (or
candle) when the output variable's 221 conditions were fulfilled at the closing of that bar (or candle).
The Output Variable Editor's 223 Graphic 225 tab defines the default properties of the graphic.

Highlights Enabled

This option highlights (i.e. changes the color) of the bar (or candle) in the price frame of the chart
window 121 in real-time, with each new incoming price tick, each time the output variable's 221
conditions are fulfilled according to the formula script. The highlights are also shown throughout the
historical charting data for each bar (or candle) when the output variable's 221 conditions were fulfilled
at the closing of that bar (or candle). The Output Variable Editor's 223 Highlights 227 tab defines the
default properties of the highlight.

Trends Enabled

This option shows an additional "trends frame" at the bottom of the chart window 121 that changes
color in real-time, with each new incoming price tick, each time the output variable's 221 conditions
are fulfilled according to the formula script. The "trends frame" is also shown throughout the
historical charting data for each bar (or candle) when the output variable's 221 conditions were fulfilled
at the closing of that bar (or candle). The Output Variable Editor's 223 Trends 227 tab defines the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 225

default properties of the "trend frame". Note: If more than one output variable 221 is Trends Enabled,
all of the output variables 221 share the "trends frame".

Indicator Output

This option shows the output variable's 221 value in the chart window. The output variable's 221 value
recalculates in real-time, with each new incoming price tick, according to the formula script. The
output variable's 221 value is also shown throughout the historical charting data for each bar (or
candle) based on its value at the closing of that bar (or candle) each time the output variable's 221
conditions are fulfilled according to the formula script.

Enabling this option is often used to include the indicator(s) that the trading system's conditions are
based on directly in the trading system's formula script instead of having to attach the indicator(s) to
the chart window 121 separately for review. It can also be useful when trying to troubleshoot a trading
system's formula script and you need to be able to quickly determine what the output variable's
value is for each bar (or candle).

Alerts Enabled

This option shows a text message in the Trading Activity 174 window (or in the Trading Systems
Alerts window if the "Show Trading Systems Alerts 68 " option is defined as "In Trading Systems
Alerts Window") and plays an audio sound file in real-time, with each new incoming price tick, each
time the output variable's 221 conditions are fulfilled according to the formula script. The Output
Variable Editor's 223 Alerts 230 tab defines the default message and/or audio sound file of the alert.

Trading Enabled

This option automatically requests an order each time the output variable's 221 conditions are fulfilled
according to the formula script if the trading system is running in Auto-Trade mode. The Output
Variable Editor's 223 Trading 232 tab defines the default automated trading properties of the output
variable 221 .

Important Note(s): It is extremely important that you properly define the output variable's 221
automated trading properties in Trading 232 tab before attempting to run the trading system in Auto-
Trade mode. It is also strongly recommended that you read through the Auto-Trading FAQ for
Trading Systems 1148 page in this manual for some additional, important information about using
trading systems for automated trading purposes.

3.13.1.4.1.2 Graphic Tab

The Output Variable Editor's 223 Graphic tab defines the default graphic properties for the output variable
221 if its Graphic Enabled option is enabled in the Name 223 tab. The graphic is shown in the price frame
of the chart window 121 in real-time, with each new incoming price tick, each time the output variable's
221 conditions are fulfilled according to the formula script. It is also shown throughout the historical
charting data for each bar (or candle) when the output variable's 221 conditions were fulfilled at the closing
of that bar (or candle).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

226 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Output Variable
Editor 223 window without saving your changes.

Explanations of Graphic Tab's Items

Font

Font defines the graphic's default symbol while the trading system is attached to the chart window
121 . The available choices are the same as those items in the Symbols tool 246 .

Size

Size defines the graphic's default color while the trading system is attached to the chart window 121 .
The available choices are: Small, Medium, and Large.

Color

Color defines the graphic's default color while the trading system is attached to the chart window 121
. It is also the color used to show the output variable's 221 Name and calculated value in the Data
Inspection 154 window (if the "Use Colors for Output Variables" option is enabled for that window).

Symbol Position

You can choose to show the graphic above or below the bar (or candle) in the price frame of the
chart window 121 using the Symbol Position options.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 227

3.13.1.4.1.3 Highlights Tab

The Output Variable Editor's 223 Highlights tab defines the default bar (or candle) highlighting properties
for the output variable 221 if its Highlights Enabled option is enabled in the Name 223 tab. Highlights
change the color of the bar (or candle) in the price frame of the chart window 121 in real-time, with each
new incoming price tick, each time the output variable's 221 conditions are fulfilled according to the
formula script. The highlights are also shown throughout the historical charting data for each bar (or
candle) when the output variable's 221 conditions were fulfilled at the closing of that bar (or candle).

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Output Variable
Editor 223 window without saving your changes.

Explanations of Highlights Tab's Items

Color

Color defines the graphic's default default bar (or candle) highlighting color while the trading system
is attached to the chart window 121 .

3.13.1.4.1.4 Trends Tab

The Output Variable Editor's 223 Trends tab defines the default trends properties for the output variable
221 if its Trends Enabled option is enabled in the Name 223 tab. The trends frame is shown at the
bottom of the chart window 121 . It changes color in real-time, with each new incoming price tick, each

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

228 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

time the output variable's 221 conditions are fulfilled according to the formula script. The trends frame is
also shown throughout the historical charting data for each bar (or candle) when the output variable's 221
conditions were fulfilled at the closing of that bar (or candle).

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Output Variable
Editor 223 window without saving your changes.

Explanations of Trends Tab's Items

Display Vertical Lines

This option shows a vertical line in the chart window 121 at the first bar (or candle) and the last bar
(or candle) that fulfills the output variable's 221 conditions according to the formula script while the
trading system is attached to the chart window 121 .

Background

Background defines the trends frame's default color while the trading system is attached to the
chart window 121 .

Pattern

Pattern defines the default pattern for the Background color in the trends frame while the trading
system is attached to the chart window 121 .

Symbol

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 229

Symbol defines the trends frame's default symbol while the trading system is attached to the chart
window 121 . The available choices are the same as those items in the Symbols tool 246 .

Symbol Color

Symbol Color defines the trends frame graphic's default color while the trading system is attached
to the chart window 121 .

3.13.1.4.1.5 Indicator Output Tab

The Output Variable Editor's 223 Indicator Output tab defines the default properties for the output
variable 221 if its Indicator Output Enabled option is enabled in the Name 223 tab. The Indicator Output
is the output variable's 221 value shown in the chart window 121 . The output variable's 221 value
recalculates in real-time, with each new incoming price tick, according to the formula script. The output
variable's 221 value is also shown throughout the historical charting data for each bar (or candle) based
on its value at the closing of that bar (or candle) each time the output variable's 221 conditions are fulfilled
according to the formula script.

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Output Variable
Editor 223 window without saving your changes.

Explanations of Indicator Output Tab's Items

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 230 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Line Color

The Line Color defines the output variable's 221 default line color while the trading system is
attached to the chart window 121 . It is also the color used to show the output variable's 221 Name
and calculated value in the Data Inspection 154 window (if the "Use Colors for Output Variables"
option is enabled for that window).

Line Width

The Line Width defines the output variable's 221 default line width while the trading system is
attached to the chart window 121 .

Line Style

The Line Style defines the output variable's 221 default line style while the trading system is
attached to the chart window 121 . This color may be changed using the indicator's properties window
when you add the indicator to the chart window 121 (or change the indicator's properties while it is
attached to the chart window).

Placement

Placement defines the default frame in which the output variable's 221 value is shown. The available
choices are: Price Frame, Additional Frame 1, Additional Frame 2, Additional Frame 3, Additional
Frame 4, and Additional Frame 5. It is acceptable to show more than output variable 221 in the same
frame; typically, an indicator and its related overbought and oversold levels will be shown in the
same frame, for example.

3.13.1.4.1.6 Alerts Tab

The Output Variable Editor's 223 Alerts tab defines the default alert properties for the output variable 221 if
its Alerts Enabled option is enabled in the Name 223 tab. An Alert shows a text message in the Trading
Activity 174 window (or in the Trading Systems Alerts window if the "Show Trading Systems Alerts 68 "
option is defined as "In Trading Systems Alerts Window") and plays an audio sound file in real-time, with
each new incoming price tick, each time the output variable's 221 conditions are fulfilled according to the
formula script.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 231

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Output Variable
Editor 223 window without saving your changes.

Explanations of Alerts Tab's Items

Alert Message

The Alert Message is the text message that shows in the Trading Activity 174 window (or in the
Trading Systems Alerts window if the "Show Trading Systems Alerts 68 " option is defined as "In
Trading Systems Alerts Window"). Leaving this text empty effectively disables the text message
alert.

Standard Sound / User Defined Sound

These options let you choose if you will be using a standard VT Trader sound file or a custom sound
file for the alert.

Standard Alert Sound / Alert Sound File

These options define your choice of a predefined VT Trader sound files or any custom .wav sound file
on your computer to use. You can hear a sample of the sound file you have chosen by clicking the
Play button ( [ > ] ).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 232 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3.13.1.4.1.7 Trading Tab

The Output Variable Editor's 223 Trading tab defines the default automated trading properties for the
output variable 221 if its Trading Enabled option is enabled in the Name 223 tab. The properties in this tab
are only used by the trading system while it is running in Auto-Trade mode.

Important Note(s): It is important to ensure that you define the properties in this tab for every Trading
Enabled 223 output variable 221 included in the trading system otherwise the trading system might not
function as expected while running in Auto-Trade mode. It is also strongly recommended that you read
through the Auto-Trading FAQ for Trading Systems 1148 page in this manual for some additional,
important information about using trading systems for automated trading purposes.

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Output Variable
Editor 223 window without saving your changes.

Explanations of Highlights Tab's Items

Trade Action

The Trade Action defines the type of order that is automatically requested each time the output
variable's 221 conditions are fulfilled according to the formula script while the trading system is
running in Auto-Trade mode. The available choices are: Buy (mark et order) and Sell (mark et order).

Market Range

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 233

The Market Range automatically approves requotes within a maximum range of pips (0-99) from the
quoted price. For example, if Market Range is set to 10, requotes within ten pips of the requested
price will be processed without requiring your confirmation. Important Note: Automated trading
systems do not have the ability to respond to requote requests (only you can accept and confirm
them) so it is very important that you define the largest Market Range value you are comfortable
with to avoid potential automated trading problems due to one or more requote request(s).

Hedge

The Hedge option defines the order that is automatically requested each time the output variable's
221 conditions are fulfilled according to the formula script while the trading system is running in
Auto-Trade mode as a hedged order. The hedge option allows the order request to open a new
position without closing an existing, opposite open position. * Note: This command is only available
if your broker supports this functionality.

For example, if the account being used by the trading system running in Auto-Trade mode has an
open Buy position and the trading system requests a Sell market order, the Buy position will not be
closed out. The Buy position remains open and a new Sell position is created. With the Hedge
option enabled, the Sell market order request, in this example, would be used to offset the open Buy
position by its Amount (in Lots).

3.13.1.5 Formula Tab

The Trading System Editor's 207 Formula tab defines the VT Trader scripting language's 329 statements,
expressions, conditions, variables, etc. used in the calculation(s) of the resulting trading system. The
Formula Editor Toolbar 234 and Paste Function window 234 (continue reading below) are available to
help aid in the construction of your formula script. It is also recommended that you enable the Code
Parameters 210 and Code Completion 213 features.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

234 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Formula Editor Toolbar allows you to quickly comment 330 (or uncomment) text, insert any of the
scripting language's 329 punctuators 331 and operators 331 into the formula script, and open the Paste
Function window.

The Paste Function window includes a full categorical listing of all of the available functions for use in
your formula script. These lists include all of the scripting language's 329 functions 334 as well as the
Function Name Aliases 192 of the standard VT Trader indicators and any of your custom indicators. The
Paste Function window also specifies the selected function's format and its arguments (if any). Lastly,
a full description of each function is also provided. Selecting a function from this window pastes it into
your formula script in the Formula tab.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 235

3.14 Quick Lists

3.14.1 Configure Indicators Quick List

The Indicators Quick List is a list of indicators that you can customize to include only the indicators
your choose. The Indicators Quick List is accessible using Ribbon>Technical
Analysis>Indicators>Indicators Quick List as well as via any chart window's contextual menu.

By default, all standard VT Trader indicators and all custom indicators are included in the Indicators
Quick List. You will need to use the Indicators Quick List Configuration window to customize this
list. You can open this window using the Configure Quick List command in the Ribbon>Technical
Analysis>Indicators>Indicators Quick List selection menu.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 236 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Indicators Quick List window is divided into left and right panes with 4 buttons between them. The
right pane is the list of indicators currently included in the Indicator Quick List. Clicking the [>] button
moves the selected indicator into the Indicators Quick List while clicking the [>>] button moves all of
the available indicators in VT Trader into the Indicators Quick List. Clicking the [<] button removes the
selected indicator from the Indicators Quick List while clicking the [<<] button removes all of the
indicators from the Indicators Quick List.

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Indicators Quick
List Configuration window without saving your changes.

3.14.2 Configure Trading Systems Quick List

The Trading Systems Quick List is a list of trading systems that you can customize to include only the
trading systems your choose. The Trading Systems Quick List is accessible using Ribbon>Technical
Analysis>Trading Systems>Trading Systems Quick List as well as via any chart window's contextual
menu.

By default, all standard VT Trader trading systems and all custom trading systems are included in the
Trading Systems Quick List. You will need to use the Trading Systems Quick List Configuration
window to customize this list. You can open this window using the Configure Quick List command in
the Ribbon>Technical Analysis>Indicators>Trading Systems Quick List selection menu.

The Trading Systems Quick List window is divided into left and right panes with 4 buttons between
them. The right pane is the list of trading systems currently included in the Trading Systems Quick
List. Clicking the [>] button moves the selected trading system into the Trading Systems Quick List
while clicking the [>>] button moves all of the available trading systems in VT Trader into the Trading
Systems Quick List. Clicking the [<] button removes the selected trading system from the Trading
Systems Quick List while clicking the [<<] button removes all of the trading systems from the Trading
Systems Quick List.

Clicking the [OK] button saves your changes. Clicking the [Cancel] button closes the Trading Systems

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Task Windows 237

Quick List Configuration window without saving your changes.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

Drawing Tools

Part

IV
 Drawing Tools 239

4 Drawing Tools

Using one or more of VT Trader's advanced drawing tools, you can perform detailed technical analysis on
any instrument you desire. Please select a tool from the categorized list below to learn more about it.

Data Analysis Tools

Copy Prices 241

Cross Hair 240
Comments 243
Symbols 246

Line Tools

Vertical Line 250

Horizontal Line 253
Trend Line 256
Trend Line by Angle 259
Linear Regression Line 263

Channel Tools

Standard Deviation Channel 265

Standard Error Channel 269
Raff Regression Channel 272
Equidistant Channel 276
Andrew's Pitchfork 279

Fibonacci Tools

Fibonacci Retracements 293

Fibonacci Time Extensions 301
Fibonacci Channel 305
Fibonacci Fan 309
Fibonacci Arc 313

Gann Tools

Gann Line 317

Gann Fan 321
Gann Grid 324

Shape Drawing Tools

Ellipse 282
Rectangle 286
Triangle 290

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 240 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.1 Data Analysis

4.1.1 Cross Hair Tool

You can easily identify a specific date, time, and price point in the chart using the Cross Hair tool. You
can show the Cross Hair tool in any chart by first making that chart the active window and then using
the Ribbon -> Chart menu -> Show/Hide group -> Cross Hair command. You can also use the Chart
Properties window (or Chart Template Properties window). As you move your cursor around in the chart,
the Cross Hair tool becomes visible.

The Cross Hair tool also includes a built-in function called "Measuring". The "Measuring" function
automatically measures (counts) the number of bars and number of pips between two locations in the
active chart window. The measuring label shows data in the format: # of bars / # of pips / price level of
cursor.

To utilize this feature, first position the cross hair cursor at one location in the chart window and then
click and hold down the left mouse button. With the left mouse button held down, move the cursor to a
second location in the chart window. As the cursor is being moved around in the chart window, a new
measuring line and label is shown. This new label updates in real-time displaying the # of bars and the #
of pips between the cursor's originating location and its current location in the chart.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 241

Note: While the Cross Hair tool is enabled, the ability to drag and scroll the chart window left and right
using the left mouse button works differently. The measuring function can be temporarily disabled by
double-clicking the left mouse button. The cursor will change from a cross to an arrow and once it's
moving it will change to a hand. In this mode, you may scroll the chart by clicking and holding down the
left mouse button while moving the cursor left or right within the chart window. The measuring function
can be reactivated by double-clicking the left mouse button again; doing so will change the cursor back
to an arrow and ultimately back to the cross once it's been moved.

Appearance Customizations

Cross Hair appearance customizations can be made for a single chart window by using the chart
window's Chart Properties 131 window. Appearance customizations can also be made using a chart
template's Chart Template Properties window.

4.1.2 Copy Prices Tool

To copy price data (i.e. each price bar's closing date/time, open/high/low/close prices, and volume) from
the active chart window you must select the Copy Prices tool. There is two ways to copy the price data:
Select by Date Range and Select Entire Date Range.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

242 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

If you choose Select Entire Date Range, all of the price data loaded into the active chart window is
copied to the computer's clipboard and a Save As dialog window opens. To save the price data as a new
text file (.txt), you must choose a name for your file and a location on the computer to save it and then
click the [Save] button.

If you choose Select by Date Range, you must specify the date range of the price data that you want to
save. To do this you must position the cursor at the starting location of the date range in the active chart
window, click and hold down the left mouse button, and move the cursor to the ending location of the
date range. Releasing the left mouse button finalizes your selection.

Upon releasing the left mouse button, the price data from the selected date range is copied to the
computer's clipboard and a Save As dialog opens. To save the price data as a new text file (.txt), you
must choose a name for your file and a location on the computer to save it and then click the [Save]
button.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 243

4.1.3 Comments Tool

To type a comment in the active chart window you must select the Comments tool. With the
comments tool selected, you must place the cursor over a location in the active chart window to type
the comment. Once a location is chosen you must click the left mouse button to show the Edit
Comments window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

244 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once shown, you can adjust the initial properties of the comment including the font attributes, text
color, background color, and positioning (i.e. Float) for the new comments. You may also type the initial
text at this time. Note: If the Float option is enabled, you will be able to move the chart data round
underneath the comment while the comment "floats" above it. If the Float option is disabled, the
comment will remain "fixed" in the exact location you that you place it in respective to the chart data.

After typing your comment, it is shown in the active chart window using the properties chosen in the
Edit Comments window (shown below with the contextual menu 245 active)...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 245

To reposition the comment, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over it
and with the left mouse button held down, drag the comment to its new location. Release the left
mouse button to finalize the new location of the comment.

The comment can also be rotated. To rotate the comment you must first select it by clicking once with
the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over it. Next, the cursor must be positioned over one of
the boxes around the outside edge of the comment box (the mouse cursor will change when positioned
correctly). Click and hold down the left mouse button to rotate the comment. The comment box will
redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize
the rotation.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the comment to access the
contextual menu 245 for additional functionality.

4.1.3.1 Contextual Menu

A Comment's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected comment from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all comments from the active chart window.

Properties

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 246 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This command opens the comment's properties 246 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the comment back to their default
values.

4.1.3.2 Properties

Using the Comments properties window, you can:

Change the font attributes and text justification

Change the background color of the comments box
Change the method that is used to apply the comment to the chart window (i.e. float)
Change the comment's text

4.1.4 Symbols Tool

You can use the Symbol tool to draw symbols (a.k .a. pictures or graphics) in the active chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 247

Once you've used the Symbol tool to select your symbol, you must position your cursor over your
desired location in the active chart window and click the left mouse button to draw the symbol.

Appearance Customizations

Each symbol can be moved and/or customized at your discretion.

To move a symbol, click the left mouse button while the cursor is positioned over it and with the left
mouse button held down, drag the symbol to its new location. Releasing the left mouse button finalizes
the symbol's new location.

All symbols are initially drawn using the Symbol tool's default properties. However, various appearance
customizations can be made using a symbol's properties 250 .

Contextual Menu

A symbol's contextual menu 249 provides you with additional symbol-specific functionality and access to
its properties 250 . To activate the contextual menu 249 , click the right mouse button while the cursor is
positioned over the symbol.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

248 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 249

4.1.4.1 Contextual Menu

A Symbol's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected symbol from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all symbols from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the symbol's properties 250 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the symbol back to their default
values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected symbol.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 250 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.1.4.2 Properties

Using the Symbol Properties window you can:

Change the color of the symbol

Change the size of the symbol

4.2 Lines
4.2.1 Vertical Lines

To draw a vertical line in the active chart window you must select the Vertical Line tool. With the
Vertical Line tool selected, you must position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to
draw the vertical line. Once a location is chosen you must click the left mouse to draw the line in the
chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 251

Once the vertical line is drawn in the chart window you can change its properties 253 (by using the
contextual menu 252 ) or reposition it.

To reposition the vertical line, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over it
and with the left mouse button held down, drag the line to its new location. Release the left mouse
button to finalize the new location of the vertical line.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the vertical line to access its
contextual menu 252 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 252 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.2.1.1 Contextual Menu

A Vertical Line's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected vertical line from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all vertical lines from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the vertical line's properties 253 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the vertical line back to their default
values.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 253

4.2.1.2 Properties

Using the Vertical Line's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the vertical line

Change the value (date/time) of the vertical line

4.2.2 Horizontal Lines

To draw a horizontal line in the active chart window you must select the Horizontal Line tool. With
the Horizontal Line tool selected, you must position the cursor over a location in the active chart
window to draw the horizontal line. Once a location is chosen you must click the left mouse to draw
the line in the chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

254 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once the horizontal line is drawn in the chart window you can change its properties 256 (by using the
contextual menu 255 ) or reposition it.

To reposition the horizontal line, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering
over it and with the left mouse button held down, drag the line to its new location. Release the left mouse
button to finalize the new location of the horizontal line.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the horizontal line to access
its contextual menu 255 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 255

4.2.2.1 Contextual Menu

A Horizontal Line's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected horizontal line from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all horizontal lines from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the horizontal line's properties 256 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the horizontal line back to their
default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected horizontal line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 256 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.2.2.2 Properties

Using the Horizontal Line's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the horizontal line

Change the value (price) of the horizontal line
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when the horizontal line is
breached

4.2.3 Trend Lines

To draw a trend line in the active chart window you must select the Trend Line tool. With the Trend
Line tool selected, you must position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to start the
calculation of the trend line. This is typically from a low or high point in price. Once a starting position
is selected you must click and hold down the left mouse button while drawing the trend line on the
chart.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 257

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 259 of the trend line (by using the contextual
menu 258 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 259 .

To reposition the trend line, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over it
and with the left mouse button held down, drag the line to its new location. Release the left mouse
button to finalize the new location of the trend line.

To recalculate where the trend line begins or ends, you must select the trend line by positioning the
cursor over it and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over either the box at the
beginning or the ending of the line; click and hold down the left mouse button to drag the calculation
point of the trend line to its new location. The trend line will redraw as the cursor is moved around
within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new
begin/end points. You may also use the Properties 259 option of the contextual menu 258 to manually
change the begin or end point using specific price and date/time values.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the trend line to access its
contextual menu 258 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 258 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.2.3.1 Contextual Menu

A Trend Line's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected trend line from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all trend lines from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the trend line's properties 259 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the trend line back to their default
values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected trend line.

Draw Parallel Trend Line

This command creates an exact duplicate of the selected trend line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 259

4.2.3.2 Properties

Using the Trend Line's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the trend line

Change the beginning and ending values (price/date/time) of the trend line
Extend the trend line from its beginning/ending points
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when the trend line is breached

4.2.4 Trend Lines by Angle

The Trend Line by Angle tool works in a similar fashion as the Trend Line 256 tool, except there is

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

260 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

one major difference. The Trend Line by Angle is drawn relative to the computer screen. For example,
if you were to use a protractor to draw a line at 45 degrees on the screen, the line should rise by one
inch for each inch it extends (runs) to the right. This 45 degree angle also could be expressed as a slope
of 1. We say the angle it is relative to the computer screen because we are discussing inches, not
prices, on the screen. Regardless of how many bars are loaded or what the x-axis and y-axis of the
chart are set to, a 45 degree angle will slope up and to the right at 45 degrees relative to the computer
screen.

To draw a trend line by angle in the active chart window you must select the Trend Line by Angle
tool. With the Trend Line by Angle tool selected, you must position the cursor over a location in the
active chart window to start the calculation of the trend line. This is typically from a low or high point in
price. Once a starting position is selected you must click and hold down the left mouse button while
drawing the trend line by angle on the chart.

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 262 of the trend line by angle (by using the
contextual menu 261 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 262 .

To reposition the trend line, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over it
and with the left mouse button held down, drag the line to its new location. Release the left mouse
button to finalize the new location of the trend line.

To recalculate where the trend line begins or ends, you must select the trend line by angle by
positioning the cursor over it and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over
either the box at the beginning or the ending of the line; click and hold down the left mouse button to
drag the calculation point of the trend line by angle to its new location. The trend line by angle will
redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize
the redrawing according to the new begin/end points. You may also use the Properties 262 option of the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 261

contextual menu 261 to manually change the begin or end point using specific price and date/time
values.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the trend line by angle to
access its contextual menu 261 for additional functionality.

4.2.4.1 Contextual Menu

A Trend Line (by Angle)'s contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected trend line (by angle) from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all trend lines (by angle) from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the trend line (by angle)'s properties 262 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the trend line back to their default

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 262 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected trend line (by
angle).

4.2.4.2 Properties

Using the Trend Line By Angle's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the trend line

Change the beginning and ending values (price/date/time) of the trend line
Extend the trend line from its beginning/ending points
Change the trend line's font attributes
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when the trend line is breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 263

4.2.5 Linear Regression Lines

To draw a linear regression line in the active chart window you must select the Linear Regression
Line tool. With the Linear Regression Line tool selected, you must position the cursor over a location
in the active chart window to start the calculation of the linear regression line. This is typically from a
low or high point in price. Once a starting position is selected you must click and hold down the left
mouse button while drawing the linear regression line on the chart.

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 265 of the linear regression line (by using the
contextual menu 264 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 265 .

To reposition the linear regression line, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is
hovering over it and with the left mouse button held down, drag the line to its new location. Release the
left mouse button to finalize the new location of the linear regression line.

To recalculate where the linear regression line begins or ends, you must select the linear regression
line by positioning the cursor over it and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor
over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the line; Click and hold down the left mouse button
to drag the calculation point of the linear regression line to its new location. The linear regression
line will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to
finalize the redrawing according to the new begin/end points.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the linear regression line to

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 264 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

access its contextual menu 264 for additional functionality.

4.2.5.1 Contextual Menu

A Linear Regression Line's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected linear regression line from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all linear regression lines from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the linear regression line's properties 265 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the linear regression line back to
their default values.

Add Comment

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 265

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected linear regression
line.

4.2.5.2 Properties

Using the Linear Regression Line's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the regression line

Change the data series that the regression line is based on

4.3 Channels
4.3.1 Standard Deviation Channels

To draw a standard deviation channel in the active chart window you must select the Standard
Deviation Channel tool. With the Standard Deviation Channel tool selected, you must position the
cursor over a location in the active chart window to start the calculation of the standard deviation
channel. Once a starting position is selected you must click and hold down the left mouse button while
drawing the standard deviation channel on the chart.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

266 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 268 of the standard deviation channel (by
using the contextual menu 267 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 267 .

To reposition the standard deviation channel, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor
is hovering over one of its lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the channel to its new
location. Release the left mouse button to finalize the new location of the standard deviation channel.

To recalculate where the standard deviation channel begins or ends, you must select the standard
deviation channel by positioning the cursor over one of its lines and clicking the left mouse button
once. Next, position the cursor over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the middle line; Click
and hold down the left mouse button to drag the calculation point of the standard deviation channel to
its new location. The standard deviation channel will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the
chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new begin/end
points.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the standard deviation channel
to access its contextual menu 267 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 267

4.3.1.1 Contextual Menu

A Standard Deviation Channel's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected standard deviation channel from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all standard deviation channels from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the standard deviation channel's properties 268 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the standard deviation channel back
to their default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected standard
deviation channel.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 268 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.3.1.2 Properties

Using the Standard Deviation Channel's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the channel lines

Change the beginning and ending values (price/date/time) of the channel's middle line
Extend the channel from its beginning/ending points
Change the data series that the channel is based on
Change the number of standard errors used to calculate the channel
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when the channel lines are
breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 269

4.3.2 Standard Error Channels

To draw a standard error channel in the active chart window you must select the Standard Error
Channel tool. With the Standard Error Channel tool selected, you must position the cursor over a
location in the active chart window to start the calculation of the standard error channel. Once a
starting position is selected you must click and hold down the left mouse button while drawing the
standard error channel on the chart.

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 271 of the standard error channel (by using
the contextual menu 270 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 271 .

To reposition the standard error channel, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is
hovering over one of its lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the channel to its new
location. Release the left mouse button to finalize the new location of the standard error channel.

To recalculate where the standard error channel begins or ends, you must select the standard error
channel by positioning the cursor over one of its lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next,
position the cursor over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the middle line; Click and hold
down the left mouse button to drag the calculation point of the standard error channel to its new
location. The standard error channel will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart
window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new begin/end points.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the standard error channel to
access its contextual menu 270 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 270 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.3.2.1 Contextual Menu

A Standard Error Channel's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected standard error channel from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all standard error channels from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the standard error channel's properties 271 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the standard error channel back to
their default values.

Add Comment

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 271

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected standard error
channel.

4.3.2.2 Properties

Using the Standard Error Channel's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the channel lines

Change the beginning and ending values (price/date/time) of the channel's middle line
Extend the channel from its beginning/ending points
Change the data series that the channel is based on
Change the number of standard errors used to calculate the channel
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when the channel lines are
breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 272 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.3.3 Raff Regression Channels

To draw a Raff regression channel in the active chart window you must select the Raff Regression
Channel tool. With the Raff Regression Channel tool selected, you must position the cursor over a
location in the active chart window to start the calculation of the Raff regression channel. Once a
starting position is selected you must click and hold down the left mouse button while drawing the Raff
regression channel on the chart.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 273

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 275 of the Raff regression channel (by using
the contextual menu 274 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 275 .

To reposition the Raff regression channel, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is
hovering over one of its lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the channel to its new
location. Release the left mouse button to finalize the new location of the Raff regression channel.

To recalculate where the Raff regression channel begins or ends, you must select the Raff
regression channel by positioning the cursor over one of its lines and clicking the left mouse button
once. Next, position the cursor over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the middle line; Click
and hold down the left mouse button to drag the calculation point of the Raff regression channel to its
new location. The Raff regression channel will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart
window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new begin/end points.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the Raff regression channel to
access its contextual menu 274 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 274 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.3.3.1 Contextual Menu

A Raff Regression Channel's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Raff regression channel from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Raff regression channels from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Raff regression channel's properties 275 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Raff regression channel back to
their default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Raff regression
channel.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 275

4.3.3.2 Properties

Using the Raff Regression Channel's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the channel lines

Change the beginning and ending values (price/date/time) of the channel's middle line
Extend the channel from its beginning/ending points
Change the data series that the channel is based on
Change the number of standard errors used to calculate the channel
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when the channel lines are
breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 276 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.3.4 Equidistant Channels

To draw an equidistant channel in the active chart window you must select the Equidistant Channel
Channel tool. With the Equidistant Channel tool selected, you must position the cursor over a
location in the active chart window to start the calculation of the equidistant channel. Once a starting
position is selected you must click and hold down the left mouse button while drawing the equidistant
channel on the chart.

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 278 of the equidistant channel (by using the
contextual menu 277 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 278 .

To reposition the equidistant channel, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is
hovering over the lower channel line and with the left mouse button held down, drag the channel to its
new location. Release the left mouse button to finalize the new location of the equidistant channel.

To recalculate where the equidistant channel begins or ends, you must select the equidistant
channel by positioning the cursor over the lower channel line and clicking the left mouse button once.
Next, position the cursor over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the line; Click and hold
down the left mouse button to drag the calculation point of the equidistant channel to its new location.
The equidistant channel will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart window. Release
the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new begin/end points. you may also use
the Properties 278 option of the contextual menu 277 to manually change the begin or end point using
specific price and date/time values. Lastly, the upper channel line may be moved to increase or
decrease the width of the channel. With the equidistant channel selected, you should click the left
mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the upper channel line and with the left mouse button held
down, drag the upper channel line to its new location. Release the left mouse button to finalize the new
location of the upper channel line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 277

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the equidistant channel to
access its contextual menu 277 for additional functionality.

4.3.4.1 Contextual Menu

A Equidistant Channel's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected equidistant channel from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all equidistant channels from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the equidistant channel's properties 278 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the equidistant channel back to their
default values.

Add Comment

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 278 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected equidistant
channel.

4.3.4.2 Properties

Using the Raff Regression Channel's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the channel lines

Change the beginning and ending values (price/date/time) of the channel's primary trend line
Extend the channel from its beginning/ending points
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when the channel lines are
breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 279

4.3.5 Andrews' Pitchforks

Originally developed by Dr. Alan Andrews, the Andrews' Pitchfork (a.k .a. median line studies) is
typically constructed of three parallel trend lines used to identify potential support and resistance levels
(additional tines can be specified; please refer to the tool's properties 281 for details). These trend lines
are created using three different reference points which are typically sequential peaks and troughs. The
first trend line (the median or middle line) begins at the left-most reference point (either a peak or trough)
and equally divides the distance between the two right-most reference points. This median line is usually
referred to as the pitchfork handle. The second and third trend lines are drawn parallel to the first trend
line, beginning at the two right-most reference points (a trough and a peak ). The second and third trend
lines are usually referred to as the pitchfork tines (or prongs).

To draw an Andrews' pitchfork in the active chart window you must select the Andrews' Pitchfork
tool. With the Andrews' Pitchfork tool selected, you must position the cursor over a location in the
active chart window to start the calculation of the Andrews' pitchfork. Once a starting position is
selected you must click and hold down the left mouse button while drawing the Andrews' pitchfork on
the chart. Please note: Correctly drawing or positioning the Andrews' pitchfork initially in the active
chart window will be very difficult, if not impossible, due to the tool's drawing behavior. It is strongly
recommended that the Andrews' pitchfork simply be placed on the chart in a way that, when selected,
all three reference points (identified as small black boxes, see screenshot below) will be visible. Once
the Andrews' pitchfork has been drawn in active chart window, you may then easily reposition each
reference point accordingly.

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 281 of the Andrews' pitchfork (by using the
contextual menu 280 ), reposition it, or change the reference points used for calculations 281 .

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 280 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

To reposition the Andrews' pitchfork, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is
hovering over any of the trend lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the pitchfork to its
new location. Release the left mouse button to finalize the new location of the Andrews' pitchfork.

To recalculate the Andrews' pitchfork's reference points, you must select the Andrews' pitchfork by
positioning the cursor over any of the trend lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position
the cursor over the box at the beginning of any trend line to be changed; Click and hold down the left
mouse button to drag the reference point of the Andrews' pitchfork to its new location. The Andrews'
pitchfork will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart window. Release the left mouse
button to finalize the redrawing according to the new reference points.

You may click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the Andrews' pitchfork to
access its contextual menu 280 for additional functionality.

4.3.5.1 Contextual Menu

An Andrew's Pitchfork's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Andrew's pitchfork from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Andrew's pitchfork's properties 281 window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 281

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Andrew's pitchfork back to their
default values.

4.3.5.2 Properties

Using the Andrew's Pitchfork's properties, you can:

Customize the tines (by click ing the [Define] button)

Choose to show or hide the tine labels
Change the tine labels' font attributes

By clicking the [Define] button, you can show or hide up to 16 custom tines (each with their own color,
width, and style). Each additional tine represents a multiple of the distance from the median (or middle)
line to the standard tines (tines with a multiple equal to 1).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 282 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.4 Shapes
4.4.1 Ellipses

To draw an ellipse in the active chart window you must select the Ellipse tool. With the Ellipse tool
selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to draw the ellipse. Once a
location is chosen, click and hold down the left mouse button to draw the shape in the chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 283

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 285 of the ellipse (by using the contextual menu
283 ), reposition it, or change its selection points.

To reposition the ellipse, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering anywhere inside the
shape and with the left mouse button held down, drag the ellipse to its new location. Release the left
mouse button to finalize the new location of the ellipse.

To recalculate the area that the ellipse covers, select the ellipse by positioning the cursor anywhere
inside the shape and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over any of the
selection points around the shape's border and then click and hold down the left mouse button to drag
the selection point to its new location. The ellipse will redraw as the cursor is moved. Release the left
mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new selection point(s).

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned anywhere inside the shape to
access its contextual menu 283 for additional functionality.

4.4.1.1 Contextual Menu

The contextual menu of an Ellipse 282 can be accessed by clicking the right mouse button while the
cursor is positioned anywhere in the shape.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

284 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

An Ellipse's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected ellipse from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all ellipses from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the ellipse's properties 285 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the ellipse back to their default
values.

Symmetric by Min

This command resizes the ellipse into a circle based on the smallest distance between 2 opposing
selection points.

Symmetric by Max

This command resizes the ellipse into a circle based on the largest distance between 2 opposing
selection points.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 285

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected ellipse.

4.4.1.2 Properties

Selecting the Properties option from an ellipse's contextual menu opens the Ellipse Properties window.

From the Colors section, you can change the color of the ellipse, the ellipse's border, and the border's

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 286 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

line style.

From the Calculations section, you can change the coordinates of the ellipse's selection points. You can
also change the drawing action the ellipse uses to redraw when one or more of its selection points are
changed. If the Move option is selected, the ellipse will change its location in the chart window while
maintaining its original size; if the Resize option is selected, the ellipse will change its size while
maintaining its current location in the chart window. You can also rotate the shape by changing the
Angle (from Horizontal) value.

From the Labels section, you can show or hide the ellipse's selection point labels. You can also change
the font attributes of the labels.

4.4.2 Rectangles

To draw a rectangle in the active chart window you must select the Rectangle tool. With the Rectangle
tool selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to draw the rectangle. Once a
location is chosen, click and hold down the left mouse button to draw the shape in the chart window.

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 288 of the rectangle (by using the contextual
menu 287 ), reposition it, or change its drawing points.

To reposition the rectangle, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering anywhere inside the
shape and with the left mouse button held down, drag the rectangle to its new location. Release the left
mouse button to finalize the new location of the rectangle.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 287

To recalculate the area that the rectangle covers, select the rectangle by positioning the cursor
anywhere inside the shape and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over and of
the drawing points around the shape's border; click and hold down the left mouse button to drag the
drawing point to its new location. The rectangle will redraw as the cursor is moved. Release the left
mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new drawing points.

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned anywhere inside the shape to
access its contextual menu 287 for additional functionality.

4.4.2.1 Contextual Menu

The contextual menu of a Rectangle 286 can be accessed by clicking the right mouse button while the
cursor is positioned anywhere in the shape.

A Rectangle's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected rectangle from the active chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 288 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Delete All

This command deletes all rectangles from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the rectangle's properties 288 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the rectangle back to their default
values.

Symmetric by Min

This command resizes the rectangle into a circle based on the smallest distance between 2
opposing selection points.

Symmetric by Max

This command resizes the rectangle into a circle based on the largest distance between 2 opposing
selection points.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected rectangle.

4.4.2.2 Properties

Selecting the Properties option from a rectangle's contextual menu opens the Rectangle Properties
window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 289

From the Colors section, you can change the color of the rectangle, the rectangle's border, and the
border's line style.

From the Calculations section, you can change the coordinates of the rectangle's selection points. You
can also change the drawing action the rectangle uses to redraw when one or more of its selection
points are changed. If the Move option is selected, the rectangle will change its location in the chart
window while maintaining its original size; if the Resize option is selected, the rectangle will change its
size while maintaining its current location in the chart window. You can also rotate the shape by
changing the Angle (from Horizontal) value.

From the Labels section, you can show or hide the rectangle's selection point labels. You can also
change the font attributes of the labels.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 290 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.4.3 Triangles

To draw a triangle in the active chart window you must select the Triangle tool. With the Triangle tool
selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to draw the triangle. Once a
location is chosen, click and hold down the left mouse button to draw the shape in the chart window.

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 292 of the triangle (by using the contextual
menu 291 ), reposition it, or change its drawing points.

To reposition the triangle, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering anywhere inside the
shape and with the left mouse button held down, drag the rectangle to its new location. Release the left
mouse button to finalize the new location of the triangle.

To recalculate the area that the triangle covers, select the rectangle by positioning the cursor anywhere
inside the shape and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over and of the
drawing points around the shape's border; click and hold down the left mouse button to drag the drawing
point to its new location. The triangle will redraw as the cursor is moved. Release the left mouse button
to finalize the redrawing according to the new drawing points.

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is positioned anywhere inside the shape to
access its contextual menu 291 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 291

4.4.3.1 Contextual Menu

The contextual menu of a Triangle 290 can be accessed by clicking the right mouse button while the
cursor is positioned anywhere in the shape.

A Triangle's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected triangle from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all triangles from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the triangle's properties 292 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the triangle back to their default
values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected triangle.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 292 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.4.3.2 Properties

Selecting the Properties option from a triangle's contextual menu opens the Triangle Properties
window.

From the Colors section, you can change the color of the triangle, the triangle's border, and the border's
line style.

From the Calculations section, you can change the coordinates of the triangle's selection points. You
can also change the drawing action the triangle uses to redraw when one or more of its selection points
are changed. If the Move option is selected, the triangle will change its location in the chart window while
maintaining its original size; if the Resize option is selected, the rectangle will change its size while

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 293

maintaining its current location in the chart window. You can also rotate the shape by changing the
Angle (from Horizontal) value.

From the Labels section, you can show or hide the triangle's selection point labels. You can also
change the font attributes of the labels.

4.5 Fibonacci
4.5.1 Fibonacci Retracements

To draw Fibonacci Retracements in the active chart window you must select the Fibonacci
Retracements tool. With the Fibonacci Retracements tool selected, position the cursor over a
location in the active chart window to draw the Fibonacci Retracements. Once a location is chosen,
click and hold down the left mouse button to draw the lines in the chart window.

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 295 of the Fibonacci Retracements (by using
the contextual menu 294 ), reposition them, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 295 .

To reposition the Fibonacci Retracements, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over
any of the lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the lines to their new location. Release
the left mouse button to finalize the new location of the Fibonacci Retracements.

To recalculate where the Fibonacci Retracements begins or ends, select the Fibonacci
Retracements by positioning the cursor over any of the lines and clicking the left mouse button once.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 294 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Next, position the cursor over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the underlying trend line;
Click and hold down the left mouse button to drag the calculation point of the Fibonacci Retracements
to its new location. The Fibonacci Retracements will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the
chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new begin/end
points.

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over any of the Fibonacci
Retracements to access its contextual menu 303 for additional functionality.

4.5.1.1 Contextual Menu

A Fibonacci Retracement's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Fibonacci retracements from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Fibonacci retracements from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Fibonacci retracement's properties 295 window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 295

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Fibonacci retracements back to
their default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Fibonacci
retracements.

4.5.1.2 Properties

Using the Fibonacci Retracement's properties, you can:

Customize the Fibonacci lines (by click ing the [Define] button)
Extend the Fibonacci lines beyond their base line's beginning/ending points
Choose to show (left, right, or left+right) or hide the Percent and/or Price line labels
Change the line labels' font attributes
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when any Fibonacci line is
breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

296 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

By clicking the [Define] button, you can show or hide up to 16 custom Fibonacci lines (each with their
own color, width, and style).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 297

4.5.2 Fibonacci Expansions

To draw Fibonacci Expansions in the active chart window you must select the Fibonacci
Expansions tool. With the Fibonacci Expansions tool selected, position the cursor over a location in
the active chart window to draw the Fibonacci Expansions. Once a location is chosen, click and hold
down the left mouse button to draw the lines in the chart window. This will draw the underlying A->B line.
The underlying B->C line will be auto-drawn to a 50% retracement level of the underlying A->B trend line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

298 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 300 of the Fibonacci Expansions (by using
the contextual menu 299 ), reposition them, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 300 .

To reposition the Fibonacci Expansions, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over
any of the lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the lines to their new location. Release
the left mouse button to finalize the new location of the Fibonacci Expansions.

To recalculate where the Fibonacci Expansions begins or ends, select the Fibonacci Expansions by
positioning the cursor over any of the lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the
cursor over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the underlying A->B trend line or B->C trend
line; Click and hold down the left mouse button to drag the calculation point of the Fibonacci
Expansions to its new location. The Fibonacci Expansions will redraw as the cursor is moved around
within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new
begin/end points.

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over any of the Fibonacci Expansions
to access its contextual menu 299 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 299

4.5.2.1 Contextual Menu

A Fibonacci Expansion's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Fibonacci expansions from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Fibonacci expansions from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Fibonacci expansion's properties 300 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Fibonacci expansions back to
their default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Fibonacci
expansions.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 300 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.5.2.2 Properties

Using the Fibonacci Expansion's properties, you can:

Customize the Fibonacci lines (by click ing the [Define] button)
Extend the Fibonacci lines beyond their base line's beginning/ending points
Choose to show (left, right, or left+right) or hide the Percent and/or Price line labels
Change the line labels' font attributes
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when any Fibonacci line is
breached

By clicking the [Define] button, you can show or hide up to 16 custom Fibonacci lines (each with their
own color, width, and style).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 301

4.5.3 Fibonacci Time Extensions

To draw vertical Fibonacci lines in the active chart window you must select the Fibonacci Time
Extension tool. With the Fibonacci Time Extension tool selected, position the cursor over a location
in the active chart window to draw the Fibonacci Time Extensions. Once a location is chosen, click
and hold down the left mouse button to draw the lines in the chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

302 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 304 of the Fibonacci Time Extensions (by
using the contextual menu 303 ), reposition them, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 304
.

To reposition the Fibonacci Time Extensions, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering
over any of the lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the lines to their new location.
Release the left mouse button to finalize the new location of the Fibonacci Time Extensions.

To recalculate where the Fibonacci Time Extensions begin or end, select the Fibonacci Time
Extensions by positioning the cursor over any of the lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next,
position the cursor over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the underlying trend line; Click
and hold down the left mouse button to drag the calculation point of the Fibonacci Time Extensions to
its new location. The Fibonacci Time Extensions will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the
chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new begin/end
points.

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over any of the Fibonacci Time
Extensions to access its contextual menu 303 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 303

4.5.3.1 Contextual Menu

A Fibonacci Time Extension's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Fibonacci time extensions from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Fibonacci time extensions from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Fibonacci time extension's properties 304 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Fibonacci time extensions back
to their default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Fibonacci time
extensions.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 304 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.5.3.2 Properties

Using the Fibonacci Time Extension's properties, you can:

Customize the Fibonacci lines (by click ing the [Define] button)
Choose to show or hide the Percent line labels
Change the line labels' font attributes

By clicking the [Define] button, you can show or hide up to 16 custom Fibonacci lines (each with their
own color, width, and style).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 305

4.5.4 Fibonacci Channels

To draw a Fibonacci Channel in the active chart window you must select the Fibonacci Channel tool.
With the Fibonacci Channel tool selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart
window to draw the Fibonacci Channel. Once a location is chosen, click and hold down the left mouse
button to draw the lines in the chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

306 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 308 of the Fibonacci Channel (by using the
contextual menu 307 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 308 .

To reposition the Fibonacci Channel, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over any
of the lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the lines to their new location. Release the
left mouse button to finalize the new location of the Fibonacci Channel.

To recalculate where the Fibonacci Channel begins or ends, select the Fibonacci Channel by
positioning the cursor over any of the lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the
cursor over either the box at the beginning or the ending of the underlying trend line; Click and hold down
the left mouse button to drag the calculation point of the Fibonacci Channel to its new location. The
Fibonacci Channel will redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart window. Release the left
mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new begin/end points.

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over any of the Fibonacci Channel
lines to access its contextual menu 307 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 307

4.5.4.1 Contextual Menu

A Fibonacci Channel's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Fibonacci channel from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Fibonacci channels from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Fibonacci channel's properties 308 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Fibonacci channel back to their
default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Fibonacci
channel.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 308 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.5.4.2 Properties

Using the Fibonacci Channel's properties, you can:

Customize the Fibonacci lines (by click ing the [Define] button)
Extend the Fibonacci lines beyond their base line's beginning/ending points
Choose to show or hide the Percent line labels
Change the line labels' font attributes
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when any Fibonacci line is
breached

By clicking the [Define] button, you can show or hide up to 16 custom Fibonacci lines (each with their
own color, width, and style).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 309

4.5.5 Fibonacci Fans

To draw a Fibonacci Fan in the active chart window you must select the Fibonacci Fan tool. With the
Fibonacci Fan tool selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to draw the
Fibonacci Fan. Once a location is chosen, click and hold down the left mouse button to draw the lines
in the chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

310 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 312 of the Fibonacci Fan (by using the
contextual menu 311 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 312 .

To reposition the Fibonacci Fan, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over one of its
lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the fan to its new location. Release the left mouse
button to finalize the new location of the Fibonacci Fan.

To recalculate where the Fibonacci Fan begins or ends, select the Fibonacci Fan by positioning the
cursor over one of its lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over either
the box at the beginning or the ending of the underlying trend line; Click and hold down the left mouse
button to drag the calculation point of the Fibonacci Fan to its new location. The Fibonacci Fan will
redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize
the redrawing according to the new begin/end points.

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the Fibonacci Fan to access its
contextual menu 311 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 311

4.5.5.1 Contextual Menu

A Fibonacci Fan's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Fibonacci fan from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Fibonacci fans from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Fibonacci fan's properties 312 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Fibonacci fan back to their
default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Fibonacci fan.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 312 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.5.5.2 Properties

Using the Fibonacci Fan's properties, you can:

Customize the Fibonacci lines (by click ing the [Define] button)
Extend the Fibonacci lines beyond their base line's beginning/ending points
Choose to show or hide the Percent line labels
Change the line labels' font attributes
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when any Fibonacci line is
breached

By clicking the [Define] button, you can show or hide up to 16 custom Fibonacci lines (each with their
own color, width, and style).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 313

4.5.6 Fibonacci Arcs

To draw a Fibonacci Arc in the active chart window you must select the Fibonacci Arc tool. With the
Fibonacci Arc tool selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to draw the
Fibonacci Arc. Once a location is chosen, click and hold down the left mouse button to draw the lines
in the chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

314 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 316 of the Fibonacci Arc (by using the
contextual menu 315 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 316 .

To reposition the Fibonacci Arc, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over one of its
lines and with the left mouse button held down, drag the arc to its new location. Release the left mouse
button to finalize the new location of the Fibonacci Arc.

To recalculate where the Fibonacci Arc begins or ends, select the Fibonacci Arc by positioning the
cursor over one of its lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over either
the box at the beginning or the ending of the underlying trend line; Click and hold down the left mouse
button to drag the calculation point of the Fibonacci Arc to its new location. The Fibonacci Arc will
redraw as the cursor is moved around within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize
the redrawing according to the new begin/end points.

You click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the Fibonacci Arc to access its
contextual menu 315 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 315

4.5.6.1 Contextual Menu

A Fibonacci Arc's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Fibonacci arc from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Fibonacci arcs from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Fibonacci arc's properties 316 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Fibonacci arc back to their
default values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Fibonacci arc.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 316 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.5.6.2 Properties

Using the Fibonacci Arc's properties, you can:

Customize the Fibonacci lines (by click ing the [Define] button)
Extend the Fibonacci lines beyond their base line's beginning/ending points into a full arc
Choose to show or hide the Percent line labels
Change the line labels' font attributes
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when any Fibonacci line is
breached

By clicking the [Define] button, you can show or hide up to 16 custom Fibonacci lines (each with their
own color, width, and style).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 317

4.6 Gann
4.6.1 Gann Lines

To draw a Gann line in the active chart window you must select the Gann Line tool. With the Gann
Line tool selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to start the calculation
of the Gann line. This is typically from a low or high point in price. Once a starting position is selected,
click the left mouse button to draw the Gann on the chart. The Gann line will initially be drawn at an
exact 45 degree angle.

The Gann line at 45 degrees is commonly referred to as the 1x1 ratio; 1 unit of time is equal to a 1 unit
rise (or decline) in the instrument's measure of price. In Forex, the smallest unit of price is called a pip.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

318 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 320 of the Gann line (by using the contextual
menu 319 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 323 .

To reposition the Gann line, you should click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over it
and with the left mouse button held down, drag the line to its new location. Release the left mouse
button to finalize the new location of the Gann line.

To recalculate where the Gann line begins or ends, select the Gann line by positioning the cursor over
it and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over either the box at the beginning
or in the middle of the line (see screenshot above); Click and hold down the left mouse button to drag
the calculation point of the Gann line to its new location. The Gann line will redraw as the cursor is
moved around within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according
to the new begin/end points.

As an alternate method of recalculation, you can manually adjust the beginning point and/or rise and run
values used for calculation 320 of the Gann line by clicking the right mouse button once while the cursor
is hovering over the line and selecting Properties from the contextual menu 319 .

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the Gann line to access its
contextual menu 319 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 319

4.6.1.1 Contextual Menu

A Gann Line's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Gann line from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Gann lines from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Gann line's properties 320 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Gann line back to their default
values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Gann line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 320 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.6.1.2 Properties

Using the Gann Line's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the Gann line

Change the run of the line (the # of bars between the beginning and ending points used for
calculation)
Change the rise of the line (the # of pips between the beginning and ending points used for
calculation)
Change the beginning values (price/date/time) of the Gann line
Extend the Gann line from its beginning point
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when the Gann line is breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 321

4.6.2 Gann Fans

To draw a Gann Fan in the active chart window you must select the Gann Fan tool. With the Gann
Fan tool selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to draw the Gann Fan.
Once a location is chosen, click the left mouse button to draw the Gann Fan in the chart window. The
Gann fan will initially be drawn with the middle (base) line at an exact 45 degree angle.

The Gann line at 45 degrees is commonly referred to as the 1x1 ratio; 1 unit of time is equal to a 1 unit
rise (or decline) in the instrument's measure of price. In Forex, the smallest unit of price is called a pip.
Other important lines used to construct the Gann fan (from top to bottom) are:

1x8 - 82.5 degrees

1x4 - 75 degrees
1x3 - 71.25 degrees
1x2 - 63.75 degrees
1x1 - 45 degrees (base line - most important according to Gann!)
2x1 - 26.25 degrees
3x1 - 18.75 degrees
4x1 - 15 degrees
8x1 - 7.5 degrees

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 323 of the Gann Fan (by using the contextual
menu 322 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 320 .

To reposition the Gann Fan, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over one of its lines
and with the left mouse button held down, drag the fan to its new location. Release the left mouse button
to finalize the new location of the Gann Fan.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 322 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

To recalculate where the Gann Fan begins or ends, select the Gann Fan by positioning the cursor over
one of its lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over either the box at
the beginning or along the 1x1 line; Click and hold down the left mouse button to drag the calculation
point of the Gann Fan to its new location. The Gann Fan will redraw as the cursor is moved around
within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new
begin/end points.

As an alternate method of recalculation, you can manually adjust the beginning point and/or rise and run
values used for calculation 323 of the Gann fan by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is
hovering over any of its lines and selecting Properties from the contextual menu 322 .

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the Gann Fan to access its
contextual menu 322 for additional functionality.

4.6.2.1 Contextual Menu

A Gann Fan's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Gann fan from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Gann fans from the active chart window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 323

Properties

This command opens the Gann fan's properties 323 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Gann fan back to their default
values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Gann fan.

4.6.2.2 Properties

Using the Gann Fan's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the Gann lines

Change the run of the Gann fan's base line (the # of bars between the beginning and ending points
used for calculation)
Change the rise of the Gann fan's base line (the # of pips between the beginning and ending points
used for calculation)
Change the beginning values (price/date/time) of the Gann fan's base line
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when any Gann line is breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 324 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.6.3 Gann Grids

To draw a Gann Grid in the active chart window you must select the Gann Grid tool. With the Gann
Grid tool selected, position the cursor over a location in the active chart window to draw the Gann Grid.
Once a location is chosen, click the left mouse button to draw the Gann Grid in the chart window. The
Gann Grid will initially be drawn with the middle (base) line at an exact 45 degree angle.

The Gann line at 45 degrees is commonly referred to as the 1x1 ratio; 1 unit of time is equal to a 1 unit
rise (or decline) in the instrument's measure of price. In Forex, the smallest unit of price is called a pip.
The 1x1 ratio 45 degree line is considered to be the most important line for measuring the price trend
according to Gann.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 325

Once drawn on the chart, you can change the properties 327 of the Gann Grid (by using the contextual
menu 326 ), reposition it, or change the begin/end points used for calculations 327 .

To reposition the Gann Grid, click the left mouse button while the cursor is hovering over one of its lines
and with the left mouse button held down, drag the fan to its new location. Release the left mouse button
to finalize the new location of the Gann Grid.

To recalculate where the Gann Grid begins or ends, select the Gann Grid by positioning the cursor
over one of its lines and clicking the left mouse button once. Next, position the cursor over either the box
at the beginning or along the 1x1 line; Click and hold down the left mouse button to drag the calculation
point of the Gann Grid to its new location. The Gann Grid will redraw as the cursor is moved around
within the chart window. Release the left mouse button to finalize the redrawing according to the new
begin/end points.

As an alternate method of recalculation, you can manually adjust the beginning point and/or rise and run
values used for calculation 327 of the Gann Grid by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is
hovering over any of its lines and selecting Properties from the contextual menu 326 .

You can click the right mouse button while the cursor is hovering over the Gann Grid to access its
contextual menu 326 for additional functionality.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 326 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4.6.3.1 Contextual Menu

A Gann Grid's contextual menu contains the following commands:

Delete

This command deletes the selected Gann grid from the active chart window.

Delete All

This command deletes all Gann grids from the active chart window.

Properties

This command opens the Gann grid's properties 327 window.

Set to Default

This command resets any custom properties currently used by the Gann grid back to their default
values.

Add Comment

This command adds a comment 243 and associates it specifically with the selected Gann grid.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Drawing Tools 327

4.6.3.2 Properties

Using the Gann Grid's properties, you can:

Change the color, width, and style of the Gann lines

Change the run of the Gann grid's base line (the # of bars between the beginning and ending points
used for calculation)
Change the rise of the Gann grid's base line (the # of pips between the beginning and ending points
used for calculation)
Change the beginning values (price/date/time) of the Gann grid's base line
Choose to be alerted (in real-time and/or when the bar closes) if/when any Gann line is breached

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

VT Trader Scripting Language

Part

V
 VT Trader Scripting Language 329

5 VT Trader Scripting Language

VT Trader's scripting language is simple, yet powerful. It enables you to create (and/or edit) custom
indicators and trading systems using the Indicators Builder 182 and/or Trading Systems Builder 205 . It's
extremely important that you take the time necessary to thoroughly read through this section of the help
manual. It explains VT Trader's scripting language's basic structure and syntax, lexical elements, and
instruction processing rules.

VT Trader's Scripting Language Structure

An indicator and/or trading system built with VT Trader's scripting language is constructed using one or
more statements. Each statement consists of an output variable, the variable assignment (:=), followed
by one or more logical expressions containing any combination of various input variables 195 , output
variables 200 , other scripting language elements 330 (see below), and ending with the statement
terminator (;).

VT Trader's scripting language evaluates each statement in a formula script one time for each bar loaded
into the chart window and continues to evaluate each statement one time per each new, incoming price
tick. Statements in a formula script are evaluated starting from the first (top) statement and ending with
the last (bottom) statement.

Important Notes:

* Each statement must be terminated by semicolon (;). Multiple lines of code will be treated as a single
statement until the terminating semicolon (allowing you to break apart long block s of code into separate
lines in the editor to increase your code's readability and clarity).

* Variable names are not case-sensitive; for example, using Periods is the same as using periods.
Variable names may include only letters and numbers. Use of the underscore ( _ ) character is also
allowed. Variable names may not include any spaces or begin with a number. Variables must not be the
same name as any existing function 334 or reserved function 400 , constant 333 , or predefined data array
334 . Additionally, no output variables 200 should have the same name as any input variables 195 within
the same formula script.

* When using fractional integers (integers with decimal places), if the whole number portion of the
fractional integer is 0, the 0 must be included in the formula. For example, .0030 is incorrect. 0.0030 is
correct; if the initial 0 is not included VT Trader will not recognize and evaluate the fractional integer
correctly.

Correct Statement Examples:

OutputVariable := Mov( C,12,E ) > Mov( C,26,E ) ;

OutputVariable1 := Mov( C,12,E ) ;
_OutputVariable := 26 ;
_OutputVariable_2 := (Mov( C,12,E ) > Mov( C,26,E )) AND C > ref(C,-1) ;
OutputVariable := abs(Mov( C,12,E ) - Mov( C,26,E )) > 0.0010 ;

Incorrect Statement Examples:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 330 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

OutputVariable 1 = Mov( C,12,E ) > Mov( C,26,E ) ; {the variable's name

and the variable's assignment punctuator is incorrect}
2OutputVariable := Mov( C,12,E ) {the variable's name is incorrect and
the statement terminator is missing}
Close = 26 ; {Close is a predefined data array and the variable's
assignment punctuator is incorrect}
InputVariable := InputVariable ; {the output variable and input variable
cannot have same name}
OutputVariable := abs(Mov( C,12,E ) - Mov( C,26,E )) > .0010 ; {the
fractional integer .0010 must be specified as 0.0010}

VT Trader's Scripting Language Elements

The following elements help form the basis of VT Trader's scripting language:

Comments 330
Punctuators (Separators) 331
Operators 331
Constants 333
Pre-Defined Data Arrays 334
Functions (Identifiers) - Alphabetical List 334
Functions (Identifiers) - Reserved For Future Use 400

To learn more about a particular element, please click on its name.

5.1 Comments

Comments are pieces of text used to annotate a formula script. Comments are for the programmer's
use only; they are stripped from the source code before parsing.

VT Trader's scripting language supports two types of comments.

Multiple-line Comments are any sequence of characters placed inside a set of balanced brackets ( {
and } ). The comment terminates at the first occurrence of right bracket " } " following the initial left
bracket " { ". { } can also be used to define only certain text within a single line as a comment as well.
However, comments delineated with a set of balanced brackets cannot be nested.

Single-line Comments are any sequence of characters placed after two adjacent slashes ( // ) in any
position within a line of code and extending until the next new line. Comments delineated by two
adjacent slashes ( // ) within a single line can be nested within comments delineated by a set of
balanced brackets ( { and } ). Comments delineated by two adjacent slashes ( // ) cannot be the last line
of code in the formula script.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 331

5.2 Punctuators

Punctuators (a.k .a. Separators) are used to maintain the basic syntax of VT Trader's scripting
language. The available punctuators and their descriptions are defined in the table below.

PUNCTUATOR DESCRIPTION
:= Colon grouped with Equal sign; Variable Assignment
; Semi-colon; Statement Terminator
, Comma; Separates the parameters of a function argument list
( ) Parentheses; Used to override normal order of precedence, group or
isolate conditional expressions, and indicate function calls and function
parameters

5.3 Operators

VT Trader's scripting language provides several operators that allow you to manipulate functions 334 and
values to create more complex expressions. The different types of operators available are:

Mathematical Operators 331

Relational Operators 332
Logical Operators 332

Operators are always evaluated in a specific order. This order is called an order of precedence. Each
type of operator has its own order of precedence within its group and each group has an overall order of
precedence. The exact order of the overall order of precedence is Logical Operators 332 , then Relational
Operators 332 , and lastly Mathematical Operators 331 .

Parentheses are always evaluated first so they can be used to control the operation precedence. This
allows the user to bypass part of the order of precedence to perform the calculations within the
parentheses first. However, the order of precedence is still enforced within the parentheses. If there are
multiple sets of parentheses in use, operations within the innermost parentheses are evaluated first.

5.3.1 Mathematical Operators

Mathematical operators are used to perform specific mathematical computations. The available
mathematical operators and their descriptions are defined in the table below.

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 332 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
() Parentheses

Mathematical operators are always evaluated in a specific order. The exact order is Parentheses, M
ultiplication, Division, Addition, and then Subtraction. A common English expression used to remember
this order is: Please My Dear Aunt Sally.

Since parentheses are evaluated first, they can be used to control the operation precedence. This allows
you to bypass part of the order of precedence to perform the calculations within the parentheses first.
However, the order of precedence is still enforced within the parentheses.

If there is more than one instance of a particular type of mathematical operation (i.e. more than one
multiplication operation) within a set of parentheses the respective operations are evaluated from left to
right.

If there are multiple sets of parentheses in use, operations within the innermost parentheses are
evaluated first.

5.3.2 Relational Operators

Relational operators are used to perform standard comparisons. The result of a comparison will
always be True or False (1 or 0 respectively). The available relational operators are:

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
> Greater Than
< Less Than
>= Greater Than or Equal To
<= Less Than or Equal To
= Equal To
<> Not Equal To

Relational operators are always evaluated from left to right because they all have the same
precedence. Parentheses can be used to further control the order of precedence when necessary.

5.3.3 Logical Operators

Logical operators (a.k .a. Booleans) are used to combine two true/false expressions. There are 3
logical operators available in VT Trader's scripting language: AND, OR, and NOT

AND is used when the result of both true/false expressions must be true.
OR is used when the result of either one or both of the two true/false expressions must be true.
NOT is used when you want the opposite value (True or False) of an expression.

The tables below define the resulting values when using AND and OR.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 333

EXPRESSION 1 EXPRESSION 2 AND RESULT

True True True
True False False
False True False
False False False

EXPRESSION 1 EXPRESSION 2 OR RESULT

True True True
True False True
False True True
False False False

When using multiple AND's, OR's, and NOT's they are always evaluated in the order they appear, from
left to right, because they all have the same precedence. Parentheses can be used to further control the
order of precedence when necessary.

5.4 Constants

A constant is an predefined fixed value (or programming calculation) in VT Trader's scripting language
that cannot be altered. The available constants and their descriptions are defined in the tables below.

GLOBAL DESCRIPTION
Pi 3.1415926535897932385
NULL Not Defined; Empty Variable

MOVING AVERAGE (MOV()) FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

S Simple moving average
W Weighted moving average
E Exponential moving average
SW Sine Weighted moving average
TRI Triangle moving average
EP End Point moving average
VOL Volume-Adjusted moving average

RATE OF CHANGE (ROC()) FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Points Calculate ROC() 376 using points (pips)
difference
Percent Calculate ROC() 376 using percentage
difference

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 334 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

5.5 Predefined Data Arrays

The following Predefined Data Arrays have been provided in VT Trader's scripting language. The
Predefined Data Arrays can be referenced in Functions 334 using either their Full Name or
Abbreviation. Please note that data arrays are not case-sensitive (i.e.: Open is the same as open).

FULL NAME ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION

Close C Close price
Open O Open price
High H High price
Low L Low price

Median Price MP or MP() (High + Low) / 2

Typical Price TP or TP() (High + Low + Close) / 3
Weighted Close WC or WC() ((Close * 2) + High + Low) / 4

haClose haC Heikin-Ashi Close price

haOpen haO Heikin-Ashi Open price
haHigh haH Heikin-Ashi High price
haLow haL Heikin-Ashi Low price

Volume V # of incoming price ticks

during bar

Prev Prev See PREV 374 function

5.6 Functions

At a basic level, functions are nothing more than a predefined, self-contained set of calculations that
can be used in comparisons and calculations. Each function has a specified name and returns a value
based on its underlying calculation routine. VT Trader's scripting language includes a large number of
built-in functions ranging from simple price calculations and indicators to specifically-designed
functions used in conjunction with technical analysis.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 335

The following alphabetical list of functions are available for use in VT Trader's scripting language:

Absolute Value 338

Arc Tangent 339
Aroon Down 339
Aroon Up 340
Average True Range 340

Bar Count 341

Bar Index 341
Bars Since 342
Bollinger Band 343
Bollinger Band Bottom 342
Bollinger Band Top 342
Buy Position Count 344

Ceiling 344
Commodity Channel Index 345
Cosine 346
Cross 346
Cumulate 348

Day Of Month 348

Day Of Week 349
Detrended Price Oscillator 349

Error 350
Event Count 351
Exponent 354

Floor 355
Fraction 355

Gap Down 356

Gap Up 356

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

336 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Highest 357
Highest Bars Ago 357
Highest High Value 358
Highest High Value Bars Ago 359
Highest Since 359
Highest Since Bars Ago 360

If () 360
Inside 362
Integer 362
IsDefined 362
IsUndefined 363

Linear Regression Indicator 363

Linear Regression Slope 364
Logarithm 364
Lowest 364
Lowest Bars Ago 364
Lowest Low Value 365
Lowest Low Value Bars Ago 366
Lowest Since 366
Lowest Since Bars Ago 367

Mama 367
Maximum 368
Median Price 368
Midpoint 369
Minimum 369
Minute 369
Modulus 370
Month 370
Moving Average 371

Negative 371

Outside 371

Parabolic SAR 372

Peak Value 373
Position Count 373
Power 373

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 337

Precision 374

Rally 376
Random 376
Rate of Change 376
Reaction 377
Reference 377
Relative Strength Index (RSI) 379
Round 379

Sell Position Count 379

Signal Flag 380
Signal Hold 382
Signal Remove 384
Signal Remove Span 387
Sine 389
Square Root 389
Standard Deviation 389
Standard Error 390
Stochastic Momentum Index 390
Stochastic Oscillator 391
Summation 392
Symbol Digits 392
Symbol Point 394

Typical Price 397

Ultimate Oscillator 397

Value When 398

Vertical Horizontal Filter 398

Weighted Close 399

Williams %R 399

Year 400

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 338 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Zli 400

5.6.1 Absolute Value

Absolute Value

abs (DATA ARRAY)

The function calculates the Absolute Value of the DATA ARRAY.

The formula abs(-12) will return +12;

The formula abs(12) will also return +12.

5.6.2 Account Status

Account Status
* This function is not and never has been officially supported
** It is strongly recommended to use any of the PositionCount(), BuyPositionCount(), and/or
SellPositionCount() functions instead of the AccountStatus() function.

AccountStatus ()

This function returns one of four possible constants for any given tick (i.e. incoming price):
No_Position_Active, Buy_Position_Active, Sell_Position_Active, or Both_Position_Active. For this
reason, it is strongly advised that AccountStatus() not be used in trading systems that operate on the
premise of "always in the market" (i.e. when one position gets closed another position gets immediately
opened in the opposing direction, etc.).

No_Position_Active = This constant indicates that there are no open buy or sell positions in the
instrument the trading system is attached to based on the trading system's assigned account.

Buy_Position_Active = This constant indicates that there is at least one open buy position in the
instrument the trading system is attached to based on the trading system's assigned account.

Sell_Position_Active = This constant indicates that there is at least one open sell position in the
instrument the trading system is attached to based on the trading system's assigned account.

Both_Position_Active = This constant indicates that there is at least one open buy position and at
least one open sell position in the instrument the trading system is attached to based on the trading
system's assigned account.

OpenBuy:= AccountStatus()=No_Position_Active AND cross(C,mov(C,10,S));

CloseBuy:= AccountStatus()=Buy_Position_Active AND cross(mov(C,10,S),C);

* Please note, in this example (assuming OpenBuy and CloseBuy are logical variables and the trading

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 339

system this code is included in is running in Auto-Trade mode), in order for AccountStatus() to function
properly OpenBuy and CloseBuy cannot both equal true on the same price tick; if such a thing were to
happen then only OpenBuy would be able to equal true and be able to execute its associated automated
trading request because it is evaluated in the code before CloseBuy. If CloseBuy needed to execute its
associated automated trading order on the same tick as OpenBuy it would not be able to because
AccountStatus() cannot return No_Position_Active and Buy_Position_Active at the same time for that
same tick.

5.6.3 Arc Tangent

Arc Tangent

atan (Y DATA ARRAY, X DATA ARRAY)

The function returns the Arc Tangent of Y/X.

The value is returned in degrees from 0 to 359.9.

Also acceptable is...

atan (DATA ARRAY)

The function returns the Arc Tangent of DATA ARRAY.

The value is returned in radians from -Pi/2 to Pi/2.

For translation to degrees in a range of -90 to +90 it is necessary to use:

Out:= ATAN(DATA ARRAY) * 180/Pi;

{where Pi is global constant 3.1415926535897932385}

5.6.4 Aroon Down

Aroon Down

AroonDown (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

Calculates the Aroon Down component of the Aroon Indicator. Use of the DATA ARRAY parameter is
only necessary if the user wishes to substitute a DATA ARRAY other than the Low price for the
calculations. Otherwise, it is acceptable to use the AroonDown() function without including it such as:

AroonDown (PERIODS)

The function AroonDown(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS) calculates the Aroon Down component of the
Aroon Indicator by formula:

{Aroon Down component of the Aroon Indicator}

_AroonDown := ((PERIODS - LLVBars(DATA ARRAY,PERIODS+1)) / PERIODS) * 100;

{end}

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 340 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The function AroonDown(Low,14) calculates the Aroon Down component of the Aroon Indicator over
14 periods.

5.6.5 Aroon Up

Aroon Up

AroonUp (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

Calculates the Aroon Up component of the Aroon Indicator. Use of the DATA ARRAY parameter is only
necessary if the user wishes to substitute a DATA ARRAY other than the High price for the calculations.
Otherwise, it is acceptable to use the AroonUp() function without including it such as:

AroonUp (PERIODS)

The function AroonUp(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS) calculates the Aroon Up component of the Aroon
Indicator by formula:

{Aroon Down component of the Aroon Indicator}

_AroonUp := ((PERIODS - HHVBars(DATA ARRAY,PERIODS+1)) / PERIODS) * 100;
{end}

The function AroonUp(High,14) calculates the Aroon Up component of the Aroon Indicator over 14
periods.

5.6.6 Average True Range

Average True Range

atr (PERIODS)

This function calculates the predefined Average True Range (ATR) indicator.

The function ATR(PERIODS) calculates the Average True Range (ATR) indicator by formula:

{Average True Range (ATR)}

TH:= If(Ref(Close,-1) > High, Ref(Close,-1), High);

TL:= If(Ref(Close,-1) < Low, Ref(Close,-1), Low);
TR:= TH-TL;
_ATR:= mov(TR, PERIODS, S);

{end}

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 341

The formula atr(20) calculates the Average True Range (ATR) indicator over 20 periods.

5.6.7 Bar Count

Bar Count

BarCount ()

This function returns the total number of bars loaded in the chart previous to (and including) any given
bar. Stated more simply, this function assigns a numerical value to each bar in the chart starting with
the first (left most) bar and assigning it the number 1 and then incrementing the count by +1 for each
additional bar loaded in the chart.

By example, the formula:

Out:= BarCount();

can also be written as...

Out:= cum(1);

However, the BarCount() function processes much faster than cum(1) when included in an indicator
or trading sytem since it is an internal function.

5.6.8 Bar Index

Bar Index

BarIndex ()

BarIndex() returns zero-based bar numbers. This function returns the total number of bars loaded in
the chart previous to (and including) any given bar. Stated more simply, this function assigns a
numerical value to each bar in the chart starting with the first (left most) bar and assigning it the number
0 and then incrementing the count by +1 for each additional bar loaded in the chart.

By example, the formula:

Out:= BarIndex();

can also be written as...

Out:= cum(1) - 1;

or...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 342 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Out:= if(prev(null)=null,0,ref(BarCount(),-1));

However, the BarIndex() function processes much faster than cum(1)-1 when included in an
indicator or trading sytem since it is an internal function.

5.6.9 Bars Since

Bars Since

BarsSince (DATA ARRAY)

This function calculates the number of bars (time periods) that have passed since DATA ARRAY was
true.

The formula BarsSince(RSI(14)>50) will return the value equal to the number of periods (bars) that
have passed since the 14-period RSI was greater than 50. The value is calculated using all data loaded
in the chart.

5.6.10 Bollinger Bands (Bottom Band)

Bollinger Bands (Bottom Band)

BBandBot (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD, DEVIATIONS)

This function calculates the Bottom Bollinger Band component of the Bollinger Bands indicator of DATA
ARRAY using METHOD calculation method and shifted downwards DEVIATIONS standard deviations.

Valid methods are SIMPLE, WEIGHTED, EXPONENTIAL, SINE WEIGHTED, TRIANGLE, END POINT
, and VOLUME-ADJUSTED (Abbreviated respectively as S, W, E, SW, TRI, EP, and VOL).

The formula BBandBot(close, 20, S, 2) calculates the Bottom Bollinger Band of Close prices
over 20 PERIODS using the SIMPLE method and shifted 2 DEVIATIONS downwards.

5.6.11 Bollinger Bands (Top Band)

Bollinger Bands (Top Band)

BBandTop (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD, DEVIATIONS)

This function calculates the Top Bollinger Band component of the Bollinger Bands indicator of DATA
ARRAY using METHOD calculation method and shifted upwards DEVIATIONS standard deviations.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 343

Valid methods are SIMPLE, WEIGHTED, EXPONENTIAL, SINE WEIGHTED, TRIANGLE, END POINT
, and VOLUME-ADJUSTED (Abbreviated respectively as S, W, E, SW, TRI, EP, and VOL).

The formula BBandTop(close, 20, S, 2) calculates the Top Bollinger Band of Close prices over
20 PERIODS using the SIMPLE method and shifted 2 DEVIATIONS upwards.

5.6.12 Bollinger Bands

Bollinger Bands

BBands (DATA_ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD, DEVIATIONS, SWITCH)

This function calculates the Bottom Bollinger Band 342 and Top Bollinger Band 342 components of the
Bollinger Bands indicator of DATA ARRAY using METHOD calculation method and shifted upwards or
downwards DEVIATIONS standard deviations based on SWITCH.

Valid METHODs are SIMPLE, WEIGHTED, EXPONENTIAL, SINE WEIGHTED, TRIANGLE, END
POINT, and VOLUME-ADJUSTED (Abbreviated respectively as S, W, E, SW, TRI, EP, and VOL).

SWITCH=0 calculates the Top Bollinger Band. SWITCH=1 calculates the Bottom Bollinger Band.

The function BBands(DATA_ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD, DEVIATIONS, 0) calculates the Top

Bollinger Band 342 component of the Bollinger Bands indicator.

TopBollingerBand:= BBands(DATA_ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD, DEVIATIONS, 0);

---

The function BBands(DATA_ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD, DEVIATIONS, 1) calculates the

Bottom Bollinger Band 342 component of the Bollinger Bands indicator.

BottomBollingerBand:= BBands(DATA_ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD, DEVIATIONS, 1);

The formula BBands(Close, 20, S, 2, 0) calculates a the Top Bollinger Band 342 of the Close
prices over 20 periods using the Simple method shifted 2 deviations upwards.

---

The formula BBands(Close, 20, S, 2, 1) calculates a the Bottom Bollinger Band 342 of the Close
prices over 20 periods using the Simple method shifted 2 deviations downwards.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 344 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The top and bottom Bollinger Bands can be calculated using the BBands() function as such:

{Bollinger Bands}

{The middle band is a n-period simple moving average}

MiddleBollingerBand:= mov(Close, PERIODS, S);

{Calculates the Bottom Bollinger Band and Top Bollinger Band components}
TopBollingerBand:= BBands(Close, 20, S, 2, 0);
BottomBollingerBand:= BBands(Close, 20, S, 2, 1);

{end}

---

It is also acceptable to use the stdev() function to calculate the top and bottom Bollinger Bands as
such:

{Bollinger Bands}

{The middle band is a n-period simple moving average}

MiddleBollingerBand:= mov(Close, PERIODS, S);

{Calculates the Bottom Bollinger Band and Top Bollinger Band components}
TopBollingerBand:= MiddleBollingerBand + ( 2 * stdev(Close,PERIODS));
BottomBollingerBand:= MiddleBollingerBand - ( 2 * stdev(Close,PERIODS));

{end}

5.6.13 Buy Position Count

Buy Position Count

BuyPositionCount ()

This function returns the number of open buy positions in the instrument that the trading system is
attached to based on the trading system's assigned account. This function's output is updated one time
per incoming price tick.

5.6.14 Ceiling

Ceiling

ceiling (DATA ARRAY)

Calculates the lowest integer that is greater than DATA ARRAY.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 345

The formula ceiling(9.2) returns 10.

The formula ceiling(-9.2) returns -9.

5.6.15 Commodity Channel Index

Commodity Channel Index (CCI)

cci (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

Calculates the PERIODS Commodity Channel Index (CCI) of DATA ARRAY. This function calculates
the predefined CCI indicator according to Donald Lambert's original formula logic. Use of the DATA
ARRAY parameter is only necessary if the user wishes to substitute a DATA ARRAY other than Typical
Price ( TP() ) for the calculations. Otherwise, it is acceptable to use the cci() function without including it
such as:

cci (PERIODS)

The function CCI(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS) calculates a 20-Periods CCI Indicator by formula:

{ Typical Price }
vTp := (H + L + C) / 3;

{ Simple Moving Average of the Typical Price }

vTpma := Mov(vTP, 20, S);

{Due to VTrader's lack of loop structures in its

programming language, the loop statement to find
Mean Deviation must be written out explicitly}

{ Mean Deviation }
vMd20 := (Abs(vTpma - vTp)
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -1))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -2))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -3))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -4))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -5))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -6))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -7))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -8))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -9))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -10))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -11))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -12))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -13))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -14))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -15))

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 346 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -16))

+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -17))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -18))
+ Abs(vTpma - Ref(vTp, -19))) / 20;

{ CCI value and output CCI on chart }

vCCI := (vTp - vTpma) / (0.015 * vMd20);

5.6.16 Cosine

Cosine

cos (DATA ARRAY)

This function calculates the Cosine of DATA ARRAY.

It assumes the DATA ARRAY value is given in degrees.

The formula cos(0) returns 1.

The formula cos(Close) returns the Cosine of the Close price in degrees.

5.6.17 Cross

Cross

cross (DATA_ARRAY_1, DATA_ARRAY_2)

Returns +1 when DATA_ARRAY_1 crosses above DATA_ARRAY_2. Otherwise, 0 is returned. If it is

required to know when DATA_ARRAY_1 crosses below DATA_ARRAY_2, use the formula:

cross (DATA_ARRAY_2, DATA_ARRAY_1)

The formula cross(Close,mov(Close,9,S) returns +1 only for the specific bar interval when the
Close price crosses above the Moving Average. For all other bars – if and until the next crossover in this
direction (above) the formula cross(Close,mov(Close,9,S) returns 0.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 347

To monitor when the Close price crosses below the Moving Average, the formula cross(mov(Close,9
,S),Close) should be used. It returns +1 only for the specific bar interval when the Close price
crosses below the Moving Average. For all other bars – if and until the next crossover in this direction
(below) the formula cross(mov(Close,9,S),Close)returns 0.

The main difference in using the Cross() function versus making comparisons using Relational
Operators 332 (such as > or <, etc.) is that the condition being evaluated using Relational Operators 332
returns +1 as long as the condition remains true.

For example, the formula Close > mov(Close,9,S) is true (shown as the thick blue line in the
screenshot below) and returns +1 for every bar that the condition remains true. For all other bars when
the formula Close > mov(Close,9,S) condition is false, 0 is returned.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 348 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

5.6.18 Cumulate

Cumulate

cum (DATA ARRAY)

Calculates a Cumulative Sum of DATA ARRAY beginning from the first period in the chart.

The formula cum(1) calculates an indicator that rises one point for each bar since the beginning of the
chart.
The formula cum(Close) calculates the cumulative total of all closing prices from the beginning of the
chart.

5.6.19 Day Of Month

Day Of Month

DayOfMonth ()

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 349

Plots the numerical day of the month.

If today was July 15th, 15 would be plotted.

5.6.20 Day Of Week

Day Of Week

DayOfWeek ()

Plots a numerical value corresonding to each day of the week.

1= Monday
2= Tuesday
3= Wednesday
4= Thursday
5= Friday
6= Saturday
7= Sunday

Each new days begins at 00:00 Eastern Standard Time (12:00 A.M. Midnight).

For example, to create a simple indicator that will plot +1 for each price bar shown during Monday use
the formula:

TodayIsMonday:= DayOfWeek()=1;

Also acceptable is:

TodayIsMonday:= if(DayOfWeek()=1,1,0);
{Note: if a condition will always evaulate to true (1) or false (0)
it is not necessary to use the If() function - it is assumed.}

5.6.21 Detrended Price Oscillator

Detrended Price Oscillator

dpo (PERIODS)

This function calculates the predefined Detrended Price Oscillator.

The function dpo(PERIODS) calculates the Detrended Price Oscillator by formula:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 350 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

{Detrended Price Oscillator}

_DPO:= Close - ref(mov(Close,PERIODS,S),-(PERIODS/2+1));
{end}

5.6.22 Error

Error

error ( CONDITION, ' MESSAGE ' )

This function executes an immediate program stop. VT Trader shows a popup window containing the
MESSAGE (in signal quote mark s) if CONDITION is true. The Indicator Label also shows a "red circled,
exclamation point" icon (see screenshot below) next to it until the condition creating the Error has been
resolved.

As an example, create a simple indicator with the following formula:

_Error:= error(1<3,'1 is less than 3');

The result of attempting to add this indicator to a chart can be seen in the screenshots below...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 351

5.6.23 Event Count

Event Count

EventCount ('Logical Variable')

This function calculates the number of true states of the Logical Variable only from the moment the
trading system is started in Auto-Trade Mode until such time as it is stopped. The main purpose of
the EventCount() function is to allow the user to better manage the number of automated trading
actions taken by the trading system with respect to each of its Logical Variables in use.

A Logical Variable is defined as any output variable 221 within a trading system that has a checkmark
next to the Trading enabled 223 option in its respective Name tab 223 . A Logical Variable can exist only
in two states - true (1) or false (0). For example, if a certain condition determines the Logical Variable
'A' such as:

A:= cross(Close,mov(Close,13,S);

Then EventCount('A') will calculate the number of times the Close price crosses above the Moving
Average starting from the point in time when the trading system was started in Auto-Trade Mode.

Please note the following:

1) After the trading system's Auto-Trade Mode has been stopped the value of EventCount

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

352 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

('Logical Variable') resets to 0.

2) If VT Trader experiences a temporary disconnection and then reconnects, the value of

EventCount ('Logical Variable') is saved and restored to its previous value before the
disconnection happened.

3) If VT Trader experiences an abrupt exit or shutdown (such as a loss a loss of power, PC

crash, PC reboot, etc.) and VT Trader was not properly shutdown, the value of EventCount
('Logical Variable') will be reset to 0 after VT Trader is restarted, the trading system re-
attached to the chart, and then restarted in Auto-Trade Mode.

It's easiest to understand how EventCount() functions by working step-by-step through a pratical
implementation of its functionality.

In the screenshot below two conditions have been specified...

Long:= cross(Close,mov(Close,13,S); {Shown as Blue Arrow graphic}

Short:= cross(mov(Close,13,S),Close); {Shown as Red Arrow graphic}
* (please refer to the cross() 346 function if you require clarification on how it works)

Next, define the Logical Variables responsible for opening and closing market order BUY trades...
* Refer to the Trading tab 232 for each respective Logical Variable to ensure proper setup for requesting
the correct automated trading market order type (BUY or SELL).

OpenBuy:= Long and (EventCount('OpenBuy') = EventCount('CloseBuy'));

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 353

CloseBuy:= Short and (EventCount('OpenBuy') > EventCount('CloseBuy'));

Let's assume OpenBuy will be used to request a BUY market order to initiate a long position in the
market, while CloseBuy will be used to request a SELL market order to close the existing long position
originally initiated by OpenBuy. When the trading system is started in Auto-Trade Mode EventCount
('OpenBuy') and EventCount('CloseBuy') are equal to 0.

The value of Logical Variable 'OpenBuy' will become equal to +1 if the condition defined for the Long
variable is true and the number of actions for EventCount('OpenBuy') in the OpenBuy condition is
equal to the number of actions for EventCount('CloseBuy') in the CloseBuy condition.

The value of Logical Variable 'CloseBuy' will become equal to +1 if the condition defined for the Short
variable is true and the number of actions for EventCount('OpenBuy') in the OpenBuy condition is
greater than the number of actions for EventCount('CloseBuy') in the CloseBuy condition. If the
EventCount('OpenBuy') value is greater than the EventCount('CloseBuy') value it is
assumed that a long trade was initiated previously by OpenBuy and it is necessary to initiate a SELL
market order to close the existing long trade.

Lastly, define the Logical Variables responsible for opening and closing market order SELL trades...
* Refer to the Trading tab 232 for each respective Logical Variable to ensure it's setup to properly
request the correct automated trading order type.

OpenSell:= Short and (EventCount('OpenSell') = EventCount('CloseSell'));

CloseSell:= Long and (EventCount('OpenSell') > EventCount('CloseSell'));

Let's assume OpenSell will be used to request a SELL market order to initiate a short position in the
market, while CloseSell will be used to request a BUY market order to close the existing short
position originally initiated by OpenSell. When the trading system is started in Auto-Trade Mode
EventCount('OpenSell') and EventCount('CloseSell') are equal to 0.

The value of Logical Variable 'OpenSell' will become equal to +1 if the condition defined for the Short
variable is true and the number of actions for EventCount('OpenSell') in the OpenSell condition
is equal to the number of actions for EventCount('CloseSell') in the CloseSell condition.

The value of Logical Variable 'CloseSell' will become equal to +1 if the condition defined for the Long
variable is true and the number of actions for EventCount('OpenSell') in the OpenSell condition
is greater than the number of actions for EventCount('CloseSell') in the CloseSell condition.
If the EventCount('OpenSell') value is greater than the EventCount('CloseSell') value it is
assumed that a short trade was initiated previously by OpenSell and it is necessary to initiate a BUY
market order to close the existing short trade.

It's recommended that when constructing a trading system using Logical Variables for auto-trading
functionality to follow a simple trading system template:

{START SAMPLE TRADING SYSTEM TEMPLATE}

{Preliminary calculations for the trading system...

this would include indicators that will be used, etc.}

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 354 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

{We'll create 2 moving averages for this sample trading system}

Output1:= close;
Output2:= mov(close,13,S);

{Define the conditions for Long and Short trading signals}

{Again, we'll build from our sample output variables
to create a simple price & moving average crossover system}

Long:= Cross(Output1,Output2);
Short:= Cross(Output2,Output1);

{Define Logical Output Variables for Auto-Trading functionality}

{OpenBuy and CloseBuy control opening and closing BUY trades}

OpenBuy:= Long and (EventCount('OpenBuy') = EventCount('CloseBuy'));

CloseBuy:= Short and (EventCount('OpenBuy') > EventCount('CloseBuy'));

{OpenSell and CloseSell control opening and closing SELL trades}

OpenSell:= Short and (EventCount('OpenSell') = EventCount('CloseSell'));

CloseSell:= Long and (EventCount('OpenSell') > EventCount('CloseSell'));

{END SAMPLE TRADING SYSTEM TEMPLATE}

5.6.24 Exponent

Exponent

exp (DATA ARRAY)

This function calculates e raised to the DATA ARRAY power.

Exponent is the same as the Exponential Function o = e x .

The constand e is the base of the natural logarithm 364 . With the possible exception of Pi 333 , e is the
most important constant in mathematics.

e = 2.7183 in VT Trader; however, e's actual value =

2.718281828459045235360287471352662497757 ...

The formula exp(1) returns 2.7183.

This formula exp(5) returns 148.4132.

5.6.25 FAMA

FAMA

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 355

Fama (DATA ARRAY, ALPHA MAXIMUM LIMIT, ALPHA MINIMUM LIMIT)

This function calculates the predefined Following Adaptive Moving Average (developed by John Ehlers) of
DATA ARRAY. According to John Ehler's literature, the alpha value in FAMA is allowed to range
between a maximum and a minimum value. The suggested ALPHA MAXIMUM LIMIT = 0.5 and the
suggested ALPHA MINIMUM LIMIT = 0.05.

The Following Adaptive Moving Average is actually a MESA Adaptive Moving Average calculated using
one-half the alpha value of MAMA 367 . This allows the Following Adaptive Moving Average to have steps
in time synchronization with the MESA Adaptive Moving Average (MAMA), but with less vertical
movement.

The formula fama(Close,0.5,0.05) calulates the Following Adaptive Moving Average applied to
Close prices using the suggested default values.

5.6.26 Floor

Floor

floor (DATA ARRAY)

This function calculates the highest integer that is less than DATA ARRAY.

The formula floor(17.8) returns 17.

The formula floor(-17.8) returns -18.

5.6.27 Fraction

Fraction

frac (DATA ARRAY)

Eliminates the integer portion of DATA ARRAY and returns the fractional part.

The formula frac(12.7) returns 0.7.

The formula frac(-12.7) returns -0.7.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 356 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

5.6.28 Gap Down

Gap Down

GapDown ()

Returns a +1 value on the current bar of the instrument when its price Gaps Down. Otherwise, 0 is
returned.

A Gap Down occurs if previous Low value is greater than the current High value.

5.6.29 Gap Up

Gap Up

GapUp ()

Returns a +1 value on the current bar of the instrument when its price Gaps Up. Otherwise, 0 is
returned.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 357

A Gap Up occurs if previous High value is less than the current Low value.

5.6.30 Highest

Highest

highest (DATA ARRAY)

This function calculates the highest value in the DATA ARRAY since the first value loaded in the chart.

The formula highest(Close) returns the highest Close price since the first value loaded in the chart.

5.6.31 Highest Bars Ago

Highest Bars Ago

HighestBars (DATA ARRAY)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 358 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This function calculates the number of periods that have passed since the DATA ARRAY's highest
value. This includes all data loaded in the chart.

The formula HighestBars(Close) returns the number of periods that have passed since the Close
price reached its highest value.

5.6.32 Highest High Value

Highest High Value

hhv (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function calculates the highest value in the DATA ARRAY over the preceding PERIODS. It's
important to note that PERIODS includes the current period.

The formula hhv(Close,5) returns the highest Close price over the preceding five periods.

A common request for using this function is determining a price channel breakout. Because hhv()
includes the current period's value in its calculations, in order to create a condition to determine a
channel breakout using the previous n-PERIODS to create the channel the ref() function must be
used. The ref() function allows the comparison of the current period's DATA ARRAY value to its value
n-PERIODS ago. In this case, we need to reference 1 bar ago.

For example: Let's create a 10-periods High price channel and a simple indicator that will plot +1 when
the current Close price crosses above the price channel and plot 0 at any other time.

{Create a price channel using the previous 10 bars,

not including the current bar}
HighPriceChannelLevel:= ref(hhv(High,10),-1);

{Create the condition to determine when the current

bar's Close price crosses above the HighPriceChannelLevel}
ChannelBreakOutUp:= Cross(Close,HighPriceChannelLevel);

The results of the formula code above can be seen in the screenshot below. The 10-periods High price
channel is the thick blue line in the price frame and the result of the condition in the
ChannelBreakOutUp variable can be viewed in the additional frame below price frame. A blue arrow
graphic has been shown under the price bar when the breakout occurred.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 359

5.6.33 Highest High Value Bars Ago

Highest High Value Bars Ago

hhvbars (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function calculates the number of periods (bars) that have passed since DATA ARRAY reached its
PERIODS period peak.

The formula hhvbars(Close,55) returns the number of periods (bars) that have passed since the
Close price reached its 55-period peak.

5.6.34 Highest Since

Highest Since

HighestSince (Nth, EXPRESSION, DATA ARRAY)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 360 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This function returns the highest value of DATA ARRAY since the Nth most recent occurrence of
EXPRESSION being true.
This includes all data loaded in the chart.

The formula HighestSince(2, Cross(Close,mov(Close,13,S)), Close) returns highest

value of the Close price since the second most recent occurrence of the Close price crossing above the
13-periods simple moving average.

5.6.35 Highest Since Bars Ago

Highest Since Bars Ago

HighestSinceBars (Nth, EXPRESSION, DATA ARRAY)

This function returns the number of periods that have passed from the highest value of DATA ARRAY
since the Nth most recent occurrence of EXPRESSION being true.
This includes all data loaded in the chart.

The formula HighestSinceBars(2, Cross(Close,mov(Close,13,S)), Close) returns the

number of periods that have passed since the highest value of the Close price since the second most
recent occurrence of the Close price crossing above the 13-periods simple moving average.

5.6.36 Hour

Hour

hour ()

This function returns to the number of hours that have passed during the day using a 24-hour clock that
starts each day at 00:00 (12:00 A.M. Midnight Eastern Standard Time).

If the current time is recorded as 10:17:27, the hour() function will return 10.

5.6.37 IF()

If

if (DATA ARRAY > >= < <= <> = DATA ARRAY, THEN DATA ARRAY, ELSE DATA ARRAY)

If() is a conditional function that returns the second parameter (THEN) if the conditional expression

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 361

defined by the first parameter is true. Otherwise, the third parameter is returned (ELSE).

The formula if(1 < 2, 3, 5) will always return the value 3.

For example, the formula if(Close > mov(Close,9,S), 1, 0) is true (shown as the thick blue
line in the screenshot below) and returns +1 for every bar that the condition remains true. For all other
bars when the formula Close > mov(Close,9,S) condition is false, 0 is returned.

If it is implied that the resulting variable can only assume the value of true (1) or false (0), then the
formula:

Variable:= if(Close > mov(Close,9,S), 1, 0);

... may be written as ...

Variable:= Close > mov(Close,9,S);

... where Variable may be equal only to 0 or 1.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 362 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

5.6.38 Inside

Inside

inside ()

This function returns a +1 value whenever an Inside period occurs. It will continue to return this same +1
value until a Rally 376 , Reaction 377 , or Outside 371 period occurs. For any period when Inside() is not
equal to +1 it returns 0.

An Inside period occurs when the current High value is less than or equal to the previous Rally 376 or
Reaction 377 value's High and the current Low is greater than or equal to the previous Rally 376 or
Reaction 377 value's Low. A range is determined by the first Inside value and is only broken by a Rally 376
, Reaction 377 , or Outside 371 value.

5.6.39 Integer

Integer

int (DATA ARRAY)

This function removes the fractional portion of DATA ARRAY and returns the integer part.

The formula int(12.7) returns 12.

The formula int(-17.8) returns -17.

5.6.40 IsDefined

IsDefined

IsDefined (DATA ARRAY)

This function returns 1 if all data necessary to calculate DATA ARRAY is available, otherwise it returns
0.

The formula IsDefined(MA) defined in the Out variable shown below:

MA:= mov(C,20,S);
Out:= IsDefined(MA);

Returns 0 for the first 19 bars loading into the chart and then returns 1 beginning with the 20th bar and

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 363

for all future bars.

5.6.41 IsUndefined

IsUndefined

IsUndefined (DATA ARRAY)

This function returns 0 if all data necessary to calculate DATA ARRAY is available, otherwise it returns
1.

The formula IsUndefined(MA) defined in the Out variable shown below:

MA:= mov(C,20,S);
Out:= IsUndefined(MA);

Returns 1 for the first 19 bars loading into the chart and then returns 0 beginning with the 20th bar and
for all future bars.

5.6.42 Linear Regression Indicator

Linear Regression Indicator

linreg (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function calculates the predefined Linear Regression Indicator.

The function LinReg(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS) calculates the Linear Regression Indicator by
formula:

{Linear Regression Indicator}

_LinReg:= (PERIODS * Sum(Cum(1)*DATA ARRAY,PERIODS) - Sum(Cum(1),PERIODS)

* Sum(DATA ARRAY,PERIODS)) /
(PERIODS * Sum(Power(Cum(1),2),PERIODS) - Power(Sum(Cum(1),
PERIODS),2)) * Cum(1) +
(Mov(DATA ARRAY,PERIODS,S) - Mov(Cum(1),PERIODS,S) * (PERIODS*Sum
(Cum(1)*DATA ARRAY,PERIODS) -
Sum(Cum(1),PERIODS) * Sum(DATA ARRAY,PERIODS)) / (PERIODS * Sum(
Power(Cum(1),2),PERIODS) -
Power(Sum(Cum(1),PERIODS),2)));

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 364 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

{end}

The formula linreg(Close,50) calculates a 50-periods Linear Regression indicator of Close prices.

5.6.43 Linear Regression Slope

Linear Regression Slope

linregslope (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function calculates the predefined Linear Regression Slope indicator.

The formula LinRegSlope(Close,50) calculates a 50-periods Linear Regression Slope of Close

prices.

5.6.44 Logarithm

Logarithm (natural)

log (DATA ARRAY)

Calculates the natural logarithm of DATA ARRAY.

The formula log(1) will return 0.

The formula log(12) will return 2.4849.

5.6.45 Lowest

Lowest

lowest (DATA ARRAY)

This function calculates the lowest value in DATA ARRAY since the first value loaded in the chart.

The formula lowest(Close) returns the lowest Close price value since the first value loaded in the
chart.

5.6.46 Lowest Bars Ago

Lowest Bars Ago

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 365

LowestBars (DATA ARRAY)

This function calculates the number of periods that have passed since the DATA ARRAY's lowest value.
This includes all data loaded in the chart.

The formula LowestBars(Close) returns the number of periods that have passed since the Close
price reached its lowest value.

5.6.47 Lowest Low Value

Lowest Low Value

llv (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function calculates the lowest value in the DATA ARRAY over the preceding PERIODS. It's
important to note that PERIODS includes the current period.

The formula llv(Close,5) returns the lowest Close price over the preceding five periods.

A common request for using this function is determining a price channel breakout. Because llv()
includes the current period's value in its calculations, in order to create a condition to determine a
channel breakout using the previous n-PERIODS to create the channel the ref() function must be
used. The ref() function allows the comparison of the current period's DATA ARRAY value to its value
n-PERIODS ago. In this case, we need to reference 1 bar ago.

For example: Let's create a 10-periods Low price channel and a simple indicator that will plot +1 when
the current Close price crosses below the price channel and plot 0 at any other time.

{Create a price channel using the previous 10 bars,

not including the current bar}
LowPriceChannelLevel:= ref(llv(Low,10),-1);

{Create the condition to determine when the current

bar's Close price crosses above the HighPriceChannelLevel}
ChannelBreakOutDown:= Cross(LowPriceChannelLevel,Close);

The results of the formula code above can be seen in the screenshot below. The 10-periods Low price
channel is the thick red line in the price frame and the result of the condition in the
ChannelBreakOutDown variable can be viewed in the additional frame below price frame. A red arrow
graphic has been shown above the price bar when the breakout occurred.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 366 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

5.6.48 Lowest Low Value Bars Ago

Lowest Low Value Bars Ago

llvbars (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function calculates the number of periods (bars) that have passed since DATA ARRAY reached its
PERIODS period trough.

The formula llvbars(Close,55) returns the number of periods (bars) that have passed since the
Close price reached its 55-period trough.

5.6.49 Lowest Since

Lowest Since

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 367

LowestSince (Nth, EXPRESSION, DATA ARRAY)

This function returns the lowest value of DATA ARRAY since the Nth most recent occurrence of
EXPRESSION being true.
This includes all data loaded in the chart.

The formula LowestSince(2, Cross(Close,mov(Close,13,S)), Close) returns lowest value

of the Close price since the second most recent occurrence of the Close price crossing above the 13-
periods simple moving average.

5.6.50 Lowest Since Bars Ago

Lowest Since Bars Ago

LowestSinceBars (Nth, EXPRESSION, DATA ARRAY)

This function returns the number of periods that have passed from the lowest value of DATA ARRAY
since the Nth most recent occurrence of EXPRESSION being true.
This includes all data loaded in the chart.

The formula LowestSinceBars(2, Cross(Close,mov(Close,13,S)), Close) returns the

number of periods that have passed since the lowest value of the Close price since the second most
recent occurrence of the Close price crossing above the 13-periods simple moving average.

5.6.51 MACD

MACD

MACD (DATA_ARRAY, FAST_EMA_PERIODS, SLOW_EMA_PERIODS, SIGNAL_EMA_PERIODS)

This function returns the histogram portion of the Moving Average Convergence/Divergence (MACD)
indicator. All parameters are optional; if a particular parameter is not defined in the MACD() function its
default value will be applied.

The MACD() function's default parameter values are as follows:

DATA_ARRAY = Close
FAST_EMA_PERIODS = 12
SLOW_EMA_PERIODS = 26
SIGNAL_EMA_PERIODS = 9

5.6.52 MAMA

MAMA

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 368 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Mama (DATA ARRAY, ALPHA MAXIMUM LIMIT, ALPHA MINIMUM LIMIT)

This function calculates the predefined MESA Adaptive Moving Average (developed by John Ehlers) of
DATA ARRAY. According to John Ehler's literature, the alpha value in MAMA is allowed to range
between a maximum and a minimum value. The suggested ALPHA MAXIMUM LIMIT = 0.5 and the
suggested ALPHA MINIMUM LIMIT = 0.05.

The formula mama(Close,0.5,0.05) calulates the MESA Adaptive Moving Average applied to Close
prices using the suggested default values.

5.6.53 Maximum

Maximum

max (DATA_ARRAY_1, DATA_ARRAY_2)

This function returns the largest value of two parameters (DATA_ARRAY_1 and DATA_ARRAY_2).

The formula max(Close,mov(Close,13,E) returns the greater of the Close price or the 13-periods
exponential moving average.
The formula max(-17,13) always returns 13.

5.6.54 Median Price

Median Price

mp ()

This function calculates the predefined Median Price indicator.

The Median Price is calculated by adding the High price and the Low price together and then dividing by
two. The result is the average, or median, price.

The function mp() calculates the Median Price by formula:

{Median Price Indicator}

_MedianPrice:= (High + Low) / 2;
{end}

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 369

5.6.55 Midpoint

Midpoint

mid (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

Returns the midpoint of the DATA ARRAY over the specified PERIODS. The midpoint is the value
halfway between the highest and lowest DATA ARRAY values during the specified PERIODS.

The function mid(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS) is calculated by formula:

{Midpoint}
_Midpoint:= llv(DATA ARRAY,PERIODS) + ((hhv(DATA ARRAY,PERIODS) - llv(DATA
ARRAY,PERIODS)) / 2);
{end}

The formula mid(Close,7) is equivalent to llv(Close,7) + ((hhv(Close,7) - llv(Close,

7)) / 2).

5.6.56 Minimum

Minimum

min (DATA_ARRAY_1, DATA_ARRAY_2)

This function returns the smallest value of two parameters (DATA_ARRAY_1 and DATA_ARRAY_2).

The formula min(Close,mov(Close,13,E) returns the smaller of the Close price or the 13-periods
exponential moving average.
The formula min(-17,13) always returns -17.

5.6.57 Minute

Minute

minute ()

This function returns the value of the minute in a two-digit format.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 370 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

If a bar had the date/time stamp of 02/17/2006, 13:44:00 (Feb. 17th, 2006, 1:44 P.M. EST), the minute
() function would return 44.

5.6.58 Modulus

Modulus

mod (DATA ARRAY_1, DATA ARRAY_2)

Calculates the remainder (i.e. the fractional portion) of DATA ARRAY_1 divided by DATA ARRAY_2.
A division by zero produces a NULL result.

The formula mod(10,3) returns 1.0.

The formula mod(-10.7,3) returns -1.7.
The same can be written as: -10.7 - (int(-10.7 / 3) * 3).

The function mod(DATA_ARRAY_1,DATA_ARRAY_2) calculates by formula:

{Modulus}

_mod := DATA_ARRAY_1 - (int(DATA_ARRAY_1 / DATA_ARRAY_2) * DATA_ARRAY_2

);

{end}

5.6.59 Month

Month

month ()

This function returns the value of the month of the year.

If a bar had the date/time stamp of 02/17/2006, 13:44:00 (Feb. 17th, 2006, 1:44 P.M. EST), the month
() function would return 02.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 371

5.6.60 Moving Average

Moving Average

mov (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, METHOD)

This function calculates a PERIODS moving average of DATA ARRAY using METHOD calculation
method.

Valid METHODS are:

S = Simple
W = Weighted
E = Exponential
SW = Sine Weighted
TRI = Triangular
EP = End Point
VOL = Volume-Adjusted

The formula mov(Close,25,E) returns the value of a 25-Period Exponential Moving Average of the
Close prices.

5.6.61 Negative

Negative

neg (DATA ARRAY)

This function calculates the negative value of DATA ARRAY.

The formula neg(10) returns -10.

The formula neg(-17) returns +17.

5.6.62 Outside

Outside

outside ()

This function returns a +1 value whenever an Outside period occurs. It will continue to return this
same +1 value until a Rally 376 , Reaction 377 , or Inside 362 period occurs. For any period when Outside
() is not equal to +1 it returns 0.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 372 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

An Outside period occurs when the current High value is greater than the previous Rally 376 or Reaction
377 value's High and the current Low is less than the previous Rally 376 or Reaction 377 value's Low. A
range is determined by the first Outside value and is only broken by a Rally 376 , Reaction 377 , or Inside
362 value.

5.6.63 Parabolic SAR

Parabolic SAR

sar (STEP, MAXIMUM)

This function calculates the predefined Parabolic SAR Indicator.

Optionally, the user may choose to define the DATA ARRAY's used to calculate the Parabolic SAR
indicator. This is useful, for example, when the user wishes to construct the Parabolic SAR using any
data series other than price. The extended function format is:

sar (DATA ARRAY, DATA ARRAY HIGH, DATA ARRAY LOW, STEP, MAXIMUM)

Please Note: When using the extended sar() function, the user must specify all 3 DATA ARRAY's or
none of the DATA ARRAY's.

STEP - As the price makes new Highs and Lows the Parabolic SAR rises and declines according to the
STEP size. For example: If the price makes new Highs for three consequetive bars, then the SAR Step
increases by 0.02 each bar (i.e.: 0.02 to 0.04 to 0.06, etc.). The SAR Step size of 0.02 is recommended
in most cases.

MAXIMUM - The Maximum value is the largest value the SAR Step can achieve. The SAR Maximum of
0.20 is recommended in most cases.

The formula SAR(0.02,0.20) calculates the Parabolic SAR Indicator with STEP=0.02 and
MAXIMUM=0.20.

The formula SAR(0.02,0.20) is equivalent to SAR(Close, High, Low, 0.02,0.20).

5.6.64 Peak Bars

Peak Bars

PeakBars (Nth, DATA ARRAY, % MINIMUM CHANGE)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 373

Plots the number of bars that have passed from the Nth peak . N=1 would return the number of bars that
have passed since the most recent peak . N=2 would return the number of bars that have passed since
the 2nd most recent peak . Etc.

5.6.65 Peak Value

Peak Value

peak (Nth, DATA ARRAY, % MINIMUM CHANGE)

This function returns the value of DATA ARRAY Nth peak(s) ago. N=1 would return the value of the most
recent peak . N=2 would return the value of the 2nd most recent peak , etc. The % MINIMUM CHANGE
parameter determines how much greater the new peak() value must be in comparison to the previous
peak() value before a new peak value is returned.

The formula Peak(1, Rsi(14), 10) returns the most recent peak() value of Rsi(14) if there has
been at least a 10% change from the previous peak value.

5.6.66 Position Count

Position Count

PositionCount ()

This function returns the total cumulative number of open buy and sell positions in the instrument that
the trading system is attached to based on the trading system's assigned account. This function's
output is updated one time per incoming price tick. For this reason, it is strongly advised that
PositionCount() not be used in trading systems that operate on the premise of "always in the market" (i.
e. when one position gets closed another position gets immediately opened in the opposing direction,
etc.).

5.6.67 Power

Power

power (DATA ARRAY, POWER)

This function calculates DATA ARRAY raised to the POWER power.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 374 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

A negative DATA ARRAY value raised to a non-integer POWER returns a NULL value.

The formula power(10,3) returns 1000.

The formula power(-10,3) returns -1000.
The formula power(-10,3.5) returns NULL.

5.6.68 Precision

Precision

prec (DATA ARRAY, PRECISION)

This function truncates DATA ARRAY to PRECISION decimal places.

The formula prec(10.56789, 2) returns 10.560.

The formula prec(10.56789, 3) returns 10.5670.
The formula prec(10.56789, 4) returns 10.56780.

Small binary rounding errors may cause some minor distortion in the decimal portion of any number
stored in a computer.

5.6.69 Prev

Previous

Prev

Prev()

prev (DATA ARRAY)

Prev makes it possible to refer from the formula to its own prior calculations on a previous bar. Prev
can be used as Prev and Prev() constants and as function Prev(DATA ARRAY). It is essential to
understand the peculiarities of PREV, PREV(0), and PREV(DATA ARRAY) and use them correctly
when necessary.

Prev and Prev()return into the current calculations of the variable its calculations on a previous bar or
NULL if the previous data is not defined or is missing. The output from these functions is synonymous
with ref(DATA ARRAY,-1).

Prev(DATA ARRAY) returns into the current calculations of the variable its calculations on the previous
bar or the value of DATA ARRAY if the previous data is not defined or missing.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 375

IMPORTANT NOTE: The use of Prev, Prev(), or Prev(DATA ARRAY) in fairly complex calculations
may significantly delay the calculation of an indicator. Their use should be avoided whenever possible!

Examples for use of the PREV function:

The calculation of the On Balance Volume indicator demonstrates the use of the PREV constant:

{On Balance Volume}

_OBV:= (If(C>Ref(C,-1), 1, If(C<Ref(C,-1), -1, 0)) * VOLUME) + PREV;

The On Balance Volume indicator may also be calculated without the use of the PREV constant by using
the cum(DATA ARRAY) function instead:

{On Balance Volume}

FactorOBV:= If(C>Ref(C,-1), 1, If(C<Ref(C,-1), -1, 0)) * VOLUME;
_OBV:= cum(FactorOBV);

This simple formula divides (High + Low + Close) by 3 and then adds this value to the previous
value of ((High + Low + Close) / 3) calculated on the previous bar of the price chart.

OUT:= ((High + Low + Close) / 3) + PREV(0);

The next example shows the Prev, Prev() and their Prev(NULL) analogy. However, this example
deals more with the characteristics of NULL. In the absence of the previous data Prev and Prev()
both return NULL (nothing, not even zero) so any further operations with NULL logically make no sense.
Whatever mathematical operations with the NULL take place: multiplication, addition, etc. - the result
will always be the same - NULL.

Using the following code(s) to illustrate:

OUT:= ((High + Low + Close) / 3) + PREV;

OUT:= ((High + Low + Close) / 3) + PREV();

These formulas on the first bar can be interpreted as:

OUT {on the first bar of loaded data}:= ((High + Low + Close) / 3) + NULL
{=NULL};

... and on the next bar...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 376 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

OUT:= NULL + NULL {=NULL};

... The indicator exists, but all of its values are equal to NULL. Therefore, the values will not be shown on
the chart.

5.6.70 Rally

Rally

rally ()

This function returns a +1 value whenever a Rally period occurs. It will continue to return this same +1
value until a Reaction 377 , Inside 362 , or Outside 371 period occurs. For any period when Rally() is not
equal to +1 it returns 0.

A Rally period occurs when the current High is greater than the previous Rally or Reaction 377 value's
High and the current Low is greater than or equal to the previous Rally or Reaction 377 value's Low.

5.6.71 Random

Random

random (DATA ARRAY)

This function returns a random value within the range of X >= 0 and X < 1.

5.6.72 Rate of Change

Rate of Change

roc (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, DIFF_METHOD)

Calculates the PERIODS Rate of Change (ROC) of DATA ARRAY expressed as DIFF_METHOD.
Valid DIFF_METHOD's are PERCENT and POINTS.

The formula roc(Close, 12, PERCENT)returns the 12-period Percent Rate of Change of the Close

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 377

prices.

The function roc(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, PERCENT) calculates the Rate of Change (ROC)
Indicator by formula:

{Rate-Of-Change -> roc(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, PERCENT)}

_ROC:= ((DATA ARRAY - ref(DATA ARRAY, - PERIODS)) / ref(DATA ARRAY, -
PERIODS)) * 100;
{end}

The function roc(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, POINTS) calculates the Rate of Change (ROC) Indicator
by formula:

{Rate-Of-Change -> roc(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, POINTS)}

_ROC:= DATA ARRAY - ref(DATA ARRAY, - PERIODS);
{end}

5.6.73 Reaction

Reaction

reaction ()

This function returns a +1 value whenever a Reaction period occurs. It will continue to return this
same +1 value until a Rally 376 , Inside 362 , or Outside 371 period occurs. For any period when Reaction
() is not equal to +1 it returns 0.

A Reaction period occurs when the current High is less than or equal to the previous Rally or Reaction
377 value's High and the current Low is less than the previous Rally 376 or Reaction value's Low.

5.6.74 Reference

Reference

ref (DATA ARRAY, -PERIODS, DEFAULT VALUE)

References a previous or subsequent element in a DATA ARRAY. Use of the DEFAULT VALUE
parameter is only necessary if the user wishes to substitute a value other than 0 for the beginning
calculation assigned to the left-most bar loaded in the chart window. Otherwise, it is acceptable to the
ref() function without including it such as:

ref (DATA ARRAY, -PERIODS)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

378 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

A negative PERIODS value references N periods ago. Therefore, the formula ref(Close, -12)
returns the Close price 12 periods ago. Thus, the 12-period price Rate-Of-Change 376 (expressed in
points) can be written as Close-ref(Close,-12). It is also allowable to use the ref() function to
reference previous value of a calculated DATA ARRAY such as the Relative Strength Index (RSI) 379
indicator. The resulting formula ref(RSI(14),-12) returns the 14-period RSI value 12 periods ago.

A positive PERIODS value references N periods ahead. Therefore, the formula ref(Close,+12)
returns the Close price 12 periods ahead (using the + sign is not necessary for positive integers). Using
the ref() function in the manner effectively shifts the resulting variable's data plot to the left N periods
ago in the chart window. It should also be noted that while it is allowable to use the ref() function to
reference N periods ahead values using a DATA ARRAY that does not need to be calculated (such as
raw price data: Close, Open, High, Low, haClose, haOpen, haHigh, and haLow), it is not allowable to use
with a DATA ARRAY that must be calculated (such as the Relative Strength Index (RSI) 379 indicator).
Therefore, the formula ref(RSI(14),+12) is not allowed and the result will always return NULL.

However, any resulting DATA ARRAY (such as the Relative Strength Index (RSI) 379 indicator) that uses
price to derive calculations can be recoded to effectively simulate the ref(RSI(14),+12) functionality
and resulting variable's data plot by first calculating the raw price data using the ref() function to
reference the element N periods ahead.

By example:

--------------------

{Normal RSI Code}

rsi_r:= (Close - ref(Close,-1));

rsi_rs:= Wilders(if(rsi_r>0,rsi_r,0),tpr) / Wilders(if(rsi_r<0,Abs(rsi_r),0
),tpr);
RSIndex:= 100-(100/(1+rsi_rs));

--------------------

{Restructured Code Allowing RSI to Shift

N Periods to the Left in the Chart Window}

prc:= ref(Close,+12);
rsi_r:= (prc - ref(prc,-1));
rsi_rs:= Wilders(if(rsi_r>0,rsi_r,0),tpr) / Wilders(if(rsi_r<0,Abs(rsi_r),0
),tpr);
RSIndex:= 100-(100/(1+rsi_rs));

--------------------

The restuctured code is the equivalent to ref(RSIndex,+12) under the prior VT Trader programming
language structure (versions 1.7.5 and previous). The restructured code works equally well under the
previous and the new VT Trader programming language structure (VT Trader 1.7.6 and beyond).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 379

5.6.75 Relative Strength Index

Relative Strength Index (RSI)

rsi (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

Calculates the predefined Relative Strength Index (RSI) Indicator. The DATA ARRAY argument is
optional; rsi() will use the Close price as the default if it is not included. Please Note: The optional
DATA ARRAY parameter is currently not available for use.

The formula RSI(Close,14) calculates the RSI Indicator of the 14-periods Close prices.
The formula RSI(14) calculates the RSI Indicator of the 14-periods Close prices.
The formula RSI(Low,14) calculates the RSI Indicator of the14-periods Low prices.

The function RSI (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS) calculates the RSI Indicator by formula:

{Relative Strength Index -> RSI(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)}

rsi_r:= (DATA ARRAY - ref(DATA ARRAY,-1));

rsi_rs:= Wilders(if(rsi_r>0,rsi_r,0),PERIODS) / Wilders(if(rsi_r<0,Abs
(rsi_r),0),PERIODS);
_RSI:= 100-(100/(1+rsi_rs));

{end}

5.6.76 Round

Round

round (DATA ARRAY)

This function rounds DATA ARRAY to the nearest integer.

The formula round(+12.5) returns +13.

The formula round(-12.5) returns -13.
The formula round(-12.4) returns -12.

5.6.77 Sell Position Count

Sell Position Count

SellPositionCount ()

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 380 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This function returns the number of open sell positions in the instrument that the trading system is
attached to based on the trading system's assigned account. This function's output is updated one time
per incoming price tick.

5.6.78 Signal Flag

Signal Flag

SignalFlag (DATA_ARRAY_1, DATA_ARRAY_2)

This function works as a flip/flop device; it returns 1 from the first occurrence of a "true" value in DATA
ARRAY 1 until the first occurrence of a "true" value in DATA ARRAY 2 which resets the state back to
zero until next first occurrence of a "true" value is detected in DATA ARRAY 1 ... etc.

The function SignalFlag(DATA_ARRAY_1, DATA_ARRAY_2) is identical to If(DATA_ARRAY_1,

1, If(DATA_ARRAY_2, 0, PREV(0)))

However, the SignalFlag() function processes much faster than If(DATA_ARRAY_1, 1, If

(DATA_ARRAY_2, 0, PREV(0))) when included in an indicator or trading sytem since it is an
internal function.

By Example (for practical application of function):

Let's assume the user has decided to use the Close price crossing above its 20-period simple moving
average as a simple entry condition to alert a possible Buy trade. Let's also assume that the user
wishes to show a simulated stoploss level on the chart for this simulated trade entry and create a simple
exit condition to alert when the Close price has crossed below the simulated stoploss level.

The formula logic to create this simple system is shown below (if the use of any functions in the formula
below is unclear, please refer to their respective documentation):

StoplossValue:= 30; {this would typically be a user-defined Input variable}

{Create the simulated Buy trade entry; ActiveBuyTrade

is checked to ensure no simulated trade is active;
0 = No Buy Trade Open, 1 = Buy Trade Currently Open}
{Displayed as blue Up Arrow grahic in price frame}
Buy:= ActiveBuyTrade=0 and Cross(Close,mov(C,20,S));

{Create a simulated entry price for the Buy trade;

this uses the Close price of the bar when the simulated
Buy trade is entered}
{Displayed as small, red dots in the price frame}
BuyPrice:= valuewhen(1,Buy,Close);

{Create the simulated stoploss level}

{Displayed as thin, dashed blue line in price frame}
BuyStop:= BuyPrice - (StoplossValue * SymbolPoint());

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 381

{Create the simulated Buy trade exit; ActiveBuyTrade

is checked to ensure a simulated trade is active;
0 = No Buy Trade Open, 1 = Buy Trade Currently Open}
{Displayed as blue Exit graphic in price frame}
BuyExit:= ActiveBuyTrade=1 and Cross(BuyStop,Close);

{Determine current simulated trade condition;

this is necessary to ensure the simulated stoploss
level stays associated with the proper simulated
entry point on the chart}
{ActiveBuyTrade can only be 0 or 1; It is set equal
to 1 when the Buy condition is true; the 1 (true)
value is maintained until BuyExit condition is true,
which resets it to zero and the process begins again.}
{Displayed as thicker black line in Additional Frame 1}
ActiveBuyTrade:= SignalFlag(Buy,BuyExit);

The end result of the formula logic above (using the Trading System Builder 205 to create this logic as a
simple alert system) can be seen in the screenshot below.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 382 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

5.6.79 Signal Hold

Signal Hold

SignalHold (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function holds a "true" value of DATA ARRAY for the specified number of PERIODS. This "true"
value is held "true" over the number of PERIODS specified even if a "false" value is generated. It should
be noted that this function starts (or resets) PERIODS using the most recent "true" value of DATA
ARRAY.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 383

The SignalHold() function is best explained by a visual example. In the screenshot below there are
two additional frames below the price frame. Visible in the price frame are two moving averages. Each of
the two additional frames corresponds to a visual representation of an output variable evaluating a
specific condition. Since each variable's value is based on a conditional statement, the output of each
variable can only be either +1 (true) or 0 (false).

The formula used to create the output variables shown in the screenshot below is as follows:

{Plots +1 for each bar when 10-period simple MA

crosses above the 30-period simple MA,
otherwise it plots 0}
{Additional Frame 1 - Blue line}
Buy:= Cross(Close,10,S),mov(Close,30,S));

{Plots +1 on the first bar when Buy is true,

then holds the +1 value until PERIODS (10 bars)
has passed, then plots 0 again until the
next occurrence of Buy being true}
{Additional Frame 2 - Dark Blue line}
BuySignalHold:= SignalHold(Buy,10);

The end result of the formula logic above (using the Trading System Builder 205 to create this logic as a
simple trading system) can be seen in the screenshot below.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 384 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

5.6.80 Signal Remove

Signal Remove

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 385

SignalRemove (DATA_ARRAY_1, DATA_ARRAY_2)

This function removes excesssive (redundant) "true" values. It returns +1 on the first occurence of a
"true" value in DATA_ARRAY_1 and then returns 0 until after at least one "true" occurrence of
DATA_ARRAY_2 even if there are additional "true" value occurrences in DATA_ARRAY_1.

The SignalRemove() function is best explained by a visual example. In the screenshot below there
are four additional frames below the price frame. Visible in the price frame are two moving averages with
vertical black lines marking the bars when the moving averages cross above and below each other. Each
of the four additional frames corresponds to a visual representation of an output variable evaluating a
specific condition. Since each variable's value is based on a conditional statement, the output of each
variable can only be either +1 (true) or 0 (false).

The formula used to create the output variables shown in the screenshot below is as follows:

{Plots +1 for every bar when 10-period simple MA

is greater than the 30-period simple MA,
otherwise it plots 0}
{Additional Frame 1 - Blue line}
Buy:= mov(Close,10,S) > mov(Close,30,S);

{Plots +1 for every bar when 10-period simple MA

is less than the 30-period simple MA,
otherwise it plots 0}
(Additional Frame 3 - Red line}
Sell:= mov(Close,10,S) < mov(Close,30,S);

{Plots +1 on the first bar when Buy is true,

then plots 0 for each additional bar until after
Sell is true for at least one bar, then plots +1
again on the next first occurrence of Buy being true}
{Additional Frame 2 - Dark Blue line}
RemoveBuySignals:= SignalRemove(Buy,Sell);

{Plots +1 on the first bar when Sell is true,

then plots 0 for each additional bar until after
Buy is true for at least one bar, then plots +1
again on the next first occurrence of Sell being true}
{Additional Frame 4 - Dark Red line}
RemoveSellSignals:= SignalRemove(Sell,Buy);

The end result of the formula logic above (using the Trading System Builder 205 to create this logic as a
simple trading system) can be seen in the screenshot below.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

386 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 387

5.6.81 Signal Remove Span

Signal Remove Span

SignalRemoveSpan (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function removes excesssive (redundant) "true" values that span PERIODS since intial "true" value.
The first non-zero bar passes through then all subsequent non-zero bars are ignored (zero is returned)
until PERIODS have passed since initial signal; From then on a new "true" value may pass through. In
other words, it returns +1 on the first occurence of a "true" value in DATA ARRAY and then returns 0
until after PERIODS have passed since initial signal.

The SignalRemoveSpan() function is best explained by a visual example. In the screenshot below
there are four additional frames below the price frame. Visible in the price frame are two moving
averages. Each of the four additional frames corresponds to a visual representation of an output variable
evaluating a specific condition. Since each variable's value is based on a conditional statement, the
output of each variable can only be either +1 (true) or 0 (false).

The formula used to create the output variables shown in the screenshot below is as follows:

{Plots +1 for every bar when 10-period simple MA

is greater than the 30-period simple MA,
otherwise it plots 0}
{Additional Frame 1 - Blue line}
Buy:= mov(Close,10,S) > mov(Close,30,S);

{Plots +1 for every bar when 10-period simple MA

is less than the 30-period simple MA,
otherwise it plots 0}
(Additional Frame 3 - Red line}
Sell:= mov(Close,10,S) < mov(Close,30,S);

{Plots +1 on the first bar when Buy is true,

then plots 0 for each additional bar until after
PERIODS has passed, then plots +1 again on the
next first occurrence of Buy being true}
{Additional Frame 2 - Dark Blue line}
RemoveBuySignals:= SignalRemoveSpan(Buy,10);

{Plots +1 on the first bar when Sell is true,

then plots 0 for each additional bar until after
PERIODS has passed, then plots +1 again on the
next first occurrence of Sell being true}
{Additional Frame 4 - Dark Red line}
RemoveSellSignals:= SignalRemoveSpan(Sell,10);

The end result of the formula logic above (using the Trading System Builder 205 to create this logic as a
simple trading system) can be seen in the screenshot below.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

388 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 389

5.6.82 Sine

Sine

sin (DATA ARRAY)

sin() returns the sine of DATA ARRAY.

This function assumes that the DATA ARRAY values are in degrees.

A sine wave can be plotted using formula sin(cum(7)). Increasing the value in this formula (i.e.:7) will
increase the frequency of the sine wave.

5.6.83 Square Root

Square Root

sqrt (DATA ARRAY)

The function calculations the Square Root of DATA ARRAY.

The Square Root of a negative DATA ARRAY always returns a NULL result.

The formula sqrt(16) returns 4.

The formula sqrt(-16)returns NULL.

5.6.84 Standard Deviation

Standard Deviation

stdev (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, TYPE, DATA ARRAY 2)

This function calculates the predefined Standard Deviation Indicator of DATA ARRAY for the specified
PERIODS. TYPE and DATA ARRAY 2 are optional parameters. Valid TYPE's are simple, weighted,
exponential, sine weighted, triangle, end point, and volume-adjusted (Abbreviated respectively as S, W,
E, SW, TRI, EP, and VOL).

For example,

stdev (Close, 4, Simple, Close) = stdev (C, 4)

stdev (Close, 4, Simple) = stdev (C, 4) {DataArray = DataArray2}

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 390 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The formula stdev(Close,21) calculates Standard Deviation of Close prices over 21-periods.

A 4-periods Standard Deviation Indicator can be written by first assigning a 4-periods Simple Moving
Average to the variable named 4PeriodMA and then summing the squares of the differences between
the Moving Average and the Close prices on each of the preceding four periods. Finally, calculate the
square root of this total.

{A 4-period Standard Deviation Indicator}

4PeriodMA:= Mov(Close,4,S);
_StDev:= Sqrt((Power(4PeriodMA-Close,2)+Power((4PeriodMA)-Ref(Close,-1),2)
+
Power((4PeriodMA)-Ref(Close,-2),2)+Power((4PeriodMA)-Ref(Close,-3
),2))/4);

5.6.85 Standard Error

Standard Error

ste (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function calculates the predefined Standard Error of DATA ARRAY for the specified PERIODS.

The formula ste(Close,21) calculates the Standard Error of Close prices over 21-periods.

5.6.86 Stochastic Momentum Index

Stochastic Momentum Index

stochmomentum (PERIODS, SMOOTHING, DOUBLE SMOOTHING)

This function calculates the predefined Stochastic Momentum Index.

The formula stochmomentum(PERIODS, SMOOTHING, DOUBLE SMOOTHING) calculates the

Stochastic Momentum Index by formula:

{Stochastic Momentum Index}

_StochMomentum:= 100 * (Mov(Mov(Close - (0.5 * (hhv(High,PERIODS) + llv

(Low,PERIODS))), SMOOTHING,E),DOUBLE SMOOTHING,E) / (0.5 * Mov(Mov(hhv

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 391

(High,PERIODS) - llv(Low,PERIODS), SMOOTHING,E),DOUBLE SMOOTHING,E)));

{end}

The following formula calculates a stochmomentum(13,25,2) Stochastic Momentum Index:

{Stochastic Momentum Index -> stochmomentum(13,25,2)}

_StochMomentum:= 100 * (Mov(Mov(Close - (0.5 * (hhv(High,13) + llv(Low,13

))),25,E),2,E) / (0.5 * Mov(Mov(hhv(High,13) - llv(Low,13),25,E),2,E)));

{end}

5.6.87 Stochastic Oscillator

Stochastic Oscillator

stoch (%K PERIODS, %K SLOWING)

This function calculates the predefined Stochastic Oscillator.

The function stoch(%K PERIODS,%K SLOWING) calculates the %K Stochastic Oscillator by formula:

{%K Stochastic Oscillator}

_K_Stoch:= (sum(Close - llv(Low,%K PERIODS),%K SLOWING) / sum(hhv(High,%K
PERIODS) - llv(Low,%K PERIODS),%K SLOWING)) * 100;
{end}

This next formula calculates a N-period %D of the %K in the preceding formula stoch(%K PERIODS,%
K SLOWING).

{%D Stochastic Oscillator}

_D_Stoch:= Mov(sum(Close - llv(Low,%K PERIODS),%K SLOWING) / sum(hhv(High,%
K PERIODS) - llv(Low,%K PERIODS),%K SLOWING)) * 100),%D PERIODS,S);
{end}

... Or...

{%D Stochastic Oscillator}

_D_Stoch:= Mov(stoch(%K PERIODS,%K SLOWING),%D PERIODS,S);
{end}

The formula stoch(5,3) returns the value of a 5-period %K slowed 3-periods.

The following formula calculates a 5-period %K Stochastic Oscillator with 3-period slowing:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 392 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

{%K Stochastic Oscillator}

_K_Stoch:= (sum(Close - llv(Low,5),3) / sum(hhv(High,5) - llv(Low,5),3)) *
100;
{end}

This next formula calculates a 3-period %D of the %K in the preceding formula.

{%D Stochastic Oscillator}

_D_Stoch:= Mov((sum(Close - llv(Low,5),3) / sum(hhv(High,5) - llv(Low,5),3
)) * 100),3,S);
{end}

... Or...

{%D Stochastic Oscillator}

_D_Stoch:= Mov(stoch(5,3),3,S);
{end}

5.6.88 Summation

Summation

sum (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

This function calculates a Cumulative Sum of DATA ARRAY for the specified PERIODS (including the
current period).

The formula sum(Close,12) returns the sum of the preceding 12 Close prices.

A 12-periods Simple Moving Average could be written as:

MA:= sum(Close,12) / 12;

5.6.89 Symbol Digits

Symbol Digits

SymbolDigits ()

This function returns a whole integer value as it corresponds to the number of digits to the right of the
decimal point for the current symbol loaded in the chart window.

For currency pairs with prices quoted out to four decimal places (such as EURUSD), SymbolDigits()
returns 4. For currency pairs with prices quoted out to two decimal places (such as USDJPY),
SymbolDigits() returns 2.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 393

By Example (for practical application of function):

Let's assume the user has decided to use the Close price crossing above its 20-period simple moving
average as a simple entry condition to alert a possible Buy trade. Let's also assume that the user
wishes to show a simulated stoploss level on the chart for this simulated trade entry and create a simple
exit condition to alert when the Close price has crossed below the simulated stoploss level.

The formula logic to create this simple system is shown below (if the use of any functions in the formula
below is unclear, please refer to their respective documentation):

StoplossValue:= 30; {this would typically be a user-defined Input variable}

{Convert the whole integer StoplossValue variable value

to a pip value that is comparable to the current symbol's
price scale}
CurrencyStoplossValue:= if(SymbolDigits()=4, StoplossValue * 0.0001,
if(SymbolDigits()=2, StoplossValue * 0.01,
0));

{Create the simulated Buy trade entry; ActiveBuyTrade

is checked to ensure no simulated trade is active;
0 = No Buy Trade Open, 1 = Buy Trade Currently Open}
{Displayed as blue Up Arrow grahic in price frame}
Buy:= ActiveBuyTrade=0 and Cross(Close,mov(C,20,S));

{Create a simulated entry price for the Buy trade;

this uses the Close price of the bar when the simulated
Buy trade is entered}
BuyPrice:= valuewhen(1,Buy,Close);

{Create the simulated stoploss level}

{Displayed as thin, dotted blue line in price frame}
BuyStop:= BuyPrice - CurrencyStoplossValue;

{Create the simulated Buy trade exit; ActiveBuyTrade

is checked to ensure a simulated trade is active;
0 = No Buy Trade Open, 1 = Buy Trade Currently Open}
{Displayed as blue Exit graphic in price frame}
BuyExit:= ActiveBuyTrade=1 and Cross(BuyStop,Close);

{Determine current simulated trade condition;

this is necessary to ensure the simulated stoploss
level stays associated with the proper simulated
entry point on the chart}
{ActiveBuyTrade can only be 0 or 1; It is set equal
to 1 when the Buy condition is true; the 1 (true)
value is maintained until BuyExit condition is true,
which resets it to zero and the process begins again.}
{Displayed as thicker black line in Additional Frame 1}

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 394 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

ActiveBuyTrade:= SignalFlag(Buy,BuyExit);

The end result of the formula logic above (using the Trading System Builder 205 to create this logic as a
simple alert system) can be seen in the screenshot below.

5.6.90 Symbol Point

Symbol Point

SymbolPoint ()

This function returns the point (pip) value for the current symbol loaded in the chart window. For
reference, a "pip" is the smallest increment of movement for any currency pair in the spot FOREX

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 395

market.

For currency pairs with prices quoted out to four decimal places a pip is equal to 0.0001. For example,
in EURUSD a movement of 1.2231 to 1.2232 is equal to one pip (0.0001).

For currency pairs with prices quoted out to only two decimal places a pip is equal to 0.01 (or 0.0100).
For example, in USDJPY a movement of 118.28 to 118.29 is equal to one pip (0.01).

By Example (for practical application of function):

Let's assume the user has decided to use the Close price crossing above its 20-period simple moving
average as a simple entry condition to alert a possible Buy trade. Let's also assume that the user
wishes to show a simulated stoploss level on the chart for this simulated trade entry and create a simple
exit condition to alert when the Close price has crossed below the simulated stoploss level.

The formula logic to create this simple system is shown below (if the use of any functions in the formula
below is unclear, please refer to their respective documentation):

StoplossValue:= 30; {this would typically be a user-defined Input variable}

{Create the simulated Buy trade entry; ActiveBuyTrade

is checked to ensure no simulated trade is active;
0 = No Buy Trade Open, 1 = Buy Trade Currently Open}
{Displayed as blue Up Arrow grahic in price frame}
Buy:= ActiveBuyTrade=0 and Cross(Close,mov(C,20,S));

{Create a simulated entry price for the Buy trade;

this uses the Close price of the bar when the simulated
Buy trade is entered}
BuyPrice:= valuewhen(1,Buy,Close);

{Create the simulated stoploss level}

{Displayed as thin, dotted blue line in price frame}
BuyStop:= BuyPrice - (StoplossValue * SymbolPoint());

{Create the simulated Buy trade exit; ActiveBuyTrade

is checked to ensure a simulated trade is active;
0 = No Buy Trade Open, 1 = Buy Trade Currently Open}
{Displayed as blue Exit graphic in price frame}
BuyExit:= ActiveBuyTrade=1 and Cross(BuyStop,Close);

{Determine current simulated trade condition;

this is necessary to ensure the simulated stoploss
level stays associated with the proper simulated
entry point on the chart}
{ActiveBuyTrade can only be 0 or 1; It is set equal
to 1 when the Buy condition is true; the 1 (true)
value is maintained until BuyExit condition is true,
which resets it to zero and the process begins again.}
{Displayed as thicker black line in Additional Frame 1}

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 396 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

ActiveBuyTrade:= SignalFlag(Buy,BuyExit);

The end result of the formula logic above (using the Trading System Builder 205 to create this logic as a
simple alert system) can be seen in the screenshot below.

5.6.91 Trough Value

Trough Value

trough (Nth, DATA ARRAY, % MINIMUM CHANGE)

This function returns the value of DATA ARRAY Nth trough(s) ago. N=1 would return the value of the
most recent trough. N=2 would return the value of the 2nd most recent trough, etc. The % MINIMUM
CHANGE parameter determines how much greater the new trough() value must be in comparison to

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 397

the previous trough() value before a new trough value is returned.

The formula Trough(1, Rsi(14), 10) returns the most recent trough() value of Rsi(14) if
there has been at least a 10% change from the previous trough value.

5.6.92 Trough Bars

Trough Bars

TroughBars (Nth, DATA ARRAY, % MINIMUM CHANGE)

Plots the number of bars that have passed from the Nth trough. N=1 would return the number of bars that
have passed since the most recent trough. N=2 would return the number of bars that have passed since
the 2nd most recent trough. Etc.

5.6.93 Typical Price

Typical Price

tp ()

This function calculates the predefined Typical Price Indicator.

The function tp() calculates the Typical Price by formula:

{Typical Price Indicator}

_TypicalPrice:= (High + Low + Close) / 3;
{end}

5.6.94 Ultimate Oscillator

Ultimate Oscillator

ult (CYCLE1, CYCLE2, CYCLE3)

This function calculates the predefined Ultimate Oscillator Indicator using the three cycle lengths
supplied as parameters.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 398 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The formula ult(7,14,28) calculates the default Ultimate Oscillator Indicator.

The function ult(CYCLE1,CYCLE2,CYCLE3)calculates the Ultimate Oscillator Indicator by formula:

{Ultimate Oscillator Indicator}

_Ult:= (((((Sum((Max((C-L),(C-Ref(L,-1)))),CYCLE1)) / (Sum((Max(Max((H-L),

H-Ref(L,-1)),Max((Ref(H,-1)-L),(Ref(H,-1)-Ref(L,-1))))),CYCLE1)))*4)+(((Sum
((Max((C-L),(C-Ref(L,-1)))), CYCLE2)) / (Sum((Max(Max((H-L),H-Ref(L,-1)),
Max((Ref(H,-1)-L),(Ref(H,-1)-Ref(L,-1))))),CYCLE2)))*2)+((Sum((Max((C-L),
(C-Ref(L,-1)))),CYCLE3)) / (Sum((Max(Max((H-L),H-Ref(L,-1)) ,Max((Ref(H,-1
)-L),(Ref(H,-1)-Ref(L,-1))))),CYCLE3)))) / CYCLE1) * 100;

{end}

5.6.95 Value When

Value When

valuewhen (Nth, EXPRESSION, DATA ARRAY)

This function returns the value of the DATA ARRAY when the EXPRESSION was true on the Nth most
recent occurrence. This includes all data loaded in the chart.

The formula valuewhen(2, cross(close,mov(close,13,S), rsi(14)) returns the value of

the 14-periods RSI on the 2nd most recent occurrence of the Close price crossing above its 13-periods
moving average.

5.6.96 Vertical Horizontal Filter

Vertical Horizontal Filter

vhf (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

Calculates the predefined Vertical Horizontal Filter of DATA ARRAY over the specified PERIODS.

The formula vhf(Close,28) calculates the Vertical Horizontal Filter of Close prices over the specified
28-periods.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 399

5.6.97 Weighted Close

Weighted Close

wc ()

The wc() function calculates the predefined Weighted Close Indicator.

The Weighted Close Indicator is calculated by multiplying the Close by two, adding the High and the
Low together, and then dividing by four. The result is the average price for the period with extra weight
given to the Close price.

The function wc() calculates the Weighted Close Indicator by formula:

{Weighted Close Indicator}

_WC:= ((Close * 2) + High + Low) / 4;
{end}

5.6.98 Wilder's Smoothing

Wilders Smoothing

Wilders (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS)

The Wilders() function calculates the predefined Wilder's Smoothing.

The function Wilders(DATA ARRAY, PERIODS) calculates the Wilder's Smoothing by formula:

{Wilder's Smoothing Indicator}

_Wilders:= Mov(DATA ARRAY, (PERIODS * 2) - 1, E);
{end}

The formula Wilders(Close,8) is equivalent to Mov(Close,8*2-1,E) or Mov(Close,15,E).

5.6.99 Williams' % R

Williams' %R

willr (PERIODS)

This function calculates the predefined Williams' %R indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 400 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The function willr() calculates the Williams' %R Indicator by formula:

{Williams' %R Indicator}
_Willr:= ((hhv(High,PERIODS) - Close) / (hhv(High, PERIODS) - llv(Low,
PERIODS))) * -100;
{end}

Notice that the formula is inverted by multiplying it by -100. Williams' %R is plotted on an upside down
scale with 0 at the top and -100 at the bottom. Values ranging from 0 to -20% indicate overbought levels
while values ranging from -80 to -100% indicate oversold levels.

5.6.100 Year

Year

year ()

This function returns the value of the year in a four-digit format.

If a bar had the date/time stamp of 02/17/2006, 13:44:00 (Feb. 17th, 2006, 1:44 P.M. EST), the year()
function would return 2006.

5.6.101 Zli

Zli

zli (DATA ARRAY, PERIODS, GAIN LIMIT)

Calculates the PERIODS zero-lag indicator of DATA ARRAY with the specified GAIN LIMIT value.
Valid GAIN LIMIT values are any positive integer.

The Zero-Lag Indicator was described in the article, "Zero Lag (Well Almost)" by John Ehlers and Ric
Way published in the November 2010 edition of Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities
magazine.

5.7 Functions (Reserved for Future Use)

Functions (Reserved for Future Use) cannot be used in the construction of custom indicators and
trading systems.The following Functions (Identifiers) are currently reserved for future use in VT Trader's
scripting language.

AD
ADX
ADXR

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 VT Trader Scripting Language 401

ALERT
ASWING
BBANDLINES
BUYP
CCIE
CMF
CO
CORREL
CSI
DELTA
DEMA
DI
DIVERGENCE
DMI
DX
EMV
EXTFML
FFF
FML
FMLVAR
FORECASTOSC
GAMMA
HIGHESTSINCEBARS
HPI
IMI
INERTIA
INPUT
KVO
LIFE
LINEARREG
LOWESTSINCEBARS
MACD
MARKETFACINDEX
MASS
MDI
MESALEADSINE
MESASINEWAVE
MFI
NVI
OBV
OPTION
OPTIONEXP
OSCP
OSCV
PDI
PEAKBARS
PER
PFE
PRICECHANNELHIGH
PRICECHANNELLOW
PROJBANDBOT
PROJBANDTOP
PROJOSC

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

402 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

PVI
PVT
QSTICK
RALLYWITHVOL
RANGEINDICATOR
REACTIONWITHVOL
RMI
RSQUARED
RVI
RWIH
RWIL
SECURITY
SELLP
STEBANDBOT
STEBANDTOP
SWING
TEMA
THETA
TICK
TRIX
TROUGHBARS
TSF
TVI
TYPICAL
VAR
VEGA
VOL
VOLO
WILLA
WRITEIF
WRITEVAL
ZIG

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

Technical Indicators

Part

VI
 404 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6 Technical Indicators

VT Trader includes 120+ of the most well-known technical indicators available to traders. Below is an
alphabetical listing of the technical indicators available in VT Trader. Click on the indicator's name for full
details.

A 404 B 404 C 404 D 404 E 405 F 405 G 405 H 405 I 405 J 405 K 405 L 405 M 406 N 406 O 406 P 406 Q
406 R 406 S 407 T 407 U 407 V 407 W 407 X 407 Y 407 Z 407

Aroon Indicator 408

Aroon Oscillator 410
Average Directional Movement Index (ADX) 412
Average Directional Movement Index Rating (ADXR) 415
Average True Range (ATR) 417

Balance of Power 419

Bollinger Bands 422
Bollinger Bands - Fibonacci Ratios 424
Bollinger Bandwidth 428
Bollinger Percent B (%b) 432

Chaikin's Volatility 434

Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index 436
Chande's Momentum Oscillator (CMO) 440
Chande's QStick 442
Chande's Range Action Verification Index (RAVI) 445
Chande's TrendScore 446
Chande's Variable Index Dynamic Average (VIDYA) 448
Chaos Accelerator Oscillator 450
Chaos Alligator Indicator 453
Chaos Awesome Oscillator 456
Chaos Fractals 459
Chaos Gator Oscillator 462
Choppiness Index 465
Commodity Channel Index (CCI) 467
Coppock Curve 471

Darvas Box 473

DeMark's DeMarker I 475
DeMark's Projected Range 478
DeMark's Range Expansion Index (REI) 480
Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) 482
Directional Movement Index 484

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 405

Directional Movement System 486

Disparity Index 490
Donchian Channel 492
Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) 494
Double Stochastic Oscillator 496

Ehlers Fisher Transform 499

Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index 502
Ehlers MESA Adaptive Moving Average (MAMA and FAMA) 504
Ehlers Relative Vigor Index (RVI) 506
Elder-Ray Bear Power 509
Elder-Ray Bull Power 512
Elliot Oscillator 516

--

Gann HiLo Activator 519

Gann Swing Oscillator 520
Gann Trend Oscillator 522

Hull Moving Average 525

Ichimoku Kinko Huo 527

Inertia 531

--

Kase CD 533
Kase DevStop II 536
Kase Peak Oscillator 538
Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) 540
Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio 543
Keltner Bands (Based on ATR) 545
Keltner Channels 548
Kurtosis Indicator 550

Linear Regression Acceleration 553

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

406 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Linear Regression Indicator 556

Linear Regression Slope 558

MACD 561
MACD-Histogram 565
MACD-Line 568
Mass Index 571
McClellan Histogram 574
McClellan Oscillator 576
McClellan Summation Index 579
McGinley Dynamic 581
Momentum 583
Moving Average (MA) 585
Moving Average Envelope 588
Moving Averages of Relative Strength Index (MA's of RSI) 592
Moving Slope Rate of Change 595

--

--

Parabolic SAR 597

Percentage Price Oscillator (PPO) 599
Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle 603
Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios 609
Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle 613
Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios 619
Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle 623
Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios 629
Polarized Fractal Efficiency 634

Quantitative Qualitative Estimation (QQE) 636

Rainbow Charts 640

Rainbow Oscillator 644
Rate of Change (ROC) 648
Recursive Moving Trend Average 651
Relative Momentum Index (RMI) 653
Relative Strength Index (RSI) 656
Relative Volatility Index (RVI) 658
R-Squared (R2) 661

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 407

Schaff Trend Cycle 664

Stochastic Momentum Index 666
Stochastic Oscillator (Fast) 669
Stochastic Oscillator (Slow) 675
Stochastic Oscillator (Full) 672
Stochastic RSI Oscillator 678
Stoller Average Range Channels (STARC Bands) 682
Support and Resistance 685

T3 Moving Average 688

Trailing Stoploss Levels (Volatility-Based) 690
Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level 692
Trend Continuation Factor (TCF) 695
Trend Intensity Index (TII) 698
Trend Oscillator (tosc) 700
Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) 702
Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) 704
Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) 706
True Strength Index (TSI) 708

Ulcer Index 712

Ultimate Oscillator 714

Volatility Quality Index 717

Williams Percent Range (%R) 719

--

--

--

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 408 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.1 Aroon Indicator

Overview

The Aroon indicator was developed by Tushar Chande in 1995. The Aroon indicator attempts to
determine if a trading instrument is trending or not as well as define how strong the trend is. Since
Chande designed this indicator to reveal the beginning of a new trend he named it "Aroon" which means
"Dawn's Early Light" in Sanskrit.

Interpretation

The Aroon indicator is constructed with two lines - Aroon(Up) and Aroon(Down). Aroon(up) is the amount
of time (on a percentage basis) that has elapsed between the start of the time period and the point at
which the highest price during that time period occurred. If the trading instrument is setting a new low for
the given time period, Aroon(up) will be zero. However, if the trading instrument closes higher than it has
during the rest of the time period, Aroon(up) will be +100. For each subsequent period that passes
without another new high, Aroon(up) moves down by an amount equal to (1 / # of periods) x 100.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 409

Technically, the formula for Aroon(up) is:

[ [ (# of periods) - (# of periods since highest high during that time) ] / (# of periods) ] x 100

For example, consider plotting a 10-period Aroon(up) line on a daily chart. If the highest price for the past
ten days occurred 6 days ago (4 days since the start of the time period), Aroon(up) for today would be
equal to ((10-6)/10) x 100 = 40. If the lowest price in that same period happened yesterday (i.e. on day
9), Aroon(down) for today would be 90.

Aroon(down) is calculated in just the opposite manner, looking for new lows instead of new highs. When
a new low is set, Aroon(down) is equal to +100. If the stock is setting a new high for the given time
period, Aroon(down) will be zero. And so on...

The formula for Aroon(down) is:

[ [ (# of periods) - (# of periods since lowest low during that time) ] / (# of periods) ] x 100

Chande states that when Aroon(up) and Aroon(down) are in close proximity to each other and
descending lower that the market is consolidating and no strong trend is evident. Aroon(up) dipping
below 50 indicates that the current trend's upward momentum is gone. Similarly, Aroon(down) dipping
below 50 indicates that the current trend's downward momentum is gone. Values above 70 indicate a
strong trend in the same direction as the Aroon (up or down). Values below 30 indicate a strong trend in
the opposite direction.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Aroon Indicator

Function Name Alias: vt_Aroon
Label Mask:
Aroon Up (%Periods%) = %_AroonUp%
Aroon Down (%Periods%) = %_AroonDown%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Aroon Indicator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 410 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Var Name: _AroonUp

Name: (Aroon Up)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: _AroonDown
Name: (Aroon Down)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: gray
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_AroonUp:= ((Periods-HHVBars(H,Periods+1))/Periods)*100;
_AroonDown:= ((Periods-LLVBars(L,Periods+1))/Periods)*100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Aroon indicator.

6.2 Aroon Oscillator

Overview

The Aroon Oscillator is derived from the Aroon Indicator. The Aroon Oscillator is constructed by
subtracting Aroon(down) from Aroon(up). Since Aroon(up) and Aroon(down) oscillate between 0
and +100, the Aroon Oscillator oscillates between -100 and +100.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 411

Interpretation

The Aroon Oscillator indicates and upward trend when it is above zero and a downward trend when it is
below zero. The farther away the oscillator is from the zero line, the stronger the trend.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Aroon Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_AroonOsc
Label Mask: Aroon Oscillator (%Periods%) = %_AroonOsc%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Aroon Oscillator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 412 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _AroonOsc
Name: (Osc)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -50.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_AroonUp:= ((Periods-HHVBars(H,Periods+1))/Periods)*100;
_AroonDown:= ((Periods-LLVBars(L,Periods+1))/Periods)*100;
_AroonOsc:= _AroonUp - _AroonDown;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Aroon Oscillator.

6.3 Average Directional Movement Index (ADX)

Overview

The Average Directional Movement Index (ADX) is a momentum indicator developed by J. Welles Wilder
and described in his book "New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems", written in 1978. The ADX is
constructed from two other Wilders' indicators: the Positive Directional indicator (+DI) and the Negative
Directional Indicator (-DI). The +DI and -DI indicators are commonly referred to as the Directional
Movement Index. Combining the +/-DI and applying a Wilders() smoothing filter results in the final ADX

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 413

value.

Interpretation

The ADX's main purpose is to measure the strength of market trends on a 0-100 scale; the higher the
ADX value the stronger the trend. It should be noted that while the direction of price is important to the
ADX's calculation, the ADX itself is not a directional indicator. Values above 40 indicate very strong
trending while values below 20 indicate non-trending or ranging market conditions.

Traders typically use the ADX as a filter along with other indicators to create a more concrete trading
methodology. Many traders view ADX turning up from below 20 as an early signal of a new emerging
trend while, conversely, a declining ADX turning down from above 40 as deterioration of the current trend.
Wilder suggests using the ADX as part of a system that includes the +DI and -DI indicators; please refer
to the Directional Movement System indicator for additional details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Average Directional Movement Index (ADX)

Function Name Alias: vt_ADX
Label Mask: ADX (%Pr%,%SmPr%) = %_ADX%

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

414 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Placement: New Frame

Data Inspection Alias: ADX

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: DX Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: SmPr
Display Name: ADX Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _ADX
Name: (ADX)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TH:= if(Ref(C,-1)>H,Ref(C,-1),H);
TL:= if(Ref(C,-1)<L,Ref(C,-1),L);
TR:= TH-TL;

PlusDM:= if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L>=Ref(L,-1), H-Ref(H,-1),

if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L<Ref(L,-1) AND H-Ref(H,-1)>Ref(L,-1)-L, H-
Ref(H,-1),
0));

PlusDI:= 100 * Wilders(PlusDM,Pr)/Wilders(Tr,Pr);

MinusDM:= if(L<Ref(L,-1) AND H<=Ref(H,-1), Ref(L,-1)-L,

if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L<Ref(L,-1) AND H-Ref(H,-1)<Ref(L,-1)-L,
Ref(L,-1)-L,
0));

MinusDI:= 100 * Wilders(MinusDM,Pr)/Wilders(Tr,Pr);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 415

DIDif:= Abs(PlusDI-MinusDI);
DISum:= PlusDI + MinusDI;

_ADX:= 100 * Wilders(DIDif/DISum,SmPr);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Average Directional Movement Index (ADX).

6.4 Average Directional Movement Index Rating (ADXR)

Overview

The Average Directional Movement Index Rating (ADXR) indicator is an attempt to quantify the
momentum change of the ADX indicator. It was developed by J. Welles Wilder and described in his book
"New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems", written in 1978. The ADXR is constructed adding the
current ADX value and an ADX value n-Periods ago and then dividing that sum by two. This additional
smoothing step causes the ADXR to be slightly less responsive to changes in the trend than the ADX.
According to Wilder, this smoothing step was used to help compensate for the variance of excessive
tops and bottoms.

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

416 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The ADXR is used in much the same way as the ADX; the higher the ADXR value the stronger the trend.
Values above 40 indicate very strong trending while values below 20 indicate non-trending or ranging
market conditions.

Wilder suggests using the ADXR (or ADX) as part of a system that includes the +DI and -DI indicators;
please refer to the Directional Movement System indicator for additional details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Average Average Directional Movement Index Rating (ADXR)

Function Name Alias: vt_ADXR
Label Mask: ADXR (%Pr%,%SmPeriods%) = %_ADXR%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: ADXR

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: DX Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: SmPeriods
Display Name: ADXR Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _ADXR
Name: (ADXR)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 417

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TH:= if(Ref(C,-1)>H,Ref(C,-1),H);
TL:= if(Ref(C,-1)<L,Ref(C,-1),L);
TR:= TH-TL;

PlusDM:= if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L>=Ref(L,-1), H-Ref(H,-1),

if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L<Ref(L,-1) AND H-Ref(H,-1)>Ref(L,-1)-L, H-
Ref(H,-1),
0));

PlusDI:= 100 * Wilders(PlusDM,Pr)/Wilders(Tr,Pr);

MinusDM:= if(L<Ref(L,-1) AND H<=Ref(H,-1), Ref(L,-1)-L,

if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L<Ref(L,-1) AND H-Ref(H,-1)<Ref(L,-1)-L,
Ref(L,-1)-L,
0));

MinusDI:= 100 * Wilders(MinusDM,Pr)/Wilders(Tr,Pr);

DIDif:= Abs(PlusDI-MinusDI);
DISum:= PlusDI + MinusDI;

ADXFinal:= 100 * Wilders(DIDif/DISum,SmPeriods);

_ADXR:= (ADXFinal + Ref(ADXFinal,1-SmPeriods)) / 2;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Average Directional Movement Index Rating (ADXR).

6.5 Average True Range (ATR)

Overview

Introduced by Welles Wilder in his book "New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems" (1978), the
Average True Range (ATR) is a measure of a trading instrument's volatility. It measures the degree of
price movement, not the direction or duration of the price movement. The True Range is first calculated
using the is the greatest of the following:

Difference between the current high and the current low

Difference between the previous closing price and the current high
Difference between the previous closing price and the current low

The Average True Range is then formulated by adding smoothing to the True Range. The True Range can
be smoothed using a variety of techniques to create the final Average True Range indicator such as
Wilders' Smoothing function or a simple moving average (which are the two most common smoothing
methods used).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

418 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Wilder stated that high ATR values often indicated market bottoms after a sell-off, while low ATR values
typically indicated extended periods of sideways price movement (such as those found at tops and after
consolidation periods). The Average True Range can be interpreted using the same techniques that are
used with the other volatility indicators.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Average True Range (ATR)

Function Name Alias: vt_ATR
Label Mask: ATR (%tPr%,%stp%) = %_ATR%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Average True Range

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: Periods

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 419

Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: stp
Display Name: Smoothing Type
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
Wilders
Simple_Moving_Average
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Wilders

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _ATR
Name: (ATR)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TH:= if(Ref(C,-1) > H,Ref(C,-1),H);

TL:= if(Ref(C,-1) < L,Ref(C,-1),L);
TR:= TH-TL;
_ATR:= if(stp=0, Wilders(TR,tPr), mov(TR,tPr,S));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Average True Range (ATR) indicator.

6.6 Balance of Power

Overview

The Balance of Power (BOP) indicator was described by Igor Livshin in the August 2001 edition of
Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine. Livshin explains that, "The balance of power
(BOP) indicator measures the strength of the bulls vs. bears by assessing the ability of each to push
price to an extreme level." The Balance of Power indicator is calculated by the formula:

BOP = (Close price – Open price) / (High price – Low price)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

420 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The resulting Balance of Power value is then typically smoothed by a moving average.

Interpretation

There are three basic techniques for using the Balance of Power indicator to generate trading signals.

Trend Direction: When the BOP is rising, prices are in an upwards trend. When the BOP is declining,
prices are in a downwards trend. BOP / Zero crossovers may also be useful. When the BOP crosses
above zero a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the BOP crosses below zero a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the BOP and price can prove to be very effective in
identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are several types
of divergences:

Classic Divergence (aka: Regular Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the BOP
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the BOP

Hidden Divergence (aka: Reverse, Continuation, Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in BOP and higher lows in price

Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in BOP and lower highs in price

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The BOP can be used to identify potential overbought and oversold
conditions in price movements thereby providing an early warning for potential trend reversals. These
conditions are generated by observing where the BOP clusters its tops and bottoms and setting its

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 421

overbought and oversold levels around those values.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Balance of Power

Function Name Alias: vt_BOP
Label Mask: Balance of Power (%SmPer%,%SmType%) = %BOP%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Balance of Power

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: SmPer
Display Name: Smoothing Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 14
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: SmType
Display Name: Smoothing Type
Type: MA type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: BOP
Name: (BOP)
Line Color: black
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

BOP:= Mov((C-O)/(H-L),SmPer,SmType);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 422 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Balance of Power indicator.

6.7 Bollinger Bands

Overview

Bollinger Bands were developed by John Bollinger and introduced in the late 1980's. Bollinger Bands
serve these primary functions:

To provide a relative definition of high and low

To identify periods of high and low volatility
To identify periods when prices are at extreme levels

They do this by using standard deviation as a measure of volatility. Since standard deviation is a
measure of volatility, the bands are self-adjusting; they widen during periods of higher volatility and
contract during periods of lower volatility. Bollinger Bands consist of 3 bands designed to encompass the
majority of a trading instrument's price action. The middle band is a basis for the intermediate-term
trend, typically a 20-periods simple moving average, which also serves as the base for the upper and
lower bands. The upper band's and lower band's distance from the middle band is determined by
volatility. Typically, the upper band is plotted +2 standard deviations above the middle band while the
lower band is plotted -2 standard deviations below the middle band.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 423

Interpretation

Bollinger Bands are usually calculated using the trading instrument's prices, but they can also be
calculated using other indicators as their base. These comments refer to bands based on prices. Mr.
Bollinger notes the following characteristics of Bollinger Bands.

Sharp price changes tend to occur after the bands tighten as volatility lessens (a.k.a. "the
Squeeze")
When prices move outside the bands a continuation of the current trend is implied
Bottoms and tops made outside the bands followed by bottoms and tops made inside the
bands call for reversals in the trend
A move that originates at one band tends to go all the way to the other band

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Bollinger Bands

Function Name Alias: vt_BBands
Label Mask:
Bollinger Bands (%Pr%,%tPr%,%ma%,%D%)
MB = %MB%, UB = %UB%, LB = %LB%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Bollinger Bands

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: ma
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: D

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 424 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Display Name: Standard Deviations

Type: float
Default: 2.0000

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: MB
Name: (Middle Band)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: UB
Name: (Upper Band)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: LB
Name: (Lower Band)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MB:= Mov(Pr,tPr,ma);
UB:= BLines(Pr,mov(Pr,tPr,ma),tPr,D,0);
LB:= BLines(Pr,mov(Pr,tPr,ma),tPr,D,1);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Bollinger Bands indicator.

6.8 Bollinger Bands - Fibonacci Ratios

Overview

The Fibonacci Bollinger Bands indicator is based on the same principles as the standard Bollinger
Bands indicator developed by John Bollinger. The Fibonacci Bollinger Bands indicator bases its upper
and lower bands on volatility just like the Bollinger Bands indicator does, but instead of using standard
deviation as the measure of volatility, a Wilders Smoothed ATR is used in its place.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 425

The middle band is a moving average used to establish the intermediate-term trend. The 3 upper bands
are constructed by using the Wilders Smoothed ATR and multiplying it by each of the Fibonacci factors
(1.6180, 2.6180, and 4.2360) and then adding the results to the middle band. The 3 lower bands are
constructed in the same manner as the upper bands except their results are subtracted from the middle
band.

Interpretation

The Fibonacci Bollinger Bands indicator may provide good clues to price reversals when used in
conjunction with other technical analysis methods or indicators.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Bollinger Bands - Fibonacci Ratios

Function Name Alias: vt_BBandsFibs
Label Mask:
Bollinger Bands - Fibonacci (%pr%,%periods%,%mat%,%factor1%,%
factor2%,%factor3%)
MB = %MidPoint%, UB1 = %UpperBand1%, UB2 = %UpperBand2%, UB3 = %
UpperBand3%

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

426 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

LB1 = %LowerBand1%, LB2 = %LowerBand2%, LB3 = %LowerBand3%

Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Bollinger Bands - Fibonacci

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: mat
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: Factor1
Display Name: Fibonacci Ratio 1
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 1.6180
Max Bounds: 1.0000
Min Bounds: 13.0000

[New] button...
Name: Factor1
Display Name: Fibonacci Ratio 2
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 2.6180
Max Bounds: 1.0000
Min Bounds: 13.0000

[New] button...
Name: Factor1
Display Name: Fibonacci Ratio 3
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 4.2360
Max Bounds: 1.0000
Min Bounds: 13.0000

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: UpperBand3
Name: (Upper Band 3)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 427

Line Color: dark green

Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: UpperBand2
Name: (Upper Band 2)
Line Color: green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: UpperBand1
Name: (Upper Band 1)
Line Color: light green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: MidPoint
Name: (Middle Band)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: LowerBand3
Name: (Lower Band 3)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: LowerBand2
Name: (Lower Band 2)
Line Color: green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: LowerBand1
Name: (Lower Band 1)
Line Color: light green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TH:=If(Ref(C,-1) > H,Ref(C,-1),H);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 428 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

TL:=If(Ref(C,-1) < L,Ref(C,-1),L);

TR:=TH-TL;
TRA:= Wilders(TR,Periods);

MidPoint:= Mov(pr,Periods,mat);

UpperBand3:= MidPoint + (factor3 * TRa);

UpperBand2:= MidPoint + (factor2 * TRa);
UpperBand1:= MidPoint + (factor1 * TRa);

LowerBand1:= MidPoint - (factor1 * TRa);

LowerBand2:= MidPoint - (factor2 * TRa);
LowerBand3:= MidPoint - (factor3 * TRa);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Fibonacci Bollinger Bands indicator.

6.9 Bollinger Bandwidth

Overview

Bollinger Bandwidth is an important indicator derived from John Bollinger's original Bollinger Bands
indicator. Bandwidth is a relative measure of the width of the Bollinger Bands.

The Bollinger Bandwidth equation can be constructed as:

Bandwidth = (Bollinger Upper Band - Bollinger Lower Band) / Bollinger Middle Band

Volatility is high when the Bollinger Bands are farther apart and low when the Bollinger Bands are closer
together. Based on the assumption that price (and volatility) generally operates in cycles - periods of low
volatility inevitably followed by periods of high volatility and so on and so forth - traders can learn to take
advantage of these cycles.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 429

Interpretation

The Bollinger Bandwidth is particularly useful in helping traders identify "the Squeeze". Bollinger states
that Bollinger Bands "are driven by volatility, and the Squeeze is a pure reflection of that volatility". The
Squeeze is similar to "the calm before the storm". The Squeeze is identified when the Bandwidth is at
its lowest low value within n-periods.

Trading signals can be generated based on the breakout of price (and volatility) following the Squeeze.

The most difficult part of trading breakout signals is determining the direction of the price breakout.
Bollinger suggests using other indicators like the Relative Strength Index (RSI) and a volume-based
indicator such as Accumulation/Distribution for confirmation combined with the Squeeze setup.

Bollinger also suggests looking for positive and negative divergence between indicators and price as an
indication of the potential breakout direction. Positive divergence (indicators rising while price is declining
or remaining neutral) is often considered a bullish sign while negative divergence (indicators declining
while price is rising) is considered a bearish sign.

Lastly, traders should be on the lookout for "false breakouts" (a.k.a. "Head Fakes" by Bollinger). Price
often breaks out in one direction immediately following the Squeeze causing many traders to think the
breakout will continue in that direction, only to quickly reverse and make the true, more significant
breakout in the opposite direction. Traders acting quickly on the initial breakout (and perhaps without
confirmation from other indicators) often get caught on the wrong side of the price action, while those
traders expecting a "false breakout" can quickly close out their original position (if they have one open)
and enter a trade in the direction of the reversal.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

430 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Implementation

Reference lines for “The Bulge” (blue line - the highest Bandwidth value within the previous n-periods) and
“The Squeeze” (red line - lowest Bandwidth value within the previous n-periods) have been included.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Bollinger Bandwidth

Function Name Alias: vt_Bandwidth
Label Mask:
Bollinger Bandwidth (%Pr%,%tPr%,%ma%,%D%,%bulgeper%,%squeezeper%)
Bw = %Bandwidth%, Bulge = %Bulge%, Squeeze = %Squeeze%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Bollinger Bandwidth

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Bollinger Bands Price
Type: price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: Bollinger Bands Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: ma
Display Name: Bollinger Bands MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: D
Display Name: Bollinger Bands Standard Deviations
Type: float
Default: 2.0000

[New] button...
Name: bulgeper
Display Name: Bandwidth Bulge Periods
Type: Integer

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 431

Default: 150

[New] button...
Name: squeezeper
Display Name: Bandwidth Squeeze Periods
Type: Interger
Default: 150

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Bandwidth
Name: (Bandwidth)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Bulge
Name: (The Bulge)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Squeeze
Name: (The Squeeze)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MB:= Mov(Pr,tPr,ma);
UB:= BLines(Pr,mov(Pr,tPr,ma),tPr,D,0);
LB:= BLines(Pr,mov(Pr,tPr,ma),tPr,D,1);

Bandwidth:= (UB-LB)/MB;

Bulge:= hhv(Bandwidth,bulgeper);
Squeeze:= llv(Bandwidth,squeezeper);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Bollinger Bandwidth indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 432 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.10 Bollinger Percent B (%b)

Overview

Bollinger Percent B (%b) is an important indicator derived from John Bollinger's original Bollinger Bands
indicator. %b depicts the location of the most recent close price in relation to the Bollinger Bands as
well as to what degree it is above or below any of the bands.

The Bollinger Percent B equation can be constructed as:

Percent B = ((Close - Bollinger Lower Band) / (Bollinger Upper Band - Bollinger Lower Band))*100

Interpretation

If the close price is equal to the upper Bollinger Band, %b will be 100 (percent). If the close price is
equal to the lower Bollinger Band, %b will be 0.0. A %b value of 50 means the close price is equal to the
middle Bollinger Band.

Furthermore, readings above 100 and below 0 indicate that the close price is outside of the Bollinger
Bands by a corresponding percentage or the Bollinger Bandwidth. A %b value of 125 means that the
close price is above the upper Bollinger Band by 25% of the Bandwidth while a %b value of -25 means
that the close price is below the lower Bollinger Band by 25% of the Bandwidth.

Construction

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 433

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Bollinger Percent B (%b)

Function Name Alias: vt_PercentB
Label Mask: Bollinger %%b (%Pr%,%tPr%,%ma%,%D%) = %B%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Bollinger %b

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Bollinger Bands Price
Type: price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: Bollinger Bands Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: ma
Display Name: Bollinger Bands MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: D
Display Name: Bollinger Bands Standard Deviations
Type: float
Default: 2.0000

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: B
Name: (%b)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +100.0000
Color: red

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 434 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MB:= Mov(Pr,tPr,ma);
UB:= BLines(Pr,mov(Pr,tPr,ma),tPr,D,0);
LB:= BLines(Pr,mov(Pr,tPr,ma),tPr,D,1);

B:= ((Pr-LB)/(UB-LB))*100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Bollinger Percent B indicator.

6.11 Chaikin's Volatility

Overview

Developed by Marc Chaikin, the Chaikin Volatility indicator quantifies volatility as the widening of the
range between high and low prices by comparing the spread between the instrument's high and low
prices over n-periods. Chaikin's Volatility indicator is created by first calculating an exponential moving
average of the difference between the High and Low price for each period over n-periods (typically 10
periods) and then by calculating the percentage change in the exponential moving average over n-periods
(also typically 10 periods).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 435

Interpretation

There are two basic methods to interpret Chaikin's measure of volatility.

Method 1: Assume that market tops are generally accompanied by increased volatility while the late
stages of market bottoms are generally accompanied by decreased volatility.

Method 2: Assume that a shorter term increase in the Volatility indicator indicates an approaching
market bottom while a longer term decrease in the volatility indicator indicates an approaching market
top.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chaikin's Volatility

Function Name Alias: vt_CVOL
Label Mask: Chaikin's Volatility (%hlper%,%rocper%) = %CVOL%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chaikin's Volatility

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 436 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: hlper
Display Name: High-Low Average Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

[New] button...
Name: rocper
Display Name: Rate of Change Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: CVOL
Name: (Volatility)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

HLAverage:= Mov((H-L),hlper,E);
HLAverageChange:= Ref(HLAverage,-rocper);
CVOL:= ((HLAverage - HLAverageChange) / HLAverageChange) * 100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Chaikin's Volatility indicator.

6.12 Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index

Overview

The Dynamic Momentum Index (DMI) was developed by Tushar Chande and Stanley Kroll. The indicator
is described in detail in their book "The New Technical Trader".

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 437

Interpretation

Chande's DMI is very similar to Welles Wilder’s Relative Strength Index (RSI), however, there is one very
important difference. Unlike the RSI which uses a fixed number of periods, the Dynamic Momentum
Index uses a variable amount of periods as market volatility changes. The number of periods the DMI
uses decreases as market volatility increases thereby allowing the indicator to be more responsive to
price changes.

The Dynamic Momentum Index can be interpreted in much the same way was as the more traditional
RSI as an overbought and oversold indicator. Readings above 70 are considered to be overbought while
readings under 30 are considered to be oversold.

Implementation

The DMI indicator has 2 indicator plots available. The default data plot is the Dynamic Momentum Index
indicator itself. The secondary data plot is the dynamic periods. The dynamic periods data plot shows
what periods length is being used for any given bar loaded in the chart.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

438 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index

Function Name Alias: vt_ChandeDMI
Label Mask:
Chande's DMI (%price%,%stdevPeriods%,%stdevmaper%,%stdevmat%,%
DmiPeriods%,%DmiLowerLimit%/%DmiUpperLimit%)
%plot% = %IndicatorPlot%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chande's DMI

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: stdevPeriods
Display Name: Standard Deviation Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

[New] button...
Name: stdevmaper
Display Name: MA of Standard Deviation Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

[New] button...
Name: stdevmat
Display Name: MA of Standard Deviation Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: DmiPeriods
Display Name: Dynamic Momentum Index Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: DmiLowerLimit
Display Name: Dynamic Periods Lower Bounds
Type: integer
Default: 3

[New] button...
Name: DmiUpperLimit
Display Name: Dynamic Periods Upper Bounds
Type: integer

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 439

Default: 30

[New] button...
Name: plot
Display Name: Display DMI or Periods Length
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
Dynamic_Momentum_Index
Dynamic_Periods_Length
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Dynamic_Momentum_Index

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: IndicatorPlot
Name: (DMI)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid line

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: gray
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Vi:= Stdev(price,stdevPeriods) / Mov(Stdev(price,stdevPeriods),

stdevmaper,stdevmat);
Td:= Int(DmiPeriods/Vi);
Td:= if(Td>DmiUpperLimit,DmiUpperLimit,if(Td<DmiLowerLimit,
DmiLowerLimit,Td));

rsi_r:= (price - ref(price,-1));

rsi_rs:= Wilders(if(rsi_r>0,rsi_r,0),Td) / Wilders(if(rsi_r<0,Abs
(rsi_r),0),Td);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 440 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

DMIndex:= 100-(100/(1+rsi_rs));

IndicatorPlot:= if(plot=0,DMIndex,Td);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Chande's DMI indicator.

6.13 Chande's Momentum Oscillator (CMO)

Overview

The Chande Momentum Oscillator (CMO) was developed by Tushar Chande and explained in the book
"The New Technical Trader" by Tushar Chande and Stanley Kroll. The CMO was designed to calculate
what Chande refers to as “pure momentum”. The CMO is similar to, yet unique from, other momentum-
oriented indicators such as the RSI, Stochastic, and Rate-of-Change.

The CMO uses data for both up days and down days in the numerator, thereby directly measuring
momentum. The calculations are performed on unsmoothed data. This allows for short-term extreme
movements to be less hidden. However, smoothing can be applied to the CMO if desired. The scale is
bound between +100 and -100 thus allowing the user to clearly see changes in net momentum using the
0 level as a balance point.

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 441

The Chande Momentum Oscillator can be used to measure several conditions:

Identifying Overbought/oversold Conditions: Looking for extreme overbought or oversold conditions is the
primary method of interpreting the CMO. As a general rule, Mr. Chande quantifies an overbought level
at +50 and the oversold level at -50. At +50, up-day momentum is three times the down-day momentum;
At -50, down-day momentum is three times the up-day momentum. These levels essentially correspond
to the common 70/30 levels used with the RSI indicator.

Using a CMO Trigger Line: Trade entry and exit rules can be created by plotting a moving average of the
CMO as a "trigger" line. For example, using the default 20-period CMO, a 9-period moving average may
serve as a good trigger line. Buy when the CMO crosses above the 9-period trigger line; sell when it
crosses below it.

Trendiness: The CMO can also be used to measure the degree of trendiness an instrument exhibits.
Higher CMO values correspond to betting trendiness while lower values of CMO indicate a possible
trading range.

Divergence: Although not specifically mentioned in Chande’s book, looking for divergence between the
CMO and the instrument's price may also be a viable strategy as it often is with other similar
momentum-oriented indicators.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chande's Momentum Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_CMO
Label Mask: Chande's Momentum Osc. (%Price%,%Periods%) = %ChMomOcs%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chande's Momentum Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 442 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Var Name: ChMomOcs
Name: (CMO)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -50.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

UpDay:= Sum((Price-Ref(Price,-1))*(Price>Ref(Price,-1)),Periods);
DownDay:= Sum((Ref(Price,-1)-Price)*(Price<Ref(Price,-1)),Periods);
ChMomOcs:= 100 * ((UpDay-DownDay)/(UpDay+DownDay));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Chandes' Momentum Oscillator indicator.

6.14 Chande's QStick

Overview

The Chande QStick was developed by Tushar Chande to help identify market trends. It is a moving
average of the difference between the opening and closing prices.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 443

Interpretation

Signals can be generated by identifying peaks and troughs, zero line crossings, and/or divergences
between the QStick and the instrument's price.

Implementation

The indicator is shown as a bi-color histogram to make identifying peaks, troughs, and zero line
crossings easier.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chande's QStick

Function Name Alias: vt_ChandeQS
Label Mask:
Chande's QStick (%periods%,%mat%)
Up = %CQS_Up%, Down = %CQS_Down%
Placement: New Frame

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

444 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Data Inspection Alias: Chande's QStick

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: QStick Periods
Type: integer
Default: 8

[New] button...
Name: mat
Display Name: QStick Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: CQS_Up
Name: (CQS-Up)
Line Color: green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: CQS_Down
Name: (CQS-Down)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

CQS:= mov((C-O),periods,mat);
CQS_Up:= if(CQS>ref(CQS,-1),CQS,CQS);
CQS_Down:= if(CQS<ref(CQS,-1),CQS,null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Chande's QStick indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 445

6.15 Chande's Range Action Verification Index (RAVI)

Overview

Developed by Tushar Chande, The Range Action Verification Index (RAVI) indicator is used to help
identify whether the market is trending (similar to the ADX).

Interpretation

If the RAVI is over 3% the market is said to be trending.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chande's Range Action Verification Index

Function Name Alias: vt_RAVI
Label Mask: Chande's RAVI (%pr%,%ShortMA%,%LongMA%) = %RAVI%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chande's RAVI

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 446 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: ShortMA
Display Name: Short Periods
Type: integer
Default: 7

[New] button...
Name: LongMA
Display Name: Long Periods
Type: integer
Default: 65

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: RAVI
Name: (RAVI)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +3.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

RAVI:= abs(1000*(mov(pr,ShortMA,S)-mov(pr,LongMA,S))/mov(pr,LongMA,S));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Chande's RAVI indicator.

6.16 Chande's TrendScore

Overview

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 447

Chande's Trendscore indicator was described by Tushar Chande in the September 1993 edition of Stock
& Commodities magazine. The TrendScore attempts to make a quantitative and qualitative determination
of the direction and strength of a market trend by comparing the current close price to previous close
prices over the last 20 periods.

Interpretation

The TrendScore indicator oscillates between +10 and -10. A +10 reading indicates a strong uptrend is
underway. A -10 reading indicates a strong downtrend is underway. Readings above 0 suggest an
upward trend of varying strength and readings below 0 suggest a downward trend of varying strength.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chande's TrendScore

Function Name Alias: vt_ChandeTS
Label Mask: Chande's TrendScore (%price%) = %TrendScore%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chande's TrendScore

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 448 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: TrendScore
Name: (TrendScore)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TrendScore:= If(price>=Ref(price,-11),1,-1) + If(price>=Ref(price,-

12),1,-1) +
If(price>=Ref(price,-13),1,-1) + If(price>=Ref(price,-
14),1,-1) +
If(price>=Ref(price,-15),1,-1) + If(price>=Ref(price,-
16),1,-1) +
If(price>=Ref(price,-17),1,-1) + If(price>=Ref(price,-
18),1,-1) +
If(price>=Ref(price,-19),1,-1) + If(price>=Ref(price,-
20),1,-1);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Chande's TrendScore indicator.

6.17 Chande's Variable Index Dynamic Average (VIDYA)

Overview

Developed by Tushar Chande, the Variable Index Dynamic Average (VIDYA) indicator was described in
the March 1992 edition of Stock & Commodities magazine. Chande's VIDYA is a moving average that
automatically adjusts its speed based on market volatility. The absolute value of a 9-period Chande
Momentum Oscillator is used for the volatility index.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 449

Interpretation

Chande's VIDYA can be used in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer to the "Moving
Average" indicator for additional details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chande's Variable Index Dynamic Average (VIDYA)

Function Name Alias: vt_VIDYA
Label Mask: Chande's VIDYA (%Price%, %Periods%,%pds%) = %Vidya%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chande's VIDYA

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 450 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: CMO Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 9
Min Bounds: 3
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: pds
Display Name: VIDYA Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 20
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Vidya
Name: (VIDYA)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

UpDay:= Sum((Price-Ref(Price,-1))*(Price>Ref(Price,-1)),Periods);
DownDay:= Sum((Ref(Price,-1)-Price)*(Price<Ref(Price,-1)),Periods);
_CMO:= 100 * ((UpDay-DownDay)/(UpDay+DownDay));

SC:= 2/(pds+1);
absCMO:= abs(_CMO)/100;

Vidya:= If(BarCount()<=(pds+1), Price, (SC*AbsCMO*Price) + (1-

(SC*AbsCMO)) * PREV(Price));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Chande's VIDYA indicator.

6.18 Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Overview

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 451

The Chaos Accelerator/Decelerator Oscillator is discussed by Bill M. Williams, PhD in his "Trading
Chaos" book(s).

Interpretation

Bill Williams' "Trading Chaos" book(s) describe some basic (and advanced) concepts for trading using
the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator as part of a larger, more inclusive Chaos-based trading methodology.

For a full, detailed description of Bill Williams' Chaos trading methods, please refer to:

"Trading Chaos: Applying Expert Techniques to Maximize Your Profits" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (1995)

"New Trading Dimensions: How to Profit from Chaos in Stocks, Bonds, and Commodities" by Bill M.
Williams, PhD (1998)

"Trading Chaos: Maximize Profits with Proven Technical Techniques" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (2004)

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

452 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_ChaosAC
Label Mask: Chaos AC (%Prc%,%ShortMAPer%,%LongMAPer%,%SignalMAPer%) = %
ACGreen%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chaos AC

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: Prc
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Median Price

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: ShortMAPeriods
Display Name: Short MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: LongMAPeriods
Display Name: Long MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 34

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: SignalMAPeriods
Display Name: Signal MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: ACGreen
Name: (AC-Green)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: ACRed
Name: (AC-Red)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 453

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

AC:= Mov(Prc,5,S) - Mov(Prc,34,S) - Mov(Mov(Prc,5,S) - Mov(Prc,34,S),5,

S);

ACGreen:= If(AC>=Ref(AC,-1), AC, AC);

ACRed:= If(AC<Ref(AC,-1), AC, null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator indicator.

6.19 Chaos Alligator Indicator

Overview

The Chaos Alligator Indicator is discussed by Bill M. Williams, PhD in his "Trading Chaos" book(s).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

454 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Bill Williams' "Trading Chaos" book(s) describe some basic (and advanced) concepts for trading using
the Chaos Alligator Indicator as part of a larger, more inclusive Chaos-based trading methodology.

For a full, detailed description of Bill Williams' Chaos trading methods, please refer to:

"Trading Chaos: Applying Expert Techniques to Maximize Your Profits" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (1995)

"New Trading Dimensions: How to Profit from Chaos in Stocks, Bonds, and Commodities" by Bill M.
Williams, PhD (1998)

"Trading Chaos: Maximize Profits with Proven Technical Techniques" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (2004)

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chaos Alligator Indicator

Function Name Alias: vt_ChaosAlligator
Label Mask:
Chaos Alligator (%Prc%,%LipPer%,%TeethPer%,%JawPer%)
Lip = %Lip%, Jaw = %Jaw%, Teeth = %Teeth%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chaos Alligator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: Prc
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Median Price

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: LipPer
Display Name: Lip Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: ShLp
Display Name: Lip Horizontal Shift

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 455

Type: Bars Forward

Default: 3
Min Bounds: 3
Max Bounds: 3

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: TeethPer
Display Name: Teeth Periods
Type: integer
Default: 8

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: ShTth
Display Name: Teeth Horizontal Shift
Type: Bars Forward
Default: 5
Min Bounds: 5
Max Bounds: 5

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: JawPer
Display Name: Jaw Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: ShJw
Display Name: Jaw Horizontal Shift
Type: Bars Forward
Default: 8
Min Bounds: 8
Max Bounds: 8

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Lip
Name: (Lip)
Line Color: green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Teeth
Name: (Teeth)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 456 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Var Name: Jaw
Name: (Jaw)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Lip:= Ref(Wilders(Prc,LipPer),-ShLp);
Teeth:= Ref(Wilders(Prc,TeethPer),-ShTth);
Jaw:= Ref(Wilders(Prc,JawPer),-ShJw);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Chaos Alligator Indicator.

6.20 Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Overview

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator is discussed by Bill M. Williams, PhD in his "Trading Chaos" book(s).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 457

Interpretation

Bill Williams' "Trading Chaos" book(s) describe some basic (and advanced) concepts for trading using
the Chaos Awesome Oscillator as part of a larger, more inclusive Chaos-based trading methodology.

For a full, detailed description of Bill Williams' Chaos trading methods, please refer to:

"Trading Chaos: Applying Expert Techniques to Maximize Your Profits" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (1995)

"New Trading Dimensions: How to Profit from Chaos in Stocks, Bonds, and Commodities" by Bill M.
Williams, PhD (1998)

"Trading Chaos: Maximize Profits with Proven Technical Techniques" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (2004)

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_ChaosAO
Label Mask:
Chaos AO (%Prc%,%ShortMAPer%,%LongMAPer%,%SignalMAPer%)
AO = %AOGreen%, AO-Signal = %SL%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chaos AO

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: Prc
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Median Price

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: ShortMAPeriods
Display Name: Short MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: LongMAPeriods

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

458 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Display Name: Long MA Periods

Type: integer
Default: 34

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: SignalMAPeriods
Display Name: Signal MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: AOGreen
Name: (AO-Green)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: AORed
Name: (AO-Red)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: SL
Name: (AO-Signal Line)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

AO:= Mov(Prc,5,S) - Mov(Prc,34,S);

SL:= Mov(AO,5,S);

AOGreen:= if(AO>=Ref(AO,-1), AO, AO);

AORed:= if(AO<Ref(AO,-1), AO, null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Chaos Awesome Oscillator indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 459

6.21 Chaos Fractals

Overview

The concept of Fractals was discussed by Bill M. Williams, PhD in his book "Trading with Chaos".
According to Williams, an "up fractal" is defined as a middle bar with two lower highs on each side of it.
A "down fractal" is defined as a middle bar with two higher lows on each side of it.

Interpretation

Bill Williams' book "Trading Chaos" described some basic (and advanced) concepts for trading using
fractals as part of a larger, more inclusive Chaos-based trading methodology.

One simple method of utilizing fractals to initiate trades is to take trade based on the direction of a price
breakout above/below the most recent fractal. If price breaks above the most recent UpFractal - enter
long; If price breaks below the most recent DownFractal - enter short. Protective stops should be placed
below the lowest low of the most recent Down Fractal or 2nd most recent DownFractal for long trades
and above the highest high of the most recent UpFractal or 2nd most recent UpFractal for short trades.

For a full, detailed description of Bill Williams' Chaos trading methods, please refer to "Trading Chaos:
Applying Expert Techniques to Maximize Your Profits" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (Wiley - 1995)

Construction

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

460 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chaos Fractals

Function Name Alias: vt_ChaosFractals
Label Mask:
Chaos Up-Fractal = %UpFractal%
Chaos Down-Fractal = %DownFractal%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chaos Fractals

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no input variables.

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: UpFractal
Name: (Up Fractal)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dots

[New] button...
Var Name: DownFractal
Name: (Down Fractal)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dots

[New] button...
Var Name: Display_UpFractal
Name: (HHV of Up Fractal)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thick
Line Type: dots

[New] button...
Var Name: Display_DownFractal
Name: (LLV of Down Fractal)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: thick
Line Type: dots

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 461

{Generate Fractal Levels}

High1:= Ref(H,-4);
High2:= Ref(H,-3);
High3:= Ref(H,-2);
High4:= Ref(H,-1);
High5:= H;

Low1:= Ref(L,-4);
Low2:= Ref(L,-3);
Low3:= Ref(L,-2);
Low4:= Ref(L,-1);
Low5:= L;

UpFractal:= valuewhen(1,High3>high1 and High3>High2 and High3>High4 and

High3>High5,High3);
DownFractal:= valuewhen(1,Low3<Low1 and Low3<Low2 and Low3<Low4 and
Low3<Low5,Low3);

{Mark Highest High Bar of UpFractal}

{Mark Lowest Low Bar of DownFractal}
{This section is FOR DISPLAY USE ONLY!}

Display_High1:= Ref(H,-2);
Display_High2:= Ref(H,-1);
Display_High3:= Ref(H,0);
Display_High4:= Ref(H,1);
Display_High5:= Ref(H,2);

Display_Low1:= Ref(L,-2);
Display_Low2:= Ref(L,-1);
Display_Low3:= Ref(L,0);
Display_Low4:= Ref(L,1);
Display_Low5:= Ref(L,2);

Display_UpFractal:= If(Display_High3>Display_High1 and

Display_High3>Display_High2 and
Display_High3>Display_High4 and
Display_High3>Display_High5,
Display_High3,
null);

Display_DownFractal:= If(Display_Low3<Display_Low1 and

Display_Low3<Display_Low2 and
Display_Low3<Display_Low4 and
Display_Low3<Display_Low5,
Display_Low3,
null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Chaos Fractals indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 462 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.22 Chaos Gator Oscillator

Overview

The Chaos Gator Oscillator is discussed by Bill M. Williams, PhD in his "Trading Chaos" book(s).

Interpretation

Bill Williams' "Trading Chaos" book(s) describe some basic (and advanced) concepts for trading using
the Chaos Gator Oscillator as part of a larger, more inclusive Chaos-based trading methodology.

For a full, detailed description of Bill Williams' Chaos trading methods, please refer to:

"Trading Chaos: Applying Expert Techniques to Maximize Your Profits" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (1995)

"New Trading Dimensions: How to Profit from Chaos in Stocks, Bonds, and Commodities" by Bill M.
Williams, PhD (1998)

"Trading Chaos: Maximize Profits with Proven Technical Techniques" by Bill M. Williams, PhD (2004)

Construction

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 463

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Chaos Gator Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_ChaosGator
Label Mask:
Chaos Gator Osc. (%Prc%,%LipPer%,%TeethPer%,%JawPer%)
GatorUp-Green = %GatorUpGr%, GatorUp-Red = %GatorUpRed%
GatorDown-Green = %GatorDnGr%, GatorDown-Red = %GatorDnRed%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Chaos Gator Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: Prc
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Median Price

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: LipPer
Display Name: Lip Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: ShLp
Display Name: Lip Horizontal Shift
Type: Bars Forward
Default: 3
Min Bounds: 3
Max Bounds: 3

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: TeethPer
Display Name: Teeth Periods
Type: integer
Default: 8

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: ShTth
Display Name: Teeth Horizontal Shift
Type: Bars Forward

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

464 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Default: 5
Min Bounds: 5
Max Bounds: 5

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: JawPer
Display Name: Jaw Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: ShJw
Display Name: Jaw Horizontal Shift
Type: Bars Forward
Default: 8
Min Bounds: 8
Max Bounds: 8

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: GatorUpGr
Name: (Gator Up - Green)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: GatorUpRed
Name: (Gator Up - Red)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: GatorDnGr
Name: (Gator Down - Green)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: GatorDnRed
Name: (Gator Down - Red)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 465

Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Lip:= Ref(Wilders(Prc,LipPer),-ShLp);
Teeth:= Ref(Wilders(Prc,TeethPer),-ShTth);
Jaw:= Ref(Wilders(Prc,JawPer),-ShJw);

GatorUp:= if(Teeth>Jaw,Teeth-Jaw,Jaw-Teeth);
GatorDn:= if(Jaw<Lip,Jaw-Lip,Lip-Jaw);

GatorUpGr:= If(GatorUp>=Ref(GatorUp,-1),GatorUp,GatorUp);
GatorUpRed:= If(GatorUp<Ref(GatorUp,-1),GatorUp,null);
GatorDnGr:= If(GatorDn<=Ref(GatorDn,-1),GatorDn,GatorDn);
GatorDnRed:= If(GatorDn>Ref(GatorDn,-1),GatorDn,null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Chaos Gator Oscillator.

6.23 Choppiness Index

Overview

Developed by E.W. Dreiss, the Choppiness Index was designed to be a simple yet practical way to help
a trader determine if the market prices are trending or consolidating. It is similar to the ADX (which is
also designed to evaluate the strength of a trend and determine if the market is trending or
consolidating), however, Dreiss considers the Choppiness Index the superior of the two indicators.

The Choppiness Index uses a scale between 0 and 100. It also typically uses upper and lower bands at
61.8 and 38.2 respectively. The Choppiness Index is constructed by first calculating the true range for
each period and summing those values over n-periods. Second, it calculates the highest high value and
lowest low value over n-periods and calculates their difference. Third, it divides the sum of the true ranges
and calculates the base-10 logarithm of the value. Finally, it divides this value by the base-10 logarithm
of n-periods and multiplies the results by 100.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

466 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

The Choppiness Index does not determine in which direction the market is moving. Its basic premise is
that the more heavily the market is trending over the last n-periods the closer to zero the Choppiness
Index will be and the more heavily the market is consolidating (i.e. moving sideways or becoming
"choppy") over the last n-periods the closer to 100 the Choppiness Index will be.

Choppiness Index values above 61.8 indicate that the market is likely “choppy” (i.e. moving sideways
and consolidating). Higher values typically occur during/after a strong consolidation phase. Higher values
could also be interpreted as a warning sign of potential upcoming breakouts after significant
consolidation has occurred.

Choppiness Index values below 38.2 indicate that the market is likely trending. Lower values typically
occur during/after a strong trending phase. Lower values could also be interpreted as a warning sign of
potential upcoming consolidation and choppiness after a strong trend phase has occurred.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Choppiness Index

Function Name Alias: vt_ChopIndex

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 467

Label Mask: Choppiness Index (%periods%) = %ChopIndex%

Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Choppiness Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 14

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: ChopIndex
Name: (CI)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Value: +61.8000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +38.2000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

ChopIndex:= ((Log(Sum(Atr(1),periods)/(HHV(H,periods)-LLV(L,periods)))/
Log(10)) / (Log(periods)/Log(10))) * 100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Choppiness Index.

6.24 Commodity Channel Index (CCI)

Overview

Developed by Donald Lambert, the Commodity Channel Index (CCI) measures the variation of a
security's price from its statistical mean. High values show that prices are unusually high compared to

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

468 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

average prices whereas low values indicate that prices are unusually low. Contrary to its name, the CCI
can be used effectively on any type of trading instrument, not just commodities.

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) is calculated by first determining the difference between the mean
price of a commodity and the average of the means over the time period chosen (where Mean is the
exact middle between 2 extremes - MidPrice). This difference is then compared to the average difference
over the time period (this factors in the commodity's own inherent volatility). The result is then multiplied
by a constant that is designed to adjust the CCI so that it fits into a "normal" trading range of +/-100.

Interpretation

The CCI is a versatile indicator capable of producing a wide array of buy and sell signals. However, there
are three basic methods of interpreting the CCI: looking for divergences, trend line breaks, and as an
overbought/oversold indicator.

A divergence occurs when the instrument's prices are making new highs while the CCI is failing to
surpass its previous highs or when the instrument's prices are making new lows while the CCI is failing
to surpass its previous lows. These classic divergences are usually followed by a correction in the
instrument's price.

Trend line breaks can also be used to generate signals. Trend lines can be drawn connecting the peaks
and troughs of the CCI. From oversold levels, an advance above -100 and trend line breakout could be
considered bullish. From overbought levels, a decline below +100 and a trend line break could be
considered bearish.

The CCI typically oscillates between ±100. To use the CCI as an overbought/oversold indicator, readings
above +100 imply an overbought condition (and a pending price correction) while readings below -100

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 469

imply an oversold condition (and a pending rally).

Implementation

VT Trader includes 2 different methods of calculation for the Commodity Channel Index. Both are similar
in design, but plot slightly different values.

The first method of calculation is the MetaStock formula equivalent.

Diff:= TP()-Mov(TP(),Pr,S);
AveDiff:= Mov(Abs(Diff),Pr,S);
EquationComp:= Diff/AveDiff;
AdjCon:= 66.66667{equivelant=2/3tds};
MS_CCI:= EquationComp*AdjCon;

The second method of calculation is Donald Lambert's original formula calculation. For scaling purposes,
Lambert set the constant at 0.015 to ensure that approximately 70 to 80 percent of CCI values would fall
between -100 and +100. The percentage of CCI values that fall between +100 and -100 will depend on
the number of periods used. A shorter CCI will be more volatile with a smaller percentage of values
between +100 and -100. Conversely, the more periods used to calculate the CCI, the higher the
percentage of values between +100 and -100.

DL_CCI:= CCI(TP(),Pr);

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Commodity Channel Index (CCI)

Function Name Alias: vt_CCI
Label Mask: CCI (%Pr%,%FormulaChoice%) = %CCIndex%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: CCI

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: CCI Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: FormulaChoice
Display Name: CCI Formula Calc Method
Type: Enumeration

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

470 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
MetaStock_Equivalent_Formula
Donald_Lambert_Formula
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Donald_Lambert_Formula

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: CCIndex
Name: (CCI)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +100.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -100.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

{MetaStock Equivalent Calculation}

Diff:= TP()-Mov(TP(),Pr,S);
AveDiff:= Mov(Abs(Diff),Pr,S);
EquationComp:= Diff/AveDiff;
AdjCon:= 66.66667;
MS_CCI:= EquationComp * AdjCon;

{Donald Lambert's Original Formula}

DL_CCI:= CCI(TP(),Pr);

{Display CCI Based on User's Choice}

CCIndex:= if(FormulaChoice=0,MS_CCI,DL_CCI);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 471

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Commodity Channel Index (CCI) indicator.

6.25 Coppock Curve

Overview

The Coppock Curve was developed by Edwin Sedgwick Coppock in 1962 and featured in the November
1994 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities, in the article "The Coppock Curve", written
by Elliot Middleton:

"We are creatures of habit. We judge the world relative to what we have experienced. If we're
shopping for a mortgage and rates have been in the teens (as they were in the early 1980s) and then
drop to 10%, we are elated. If, however, they've been at 8% and then rise to 10%, we are
disappointed. It all depends on our perspective. The principle of adaptation-level applies to how we
judge our income levels, stock prices and virtually every other variable in our lives. Psychologically,
relativity prevails..."

-- Tak en from Stock s & Commodities, V. 12:11 (459-462): The Coppock Curve by Elliott Middleton

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

472 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The moving average is the simplest form of adaptation-level. The Coppock Curve Indicator is a longer
term oscillator based on adaptation-levels, but in a different way. Oscillators usually begin by calculating
a % change of current price from some previous price, where the previous price is the reference point
(adaptation-level).

Edwin Coppock reasoned that the market participants' emotional state could be quantified by summing
up the % changes over the recent past to get a general sense of the market's longer term momentum.

For example: If we compare prices relative to a year ago and we see that this month the market is up
15% over a year ago, last month it was up 12.5% over a year ago, and 10%, 7.5% and 5% respectively
the months before that, then we may gauge that the market is gaining momentum.

Basic signals can be generated using the Coppock Curve by trading reversals from extreme levels.
Looking for divergence and trend line breaks may also be useful.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Coppock Curve

Function Name Alias: vt_Coppock
Label Mask: Coppock Curve (%ROC_per%,%ma1_per%,%ma2_per%) = %CC%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Coppock Curve

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: ROC_per
Display Name: ROC Periods
Type: integer
Default: 250

[New] button...
Name: ma1_per
Display Name: MA1 Periods
Type: integer
Default: 22

[New] button...
Name: ma2_per
Display Name: MA2 Periods
Type: integer
Default: 150

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 473

[New] button...
Var Name: CC
Name: (CC)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

CC:= (Mov(Roc(Mov(C,ma1_per,S),ROC_per,Percent),ma2_per,E))/100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Coppock Curve indicator.

6.26 Darvas Box

Overview

The Darvas Box Theory was created by Nicolas Darvas and described in his first book, "How I Made
$2,000,000 In the Stock Market" (1986, Lyle Stuart Kensington Publishing, New York).

The "Darvas Box" is a very simplistic basic element of Darvas's trading methodology. Coupling this
indicator with his strict discipline, uncanny market insights, and risk management, Darvas amassed a
fortune of over $2.2 million dollars starting with an account of only $10,000. This was in 1959 and would
be equivalent to over $20 million dollars today.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

474 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

One method of using the Darvas Box to signal trades is based on a simple breakout strategy of the
Darvas Box lines. If price breaks the top box, trade long; if price breaks below the bottom box, trade
short.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Darvas Box

Function Name Alias: vt_DarvasBox
Label Mask:
Darvas Box (%Periods%)
Box Top = %TopBox%
Box Bottom = %BottomBox%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Darvas Box

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 475

Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 100

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: TopBox
Name: (Top)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: BottomBox
Name: (Bottom)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_TopBox:= If(Ref(H,-3)>=Ref(HHV(H,Periods),-4) AND Ref(H,-2)<Ref(H,-3)

AND Ref(H,-1)<Ref(H,-3) AND H<Ref(H,-3),Ref(H,-3),PREV(0));
_BottomBox:= If(Ref(H,-3)>=Ref(HHV(H,Periods),-4) AND Ref(H,-2)<Ref(H,-
3) AND Ref(H,-1)<Ref(H,-3) AND H<Ref(H,-3),LLV(L,4),PREV(0));

TopBox:= If(_TopBox<>0,_TopBox,NULL);
BottomBox:= If(_BottomBox<>0,_BottomBox,NULL);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Darvas Box indicator.

6.27 DeMark's DeMarker I

Overview

The TD DeMarker I is designed to overcome the common shortcomings of traditional overbought /

oversold indicators. The DeMarker I helps identify potential price bottoms and tops by making price
comparisons from one bar to the next and measuring the level of price demand.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

476 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

The TD DeMarker I can be interpreted in many of the same ways as other overbought / oversold
indicators such as RSI.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the TD DeMarker and price can prove to be very effective in
identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish Divergence: Lower
lows in price and higher lows in the TD DeMarker; Trade short on Classic Bearish Divergence: Higher
highs in price and lower highs in the TD DeMarker. These types of divergence are often indications of an
impending reversal.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The TD DeMarker can be used to identify potential overbought and
oversold conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described as the TD
DeMarker being greater than or equal to the 70% level while an oversold condition is generally described
as the TD DeMarker being less than or equal to the 30% level. Trades can be generated when the TD
DeMarker crosses these levels. When the TD DeMarker crosses above 30 a buy signal is given.
Alternatively, when the TD DeMarker crosses below 70 a sell signal is given.

Support/Resistance and “Failure Swings”: The TD DeMarker shows, sometimes more clearly than price
itself, levels of support and resistance. Failure swings (a.k.a. support/resistance breakouts) occur when
the TD DeMarker surpasses a previous high (peak) or falls below a recent low (trough).

TD DeMarker / 50-level Crossover: When the TD DeMarker crosses above 50 a buy signal is given.
Alternatively, when the TD DeMarker crosses below 50 a sell signal is given.

Construction

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 477

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: DeMark's DeMarker I

Function Name Alias: vt_TDDMI
Label Mask: DeMark's DeMarker I (%periods%) = %DeMarker%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: DeMark's DeMarker I

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: DeMarker
Name: (DeMarker I)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

highm:= if(H>Ref(H,-1),H-Ref(H,-1),0);
lowm:= if(L<Ref(L,-1),Ref(L,-1)-L,0);
DeMarker:= 100 * Sum(highm,periods) / (Sum(lowm,periods) + Sum(highm,
periods));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building DeMark's DeMarker I indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 478 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.28 DeMark's Projected Range

Overview

The TD Projected Range indicator, developed by Tom Demark, attempts to identify benchmark
expectations for the next bar's potential high and low prices. The range projection is based on the
relationship of the open to close prices of the most recent period.

Interpretation

If the next bar opens within the projected range, you may anticipate that prices should remain within that
range. If the next bar opens above the projected high you may anticipate that the market will continue in
an uptrend; if the bar opens below the projected low you may anticipate that the market will continue in a
downtrend.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 479

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: DeMark's Projected Range

Function Name Alias: vt_TDPR
Label Mask:
DeMark's Projected Range
Projected High = %PH%
Projected Low = %PL%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: DeMark's Projected Range

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no input variables.

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: PH
Name: (Projected High)
Line Color: green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: dots

[New] button...
Var Name: PL
Name: (Projected Low)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: dots

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TDH1:=(H+C+2*L)/2-L;
TDH2:=(2*H+L+C)/2-L;
TDH3:=(H+L+2*C)/2-L;
TDL1:=(H+C+2*L)/2-H;
TDL2:=(2*H+L+C)/2-H;
TDL3:=(H+L+2*C)/2-H;

PH:= If((C<O),TDH1,If((C>O),TDH2,If((C=O),TDH3,0)));
PL:= If((C<O),TDL1,If((C>O),TDL2,If((C=O),TDL3,0)));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building DeMark's Projected Range indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 480 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.29 DeMark's Range Expansion Index (REI)

Overview

The TD Range Expansion Index was created by Tom DeMark and described in, "DeMark on Day Trading
Options" written by T.R. DeMark and T.R. Demark, Jr. (McGraw Hill, 1999).

The TD REI is a market-timing oscillator that attempts to overcome problems with exponentially
calculated oscillators, such as the MACD, by being arithmetically calculated.

Interpretation

The TD REI typically produces values of -100 to +100; Readings of +45 or higher indicates overbought
conditions while readings -45 or lower indicate oversold conditions. DeMark advises against trading in
extreme overbought or oversold conditions indicated by six or more bars above or below the 45
thresholds.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 481

Name: DeMark's Range Expansion Index

Function Name Alias: vt_TDREI
Label Mask: DeMark's REI (%Periods%) = %TDREI%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: DeMark's REI

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: TDREI
Name: (TDREI)
Line Color: yellow-green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +45.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -45.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

HighMom:= H - Ref(H,-2);
LowMom:= L - Ref(L,-2);

TD1:= (H>=Ref(L,-5) OR H>=Ref(L,-6));

TD2:= (Ref(H,-2)>=Ref(C,-7) OR Ref(H,-2)>=Ref(C,-8));
TD3:= (L<=Ref(H,-5) OR L<=Ref(H,-6));
TD4:= (Ref(L,-2)<=Ref(C,-7) OR Ref(L,-2)<=Ref(C,-8));

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 482 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

TD5:= (TD1 OR TD2) AND (TD3 OR TD4);

TD6:= If(TD5,HighMom + LowMom,0);

TD7:= Abs(HighMom) + Abs(LowMom);

TDREI:= 100 * Sum(TD6,Periods) / Sum(TD7,Periods);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building DeMark's Range Expansion Index (REI) indicator.

6.30 Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO)

Overview

The Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO), described in Steven Achelis' book "Technical Analysis A-Z",
attempts to eliminate the trend in prices by filtering out cycles longer than its moving average. It
accomplishes this by comparing the current price to a moving of price (n/2)+1 periods ago. By
detrending prices, shorter-term cycles are more easily identified allowing for a quicker determination of
potential overbought and oversold levels.

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 483

The Detrended Price Oscillator can be used in a variety of ways:

Identifying Overbought/oversold Conditions: Identifying common overbought and oversold values based on
observation of past behavior of the DPO, trade long when the DPO crosses below and then back above
the oversold value and trade short when the DPO crosses above and then back below the overbought
value.

Going with the trend: The DPO can also be used to signal long trades when the DPO crosses above the
zero line and short trades when it crosses below the zero line.

Divergence: Look for divergence between the DPO and the instrument's price; bullish divergence occurs
when the DPO makes a higher low while price makes a lower low; bearish divergence occurs when the
DPO makes a lower high while the price makes a higher high.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO)

Function Name Alias: vt_DPO
Label Mask: DPO (%price%,%periods%) = %DPOsc%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: DPO

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: DPOsc
Name: (Osc)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 484 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

DPOsc:= price - Ref(mov(price,periods,S),-(periods/2+1));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Detrended Price Oscillator indicator.

6.31 Directional Movement Index

Overview

The Directional Movement Index (DX) was developed by J. Welles Wilder and described in his book "New
Concepts In Technical Trading Systems", written in 1978. The DX consists of two parts: the Positive
Directional Index (+DI) and the Negative Directional Index (-DI). The DX's main purpose is to help identify
equilibrium points in the price movement by measuring true directional movement. The +DI line
measures positive (upward) movement while the -DI measures negative (downward) movement.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 485

Interpretation

Below are a few common methods for generating trading signals using the Directional Movement Index.

+DI/-DI Crossovers: When the +DI line crosses above the -DI line a buy signal is initiated (indicating that
positive price direction is greater than negative price direction). Conversely, when the -DI line crosses
above the +DI line a sell signal is initiated (indicating that negative price direction is greater than positive
price direction). When using the DMI crossover method to generate trading signals, Wilder stresses the
use of an additional "extreme point rule". The extreme price rule states that when the +DI/-DI crossover
occurs, the extreme point will become the high or low of that bar. Before entering a trade based on the
direction of the +DI/-DI crossover, the price must first break above the high (for a buy) or break below the
low (for a sell) and remain above/below those respective levels for several bars before intiating a new
trade or exiting a existing trade. The "extreme point rule" is useful in reducing the number of whipsaws
and false breakouts a trader may encounter if trading based on +DI/-DI crossovers alone.

Directional Movement System: Wilder typically suggests to use the DX as a filter along with other
indicators (such as the ADX or ADX(R)) to create a more concrete trading methodology. Wilder suggests
using the DMI as part of a system that includes the ADX indicator. (See the Directional Movement
System indicator for additional details)

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Directional Movement Index

Function Name Alias: vt_DMI
Label Mask:
Directional Movement Index (%Pr%)
+DI = %PlusDI%, -D = %MinusDI%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: DMI

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: PlusDI
Name: (+DI)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 486 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Line Color: blue

Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: MinusDI
Name: (-DI)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TH:= if(Ref(C,-1)>H,Ref(C,-1),H);
TL:= if(Ref(C,-1)<L,Ref(C,-1),L);
TR:= TH-TL;

PlusDM:= if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L>=Ref(L,-1), H-Ref(H,-1),

if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L<Ref(L,-1) AND H-Ref(H,-1)>Ref(L,-1)-L, H-
Ref(H,-1),
0));

PlusDI:= 100 * Wilders(PlusDM,Pr)/Wilders(Tr,Pr);

MinusDM:= if(L<Ref(L,-1) AND H<=Ref(H,-1), Ref(L,-1)-L,

if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L<Ref(L,-1) AND H-Ref(H,-1)<Ref(L,-1)-L,
Ref(L,-1)-L,
0));

MinusDI:= 100 * Wilders(MinusDM,Pr)/Wilders(Tr,Pr);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Directional Movement Index (DMI) indicator.

6.32 Directional Movement System

Overview

The Directional Movement System is a complex indicator developed by J. Welles Wilder and described
in his book "New Concepts In Technical Trading Systems", written in 1978. The Directional Movement

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 487

System consists of the ADX (or ADX(R)) and the Directional Movement Index indicators.

Interpretation

Through the use of the ADX (or ADX(R)) and Directional Movement Index indicators, a concrete trading
methodology can be constructed. For example, one variation of the rules for trading using the Directional
Movement System as defined by Dr. Alexander Elder in "Trading For A Living" is as follows:

Buy Entry: ADX (or ADXR) rises while +DI and ADX (or ADXR) are above -DI; or ADX (or ADXR) turns
upwards from below +DI and -DI
Buy Exit: +DI crosses below -DI; or ADX turns downwards from above +DI and -DI

Sell Entry: ADX (or ADXR) rises while - DI and ADX (or ADXR) are above +DI; or ADX (or ADXR) turns
upwards from below +DI and -DI
Sell Exit: -DI crosses below +DI; or ADX (or ADXR) turns downwards from above +DI and -DI

No trades are entered while ADX (or ADXR) is below both +DI and -DI; this indicates what's commonly
referred to as a "lifeless" market. The longer that ADX (or ADXR) remains below the +DI and -DI the
stronger the next emerging trend will likely be. Dr. Elder also recommends waiting to enter new trades
until after the ADX (or ADXR) rises a minimum of 4 steps from its low (i.e.: if the ADX low was 16 it must
rise to at least 20) indicating that that it has clearly turned upwards from its bottom.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

488 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Directional Movement System

Function Name Alias: vt_DMSystem
Label Mask:
Directional Movement System (%Pr%,%SmPr%,%cT%)
+DI = %PlusDI%, -DI = %MinusDI%, ADX = %Final_ADX%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Directional Movement System

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: DX Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: SmPr
Display Name: ADX/ADXR Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: cT
Display Name: Display ADX or ADXR?
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
ADX
ADXR
... then, click [OK] button
Default: ADX

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: PlusDI
Name: (+DI)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: MinusDI
Name: (-DI)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 489

[New] button...
Var Name: Final_ADX
Name: (ADX)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TH:= if(Ref(C,-1)>H,Ref(C,-1),H);
TL:= if(Ref(C,-1)<L,Ref(C,-1),L);
TR:= TH-TL;

PlusDM:= if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L>=Ref(L,-1), H-Ref(H,-1),

if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L<Ref(L,-1) AND H-Ref(H,-1)>Ref(L,-1)-L, H-
Ref(H,-1),
0));

PlusDI:= 100 * Wilders(PlusDM,Pr)/Wilders(Tr,Pr);

MinusDM:= if(L<Ref(L,-1) AND H<=Ref(H,-1), Ref(L,-1)-L,

if(H>Ref(H,-1) AND L<Ref(L,-1) AND H-Ref(H,-1)<Ref(L,-1)-L,
Ref(L,-1)-L,
0));

MinusDI:= 100 * Wilders(MinusDM,Pr)/Wilders(Tr,Pr);

DIDif:= Abs(PlusDI-MinusDI);
DISum:= PlusDI + MinusDI;

_ADX:= 100 * Wilders(DIDif/DISum,SmPr);

_ADXR:= (_ADX + Ref(_ADX,1-SmPr)) / 2;

Final_ADX:= if(cT=0,_ADX,_ADXR);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Directional Movement System indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 490 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.33 Disparity Index

Overview

Developed by Steve Nison and described in his book entitled "Beyond Candlesticks", the Disparity Index
compares the market price to an n-periods moving average of market prices and calculates a
percentage-based oscillator.

When the Disparity Index is at 0, the current market price is the same as the n-periods moving average
value. When the Disparity Index is below 0, the current market price is below the n-periods moving
average by that percentage amount. When the Display Index is above 0, the current market price is
above the n-periods moving average by that percentage amount.

The Disparity Index is calculated by subtracting an n-periods moving average of market prices from the
current market price, dividing that value by the n-periods moving average, and then multiplying the result
by 100.

Interpretation

The Disparity Index is a very versatile indicator and can be used with several different techniques to
generate trading signals.

Disparity Index / Zero Level Crossover: A buy signal occurs when the Disparity Index crosses above zero
and a sell signal occurs when the Disparity Index crosses below zero.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 491

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the Disparity Index and price can prove to be very effective
in identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are several
types of divergences:

Classic Divergence (aka: Regular Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the Disparity Index
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the Disparity Index

Hidden Divergence (aka: Reverse, Continuation, Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in Disparity Index and higher lows in price
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in Disparity Index and lower highs in price

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The Disparity Index can be used to identify potential overbought and
oversold conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described as the Disparity
Index being greater than or equal to its upper bound level while an oversold condition is generally
described as the Disparity Index being less than or equal to its lower bound level. The Disparity Index’s
upper and lower bounds values must be carefully determined after studying how the index reacts to the
instrument’s price movements that it is being used to evaluate. Trades can be generated when the
Disparity Index crosses these levels. A buy signal occurs when the Disparity Index declines below its
lower bound and then rises above that level. A sell signal occurs when the Disparity Index rises above its
upper bound and then declines below that level.

Nison also recommends combining the Disparity Index with candlesticks patterns such as harami cross
patterns, koma’s (a.k.a. spinning tops or small real body candles) and doji’s.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Disparity Index

Function Name Alias: vt_DisparityIndex
Label Mask: Disparity Index (%price%,%periods%,%matype%) = %
DisparityIndex%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Disparity Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: periods

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 492 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Display Name: Periods

Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 13
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: matype
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: DisparityIndex
Name: (Index)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

DisparityIndex:= (price-mov(price,periods,matype))/mov(price,periods,
matype)*100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Disparity Index indicator.

6.34 Donchian Channel

Overview

The Donchian Channel is a very simple trend-following indicator developed by Richard Donchian. It plots
the highest high and lowest low over the last period time intervals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 493

Interpretation

When the market is trending, signals can be derived from this indicator based on the following basic
rules:

1. When price closes above the Donchian Channel, buy long and cover short positions.
2. When price closes below the Donchian Channel, sell short and liquidate long positions.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Donchian Channel

Function Name Alias: vt_DC
Label Mask:
Donchian Channel (%Pds%)
DU = %DU%, DM = %DM%, DL = %DL%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Donchian Channel

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 494 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: Pds
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: DU
Name: (Donchian-Upper)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: DL
Name: (Donchian-Lower)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: DM
Name: (Donchian-Middle)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

DU:= HHV(Ref(H,-1),Pds);
DL:= LLV(Ref(L,-1),Pds);
DM:= (DU+DL)/2;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Donchian Channel indicator.

6.35 Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA)

Overview

Developed by Patrick Mulloy and introduced in the February 1994 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks
& Commodities magazine, this trend indicator is an acronym standing for "Double Exponential Moving

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 495

Average". DEMA was designed to lessen the lag of a regular exponential moving average. It is a
composite of a single exponential MA and a double exponential MA that produces less lag than its two
components individually; it is NOT a moving average of a moving average.

Interpretation

The DEMA can be used in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer to the "Moving Average"
indicator for additional details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA)

Function Name Alias: vt_DEMA
Label Mask: DEMA (%pr%,%len%,%mat%) = %_Dema%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: DEMA

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 496 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: pr
Display Name: MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: len
Display Name: MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: mat
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _Dema
Name: (Dema)
Line Color: orange
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_Dema:= 2 * mov(pr,len,mat) - mov(mov(pr,len,mat),len,mat);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) indicator.

6.36 Double Stochastic Oscillator

Overview

The Double Stochastic Oscillator is a deviation from the Stochastic Oscillators developed by George C.
Lane in the 1950's. The Double Stochastic Oscillator can be interpreted in the same manner as other
Stochastic Oscillators. Like the original Stochastic Oscillators, it is a momentum indicator designed to
show the relation of the current close price relative to the high/low range over a given number of periods
using a scale of 0-100. It is based on the assumption that in a rising market the price(s) will close near
the high of the range and in a declining market the price(s) will close near the low of the range.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 497

The Double Stochastic Oscillator is plotted as 2 lines: %K and %D. %K is the main (fast) line and %D
is the signal (slow) line.

The Double Stochastic Oscillator is calculated by the formula:

Fast %K = ((Today's Close - Lowest Low in %K Periods) / (Highest High in %K Periods - Lowest Low in
%K Periods)) * 100

Slowing %K = N-period moving average of Fast %K

Double %K = ((Today's Slowing %K - Lowest Low Slowing %K in %K Periods) / (Highest High Slowing
%K in %K Periods - Lowest Low Slowing %K in %K Periods)) * 100

Double Slowing %K = N-period moving average of Double %K

%D = 3-period simple moving average of Double Slowing %K

Interpretation

There are three basic techniques for using the Double Stochastic Oscillator to generate trading signals.

Crossovers: 1) %K line / %D line Crossover: A buy signal occurs When the %K line crosses above the
%D line and a sell signal occurs when the %K line crosses below the %D line. 2) %K line / 50-level
Crossover: When the %K line crosses above 50 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the %K line
crosses below 50 a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the Double Stochastic Oscillator and price can prove to be

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

498 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

very effective in identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish
Divergence: Lower lows in price and higher lows in the Double Stochastic Oscillator; Trade short on
Classic Bearish Divergence: Higher highs in price and lower highs in the Double Stochastic Oscillator.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The Double Stochastic Oscillator can be used to identify potential
overbought and oversold conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described
as the Double Stochastic Oscillator being greater than or equal to the 80% level while an oversold
condition is generally described as the Double Stochastic Oscillator being less than or equal to the 20%
level. Trades can be generated when the Double Stochastic Oscillator crosses these levels. A buy signal
occurs when the Double Stochastic Oscillator declines below 20% and then rises above that level. A sell
signal occurs when the Double Stochastic Oscillator rises above 80% and then declines below that level.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Double Stochastic Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_DoubleStochOsc
Label Mask:
Double Stochastic Osc. (%K%,%Sl%,%Mt%,%D%,%MtD%)
DSO = %DSt%, Signal = %DStD%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Double Stochastic Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: K
Display Name: %K Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

[New] button...
Name: Sl
Display Name: %K Slowing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 3

[New] button...
Name: Mt
Display Name: %K Slowing Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: D
Display Name: %D Periods
Type: integer

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 499

Default: 3

[New] button...
Name: MtD
Display Name: %D Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: DSt
Name: (DSO)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: DStD
Name: (DSO Signal)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +80.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

St:= Mov(((C-LLV(L,K))/(HHV(H,K)-LLV(L,K)))*100,Sl,Mt);
DSt:= Mov(((St-LLV(St,K))/(HHV(St,K)-LLV(St,K)))*100,Sl,Mt);
DStD:= Mov(DSt,D,MtD);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Double Stochastic Oscillator indicator.

6.37 Ehlers Fisher Transform

Overview

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

500 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Introduced by John Elhers, the Fisher Transform is based on the article "Using the Fisher Transform" in
the November 2002 issue of Stocks and Commodities Magazine.

It was designed to clearly define major price reversals with its rapid response time and sharp, distinct
turning points. It is based on the assumption that prices do not have a Gaussian probability density
function (PDF) (bell-shaped curve movement), but that by normalizing price and applying the Fisher
Transform you could create a nearly Gaussian PDF.

Interpretation

Signals can be generated with pinpoint precision, according to Ehlers, by the crossover points of the
Fisher and its signal line.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Ehlers Fisher Transform

Function Name Alias: vt_Fisher
Label Mask:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 501

Ehlers Fisher Transform (%pr%,%prd%)

Fisher = %fisher%, Signal = %signal%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Ehlers Fisher Transform

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: prd
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: fisher
Name: (Fisher)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: signal
Name: (Signal Line)
Line Color: yellow
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

maxh:= HHV(pr,prd);
minl:= LLV(pr,prd);
val1:= 0.33 * 2 * ((pr-minl)/(maxh-minl)-0.5) + 0.67 * PREV(0);
val2:= If(val1>0.99,0.999,If(val1<-0.99,-0.999,val1));
fisher:= 0.5 * Log((1+val2)/(1-val2)) + 0.5 * PREV(0);
signal:= ref(fisher,-1);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Ehlers Fisher Transform indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 502 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.38 Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index

Overview

The Laguerre Relative Strength Index was introduced by John Ehlers in his book "Cybernetic Analysis for
Stocks and Futures". It uses a 4-Element Laguerre filter to provide a "time warp" such that the low
frequency components are delayed much more than the high frequency components. This enables much
smoother filters to be created using shorter amounts of data.

Interpretation

A typical use of the Laguerre RSI is to buy after it crosses back over the 20% level and sell after it
crosses back down through the 80% level.

Implementation

This implementation of the Laguerre RSI has been normalized to a scale of 0-100 rather than the original
0-1 scale.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 503

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index

Function Name Alias: vt_LgRSI
Label Mask: Ehlers Laguerre RSI (%prc%,%df%) = %LRSI%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Ehlers Laguerre RSI

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: prc
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: df
Display Name: Damping Factor
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 0.5000
Min Bounds: 0.5000
Max Bounds: 0.8500

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: LRSI
Name: (LRSI)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +80.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 504 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

g:= df;
L0:= ((1-g)*prc) + (g*PREV(0));
L1:= (-g*L0) + Ref(L0,-1) + (g*PREV(0));
L2:= (-g*L1) + Ref(L1,-1) + (g*PREV(0));
L3:= (-g*L2) + Ref(L2,-1) + (g*PREV(0));

cu:= If(L0>L1, L0-L1,0) + If(L1>L2, L1-L2,0) + If(L2>L3, L2-L3,0);

cd:= If(L0<L1, L1-L0,0) + If(L1<L2, L2-L1,0) + If(L2<L3, L3-L2,0);

temp:= If(cu+cd=0,-1,cu+cd);
LRSI:= If(temp=-1,0,100*cu/temp);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index indicator.

6.39 Ehlers MESA Adaptive Moving Average (MAMA and FAMA)

Overview

Excerpted from the article entitled "Mesa Adaptive Moving Averages" by John F. Ehlers in the Sept.
2001 edition of Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine…

“The MESA Adaptive Moving Average (MAMA) adapts to price movement based on the rate of
change of phase as measured by the Hilbert Transform Discriminator (Technical Analysis of Stock s
and Commodities magazine, December 2000). This method features a fast attack average and a
slow decay average so that composite average rapidly ratchets behind price changes and holds the
average value until the next ratchet occurs.”

For a more detailed description of the MESA Adaptive Moving Average, please refer to the
aforementioned article.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 505

Interpretation

Ehlers MESA Adaptive Moving Average can be used in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer
to the "Moving Average" indicator for additional details.

Additionally, the crossing of the MAMA and FAMA lines can be used to generate Buy and Sell signals.
When the MAMA crosses above the FAMA a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the MAMA crosses
below the FAMA a sell signal is given.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Ehlers MESA Adaptive Moving Average (MAMA and FAMA)

Function Name Alias: vt_MESA
Label Mask:
Ehlers MESA (%Price%,%FastLimit%,%SlowLimit%)
MAMA = %_MAMA%, FAMA = %_FAMA%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: MESA Adaptive MA

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 506 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Median Price

[New] button...
Name: FastLimit
Display Name: Fast Limit
Type: float
Default: 0.5000

[New] button...
Name: SlowLimit
Display Name: Slow Limit
Type: float
Default: 0.0500

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _MAMA
Name: (MAMA)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: _FAMA
Name: (FAMA)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_MAMA:= Mama(Price,FastLimit,SlowLimit);
_FAMA:= Fama(Price,FastLimit,SlowLimit);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Ehlers MESA Adaptive Moving Average indicator.

6.40 Ehlers Relative Vigor Index (RVI)

Overview

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 507

The Relative Vigor Index (RVI) was described in the January 2002 edition of Technical Analysis of
Stocks and Commodities magazine in an article titled, "Something Old, Something New - Relative Vigor
Index (RVI)" by John Ehlers. The RVI merges the older concepts of technical analysis with modern
digital signal processing theory and filters to create a practical and useful indicator.

The basic principle behind the RVI is simple - prices tend to close higher than they open in up-trending
markets and close lower than they open in down-trending markets. The energy (vigor) of the move is
thereby established by where the prices end up at the close. The RVI is essentially based on the
measure of the average difference between the close and open, normalized to the average daily trading
range. The end result is a responsive oscillator with crisp turning points that is basically in phase with
the cyclic component of market prices.

Interpretation

The Relative Vigor Index is a unique indicator. The basic method of interpreting the RVI is to use the
crossovers of the RVI and the RVI Signal Line. A buy signal occurs when the RVI crosses above the RVI
Signal Line and a sell signal occurs when the RVI crosses below the RVI Signal Line.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

508 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Ehlers Relative Vigor Index

Function Name Alias: vt_RVI
Label Mask:
Ehlers Relative Vigor Index (%periods%)
RVI = %_rvi%, Signal = %_rvisig%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Relative Vigor Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _rvi
Name: (RVI)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: _rvisig
Name: (RVI Signal Line)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

value1:= ((C-O)+(2*Ref(C-O,-1))+(2*Ref(C-O,-2))+Ref(C-O,-3))/6;
value2:= ((H-L)+(2*Ref(H-L,-1))+(2*Ref(H-L,-2))+Ref(H-L,-3))/6;

{Avoid Divide By Zero Error}

denom:= If(Sum(value2,periods)=0,0.0001,Sum(value2,periods));

{Plot Indicator to Chart}

_rvi:= Sum(value1,periods)/denom;
_rvisig:= (_rvi+Ref(2*_rvi,-1)+Ref(2*_rvi,-2)+Ref(_rvi,-3))/6;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Ehlers Relative Vigor Index indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 509

6.41 Elder-Ray Bear Power

Overview

Developed by Dr. Alexander Elder in 1989 and described in his book “Trading for a Living”, the Elder-Ray
indicator consists of three components: Bear Power, Bull Power, and a 13-periods exponential moving
average.

Bull Power is calculated by subtracting a 13-periods exponential moving average from the High price.

Bear Power is calculated by subtracting a 13-periods exponential moving average from the Low price of
the bar.

The High price of any bar represents the maximum power of the bulls and the Low price of any bar
represents the maximum power of the bears. Elder refers to the exponential moving average as the
average consensus of price value. Therefore, Bull Power represents the ability of the bulls to raise prices
above the average consensus of value and Bear Power represents the ability of the bears to push prices
below the average consensus of value.

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

510 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

According the Elder, Bull Power should normally remain positive and Bear Power should normally remain
negative. However, if Bull Power turns negative it means that the bears have gained control of the market
and if Bear Power turns positive it means that the bulls have gained control. You should not buy when
Bear Power is positive and you should not sell when Bull Power is negative.

Elder suggests using the exponential moving average’s slope to determine the market trend direction. He
describes the best buy signals as being when bullish divergence occurs between Bear Power and price
(i.e. lower lows in price and higher lows in Bear Power) and the best sell signals as being when bearish
divergence occurs between Bull Power and price (i.e. higher highs in price and lower highs in Bull
Power).

Elder described four basic conditions for buying and selling using only the Elder-Ray method, but also
recommended combining it with the Triple Screen method.

Buying Conditions:

(Essential)

1. Prices are trending upwards according to the 13-periods exponential moving average
2. Bear Power is negative, but rising

(Optional)

3. The latest Bull Power peak is higher than its previous peak
4. Bear Power is rising from a bullish divergence

Selling Conditions:

(Essential)

1. Prices are trending downwards according to the 13-periods exponential moving average
2. Bull Power is positive, but declining

(Optional)

3. The latest Bear Power trough is lower than its previous trough
4. Bull Power is declining from a bearish divergence

Elder mentions that if you want to increase your position, you should:

Increase your long position whenever Bear Power declines below zero and then rises back into
positive territory.
Increase your short position whenever Bull Power rises above zero and then falls back into
negative territory.

Elder’s Triple Screen method suggests identifying the price trend on a higher chart interval (like Weekly
charts) and applying the Elder-Ray on a lower chart interval (like Daily charts). Signals are taken
according to the Elder-Ray, but only in the direction of the price trend in the higher chart interval. A
Trailing Buy Stop and Trailing Sell Stop technique can then be used to pinpoint entry points. For
example, if the weekly trend is up and the daily oscillator is declining Elder suggests placing a buy stop
order 1 point above the previous bar's High. If the market reverses you will be stopped in long. However, if
the market continues to decline, you must adjust your buy stop order so that it is always 1 point above
the previous bar's High. The buy stop order remains active until it is either triggered or the weekly trend

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 511

reverses (at which time you would cancel your order). If the weekly trend is down and the daily oscillator
is rising Elder suggests placing a sell stop order 1 point below the previous bar's Low. If the market
reverses you will be stopped in short. However, if the market continues to rise, you must adjust your sell
stop order so that it is always 1 point below the previous bar's Low. The sell stop order remains active
until it is either triggered or the weekly trend reverses (at which time you would cancel your order).

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Elder-Ray Bear Power

Function Name Alias: vt_ElderRayBearPwr
Label Mask: Elder-Ray Bear Power (%LDA%,%MaPrice%,%MaPeriods%,%MaType%) = %BearPowe
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Elder-Ray Bear Power

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: LDA
Display Name: Low Price
Type: Price
Default: Low

[New] button...
Name: MaPrice
Display Name: MA Price
Type: Price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: MaPeriods
Display Name: MA Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 13
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: MaType
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: BearPower

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 512 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: (Bear Pwr)

Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

BearPower:= LDA - Mov(MaPrice,MaPeriods,MaType);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Elder-Ray Bear Power indicator.

6.42 Elder-Ray Bull Power

Overview

Developed by Dr. Alexander Elder in 1989 and described in his book “Trading for a Living”, the Elder-Ray
indicator consists of three components: Bear Power, Bull Power, and a 13-periods exponential moving
average.

Bull Power is calculated by subtracting a 13-periods exponential moving average from the High price.

Bear Power is calculated by subtracting a 13-periods exponential moving average from the Low price of
the bar.

The High price of any bar represents the maximum power of the bulls and the Low price of any bar
represents the maximum power of the bears. Elder refers to the exponential moving average as the
average consensus of price value. Therefore, Bull Power represents the ability of the bulls to raise prices
above the average consensus of value and Bear Power represents the ability of the bears to push prices
below the average consensus of value.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 513

Interpretation

According the Elder, Bull Power should normally remain positive and Bear Power should normally remain
negative. However, if Bull Power turns negative it means that the bears have gained control of the market
and if Bear Power turns positive it means that the bulls have gained control. You should not buy when
Bear Power is positive and you should not sell when Bull Power is negative.

Elder suggests using the exponential moving average’s slope to determine the market trend direction. He
describes the best buy signals as being when bullish divergence occurs between Bear Power and price
(i.e. lower lows in price and higher lows in Bear Power) and the best sell signals as being when bearish
divergence occurs between Bull Power and price (i.e. higher highs in price and lower highs in Bull
Power).

Elder described four basic conditions for buying and selling using only the Elder-Ray method, but also
recommended combining it with the Triple Screen method.

Buying Conditions:

(Essential)

1. Prices are trending upwards according to the 13-periods exponential moving average
2. Bear Power is negative, but rising

(Optional)

3. The latest Bull Power peak is higher than its previous peak
4. Bear Power is rising from a bullish divergence

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

514 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Selling Conditions:

(Essential)

1. Prices are trending downwards according to the 13-periods exponential moving average
2. Bull Power is positive, but declining

(Optional)

3. The latest Bear Power trough is lower than its previous trough
4. Bull Power is declining from a bearish divergence

Elder mentions that if you want to increase your position, you should:

Increase your long position whenever Bear Power declines below zero and then rises back into
positive territory.
Increase your short position whenever Bull Power rises above zero and then falls back into
negative territory.

Elder’s Triple Screen method suggests identifying the price trend on a higher chart interval (like Weekly
charts) and applying the Elder-Ray on a lower chart interval (like Daily charts). Signals are taken
according to the Elder-Ray, but only in the direction of the price trend in the higher chart interval. A
Trailing Buy Stop and Trailing Sell Stop technique can then be used to pinpoint entry points. For
example, if the weekly trend is up and the daily oscillator is declining Elder suggests placing a buy stop
order 1 point above the previous bar's High. If the market reverses you will be stopped in long. However, if
the market continues to decline, you must adjust your buy stop order so that it is always 1 point above
the previous bar's High. The buy stop order remains active until it is either triggered or the weekly trend
reverses (at which time you would cancel your order). If the weekly trend is down and the daily oscillator
is rising Elder suggests placing a sell stop order 1 point below the previous bar's Low. If the market
reverses you will be stopped in short. However, if the market continues to rise, you must adjust your sell
stop order so that it is always 1 point below the previous bar's Low. The sell stop order remains active
until it is either triggered or the weekly trend reverses (at which time you would cancel your order).

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Elder-Ray Bull Power

Function Name Alias: vt_ElderRayBullPwr
Label Mask: Elder-Ray Bull Power (%HDA%,%MaPrice%,%MaPeriods%,%MaType%) = %BullPowe
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Elder-Ray Bull Power

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: HDA

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 515

Display Name: High Price

Type: Price
Default: High

[New] button...
Name: MaPrice
Display Name: MA Price
Type: Price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: MaPeriods
Display Name: MA Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 13
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: MaType
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: BullPower
Name: (Bull Pwr)
Line Color: light green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

BullPower:= HDA - Mov(MaPrice,MaPeriods,MaType);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Elder-Ray Bull Power indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 516 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.43 Elliot Oscillator

Overview

Elliot Wave Theory is named after Ralph Nelson Elliot. It was inspired by the Dow Theory and by
observations found throughout nature; Fibonacci numbers provide the mathematical foundation. Each of
the cycles defined by Elliot are compromised of a total wave count that falls within the Fibonacci number
sequence. From this information, Elliot concluded that the movements of the financial markets could be
predicted by identifying this naturally repetitive series of waves.

After Elliot's passing, much research and advancement was done on Elliot Wave Theory during the
1950's - 1970's by Hamilton Bolton, Robert Prechter, and A.J. Frost. However, the basic concepts of
Elliot Wave Theory are outlined below:

Action is followed by reaction

The basic Elliot Wave pattern consists of 8 waves which are often labeled as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, a, b, c

There are 5 waves in the direction of the main trend followed by 3 corrective waves (a.k.a. "5-3"
count); Waves 1, 3, and 5 are called "impulse" waves while waves 2 and 4 are called "corrective"
waves; Waves 1-5 can be either up or down; Waves a, b, and c correct the main trend and always
travel in the oppisite direction of waves 1 - 5.

A 5-3 count completes a cycle; this completed count then becomes 2 subdivisions of the next
higher 5-3 wave; The cycles are as follows: The largest wave count is called the Grand Supercycle
which consists of Supercycles which consist of Cycles. This process continues into Primary,
Intermediate, Minute, Minuette, and Sub-minuette wave cycles.

The underlying 5-3 pattern remains constant, but the time frame required to complete the pattern
may vary

However, there is an inherent weakness of the Elliott Wave Theory - its predictive nature is very
dependent on an accurate wave count. Determining where one wave starts and another wave ends can
be extremely subjective.

Enter the Elliot Oscillator indicator.

In an effort to keep better track of the complicated and very subjective Elliot Wave counts the Elliot
Oscillator measures the Rate of change of one wave compared to the Rate of Change of another wave.

The Elliot Oscillator is simply the difference of a 5-periods simple moving average and a 34-periods
simple moving average shown as a histogram that oscillates above/below a zero line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 517

Interpretation

The most important Elliot Oscillator concepts are:

The highest/lowest value of the oscillator identifies a potential bullish/bearish wave 3

Wave 4 almost always pulls back to or crosses over the zero line in the opposite direction of the
main trend

Wave 5 usually makes a new high or low price for the swing, but often diverges from the Elliot
Oscillator; if Wave 5 makes a new high/low price, but doesn't diverge from the indicator, alternate
analysis may conclude that the wave was not wave 5, but instead an extended wave 3.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Elliot Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_ElliotOsc
Label Mask: Elliot Oscillator (%Price%,%ShortMA%,%LongMA%,%Mat%) = %
EllOsc%
Placement: New Frame

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

518 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Data Inspection Alias: Elliot Oscillator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Median Price

[New] button...
Name: ShortMA
Display Name: Short MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

[New] button...
Name: LongMA
Display Name: Long MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 34

[New] button...
Name: Mat
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: EllOsc
Name: (EO)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

EllOsc:= Mov(Price,ShortMA,Mat)-Mov(Price,LongMA,Mat);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Elliot Oscillator indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 519

6.44 Gann HiLo Activator

Overview

The Gann HiLo Activator was first introduced by Robert Krausz in the Feb. 1998 issue of Stocks &
Commodities Magazine. Further information about this indicator was gathered from Robert Krausz's
Fibonacci Trader Journal (Volume 1, Issue 2).

The Gann HiLo Activator is basically a simple moving average of the previous 3 periods' highs or lows
plotted based in relation to the HiLo Activator. When price is above the HiLo Activator it can be used as
a buy stop (uses the previous period’s lows for calculations) and when price is below the HiLo Activator it
can be used as a sell stop (using the previous period’s highs for calculation).

Interpretation

The Gann HiLo Activator is meant to be used in conjunction with the Gann Swing and Gann Trend
indicators to form a trading system methodology commonly referred to as the "New Gann Swing Chartist
Plan". Within this methodology the Gann HiLo Activator can be used as an entry trigger and stoploss
point.

Construction

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 520 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Gann HiLo Activator

Function Name Alias: vt_GannHiLo
Label Mask: Gann HiLo Activator (%Lb%) = %HiLo%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Gann HiLo Activator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Lb
Display Name: Lookback Periods
Type: integer
Default: 3

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: HiLo
Name: (HiLo)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

HLd:=If(C>Ref(Mov(H,Lb,S),-1),1,If(C<Ref(Mov(L,Lb,S),-1),-1,0));
HLv:=ValueWhen(1,HLd<>0,HLd);
HiLo:=If(HLv=-1,Mov(H,Lb,S),Mov(L,Lb,S));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Gann HiLo Activator indicator.

6.45 Gann Swing Oscillator

Overview

The Gann Swing Oscillator has been adapted from Robert Krausz's book, "A W.D. Gann Treasure
Discovered".

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 521

Interpretation

The Gann Swing Oscillator helps define market swings. A market swing up is defined by 2 higher highs
while a market swing low is defined by 2 lower lows. An up-swing is indicated by a +1 value of the
oscillator while a down-swing is indicated by a -1 value.

The Gann Swing Oscillator is meant to be used in conjunction with the Gann HiLo Activator and Gann
Trend indicators to form a trading system methodology commonly referred to as the "New Gann Swing
Chartist Plan". Within this methodology the Gann Swing Oscillator is used to help determine market
direction for trading only with the current market trend.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Gann Swing Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_GannSwing
Label Mask: Gann Swing Osc. = %TD1%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Gann Swing Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 522 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This indicator requires no input variables.

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: TD1
Name: (Osc)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

{Market swing is defined as: Up = 2 higher highs, Down = 2 lower lows}

Us:= BarsSince(Sum(H>Ref(H,-1),2)=2);
Ds:= BarsSince(Sum(L<Ref(L,-1),2)=2);
Hc:= HighestSince(1,Us=0,H);
Lc:= LowestSince(1,Ds=0,L);
Sd1:= If(Us=0, If((L<>Lc) AND (Ref(L,-1)<>Lc), 1, 0), If(Ds=0, If
((H<>HC) AND (Ref(H,-1)<>Hc), -1, 0), 0));
Sd2:= If(Sd1=1,If(Ref(BarsSince(Sd1=1),-1) > Ref(BarsSince(Sd1=-1),-1),
1, 0), If(Sd1=-1, If(Ref(BarsSince(Sd1=1),-1) < Ref(BarsSince(Sd1=-1),-
1), -1, 0), 0));
TD1:= ValueWhen(1,Sd2<>0,Sd2);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Gann Swing Oscillator indicator.

6.46 Gann Trend Oscillator

Overview

The Gann Trend Oscillator has been adapted from Robert Krausz's book, "A W.D. Gann Treasure
Discovered".

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 523

Interpretation

The Gann Trend Oscillator helps define overall market trend direction. An up-trending market is defined
by a +1 value of the oscillator while a down-trending market is indicated by a -1 value.

The Gann Trend Oscillator is meant to be used in conjunction with the Gann HiLo Activator and Gann
Swing indicators to form a trading system methodology commonly referred to as the "New Gann Swing
Chartist Plan". Within this methodology the Gann Trend Oscillator is used to determine the overall trend
direction of the market.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Gann Trend Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_GannTrend
Label Mask: Gann Trend Osc. = %Tdv%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Gann Trend Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

524 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This indicator requires no input variables.

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Tdv
Name: (Osc)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

{Market swing is defined as: Up = 2 higher highs, Down = 2 lower lows}

Us:= BarsSince(Sum(H>Ref(H,-1),2)=2);
Ds:= BarsSince(Sum(L<Ref(L,-1),2)=2);
Hc:= HighestSince(1,Us=0,H);
Lc:= LowestSince(1,Ds=0,L);
Sd1:= If(Us=0, If((L<>Lc) AND (Ref(L,-1)<>Lc), 1, 0), If(Ds=0, If
((H<>HC) AND (Ref(H,-1)<>Hc), -1, 0), 0));
Sd2:= If(Sd1=1,If(Ref(BarsSince(Sd1=1),-1) > Ref(BarsSince(Sd1=-1),-1),
1, 0), If(Sd1=-1, If(Ref(BarsSince(Sd1=1),-1) < Ref(BarsSince(Sd1=-1),-
1), -1, 0), 0));
TD1:= ValueWhen(1,Sd2<>0,Sd2);

{Swing Direction}

Sd:= TD1;

{Swing Change High}

Sch:= If(Sd=1 AND Ref(sd,-1)=-1, 1, 0);

{Swing Change Low}

Scl:= If(Sd=-1 AND Ref(Sd,-1)=1, 1, 0);

{Peak Value}

Pv:= If(Scl=1, HighestSince(1,Sch=1,H), 0);

{Trough Value}

Tv:= If(Sch=1, LowestSince(1,Scl=1,L), 0);

{Trend Direction}

Td:= If(H>ValueWhen(1,Pv>0,Pv), 1, If(L<ValueWhen(1,Tv>0,Tv), -1, 0));

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 525

{UpTrend=1 | DownTrend =-1}

Tdv:= ValueWhen(1,Td<>0,Td);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Gann Trend Oscillator indicator.

6.47 Hull Moving Average (HMA)

Overview

The Hull Moving Average (HMA), developed by Alan Hull, is an extremely fast and smooth moving
average. In fact, the HMA almost eliminates lag altogether and manages to improve smoothing at the
same time.

Interpretation

The Hull Moving Average can be used in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer to the "Moving
Average" indicator for additional details.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

526 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Hull Moving Average

Function Name Alias: vt_HMA
Label Mask: Hull MA (%price%,%length%,%method%) = %HMA%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Hull MA

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: length
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: method
Display Name: Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Weighted

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: HMA
Name: (HMA)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

halvedLength:= if((ceiling(length/2) - (length/2) <= 0.5), ceiling

(length/2), floor(length/2));
sqrRootLength:= if((ceiling(sqrt(length)) - sqrt(length) <= 0.5),
ceiling(sqrt(length)), floor(sqrt(length)));

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 527

Value1:= 2 * mov(price,halvedLength,method);
Value2:= mov(price,length,method);
HMA:= mov((Value1-Value2),sqrRootLength,method);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Hull Moving Average indicator.

6.48 Ichimoku Kinko Huo

Overview

The Ichimoku Kinko Hyo Japanese charting technique was developed before World War II by a Japanese
newspaper writer with the pen name of Ichimoku Sanjin. The word Ichimoku can be translated to mean
"a glance" or "one look". Kinko translates into "equilibrium" or "balance", and Hyo is the Japanese word
for "chart". Thus, Ichimoku Kinko Hyo simply means, "a glance at an equilibrium chart". Ichimoku charts
attempt to identify the probably direction of price and help the trader to determine the most suitable
times to enter and/or exit the market.

The Ichimoku chart consists of five lines constructed using only the midpoints of previous highs and
lows. The five lines are calculated as follows:

1) Tenkan-Sen = Conversion Line = (Highest High + Lowest Low) / 2, for the past 9 periods

2) Kijun-Sen = Base Line = (Highest High + Lowest Low) / 2, for the past 26 periods

3) Chikou Span = Lagging Span = Today's closing price plotted 26 periods behind

4) Senkou Span A = Leading Span A = (Tenkan-Sen + Kijun-Sen) / 2, plotted 26 periods ahead

5) Senkou Span B = Leading Span B = (Highest High + Lowest Low) / 2, for the past 52 periods, plotted
26 periods ahead

The Kumo (or clouds) is the area between Senkou Span A and Senkou Span B.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

528 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

A bullish signal is issued when the Tenkan-Sen crosses the Kijun-Sen from below. A bearish signal is
issued when the Tenkan-Sen crosses the Kijun-Sen from above. However, there are different levels of
strength for the buy and sell signals of an Ichimoku chart.

If a bullish crossover signal occurs above the Kumo (or clouds), it is considered a very strong buy signal.
In contrast, a bearish crossover signal that occurs below the Kumo is considered a very strong sell
signal.

If a bullish or bearish crossover signal takes place within the Kumo (or clouds) it's considered an average
or medium strength buy or sell signal.

A bullish crossover that occurs below the Kumo (or clouds) is considered a weak buy signal while a
bearish crossover that occurs above the Kumo is considered a weak sell signal.

Additionally, support and resistance levels can be predicted by the presence of Kumo (or clouds). The
Kumo can also be used to help identify the prevailing trend of the market. If the price is above the Kumo,
the prevailing trend is said to be up; if the price is below the Kumo, the prevailing trend is said to be
down.

Lastly, the Chikou Span (or Lagging Span) can also be used to determine the strength of the buy or sell
signal. If the Chikou Span is below the closing price for 26 periods ago and a sell signal is issued, then
the strength is to the downside, otherwise it is considered a weak sell signal. Conversely, if there is a
buy signal and the Chikou Span is above the price for 26 periods ago, then the strength is to the upside,
otherwise it can be considered a weak buy signal.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 529

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Ichimoku Kinko Huo

Function Name Alias: vt_Ichimoku
Label Mask:
Ichimoku Kinko Huo (%TSpr%,%KSPr%,%SSBPr%)
TS = %TS%, KS = %KS%, CS = %CS%
SSA = %SSA%, SSB = %SSB%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Ichimoku Kinko Huo

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: TSpr
Display Name: Tenkan-Sen
Type: integer
Default: 9

[New] button...
Name: KSPr
Display Name: Kijun-Sen
Type: Bars Forward
Default: 26
Min Bounds: 0
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: SSBPr
Display Name: Senkou Span B
Type: integer
Default: 52

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: SSA
Name: (Senkou Span A)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SSB
Name: (Senkou Span B)
Line Color: black

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

530 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Line Width: thin

Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: TS
Name: (Tenkan-Sen)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: KS
Name: (Kijun-Sen)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: CS
Name: (Chinkou Span)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: KumoUp
Name: (Kumo Up)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Kumo_Up
Name: (Kumo Up)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: KumoDown
Name: (Kumo Down)
Line Color: pink
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Kumo_Down
Name: (Kumo Down)
Line Color: pink
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 531

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

{Tenkan-Sen}

TS:= (HHV(H,TSpr)+LLV(L,TSpr))/2;

{Kijun-Sen}

KS:= (HHV(H,KSPr)+LLV(L,KSPr))/2;

{Senkou Span A}

SSA:= Ref((ts+ks)/2,-(KSPr-1));

{Senkou Span B}

SSB:= Ref((HHV(H,SSBPr)+LLV(L,SSBPr))/2,-(KSPr-1));

{Chinkou Span}

CS:= Ref(C,(KSPr-1));

{Paint the Clouds}

KumoUp:=if(ssa>ssb,if(prev=ref(ssb,-1),ssa,ssb),null);
Kumo_Up:=if(ssa>ssb,if(prev=ref(ssa,-1),ssb,ssa),null);

KumoDown:=if(ssa<ssb,if(prev=ref(ssb,-1),ssa,ssb),null);
Kumo_Down:=if(ssa<ssb,if(prev=ref(ssa,-1),ssb,ssa),null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Ichimoku Kinko Huo indicator.

6.49 Inertia

Overview

The Inertia indicator was developed by Donald Dorsey and first appeared in the September 1995 issue of
Technical Analysis of Stocks &Commodities magazine.

Dorsey chose the name "Inertia" because of his interpretation of a trend. He claimed that a trend is the
outward result of inertia; thus it takes more energy for a market to reverse direction than to continue in
the same direction. Therefore, a trend is a measurement of market inertia.

In physics, Inertia is defined in terms of mass and direction of motion. Using standard technical

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

532 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

analysis, the direction of motion is easily defined. However, mass is not so easily defined. Dorsey
claimed that volatility may be the simplest and most accurate measurement of inertia. This theory led
him to use the Relative Volatility Index (RVI) as the basis for a trend indicator. Inertia is a RVI smoothed
by a linear regression indicator.

Interpretation

The Inertia indicator is relatively simple to interpret. If the Inertia indicator is above 50, positive inertia is
indicated thereby defining the long-term trend as up while the indicator remains above 50. If the Inertia
indicator is below 50, negative inertia is indicated thereby defining the long-term trend is down while the
indicator remains below 50.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Inertia
Function Name Alias: vt_Inertia
Label Mask: Inertia (%periods%,%mt%) = %_Inertia%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Inertia

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 533

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: mt
Display Name: Smoothing Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _Inertia
Name: (Inertia)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_Inertia:= Mov(((100 * Mov(If(H>Ref(H,-1),Stdev(H,10),0),14,E) /

(Mov(If(H>Ref(H,-1),Stdev(H,10),0),14,E) +
Mov(If(H<Ref(H,-1),Stdev(H,10),0),14,E)) +
100 * Mov(If(L>Ref(L,-1),Stdev(L,10),0),14,E) /
(Mov(If(L>Ref(L,-1),Stdev(L,10),0),14,E) +
Mov(If(L<Ref(L,-1),Stdev(L,10),0),14,E))) / 2),periods,mt);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Inertia indicator.

6.50 Kase CD

Overview

The Kase CD is the derivative of the Kase Peak Oscillator. It is calculated in much the same way as the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

534 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

MACD histogram is calculated from a moving average oscillator. That is, it is the difference between the
Kase Peak Oscillator and the average of the Kase Peak Oscillator. However, because its basis is
statistical, it generates cleaner crossover signals and more reliable divergences.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Kase CD
Function Name Alias: vt_KaseCD
Label Mask:
Kase CD (%Per1%)
KCD-Green = %Green%
KCD-Red = %Red%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Kase CD

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Per1
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 8

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 535

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: LN
Name: (LN)
Line Color: yellow
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Red
Name: (Red KCD Histogram)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: Green
Name: (Green KCD Histogram)
Line Color: green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

RWH:=(H-Ref(L,-Per1))/(ATR(Per1)*Sqrt(Per1));
RWL:=(Ref(H,-Per1)-L)/(ATR(Per1)*Sqrt(Per1));
Pk:= Mov(Mov((RWH-RWL),3,W),3,S);
KCD:= PK-Mov(PK,8,S);
MN:= Mov(KCD,Per1,S);
SD:= Stdev(KCD,Per1);
Val1:= If(MN+(1.33*SD)>2.08,MN+(1.33*SD),2.08);
Val2:= If(MN-(1.33*SD)<-1.92,MN-(1.33*SD),-1.92);
LN:= If(Ref(KCD,-1)>=0 AND KCD>0,Val1,If(Ref(KCD,-1)<=0 AND KCD<0,
Val2,0));
Red:= If(Ref(KCD,-1)>KCD,KCD,0);
Green:= If(KCD>Ref(KCD,-1),KCD,0);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Kase CD indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 536 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.51 Kase DevStop II

Overview

The Kase DevStop indicator is described in Cynthia Kase's "Trading with the Odds". The KDS calculates
an average range and 3 standard deviations of the range.

Interpretation

The DevStop is used to determine realistic exit points for trades based on volatility, the variance of
volatility, and volatility skew. The 4 lines are defined as a Warning Line and Standard Deviations of 1, 2
and 3. This allows traders to take profit or cut losses at levels at which the probability of a trade
remaining profitable is low, without taking more of a loss or cutting profits any sooner than necessary.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Kase DevStop II

Function Name Alias: vt_KaseDS

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 537

Label Mask:
Kase DevStop II (%Per1%)
Warning = %Val1%
1 StDev = %Val2%
2 StDevs = %Val3%
3 StDevs = %Val4%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Kase DevStop II

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Per1
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 30
Min Bounds: 2
Max Bounds: 100

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Val1
Name: (Warning Line)
Line Color: yellow
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Val2
Name: (1 Deviation)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Val3
Name: (2 Deviations)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: (3 Deviations)
Name: Val4
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 538 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

RWH:=(H-Ref(L,-Per1))/(ATR(Per1)*Sqrt(Per1));
RWL:=(Ref(H,-Per1)-L)/(ATR(Per1)*Sqrt(Per1));

Pk:=Mov((RWH-RWL),3,W);
AVTR:=Mov(HHV(H,2) - LLV(L,2),20, S);
SD:=Stdev(HHV(H,2) - LLV(L,2),20);
Val4:=If(Pk>0,HHV(H-AVTR-3*SD,20),LLV(L+AVTR+3*SD,20));
Val3:=If(Pk>0,HHV(H-AVTR-2*SD,20),LLV(L+AVTR+2*SD,20));
Val2:=If(Pk>0,HHV(H-AVTR-SD,20),LLV(L+AVTR+SD,20));
Val1:=If(Pk>0,HHV(H-AVTR,20),LLV(L+AVTR,20));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Kase DevStop II indicator.

6.52 Kase Peak Oscillator

Overview

The Kase Peak Oscillator is used similarly to traditional oscillators, but is derived from a statistical
evaluation of trend that evaluates over 50 different trend lengths. It is capable of automatically adapting
for cycle length and volatility changes.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 539

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Kase Peak Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_KasePO
Label Mask:
Kase Peak Oscillator (%Per1%)
KPO-Green = %Green%
KPO-Red = %Red%
LN = %LN%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Kase Peak Oscillator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Per1
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 30

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: LN
Name: (LN)
Line Color: yellow
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Red
Name: (Red KPO Histogram)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: Green
Name: (Green KPO Histogram)
Line Color: green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 540 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

RWH:= (H-Ref(L,-Per1))/(ATR(Per1)*Sqrt(Per1));
RWL:= (Ref(H,-Per1)-L)/(ATR(Per1)*Sqrt(Per1));
Pk:= Mov((RWH-RWL),3,W);
MN:= Mov(Pk,Per1,S);
SD:= Stdev(Pk,Per1);
Val1:= If(MN+(1.33*SD)>2.08,MN+(1.33*SD),2.08);
Val2:= If(MN-(1.33*SD)<-1.92,MN-(1.33*SD),-1.92);
LN:= If(Ref(Pk,-1)>=0 AND Pk>0,Val1,If(Ref(Pk,-1)<=0 AND Pk<0,Val2,0));
Red:= If(Ref(Pk,-1)>Pk,Pk,0);
Green:= If(Pk>Ref(Pk,-1),Pk,0);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Kase Peak Oscillator indicator.

6.53 Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA)

Overview

Developed by Perry Kaufman, this indicator is a moving average that automatically adjusts its speed
based on market volatility.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 541

Interpretation

The KAMA can be used in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer to the "Moving Average"
indicator for additional details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA)

Function Name Alias: vt_KAMA
Label Mask: Kaufman's AMA (%Pr%,%periods%,%fsp%,%ssp%) = %Kama%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Kaufman's AMA

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Close

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

542 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: fsp
Display Name: Fast Smoothing Constant
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 2
Min Bounds: 2
Max Bounds: 300

[New] button...
Name: ssp
Display Name: Slow Smoothing Constant
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 30
Min Bounds: 2
Max Bounds: 300

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Kama
Name: (Kama)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Direction:= Pr - ref(Pr,-periods);
Volatility:= sum(abs(roc(Pr,1,Points)),periods);
Volatility:= if(Volatility>0, Volatility, 0.0001);
ER:= abs(Direction/Volatility);
FastSC:= 2/(fsp + 1);
SlowSC:= 2/(ssp + 1);
SSC:= ER * (FastSC - SlowSC) + SlowSC;
Constant:= power(SSC,2);
Kama:= If(BarCount()<=periods, Pr, PREV(0) + constant * (Pr - PREV(0)));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 543

6.54 Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio

Overview

Developed by Perry Kaufman and described in his book entitled “New Trading Systems and Methods”,
the Efficiency Ratio is a measure of relative market speed to volatility. It is often used as a filter to help
avoid “choppy” or flat markets and help identify smoother market trends.

The Efficiency Ratio is calculated by dividing the net change in price movement over n-periods by the
sum of all bar-to-bar price changes (taken as absolute values) over those same n-periods.

Interpretation

The smoother the market is trending the greater the Efficiency Ratio. Efficiency Ratio readings around
zero indicate a lot of inefficiency and “choppiness” in the market movements.

For example, the Efficiency Ratio will read +100 for an instrument that is up-trending with perfect
efficiency and -100 for an instrument that is down-trending with perfect efficiency. Obviously, it is virtually
impossible for an instrument to have a perfect efficiency ratio since any adverse movement against the
prevailing trend direction during the time period being evaluated would decrease the efficiency ratio.

Efficiency Ratio values above +30 generally indicate a smoother uptrend while values below -30 generally
indicate a smoother downtrend. However, it’s important that you experiment with these values to
determine the most appropriate levels for the instrument(s) being evaluated and the trading methodology
being used.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

544 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio

Function Name Alias: vt_Efficiency
Label Mask: Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio (%prc%,%periods%) = %KER%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Efficiency Ratio

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: prc
Display Name: Price
Type: Price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 20
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: KER
Name: (KER)
Line Color: dark yellow-gold
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 545

Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Speed:= prc-Ref(prc,-periods);
Volatility:= Sum(Abs(prc-Ref(prc,-1)),periods);
KER:= Speed/Volatility*100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio indicator.

6.55 Keltner Bands (Based on ATR)

Overview

Originally developed by Chester W. Keltner and first introduced in his 1960 book "How to Make Money in
Commodities", Keltner Channels help identify market trends using a rather simple volatility channel. The
original Keltner Channels formulas were later modified by Linda B. Raschke. To differentiate Raschke's
modified indicator from the original Keltner Channels, VT Trader refers it as Keltner ATR Bands.

Raschke replaced the original price-range simple moving average channels with bands based on an
average true range (ATR) measure of volatility. Raschke's modified Keltner Channels (Bands) are similar
to Bollinger Bands except that Bollinger Bands use a standard deviation method to determine volatility.

The Keltner Bands indicator is an n-period exponential moving average of the closing price. The bands
are created by adding (for the upper band) and subtracting (for the lower band) an (n-period simple
moving average of an n-period ATR) * an ATR multiplier.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

546 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

The modified Keltner ATR Bands can be traded in much the same methods as Bollinger Bands.

When prices move outside the bands a continuation of the current trend is implied
Bottoms and tops made outside the bands followed by bottoms and tops made inside the bands
call for reversals in the trend
A move that originates at one band tends to go all the way to the other band

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Keltner Bands (Based on ATR)

Function Name Alias: vt_KeltnerBandsATR
Label Mask:
Keltner Bands (Based on ATR) (%Pds1%,%Pds2%,%Mult%)
EMA = %MidKB%, UB = %UpperKB%, LB = %LowerKB%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Keltner ATR Bands

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 547

[New] button...
Name: Pds1
Display Name: EMA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: Pds2
Display Name: ATR Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

[New] button...
Name: Mult
Display Name: ATR Multiple
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 2.5000
Min Bounds: 1.0000
Max Bounds:= 10.0000

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: MidKB
Name: (Middle EMA)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: UpperKB
Name: (Upper Band)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: LowerKB
Name: (Lower Band)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TH:= if(Ref(C,-1) > H,Ref(C,-1),H);

TL:= if(Ref(C,-1) < L,Ref(C,-1),L);
TR:= TH-TL;

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 548 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

MidKB:= Mov(C,pds1,E);
Diff:= Mov(TR,Pds2,S)*Mult;
UpperKB:= Mov(C,pds1,E)+Diff;
LowerKB:= Mov(C,pds1,E)-Diff;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Keltner ATR Bands indicator.

6.56 Keltner Channels

Overview

Originally developed by Chester W. Keltner and first introduced in his 1960 book "How to Make Money in
Commodities", Keltner Channels help identify market trends using a rather simple volatility channel.

Keltner Channels consist of a middle moving average and two channel lines. The middle line of the
Keltner Channels indicator is an n-period simple moving average of typical price. The channel lines are
created by adding (for the upper channel line) and subtracting (for the lower channel line) an n-period
simple moving average of the High/Low range.

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 549

Keltner’s trading strategy regards price breaking above the upper channel line as a strong bullish (buy)
signal. Conversely, price breaking below the lower channel line is considered a strong bearish (sell)
signal.

It’s also mentioned that sometimes other confirming indicators such as the RSI or MACD should be
used along with Keltner’s own “Minor Trend Rule”.

The “Minor Trend Rule” is a method for using the daily trend as a trading guide. Comparing today’s
prices with yesterday’s prices, Keltner defines a downtrend by an absence of new highs and an uptrend
by the failure of price to make new lows. Essentially, the “Minor Trend Rule” is a simple breakout
method that buys on new highs (today’s high > yesterday’s high) and sells on new lows (today’s low is
< yesterday’s low).

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Keltner Channels

Function Name Alias: vt_KeltnerChannels
Label Mask:
Keltner Channels (%Pr%)
SMA = %MidKC%, UC = %UpperKC%, LC = %LowerKC%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Keltner Channels

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: SMA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: MidKB
Name: (Middle SMA)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: UpperKB
Name: (Upper Band)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 550 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Var Name: LowerKB
Name: (Lower Band)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MidKC:= Mov(TP(),Pr,S);
UpperKC:= MidKC + Mov((H-L),Pr,S);
LowerKC:= MidKC - Mov((H-L),Pr,S);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Keltner Channels indicator.

6.57 Kurtosis Indicator

Overview

The Kurtosis Indicator is used to help determine market sentiment.

The Kurtosis Indicator is calculated in three parts.

The Kurtosis portion is calculated by the formula:

K = n-periods momentum – n-periods momentum of 1 bar ago (current bar’s momentum value minus the
previous bar’s momentum value)

The Fast Kurtosis portion is calculated by the formula:

FK = n-periods moving average of K

The Fast/Slow Kurtosis portion is calculated by the formula:

FSK = n-periods moving average of FK

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 551

Interpretation

A buy signal occurs when the Kurtosis indicator crosses above zero and a sell signal occurs when the
Kurtosis indicator crosses below zero.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Kurtosis Indicator

Function Name Alias: vt_Kurtosis
Label Mask: Kurtosis (%kprc%,%kper%,%fkper%,%fkmat%,%fskper%,%fskmat%) = %fsk%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Kurtosis

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: kprc
Display Name: Price
Type: Price
Default: Close

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

552 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: kper
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 3
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: fkper
Display Name: Smoothing Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 66
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: fkmat
Display Name: Smoothing Type
Type: MA type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: fskper
Display Name: Double Smoothing Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 3
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: fskmat
Display Name: Double Smoothing Type
Type: MA type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: fsk
Name: (FSK)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 553

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

mom:= kprc - Ref(kprc,-kper);

k:= mom - Ref(mom,-1);
fk:= Mov(k,fkper,fkmat);
fsk:= Mov(fk,fskper,fskmat);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Kurtosis indicator.

6.58 Linear Regression Acceleration

Overview

The Linear Regression Acceleration indicator calculates the change in the regression line's normalized
slope on the current bar from its normalized slope from the previous bar. The normalized acceleration
value is then plotted for each bar loaded in the chart.

Interpretation

The Linear Regression Acceleration indicator calculates the change in normalized slope of the
regression line from one bar to the next for each bar loaded in the chart. (See the Linear Regression

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

554 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Slope indicator for additional details about regression slope)

If the normalized acceleration is 0.20, then the regression line's normalized slope is rising at a rate of
0.20 per bar. Similarly, a normalized slope of -0.55 would indicate that the regression line's normalized
slope is declining at the rate of 0.55 per bar. For example, if the current bar's normalized slope value is
0.45 and the previous bar's normalized slope value is 0.37, then the normalized acceleration of the
current bar would be calculated as 0.45 - 0.37 = 0.08.

PLEASE NOTE: It's important to understand that a positive acceleration value does not equate to a
positive slope value; it simply means the slope is increasing. A negative acceleration value does not
equate to a negative slope value; it simply means the slope is decreasing.

Implementation

The Linear Regression Acceleration indicator allows for price selection, regression periods, smoothing of
RAW price before applying the regression and selection of smoothing type. The resulting regression
slope indicator is shown as a bi-color histogram that oscillates above and below 0. A reference line is
set at the 0 level. A rising slope (greater than its previous value 1 bar ago) is shown in the UpSlope color,
while a declining slope (lower than its previous value 1 bar ago) is shown in the DownSlope color.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Linear Regression Acceleration

Function Name Alias: vt_LinRegAccel
Label Mask: Linear Reg. Accel. (%RegPeriods%,%Price%,%SmoothPeriods%,%
SmoothType%) = %PlusAcceleration%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Linear Reg. Accel.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: RegPeriods
Display Name: Regression Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Regression Price
Type: Price
Default: close

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 555

Name: SmoothPeriods
Display Name: Pre-Smoothing Price Periods
Type: integer
Default: 1

[New] button...
Name: SmoothType
Display Name: Pre-Smoothing MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: PlusAcceleration
Name: (Plus Acceleration)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: MinusAcceleration
Name: (Minus Acceleration)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

SmoothData:= mov(Price,SmoothPeriods,SmoothType);
Slope:= (linregslope(smoothdata,RegPeriods))*100/Price;
Acceleration:= Slope - ref(Slope,-1);
PlusAcceleration:= if(Acceleration>=ref(Acceleration,-1),Acceleration,
Acceleration);
MinusAcceleration:= if(Acceleration<ref(Acceleration,-1),Acceleration,
null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Linear Regression Acceleration indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 556 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.59 Linear Regression Indicator

Overview

The Linear Regression Indicator plots the trend of a market instrument's price over a specified length of
time. The trend is determined by calculating a Linear Regression Trend Line using the "least squares fit"
method. This method helps to minimum distance between the data points and a Linear Regression
Trend Line.

Unlike the straight Linear Regression Trend Line, the Linear Regression indicator plots the ending values
of multiple Linear Regression trend lines. Any point along the Linear Regression Indicator will be equal to
the ending value of a Linear Regression Trend line, but the result looks like a Moving Average.

However, unlike a Moving Average, the Linear Regression Indicator does not exhibit as much delay since
it is fitting a line to data points rather than averaging them. The Linear Regression Indicator is actually a
forecast of the tomorrow's price plotted today. When prices are persistently higher or lower than the
forecasted price, expect them to quickly return to more realistic levels. In other words, the Linear
Regression Indicator shows where prices "should" be trading on a statistical basis and any excessive
deviation from the regression line is likely to be short-lived.

Interpretation

The Linear Regression Indicator can be used in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer to the
"Moving Average" indicator for additional details.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 557

Implementation

The Linear Regression Indicator allows for price selection, regression periods, smoothing of RAW price
before applying the regression and selection of smoothing type. It's presented as a bi-color indicator. A
rising regression line (greater than its previous value 1 bar ago) is shown in the UpLine color, while a
declining line (lower than its previous value 1 bar ago) is shown in the DownLine color.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Linear Regression Indicator

Function Name Alias: vt_LinReg
Label Mask: Linear Regression (%RegPeriods%,%Price%,%SmoothPeriods%,%
SmoothType%) = %UpLine%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Linear Regression

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: RegPeriods
Display Name: Regression Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: Price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: SmoothPeriods
Display Name: Pre-Smoothing Price Periods
Type: integer
Default: 1

[New] button...
Name: SmoothType
Display Name: Pre-Smoothing MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 558 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Var Name: UpLine
Name: (Upward Line)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: DownLine
Name: (Downward Line)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal levels.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

SmoothData:= mov(Price,SmoothPeriods,SmoothType);
Line:= linreg(SmoothData,RegPeriods);
UpLine:= if(Line>=ref(Line,-1),Line,Line);
DownLine:= if(Line<ref(Line,-1),Line,null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Linear Regression Indicator.

6.60 Linear Regression Slope

Overview

The Linear Regression Slope indicator calculates the slope value of theoretical regression lines which
involve that bar and the previous n-1 bars (n = regression periods) for each bar loaded in the chart. (See
the Linear Regression Indicator for additional details about regression lines). The slope values are then
normalized by multiplying the raw slope values by 100 and then dividing by the price (raw slope * 100 /
price).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 559

Interpretation

The normalization of the slope values is important when comparing markets that trade within different
price ranges. The normalized slope value basically shows the percent change in price per bar of the
regression (best fit) line. If the normalized slope is 0.20, then the regression line is rising at a rate of
0.20% per bar. Similarly, a normalized slope of -0.55 would indicate that the regression line is declining
at the rate o 0.55% per bar.

Implementation

The Linear Regression Slope indicator allows for price selection, regression periods, smoothing of RAW
price before applying the regression and selection of smoothing type. The resulting regression slope
indicator is shown as a bi-color histogram that oscillates above and below 0. A reference line is set at
the 0 level. A rising slope (greater than its previous value 1 bar ago) is shown in the UpSlope color, while
a declining slope (lower than its previous value 1 bar ago) is shown in the DownSlope color.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

560 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: Linear Regression Slope

Function Name Alias: vt_LinRegSlope
Label Mask: Linear Reg. Slope (%RegPeriods%,%Price%,%SmoothPeriods%,%
SmoothType%) = %UpSlope%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Linear Reg. Slope

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: RegPeriods
Display Name: Regression Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Regression Price
Type: Price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: SmoothPeriods
Display Name: Pre-Smoothing Price Periods
Type: integer
Default: 1

[New] button...
Name: SmoothType
Display Name: Pre-Smoothing MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: UpSlope
Name: (Upward Slope)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...
Var Name: DownSlope
Name: (Downward Slope)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 561

Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

SmoothData:= mov(Price,SmoothPeriods,SmoothType);
Slope:= (linregslope(smoothdata,RegPeriods))*100/Price;
UpSlope:= if(Slope>=ref(Slope,-1),Slope,Slope);
DownSlope:= if(Slope<ref(Slope,-1),Slope,null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Linear Regression Slope indicator.

6.61 MACD

Overview

Developed by Gerald Appel, publisher of "Systems & Forecasts", the Moving Average Convergence/
Divergence (MACD) indicator is one of the simplest, most reliable, and most commonly used indicators
available. The MACD is a momentum oscillator with some trend-following characteristics.

The most popular construction of the MACD first calculates the difference between two moving averages
and plots that as the "Fast" line; a second "Signal" (trigger) line is then calculated from the resulting
"Fast" line and plotted in the same frame as the "Fast" line. The "standard" MACD values for the "Fast"
line are a 12-period exponential moving average and a 26-period exponential moving average and a 9-
period exponential moving average for the "Signal" line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

562 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

The MACD is widely used as a trend-following indicator and tends to work most effectively when
measuring wide-swinging market movements. There are three basic techniques for using the MACD to
generate trading signals.

Crossovers: 1) Fast line/Signal line Crossover: A buy signal occurs when the Fast line crosses above
the Signal line and a sell signal occurs when the Fast line crosses below the Signal line. 2) Fast line /
Zero-Level Crossover: When the Fast line crosses above zero a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when
the Fast line crosses below zero a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the MACD and price can prove to be very effective in
identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are several types
of divergences:

Classic Divergence (aka: Regular Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the MACD
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the MACD

Hidden Divergence (aka: Reverse, Continuation, Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in MACD and higher lows in price

Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in MACD and lower highs in price

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The MACD can be used to identify potential overbought and oversold
conditions in price movements. These conditions are generated by comparing the distance between the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 563

shorter moving average and the longer moving average; if the shorter moving average separates
dramatically from the longer moving average it may be an indication that price is over-extending and will
soon return to more realistic levels.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Moving Average Convergence/Divergence (MACD)

Function Name Alias: vt_MACD
Label Mask:
MACD (%FastPeriods%,%SlowPeriods%,%SigPeriods%)
Fast = %Fast%
Signal = %Signal%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: MACD

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: FastPrice
Display Name: Fast MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: FastPeriods
Display Name: Fast MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 12.0000

[New] button...
Name: FastType
Display Name: Fast MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: SlowPrice
Display Name: Slow MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: SlowPeriods
Display Name: Slow MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 26.0000

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

564 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: SlowType
Display Name: Slow MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: SigPeriods
Display Name: Signal MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 9.0000

[New] button...
Name: SigType
Display Name: Signal MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Fast
Name: (Fast Line)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Signal
Name: (Signal Line)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: OsMA
Name: (Histogram)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Fast:= Mov(FastPrice,FastPeriods,FastType) - Mov(SlowPrice,SlowPeriods,

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 565

SlowType);
Signal:= Mov(Fast,SigPeriods,SigType);
OsMA:= Fast-Signal;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the MACD indicator.

6.62 MACD-Histogram

Overview

Developed by Gerald Appel, publisher of "Systems & Forecasts", the Moving Average Convergence/
Divergence (MACD) indicator is one of the simplest, most reliable, and most commonly used indicators
available. The MACD is a momentum oscillator with some trend-following characteristics.

The most popular construction of the MACD first calculates the difference between two moving averages
and plots that as the "Fast" line; a second "Signal" (trigger) line is then calculated from the resulting
"Fast" line and plotted in the same frame as the "Fast" line. The "standard" MACD values for the "Fast"
line are a 12-period exponential moving average and a 26-period exponential moving average and a 9-
period exponential moving average for the "Signal" line.

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

566 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The MACD is widely used as a trend-following indicator and tends to work most effectively when
measuring wide-swinging market movements. There are three basic techniques for using the MACD to
generate trading signals.

Histogram / Zero-Level Crossover: When the MACD Histogram crosses above zero a buy signal is given.
Alternatively, when the MACD Histogram crosses below zero a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the MACD Histogram and price can prove to be very
effective in identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are
several types of divergences:

Classic Divergence (aka: Regular Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the MACD Histogram
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the MACD Histogram

Hidden Divergence (aka: Reverse, Continuation, Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in MACD Histogram and higher lows in price
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in MACD Histogram and lower highs in price

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Moving Average Convergence/Divergence (MACD) - Histogram

Function Name Alias: vt_MACDHist
Label Mask: MACD Histogram (%FastPeriods%,%SlowPeriods%,%SigPeriods%) =
%OsMA%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: MACD Histogram

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: FastPrice
Display Name: Fast MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: FastPeriods
Display Name: Fast MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 12.0000

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 567

[New] button...
Name: FastType
Display Name: Fast MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: SlowPrice
Display Name: Slow MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: SlowPeriods
Display Name: Slow MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 26.0000

[New] button...
Name: SlowType
Display Name: Slow MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: SigPeriods
Display Name: Signal MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 9.0000

[New] button...
Name: SigType
Display Name: Signal MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: OsMA
Name: (Histogram)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 568 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Fast:= Mov(FastPrice,FastPeriods,FastType) - Mov(SlowPrice,SlowPeriods,

SlowType);
Signal:= Mov(Fast,SigPeriods,SigType);
OsMA:= Fast-Signal;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the MACD-Histogram indicator.

6.63 MACD-Line

Overview

Developed by Gerald Appel, publisher of "Systems & Forecasts", the Moving Average Convergence/
Divergence (MACD) indicator is one of the simplest, most reliable, and most commonly used indicators
available. The MACD is a momentum oscillator with some trend-following characteristics.

The most popular construction of the MACD first calculates the difference between two moving averages
and plots that as the "Fast" line; a second "Signal" (trigger) line is then calculated from the resulting
"Fast" line and plotted in the same frame as the "Fast" line. The "standard" MACD values for the "Fast"
line are a 12-period exponential moving average and a 26-period exponential moving average and a 9-
period exponential moving average for the "Signal" line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 569

Interpretation

The MACD is widely used as a trend-following indicator and tends to work most effectively when
measuring wide-swinging market movements. There are three basic techniques for using the MACD to
generate trading signals.

Crossovers: 1) Fast line/Signal line Crossover: A buy signal occurs when the Fast line crosses above
the Signal line and a sell signal occurs when the Fast line crosses below the Signal line. 2) Fast line /
Zero-Level Crossover: When the Fast line crosses above zero a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when
the Fast line crosses below zero a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the MACD and price can prove to be very effective in
identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are several types
of divergences:

Classic Divergence (aka: Regular Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the MACD
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the MACD

Hidden Divergence (aka: Reverse, Continuation, Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in MACD and higher lows in price

Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in MACD and lower highs in price

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The MACD can be used to identify potential overbought and oversold
conditions in price movements. These conditions are generated by comparing the distance between the
shorter moving average and the longer moving average; if the shorter moving average separates
dramatically from the longer moving average it may be an indication that price is over-extending and will
soon return to more realistic levels.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Moving Average Convergence/Divergence (MACD) - Line

Function Name Alias: vt_MACDLine
Label Mask:
MACD Line (%FastPeriods%,%SlowPeriods%,%SigPeriods%)
Fast = %Fast%
Signal = %Signal%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: MACD Line

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

570 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: FastPrice
Display Name: Fast MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: FastPeriods
Display Name: Fast MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 12.0000

[New] button...
Name: FastType
Display Name: Fast MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: SlowPrice
Display Name: Slow MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: SlowPeriods
Display Name: Slow MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 26.0000

[New] button...
Name: SlowType
Display Name: Slow MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: SigPeriods
Display Name: Signal MA Periods
Type: float
Default: 9.0000

[New] button...
Name: SigType
Display Name: Signal MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Fast

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 571

Name: (Fast Line)

Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Signal
Name: (Signal Line)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Fast:= Mov(FastPrice,FastPeriods,FastType) - Mov(SlowPrice,SlowPeriods,

SlowType);
Signal:= Mov(Fast,SigPeriods,SigType);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the MACD-Line indicator.

6.64 Mass Index

Overview

Developed by Donald Dorsey and described in his article entitled “The Mass Index” in the June 1992
issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities magazine, the Mass Index indicator was designed
to warn of upcoming trend reversals. It does this by measuring the narrowing and widening of the average
range between the high and low prices. As the price range widens the Mass Index increases and as the
price range narrows the Mass Index decreases.

The Mass Index is created by calculating an n-periods moving summation (average) of the ratio of two
moving averages. The first moving average is divided by a second moving average (which is actually a
moving average of the first moving average). The moving averages ratio is then summed over n-periods to
calculate the final Mass Index.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

572 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

According to Dorsey, the “reversal bulge” pattern is the most method of generating potential trading
opportunities. A “reversal bulge” occurs when the Mass Index rises above 27 and then declines back
below 26.5.

It should be noted that the Mass Index does not indicate market direction. Dorsey suggests using an
additional moving average of price to help determine the market direction and classify the “reversal bulge”
pattern as a potential buy or sell signal.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Mass Index

Function Name Alias: vt_MassIndex
Label Mask: Mass Index (%maperiods%,%matype%,%sumperiods%) = %MassIndex%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Mass Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 573

[New] button...
Name: maperiods
Display Name: MA Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 9
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: matype
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: sumperiods
Display Name: Summation Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 25
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: MassIndex
Name: (Mass)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Value: +27.0000
Color: dark red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +26.5000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MA1:= Mov((H-L),maperiods,matype);
MA2:= Mov(MA1,maperiods,matype);
MassIndex:= Sum(MA1/MA2,sumperiods);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Mass Index indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 574 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.65 McClellan Histogram

Overview

The McClellan Histogram is a visual representation of the McClellan Oscillator and its signal line. This
difference is plotted as a histogram, making zero-line crossovers and divergences more easily
identifiable.

Interpretation

The McClellan Histogram is momentum indicator. As such, it can be traded in much the same way as
the MACD indicator. There are two basic techniques for using the McClellan Histogram to generate
trading signals.

Histogram / Zero-Level Crossover: When the histogram crosses above zero a buy signal is given.
Alternatively, when the histogram crosses below zero a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the McClellan Histogram and price can prove to be very
effective in identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are
several types of divergences:

Classic Divergence (a.k.a.: Regular Divergence)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 575

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the McClellan Histogram
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the McClellan Histogram

Hidden Divergence (a.k.a.: Reverse, Continuation, Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in McClellan Histogram and higher lows in price
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in McClellan Histogram and lower highs in price

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: McClellan Histogram

Function Name Alias: vt_McClellanHist
Label Mask: McClellan Histogram (%Pr%,%Sh%,%Lg%,%Sig%,%mat%) = %McClHist
%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: McClellan Histogram

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Sh
Display Name: Short MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 19

[New] button...
Name: Lg
Display Name: Long MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 39

[New] button...
Name: sig
Display Name: Signal MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 9

[New] button...
Name: mat

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 576 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Display Name: MA Type

Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: McClHist
Name: (Histogram)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

McClOsc:= Mov(Pr,Sh,mat) - Mov(Pr,Lg,mat);

McClHist:= McClOsc - Mov(McClOsc,Sig,mat);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the McClellan Histogram indicator.

6.66 McClellan Oscillator

Overview

The McClellan Oscillator, developed by Sherman and Marian McClellan, is a market breadth indicator
that is based on the smoothed difference between the numbers of advancing/declining statistics. In
depth coverage of the McClellan Oscillator is provided in their book “Patterns for Profit”.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 577

Interpretation

The McClellan Oscillator is momentum indicator. As such, it can be traded in much the same way as
the MACD indicator. There are three basic techniques for using the McClellan Oscillator to generate
trading signals.

Oscillator / Zero-Level Crossover: When the oscillator crosses above zero a buy signal is given.
Alternatively, when the oscillator crosses below zero a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the McClellan Oscillator and price can prove to be very
effective in identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are
several types of divergences:

Classic Divergence (a.k.a.: Regular Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the McClellan Histogram
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the McClellan Histogram

Hidden Divergence (a.k.a.: Reverse, Continuation, Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in McClellan Histogram and higher lows in price
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in McClellan Histogram and lower highs in price

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The McClellan Oscillator can also be used to identify potential
overbought and oversold conditions in price movements. These conditions are generated by comparing
the distance between the shorter moving average and the longer moving average. If the shorter moving
average separates dramatically from the longer moving average it may be an indication that price is over-

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

578 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

extending and will soon return to more realistic levels.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: McClellan Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_McClellanOsc
Label Mask: McClellan Osc. (%Pr%,%Sh%,%Lg%,%mat%) = %McClOsc%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: McClellan Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Sh
Display Name: Short MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 19

[New] button...
Name: Lg
Display Name: Long MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 39

[New] button...
Name: mat
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: McClOsc
Name: (Osc)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 579

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

McClOsc:= Mov(Pr,Sh,mat) - Mov(Pr,Lg,mat);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the McClellan Oscillator indicator.

6.67 McClellan Summation Index

Overview

The McClellan Summation Index, developed by Sherman and Marian McClellan, is a long-term version of
their McClellan Oscillator that is better suited to help identify potential major trend reversals.

The McClellan Oscillator is a market breadth indicator that is based on the smoothed difference between
the numbers of advancing/declining statistics. In depth coverage of the McClellan Oscillator is provided in
their book “Patterns for Profit”.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

580 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

The Summation Index is interpreted in much the way same as the McClellan Oscillator is. Please refer
to the McClellan Oscillator's Notes for additional details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: McClellan Summation Index

Function Name Alias: vt_McClellanSumIndex
Label Mask: McClellan Sum. Index (%Pr%,%Sh%,%Lg%,%mat%) = %McClSumIndex%

Placement: New Frame

Data Inspection Alias: McClellan Sum. Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Sh
Display Name: Short MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 19

[New] button...
Name: Lg
Display Name: Long MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 39

[New] button...
Name: mat
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 581

Var Name: McClSumIndex

Name: (Sum Index)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

McClSumIndex:= Cum(Mov(Pr,Sh,mat)-Mov(Pr,Lg,mat));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the McClellan Summation Index indicator.

6.68 McGinley Dynamic

Overview

Developed by John McGinley in 1990 and published in the Market Technicians Association’s Journal Of
Technical Analysis 1997, the McGinley Dynamic attempts to overcome the problems of more traditional
simple and exponential moving averages by automatically adjusting itself relative to speed of the market.
This allows the McGinley Dynamic to follow prices move closely in fast and slow moving markets while
better avoiding price separation and whipsaws. The McGinley Dynamic is calculated by the formula:

Dynamic = D1 + (Price - D1) / (N * (Price/D1)^4)

Where:
D1 = previous value of Dynamic
N = smoothing factor (periods)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

582 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

McGinley believes that moving averages (and his Dynamic) should be used as smoothing mechanisms
rather than as trading systems or signal generators. However, the McGinley Dynamic can also be used
in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer to the "Moving Average" indicator for additional
details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: McGinley Dynamic

Function Name Alias: vt_McGinleyDynamic
Label Mask: McGinley Dynamic (%prc%,%periods%) = %McGDynamic%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: McGinley Dynamic

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: prc
Display Name: Price

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 583

Type: Price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 12
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: McGDynamic
Name: (Dynamic)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

McGDynamic:= Prev(prc)+(prc-Prev(prc))/(periods*Power(prc/Prev(prc),4));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the McGinley Dynamic indicator.

6.69 Momentum

Overview

The momentum indicator is one of the simplest equations available in modern technical analysis.
Momentum is a measure of price change velocity calculated as the difference between the current bar's
price and the price a selected number of bars ago. Basically, it represents the rate of change of the
trading instrument's price over those specified time periods. The faster prices rise, the larger the
increase in momentum. The faster prices decline, the larger the decrease in momentum. As the price
movement begins to slow the momentum will also slow and return to a more median level.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

584 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

The Momentum indicator is a versatile indicator capable of producing a wide array of buy and sell
signals. However, there are three basic methods of interpreting the Momentum indicator:

Zero-Level Crossovers: A buy signal occurs when Momentum crosses above zero and a sell signal
occurs when momentum crosses below zero.

Extreme Overbought/Oversold Levels: To use Momentum as an overbought/oversold indicator, the user

must identify potential overbought and oversold levels based on previous indicator readings; When
choosing the overbought and oversold levels the user should ensure that at least two-thirds of previous
Momentum values fall between the overbought and oversold levels. Readings above the overbought level
imply an overbought condition (and a pending price correction) while readings below the oversold level
imply an oversold condition (and a pending rally).

Trend Line Breakouts: Trend lines can be drawn connecting the peaks and troughs of the Momentum
indicator. Often momentum begins to turn before price thereby making it a leading indicator. Momentum
readings breaking above a declining trend line warns of a possible bullish reversal while momentum
readings breaking below a rising trend line warns of a possible bearish reversal.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 585

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Momentum
Function Name Alias: vt_MOM
Label Mask: Momentum (%Pr%,%tPr%) = %Mom%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Momentum

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Mom
Name: (Momentum)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Mom:= Pr - Ref(Pr,-tPr);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Momentum indicator.

6.70 Moving Average

Overview

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

586 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

A Moving Average is an indicator that calculates the average value of prices (or any specified data
series) over a period of predetermined period of time.

VT Trader supports seven popular types of moving averages: simple, weighted, exponential, sine
weighted, triangular, end point, and volume-adjusted. Moving averages can be calculated on any data
series including a trading instrument's open, high, low, close, volume, or even another indicator.

The only significant difference between the various types of moving averages is the weight assigned to
the most recent data. Simple moving averages apply equal weight to the prices. Exponential and
weighted averages apply more weight to recent prices. Triangular averages apply more weight to prices
in the middle of the time period.

Interpretation

The most popular method of interpreting a moving average is to compare the relationship between a
moving average of the price with the price itself. A buy signal is generated when the price rises above its
moving average and a sell signal is generated when the price falls below its moving average.

Also popular are various types of moving average crossover systems. Such systems often include two or
more moving averages crossing above/below each other and perhaps even utilizing other indicators as
additional entry and exit confirmation signals. The combinations of conditions for these types of systems
are almost limitless!

Moving averages can also be calculated and plotted on indicators. The interpretation of an indicator's
moving average is similar to the interpretation of the price’s moving average: when the indicator rises

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 587

above its moving average, it signifies a continued upward movement by the indicator; when the indicator
falls below its moving average, it signifies a continued downward movement by the indicator.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Moving Average

Function Name Alias: vt_MOV
Label Mask: Moving Average (%Pr%,%tPr%,%mt%,%VShift%,%HShift%) = %MA%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Moving Average

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
Name: mt
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: VShift
Display Name: Vertical Shift %
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 0.0000
Min Bounds: -9999.0000
Max Bounds:= 9999.0000

[New] button...
Name: HShift
Display Name: Horizontal Shift
Type: Bars Forward
Default: 0
Min Bounds: 0
Max Bounds:= 9999

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 588 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: MA
Name: (MA)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

DataBars:= Ref(Pr,-HShift);
tmpMV:= Mov(DataBars,tPr,mt);
MA:= tmpMV+((tmpMV*VShift)/100);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Moving Average indicator.

6.71 Moving Average Envelope

Overview

The Moving Average Envelope indicator creates upper and lower channel lines plotted an equidistant %
(or number of pips) above and below the moving average.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 589

Interpretation

While several different trading rules are available, the simplest approach uses price penetrating the upper
channel to initiate long positions and price penetrating the lower channel initiate short positions.

An alternative to the above methods when the market is more range bound is to use price touching the
upper channel to go short price touching the lower channel to go long.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Moving Average Envelope

Function Name Alias: vt_MaEnv
Label Mask:
Moving Average Envelope (%Pr%,%tPr%,%mt%,%VShift%,%HShift%,%prcnt%,%
pips%)
Upper = %UC%, Lower = %LC%, MA = %DisplayMA%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: MA Envelope

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

590 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
Name: mt
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: VShift
Display Name: MA Vertical Shift %
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 0.0000
Min Bounds: -9999.0000
Max Bounds:= 9999.0000

[New] button...
Name: HShift
Display Name: MA Horizontal Shift
Type: Bars Forward
Default: 0
Min Bounds: 0
Max Bounds:= 9999

[New] button...
Name: HShift
Display Name: MA Horizontal Shift
Type: Bars Forward
Default: 0
Min Bounds: 0
Max Bounds:= 9999

[New] button...
Name: EType
Display Name: Type of MA Envelope
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
Percentage_Based
Pip_Based
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Percentage_Based

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 591

[New] button...
Name: prcnt
Display Name: MA Envelope % (if % Based)
Type: float
Default: 0.1000

[New] button...
Name: pips
Display Name: MA Envelope Pips (if Pip Based)
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: ShowMA
Display Name: Display Center MA?
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
No
Yes
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Yes

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: UC
Name: (Upper Channel)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: DisplayMA
Name: (Moving Average)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: LC
Name: (Lower Channel)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 592 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

DataBars:= Ref(Pr,-HShift);
tmpMV:= Mov(DataBars,tPr,mt);
MA:= tmpMV+((tmpMV*VShift)/100);
UC:= if(EType=0, MA + (MA * (prcnt/100)), MA + (Pips*SymbolPoint()));
LC:= if(EType=0, MA - (MA * (prcnt/100)), MA - (Pips*SymbolPoint()));
DisplayMA:= if(ShowMA=1, MA, null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Moving Average Envelope indicator.

6.72 Moving Averages of RSI

Overview

The Moving Averages (MA’s) of RSI indicator consists of a Relative Strength Index (RSI) indicator and
two moving averages or the RSI (fast and slow). The Fast MA of RSI and Slow MA of RSI are
constructed by calculating different n-periods moving averages of RSI.

Interpretation

There are several different methods in which the MA’s of RSI indicator can be used to generate trading
signals. Here are few of the more common techniques:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 593

Crossovers: 1) RSI / Fast MA or Slow MA Crossover: A buy signal occurs when the RSI crosses above
the Fast MA or Slow MA and a sell signal occurs when RSI crosses below the Fast MA or Slow MA. 2)
RSI / 50-level Crossover: When the RSI crosses above 50 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the
RSI crosses below 50 a sell signal is given. 3) Fast MA / Slow MA Crossover: A buy signal occurs when
the Fast MA crosses above the Slow MA and a sell signal occurs when Fast MA crosses below the
Slow MA.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the MA’s of RSI indicator and price can prove to be very
effective in identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish
Divergence: Lower lows in price and higher lows in the RSI or the MA’s of RSI; Trade short on Classic
Bearish Divergence: Higher highs in price and lower highs in the RSI or the MA’s of RSI.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: Much like the original RSI (and other oscillators), the MA’s of RSI
indicator can be used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in price movements. An
Overbought condition is generally described as the RSI or the MA’s of RSI being greater than or equal to
the 70% level while an oversold condition is generally described as the RSI or MA’s of RSI being less
than or equal to the 30% level. Trades can be generated when any of the MA’s of RSI outputs (RSI, Fast
MA or Slow MA) crosses these levels. When the RSI, Fast MA or Slow MA crosses above 30 a buy
signal is given. Alternatively, when the RSI, Fast MA or Slow MA crosses below 70 a sell signal is given.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Moving Averages of Relative Strength Index (MA's of RSI)

Function Name Alias: vt_MARSIndex
Label Mask:
MA's of RSI (%pr%,%tpr%,%MA1pr%,%MA1type%,%MA2pr%,%MA2type%)
RSI = %RS%, Fast MA = %FastMA%, Slow MA = %SlowMA%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: MA's of RSI

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: pr
Display Name: RSI Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: tpr
Display Name: RSI Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

594 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: MA1pr
Display Name: Fast MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

[New] button...
Name: MA1type
Display Name: Fast MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: MA2pr
Display Name: Slow MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 30

[New] button...
Name: MA2type
Display Name: Slow MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: RS
Name: (RSI)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: FastMA
Name: (Fast MA)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SlowMA
Name: (Slow MA)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 595

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: gray
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

{Relative Strength Index}

rsi_r:= (pr - ref(pr,-1));

rsi_rs:= Wilders(if(rsi_r>0,rsi_r,0),tpr) / Wilders(if(rsi_r<0,Abs
(rsi_r),0),tpr);
RS:= 100-(100/(1+rsi_rs));

{Moving Averages of Relative Strength Index}

FastMA:= mov(RS,MA1pr,MA1type);
SlowMA:= mov(RS,MA2pr,MA2type);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the MA's of RSI indicator.

6.73 Moving Slope Rate of Change

Overview

The Moving Slope Rate of Change (MSROC) Indicator is discussed in the Two Moving Function Hybrids
article written by William Rafter in the September 2005 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks and
Commodities magazine.

The MSROC is created by first calculating the linear regression slope over n-periods using the least
squares fit method and then calculating the ROC of that regression line. Because of the use of the linear
regression slope rather than raw price, it is smoother and more responsive than the Rate of Change
(ROC) indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

596 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Trading opportunities can be derived from the MSROC crossing above and below the zero line.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Moving Slope Rate of Change

Function Name Alias: vt_MSROC
Label Mask: Moving Slope ROC (%prc%,%periods%) = %MSROC%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Moving Slope ROC

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Prc
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 597

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 25

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: MSROC
Name: (MSROC)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

LinRegLine:= LinRegSlope(Prc,periods);
MSROC:= ROC(LinRegLine,periods,Points);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Moving Slope Rate of Change indicator.

6.74 Parabolic SAR

Overview

The Parabolic Time/Price System, developed by Welles Wilder, is used to set trailing price stops and is
usually referred to as the "SAR" (stop-and-reversal). This indicator is explained thoroughly in Wilder's
book, "New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems".

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

598 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

The Parabolic SAR provides excellent exit points. It is suggested to close long positions when the price
falls below the SAR and close short positions when the price rises above the SAR.

If the price is above the SAR, the SAR will move up every day, regardless of the direction the price is
moving. The amount the SAR moves up depends on the amount that prices move. If the price is below
the SAR, the SAR will move down every day, regardless of the direction the price is moving. The
amount the SAR moves up or down depends on the amount that prices move.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Parabolic SAR

Function Name Alias: vt_SAR
Label Mask: Parabolic SAR (%Step%,%Maximum%) = %SR%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Parabolic SAR

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 599

[New] button...
Name: Step
Display Name: Step
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 0.0200
Min Bounds: 0.0010
Max Bounds: 0.1000

[New] button...
Name: Maximum
Display Name: Maximum
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 0.2000
Min Bounds: 0.0100
Max Bounds: 1.0000

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: SR
Name: (PSAR)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dots

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

SR:= SAR(Step,Maximum);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Parabolic SAR indicator.

6.75 Percentage Price Oscillator

Overview

The Percentage Price Oscillator (PPO) is a momentum oscillator with some trend-following
characteristics. It expresses the difference between two moving averages as a percentage value that
quantifies where the fast moving average is in relation to the slow moving average. The Percentage Price
Oscillator is very similar to the Moving Average Convergence/Divergence (MACD), except the MACD
expresses the difference of two moving averages as an absolute value. Expressing the difference as a
percentage value makes it easier to compare trading instruments with difference prices.

The PPO is calculated by the formula:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

600 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

PPO = (fast moving average – slow moving average) / slow moving average

Sometimes an additional “signal” (trigger) line is then calculated from the PPO. The signal line is a
moving average of the PPO. An additional histogram may also be calculated. The histogram is
calculated as the difference between the PPO and its signal line.

Interpretation

The Percentage Price Oscillator is widely used as a trend-following indicator and tends to work most
effectively when measuring wide-swinging market movements. There are three basic techniques for using
the PPO to generate trading signals.

PPO / Zero-Level Crossover: When the PPO crosses above zero a buy signal is given. Alternatively,
when the PPO crosses below zero a sell signal is given.

PPO / Signal line Crossover: A buy signal occurs when the PPO crosses above its Signal line and a sell
signal occurs when the PP crosses below its Signal line.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the PPO and price can prove to be very effective in
identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are several types
of divergences:

Classic Divergence (aka: Regular Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the PPO
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the PPO

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 601

Hidden Divergence (aka: Reverse, Continuation, or Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in PPO and higher lows in price

Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in PPO and lower highs in price

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Percentage Price Oscillator (PPO)

Function Name Alias: vt_PPO
Label Mask:
%% Price Osc. (%FmaPeriods%,%SmaPeriods%,%SigMaPeriods%)
PPO = %PPO%
Signal = %PPO_Signal%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: % Price Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: FmaPrice
Display Name: Fast MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: FmaPeriods
Display Name: Fast MA Periods
Default: 9
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: FmaType
Display Name: Fast MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: SmaPrice
Display Name: Slow MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: SmaPeriods

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

602 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Display Name: Slow MA Periods

Default: 26
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: SmaType
Display Name: Slow MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: SigMaPeriods
Display Name: Signal MA Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 9
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: SigMaType
Display Name: Signal MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: PPO
Name: (PPO)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: PPO_Signal
Name: (Signal)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: PPO_Histogram
Name: (Histogram)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 603

Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

FastMa:= Mov(FmaPrice,FmaPeriods,FmaType);
SlowMa:= Mov(SmaPrice,SmaPeriods,SmaType);
PPO:= (FastMa-SlowMa)/SlowMa;
PPO_Signal:= Mov(PPO,SigMaPeriods,SigMaType);
PPO_Histogram:= PPO - PPO_Signal;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Percentage Price Oscillator indicator.

6.76 Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle

Overview

Pivot points consist of a central pivot level surrounded by three support levels below it and three
resistance levels above it. Pivot points were originally used by floor traders on equity and futures
exchanges because they provided a quick way for those traders to get a general idea of how the market
was moving during the course of the day using only a few simple calculations. However, over time pivot
points have also proved exceptionally useful in other markets as well.

One of the reasons that pivot points are now so popular is because they are considered a "leading" (or
predictive) indicator rather than a lagging indicator. All that is required to calculate the pivot points for the
upcoming (current) trading day is the previous day's high, low, and close prices. For 24-hour markets
like Forex, each broker determines when the trading day closes for their clients; however, 4:00PM ET or
5:00PM ET are common as a daily closing time (except on Friday when some brok ers may end trading
earlier).

The 24-hour cycle pivot points in this indicator are calculated according to the following formulas:

Pivot Point for Current 24-Hour Cycle = (High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) + Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) +
Close(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)) / 3

The central pivot point can then be used to calculate the support and resistance levels as follows:

Resistance 1 = (2 * Pivot Point) - Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)

Support 1 = (2 * Pivot Point) - High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)

Resistance 2 = (Pivot Point - Support 1) + Resistance 1

Support 2 = Pivot Point - (Resistance 1 - Support 1)

Resistance 3 = (Pivot Point - Support 2) + Resistance 2

Support 3 = Pivot Point - (Resistance 2 - Support 2)

VT Trader also includes support and resistance mid-levels that are calculated as follows:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

604 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Resistance Mid-Level 1 = (Pivot Point + Resistance 1) / 2

Support Mid-Level 1 = (Pivot Point + Support 1) / 2

Resistance Mid-Level 2 = (Resistance 1 + Resistance 2) / 2

Support Mid-Level 2 = (Support 1 + Support 2) / 2

Resistance Mid-Level 3 = (Resistance 2 + Resistance 3) / 2

Support Mid-Level 3 = (Support 2 + Support 3) / 2

Interpretation

Pivot point levels can be used in many different ways. Here are a few of the most common methods for
utilizing them.

Trend Direction Determined by Pivot Point: Combined with other technical analysis techniques such as
overbought/oversold oscillators, volatility measurements, etc., the central pivot point may be useful in
determining the general trending direction of the market. Trades are only taken in the direction of the
trend. Buy trades occur only when the price is above the central pivot point and sell trades occur only
when the price is below the central pivot point.

Price Breakouts: When trading price breakouts, a buy signal occurs when the price breaks up through
the central pivot point or one of the resistance levels (typically Resistance 1). A sell signal occurs when
price breaks down through the central pivot point or one of the support levels (typically Support 1).

Price Reversals: When trading price reversals, a buy signal occurs when the price moves towards a
support level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and
moves back in the opposite direction. A sell signal occurs when the price moves towards a resistance

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 605

level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and moves
back in the opposite direction.

Stop loss and/or Limit Profit Values Determined by Support/Resistance Levels: The central pivot point
and its support and resistance levels may be potentially helpful in determining suitable stop loss and/or
limit profit placements. For example, if trading a long breakout above the Resistance 1 level it may be
reasonable to position a stop loss order just below the central pivot point and one or more limit profit(s)
orders at the Resistance 2 and/or Resistance 3 levels.

Implementation

This Pivot Points indicator calculates the pivot points using a 24-hour cycle that resets at the specified
predetermined time each day. The Calculation Time (Hour/Minute) is defined using a 24-hour clock (AM/
PM is not used). For example, setting the Calculation Hour equal to 9 and the Calculation Minute to 00
recalculates the pivot points each day at 9:00 AM while setting the Calculation Hour equal to 17 and the
Calculation Minute to 30 recalculates the pivot points each day at 5:30PM.

Please Note: This indicator will not function properly on the following chart intervals: Tick , Daily, Week ly,
or Monthly. It is not possible for VT Trader to load enough tick data into a Tick chart interval for the
indicator to properly calculate the pivot points and the calculations performed are not designed (nor can
they be reprogrammed) to function in the Daily, Week ly, or Monthly chart intervals.

If the pivot points are not shown in the chart window once the indicator is attached, you may need to
increase the number of bars that VT Trader loads into its charts. As minimum amounts, VT Trader
should load 3,000+ bars into its charts if you intend to attach this Pivot Points indicator to any 1-Minute
interval charts or 750+ bars if you intend to attach it to any 5-Minute or higher intraday interval charts.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle

Function Name Alias: vt_PPI
Label Mask:
Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle (Calculation Time: %CalculationHour%:%
CalculationMinute%)
PP = %PivotPoint%, R1 = %Resistance1%, R2 = %Resistance2%, R3 = %
Resistance3%
S1 = %Support1%, S2 = %Support2%, S3 = %Support3%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: CalculationHour

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

606 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Display Name: Calculation Hour

Type: integer
Default: 17

[New] button...
Name: CalculationMinute
Display Name: Calculation Minute
Type: integer
Default: 0

[New] button...
Name: ShowMidLevels
Display Name: Show Mid-Levels?
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
No
Yes
... then, click [OK] button
Default: No

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance3
Name: (R3)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel3
Name: (R3 ML)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance2
Name: (R2)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel2
Name: (R2 ML)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance1

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 607

Name: (R1)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel1
Name: (R1 ML)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: PivotPoint
Name: (Pivot Point)
Line Color: black
Line Width: very thick
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel1
Name: (S1 ML)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Support1
Name: (S1)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel2
Name: (S2 ML)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Support2
Name: (S2)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel3
Name: (S3 ML)
Line Color: light red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

608 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Var Name: Support3
Name: (S3)
Line Color: light red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_Hour:= Hour();
_Minute:= Minute();

CalculationTime:= Cross((_Hour=CalculationHour AND

_Minute>=CalculationMinute),0.5);

CalculateLookBackPeriods:= Barssince(CalculationTime=1);
LookBackPeriods:= valuewhen(1, Cross(0.5,CalculateLookBackperiods), ref
(CalculateLookBackPeriods,-1));

_H:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(HHV(H,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_L:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(LLV(L,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_C:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,C);

PivotPoint:= (_H+_L+_C)/3;

Resistance1:= 2 * PivotPoint - _L;

Resistance2:= PivotPoint + (_H-_L);
Resistance3:= 2 * PivotPoint + (_H-2*_L);

Support1:= 2 * PivotPoint - _H;

Support2:= PivotPoint - (_H-_L);
Support3:= 2 * PivotPoint - (2*_H-_L);

ResistanceMidLevel1:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (PivotPoint+Resistance1)/2,

null);
ResistanceMidLevel2:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Resistance1+Resistance2)/2,
null);
ResistanceMidLevel3:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Resistance2+Resistance3)/2,
null);

SupportMidLevel1:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (PivotPoint+Support1)/2, null);

SupportMidLevel2:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Support1+Support2)/2, null);
SupportMidLevel3:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Support2+Support3)/2, null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 609

6.77 Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios

Overview

Pivot points consist of a central pivot level surrounded by three support levels below it and three
resistance levels above it. This pivot points indicator replaces the traditional formulas used to calculate
the support and resistance levels with Fibonacci-based formulas. Pivot points (calculated using the
traditional formulas) were originally used by floor traders on equity and futures exchanges because they
provided a quick way for those traders to get a general idea of how the market was moving during the
course of the day using only a few simple calculations. However, over time pivot points have also proved
exceptionally useful in other markets as well.

One of the reasons that pivot points are now so popular is because they are considered a "leading" (or
predictive) indicator rather than a lagging indicator. All that is required to calculate the pivot points for the
upcoming (current) trading day is the previous day's high, low, and close prices. For 24-hour markets
like Forex, each broker determines when the trading day closes for their clients; however, 4:00PM ET or
5:00PM ET are common as a daily closing time (except on Friday when some brok ers may end trading
earlier).

The 24-hour cycle pivot points in this indicator are calculated according to the following formulas:

Pivot Point for Current 24-Hour Cycle = (High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) + Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) +
Close(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)) / 3

With the central pivot point level already calculated, the support and resistance levels are determined by
calculating the previous cycle's high/low price range along with several Fibonacci-based percentages of
that price range and then adding those % values to (for resistance levels) or subtracting those % values
from (for support levels) the central pivot point. The support levels' and resistance levels' formulas are as
follows:

Resistance 1 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) - Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)) * 0.382)
Support 1 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) - Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)) * 0.382)

Resistance 2 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) - Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)) * 0.618)
Support 2 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) - Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)) * 0.618)

Resistance 3 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) - Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)) * 1.000)
Support 3 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous 24-Hour Cycle) - Low(Previous 24-Hour Cycle)) * 1.000)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

610 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Pivot point levels can be used in many different ways. Here are a few of the most common methods for
utilizing them.

Trend Direction Determined by Pivot Point: Combined with other technical analysis techniques such as
overbought/oversold oscillators, volatility measurements, etc., the central pivot point may be useful in
determining the general trending direction of the market. Trades are only taken in the direction of the
trend. Buy trades occur only when the price is above the central pivot point and sell trades occur only
when the price is below the central pivot point.

Price Breakouts: When trading price breakouts, a buy signal occurs when the price breaks up through
the central pivot point or one of the resistance levels (typically Resistance 1). A sell signal occurs when
price breaks down through the central pivot point or one of the support levels (typically Support 1).

Price Reversals: When trading price reversals, a buy signal occurs when the price moves towards a
support level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and
moves back in the opposite direction. A sell signal occurs when the price moves towards a resistance
level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and moves
back in the opposite direction.

Stop loss and/or Limit Profit Values Determined by Support/Resistance Levels: The central pivot point
and its support and resistance levels may be potentially helpful in determining suitable stop loss and/or
limit profit placements. For example, if trading a long breakout above the Resistance 1 level it may be
reasonable to position a stop loss order just below the central pivot point and one or more limit profit(s)
orders at the Resistance 2 and/or Resistance 3 levels.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 611

Implementation

This Pivot Points indicator calculates the pivot points using a 24-hour cycle that resets at the specified
predetermined time each day. The Calculation Time (Hour/Minute) is defined using a 24-hour clock (AM/
PM is not used). For example, setting the Calculation Hour equal to 9 and the Calculation Minute to 00
recalculates the pivot points each day at 9:00 AM while setting the Calculation Hour equal to 17 and the
Calculation Minute to 30 recalculates the pivot points each day at 5:30PM.

Please Note: This indicator will not function properly on the following chart intervals: Tick , Daily, Week ly,
or Monthly. It is not possible for VT Trader to load enough tick data into a Tick chart interval for the
indicator to properly calculate the pivot points and the calculations performed are not designed (nor can
they be reprogrammed) to function in the Daily, Week ly, or Monthly chart intervals.

If the pivot points are not shown in the chart window once the indicator is attached, you may need to
increase the number of bars that VT Trader loads into its charts. As minimum amounts, VT Trader
should load 3,000+ bars into its charts if you intend to attach this Pivot Points indicator to any 1-Minute
interval charts or 750+ bars if you intend to attach it to any 5-Minute or higher intraday interval charts.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios

Function Name Alias: vt_PPIFibs
Label Mask:
Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios (Calculation Time: %
CalculationHour%:%CalculationMinute%)
PP = %PivotPoint%, R1 = %Resistance1%, R2 = %Resistance2%, R3 = %
Resistance3%
S1 = %Support1%, S2 = %Support2%, S3 = %Support3%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle - Fibonacci

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: CalculationHour
Display Name: Calculation Hour
Type: integer
Default: 17

[New] button...
Name: CalculationMinute
Display Name: Calculation Minute
Type: integer
Default: 0

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

612 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance3
Name: (R3)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance2
Name: (R2)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance1
Name: (R1)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: PivotPoint
Name: (Pivot Point)
Line Color: black
Line Width: very thick
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support1
Name: (S1)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support2
Name: (S2)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support3
Name: (S3)
Line Color: light red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 613

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_Hour:= Hour();
_Minute:= Minute();

CalculationTime:= Cross((_Hour=CalculationHour AND

_Minute>=CalculationMinute),0.5);

CalculateLookBackPeriods:= Barssince(CalculationTime=1);
LookBackPeriods:= valuewhen(1, Cross(0.5,CalculateLookBackperiods), ref
(CalculateLookBackPeriods,-1));

_H:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(HHV(H,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_L:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(LLV(L,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_C:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,C);

PivotPoint:= (_H+_L+_C)/3;

Resistance1:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 0.382);

Resistance2:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 0.618);
Resistance3:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 1.000);

Support1:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 0.382);

Support2:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 0.618);
Support3:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 1.000);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Pivot Points - 24-Hour Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios indicator.

6.78 Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle

Overview

Pivot points consist of a central pivot level surrounded by three support levels below it and three
resistance levels above it. Pivot points were originally used by floor traders on equity and futures
exchanges because they provided a quick way for those traders to get a general idea of how the market
was moving during the course of the day using only a few simple calculations. However, over time pivot
points have also proved exceptionally useful in other markets as well.

One of the reasons that pivot points are now so popular is because they are considered a "leading" (or
predictive) indicator rather than a lagging indicator. All that is required to calculate the pivot points for the
upcoming (current) trading month is the previous month's high, low, and close prices.

The monthly cycle pivot points in this indicator are calculated according to the following formulas:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

614 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Pivot Point for Current Monthly Cycle = (High(Previous Monthly Cycle) + Low(Previous Monthly Cycle) +
Close(Previous Monthly Cycle)) / 3

The central pivot point can then be used to calculate the support and resistance levels as follows:

Resistance 1 = (2 * Pivot Point) - Low(Previous Monthly Cycle)

Support 1 = (2 * Pivot Point) - High(Previous Monthly Cycle)

Resistance 2 = (Pivot Point - Support 1) + Resistance 1

Support 2 = Pivot Point - (Resistance 1 - Support 1)

Resistance 3 = (Pivot Point - Support 2) + Resistance 2

Support 3 = Pivot Point - (Resistance 2 - Support 2)

VT Trader also includes support and resistance mid-levels that are calculated as follows:

Resistance Mid-Level 1 = (Pivot Point + Resistance 1) / 2

Support Mid-Level 1 = (Pivot Point + Support 1) / 2

Resistance Mid-Level 2 = (Resistance 1 + Resistance 2) / 2

Support Mid-Level 2 = (Support 1 + Support 2) / 2

Resistance Mid-Level 3 = (Resistance 2 + Resistance 3) / 2

Support Mid-Level 3 = (Support 2 + Support 3) / 2

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 615

Pivot point levels can be used in many different ways. Here are a few of the most common methods for
utilizing them.

Trend Direction Determined by Pivot Point: Combined with other technical analysis techniques such as
overbought/oversold oscillators, volatility measurements, etc., the central pivot point may be useful in
determining the general trending direction of the market. Trades are only taken in the direction of the
trend. Buy trades occur only when the price is above the central pivot point and sell trades occur only
when the price is below the central pivot point.

Price Breakouts: When trading price breakouts, a buy signal occurs when the price breaks up through
the central pivot point or one of the resistance levels (typically Resistance 1). A sell signal occurs when
price breaks down through the central pivot point or one of the support levels (typically Support 1).

Price Reversals: When trading price reversals, a buy signal occurs when the price moves towards a
support level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and
moves back in the opposite direction. A sell signal occurs when the price moves towards a resistance
level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and moves
back in the opposite direction.

Stop loss and/or Limit Profit Values Determined by Support/Resistance Levels: The central pivot point
and its support and resistance levels may be potentially helpful in determining suitable stop loss and/or
limit profit placements. For example, if trading a long breakout above the Resistance 1 level it may be
reasonable to position a stop loss order just below the central pivot point and one or more limit profit(s)
orders at the Resistance 2 and/or Resistance 3 levels.

Implementation

This Pivot Points indicator calculates the pivot points using a monthly cycle that resets at 12:00 AM on
the first day of each month.

Please Note: This indicator will not function properly on any chart interval lower than the 30-Minute chart
interval. It is not possible for VT Trader to load enough data into those lower chart intervals for the
indicator to properly calculate the pivot points. This indicator will also not function properly on a Monthly
chart interval. The calculations performed are not designed (nor can they be reprogrammed) to function in
the Monthly chart interval.

If the pivot points are not shown in the chart window once the indicator is attached, you may need to
increase the number of bars that VT Trader loads into its charts. As minimum amounts, VT Trader
should load 5,000+ bars into its charts if you intend to attach this Pivot Points indicator to any 30-Minute
or higher interval charts.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

616 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Function Name Alias: vt_PPIMonthly

Label Mask:
Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle (Calculation Time: 12:00AM, 1st of
month)
PP = %PivotPoint%, R1 = %Resistance1%, R2 = %Resistance2%, R3 = %
Resistance3%
S1 = %Support1%, S2 = %Support2%, S3 = %Support3%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: ShowMidLevels
Display Name: Show Mid-Levels?
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
No
Yes
... then, click [OK] button
Default: No

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance3
Name: (R3)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel3
Name: (R3 ML)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance2
Name: (R2)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel2
Name: (R2 ML)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 617

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance1
Name: (R1)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel1
Name: (R1 ML)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: PivotPoint
Name: (Pivot Point)
Line Color: black
Line Width: very thick
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel1
Name: (S1 ML)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Support1
Name: (S1)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel2
Name: (S2 ML)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Support2
Name: (S2)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel3
Name: (S3 ML)
Line Color: light red

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

618 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Line Width: thin

Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Support3
Name: (S3)
Line Color: light red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_Hour:= Hour();
_Minute:= Minute();

CalculationTime:= Cross(Month()<>ref(Month,-1),0.5);

CalculateLookBackPeriods:= Barssince(CalculationTime=1);
LookBackPeriods:= valuewhen(1, Cross(0.5,CalculateLookBackperiods), ref
(CalculateLookBackPeriods,-1));

_H:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(HHV(H,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_L:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(LLV(L,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_C:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,C);

PivotPoint:= (_H+_L+_C)/3;

Resistance1:= 2 * PivotPoint - _L;

Resistance2:= PivotPoint + (_H-_L);
Resistance3:= 2 * PivotPoint + (_H-2*_L);

Support1:= 2 * PivotPoint - _H;

Support2:= PivotPoint - (_H-_L);
Support3:= 2 * PivotPoint - (2*_H-_L);

ResistanceMidLevel1:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (PivotPoint+Resistance1)/2,

null);
ResistanceMidLevel2:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Resistance1+Resistance2)/2,
null);
ResistanceMidLevel3:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Resistance2+Resistance3)/2,
null);

SupportMidLevel1:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (PivotPoint+Support1)/2, null);

SupportMidLevel2:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Support1+Support2)/2, null);
SupportMidLevel3:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Support2+Support3)/2, null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 619

6.79 Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios

Overview

Pivot points consist of a central pivot level surrounded by three support levels below it and three
resistance levels above it. This pivot points indicator replaces the traditional formulas used to calculate
the support and resistance levels with Fibonacci-based formulas. Pivot points (calculated using the
traditional formulas) were originally used by floor traders on equity and futures exchanges because they
provided a quick way for those traders to get a general idea of how the market was moving during the
course of the day using only a few simple calculations. However, over time pivot points have also proved
exceptionally useful in other markets as well.

One of the reasons that pivot points are now so popular is because they are considered a "leading" (or
predictive) indicator rather than a lagging indicator. All that is required to calculate the pivot points for the
upcoming (current) trading month is the previous month's high, low, and close prices.

The monthly cycle pivot points in this indicator are calculated according to the following formulas:

Pivot Point for Current Monthly Cycle = (High(Previous Monthly Cycle) + Low(Previous Monthly Cycle) +
Close(Previous Monthly Cycle)) / 3

With the central pivot point level already calculated, the support and resistance levels are determined by
calculating the previous cycle's high/low price range along with several Fibonacci-based percentages of
that price range and then adding those % values to (for resistance levels) or subtracting those % values
from (for support levels) the central pivot point. The support levels' and resistance levels' formulas are as
follows:

Resistance 1 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous Monthly Cycle) - Low(Previous Monthly Cycle)) * 0.382)
Support 1 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous Monthly Cycle) - Low(Previous Monthly Cycle)) * 0.382)

Resistance 2 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous Monthly Cycle) - Low(Previous Monthly Cycle)) * 0.618)
Support 2 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous Monthly Cycle) - Low(Previous Monthly Cycle)) * 0.618)

Resistance 3 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous Monthly Cycle) - Low(Previous Monthly Cycle)) * 1.000)
Support 3 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous Monthly Cycle) - Low(Previous Monthly Cycle)) * 1.000)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

620 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Pivot point levels can be used in many different ways. Here are a few of the most common methods for
utilizing them.

Trend Direction Determined by Pivot Point: Combined with other technical analysis techniques such as
overbought/oversold oscillators, volatility measurements, etc., the central pivot point may be useful in
determining the general trending direction of the market. Trades are only taken in the direction of the
trend. Buy trades occur only when the price is above the central pivot point and sell trades occur only
when the price is below the central pivot point.

Price Breakouts: When trading price breakouts, a buy signal occurs when the price breaks up through
the central pivot point or one of the resistance levels (typically Resistance 1). A sell signal occurs when
price breaks down through the central pivot point or one of the support levels (typically Support 1).

Price Reversals: When trading price reversals, a buy signal occurs when the price moves towards a
support level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and
moves back in the opposite direction. A sell signal occurs when the price moves towards a resistance
level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and moves
back in the opposite direction.

Stop loss and/or Limit Profit Values Determined by Support/Resistance Levels: The central pivot point
and its support and resistance levels may be potentially helpful in determining suitable stop loss and/or
limit profit placements. For example, if trading a long breakout above the Resistance 1 level it may be
reasonable to position a stop loss order just below the central pivot point and one or more limit profit(s)
orders at the Resistance 2 and/or Resistance 3 levels.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 621

Implementation

This Pivot Points indicator calculates the pivot points using a monthly cycle that resets at 12:00 AM on
the first day of each month.

Please Note: This indicator will not function properly on any chart interval lower than the 30-Minute chart
interval. It is not possible for VT Trader to load enough data into those lower chart intervals for the
indicator to properly calculate the pivot points. This indicator will also not function properly on a Monthly
chart interval. The calculations performed are not designed (nor can they be reprogrammed) to function in
the Monthly chart interval.

If the pivot points are not shown in the chart window once the indicator is attached, you may need to
increase the number of bars that VT Trader loads into its charts. As minimum amounts, VT Trader
should load 5,000+ bars into its charts if you intend to attach this Pivot Points indicator to any 30-Minute
or higher interval charts.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios

Function Name Alias: vt_PPIMonthlyFibs
Label Mask:
Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios (Calculation Time:
12:00AM, 1st of month)
PP = %PivotPoint%, R1 = %Resistance1%, R2 = %Resistance2%, R3 = %
Resistance3%
S1 = %Support1%, S2 = %Support2%, S3 = %Support3%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle - Fibonacci

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no input variables.

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance3
Name: (R3)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance2

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

622 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: (R2)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance1
Name: (R1)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: PivotPoint
Name: (Pivot Point)
Line Color: black
Line Width: very thick
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support1
Name: (S1)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support2
Name: (S2)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support3
Name: (S3)
Line Color: light red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_Hour:= Hour();
_Minute:= Minute();

CalculationTime:= Cross(Month()<>ref(Month,-1),0.5);

CalculateLookBackPeriods:= Barssince(CalculationTime=1);
LookBackPeriods:= valuewhen(1, Cross(0.5,CalculateLookBackperiods), ref

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 623

(CalculateLookBackPeriods,-1));

_H:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(HHV(H,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_L:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(LLV(L,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_C:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,C);

PivotPoint:= (_H+_L+_C)/3;

Resistance1:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 0.382);

Resistance2:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 0.618);
Resistance3:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 1.000);

Support1:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 0.382);

Support2:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 0.618);
Support3:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 1.000);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Pivot Points - Monthly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios indicator.

6.80 Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle

Overview

Pivot points consist of a central pivot level surrounded by three support levels below it and three
resistance levels above it. Pivot points were originally used by floor traders on equity and futures
exchanges because they provided a quick way for those traders to get a general idea of how the market
was moving during the course of the day using only a few simple calculations. However, over time pivot
points have also proved exceptionally useful in other markets as well.

One of the reasons that pivot points are now so popular is because they are considered a "leading" (or
predictive) indicator rather than a lagging indicator. All that is required to calculate the pivot points for the
upcoming (current) trading week is the previous week's high, low, and close prices. For 24-hour markets
like Forex, each broker determines when the trading week closes for their clients; however, Friday at
4:00PM ET or 5:00PM ET is common as a weekly closing day/time. 12:00AM ET on Monday is also a
common weekly closing day/time.

The weekly cycle pivot points in this indicator are calculated according to the following formulas:

Pivot Point for Current Weekly Cycle = (High(Previous Weekly Cycle) + Low(Previous Weekly Cycle) +
Close(Previous Weekly Cycle)) / 3

The central pivot point can then be used to calculate the support and resistance levels as follows:

Resistance 1 = (2 * Pivot Point) - Low(Previous Weekly Cycle)

Support 1 = (2 * Pivot Point) - High(Previous Weekly Cycle)

Resistance 2 = (Pivot Point - Support 1) + Resistance 1

Support 2 = Pivot Point - (Resistance 1 - Support 1)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

624 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Resistance 3 = (Pivot Point - Support 2) + Resistance 2

Support 3 = Pivot Point - (Resistance 2 - Support 2)

VT Trader also includes support and resistance mid-levels that are calculated as follows:

Resistance Mid-Level 1 = (Pivot Point + Resistance 1) / 2

Support Mid-Level 1 = (Pivot Point + Support 1) / 2

Resistance Mid-Level 2 = (Resistance 1 + Resistance 2) / 2

Support Mid-Level 2 = (Support 1 + Support 2) / 2

Resistance Mid-Level 3 = (Resistance 2 + Resistance 3) / 2

Support Mid-Level 3 = (Support 2 + Support 3) / 2

Interpretation

Pivot point levels can be used in many different ways. Here are a few of the most common methods for
utilizing them.

Trend Direction Determined by Pivot Point: Combined with other technical analysis techniques such as
overbought/oversold oscillators, volatility measurements, etc., the central pivot point may be useful in
determining the general trending direction of the market. Trades are only taken in the direction of the
trend. Buy trades occur only when the price is above the central pivot point and sell trades occur only
when the price is below the central pivot point.

Price Breakouts: When trading price breakouts, a buy signal occurs when the price breaks up through

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 625

the central pivot point or one of the resistance levels (typically Resistance 1). A sell signal occurs when
price breaks down through the central pivot point or one of the support levels (typically Support 1).

Price Reversals: When trading price reversals, a buy signal occurs when the price moves towards a
support level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and
moves back in the opposite direction. A sell signal occurs when the price moves towards a resistance
level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and moves
back in the opposite direction.

Stop loss and/or Limit Profit Values Determined by Support/Resistance Levels: The central pivot point
and its support and resistance levels may be potentially helpful in determining suitable stop loss and/or
limit profit placements. For example, if trading a long breakout above the Resistance 1 level it may be
reasonable to position a stop loss order just below the central pivot point and one or more limit profit(s)
orders at the Resistance 2 and/or Resistance 3 levels.

Implementation

This Pivot Points indicator calculates the pivot points using a weekly cycle that resets at the specified
predetermined day of the week and time of that day. The Calculation Time (Hour/Minute) is defined using
a 24-hour clock (AM/PM is not used). For example, setting the Calculation Hour equal to 9 and the
Calculation Minute to 00 recalculates the pivot points each day at 9:00 AM while setting the Calculation
Hour equal to 17 and the Calculation Minute to 30 recalculates the pivot points on the specified day at
5:30PM.

Please Note: This indicator will not function properly on the following chart intervals: Tick , 1-Minute,
Week ly, or Monthly. It is not possible for VT Trader to load enough data into a Tick or 1-Minute chart
interval for the indicator to properly calculate the pivot points and the calculations performed are not
designed (nor can they be reprogrammed) to function in the Week ly or Monthly chart intervals.

If the pivot points are not shown in the chart window once the indicator is attached, you may need to
increase the number of bars that VT Trader loads into its charts. As minimum amounts, VT Trader
should load 3,500+ bars into its charts if you intend to attach this Pivot Points indicator to any 5-Minute
interval charts or 2,000+ bars if you intend to attach it to any 10-Minute or higher interval charts.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle

Function Name Alias: vt_PPIWeekly
Label Mask:
Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle (Calculation Time: %CalculationDay%, %
CalculationHour%:%CalculationMinute%)
PP = %PivotPoint%, R1 = %Resistance1%, R2 = %Resistance2%, R3 = %
Resistance3%
S1 = %Support1%, S2 = %Support2%, S3 = %Support3%

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

626 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Placement: Price Frame

Data Inspection Alias: Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: CalculationDay
Display Name: Calculation Day
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Monday

[New] button...
Name: CalculationHour
Display Name: Calculation Hour
Type: integer
Default: 0

[New] button...
Name: CalculationMinute
Display Name: Calculation Minute
Type: integer
Default: 0

[New] button...
Name: ShowMidLevels
Display Name: Show Mid-Levels?
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
No
Yes
... then, click [OK] button
Default: No

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance3
Name: (R3)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 627

Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel3

Name: (R3 ML)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance2
Name: (R2)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel2
Name: (R2 ML)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance1
Name: (R1)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ResistanceMidLevel1
Name: (R1 ML)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: PivotPoint
Name: (Pivot Point)
Line Color: black
Line Width: very thick
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel1
Name: (S1 ML)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Support1
Name: (S1)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: slightly thicker

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

628 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel2
Name: (S2 ML)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Support2
Name: (S2)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SupportMidLevel3
Name: (S3 ML)
Line Color: light red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: Support3
Name: (S3)
Line Color: light red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_DayOfWeek:= DayOfWeek();
_Hour:= Hour();
_Minute:= Minute();

CalculationTime:= Cross((_DayOfWeek=CalculationDay AND

_Hour>=CalculationHour AND _Minute>=CalculationMinute),0.5);

CalculateLookBackPeriods:= Barssince(CalculationTime=1);
LookBackPeriods:= valuewhen(1, Cross(0.5,CalculateLookBackperiods), ref
(CalculateLookBackPeriods,-1));

_H:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(HHV(H,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_L:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(LLV(L,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_C:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,C);

PivotPoint:= (_H+_L+_C)/3;

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 629

Resistance1:= 2 * PivotPoint - _L;

Resistance2:= PivotPoint + (_H-_L);
Resistance3:= 2 * PivotPoint + (_H-2*_L);

Support1:= 2 * PivotPoint - _H;

Support2:= PivotPoint - (_H-_L);
Support3:= 2 * PivotPoint - (2*_H-_L);

ResistanceMidLevel1:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (PivotPoint+Resistance1)/2,

null);
ResistanceMidLevel2:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Resistance1+Resistance2)/2,
null);
ResistanceMidLevel3:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Resistance2+Resistance3)/2,
null);

SupportMidLevel1:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (PivotPoint+Support1)/2, null);

SupportMidLevel2:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Support1+Support2)/2, null);
SupportMidLevel3:= if(ShowMidLevels=1, (Support2+Support3)/2, null);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle indicator.

6.81 Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios

Overview

Pivot points consist of a central pivot level surrounded by three support levels below it and three
resistance levels above it. Pivot points were originally used by floor traders on equity and futures
exchanges because they provided a quick way for those traders to get a general idea of how the market
was moving during the course of the day using only a few simple calculations. However, over time pivot
points have also proved exceptionally useful in other markets as well.

One of the reasons that pivot points are now so popular is because they are considered a "leading" (or
predictive) indicator rather than a lagging indicator. All that is required to calculate the pivot points for the
upcoming (current) trading week is the previous week's high, low, and close prices. For 24-hour markets
like Forex, each broker determines when the trading week closes for their clients; however, Friday at
4:00PM ET or 5:00PM ET is common as a weekly closing day/time. 12:00AM ET on Monday is also a
common weekly closing day/time.

The weekly cycle pivot points in this indicator are calculated according to the following formulas:

Pivot Point for Current Weekly Cycle = (High(Previous Weekly Cycle) + Low(Previous Weekly Cycle) +
Close(Previous Weekly Cycle)) / 3

With the central pivot point level already calculated, the support and resistance levels are determined by
calculating the previous cycle's high/low price range along with several Fibonacci-based percentages of
that price range and then adding those % values to (for resistance levels) or subtracting those % values
from (for support levels) the central pivot point. The support levels' and resistance levels' formulas are as

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

630 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

follows:

Resistance 1 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous Weekly Cycle) - Low(Previous Weekly Cycle)) * 0.382)
Support 1 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous Weekly Cycle) - Low(Previous Weekly Cycle)) * 0.382)

Resistance 2 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous Weekly Cycle) - Low(Previous Weekly Cycle)) * 0.618)
Support 2 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous Weekly Cycle) - Low(Previous Weekly Cycle)) * 0.618)

Resistance 3 = Pivot Point + ((High(Previous Weekly Cycle) - Low(Previous Weekly Cycle)) * 1.000)
Support 3 = Pivot Point - ((High(Previous Weekly Cycle) - Low(Previous Weekly Cycle)) * 1.000)

Interpretation

Pivot point levels can be used in many different ways. Here are a few of the most common methods for
utilizing them.

Trend Direction Determined by Pivot Point: Combined with other technical analysis techniques such as
overbought/oversold oscillators, volatility measurements, etc., the central pivot point may be useful in
determining the general trending direction of the market. Trades are only taken in the direction of the
trend. Buy trades occur only when the price is above the central pivot point and sell trades occur only
when the price is below the central pivot point.

Price Breakouts: When trading price breakouts, a buy signal occurs when the price breaks up through
the central pivot point or one of the resistance levels (typically Resistance 1). A sell signal occurs when
price breaks down through the central pivot point or one of the support levels (typically Support 1).

Price Reversals: When trading price reversals, a buy signal occurs when the price moves towards a

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 631

support level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and
moves back in the opposite direction. A sell signal occurs when the price moves towards a resistance
level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and moves
back in the opposite direction.

Stop loss and/or Limit Profit Values Determined by Support/Resistance Levels: The central pivot point
and its support and resistance levels may be potentially helpful in determining suitable stop loss and/or
limit profit placements. For example, if trading a long breakout above the Resistance 1 level it may be
reasonable to position a stop loss order just below the central pivot point and one or more limit profit(s)
orders at the Resistance 2 and/or Resistance 3 levels.

Implementation

This Pivot Points indicator calculates the pivot points using a weekly cycle that resets at the specified
predetermined day of the week and time of that day. The Calculation Time (Hour/Minute) is defined using
a 24-hour clock (AM/PM is not used). For example, setting the Calculation Hour equal to 9 and the
Calculation Minute to 00 recalculates the pivot points each day at 9:00 AM while setting the Calculation
Hour equal to 17 and the Calculation Minute to 30 recalculates the pivot points on the specified day at
5:30PM.

Please Note: This indicator will not function properly on the following chart intervals: Tick , 1-Minute,
Week ly, or Monthly. It is not possible for VT Trader to load enough data into a Tick or 1-Minute chart
interval for the indicator to properly calculate the pivot points and the calculations performed are not
designed (nor can they be reprogrammed) to function in the Week ly or Monthly chart intervals.

If the pivot points are not shown in the chart window once the indicator is attached, you may need to
increase the number of bars that VT Trader loads into its charts. As minimum amounts, VT Trader
should load 3,500+ bars into its charts if you intend to attach this Pivot Points indicator to any 5-Minute
interval charts or 2,000+ bars if you intend to attach it to any 10-Minute or higher interval charts.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios

Function Name Alias: vt_PPIWeeklyFibs
Label Mask:
Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios (Calculation Time: %
CalculationDay%, %CalculationHour%:%CalculationMinute%)
PP = %PivotPoint%, R1 = %Resistance1%, R2 = %Resistance2%, R3 = %
Resistance3%
S1 = %Support1%, S2 = %Support2%, S3 = %Support3%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle - Fibonacci

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

632 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: CalculationDay
Display Name: Calculation Day
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Monday

[New] button...
Name: CalculationHour
Display Name: Calculation Hour
Type: integer
Default: 0

[New] button...
Name: CalculationMinute
Display Name: Calculation Minute
Type: integer
Default: 0

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance3
Name: (R3)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance2
Name: (R2)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Resistance1
Name: (R1)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: PivotPoint

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 633

Name: (Pivot Point)

Line Color: black
Line Width: very thick
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support1
Name: (S1)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support2
Name: (S2)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Support3
Name: (S3)
Line Color: light red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_DayOfWeek:= DayOfWeek();
_Hour:= Hour();
_Minute:= Minute();

CalculationTime:= Cross((_DayOfWeek=CalculationDay AND

_Hour>=CalculationHour AND _Minute>=CalculationMinute),0.5);

CalculateLookBackPeriods:= Barssince(CalculationTime=1);
LookBackPeriods:= valuewhen(1, Cross(0.5,CalculateLookBackperiods), ref
(CalculateLookBackPeriods,-1));

_H:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(HHV(H,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_L:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,ref(LLV(L,LookBackPeriods),-1));
_C:= valuewhen(1,CalculationTime=1,C);

PivotPoint:= (_H+_L+_C)/3;

Resistance1:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 0.382);

Resistance2:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 0.618);
Resistance3:= PivotPoint + ((_H-_L) * 1.000);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 634 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Support1:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 0.382);

Support2:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 0.618);
Support3:= PivotPoint - ((_H-_L) * 1.000);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Pivot Points - Weekly Cycle - Fibonacci Ratios indicator.

6.82 Polarized Fractal Efficiency

Overview

The Polarized Fractal Efficiency indicator (PFE) was developed by Hans Hannula. It was introduced in
the January 1994 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine. The PFE is used
to gauge how trendy or congested price action is.

Interpretation

PFE readings above zero mean that the trend is up; the higher the value the more efficient (trendy) the
upward movement is. PFE readings below zero mean that the trend is down; the lower the value the
more efficient (trendy) the downward movement is. Readings around zero indicate choppy, less efficient
movement.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 635

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Polarized Fractal Efficiency

Function Name Alias: vt_PFE
Label Mask: Polarized Fractal Efficiency (%pr%,%length%,%smooth%) = %
_pfe%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Polarized Fractal Efficiency

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: length
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

[New] button...
Name: smooth
Display Name: Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _pfe
Name: (PFE)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 636 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_pfe:= Mov(If(pr>Ref(pr,-length),sqrt(Power(Roc(pr,length,Points),2) +
Power(10,2)) /
Sum(Sqrt(Power(Roc(pr,1,Points),2)+1),length),-
Sqrt(Power(Roc(pr,length,Points),2) + Power(10,2)) /
Sum(Sqrt(Power(Roc(pr,1,Points),2)+1),length))*100,smooth,E);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Polarized Fractal Efficiency indicator.

6.83 Quantitative Qualitative Estimation

Overview

The origin of the Quantitative Qualitative Estimation (QQE) indicator is currently unknown.

The QQE indicator consists of a smoothed Relative Strength Index (RSI) indicator and two volatility-
based trailing levels (fast and slow). The Fast Trailing Level (TL) and Slow TL are constructed by
calculating the ATR of the smoothed RSI over n-periods and then further smoothing the ATR using an
additional n-periods Wilders smoothing function. This smoothed ATR of RSI is then multiplied by the
Fast and Slow ATR Multipliers to calculate the final Fast and Slow Trailing Levels.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 637

Interpretation

There are several different methods in which the QQE can be used to generate trading signals. Here are
few of the more common techniques:

Crossovers: 1) RSI / Fast ATR TL or Slow ATR TL Crossover: A buy signal occurs when the RSI crosses
above the Fast ATR TL or Slow ATR TL and a sell signal occurs when RSI crosses below the Fast ATR
TL or Slow ATR TL. 2) RSI / 50-level Crossover: When the RSI crosses above 50 a buy signal is given.
Alternatively, when the RSI crosses below 50 a sell signal is given. 3) Fast ATR TL / Slow ATR TL
Crossover: A buy signal occurs when the Fast ATR TL crosses above the Slow ATR TL and a sell signal
occurs when Fast ATR TL crosses below the Slow ATR TL.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the QQE indicator and price can prove to be very effective
in identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish Divergence:
Lower lows in price and higher lows in the QQE; Trade short on Classic Bearish Divergence: Higher
highs in price and lower highs in the QQE.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: Much like the original RSI (and other oscillators), the QQE indicator
can be used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in price movements. An Overbought
condition is generally described as the QQE being greater than or equal to the 70% level while an
oversold condition is generally described as the QQE being less than or equal to the 30% level. Trades
can be generated when any of the QQE outputs (RSI, Fast ATR TL or Slow ATR TL) crosses these
levels. When the RSI, Fast ATR TL or Slow ATR TL crosses above 30 a buy signal is given.
Alternatively, when the RSI, Fast ATR TL or Slow ATR TL crosses below 70 a sell signal is given.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Quantitative Qualitative Estimation

Function Name Alias: vt_QQE
Label Mask:
QQE (%rsiprice%,%rsiperiods%,%SF%,%ST%,%atrperiods%,%atrsmperiods%,%
fastatrmult%,%slowatrmult%)
RSI = %RSIndex%, ATR FTL = %FastAtrRsiTL%, ATR STL = %SlowAtrRsiTL%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: QQE

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: rsiprice
Display Name: RSI Price
Type: price
Default: close

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

638 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: rsiperiods
Display Name: RSI Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: SF
Display Name: RSI Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 2

[New] button...
Name: ST
Display Name: RSI Smoothing Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: atrperiods
Display Name: ATR Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: atrsmperiods
Display Name: Wilders ATR Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: fastatrmult
Display Name: Fast ATR TL Multiplier
Type: float
Default: 2.6180

[New] button...
Name: slowatrmult
Display Name: Slow ATR TL Multiplier
Type: float
Default: 4.2360

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: RSIndex
Name: (RSI)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: FastAtrRsiTL

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 639

Name: (ATR Fast TL)

Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: SlowAtrRsiTL
Name: (ATR Slow TL)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

{Smoothed RSI}

rsi_r:= (rsiprice - ref(rsiprice,-1));

rsi_rs:= Wilders(if(rsi_r>0,rsi_r,0),rsiperiods) / Wilders(if(rsi_r<0,
Abs(rsi_r),0),rsiperiods);
RSIndex:= Mov((100-(100/(1+rsi_rs))),SF,ST);

{Smoothed ATR of Smoothed RSI}

TH:= if(Ref(RSIndex,-1)>RSIndex,Ref(RSIndex,-1),RSIndex);
TL:= if(Ref(RSIndex,-1)<RSIndex,Ref(RSIndex,-1),RSIndex);
TR:= TH-TL;
AtrRsi:= Wilders(TR,atrperiods);
SmoothedAtrRsi:= Wilders(AtrRsi,atrsmperiods);

{Fast and Slow ATR Trailing Levels}

DeltaFastAtrRsi:= SmoothedAtrRsi*fastatrmult;

FastAtrRsiTL:= if(BarCount()<=(rsiperiods*2),null,
if(ref(RSIndex,-1)>PREV(0) AND RSIndex>PREV(0),max(PREV
(0),RSIndex-DeltaFastAtrRsi),
if(ref(RSIndex,-1)<PREV(0) AND RSIndex<PREV(0),min(PREV
(0),RSIndex+DeltaFastAtrRsi),
if(Cross(RSIndex,PREV(0)),RSIndex-DeltaFastAtrRsi,

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 640 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

if(Cross(PREV(0),RSIndex),RSIndex+DeltaFastAtrRsi,
if(RSIndex=PREV(0),PREV(0),PREV(0)))))));

DeltaSlowAtrRsi:= SmoothedAtrRsi*slowatrmult;

SlowAtrRsiTL:= if(BarCount()<=(rsiperiods*2),null,
if(ref(RSIndex,-1)>PREV(0) AND RSIndex>PREV(0),max(PREV
(0),RSIndex-DeltaSlowAtrRsi),
if(ref(RSIndex,-1)<PREV(0) AND RSIndex<PREV(0),min(PREV
(0),RSIndex+DeltaSlowAtrRsi),
if(Cross(RSIndex,PREV(0)),RSIndex-DeltaSlowAtrRsi,
if(Cross(PREV(0),RSIndex),RSIndex+DeltaSlowAtrRsi,
if(RSIndex=PREV(0),PREV(0),PREV(0)))))));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the QQE indicator.

6.84 Rainbow Charts

Overview

The Rainbow Charts and Rainbow Oscillator indicators were created by Mel Widner, Ph.D. and originally
introduced in the July 1997 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine.

The Rainbow Charts indicator is trend-following indicator. The basis of the Rainbow Charts indicator is a
2-period simple moving average. Recursive smoothing is then applied to the original moving average
thereby creating 9 additional moving averages; each new moving average is based on the previous
moving average. Through this use of recursive smoothing a full spectrum of trends is created that, when
plotted using continuous colors, have the appearance of a rainbow.

The Rainbow Oscillator is also a trend-following indicator that is based on the same calculations used to
create the Rainbow Charts. The Rainbow Oscillator is derived from a consensus of the Rainbow Charts
trends. It defines the highest high and lowest low of those moving averages to create an oscillator and
bandwidth lines based on those calculations.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 641

Interpretation

One simple interpretation of the Rainbow Charts indicator is:

When the market is rising and the trend is up, the least smoothed line is at the top of the Rainbow (the
red line) and the most smoothed line is at the bottom of the Rainbow (the violet line). When the market
is declining and the trend is down the order of the Rainbow is reversed; the most smoothed line is at the
bottom and the least smoothed line is at the top.

As the underlying market price moves up or down, the moving averages follow and cross in sequence as
the move continues. Price moves away from the Rainbow are seen as potential trend continuations
leading to a greater Rainbow width, while price moves towards (or into) the Rainbow are seen as
potential reversals leading to a contraction of the Rainbow width. The depth that price penetrates into the
Rainbow can be used to judge the strength of the move.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Rainbow Charts

Function Name Alias: vt_RBCharts
Label Mask:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

642 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Rainbow Charts (%prc%,%periods%,%mat%,%recperiods%,%recmat%)

Least Smooth MA = %MA%, Smoothest MA = %R9%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Rainbow Charts

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: prc
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 2

[New] button...
Name: mat
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: recperiods
Display Name: Recursive Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 2

[New] button...
Name: recmat
Display Name: Recursive Smoothing MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: MA
Name: (MA - Least Smooth)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: R1
Name: (R1)
Line Color: orange
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 643

[New] button...
Var Name: R2
Name: (R2)
Line Color: yellow
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: R3
Name: (R3)
Line Color: light green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: R4
Name: (R4)
Line Color: green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: R5
Name: (R5)
Line Color: blue-green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: R6
Name: (R6)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: R7
Name: (R7)
Line Color: medium-light blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: R8
Name: (R8)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: R9
Name: (R9 - Smoothest)
Line Color: purple

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 644 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Line Width: thin

Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MA:= Mov(prc,periods,mat);
r1:= Mov(MA,recperiods,recmat);
r2:= Mov(r1,recperiods,recmat);
r3:= Mov(r2,recperiods,recmat);
r4:= Mov(r3,recperiods,recmat);
r5:= Mov(r4,recperiods,recmat);
r6:= Mov(r5,recperiods,recmat);
r7:= Mov(r6,recperiods,recmat);
r8:= Mov(r7,recperiods,recmat);
r9:= Mov(r8,recperiods,recmat);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Rainbow Charts indicator.

6.85 Rainbow Oscillator

Overview

The Rainbow Charts and Rainbow Oscillator indicators were created by Mel Widner, Ph.D. and originally
introduced in the July 1997 issue of Stocks and Commodities magazine.

The Rainbow Charts indicator is trend-following indicator. The basis of the Rainbow Charts indicator is a
2-period simple moving average. Recursive smoothing is then applied to the original moving average
thereby creating 9 additional moving averages; each new moving average is based on the previous
moving average. Through this use of recursive smoothing a full spectrum of trends is created that, when
plotted using continuous colors, have the appearance of a rainbow.

The Rainbow Oscillator is also a trend-following indicator that is based on the same calculations used to
create the Rainbow Charts. The Rainbow Oscillator is derived from a consensus of the Rainbow Charts
trends. It defines the highest high and lowest low of those moving averages to create an oscillator and
bandwidth lines based on those calculations.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 645

Interpretation

One simple interpretation of the Rainbow Charts indicator is:

When the market is rising and the trend is up, the least smoothed line is at the top of the Rainbow (the
red line) and the most smoothed line is at the bottom of the Rainbow (the violet line). When the market
is declining and the trend is down the order of the Rainbow is reversed; the most smoothed line is at the
bottom and the least smoothed line is at the top.

As the underlying market price moves up or down, the moving averages follow and cross in sequence as
the move continues. Price moves away from the Rainbow are seen as potential trend continuations
leading to a greater Rainbow width, while price moves towards (or into) the Rainbow are seen as
potential reversals leading to a contraction of the Rainbow width. The depth that price penetrates into the
Rainbow can be used to judge the strength of the move.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Rainbow Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_RBOscillator
Label Mask:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

646 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Rainbow Osc. (%prc%,%periods%,%mat%,%recperiods%,%recmat%,%rbop%)

Osc. = %RBOsc%, Upper = %RBUpperBand%, Lower = %RBLowerBand%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Rainbow Oscillator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: prc
Display Name: Rainbow Charts Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Rainbow Charts Periods
Type: integer
Default: 2

[New] button...
Name: mat
Display Name: Rainbow Charts MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: recperiods
Display Name: Rainbow Charts Recursive Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 3

[New] button...
Name: recmat
Display Name: Rainbow Charts Recursive Smoothing MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: rbop
Display Name: Rainbow Oscillator Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: RBOsc
Name: (RB Oscillator)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: histogram

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 647

Var Name: RBLowerBand

Name: (RB Lower Band)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: RBUpperBand
Name: (RB Upper Band)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MA:= Mov(prc,periods,mat);
r1:= Mov(MA,recperiods,recmat);
r2:= Mov(r1,recperiods,recmat);
r3:= Mov(r2,recperiods,recmat);
r4:= Mov(r3,recperiods,recmat);
r5:= Mov(r4,recperiods,recmat);
r6:= Mov(r5,recperiods,recmat);
r7:= Mov(r6,recperiods,recmat);
r8:= Mov(r7,recperiods,recmat);
r9:= Mov(r8,recperiods,recmat);

RMin:= Min(MA,Min((r1),Min((r2),Min((r3),Min((r4),Min((r5),
Min((r6),Min((r7),Min((r8),r9)))))))));

RMax:= Max(MA,Max((r1),Max((r2),Max((r3),Max((r4),Max((r5),
Max((r6),Max((r7),Max((r8),r9)))))))));

RBLowerBand:= -100 * (RMin-RMax) / (HHV(prc,rbop)-LLV(prc,rbop));

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 648 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

RBUpperBand:= 100 * (RMin-RMax) / (HHV(prc,rbop)-LLV(prc,rbop));

RBOsc:= 100 * (prc-((MA+r1+r2+r3+r4+r5+r6+r7+r8+r9)/rbop)) / (HHV(Prc,

rbop) - LLV(Prc,rbop));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Rainbow Oscillator indicator.

6.86 Rate of Change (ROC)

Overview

The Rate of Change (ROC) indicator calculates how price has changed within a specified number of time
periods by calculating the difference between the current bar's price and the price a selected number of
bars ago. The difference is calculated in "Points" or as a "Percentage". The ROC moves in a wave-like
fashion (similar to that of price), but it oscillates above and below an equilibrium level set at zero. The
ROC rises as prices rise; the ROC declines as prices decline. The greater the change in prices, the
greater the change in the ROC indicator.

To calculate the ROC in Points:

ROCPoints = Today's Price - Price n-Periods Ago

To calculate the ROC as a Percentage:

ROCPercentage = ((Today's Price - Price n-Periods Ago) / Price n-Periods Ago) * 100

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 649

Interpretation

The ROC indicator is a simple indicator capable of producing a myriad of buy and sell signals. However,
there are four basic methods of interpreting the ROC indicator:

Zero-Level Crossovers: A buy signal occurs when the ROC crosses above zero and a sell signal occurs
when the ROC crosses below zero.

Overbought/Oversold Levels: To use ROC as an overbought/oversold indicator, generally a few

assumptions are made: The higher the ROC readings the more overbought a trading instrument is and
the lower the ROC readings the more oversold a trading instrument is. Readings above the overbought
level imply an overbought condition (and a pending price correction) while readings below the oversold
level imply an oversold condition (and a pending rally). However, it is worth remembering that prices may
remain overbought or oversold for extended periods of time. When this happens, it may actually suggest
that the trend will continue rather than reverse.

Trend Line Breakouts: Trend lines can be drawn connecting the peaks and troughs of the ROC indicator.
Often ROC begins to turn before price thereby making it a leading indicator. ROC readings breaking
above a declining trend line warns of a possible bullish reversal while momentum readings breaking
below a rising trend line warns of a possible bearish reversal.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the ROC indicator and price can prove to be very effective
in identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish Divergence:
Lower lows in price and higher lows in the ROC; Trade short on Classic Bearish Divergence: Higher
highs in price and lower highs in the ROC.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

650 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Rate of Change (ROC)

Function Name Alias: vt_ROC
Label Mask: ROC (%Pr%,%tPr%,%CalcMethod%) = %_ROC%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Rate of Change

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 12

[New] button...
Name: CalcMethod
Display Name: Calculation Method
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
Points
Percent
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Points

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _ROC
Name: (ROC)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 651

Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_ROC:= if(CalcMethod=0,Pr-Ref(Pr,-tPr),((Pr-Ref(Pr,-tPr))/ref(Pr,-tPr))
*100);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Rate of Change indicator.

6.87 Recursive Moving Trend Average

Overview

Developed by Dennis Meyers and described in his article entitled “The Japanese Yen, Recursed”
published in the December 1998 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine, the
Recursive Moving Trend Average is in mathematical terms a "Recursive Moving Polynomial Fit”.

Meyers describes this technique as requiring only a small number of past values of the estimated price
and the current (today’s) price to predict the next (tomorrow’s) price whereas the Least Squares
Polynomial Fit (which is very computationally intensive) requires large numbers of past price points.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

652 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Meyers suggests creating a simple “trend oscillator” which he refers to as the “tocs” which is the
difference between the Recursive Moving Trend Average and an Exponential Moving Average of the same
n-periods.

He mentions looking for changes in the price series that are above the normal noise fluctuations
indicating that a potential uptrend or downtrend has started. This is accomplished by examining the plot
of the tosc.

A potential buy signal is generated when the tosc’s value crosses above the “dup” level and a potential
sell signal is generated when the tosc’s value crosses below the “-ddn” level.

During Meyer’s testing, the optimum “dup” and “-ddn” levels were calculated using optimization, walk-
forward testing, out-of-sample testing, and averaging of all testing results.

For additional information, including the mathematical formulas for the Recursive Moving Trend Average
and TOSC, please review Dennis Meyer’s whitepaper entitled “The Japanese Yen, Recursed” published
in 1998, which is available from his website.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Recursive Moving Trend Average

Function Name Alias: vt_RMTA
Label Mask: Recursive Mov. Trend Avg. (%Price%,%Periods%) = %RMTA%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Recursive Mov. Trend Avg.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: Price
Default: Close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 21
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 653

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: RMTA
Name: (RMTA)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Alpha:= 2/(Periods+1);
Bot:= (1-Alpha)*(If(BarCount()<Periods,Price,PREV(Price)))+Price;
RMTA:= (1-Alpha)*(If(BarCount()<Periods,Price,PREV(Price)))+(Alpha*Abs
(Price+Bot-Ref(Bot,-1)));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Recursive Moving Trend Average indicator.

6.88 Relative Momentum Index

Overview

The Relative Momentum Index was developed by Roger Altman. It was first introduced in the February
1993 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities magazine. The RMI is a variation of the RSI
indicator. The RMI counts up and down days from the close relative to the close x-days ago (where x is
not limited to 1 as is required by the RSI) instead of counting up and down days from close to close as
the RSI does.

Note that an RMI with parameters of C, 14, 1 is equivalent to a 14 period RSI of the Close price. This is
because the momentum parameter is calculating only a 1-day price change (which the RSI does by
default). As the momentum periods are increased the RMI fluctuations become smoother.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

654 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Since the RMI is an oscillator it exhibits the same strengths and weaknesses of other overbought /
oversold indicators. During strong trending markets it is likely that the RMI will remain at overbought or
oversold levels for an extended period of time. However, during non-trending markets the RMI tends to
oscillate more predictably between an overbought level of 70 to 90 and an oversold level of 10 to 30.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field::

Name: Relative Momentum Index

Function Name Alias: vt_RMI
Label Mask: Relative Momentum Index (%price%,%rmiper%,%momper%) = %_RMI%

Placement: New Frame

Data Inspection Alias: Relative Momentum Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 655

Display Name: Price

Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: rmiper
Display Name: RMI Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: momper
Display Name: Momentum Periods
Type: integer
Default: 5

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _RMI
Name: (RMI)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Mom:= price - ref(price,-momper);

Rms:= Wilders(If(Mom>0,Mom,0),rmiper) / Wilders(If(Mom<0,Abs(Mom),0),
rmiper);
_RMI:= 100-(100/(1+RMS));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Relative Momentum Index indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 656 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.89 Relative Strength Index (RSI)

Overview

Developed by J. Wells Wilder and introduced in his 1978 book, “New Concepts in Technical Trading
Systems”, the Relative Strength Index (RSI) has become a very popular oscillator and useful momentum
oscillator. The RSI compares a trading instrument’s magnitude of recent gains against its magnitude of
recent losses and quantifies this information into a value that ranges between 0 and 100.

Often times the name "Relative Strength Index" is slightly confusing or misleading because the RSI does
not compare the relative strength of two trading instruments, but rather the internal strength of a single
trading instrument. A more appropriate name might have been "Internal Strength Index”, but most traders
simply refer to it as “the RSI” in an effort not to confuse it with John Murphy’s “Relative Strength” charts
and IBD’s “Relative Strength” rankings.

Interpretation

There are several popular methods of analyzing the RSI, some of which include:

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the RSI and price can prove to be very effective in
identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish Divergence: Lower
lows in price and higher lows in the RSI; Trade short on Classic Bearish Divergence: Higher highs in

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 657

price and lower highs in the RSI. These types of divergence are often indications of an impending
reversal.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The RSI can be used to identify potential overbought and oversold
conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described as the RSI being greater
than or equal to the 70% level while an oversold condition is generally described as the RSI being less
than or equal to the 30% level. Trades can be generated when the RSI crosses these levels. When the
RSI crosses above 30 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the RSI crosses below 70 a sell signal is
given.

Support/Resistance and “Failure Swings”: The RSI shows, sometimes more clearly than price itself,
levels of support and resistance. Failure swings (a.k.a. support/resistance breakouts) occur when the
RSI surpasses a previous high (peak) or falls below a recent low (trough).

RSI / 50-level Crossover: When the RSI crosses above 50 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the
RSI crosses below 50 a sell signal is given.

Chart Formations: The RSI often forms chart patterns such as head and shoulders or triangles that may
or may not be visible on the price chart.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Relative Strength Index (RSI)

Function Name Alias: vt_RSI
Label Mask: RSI (%pr%,%tpr%) = %RSIndex%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: RSI

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: tpr
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: RSIndex

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 658 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: (RSI)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: gray
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

rsi_r:= (pr - ref(pr,-1));

rsi_rs:= Wilders(if(rsi_r>0,rsi_r,0),tpr) / Wilders(if(rsi_r<0,Abs
(rsi_r),0),tpr);
RSIndex:= 100-(100/(1+rsi_rs));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Relative Strength Index indicator.

6.90 Relative Volatility Index (RVI)

Overview

The Relative Volatility Index (RVI) was developed by Donald Dorsey. It was originally introduced in the
June 1993 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine (TASC). A revision to the
indicator was discussed in the September 1995 issue.

The RVI is very similar to the Relative Strength Index (RSI) index except that the RVI measures the
direction of volatility using the standard deviation of price changes in its calculations rather than absolute
price changes like the RSI does.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 659

Interpretation

The RVI is best used as a confirmation indicator to other momentum and/or trend-following indicators.
Dorsey recommended the following rules for using the RVI:

Only act on buy signals when RVI > 50.

Only act on sell signals when RVI < 50.

If a buy signal is ignored, enter long if RVI > 60.

If a sell signal is ignored, enter short if RVI < 40.

Close a long position if RVI falls below 40.

Close a short position if RVI rises above 60.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Relative Volatility Index (RVI)

Function Name Alias: vt_RelVolIndex
Label Mask: Relative Volatility Index (RVI) (%pr%,%stdevper%,%tpr%) = %
RVIndex%

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

660 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Placement: New Frame

Data Inspection Alias: Relative Volatility Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: stdevper
Display Name: Std. Deviation Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 10
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: tpr
Display Name: RVI Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 14
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: RVIndex
Name: (RVI)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +60.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +50.5000
Color: gray
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +40.0000
Color: red

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 661

Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

rvi_r:= pr - ref(pr,-1);
rvi_rs:= wilders(if(rvi_r>0,stdev(pr,stdevper),0),tpr) / wilders(if
(rvi_r<0,abs(stdev(pr,stdevper)),0),tpr);
RVIndex:= 100-(100/(1+rvi_rs));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Relative Volatility Index indicator.

6.91 R-Squared

Overview

R-Squared is a linear regression method that helps quantify the strength of market trends (i.e.
“trendiness of prices). The more closely prices move in a straight line over n-periods (forming a linear
relationship), the stronger the trend. R-Squared values represent the percentage of price movement that
can be explained by linear regression. For example, if the R-Squared value over 14 periods is at 50%
then that means that 50% of the price movement can be explained by linear regression and the
remaining 50% is random noise.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

662 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

To determine if a trend is statistically significant for an n-periods linear regression line a 95% confidence
level is required. The 95% confidence level varies based on the number of periods being evaluated. If the
R-Squared value is less than its corresponding 95% confidence level for a given n-periods it is generally
assumed that no statistically significant trend exists. The table below outlines the recommended number
of R-Squared periods and their corresponding 95% confidence levels.

# of Periods / R2 Critical Value (95% Confidence)

5 / 77
10 / 40
14 / 27
20 / 20
25 / 16
30 / 13
50 / 8
60 / 6
120 / 3

There are many ways to use linear regression and R-Squared to generate potential trading
opportunities.

One such method recommends using R-Squared in conjunction with the Linear Regression Slope. R-
Squared defines the strength of the trend and the Linear Regression Slope defines the general direction
of the trend (positive or negative). Potential trading signals would be generated with respect to the
direction of the Linear Regression Slope while the R-Squared remained above its 95% confidence level.

Another method recommends using R-Squared in conjunction with oscillators. Potential trading signals
would be generated with respect to the oscillator’s overbought and oversold levels while R-Squared
remains low (i.e. well below its 95% confidence level) indicating that prices are less “trendy”.

For additional information you may wish to refer to Tushar Chande’s and Stanley Kroll’s book entitled,
“The New Technical Trader”.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: R-Squared (R2)

Function Name Alias: vt_R2
Label Mask: R-Squared (%price%,%periods%) = %R2%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: R-Squared

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 663

Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 14
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: R2
Name: (R2)
Line Color: black
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

t1:= BarCount();
t2:= Price;
N:= Periods;
A:= (N * Sum(Power(t1,2),N) - Power(Sum(t1,N),2));
B:= (N * Sum(Power(t2,2),N) - Power(Sum(t2,N),2));
R1:= (N * Sum(t1*t2,N) - Sum(t1,N) * Sum(t2,N)) / (sqrt(A) * sqrt(B));
R2:= (Power(R1,2)) * 100;
CV:= If(N=5,77,
If(N=10,40,
If(N=14,27,
If(N=20,20,
If(N=25,16,
If(N=30,13,
If(N=50,8,
If(N=60,120,
If(N=120,3,Null)))))))));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the R-Squared indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 664 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.92 Schaff Trend Cycle

Overview

Developed by Doug Schaff in the 1990's, the Schaff Trend Cycle bases its method on the fact that
trends, like price, exhibit repeating high and low patterns (cycles). This indicator is a modified MACD
line run through a modified stochastic algorithm smoothed with Wilders' smoothing to calculate the final
STC indicator.

Interpretation

The Schaff Trend Cycle uses three inputs:

Sh: Shorter-term Exponential Moving Average. Default: 23

Lg: Longer-term Exponential Moving Average. Default: 50
Cycle: Set at half the cycle length. Default: 10

The Schaff Trend Cycle helps to identify:

1. Direction a Trend Cycle is moving.

2. Tops and Bottoms within a Trend Cycle.

When the Schaff Trend Cycle Indicator is declining, the trend cycle is falling and prices tend to stabilize
or follow the cycle down. When the STC is rising, the trend cycle is rising and prices tend to stabilize or
follow the cycle higher.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 665

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Schaff Trend Cycle

Function Name Alias: vt_SchaffTC
Label Mask: Schaff Trend Cycle (%price%,%Sh%,%Lg%,%Cycle%) = %STCycle%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Schaff Trend Cycle

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: Typical Price

[New] button...
Name: Sh
Display Name: Short-Term Periods
Type: integer
Default: 23

[New] button...
Name: Lg
Display Name: Long-Term Periods
Type: integer
Default: 50

[New] button...
Name: Cycle
Display Name: Schaff Cycle Periods
Type: integer
Default: 10

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: STCycle
Name: (STC)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 666 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Value: +80.0000
Color: blue
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: blue
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: blue
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: blue
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MCD:= Wilders(price,Sh) - Wilders(price,Lg);

ST:= ((MCD-LLV(MCD,Cycle)) / (HHV(MCD,Cycle)-LLV(MCD,Cycle))) * 100;
STCycle:= Wilders(ST,Cycle/2);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Schaff Trend Cycle indicator.

6.93 Stochastic Momentum Index

Overview

Created by William Blau, the Stochastic Momentum Index was described in the January 1993 issue of
Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine.

The SMI is a smoother version of the classic Stochastic Oscillator with an interesting twist. Instead of
calculating the distance the current price relative to the recent n-period high/low range, the SMI is
calculated by comparing the price to the midpoint average of the n-period high/low range. The raw price
differences are then smoothed by a double EMA (an EMA of an EMA of the raw price differences). When
the close is greater than the midpoint of the range, the SMI is positive. When the close is less than the
midpoint of the range, it is negative.

The result is an oscillator that ranges between +/- 100 and is less erratic than an equal period

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 667

Stochastic Oscillator.

Interpretation

Popular methods for interpreting the Stochastic Momentum Index include:

1. Overbought/Oversold Level Crossovers: +/- 40 are popular levels. Buy when the SMI falls below the
oversold level and then rises above that level; Sell when the SMI rises above the overbought level and
then falls below that level.

2. Signal Line Crossovers: Buy when the SMI rises above its signal line and sell when the SMI falls
below the signal line.

3. Divergences: For example, where prices are making a series of new highs and the SMI is failing to
surpass its previous highs.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Stochastic Momentum Index

Function Name Alias: vt_SMI

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

668 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Label Mask:
SMI (%lp%,%sm%,%dsmp%,%sig%) = %SMI%
SMI Signal = %SMI_Sig%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Stochastic Momentum Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: lp
Display Name: Lookback Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
Name: sm
Display Name: Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 25

[New] button...
Name: dsmp
Display Name: Double Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 2

[New] button...
Name: sig
Display Name: Signal Line Periods
Type: integer
Default: 3

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: SMI
Name: (SMI)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: SMI_Sig
Name: (SMI Signal Line)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +40.0000
Color: red

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 669

Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -40.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

SMI:= 100 * (Mov(Mov(C-(0.5*(HHV(H,lp)+LLV(L,lp))),sm,E),dsmp,E) /

(0.5*Mov(Mov(HHV(H,lp)-LLV(L,lp),sm,E),dsmp,E)));
SMI_Sig:= mov(SMI,sig,E);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Stochastic Momentum Index indicator.

6.94 Stochastic Oscillator (Fast)

Overview

Developed by George C. Lane in the 1950's, the Stochastic Oscillator comes in 3 flavors: Fast, Slow,
and Full. The Stochastic Oscillator is a momentum indicator designed to show the relation of the current
close price relative to the high/low range over a given number of periods using a scale of 0-100. It is
based on the assumption that in a rising market the price(s) will close near the high of the range and in a
declining market the price(s) will close near the low of the range.

The Stochastic Oscillators are typically plotted as 2 lines: %K and %D. %K is the main (fast) line and
%D is the signal (slow) line.

The Fast Stochastic Oscillator is calculated by the formula:

Fast %K = ((Today's Close - Lowest Low in %K Periods) / (Highest High in %K Periods - Lowest Low in
%K Periods)) * 100
%D = 3-period simple moving average of Fast %K

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

670 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

There are three basic techniques for using the various Stochastic Oscillators to generate trading signals.

Crossovers: 1) %K line / %D line Crossover: A buy signal occurs When the %K line crosses above the
%D line and a sell signal occurs when the %K line crosses below the %D line. 2) %K line / 50-level
Crossover: When the %K line crosses above 50 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the %K line
crosses below 50 a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the Stochastic Oscillator and price can prove to be very
effective in identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish
Divergence: Lower lows in price and higher lows in the Stochastic Oscillator; Trade short on Classic
Bearish Divergence: Higher highs in price and lower highs in the Stochastic Oscillator.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The Stochastic Oscillator can be used to identify potential overbought
and oversold conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described as the
Stochastic Oscillator being greater than or equal to the 80% level while an oversold condition is generally
described as the Stochastic Oscillator being less than or equal to the 20% level. Trades can be
generated when the Stochastic Oscillator crosses these levels. A buy signal occurs when the
Stochastic Oscillator declines below 20% and then rises above that level. A sell signal occurs when the
Stochastic Oscillator rises above 80% and then declines below that level.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 671

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Stochastic Oscillator (Fast)

Function Name Alias: vt_StochOscFast
Label Mask:
Fast Stochastic Osc. (%K%,%D%,%Mt%)
K = %StK%, D = %StD%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Fast Stochastic Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: K
Display Name: %K Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 14
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: D
Display Name: %D Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 3
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: Mt
Display Name: %D Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: StK
Name: (%K)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: StD
Name: (%D)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 672 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Value: +80.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

StK:= ((C-LLV(L,K))/(HHV(H,K)-LLV(L,K)))*100;
StD:= Mov(StK,D,Mt);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Fast Stochastic Oscillator indicator.

6.95 Stochastic Oscillator (Full)

Overview

Developed by George C. Lane in the 1950's, the Stochastic Oscillator comes in 3 flavors: Fast, Slow,
and Full. The Stochastic Oscillator is a momentum indicator designed to show the relation of the current
close price relative to the high/low range over a given number of periods using a scale of 0-100. It is
based on the assumption that in a rising market the price(s) will close near the high of the range and in a
declining market the price(s) will close near the low of the range.

The Stochastic Oscillators are typically plotted as 2 lines: %K and %D. %K is the main (fast) line and
%D is the signal (slow) line.

The Full Stochastic Oscillator is calculated by the formula:

Fast %K = ((Today's Close - Lowest Low in %K Periods) / (Highest High in %K Periods - Lowest Low in
%K Periods)) * 100
Slowing %K = N-period moving average of Fast %K
%D = N-period simple moving average of Slowing %K

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 673

Interpretation

There are three basic techniques for using the various Stochastic Oscillators to generate trading signals.

Crossovers: 1) %K line / %D line Crossover: A buy signal occurs When the %K line crosses above the
%D line and a sell signal occurs when the %K line crosses below the %D line. 2) %K line / 50-level
Crossover: When the %K line crosses above 50 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the %K line
crosses below 50 a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the Stochastic Oscillator and price can prove to be very
effective in identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish
Divergence: Lower lows in price and higher lows in the Stochastic Oscillator; Trade short on Classic
Bearish Divergence: Higher highs in price and lower highs in the Stochastic Oscillator.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The Stochastic Oscillator can be used to identify potential overbought
and oversold conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described as the
Stochastic Oscillator being greater than or equal to the 80% level while an oversold condition is generally
described as the Stochastic Oscillator being less than or equal to the 20% level. Trades can be
generated when the Stochastic Oscillator crosses these levels. A buy signal occurs when the
Stochastic Oscillator declines below 20% and then rises above that level. A sell signal occurs when the
Stochastic Oscillator rises above 80% and then declines below that level.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

674 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Stochastic Oscillator (Full)

Function Name Alias: vt_StochOscFull
Label Mask:
Full Stochastic Osc. (%K%,%Sl%,%MtK%,%D%,%Mt%)
K = %StDK%, D = %StDD%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Full Stochastic Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: K
Display Name: %K Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 14
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: Sl
Display Name: %K Slowing Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 3
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: MtK
Display Name: %K Slowing Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: D
Display Name: %D Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 3
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: Mt
Display Name: %D Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 675

Var Name: StDK

Name: (%K)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: StDD
Name: (%D)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +80.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

StK:= ((C-LLV(L,K))/(HHV(H,K)-LLV(L,K)))*100;
StDK:= Mov(StK,Sl,MtK);
StDD:= Mov(StDK,D,Mt);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Full Stochastic Oscillator indicator.

6.96 Stochastic Oscillator (Slow)

Overview

Developed by George C. Lane in the 1950's, the Stochastic Oscillator comes in 3 flavors: Fast, Slow,
and Full. The Stochastic Oscillator is a momentum indicator designed to show the relation of the current
close price relative to the high/low range over a given number of periods using a scale of 0-100. It is
based on the assumption that in a rising market the price(s) will close near the high of the range and in a
declining market the price(s) will close near the low of the range.

The Stochastic Oscillators are typically plotted as 2 lines: %K and %D. %K is the main (fast) line and
%D is the signal (slow) line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

676 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator is calculated by the formula:

Fast %K = ((Today's Close - Lowest Low in %K Periods) / (Highest High in %K Periods - Lowest Low in
%K Periods)) * 100
Slowing %K = 3-period simple moving average of Fast %K
%D = 3-period simple moving average of Slowing %K

Interpretation

There are three basic techniques for using the various Stochastic Oscillators to generate trading signals.

Crossovers: 1) %K line / %D line Crossover: A buy signal occurs When the %K line crosses above the
%D line and a sell signal occurs when the %K line crosses below the %D line. 2) %K line / 50-level
Crossover: When the %K line crosses above 50 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the %K line
crosses below 50 a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the Stochastic Oscillator and price can prove to be very
effective in identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish
Divergence: Lower lows in price and higher lows in the Stochastic Oscillator; Trade short on Classic
Bearish Divergence: Higher highs in price and lower highs in the Stochastic Oscillator.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The Stochastic Oscillator can be used to identify potential overbought
and oversold conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described as the
Stochastic Oscillator being greater than or equal to the 80% level while an oversold condition is generally
described as the Stochastic Oscillator being less than or equal to the 20% level. Trades can be
generated when the Stochastic Oscillator crosses these levels. A buy signal occurs when the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 677

Stochastic Oscillator declines below 20% and then rises above that level. A sell signal occurs when the
Stochastic Oscillator rises above 80% and then declines below that level.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Stochastic Oscillator (Slow)

Function Name Alias: vt_StochOscSlow
Label Mask:
Slow Stochastic Osc. (%K%,%Sl%,%MtK%,%D%,%Mt%)
K = %StDK%, D = %StDD%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Slow Stochastic Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: K
Display Name: %K Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 14
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: Sl
Display Name: %K Slowing Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 3
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: MtK
Display Name: %K Slowing Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: D
Display Name: %D Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 3
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 678 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: Mt
Display Name: %D Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: StDK
Name: (%K)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: StDD
Name: (%D)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +80.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

StK:= ((C-LLV(L,K))/(HHV(H,K)-LLV(L,K)))*100;
StDK:= Mov(StK,Sl,MtK);
StDD:= Mov(StDK,D,Mt);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Slow Stochastic Oscillator.

6.97 Stochastic RSI Oscillator

Overview

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 679

Introduced by Tuschar Chande and Stanley Kroll in their December, 1992 Stocks and Commodities
article entitled, “Stochastic RSI and Dynamic Momentum Index”, the Stochastic RSI Oscillator attempts
to combine ideas from two indicators - the Relative Strength Index (RSI) and the Stochastic Oscillator.
As its name implies, the Stochastic RSI Oscillator is the RSI run through the stochastic algorithm. The
Stochastic RSI Oscillator is a momentum indicator designed to show the relation of the current RSI
value relative to its high/low range over a given number of periods using a scale of 0-100.

The Stochastic RSI Oscillator, much like the other stochastic oscillators, is typically plotted as 2 lines:
the StochRSI line and %D. The StochRSI is the main (fast) line and %D is the signal (slow) line.

The Stochastic RSI Oscillator is calculated by the formula:

StochRSI = ((Today's RSI - Lowest RSI Low in %K Periods) / (Highest RSI High in %K Periods - Lowest
RSI Low in %K Periods)) * 100

Slowing StochRSI = 3-period moving average of StochRSI; using a 1-period moving average of StochRSI
eliminates this slowing (or smoothing) of the StochRSI
%D = 3-period moving average of Slowing StochRSI

Interpretation

There are three basic techniques for using the Stochastic RSI Oscillator to generate trading signals.

Crossovers: 1) StochRSI / %D line Crossover: A buy signal occurs When the StochRSI crosses above
the %D line and a sell signal occurs when the StochRSI crosses below the %D line. 2) StochRSI / 50-
level Crossover: When the StochRSI crosses above 50 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

680 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

StochRSI crosses below 50 a sell signal is given.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the Stochastic RSI Oscillator and price can prove to be
very effective in identifying potential reversal points in price movement. Trade long on Classic Bullish
Divergence: Lower lows in price and higher lows in the Stochastic RSI Oscillator; Trade short on Classic
Bearish Divergence: Higher highs in price and lower highs in the Stochastic RSI Oscillator.

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The Stochastic RSI Oscillator can be used to identify potential
overbought and oversold conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described
as the Stochastic RSI Oscillator being greater than or equal to the 80% level while an oversold condition
is generally described as the Stochastic Oscillator being less than or equal to the 20% level. Trades can
be generated when the Stochastic RSI Oscillator crosses these levels. A buy signal occurs when the
Stochastic RSI Oscillator declines below 20% and then rises above that level. A sell signal occurs when
the Stochastic RSI Oscillator rises above 80% and then declines below that level.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Stochastic RSI Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_StochRSI
Label Mask: Stochastic RSI Osc. (%rsiprice%,%rsiperiods%,%PerK%,%Sl%,%
mtK%,%PerD%,%mtD%) = %StochRSI%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Stochastic RSI Osc.

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: rsiprice
Display Name: RSI Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: rsiperiods
Display Name: RSI Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: PerK
Display Name: Stochastic RSI %K Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: Sl

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 681

Display Name: Stochastic RSI %K Slowing Periods

Type: integer
Default: 1

[New] button...
Name: mtK
Display Name: Stochastic RSI %K Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

[New] button...
Name: PerD
Display Name: Stochastic RSI %D Periods
Type: integer
Default: 3

[New] button...
Name: mtD
Display Name: Stochastic RSI %D Method
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: StochRSI
Name: (StochRSI)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: StochRsiD
Name: (StochRSI %D)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +80.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: gray
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 682 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

{Relative Strength Index}

rsi_r:= (rsiprice - ref(rsiprice,-1));

rsi_rs:= Wilders(if(rsi_r>0,rsi_r,0),rsiperiods) / Wilders(if(rsi_r<0,
abs(rsi_r),0),rsiperiods);
RS:= 100-(100/(1+rsi_rs));

{Stochastic RSI Oscillator}

StochRSI:= Mov((((RS-LLV(RS,PerK)) / (HHV(RS,PerK)-LLV(RS,PerK)))*100),

Sl,mtK);
StochRsiD:= mov(StochRSI,PerD,mtD);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Stochastic RSI Oscillator indicator.

6.98 Stoller Average Range Channels (STARC Bands)

Overview

The Stoller Average Range Channels (a.k.a. STARC Bands) indicator was developed by Manning Stoller
in the 1980's. Similar to Bollinger Bands, the STARC bands are designed to interpret market volatility
using a measure of the Average True Range (ATR). The STARC Bands create a channel above and
below a moving average of the instrument's underlying price; the width of the channel expands and
contracts depending on the fluctuation in the ATR.

The upper STARC band is calculated by adding a value of the (ATR * ATRMultiplier) to the moving
average. The lower STARC band is calculated by subtracting a value of the (ATR * ATR Multiplier) to the
moving average.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 683

Interpretation

The STARC Bands are considered to encapsulate the majority of the instrument's price action between
the bands allowing the bands to define the normal upper and lower limits of price action. This helps the
trader determine higher probability, lower risk trading opportunities using the general assumption that
price often returns to its median (the moving average).

Price action that rises to the upper band offers a lower risk selling opportunity (and a high risk
buying opportunity).
Price action that declines to the lower band offers a lower risk buying opportunity (and a high risk
selling opportunity).

These assumptions are not to say that the price action will not go against these rules. In fact, some
traders believe that a penetration of the upper or lower STARC band indicates an increased momentum
in the direction of the band penetration.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Stoller Average Range Channels (STARC Bands)

Function Name Alias: vt_STARC

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

684 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Label Mask:
STARC Bands (%atrperiods%,%atrdev%,%mapr%,%maper%,%mtp%)
Middle = %MiddleBand%, Upper = %UpperBand%, Lower = %LowerBand%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: STARC Bands

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: atrperiods
Display Name: ATR Periods
Type: integer
Default: 15

[New] button...
Name: atrdev
Display Name: ATR Multiplier
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 2.0000
Max Bounds: 0.1000
Min Bounds: 10.0000

[New] button...
Name: mapr
Display Name: STARC Bands Price
Type: price
Default: Typical Price

[New] button...
Name: maper
Display Name: STARC Bands Periods
Type: integer
Default: 6

[New] button...
Name: mtp
Display Name: STARC Bands Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: UpperBand
Name: (Upper Band)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: MiddleBand
Name: (Middle Band)
Line Color: dark blue

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 685

Line Width: thin

Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: LowerBand
Name: (Lower Band)
Line Color: purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

ATRange:= ATR(atrperiods);

UpperBand:= Mov(mapr,maper,mtp) + (atrdev * ATRange);

MiddleBand:= Mov(mapr,maper,mtp);
LowerBand:= Mov(mapr,maper,mtp) - (atrdev * ATRange);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Stoller Average Range Channels indicator.

6.99 Support and Resistance

Overview

Support levels indicate the price where the majority of investors believe that prices will move higher, while
resistance levels indicate the price at which a majority of investors feel prices will move lower. Prices
often tend to “bounce” off of these levels rather than break through them. However, once price has broken
through a support or resistance level it is likely to continue moving in that direction until it encounters the
next support or resistance level.

An interesting phenomenon of support and resistance levels is that once a support level has been broken
it often becomes a new resistance level and, alternatively, when a resistance level is broken it often
becomes a new support level.

Another point of interest is that the more often a support or resistance level is “tested” (that is touched
and bounced off of by price), the more significance that particular support or resistance level gains.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

686 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Support and resistance levels can be calculated using several different methods: trend lines, Fibonacci
ratios, pivot point calculations are just a few. VT Trader uses a different method to construct this
“Support and Resistance” indicator. Resistance levels are calculated by finding the highest high value
over the previous n-periods at each occurrence of the price crossing below an n-periods simple moving
average of price. Support levels are calculated by finding the lowest low value over the previous n-periods
at each occurrence of the price crossing above an n-periods simple moving average of price.

There are two basic techniques for using the support and resistance levels to generate trading signals.

Price Breakouts: When trading price breakouts, a buy signal occurs when the price breaks up through a
resistance level. A sell signal occurs when price breaks down through a support level. When a previous
resistance level is broken it has the potential to become a new support level and vice versa. When a
previous support level is broken it has the potential to become a new resistance level.

Price Reversals: When trading price reversals, a buy signal occurs when the price moves towards a
support level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and
moves back in the opposite direction. A sell signal occurs when the price moves towards a resistance
level, gets very close to it, touches it, or moves only slightly through it, and then reverses and moves
back in the opposite direction.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 687

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Support and Resistance

Function Name Alias: vt_SupRes
Label Mask:
Support (%LBP%) = %Sup%
Resistance (%LBP%) = %Res%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Support and Resistance

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: LBP
Display Name: Lookback Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 10
Min Bounds: 1
Max Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Res
Name: (Resistance)
Line Color: red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: dots

[New] button...
Var Name: Sup
Name: (Support)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: dots

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Res:= valuewhen(1,Cross(Mov(C,LBP,S),C),HHV(H,LBP));
Sup:= valuewhen(1,Cross(C,Mov(C,LBP,S)),LLV(L,LBP));

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Support and Resistance indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 688 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.100 T3 Moving Average

Overview

The T3 Moving Average was described by Tim Tillson in the January 1998 issue of Technical Analysis of
Stocks & Commodities article "Smoothing Techniques for More Accurate Signals". The T3 is a
significant improvement over traditional moving averages; it's smoother with much less lag. However, it
can "overshoot" price as it attempts to re-align itself with current market prices.

Interpretation

The T3 Moving Average can be used in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer to the "Moving
Average" indicator for additional details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: T3 Moving Average

Function Name Alias: vt_T3MA

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 689

Label Mask: T3 MA (%Pr%,%tPr%,%mt%,%b%) = %T3MA%

Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: T3 Moving Average

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: tPr
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 8

[New] button...
Name: mt
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

[New] button...
Name: b
Display Name: Volume Factor
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 0.7
Min Bounds: 0.0000
Max Bounds: 5.0000

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: T3MA
Name: (T3)
Line Color: light blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

e1:= Mov(Pr,tPr,mt);
e2:= Mov(e1,tPr,mt);
e3:= Mov(e2,tPr,mt);
e4:= Mov(e3,tPr,mt);
e5:= Mov(e4,tPr,mt);
e6:= Mov(e5,tPr,mt);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 690 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

c1:= -b*b*b;
c2:= 3*b*b+3*b*b*b;
c3:= -6*b*b-3*b-3*b*b*b;
c4:= 1+3*b+b*b*b+3*b*b;
T3MA:= c1*e6+c2*e5+c3*e4+c4*e3;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building Tim Tillson's T3 Moving Average.

6.101 Trailing Stoploss Levels (Volatility-Based)

Overview

The Trailing Stoploss Levels (Volatility-Based) indicator is based from Chande & Kroll's "The New
Technical Trader", p.167, 'Volatility-Based Trailing Stops'.

The Trailing Stoploss Levels (Volatility-Based) indicator "trails" (or follows) above and below price based
on its position respective to the price. It can be set to trail above or below prices based on volatility.
Volatility-related settings are available to allow fine-tuning of the indicator.

Interpretation

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 691

Trailing Stoploss levels, either volatility-based or pip-based, have become very popular with traders as a
non-emotional exit strategy for their trading methodology. Trailing Stoplosses help to remove the emotion
usually involved with exiting trades thereby helping to control risk.

In a long position, the trailing stoploss level trails (or follows) below price and ratchets itself higher as
prices rise. Conversely, in a short position, the trailing stoploss level trails (or follows) above price and
ratchets itself lower as prices fall. However, if price retreats back towards the trailing stoploss level the
trailing stoploss level will remain at its previous level never "backing away" from price thus helping to
protect potential profits or limit loss. A long trade exit is signaled when price crosses back below the
trailing stoploss level. A short trade exit is signaled when price crosses back above the trailing stoploss
level.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Trailing Stoploss Levels (Volatility-Based)

Function Name Alias: vt_TSLATR
Label Mask:
Trailing Stoploss Levels (Volatility) (%Pds1%,%Mult%,%Pds2%)
Long Stop = %ActualStopLong%, Short Stop = %ActualStopShort%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Trailing Stoploss Levels (Volatility)

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pds1
Display Name: ATR Lookback
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 10
Min Bounds: 2
Max Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: Mult
Display Name: ATR Multiplier
Type: float (with bounds)
Default: 3.0000
Min Bounds: 1.0000
Max Bounds: 20.0000

[New] button...
Name: Pds2
Display Name: Period Lookback
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 20
Min Bounds: 2

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 692 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Max Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: ActualStopLong
Name: (Long Stoploss)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

[New] button...
Var Name: ActualStopShort
Name: (Short Stoploss)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

{Volatility Stop (Long)}

PrelimStopLong:= HHV(H,Pds1) - ATR(Pds1)*Mult;

ActualStopLong:= HHV(PrelimStopLong,Pds2);

{Volatility Stop (Short)}

PrelimStopShort:= LLV(L,Pds1) + ATR(Pds1)*Mult;

ActualStopShort:= LLV(PrelimStopShort,Pds2);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Volatility-Based Trailing Stoploss Levels indicator.

6.102 Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level

Overview

The Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level indicator "trails" (or follows) above or below price depending on its
position respective to the price. It can be set to trail above or below prices based on volatility or a user-
defined number of pips. Volatility-related settings and Pip-based settings are available to allow the user
fine-tuning of the indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 693

Interpretation

Trailing Stoploss levels, either volatility-based or pip-based, have become very popular with traders as a
non-emotional exit strategy for their trading methodology. Trailing Stoplosses help to remove the emotion
usually involved with exiting trades thereby helping to control risk.

In a long position, the trailing stoploss level trails (or follows) below price and ratchets itself higher as
prices rise. Conversely, in a short position, the trailing stoploss level trails (or follows) above price and
ratchets itself lower as prices fall. However, if price retreats back towards the trailing stoploss level the
trailing stoploss level will remain at its previous level never "backing away" from price thus helping to
protect potential profits or limit loss. A long trade exit is signaled when price crosses back below the
trailing stoploss level. A short trade exit is signaled when price crosses back above the trailing stoploss
level.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level

Function Name Alias: vt_TSL
Label Mask: Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level (%Mode%,%atrperiods%,%
atrsmperiods%,%atrmult%,%Pips%) = %TSL%

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

694 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Placement: Price Frame

Data Inspection Alias: Trailing Stoploss Level

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Mode
Display Name: Trailing Stoploss Mode
Type: Enumeration
Default: click [...] button, [New] button, then create the following
entries:
Volatility
Pips
... then, click [OK] button
Default: Volatility

[New] button...
Name: atrperiods
Display Name: If Volatility, ATR Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: atrsmperiods
Display Name: If Volatility, Wilders ATR Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

[New] button...
Name: atrmult
Display Name: If Volatility, ATR Multiplier
Type: float
Default: 2.8240

[New] button...
Name: Pips
Display Name: If Pips, # of Pips to Trail
Type: integer
Default: 20

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: TSL
Name: (TSL)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 695

Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_Pips:= Pips*SymbolPoint();
DeltaStop:= if(Mode=0,Wilders(ATR(atrperiods),atrsmperiods)*atrmult,
_Pips);

TSL:= if(BarCount()>(atrperiods+atrsmperiods),
if(ref(price,-1)>PREV(0) AND price>PREV(0),max(PREV(0),price-
DeltaStop),
if(ref(price,-1)<PREV(0) AND price<PREV(0),min(PREV(0),
price+DeltaStop),
if(Cross(price,PREV(0)),price-DeltaStop,
if(Cross(PREV(0),price),price+DeltaStop,
if(price=PREV(0),PREV(0),PREV(0)))))),
NULL);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level indicator.

6.103 Trend Continuation Factor

Overview

The Trend Continuation Factor (TCF) was introduced by M. H. Pee. in the article "Trend Continuation
Factor". It was designed to help identify the market trend and direction.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

696 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

Positive values of either the PlusTCF or MinusTCF lines indicate a strong prevailing trend. Positive values
of PlusTCF indicate a strong Uptrend, while positive values of MinusTCF indicate a strong Downtrend.
Both PlusTCF and MinusTCF cannot be positive at the same time since an uptrend and a downtrend
cannot occur simultaneously. However, PlusTCF and MinusTCF can both be negative; this signifies
market consolidation (the absence of a prevailing trend).

Typical trading strategies include entering Buy positions when PlusTCF is positive and entering Sell
positions when MinusTCF is positive. An alternative trading strategy may include entering trades based
on the crossings of PlusTCF and MinusTCF.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Trend Continuation Factor

Function Name Alias: vt_TCF
Label Mask:
Trend Continuation Factor (%prc%,%periods%)
PlusTCF = %PlusTCF%, MinusTCF = %MinusTCF%
Placement: New Frame

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 697

Data Inspection Alias: Trend Continuation Factor

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: prc
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 35

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: PlusTCF
Name: (PlusTCF)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: MinusTCF
Name: (MinusTCF)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

pc:= If(ROC(prc,1,Points)>0,ROC(prc,1,Points),0);
nc:= If(ROC(prc,1,Points)<0,Neg(ROC(prc,1,Points)),0);
ncf:= If(nc=0,0,PREV(0)+nc);
PlusTCF:= Sum(pc,periods)-Sum(ncf,periods);

pc:= If(ROC(prc,1,Points)>0,ROC(prc,1,Points),0);
nc:= If(ROC(prc,1,Points)<0,Neg(ROC(prc,1,Points)),0);
pcf:= If(pc=0,0,PREV(0)+pc);
MinusTCF:= Sum(nc,periods)-Sum(pcf,periods);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Trend Continuation Factor indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 698 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.104 Trend Intensity Index (TII)

Overview

Developed by M.H. Pee, the trend intensity index (TII) is used to indicate the strength of a current trend
in the market. It was introduced in the June 2002 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks and
Commodities magazine.

Interpretation

TII determines the current strength of a price trend based on deviations of previous prices from a current
moving average.The stronger the current trend, the more likely the market will continue moving in its
current direction instead of changing course. According to M.H. Pee, values >80 and <20 indicate strong
trends.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Trend Intensity Index (TII)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 699

Function Name Alias: vt_TII

Label Mask: Trend Intensity Index (%Pr%,%Periods%,%mt%) = %tii%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Trend Intensity Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 30

[New] button...
Name: mt
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Simple

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: tii
Name: (tii)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +80.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

ma:= Mov(Pr,2*periods,mt);
sdp:= Sum(If(Pr-ma>0, Pr-ma,0),periods);
sdm:= Sum(If(ma-Pr>0, ma-Pr,0),periods);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 700 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

tii:= (sdp/(sdp + sdm)) * 100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Trend Intensity Index (TII) indicator.

6.105 Trend Oscillator (tosc)

Overview

Developed by Dennis Meyers and described in his article entitled “The Japanese Yen, Recursed”
published in the December 1998 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine, the
Trend Oscillator (a.k.a. tosc) is calculated by calculating the difference between Meyer's Recursive
Moving Trend Average (also described in that same article) and an exponential moving average of the
same n-periods.

Interpretation

Meyers mentions looking for changes in the price series that are above the normal noise fluctuations
indicating that a potential uptrend or downtrend has started. This is accomplished by examining the plot
of the tosc.

A potential buy signal is generated when the tosc’s value crosses above the “dup” level and a potential

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 701

sell signal is generated when the tosc’s value crosses below the “-ddn” level.

During Meyer’s testing, the optimum “dup” and “-ddn” levels were calculated using optimization, walk-
forward testing, out-of-sample testing, and averaging of all testing results.

For additional information, including the mathematical formulas for the Recursive Moving Trend Average
and TOSC, please review Dennis Meyer’s whitepaper entitled “The Japanese Yen, Recursed” published
in 1998, which is available from his website.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Trend Oscillator (tosc)

Function Name Alias: vt_TOSC
Label Mask: Trend Oscillator (tosc) (%Price%,%Periods%) = %TOSC%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Trend Oscillator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 21
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: TOSC
Name: (TOSC)
Line Color: dark purple
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 702 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Alpha:= 2/(Periods+1);
Bot:= (1-Alpha)*(If(BarCount()<Periods,Price,PREV(Price)))+Price;
RMTA:= (1-Alpha)*(If(BarCount()<Periods,Price,PREV(Price)))+(Alpha*Abs
(Price+Bot-Ref(Bot,-1)));
TOSC:= RMTA-Mov(Price,Periods,E);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Trend Oscillator (tosc) indicator.

6.106 Trend Trigger Factor (TTF)

Overview

M.H. Pee's article "Trend Trigger Factor" in the December 2004 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks
and Commodities magazine (TASC) presents the Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) indicator. The TTF is a
method of detecting up-trends and down-trends using buy power and sell power calculations derived over
the previous n-periods.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 703

Interpretation

Typical uses include creating an always-in-the-market system whereby Sell trades are generated when
the TTF crosses down through the 100 level and Buy signals are generated when the TTF crosses up
through the -100 level.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Trend Trigger Factor

Function Name Alias: vt_TTF
Label Mask: Trend Trigger Factor (%periods%) = %ttf%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Trend Trigger Factor

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 15

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: ttf
Name: (ttf)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +100.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 704 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Value: -100.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

bp:= HHV(H,periods)-Ref(LLV(L,periods),-periods);
sp:= Ref(HHV(H,periods),-periods)-LLV(L,periods);
ttf:= ((bp-sp)/(0.5*(bp+sp)))*100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) indicator.

6.107 Triple Exponential Average (TRIX)

Overview

Developed by Jack Hutson, the TRIX indicator is a triple-smoothed oscillator designed to eliminate
cycles shorter than the selected indicator period. TRIX oscillates above and below a zero line like many
other oscillators. However, it can also be used as a momentum indicator. When being used as a
momentum indicator, positive values suggest that momentum may be increasing while negative values
suggest that momentum may be decreasing.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 705

Interpretation

Trades can be initiated when the TRIX indicator crosses the zero line. A signal line can also be used to
generate trade signals. Divergence between the TRIX and price can also be an effective method of
generating trades.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Triple Exponential Average (TRIX)

Function Name Alias: vt_TRIX
Label Mask:
TRIX (%mapr%,%maper%) = %_TRIX%
TRIX Signal (%TRIXper%) = %TRIX_Signal%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Triple Exponential Average

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: mapr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: maper
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 15

[New] button...
Name: TRIXper
Display Name: Signal Line Periods
Type: integer
Default: 9

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _TRIX
Name: (TRIX)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 706 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: TRIX_Signal
Name: (TRIX Signal Line)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: dashed

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

MA1:= mov(mapr,maper,E);
MA2:= mov(ma1,maper,E);
MA3:= mov(ma2,maper,E);

_TRIX:= (MA3-ref(MA3,-1))/ref(MA3,-1);
TRIX_Signal:= mov(_TRIX,TRIXper,E);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the TRIX indicator.

6.108 Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA)

Overview

Developed by Patrick Mulloy and introduced in the January 1994 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks
& Commodities magazine, this trend indicator is an acronym standing for “Triple Exponential Moving
Average”. TEMA was designed to lessen the lag of a regular exponential moving average. It is a
composite of a single exponential MA, a double exponential MA, and a triple exponential MA that
produces less lag than any of its three components individually; it is NOT a moving average of a moving
average of a moving average.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 707

Interpretation

The TEMA can be used in place of traditional moving averages. Please refer to the "Moving Average"
indicator for additional details.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA)

Function Name Alias: vt_TEMA
Label Mask: TEMA (%pr%,%len%,%mat%) = %_Tema%
Placement: Price Frame
Data Inspection Alias: TEMA

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: pr
Display Name: MA Price
Type: price
Default: close

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 708 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

[New] button...
Name: len
Display Name: MA Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: mat
Display Name: MA Type
Type: MA Type
Default: Exponential

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: _Tema
Name: (Tema)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

_Tema:= 3 * mov(pr,len,mat) - 3 * mov(mov(pr,len,mat),len,mat) + mov(mov

(mov(pr,len,mat),len,mat),len,mat);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) indicator.

6.109 True Strength Index

Overview

The True Strength Index (TSI) is a variation of the Relative Strength indicator developed by William Blau.
It is a momentum-based indicator that combines the leading characteristic of a differencing momentum
calculation with the lagging characteristic of an averaging function to create an indicator that reflects
price direction and is more in sync with market turns.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 709

Interpretation

The TSI can be used to determine general trend direction as well as overbought-oversold conditions.
There are three basic techniques for using the TSI to generate trading signals.

Crossovers: TSI/Signal line Crossover: A buy signal occurs when the TSI crosses above the Signal line
and a sell signal occurs when the TSI crosses below the Signal line.

Divergence: Looking for divergences between the TSI and price can prove to be very effective in
identifying potential reversal and/or trend continuation points in price movement. There are several types
of divergences:

Classic Divergence (aka: Regular Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in price and higher lows in the TSI
Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in price and lower highs in the TSI

Hidden Divergence (aka: Reverse, Continuation, Trend Divergence)

Bullish Divergence = Lower lows in TSI and higher lows in price

Bearish Divergence = Higher highs in TSI and lower highs in price

Overbought/Oversold Conditions: The TSI can be used to identify potential overbought and oversold
conditions in price movements. An Overbought condition is generally described as the TSI being greater
than or equal to the +25 level while an oversold condition is generally described as the TSI being less
than or equal to the -25 level. Trades can be generated when the TSI crosses these levels. When the TSI
crosses above -25 a buy signal is given. Alternatively, when the TSI crosses below +25 a sell signal is

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

710 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

given.

Support/Resistance and “Failure Swings”: Failure swings (a.k.a. support/resistance breakouts) occur
when the TSI surpasses a previous high (peak) or falls below a recent low (trough).

TSI / Zero-level Crossover: When the TSI Histogram crosses above 0 a buy signal is given. Alternatively,
when the TSI crosses below 0 a sell signal is given.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: True Strength Index

Function Name Alias: vt_TSI
Label Mask:
TSI (%Pr%,%R%,%Sm%) = %TSI%
TSI Signal (%Sigp%) = %Sig%
TSI Histogram = %Hist%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: True Strength Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Pr
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: R
Display Name: Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 20

[New] button...
Name: Sm
Display Name: Double Smoothing Periods
Type: integer
Default: 13

[New] button...
Name: Sigp
Display Name: Signal Line Periods
Type: integer
Default: 7

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 711

[New] button...
Var Name: TSI
Name: (TSI)
Line Color: blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Sig
Name: (Signal Line)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: Hist
Name: (Histogram)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: histogram

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +25.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +0.0000
Color: black
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -25.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Num:= 100 * Mov(Mov((Pr-ref(Pr,-1)),R,E),Sm,E);

Den:= Mov(Mov(Abs(Pr-ref(Pr,-1)),R,E),Sm,E);

TSI:= if(Den<>0, Num/Den, 0);

Sig:= mov(tsi,Sigp,E);
Hist:= TSI - Sig;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the True Strength Index indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 712 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.110 Ulcer Index

Overview

Developed in 1987 by Peter G. Martin and published in 1989 in the book entitled “The Investor's Guide to
Fidelity Funds: Winning Strategies for Mutual Fund Investors” by Peter G. Martin and Byron B. McCann,
the Ulcer Index was mainly used by traders to measure short-term risk associated with trading
instruments such as stocks, indices, mutual funds, and/or commodities.

The Ulcer Index defines the riskiness (or “stress”) of a trading instrument by only considering the
downside volatility. This differs from other risk indicators such as standard deviation which consider both
upside and downside volatility in their calculations. Since the Ulcer Index is based on the notion that
only downside volatility is bad and upside volatility is good, it is calculated by measuring the depth and
duration (severity) of drawdowns from recent peaks (highs) in price. According to Martin, the Ulcer Index
“is the square root of the mean of the squared percentage drops in value”.

Interpretation

High Ulcer Index values correspond to high levels or risk associated with the trading instrument.
According to Martin, “the greater a drawdown in value, and the longer it takes to recover to earlier highs,
the higher the UI”.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 713

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Ulcer Index

Function Name Alias: vt_UlcerIndex
Label Mask: Ulcer Index (%Price%,%Periods%) = %Ulcer%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Ulcer Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Price
Display Name: Price
Type: price
Default: close

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 10
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: Ulcer
Name: (UI)
Line Color: dark red
Line Width: slightly thicker
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

Ulcer:= Sqrt(Sum(Power(100*(HHV(Price,Periods)-Price)/(HHV(Price,
Periods)),2),Periods)/Periods);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Ulcer Index indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 714 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

6.111 Ultimate Oscillator

Overview

In the April, 1985 issue of Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities magazine Larry Williams stated,

"The trouble for most oscillator work ers was, and has continued to be, that while frequently
oscillators lead sometimes they lead far too early and, instead of buying a bottom, you are buying
falling daggers and getting sliced up. Even the best oscillators consistently give premature buy and
sell signals."

The Ultimate Oscillator combines the weighted sums of price action from three different n-periods of time
to create an oscillator that ranges from 0 to 100. Values of 70 and above are considered to be
overbought while values of 30 and below are considered to be oversold. The time frames typically used
for the Ultimate Oscillator are 7 periods (short-term), 14 periods (intermediate-term), and 28 periods
(long-term). It’s important to note that these time periods overlap each other. In other words, the 28-
period time frame encompasses both the 14-period time frame and the 7-period time frame.

Interpretation

Larry Williams defined very specific criteria for generating buy and sell signals using the Ultimate
Oscillator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 715

According to Williams, a buy signal occurs when...

1. There is Bullish divergence between the price and Ultimate Oscillator (price makes lower lows while
oscillator makes higher lows)
2. During the divergence the oscillator has fallen below 30
3. The Ultimate Oscillator has risen above its high created during the divergence (i.e. the high between
the two lows)

The buy position is closed when the Ultimate Oscillator rises above 70, or rises above 50 and then falls
back below 45.

Conversely, a sell signal occurs when...

1. There is Bearish divergence between price and the Ultimate Oscillator (price makes higher highs while
oscillator makes lower highs)
2. During the divergence the oscillator has risen above 70
3. The Ultimate Oscillator has fallen below its low created during the divergence (i.e. the low between the
two highs)

The sell position is closed when the Ultimate Oscillator falls below 30 or rises back above 65.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Ultimate Oscillator

Function Name Alias: vt_Ultimate
Label Mask: Ultimate Oscillator (%STPeriods%) = %UltimateOscillator%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Ultimate Oscillator

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: STPeriods
Display Name: Short-Term Periods
Type: integer
Default: 7

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled
Name: blank1
Display Name: Medium-Term = 2x Short-Term
Type: Enumeration
Default: NULL

[New] button...
"Read Only" Enabled

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

716 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: blank2
Display Name: Long-Term = 4x Short-Term
Type: Enumeration
Default: NULL

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: UltimateOscillator
Name: (UO)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: +70.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +50.0000
Color: gray
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: +30.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TL:= min(L,ref(C,-1));
BP:= C-TL;
TR:= max((H-L),max((H-ref(C,-1)),ref(C,-1)-L));
BPSum1:= sum(BP,STPeriods);
BPSum2:= sum(BP,(STPeriods*2));
BPSum3:= sum(BP,(STPeriods*4));
TRSum1:= sum(TR,STPeriods);
TRSum2:= sum(TR,(STPeriods*2));
TRSum3:= sum(TR,(STPeriods*4));
RawUO:= 4*(BPSum1/TRSum1)+2*(BPSum2/TRSum2)+(BPSum3/TRSum3);
UltimateOscillator:= (RawUO/(4+2+1))*100;

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Ultimate Oscillator indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 717

6.112 Volatility Quality Index

Overview

The Volatility Quality Index was described by Thomas Stridsman in the August 2002 edition of Technical
Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine.

Interpretation

Unknown.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Volatility Quality Index

Function Name Alias: vt_VQI
Label Mask:
Volatility Quality Index = %SumVQI%
VQI Short MA (%ShMaPeriods%) = %ShortMa_SumVQI%

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

718 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

VQI Long MA (%LgMaPeriods%) = %LongMa_SumVQI%

Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Volatility Quality Index

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: ShMaPeriods
Display Name: Short MA Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 9
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

[New] button...
Name: LgMaPeriods
Display Name: Long MA Periods
Type: integer (with bounds)
Default: 200
Min. Bounds: 1
Max. Bounds: 9999

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: SumVQI
Name: (VQI)
Line Color: dark green
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: ShortMa_SumVQI
Name: (VQI Short MA)
Line Color: red
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

[New] button...
Var Name: LongMa_SumVQI
Name: (VQI Long MA)
Line Color: yellow
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

This indicator requires no horizontal lines.

6. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

TR:= ATR(1);
C1:= Ref(C,-1);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 719

VQI:= If(TR<>0 AND (H-L)<>0,((C-C1/TR)+((C-O)/(H-L)))*0.5,Prev(0));

VQI:= Abs(VQI)*((C-C1+(C-O))*0.5);
SumVQI:= Cum(VQI);
ShortMa_SumVQI:= Mov(SumVQI,ShMaPeriods,S);
LongMa_SumVQI:= Mov(SumVQI,LgMaPeriods,S);

7. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Volatility Quality Index indicator.

6.113 Williams Percent Range (%R)

Overview

Developed by Larry Williams, the Williams %R (pronounced "percent R") indicator is a momentum
oscillator used to measure overbought and oversold levels. It's very similar to the Stochastic Oscillator
except that the %R is plotted upside-down on a negative scale from 0 to -100 and has no internal
smoothing.

The %R defines the relationship of the close price relative to the High-Low range over n-Periods. The
nearer the close price is to the highest high of the range the nearer to zero the reading will be.
Alternatively, the nearer the close price is to the lowest low of the range the nearer to -100 the reading
will be. If the close price equals the highest high of the range the reading will be 0; if the close price
equals the lowest low of the range to reading will be -100.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

720 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Interpretation

As an overbought/oversold indicator, Williams %R values from 0 to -20 are considered overbought while
values from -80 to -100 are considered oversold. An interesting phenomenon of the %R indicator is its
uncanny ability to anticipate a reversal in the underlying trading instrument's price.

Construction

1. Click the Ribbon>Technical Analysis menu>Indicators group>Indicator Builder command>

Indicator Builder window's [New] button

2. In the General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name: Williams %R
Function Name Alias: vt_WilliamsR
Label Mask: Williams %%R (%Periods%) = %R%
Placement: New Frame
Data Inspection Alias: Williams %R

3. In the Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Name: Periods
Display Name: Periods
Type: integer
Default: 14

4. In the Output Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

[New] button...
Var Name: R
Name: (%R)
Line Color: dark blue
Line Width: thin
Line Type: solid

5. In the Horizontal Line tab, create the following lines:

[New] button...
Value: -20.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

[New] button...
Value: -80.0000
Color: red
Width: thin
Type: dashed

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Technical Indicators 721

4. In the Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula:

R:= ((HHV(H,Periods)-C) / (HHV(H,Periods) - LLV(L,Periods))) * -100;

5. Click the "Save" icon to finish building the Williams %R indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

Trading Systems

Part

VII
 Trading Systems 723

7 Trading Systems

A trading system, simply defined, consists of a concise set of non-emotional, objective rules based on
measurable factors that are used to describe when to buy and sell a trade instrument. A trading system
can generate various types of alerts based on pre-defined conditions and request automated trading
actions* to be taken on those conditions.

VT Trader provides clients with several automated trading systems. These trading systems generate
alerts based on some of the most common ways that many of VT Trader's standard technical indicators
are used or can be used for technical analysis. These trading systems can be generally categorized
into: breakout methods, trend/momentum trading methods, and range/counter-trend trading methods.

While fully functional and able to execute automated trades while attached to a chart and running in
Auto-Trade mode, these trading systems are meant to serve only as examples of some types of
systems that can be created using VT Trader's Trading Systems Builder 205 and scripting language 329 .
These trading systems are not to be construed as recommendations for trading strategies nor does
Visual Trading Systems LLC or its affiliates have access to or maintain records relating to potential
profitability (a.k .a. back tests) of the sample automated trading systems. * Please note: Certain rules
and restrictions apply to any trading system running in Auto-Trade mode. It is STRONGLY
recommended that you take a few minutes to read through the Automated Trading FAQ for trading
systems by clicking here 1148 .

Below is an alphabetical listing of the automated trading systems. Click on the trading system's name
for full details.

A 723 B 723 C 723 D 724 E 724 F 724 G 724 H 724 I 724 J 724 K 724 L 725 M 725 N 725 O 725 P 725 Q
725 R 726 S 726 T 726 U 726 V 726 W 726 X 726 Y 727 Z 727

Aroon Oscillator Cross System 727

Balance of Power Cross System 730

Bollinger Bands Breakout System 734
Bollinger Bands Reversal System 738
Bull / Bear Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks Reversal System 742
Bull / Bear Japanese Candlesticks Reversal System 745

Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Cross System 749

Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Reversal System 753
Chande's QStick Cross System 757
Chande's Trend Momentum System 761
Chande's TrendScore Trend Surfing System 765
Chande's VIDYA Cross System 769
Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Cross System 773
Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Reversal System 777

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

724 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System 781

Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Zero Cross System 785
Chaos Awesome Oscillator Reversal System 789
Chaos Fractals Breakout System 793
Chaos Fractals Reversal System 797
Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Complex Cross System 801
Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Cross System 805
Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Reversal System 809
Complex Trend System #1 (Fast MA / Slow MA / RSI / MACD) 813

Darvas Box Breakout System 817

Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) Cross System 821
Directional Movement Index "Extreme Price Rule" System 825
Directional Movement Index Cross System 829
Disparity Index Cross System 833
Disparity Index Reversal System 837
Donchian Channel Breakout System 841
Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) Cross System 845
Double Stochastic Oscillator Cross System 849
Double Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System 852

Ehlers Fisher Transform Cross System 856

Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Cross System 860
Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Reversal System 864
Ehlers MAMA / FAMA Cross System 868
Ehlers Relative Vigor Index Cross System 871

--

Gann Basic "Swing Chartist" System 875

Hull Moving Average Cross System 879

Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Strong Signals" System 883

Inertia Cross System 888

--

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 725

Kase CD Cross System 891

Kase Peak Oscillator Cross System 895
Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) Cross System 899
Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio UpTrend / DownTrend System 903
Keltner Bands Breakout System 907
Keltner Bands Reversal System 911
Keltner Channels Breakout System 915
Keltner Channels Reversal System 919
Kurtosis Cross System 923

Linear Regression Cross System 927

Linear Regression Reversal System 931
Linear Regression Slope Cross System 934
Linear Regression Slope High / Low Breakout System 938
Linear Regression Slope Tops / Bottoms Reversal System 942

MACD Fast Line / Signal Line Cross System 946

MACD Fast Line / Zero Cross System 950
MACD Histogram High / Low Breakout System 954
MACD Histogram Tops and Bottoms Reversal System 958
McClellan Oscillator Cross System 962
McClellan Summation Index Cross System 966
McGinley Dynamic Cross System 970
Momentum Cross System 974
Moving Average Envelope Breakout System 978
Moving Average Envelope Reversal System 982
Moving Averages Cross System 986
Moving Averages Double Cross System 991
Moving Slope Rate of Change Cross System 995

--

--

Parabolic SAR Reversal System 999

Percentage Price Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System 1003
Percentage Price Oscillator / Zero Cross System 1007
Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram High / Low Breakout System 1011
Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal System 1015
Polarized Fractal Efficiency Cross System 1019

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

726 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Quantitative Qualitative Estimation (QQE) Cross System 1023

Rate of Change (ROC) Cross System 1029

Relative Momentum Index Cross System 1032
Relative Momentum Index Reversal System 1036
Relative Strength Index (RSI) Cross System 1040
Relative Strength Index (RSI) Reversal System 1044
Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Cross System 1048
Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Reversal System 1052
RSI Bollinger Bands Breakout System 1056
RSI Bollinger Bands Reversal System 1060
RSI Moving Averages Cross System 1064

Schaff Trend Cycle Double Reversal System 1070

Schaff Trend Cycle Reversal System 1073
Slow Stochastic Oscillator Cross System 1077
Slow Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System 1080
STARC Bands Reversal System 1084
Stochastic Momentum Index Cross System 1088

T3 Moving Average Cross System 1096

Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level Cross System 1100
Trend Continuation Factor Cross System 1104
Trend Continuation Factor Strong Trend System 1108
Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) Reversal System 1112
Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) Cross System 1116
Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) Cross System 1119
True Strength Index Cross System 1123

Ultimate Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System 1126

Ultimate Oscillator Cross System 1130
Ultimate Oscillator Reversal System 1134

--

Williams Percent Range (%R) Cross System 1138

Williams Percent Range (%R) Reversal System 1142

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 727

--

--

--

RISK DISCLAIMER

Past performance is not indicative of future results. Trading foreign exchange and futures on margin
carries a high level of risk, and may not be suitable for all investors. The high degree of leverage can
work against you as well as for you. Before deciding to invest in foreign exchange or futures you should
carefully consider your investment objectives, level of experience, and risk appetite. The possibility
exists that you could sustain a loss of some or all of your initial investment and therefore you should not
invest money that you cannot afford to lose. You should be aware of all the risks associated with foreign
exchange and futures trading, and seek advice from an independent financial advisor if you have any
doubts.

The materials presented in this manual are solely for informational purposes. No offer or solicitation to
buy or sell currencies or commodities, or any type of investment or trading advice or strategy, is made,
given or in any manner endorsed by Visual Trading Systems LLC or its affiliates. You are fully
responsible for any investment or trading decisions you make, and such decisions should be based
solely on your evaluation of your financial circumstances, investment or trading objectives, risk tolerance
and liquidity needs.

7.1 Aroon Oscillator Cross System

Overview

The Aroon Oscillator Cross System uses the Aroon Oscillator to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Aroon Oscillator crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the Aroon Oscillator crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Aroon Oscillator Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

728 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Aroon Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a blue histogram.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Aroon Oscillator crossed above zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Aroon Oscillator crossed below zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Aroon Oscillator Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

System Parameters

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 729

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Aroon Oscillator Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Aroon Oscillator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 730 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.2 Balance of Power Cross System

Overview

The Balance of Power Cross System uses the Balance of Power (BOP) indicator to generate signals
for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the BOP crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the BOP crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Balance of Power Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 731

The Balance of Power (BOP) indicator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a black histogram. Its mid-
level (0) displays in the same frame as a dashed black line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the BOP is greater
than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the BOP is less than
zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Balance of Power crossed above zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Balance of Power crossed below zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Balance of Power Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

732 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 733

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

BOP Smoothing Periods and DOP Smoothing Type

These parameters define the number of periods and the type of moving average used to used to
calculate the Balance of Power (BOP) indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 734 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.3 Bollinger Bands Breakout System

Overview

The Bollinger Bands Breakout System uses Bollinger Bands to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the upper Bollinger Band. If the "Require
Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Long signal
is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of the upper Bollinger Band breakout bar
within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the lower Bollinger Band. If the "Require
Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Short
signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the lower Bollinger Band
breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 735

selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Bollinger Bands Breakout System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The upper and lower Bollinger Bands display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, green lines. The
middle Bollinger Band displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, green line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the upper Bollinger Band
breakout bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the Low price of
the lower Bollinger Band breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has broken out above the Upper Bollinger Band." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has broken out below the Lower Bollinger Band." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Bollinger Bands Breakout System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

736 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 737

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Bollinger Bands Price, Periods, MA Type, and Std. Deviations

These parameters define price, number of periods, MA Type, and number of standard deviations
used to calculate the Bollinger Bands.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 738 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.4 Bollinger Bands Reversal System

Overview

The Bollinger Bands Reversal System uses Bollinger Bands to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the price reverses from the lower Bollinger Band using either a 1-bar or
2-bar reversal formation.

Long 1-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower Bollinger Band AND
Low price <= Lower Bollinger Band

Long 2-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower Bollinger Band AND
Close price > Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago < Open price 1 bar ago AND Low
price 1 bar ago <= Lower Bollinger Band 1 bar ago

A Short signal is generated when the price reverses from the upper Bollinger Band using either a 1-bar or
2-bar reversal formation.

Short 1-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper Bollinger Band AND

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 739

High price >= Upper Bollinger Band

Short 2-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper Bollinger Band AND
Close price < Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago > Open price 1 bar ago AND High
price 1 bar ago >= Upper Bollinger Band 1 bar ago

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Bollinger Bands Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The upper and lower Bollinger Bands display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, green lines. The
middle Bollinger Band displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, green line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from Lower Bollinger Band."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from the Upper Bollinger Band."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Bollinger Bands Reversal System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

740 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 741

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Bollinger Bands Price, Periods, MA Type, and Std. Deviations

These parameters define price, number of periods, MA Type, and number of standard deviations
used to calculate the Bollinger Bands.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 742 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.5 Bull / Bear Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks Reversal System

Overview

The Bull / Bear Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks Reversal System uses the Heikin-Ashi candlesticks to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the specified number of consecutive Bull Heikin-Ashi candlesticks
form. A Bull candlestick forms when its Close price is greater than its Open price.

A Short signal is generated when the specified number of consecutive Bear Heikin-Ashi candlesticks
form. A Bear candlestick forms when its Close price is less than its Open price.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 743

The Bull / Bear Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks Reversal System consists of the following output variables
and display parameters:

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Bull Heikin-Ashi Candle(s) formation suggests a potential price
reversal." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Bear Heikin-Ashi Candle(s) formation suggests a potential price
reversal." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Bull / Bear Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks Reversal System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

744 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

# of Bull H.A. Candles Required for Reversal

This parameter defines the number of consecutive Bull Heikin-Ashi candlesticks that must form
before a Long signal is generated.

# of Bear H.A. Candles Required for Reversal

This parameter defines the number of consecutive Bear Heikin-Ashi candlesticks that must form
before a Short signal is generated.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 745

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.6 Bull / Bear Japanese Candlesticks Reversal System

Overview

The Bull / Bear Japanese Candlesticks Reversal System uses the traditional Japanese candlesticks
to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the specified number of consecutive Bull Japanese candlesticks form.
A Bull candlestick forms when its Close price is greater than its Open price.

A Short signal is generated when the specified number of consecutive Bear Japanese candlesticks form.
A Bear candlestick forms when its Close price is less than its Open price.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

746 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Bull / Bear Japanese Candlesticks Reversal System consists of the following output variables
and display parameters:

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Bull Candle(s) formation suggests a potential price reversal."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Bear Candle(s) formation suggests a potential price reversal."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Bull / Bear Japanese Candlesticks Reversal System attached
to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 747

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

748 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

# of Bull Candles Required for Reversal

This parameter defines the number of consecutive Bull Japanese candlesticks that must form before
a Long signal is generated.

# of Bear Candles Required for Reversal

This parameter defines the number of consecutive Bear Japanese candlesticks that must form
before a Short signal is generated.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 749

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.7 Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Cross System

Overview

The Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Cross System uses Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index
to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index crosses above its Long Entry
Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index crosses below its Short
Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

750 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Cross System consists of the following output variables
and display parameters:

The Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid
blue line. Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines.
Its mid-level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in
Additional Frame 1 as dashed blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Chande's DMI crossed above its Long Entry Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! Chande's DMI crossed below its Short Entry Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Cross System attached
to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 751

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

752 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chande's DMI Price, Std. Dev. Periods, MA of Std. Dev. Periods, MA of Std. Dev. Type, Periods,
and Dynamic Periods Lower/Upper Bounds

These parameters define the values used to calculate Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index. Please
refer to Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index's Notes section in VT Trader for additional indicator
details.

Chande's DMI Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Chande's DMI-related conditions to generate the Long
signal.

Chande's DMI Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Chande's DMI-related conditions to generate the Short
signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 753

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.8 Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Reversal System

Overview

The Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Reversal System uses Chande's Dynamic Momentum
Index to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index crosses above its OverSold
Level from below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index crosses below its
OverBought Level from above OR Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index crosses below its OverSold Level
from above.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

754 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

A Short Entry signal is generated when Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index crosses below its
OverBought Level from above.

A Short Exit signal is generated when Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index crosses above its OverSold
Level from below OR Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index crosses above its OverBought Level from
below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Reversal System consists of the following output variables
and display parameters:

Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid, slightly thicker blue
line.

Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1
as dashed red lines.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Chande's DMI crossed above its OverSold Level." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Chande's DMI crossed below its OverBought Level or OverSold
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable
and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! Chande's DMI crossed below its OverBought Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the message
"Short exit signal detected! Chande's DMI crossed above its OverSold Level or OverBought Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index Reversal System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 755

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

756 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chande's DMI Price, Std. Dev. Periods, MA of Std. Dev. Periods, MA of Std. Dev. Type, Periods,
and Dynamic Periods Lower/Upper Bounds

These parameters define the values used to calculate Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index. Please
refer to Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index's Notes section in VT Trader for additional indicator
details.

Chande's DMI OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index-
related conditions to generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

Chande's DMI OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index-related
conditions to generate the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 757

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.9 Chande's QStick Cross System

Overview

The Chande's QStick Cross System uses Chande's QStick to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when Chande's QStick Histogram crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when Chande's QStick Histogram crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Chande's QStick Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

758 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Chande's QStick Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is
green if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is
less than the value 1 bar ago.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a dark blue background while Chande's QStick
Histogram is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a dark red background while Chande's
QStick Histogram is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a dark blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Chande's QStick crossed above zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a dark red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Chande's QStick crossed below zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chande's QStick Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 759

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

760 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chande's QStick Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate Chande's QStick

Chande's QStick MA Type

This parameter defines the type of moving average used to calculate Chande's QStick

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 761

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.10 Chande's Trend Momentum System

Overview

The Chande's Trend Momentum System uses Chande's Momentum Oscillator to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when Chande's Momentum Oscillator crosses above its Long Entry
Level.

A Long Exit signal is generated when Chande's Momentum Oscillator crosses below its OverBought
Level OR Chande's Momentum Oscillator crosses below its Short Entry Level.

A Short Entry signal is generated when Chande's Momentum Oscillator crosses below its Short Entry
Level.

A Short Exit signal is generated when Chande's Momentum Oscillator crosses above its OverSold Level
OR Chande's Momentum Oscillator crosses above its Long Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

762 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Chande's Trend Momentum System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

Chande's Momentum Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line.

Chande's Momentum Oscillator OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as
dashed red lines.

Chande's Momentum Oscillator Long Entry and Short Entry levels display in Additional Frame 1 as
dashed black lines.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! CMO crossed above its Long Entry Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected!CMO crossed below its OverBought Level or its Short Entry
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable
and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! CMO crossed below its Short Entry Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the message
"Short exit signal detected! CMO crossed above its OverSold Level or its Long Entry Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chande's Trend Momentum System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 763

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

764 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chande's Mom. Osc. Price and Chande' Mom. Osc. Periods

These parameters define the values used to calculate Chande's Momentum Oscillator.

Chande's Mom. Osc. OverBought Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Chande's Momentum Oscillator-related conditions to
generate the Long Exit signal.

Chande's Mom. Osc. OverSold Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Chande's Momentum Oscillator-related conditions to
generate the Short Exit signal.

Chande's Mom. Osc. Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Chande's Momentum Oscillator-related conditions to
generate the Long Entry signal.

Chande's Mom. Osc. Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Chande's Momentum Oscillator-related conditions to
generate the Short Entry signal.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 765

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.11 Chande's TrendScore Trend Surfing System

Overview

The Chande's TrendScore Trend Surfing System uses Chande's TrendScore indicator to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when Chande's TrendScore is equal to 10 for two bars.

A Long Exit signal is generated when Chande's TrendScore crosses below zero.

A Short Entry signal is generated when Chande's TrendScore is equal to -10 for two bars.

A Short Exit signal is generated when Chande's TrendScore crosses above zero.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

766 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Chande's TrendScore Trend Surfing System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

Chande's Momentum Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid, slightly thicker green
line. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a dashed black line.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Chande's TrendScore has been equal to 10 for two bars."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Chande's TrendScore crossed below zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters
defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! Chande's TrendScore has been equal to -10 for two bars."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the message
"Short exit signal detected! Chande's TrendScore crossed above zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and the parameters
defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chande's TrendScore Trend Surfing System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 767

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

768 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chande's TrendScore Price

These parameters define the price used to calculate Chande's TrendScore

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 769

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.12 Chande's VIDYA Cross System

Overview

Chande's VIDYA Cross System uses fast and slow Chande Variable Index Dynamic Averages
(VIDYA's) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast VIDYA crosses above the Slow VIDYA.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast VIDYA crosses below the Slow VIDYA.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Chande's VIDYA Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The Fast VIDYA displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid blue line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

770 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Slow VIDYA displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Fast VIDYA is
greater than the Slow VIDYA.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Fast VIDYA is
less than the Slow VIDYA.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast VIDYA crossed above Slow VIDYA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast VIDYA crossed below Slow VIDYA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 771

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

772 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast VIDYA Price, Fast CMO Periods, and Fast VIDYA Periods

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and number of CMO periods used to
calculate the Fast Variable Index Dynamic Average (VIDYA).

Slow VIDYA Price, Slow CMO Periods, and Slow VIDYA Periods

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and number of CMO periods used to
calculate the Slow Variable Index Dynamic Average (VIDYA).

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 773

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.13 Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Cross System

Overview

The Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Cross System uses the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

774 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Chaos Accelerator Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is
green if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is
less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Chaos Accelerator
Oscillator is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Chaos
Accelerator Oscillator is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Chaos Accelerator Osc. crossed above zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Chaos Accelerator Osc. crossed below zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 775

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

776 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chaos AC Osc. Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Chaos AC Osc. Fast MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the fast moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Chaos AC Osc. Slow MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the slow moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Chaos AC Osc. Signal MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the signal line used to calculate the
Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 777

Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.14 Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Reversal System

Overview

The Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Reversal System uses the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator turns upwards (i.e. the current Chaos
AC value is greater than the previous Chaos AC value).

A Short signal is generated when the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator turns downwards (i.e. the current
Chaos AC value is less than the previous Chaos AC value).

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

778 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Chaos Accelerator Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is
green if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is
less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Chaos Accelerator Osc. turned upwards." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Chaos Accelerator Osc. turned downwards." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator Reversal System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 779

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

780 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chaos AC Osc. Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Chaos AC Osc. Fast MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the fast moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Chaos AC Osc. Slow MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the slow moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Chaos AC Osc. Signal MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the signal line used to calculate the
Chaos Accelerator Oscillator

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 781

Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.15 Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System

Overview

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System uses the Chaos Awesome Oscillator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Chaos Awesome Oscillator crosses above its Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when the Chaos Awesome Oscillator crosses below its Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

782 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System consists of the following output variables
and display parameters:

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is
green if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is
less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator's Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a blue dashed line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Chaos Awesome Osc. crossed above its Signal Line."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Chaos Awesome Osc. crossed below its Signal Line."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 783

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

784 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chaos AO Osc. Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Fast MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the fast moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Slow MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the slow moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Signal MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator's
Signal Line

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 785

Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.16 Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Zero Cross System

Overview

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Zero Cross System uses the Chaos Awesome Oscillator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Chaos Awesome Oscillator crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the Chaos Awesome Oscillator crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

786 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Zero Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is
green if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is
less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator's Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a blue dashed line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Chaos Awesome
Oscillator is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Chaos Awesome
Oscillator is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Chaos Awesome Osc. crossed above zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Chaos Awesome Osc. crossed below zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chaos Awesome Oscillator / Zero Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 787

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

788 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chaos AO Osc. Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Fast MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the fast moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Slow MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the slow moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Signal MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator's
Signal Line

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 789

Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.17 Chaos Awesome Oscillator Reversal System

Overview

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator Reversal System uses the Chaos Awesome Oscillator to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Chaos Awesome Oscillator turns upwards (i.e. the current Chaos
AO value is greater than the previous Chaos AO value).

A Short signal is generated when the Chaos Awesome Oscillator turns downwards (i.e. the current
Chaos AO value is less than the previous Chaos AO value).

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

790 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is
green if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is
less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Chaos Awesome Oscillator's Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a blue dashed line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Chaos Awesome Osc. turned upwards." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Chaos Awesome Osc. turned downwards." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chaos Awesome Oscillator Reversal System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 791

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

792 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Chaos AO Osc. Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Fast MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the fast moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Slow MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the slow moving average used to
calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator

Chaos AO Osc. Signal MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Chaos Awesome Oscillator's
Signal Line

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 793

Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.18 Chaos Fractals Breakout System

Overview

The Chaos Fractals Breakout System uses the Chaos Fractals indicator to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the most recent Up Fractal. If the
"Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the
Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of the most recent Up
Fractal breakout bar within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the most recent Down Fractal. If the
"Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the
Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the most recent Down
Fractal breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

794 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Chaos Fractals Breakout System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Up Fractals levels are shown in the Price Frame as small blue dots.

The highest High value of the Up Fractals are shown in the Price Frame as large dark blue dots.
These dots are shown over the 3rd bar of the fractal only after the fractal has been identified on its
5th bar.

The Down Fractals levels are shown in the Price Frame as small red dots. These dots are shown
under the 3rd bar of the fractal only after the fractal has been identified on its 5th bar.

The lowest Low value of the Down Fractals are shown in the Price Frame as large dark red dots.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the most recent Up Fractal
breakout bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the Low price of
the most recent Down Fractal breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has broken out above the most recent Up Fractal." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has broken out below the most recent Down Fractal."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chaos Fractals Breakout System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 795

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

796 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 797

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.19 Chaos Fractals Reversal System

Overview

The Chaos Fractals Reversal System uses the Chaos Fractals indicator to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the prices form a new Down Fractal.

A Short signal is generated when the prices form a new Up Fractal.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

798 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Chaos Fractals Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Up Fractals levels are shown in the Price Frame as small blue dots.

The highest High value of the Up Fractals are shown in the Price Frame as large dark blue dots.
These dots are shown over the 3rd bar of the fractal only after the fractal has been identified on its
5th bar.

The Down Fractals levels are shown in the Price Frame as small red dots. These dots are shown
under the 3rd bar of the fractal only after the fractal has been identified on its 5th bar.

The lowest Low value of the Down Fractals are shown in the Price Frame as large dark red dots.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has formed a new Down Fractal." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has formed a new Up Fractal." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Chaos Fractals Reversal System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 799

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

800 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 801

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.20 Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Complex Cross System

Overview

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Complex Cross System uses the Commodity Channel Index
(CCI) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the CCI crosses above the CCI + Control Level, but only if the
CCI has crossed below and then above zero since the 2nd most recent occurrence of the CCI crossing
above the CCI + Control Level.

If the CCI crosses above the CCI + Extreme Level, then a Long Exit signal occurs when the CCI crosses
below the CCI + Control Level; however, if the CCI does not cross above the CCI + Extreme Level, then
a Long Exit signal occurs when the CCI crosses below zero.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the CCI crosses below the CCI - Control Level, but only if the CCI
has crossed above and then below zero since the 2nd most recent occurrence of the CCI crossing below
the CCI - Control Level.

If the CCI crosses below the CCI - Extreme Level, then a Short Exit signal occurs when the CCI crosses
above the CCI - Control Level; however, if the CCI does not cross below the CCI - Extreme Level, then a
Short Exit signal occurs when the CCI crosses above zero.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

802 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Complex Cross System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line. Its mid-
level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

Commodity Channel Index (CCI)'s +/- Control Levels display in Additional Frame 1 as dashed blue
lines.

Commodity Channel Index (CCI)'s +/- Extreme Levels display in Additional Frame 1 as dashed red
lines.

The Trend Frame displays a blue up arrow against a light blue background while the Commodity
Channel Index (CCI) is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Commodity
Channel Index (CCI) is less than zero.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The CCI Complex Cross Long Entry conditions have been
met." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The CCI Complex Cross Long Exit conditions have been
met." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable
and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The CCI Complex Cross Short Entry conditions have
been met." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade
mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell
output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the
Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The CCI Complex Cross Short Exit conditions have been
met." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 803

Below is a screenshot that shows the Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Complex Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

804 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

CCI Price, Periods, and Formula Calculation Method

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and method used to calculate the Commodity
Channel Index (CCI).

CCI +/- Control Level

This parameter defines the positive/negative values used in the conditions to generate the Long Entry
, Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

CCI +/- Extreme Level

This parameter defines the positive/negative values used in the conditions to generate the Long Exit
and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 805

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.21 Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Cross System

Overview

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Cross System uses the Commodity Channel Index (CCI) to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the CCI crosses above its Long Entry Level.

A Short signal is generated when the CCI crosses below its Short Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

806 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line. It's
overbought (+100) and oversold (-100) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI)'s Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in Additional
Frame 1 as dashed blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The CCI crossed above its Long Entry Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! The CCI crossed below its Short Entry Level." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 807

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

808 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

CCI Price, Periods, and Formula Calculation Method

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and method used to calculate the Commodity
Channel Index (CCI).

CCI Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the CCI-related conditions to generate the Long signal.

CCI Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the CCI-related conditions to generate the Short signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 809

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.22 Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Reversal System

Overview

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Reversal System uses the Commodity Channel Index (CCI) to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the CCI crosses above its OverSold Level from below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the CCI crosses below its OverBought Level from above OR the
CCI crosses below its OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the CCI crosses below its OverBought Level from above.

A Short Exit signal is generated when the CCI crosses above its OverSold Level from below OR the CCI
crosses above its OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

810 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Commodity Channel Index (CCI) displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line. Its mid-
level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

Commodity Channel Index (CCI)'s OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1
as dashed red lines.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The CCI crossed above its OverSold Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The CCI crossed below its OverBought Level or OverSold
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable
and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The CCI crossed below its OverBought Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The CCI crossed above its OverSold Level or OverBought
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Commodity Channel Index (CCI) Reversal System attached to
a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 811

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

812 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

CCI Price, Periods, and Formula Calculation Method

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and method used to calculate the Commodity
Channel Index (CCI).

CCI OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the CCI-related conditions to generate the Long
Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

CCI OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the CCI-related conditions to generate the Long
Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 813

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.23 Complex Trend System #1 (Fast MA / Slow MA / RSI / MACD)

Overview

The Complex Trend System #1 (Fast MA / Slow MA / RSI / MACD) uses Fast and Slow Moving
Averages, the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Moving Average Convergence Divergence (MACD)
indicators to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated for the first bar when all of the following conditions become true:
- Fast Moving Average is greater than Slow Moving Average
- RSI is greater than 50, and
- MACD Fast Line is greater than MACD Signal Line

A Short signal is generated for the first bar when all of the following conditions become true:
- Fast Moving Average is less than Slow Moving Average
- RSI is less than 50, and
- MACD Fast Line is less than MACD Signal Line

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

814 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Complex Trend System #1 (Fast MA / Slow MA / RSI / MACD) consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

The Fast Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid blue line.

The Slow Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid red line.

The Relative Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid green line.
Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The MACD Fast Line, Signal Line, and Histogram display in Additional Frame 2. The MACD Fast
Line is the thin, solid blue line; the MACD Signal Line is the thin, solid red line; the MACD
Histogram is the thin, green histogram. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black
dashed line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Fast MA is
greater than the Slow MA and the RSI is greater than 50 and the MACD Fast Line is greater than
the MACD Signal Line.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Fast MA is less
than the Slow MA and the RSI is less than 50 and the MACD Fast Line is less than the MACD
Signal Line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast MA > Slow MA AND RSI > 50 AND MACD Fast Line >
MACD Signal Line." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in
the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast MA < Slow MA AND RSI < 50 AND MACD Fast Line <
MACD Signal Line." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in
the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Complex Trend System #1 (Fast MA / Slow MA / RSI / MACD)
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 815

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

816 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast MA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Fast Moving Average.

Slow MA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Slow Moving Average.

RSI Price and RSI Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Relative Strength
Index.

MACD Fast MA Price, MACD Fast MA Periods, and MACD Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Slow MA Price, MACD Slow MA Periods, and MACD Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 817

MACD Signal MA Periods and MACD Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the MACD indicator.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.24 Darvas Box Breakout System

Overview

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

818 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Darvas Box Breakout System uses the Darvas Box to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the top Darvas Box. If the "Require Price
Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Long signal is
generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of the top Darvas Box breakout bar within
the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the bottom Darvas Box. If the "Require
Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Short
signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the bottom Darvas Box
breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Darvas Box Breakout System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The Darvas Box displays in the Price Frame. The top Darvas Box is a slightly thicker, solid blue
line and the bottom Darvas box is a slightly thicker, solid red line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the top Darvas Box breakout
bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the Low price of the
bottom Darvas Box breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has broken out above the Top Darvas Box." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has broken out below the Bottom Darvas Box." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Darvas Box Breakout System attached to a chart window using
its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 819

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

820 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Darvas Box Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Darvas Box.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 821

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.25 Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) Cross System

Overview

The Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) Cross System uses the Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the DPO crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the DPO crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

822 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) displays in Additional Frame 1 as solid blue line. Its mid-level
(0) displays in the same frame as a dashed black line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the DPO is greater
than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the DPO is less than
zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The DPO crossed above zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The DPO crossed below zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 823

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

824 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

DPO Price and DPO Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Detrended Price
Oscillator (DPO).

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 825

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.26 Directional Movement Index "Extreme Point Rule" System

Overview

The Directional Movement Index "Extreme Point Rule" System uses the Directional Movement
Index to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when +DI is greater than -DI and the Close price crosses above the
High price of the bar when +DI crossed above -DI.

A Long Exit signal is generated when +DI crosses below -DI.

A Short Entry signal is generated when +DI is less than -DI and the Close price crosses below the Low
price of bar when +DI crossed below -DI.

A Short Exit signal is generated when +DI crosses above -DI.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

826 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Directional Movement Index "Extreme Point Rule" System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

The Directional Movement Index's +DI displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line.

The Directional Movement Index's -DI displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid red line.

The Long Extreme Point value displays in the Price Frame as small blue dots.

The Short Extreme Point value displays in the Price Frame as small red dots.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! +DI > -DI and the Close price crossed above the High price
of the bar when +DI crossed above -DI." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio
sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on
the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! +DI crossed below -DI." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the
Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! +DI < -DI and the Close price crossed below the Low price
of the bar when +DI crossed below -DI." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio
sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on
the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the message
"Short exit signal detected! +DI crossed above -DI." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an
audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders
based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Directional Movement Index "Extreme Point Rule" System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 827

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

828 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

DMI Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used calculate the Directional Movement Index.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 829

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.27 Directional Movement Index Cross System

Overview

The Directional Movement Index Cross System uses the Directional Movement Index to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities. The Average Directional Movement Index (ADX) is included as
a visual aid only.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when +DI crosses above -DI.

A Short signal is generated when +DI crosses below -DI.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Directional Movement Index Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

830 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Directional Movement Index's +DI displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line.

The Directional Movement Index's -DI displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid red line.

The Average Directional Movement Index (ADX) displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly-thicker,
solid green line.

The Short Extreme Point value displays in the Price Frame as small red dots.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background along with beginning/ending
vertical blue lines while +DI is greater than -DI.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background along with beginning/
ending vertical red lines while +DI is less than -DI.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message
"Long entry signal detected! +DI crossed above -DI." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an
audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based
on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! +DI crossed below -DI." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Directional Movement Index Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 831

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

832 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

DMI / ADX Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used calculate the Directional Movement Index and
the Average Directional Movement Index (ADX).

ADX Type

This parameter defines the type of Average Directional Movement Index (ADX) that is calculated.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 833

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.28 Disparity Index Cross System

Overview

The Disparity Index Cross System uses the Disparity Index indicator to generate signals for potential
trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Disparity Index crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the Disparity Index crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Disparity Index Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The Disparity Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as solid green line. Its mid-level (0) displays in

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

834 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

the same frame as a dashed black line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Disparity Index is
greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Disparity Index is
less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Disparity Index crossed above zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Disparity Index crossed below zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Disparity Index Cross System attached to a chart window using
its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 835

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

836 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Disparity Index Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Disparity Index.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 837

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.29 Disparity Index Reversal System

Overview

The Disparity Index Reversal System uses the Disparity Index indicator to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Disparity Index crosses above its OverSold Level from below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Disparity Index crosses below its OverBought Level, Zero, or
its OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Disparity Index crosses below its OverBought Level from
above.

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Disparity Index crosses above its OverSold Level, Zero, or its
OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

838 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Disparity Index Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Disparity Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid green line. Its mid-level (0) displays
in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Disparity Index's OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as dashed red
lines.

The Trend Frame displays a blue background while the Disparity Index is less than its OverSold
Level.

The Trend Frame displays a red background while the Disparity Index is greater than its
OverBought Level.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The Disparity Index crossed above its OverSold Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The Disparity Index crossed below its OverBought Level,
Zero, or its OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.
If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The Disparity Index crossed below its OverBought
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The Disparity Index crossed above its OverSold Level, Zero,
or its OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If
Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Disparity Index Reversal System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 839

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

840 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Disparity Index Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Disparity Index.

DI OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Disparity Index-related conditions to
generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

DI OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Disparity Index-related conditions to generate
the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 841

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.30 Donchian Channel Breakout System

Overview

The Donchian Channel Breakout System uses the Donchian Channel to generate signals for potential
trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the upper Donchian Channel. If the
"Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the
Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of the upper Donchian
Channel breakout bar within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the lower Donchian Channel. If the
"Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the
Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the lower Donchian
Channel breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

842 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Donchian Channel Breakout System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Donchian Channel displays in the Price Frame. The upper Donchian Channel solid blue line.
The lower Donchian Channel is a solid red line. The middle Donchian Channel is a dashed green
line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the top Darvas Box breakout
bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the Low price of the
bottom Darvas Box breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has broken out above the Upper Donchian Channel."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has broken out below the Lower Donchian Channel."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Donchian Channel Breakout System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 843

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

844 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Donchian Channel Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Donchian Channel.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate its Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 845

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.31 Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) Cross System

Overview

The Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) Cross System uses fast and slow Double
Exponential Moving Averages (DEMA's) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast DEMA crosses above the Slow DEMA.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast DEMA crosses below the Slow DEMA.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) Cross System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

846 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Fast DEMA displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid light blue line.

The Slow DEMA displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid orange line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a light blue background while the Fast DEMA is
greater than the Slow DEMA.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against an orange background while the Fast DEMA
is less than the Slow DEMA.

When a Long signal is generated a light blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast DEMA crossed above Slow DEMA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated an orange down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast DEMA crossed below Slow DEMA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA) Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 847

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

848 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast DEMA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Fast Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA).

Slow DEMA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Slow Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA).

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 849

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.32 Double Stochastic Oscillator Cross System

Overview

The Double Stochastic Oscillator Cross System uses the Double Stochastic Oscillator to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Double Stochastic Oscillator's %K line crosses above its %D Line.

A Short signal is generated when the Double Stochastic Oscillator's %K line crosses below its %D Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Double Stochastic Oscillator Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

850 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Double Stochastic Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line. Its
overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines.

The Double Stochastic Oscillator's Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed,
dark blue line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! DSO crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! DSO crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Double Stochastic Oscillator Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 851

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Double Stochastic Osc. %K Periods, %K Slowing Periods, %K Slowing Method, %D Periods, and
%D Method

These parameters define the values used calculate the Double Stochastic Oscillator and its Signal
Line.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 852 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.33 Double Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System

Overview

The Double Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System uses the Double Stochastic Oscillator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Double Stochastic Oscillator crosses above its Signal Line
while both are below the OverSold Level. If the "Require Bull Candle for Long Entry?" input parameter
(see description below) is set to "Yes", the Long Entry signal is only generated if the entry bar is a Bull
Candle (i.e. its Close price > its Open price).

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Double Stochastic Oscillator crosses below its Signal Line.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Double Stochastic Oscillator crosses below its Signal Line
while both are above the OverBought Level. If the "Require Bear Candle for Short Entry?" input
parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Short Entry signal is only generated if the entry
bar is a Bear Candle (i.e. its Close price < its Open price).

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Double Stochastic Oscillator crosses above its Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 853

in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Double Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System consists of the following output variables
and display parameters:

The Double Stochastic Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line.

The Double Stochastic Oscillator's Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a dashed blue
line.

The Double Stochastic Oscillator's OverBought and OverSold Levels display in Additional Frame 1
as dashed red lines.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! DSO crossed above its Signal Line while both were below
the OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenBuy output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! DSO crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in
the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! DSO crossed above its Signal Line while both were above
the OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If
Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in
the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the message
"Short exit signal detected! DSO crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the
Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Double Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System attached
to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

854 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 855

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Double Stochastic Osc. %K Periods, %K Slowing Periods, %K Slowing Method, %D Periods, and
%D Method

These parameters define the values used calculate the Double Stochastic Oscillator and its Signal
Line.

Double Stochastic Osc. OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Double Stochastic Oscillator-related
conditions to generate the Short Entry signal.

Double Stochastic Osc. OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Double Stochastic Oscillator-related
conditions to generate the Long Entry signal.

Require Bull Candle for Long Entry?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long Entry signal. Please refer to
the Overview section above for details.

Require Bear Candle for Short Entry?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Short Entry signal. Please refer to

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 856 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

the Overview section above for details.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.34 Ehlers Fisher Transform Cross System

Overview

The Ehlers Fisher Transform Cross System uses Ehlers Fisher Transform to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when Ehlers Fisher Transform crosses above its Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when Ehlers Fisher Transform crosses below its Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 857

in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Ehlers Fisher Transform Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

Ehlers Fisher Transform displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid orange line.

Ehlers Fisher Transform Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid yellow line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Ehlers Fisher Transform crossed above its Signal Line." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Ehlers Fisher Transform crossed below its Signal Line." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ehlers Fisher Transform Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

858 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 859

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Ehlers Fisher Transform Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate Ehlers Fisher Transform.

Ehlers Fisher Transform Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate Ehlers Fisher Transform.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 860 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.35 Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Cross System

Overview

The Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Cross System uses Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength
Index indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index crosses above its Long Entry
Level.

A Short signal is generated when Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index crosses below its Short Entry
Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 861

The Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Cross System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid
green line. Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed
lines. Its mid-level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in
Additional Frame 1 as dashed blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Ehlers Laguerre RSI crossed above its Long Entry Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! Ehlers Laguerre RSI crossed below its Short Entry Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

862 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 863

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Laguerre RSI Price and Laguerre RSI Damping Factor

These parameters define the price and damping factor used to calculate Ehlers Laguerre Relative
Strength Index.

Laguerre RSI Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index-related conditions
to generate the Long signal.

Laguerre RSI Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index-related conditions
to generate the Short signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 864 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.36 Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Reversal System

Overview

Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Reversal System uses Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength
Index indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index crosses above its
OverSold Level from below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index crosses below its
OverBought Level, Mid-Level, or OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index crosses below its
OverBought Level from above.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 865

A Short Exit signal is generated when Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index crosses above its
OverSold Level, Mid-Level, or OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Reversal System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid
green line. Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed
lines. Its mid-level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional
Frame 1 as dashed red lines.

The Trend Frame displays a blue background while Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index is
less than its OverSold Level.

The Trend Frame displays a red background while Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index is
greater than its OverBought Level.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Ehlers Laguerre RSI crossed above its OverSold Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Ehlers Laguerre RSI crossed below its OverBought Level,
Mid Level, or OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file
plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic
of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! Ehlers Laguerre RSI crossed below its OverBought
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Ehlers Laguerre RSI crossed above its OverSold Level, Mid
Level, or OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file
plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

866 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

of the OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index Reversal System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 867

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Laguerre RSI Price and Laguerre RSI Damping Factor

These parameters define the price and damping factor used to calculate Ehlers Laguerre Relative
Strength Index.

Laguerre RSI OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index-related
conditions to generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

Laguerre RSI OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index-related
conditions to generate the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 868 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.37 Ehlers MAMA / FAMA Cross System

Overview

The Ehlers MAMA / FAMA Cross System uses Ehlers MESA Adaptive Moving Average (MAMA) and
Ehlers Following Adaptive Moving Average (FAMA) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when Ehlers MAMA crosses above Ehlers FAMA.

A Short signal is generated when Ehlers MAMA crosses below Ehlers FAMA.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Ehlers MAMA / FAMA Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 869

Ehlers MESA Adaptive MA (MAMA) displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid green
line.

Ehlers Following Adaptive Moving Average (FAMA) displays in the Price Frame as a slightly
thicker, solid dark red line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Ehlers MAMA crossed above Ehlers FAMA." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Ehlers MAMA crossed below Ehlers FAMA." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ehlers MAMA / FAMA Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

870 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

MAMA and FAMA Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate Ehlers MAMA and Ehlers FAMA.

MAMA and FAMA Fast Limit

This parameter defines the fast limit used to calculate the "phase" rate of change alpha value of
Ehlers MAMA and Ehlers FAMA. Please refer to John F. Ehlers' published works for additional
details.

MAMA and FAMA Slow Limit

This parameter defines the slow limit used to calculate the "phase" rate of change alpha value of
Ehlers MAMA and Ehlers FAMA. Please refer to John F. Ehlers' published works for additional
details.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 871

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.38 Ehlers Relative Vigor Index Cross System

Overview

The Ehlers Relative Vigor Index Cross System uses Ehlers Relative Vigor Index (RVI) to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when Ehlers Relative Vigor Index crosses above its Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when Ehlers Relative Vigor Index crosses below its Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

872 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Ehlers Relative Vigor Index Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

Ehlers Relative Vigor Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line.

Ehlers Relative Vigor Index Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid red line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Ehlers RVI crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Ehlers RVI crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ehlers Relative Vigor Index Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 873

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

874 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Ehlers RVI Periods

This parameter defines the periods used to calculate Ehlers Relative Vigor Index.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 875

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.39 Gann Basic "Swing Chartist" System

Overview

The Gann Basic "Swing Chartist" System uses the Gann HiLo Activator, Gann Swing Oscillator, and
Gann Trend Oscillator indicators to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Gann Trend Oscillator = +1 AND the Gann Swing Oscillator =
+1 AND the Close price crosses above the Gann HiLo Activator.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Gann Hi/Lo Activator.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Gann Trend Oscillator = -1 AND the Gann Swing Oscillator =
-1 AND the Close price crosses below the Gann HiLo Activator.

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the Gann Hi/Low Activator.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

876 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Gann Basic "Swing Chartist" System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Gann HiLo Activator displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid, blue line.

The Gann Swing Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, purple line.

The Gann Trend Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 2 as a slightly thicker, solid, green line.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a cyan up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Gann Swing Osc. = +1, Gann Trend Osc. = +1, and Close
price crossed above Gann HiLo Activator." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio
sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on
the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a cyan exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Close price crossed below Gann HiLo Activator." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a purple down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! Gann Swing Osc. = -1, Gann Trend Osc. = -1, and
Close price crossed below Gann HiLo Activator." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an
audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders
based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a purple exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Close price crossed above Gann HiLo Activator." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Gann Basic "Swing Chartist" System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 877

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

878 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Gann HiLo Lookback Periods and Gann HiLo MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of moving average used to calculate the
Gann HiLo Activator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 879

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.40 Hull Moving Average Cross System

Overview

The Hull Moving Average Cross System uses fast and slow Hull Moving Averages to generate signals
for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast Hull Moving Average crosses above the Slow Hull Moving
Average.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast Hull Moving Average crosses below the Slow Hull Moving
Average.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Hull Moving Average Cross System consists of the following output variables and display

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

880 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

parameters:

The Fast Hull Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid dark blue line.

The Slow Hull Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid dark red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a dark blue background while the Fast Hull
Moving Average is greater than the Slow Hull Moving Average.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a dark red background while the Fast Hull
Moving Average is less than the Slow Hull Moving Average.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast Hull MA crossed above Slow Hull MA." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast Hull MA crossed below Slow Hull MA." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Hull Moving Average Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 881

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

882 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast Hull MA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Fast Hull Moving Average.

Slow Hull MA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Slow Hull Moving Average.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 883

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.41 Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Strong Signals" System

Overview

The Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Strong Signals" System uses the Ichimoku Kinko Huo indicator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated by an Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Strong" buy signal (i.e. Tenk an-Sen
crosses above Kijun-Sen while both are above the Kumo).

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Close price crosses down into the Kumo.

A Short Entry signal is generated by an Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Strong" sell signal (i.e. Tenk an-Sen
crosses below Kijun-Sen while both are below the Kumo).

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Close price crosses up into the Kumo.

If the "Provide Ichimoku Weak / Medium Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", supplemental Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Weak" and "Medium" buy and sell alerts are provided.

An Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Weak" buy signal is generated when Tenkan-Sen crosses above Kijun-Sen
while both are below the Kumo.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

884 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

An Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Medium" buy signal is generated when Tenkan-Sen crosses above Kijun-Sen
while both are within the Kumo.

An Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Weak" sell signal is generated when Tenkan-Sen crosses below Kijun-Sen
while both are above the Kumo.

An Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Medium" sell signal is generated when Tenkan-Sen crosses below Kijun-Sen
while both are within the Kumo.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the Long Entry, Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit
signals even if the "Provide Ichimoku Weak / Medium Signals?" input selection is set to "Yes".

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Strong Signals" System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

Ichimoku's Tenkan-Sen displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid, red line.

Ichimoku's Kijun-Sen displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid, blue line.

Ichimoku's Chinkou Span displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid, green line.

Ichimoku's Senkou Span A displays in the Price Frame as a thin, solid, dark blue line.

Ichimoku's Senkou Span B displays in the Price Frame as a thin, solid, black line.

Ichimoku's Up Kumo displays in the Price Frame as a light blue cloud.

Ichimoku's Down Kumo displays in the Price Frame as a light red cloud.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a dark blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Long entry signal detected! Ichimoku Buy Signal: Strong" displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the parameters
defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a dark blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Close price crossed down into the Kumo." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters
defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a dark red down arrow graphic displays in the chart
window, the message "Short entry signal detected! Ichimoku Sell Signal: Strong" displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 885

CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a dark red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Close price crossed up into the Kumo." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

If the "Provide Ichimoku Weak / Medium Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set
to "Yes", when an Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Weak" buy signal is generated a light blue up arrow
graphic displays in the chart window, the message "Ichimoku Buy Signal: Weak" displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Ichimoku Weak / Medium Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set
to "Yes", when an Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Medium" buy signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic
displays in the chart window, the message "Ichimoku Buy Signal: Medium" displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Ichimoku Weak / Medium Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set
to "Yes", when an Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Weak" sell signal is generated a light red down arrow
graphic displays in the chart window, the message "Ichimoku Sell Signal: Weak" displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Ichimoku Weak / Medium Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set
to "Yes", when an Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Medium" sell signal is generated a red down arrow
graphic displays in the chart window, the message "Ichimoku Sell Signal: Medium" displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ichimoku Kinko Huo "Strong Signals" System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

886 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 887

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Ichimoku's Tenkan-Sen, Kijun_Sen, and Senkou Span B

These parameters define the values used to calculate the various aspects of the Ichimoku Kinko Huo
indicator.

Provide Ichimoku Weak / Medium Signals?

This parameter defines if the trading system provides additional, supplemental Ichimoku Kinko Hou
"Weak" and "Medium" buy and sell alerts. Please refer to the Overview and System Outputs and
Signals Logic sections above for details.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 888 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.42 Inertia Cross System

Overview

The Inertia Cross System uses the Inertia indicator to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Inertia indicator crosses above 50.

A Short signal is generated when the Inertia indicator crosses below 50.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Inertia Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The Inertia indicator displays in Additional Frame 1 as slightly thicker, solid dark green line. Its mid-

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 889

level (50) displays in the same frame as a dashed grey line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Inertia indicator is
greater than 50.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Inertia indicator
is less than 50.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Inertia crossed above 50." displays in the Trading Activity window,
and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request
orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable,
and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Inertia crossed below 50." displays in the Trading Activity window,
and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request
orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable,
and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Inertia Cross System attached to a chart window using its
default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

890 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Inertia Periods

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the Inertia indicator.

Inertia Smoothing Type

This parameter defines the type of moving average used to calculate the Inertia indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 891

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.43 Kase CD Cross System

Overview

The Kase CD Cross System uses the Kase CD indicator to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Kase CD crosses above the Kase CD's Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when the Kase CD crosses below the Kase CD's Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Kase CD Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The Kase CD displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is green if the current

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

892 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is less than the value 1
bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Kase CD Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, yellow line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Kase CD is
greater than the Kase CD's Signal Line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a red background while the Kase CD is less
than the Kase CD's Signal Line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Kase CD crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Kase CD crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Kase CD Cross System attached to a chart window using its
default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 893

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

894 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Kase CD Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Kase CD indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 895

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.44 Kase Peak Oscillator Cross System

Overview

The Kase Peak Oscillator Cross System uses the Kase Peak Oscillator indicator to generate signals
for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Kase Peak Oscillator crosses above the Kase Peak Oscillator's
Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when the Kase Peak Oscillator crosses below the Kase Peak Oscillator's
Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Kase Peak Oscillator Cross System consists of the following output variables and display

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

896 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

parameters:

The Kase Peak Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is green
if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is less
than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Kase Peak Oscillator Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid,
yellow line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Kase Peak
Oscillator is greater than the Kase Peak Oscillator's Signal Line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a red background while the Kase Peak
Oscillator is less than the Kase Peak Oscillator's Signal Line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Kase Peak Osc. crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Kase Peak Osc. crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Kase Peak Oscillator Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 897

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

898 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Kase Peak Osc. Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Kase Peak Oscillator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 899

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.45 Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) Cross System

Overview

The Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) Cross System uses fast and slow Kaufman
Adaptive Moving Averages (KAMA's) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast KAMA crosses above the Slow KAMA.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast KAMA crosses below the Slow KAMA.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) Cross System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

900 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Fast KAMA displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid blue line.

The Slow KAMA displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Fast KAMA is
greater than the Slow KAMA.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Fast KAMA is
less than the Slow KAMA.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast KAMA crossed above Slow KAMA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast KAMA crossed below Slow KAMA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 901

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

902 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast KAMA Price, Periods, Fast Smoothing Constant, and Slow Smoothing Constants

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and smoothing constants used to calculate
the Fast Kaufman's moving average.

Slow KAMA Price, Periods, Fast Smoothing Constant, and Slow Smoothing Constants

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and smoothing constants used to calculate
the Slow Kaufman's moving average.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 903

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.46 Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio UpTrend / DownTrend System

Overview

The Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio UpTrend / DownTrend System uses Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio
indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated by Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio crossing above the UpTrend Threshold
Level.

A Long Exit signal is generated by your choice of: the Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio crossing below the
UpTrend Threshold Level, Zero, or the DownTrend Threshold Level.

A Short Entry signal is generated by Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio crossing below the DownTrend
Threshold Level.

A Short Exit signal is generated by your choice of: the Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio crossing above the
DownTrend Threshold Level, Zero, or the UpTrend Threshold Level.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes",
supplemental Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio long and short alerts are provided.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

904 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Supplemental long signals are generated when Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio crosses above zero.

Supplemental short signals are generated when Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the Long Entry, Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit
signals even if the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input selection is set to "Yes".

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio UpTrend / DownTrend System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid dark gold
line. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The UpTrend Threshold Level displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed, red line.

The DownTrend Threshold Level displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed, red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a light blue background while Kaufman's
Efficiency Ratio is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a light red background while Kaufman's
Efficiency Ratio is less than zero.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! KER crossed above the UpTrend Theshold." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a green exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Your specified QQE condition has been met." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters
defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! KER crossed below DownTrend Theshold." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a pink exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Your specified KER condition has been met." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 905

parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "KER crosses above zero" long signal is generated a small, light
blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio
crossed above zero!" displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "KER crosses below" short signal is generated a small, red down
arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio crossed
below zero!" displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio UpTrend / DownTrend System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

906 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio Price and Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio Periods

These parameters define the price and the number of periods used to calculate Kaufman's Efficiency
Ratio.

UpTrend Threshold Level

This parameter defines the value used in Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio-related conditions to generate
the Long Entry signal and, depending on your choice for the long exit condition, the Long Exit signal.

DownTrend Threshold Level

This parameter defines the value used in Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio-related conditions to generate
the Short Entry signal and, depending on your choice for the short exit condition, the Short Exit
signal.

Choose Long Exit Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Long Exit signal.

Choose Short Exit Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Short Exit signal.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 907

Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?

This parameter defines if the trading system provides additional, supplemental Kaufman's Efficiency
Ratio long and short alerts. Please refer to the Overview and System Outputs and Signals Logic
sections above for details.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.47 Keltner Bands Breakout System

Overview

The Keltner Bands Breakout System uses Keltner Bands to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the upper Keltner Band. If the "Require

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

908 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Long signal
is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of the upper Keltner Band breakout bar
within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the lower Keltner Band. If the "Require
Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Short
signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the lower Keltner Band
breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Keltner Bands Breakout System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The upper and lower Keltner Bands display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, purple lines. The
middle Keltner Band displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, dark blue line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the upper Keltner Band
breakout bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the Low price of
the lower Keltner Band breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has broken out above the Upper Keltner Band." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has broken out below the Lower Keltner Band." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Keltner Bands Breakout System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 909

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

910 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Keltner Bands EMA Periods, ATR Periods, and ATR Multiple

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Keltner Bands.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 911

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.48 Keltner Bands Reversal System

Overview

The Keltner Bands Reversal System uses Keltner Bands to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the price reverses from the lower Keltner Band using either a 1-bar or 2-
bar reversal formation.

Long 1-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower Keltner Band AND
Low price <= Lower Keltner Band

Long 2-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower Keltner Band AND
Close price > Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago < Open price 1 bar ago AND Low
price 1 bar ago <= Lower Keltner Band 1 bar ago

A Short signal is generated when the price reverses from the upper Keltner Band using either a 1-bar or
2-bar reversal formation.

Short 1-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper Keltner Band AND
High price >= Upper Keltner Band

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

912 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Short 2-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper Keltner Band AND
Close price < Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago > Open price 1 bar ago AND High
price 1 bar ago >= Upper Keltner Band 1 bar ago

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Keltner Bands Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The upper and lower Keltner Bands display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, purple lines. The
middle Keltner Band displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, dark blue line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from Lower Keltner Band." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from the Upper Keltner Band."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Keltner Bands Reversal System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 913

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

914 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Keltner Bands EMA Periods, ATR Periods, and ATR Multiple

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Keltner Bands.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 915

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.49 Keltner Channels Breakout System

Overview

The Keltner Channels Breakout System uses Keltner Channels to generate signals for potential
trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the upper Keltner Channel. If the
"Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the
Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of the upper Keltner
Channel breakout bar within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the lower Keltner Channel. If the
"Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the
Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the lower Keltner Channel
breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

916 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Keltner Channels Breakout System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The upper and lower Keltner Channels display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, purple lines. The
middle Keltner Channel displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, dark blue line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the upper Keltner Channel
breakout bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the Low price of
the lower Keltner Channel breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has broken out above the Upper Keltner Channel." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has broken out below the Lower Keltner Channel." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Keltner Channels Breakout System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 917

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

918 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Keltner Channels SMA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Keltner Channels.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 919

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.50 Keltner Channels Reversal System

Overview

The Keltner Channels Reversal System uses Keltner Channels to generate signals for potential
trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the price reverses from the lower Keltner Channel using either a 1-bar
or 2-bar reversal formation.

Long 1-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower Keltner Channel AND
Low price <= Lower Keltner Channel

Long 2-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower Keltner Channel AND
Close price > Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago < Open price 1 bar ago AND Low
price 1 bar ago <= Lower Keltner Channel 1 bar ago

A Short signal is generated when the price reverses from the upper Keltner Channel using either a 1-bar
or 2-bar reversal formation.

Short 1-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper Keltner Channel AND
High price >= Upper Keltner Channel

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

920 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Short 2-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper Keltner Channel AND
Close price < Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago > Open price 1 bar ago AND High
price 1 bar ago >= Upper Keltner Channel 1 bar ago

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Keltner Channels Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The upper and lower Keltner Channels display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, purple lines. The
middle Keltner Channel displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, dark blue line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from Lower Keltner Channel."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from the Upper Keltner Channel."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Keltner Channels Reversal System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 921

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

922 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Keltner Channels SMA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Keltner Channels.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 923

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.51 Kurtosis Cross System

Overview

The Kurtosis Cross System uses the Kurtosis indicator to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Kurtosis indicator crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the Kurtosis indicator crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Kurtosis Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The Kurtosis indicator displays in Additional Frame 1 as solid blue line. Its mid-level (0) displays in

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

924 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

the same frame as a dashed black line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Kurtosis indicator
is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Kurtosis indicator
is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Kurtosis indicator crossed above zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Kurtosis indicator crossed below zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Kurtosis Cross System attached to a chart window using its
default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 925

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

926 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Kurtosis Price and Kurtosis Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the momentum and
Kurtosis components of the Kurtosis indicator.

Kurtosis Smoothing Periods and Kurtosis Smoothing Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of smoothing used to calculate smoothing
component of the Kurtosis indicator.

Kurtosis Double Smoothing Periods and Kurtosis Double Smoothing Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of smoothing used to calculate the double
smoothing component of the Kurtosis indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 927

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.52 Linear Regression Cross System

Overview

The Linear Regression Cross System uses fast and slow Linear Regression indicators to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast Linear Regression indicator crosses above the Slow Linear
Regression indicator.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast Linear Regression indicator crosses below the Slow Linear
Regression indicator.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Linear Regression Cross System consists of the following output variables and display

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

928 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

parameters:

The Fast Linear Regression indicator displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid blue line.

The Slow Linear Regression indicator displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid red
line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Fast Linear
Regression indicator is greater than the Slow Linear Regression indicator.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Fast Linear
Regression indicator is less than the Slow Linear Regression indicator.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast LRI crossed above Slow LRI." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast LRI crossed below Slow LRI." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Linear Regression Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 929

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

930 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast Regression Periods, Fast Regression Price, Fast Pre-Smoothing Price Periods, Fast Pre-
Smoothing MA Type

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Fast Linear Regression Indicator.

Slow Regression Periods, Slow Regression Price, Slow Pre-Smoothing Price Periods, Slow
Pre-Smoothing MA Type

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Slow Linear Regression Indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 931

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.53 Linear Regression Reversal System

Overview

The Linear Regression Reversal System uses the Linear Regression Indicator to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Linear Regression Indicator turns upwards (i.e. the current LRI
value is greater than the previous LRI value).

A Short signal is generated when the Linear Regression Indicator turns downwards (i.e. the current LRI
value is less than the previous LRI value).

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Linear Regression Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

932 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

parameters:

The Linear Regression Indicator displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid, two-color
line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The LRI turned blue." displays in the Trading Activity window, and
an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders
based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The LRI turned red." displays in the Trading Activity window, and
an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders
based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Linear Regression Reversal System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 933

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

LRI Regression Periods, Regression Price, Pre-Smoothing Price Periods, Pre-Smoothing MA

Type

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Linear Regression Indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 934 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.54 Linear Regression Slope Cross System

Overview

The Linear Regression Slope Cross System uses the Linear Regression Slope indicator to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Linear Regression Slope crosses above its Long Entry Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Linear Regression Slope crosses below its Short Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Linear Regression Slope Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 935

The Linear Regression Slope indicator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The
histogram is blue if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the
current value is less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a
black dashed line.

The Linear Regression Slope's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in Additional Frame
1 as dashed blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The LRS crossed above its Long Entry Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! The LRS crossed below its Short Entry Level." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Linear Regression Slope Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

936 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 937

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

LRS Regression Periods, LRS Regression Price, LRS Pre-Smoothing Price Periods, and LRS
Pre-Smoothing MA Type

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Linear Regression Slope indicator.

LRS Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Linear Regression Slope-related conditions to generate
the Long signal.

LRS Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Linear Regression Slope-related conditions to generate
the Short signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 938 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.55 Linear Regression Slope High / Low Breakout System

Overview

The Linear Regression Slope High / Low Breakout System uses the Linear Regression Slope
indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Linear Regression Slope crosses above its highest high value of the
previous n-bars. If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below)
is set to "Yes", the Long Entry signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of
the Linear Regression Slope highest high value breakout bar within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Linear Regression Slope crosses below its lowest low value of the
previous n-bars. If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below)
is set to "Yes", the Short Entry signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 939

the Linear Regression Slope lowest low value breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Linear Regression Slope High / Low Breakout System consists of the following output variables
and display parameters:

The Linear Regression Slope indicator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The
histogram is blue if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the
current value is less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a
black dashed line.

The highest high value of the Linear Regression Slope during the last n-bars displays in Additional
Frame 1 as a thin, dashed, blue line.

The lowest low value of the Linear Regression Slope during the last n-bars displays in Additional
Frame 1 as a thin, dashed, red line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the Linear Regression Slope
highest high value breakout bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to
designate the Low price of the Linear Regression Slope lowest low value breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! LRS has broken out above its HHV." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! LRS Histogram has broken out below its LLV." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Linear Regression Slope High / Low Breakout System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

940 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 941

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

LRS Regression Periods, LRS Regression Price, LRS Pre-Smoothing Price Periods, and LRS
Pre-Smoothing MA Type

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Linear Regression Slope indicator.

LRS High/Low Lookback Periods

This parameter defines the number of previous bars used to calculate the highest high value and
lowest low value of the Linear Regression Slope.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 942 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.56 Linear Regression Slope Tops / Bottoms Reversal System

Overview

The Linear Regression Slope Tops / Bottoms Reversal System uses the Linear Regression Slope
indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Linear Regression Slope forms a 5-bar Trough Fractal formation (i.
e. a lowest low value with 2 subsequent lower low values on each side of it). This formation can form
while the Linear Regression Slope is above or below zero. If it forms while below zero, it may be
considered a potential reversal signal; if forms while above zero it may be considered a potential
continuation signal.

A Short signal is generated when the Linear Regression Slope forms a 5-bar Peak Fractal formation (i.e.
a highest high value with 2 subsequent lower high values on each side of it). This formation can form

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 943

while the Linear Regression Slope is above or below zero. If it forms while above zero, it may be
considered a potential reversal signal; if it forms while below zero it may be considered a potential
continuation signal.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Linear Regression Slope Tops / Bottoms Reversal System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

The Linear Regression Slope indicator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The
histogram is blue if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the
current value is less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a
black dashed line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! LRS completed a trough fractal formation." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! LRS Histogram completed a peak fractal formation." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Linear Regression Slope Tops / Bottoms Reversal System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

944 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 945

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

LRS Regression Periods, LRS Regression Price, LRS Pre-Smoothing Price Periods, and LRS
Pre-Smoothing MA Type

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Linear Regression Slope indicator.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 946 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.57 MACD Fast Line / Signal Line Cross System

Overview

The MACD Fast Line / Signal Line Cross System uses the Moving Average Convergence Divergence
(MACD) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the MACD's Fast Line crosses above the MACD's Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when the MACD's Fast Line crosses below the MACD's Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The MACD Fast Line / Signal Line Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 947

The MACD Fast Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line.

The MACD Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, red line.

The MACD Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a green histogram. Its mid-level (0)
displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background along with beginning/
ending vertical blue lines while the MACD's Fast Line is greater than the MACD's Signal Line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a red background along with beginning/ending
vertical red lines while the MACD's Fast Line is less than the MACD's Signal Line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! MACD Fast Line crossed above MACD Signal Line." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! MACD Fast Line crossed below MACD Signal Line." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the MACD Fast Line / Signal Line Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

948 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 949

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

MACD Fast MA Price, MACD Fast MA Periods, and MACD Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Slow MA Price, MACD Slow MA Periods, and MACD Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Signal MA Periods and MACD Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the MACD indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 950 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.58 MACD Fast Line / Zero Cross System

Overview

The MACD Fast Line / Zero Cross System uses the Moving Average Convergence Divergence (MACD)
to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the MACD's Fast Line crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the MACD's Fast Line crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The MACD Fast Line / Zero Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 951

The MACD Fast Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line.

The MACD Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, red line.

The MACD Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a green histogram. Its mid-level (0)
displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the MACD's Fast
Line is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a red background while the MACD's Fast Line
is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! MACD Fast Line crossed above zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! MACD Fast Line crossed below zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the MACD Fast Line / Zero Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

952 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 953

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

MACD Fast MA Price, MACD Fast MA Periods, and MACD Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Slow MA Price, MACD Slow MA Periods, and MACD Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Signal MA Periods and MACD Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the MACD indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 954 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.59 MACD Histogram High / Low Breakout System

Overview

The MACD Histogram High / Low Breakout System uses the Moving Average Convergence
Divergence (MACD) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the MACD Histogram crosses above its highest high value of the
previous n-bars. If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below)
is set to "Yes", the Long Entry signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of
the MACD Histogram highest high value breakout bar within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the MACD Histogram crosses below its lowest low value of the
previous n-bars. If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below)
is set to "Yes", the Short Entry signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of
the MACD Histogram lowest low value breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 955

selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The MACD Histogram High / Low Breakout System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The MACD Fast Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line.

The MACD Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, red line.

The MACD Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a green histogram. Its mid-level (0)
displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The highest high value of the MACD Histogram during the last n-bars displays in Additional Frame
1 as a thin, dashed, blue line.

The lowest low value of the MACD Histogram during the last n-bars displays in Additional Frame 1
as a thin, dashed, red line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the MACD Histogram highest
high value breakout bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the
Low price of the MACD Histogram lowest low value breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! MACD Histogram has broken out above its HHV." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! MACD Histogram has broken out below its LLV." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the MACD Histogram High / Low Breakout System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

956 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 957

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

MACD Fast MA Price, MACD Fast MA Periods, and MACD Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Slow MA Price, MACD Slow MA Periods, and MACD Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Signal MA Periods and MACD Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD High/Low Lookback Periods

This parameter defines the number of previous bars used to calculate the highest high value and
lowest low value of the MACD Histogram.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 958 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.60 MACD Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal System

Overview

The MACD Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal System uses the Moving Average Convergence
Divergence (MACD) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 959

A Long signal is generated when the MACD Histogram forms a 5-bar Trough Fractal formation (i.e. a
lowest low value with 2 subsequent lower low values on each side of it). This formation can form while the
MACD Histogram is above or below zero. If it forms while below zero, it may be considered a potential
reversal signal; if forms while above zero it may be considered a potential continuation signal.

A Short signal is generated when the MACD Histogram forms a 5-bar Peak Fractal formation (i.e. a
highest high value with 2 subsequent lower high values on each side of it). This formation can form while
the MACD Histogram is above or below zero. If it forms while above zero, it may be considered a
potential reversal signal; if it forms while below zero it may be considered a potential continuation signal.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The MACD Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The MACD Fast Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line.

The MACD Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, red line.

The MACD Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The histogram is blue if the
current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the current value is less than the
value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! MACD Histogram completed a trough fractal formation." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! MACD Histogram completed a peak fractal formation." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the MACD Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal System attached to
a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

960 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 961

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

MACD Fast MA Price, MACD Fast MA Periods, and MACD Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Slow MA Price, MACD Slow MA Periods, and MACD Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Fast Line of the MACD indicator.

MACD Signal MA Periods and MACD Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the MACD indicator.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 962 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.61 McClellan Oscillator Cross System

Overview

The McClellan Oscillator Cross System uses the McClellan Oscillator to generate signals for potential
trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the McClellan Oscillator crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the McClellan Oscillator crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 963

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The McClellan Oscillator Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The McClellan Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as blue histogram. Its mid-level (0) displays
in the same frame as a dashed black line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the McClellan
Oscillator is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the McClellan
Oscillator is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The McClellan Oscillator crossed above zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The McClellan Oscillator crossed below zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the McClellan Oscillator Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

964 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 965

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

McClellan Osc. Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the McClellan Oscillator.

McClellan Osc. Short MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the short moving average component
of the McClellan Oscillator.

McClellan Osc. Long MA Periods

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the long moving average component of the
McClellan Oscillator.

McClellan Osc. MA Type

This parameter defines the type of moving averages used to calculate the McClellan Oscillator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 966 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.62 McClellan Summation Index Cross System

Overview

The McClellan Summation Index Cross System uses the McClellan Summation Index to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the McClellan Summation Index crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the McClellan Summation Index crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The McClellan Summation Index Cross System consists of the following output variables and display

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 967

parameters:

The McClellan Summation Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as blue histogram. Its mid-level (0)
displays in the same frame as a dashed black line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the McClellan
Summation Index is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the McClellan
Summation Index is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The McClellan Summation Index crossed above zero." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The McClellan Summation Index crossed below zero." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the McClellan Summation Index Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

968 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 969

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

McClellan Sum. Index Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the McClellan Summation Index.

McClellan Sum. Index Short MA Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the short moving average component
of the McClellan Summation Index.

McClellan Sum. Index Long MA Periods

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the long moving average component of the
McClellan Summation Index.

McClellan Sum. Index MA Type

This parameter defines the type of moving averages used to calculate the McClellan Summation
Index.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 970 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.63 McGinley Dynamic Cross System

Overview

The McGinley Dynamic Cross System uses fast and slow McGinley Dynamic indicators to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast McGinley Dynamic indicator crosses above the Slow
McGinley Dynamic indicator.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast McGinley Dynamic indicator crosses below the Slow
McGinley Dynamic indicator.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 971

The McGinley Dynamic Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Fast McGinley Dynamic indicator displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid dark
blue line.

The Slow McGinley Dynamic indicator displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid dark
red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a dark blue background while the Fast
McGinley Dynamic indicator is greater than the Slow McGinley Dynamic indicator.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a dark red background while the Fast
McGinley Dynamic indicator is less than the Slow McGinley Dynamic indicator.

When a Long signal is generated a dark blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast McG. Dynamic crossed above Slow McG. Dynamic."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a dark red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast McG. Dynamic crossed below Slow McG. Dynamic."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the McGinley Dynamic Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

972 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 973

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast McGinley Dynamic Price and Fast McGinely Dynamic Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Fast McGinley
Dynamic indicator.

Slow McGinley Dynamic Price and Slow McGinely Dynamic Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Slow McGinley
Dynamic indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 974 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.64 Momentum Cross System

Overview

The Momentum Cross System uses Momentum to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when Momentum crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when Momentum crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Momentum Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

Momentum displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line. It's mid-level (0) displays in the
same frame as a dashed black line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 975

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while Momentum is greater
than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while Momentum is less
than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Momentum crossed above zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Momentum crossed below zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Momentum Cross System attached to a chart window using its
default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

976 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 977

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Momentum Price and Momentum Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate Momentum.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 978 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.65 Moving Average Envelope Breakout System

Overview

The Moving Average Envelope Breakout System uses a Moving Average Envelope to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the upper MA Envelope. If the "Require
Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Long signal
is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of the upper MA Envelope breakout bar
within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the lower MA Envelope. If the "Require
Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Short
signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the lower MA Envelope
breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 979

selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Moving Average Envelope Breakout System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The upper and lower MA Envelopes display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, dark blue lines. The
middle MA Envelope displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, dark blue line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the upper MA Envelope
breakout bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the Low price of
the lower MA Envelope breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has broken out above the Upper MA Envelope." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has broken out below the Lower MA Envelope." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Moving Average Envelope Breakout System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

980 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 981

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

MA Envelope MA Price, MA Periods, MA Type, MA Vertical Shift %, Horizontal Shift (# of bars),

Envelope Type, Envelope % (if % Based), and Envelope Pips (if Pips Based)

These parameters define the price, number of periods, MA Type, vertical and horizontal shifts of the
moving average as well as the type (% or pips based) of moving average envelope calculated.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 982 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.66 Moving Average Envelope Reversal System

Overview

The Moving Average Envelope Reversal System uses a Moving Average Envelope to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the price reverses from the lower MA Envelope using either a 1-bar or
2-bar reversal formation.

Long 1-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower MA Envelope AND
Low price <= Lower MA Envelope

Long 2-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower MA Envelope AND
Close price > Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago < Open price 1 bar ago AND Low
price 1 bar ago <= Lower MA Envelope 1 bar ago

A Short signal is generated when the price reverses from the upper MA Envelope using either a 1-bar or
2-bar reversal formation.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 983

Short 1-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper MA Envelope AND
High price >= Upper MA Envelope

Short 2-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper MA Envelope AND
Close price < Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago > Open price 1 bar ago AND High
price 1 bar ago >= Upper MA Envelope 1 bar ago

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Moving Average Envelope Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The upper and lower MA Envelopes display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, dark blue lines. The
middle MA Envelope displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, dark blue line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from the Lower MA Envelope."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from the Upper MA Envelope."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Moving Average Envelope Reversal System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

984 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 985

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

MA Envelope MA Price, MA Periods, MA Type, MA Vertical Shift %, Horizontal Shift (# of bars),

Envelope Type, Envelope % (if % Based), and Envelope Pips (if Pips Based)

These parameters define the price, number of periods, MA Type, vertical and horizontal shifts of the
moving average as well as the type (% or pips based) of moving average envelope calculated.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 986 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.67 Moving Averages Cross System

Overview

The Moving Averages Cross System uses fast and slow Moving Averages to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast Moving Average crosses above the Slow Moving Average.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast Moving Average crosses below the Slow Moving Average.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Moving Averages Cross System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The Fast Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid blue line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 987

The Slow Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background along with beginning/ending
vertical blue lines while the Fast Moving Average is greater than the Slow Moving Average.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background along with beginning/
ending vertical red lines while the Fast Moving Average is less than the Slow Moving Average.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast MA crossed above Slow MA." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast MA crossed below Slow MA." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Moving Averages Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

988 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 989

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast MA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Fast Moving Average.

Fast MA Vertical Shift Method

This parameter defines the method used to shift the Fast Moving Average's plot up or down. The
available choices are: Percent and Pips.

Fast MA Vertical Shift (by %)

This parameter defines the percentage used to shift the Fast Moving Average's plot up or down
while Percent is chosen as the Fast MA Vertical Shift Method.

Fast MA Vertical Shift (by Pips)

This parameter defines the number of pips used to shift the Fast Moving Average's plot up or down
while Pips is chosen as the Fast MA Vertical Shift Method.

Fast MA Horizontal Shift (# of Bars)

This parameter defines the number of bars used to shift the Fast Moving Average's plot ahead of the
price data.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

990 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Slow MA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Slow Moving Average.

Slow MA Vertical Shift Method

This parameter defines the method used to shift the Slow Moving Average's plot up or down. The
available choices are: Percent and Pips.

Slow MA Vertical Shift (by %)

This parameter defines the percentage used to shift the Slow Moving Average's plot up or down
while Percent is chosen as the Slow MA Vertical Shift Method.

Slow MA Vertical Shift (by Pips)

This parameter defines the number of pips used to shift the Slow Moving Average's plot up or down
while Pips is chosen as the Slow MA Vertical Shift Method.

Slow MA Horizontal Shift (# of Bars)

This parameter defines the number of bars used to shift the Slow Moving Average's plot ahead of the
price data.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 991

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.68 Moving Averages Double Cross System

Overview

The Moving Averages Double Cross System uses 3 moving averages (short, medium, and long) to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated for each initial bar when the Close price is greater than the short MA
AND the short MA is greater than the medium MA AND the medium MA is greater than the long MA.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the short MA crosses below the medium MA.

A Short Entry signal is generated for each initial bar when the Close price is less than the short MA AND
the short MA is less than the medium MA AND the medium MA is less than the long MA.

A Short Exit signal is generated when the short MA crosses above the medium MA.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

992 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Moving Averages Double Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Short Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as a solid, slightly thicker blue line.

The Medium Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as a solid, slightly thicker red line.

The Long Moving Average displays in the Price Frame as a solid, slightly thicker green line.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Close price > Short MA > Medium MA > Long MA."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Short MA crossed below Medium MA." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters
defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! Close price < Short MA < Medium MA < Long MA."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Short MA crossed above Medium MA." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Moving Averages Double Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 993

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

994 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Short MA Price, Periods, and Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the short moving average.

Medium MA Price, Periods, and Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the medium moving average.

Long MA Price, Periods, and Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the long moving average.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 995

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.69 Moving Slope Rate of Change Cross System

Overview

The Moving Slope Rate of Change Cross System uses the Moving Slope Rate of Change to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Moving Slope Rate of Change crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the Moving Slope Rate of Change crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Moving Slope Rate of Change Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

996 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Moving Slope Rate of Change displays in Additional Frame 1 as slightly thicker, solid, purple
line. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a dashed black line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Moving Slope Rate
of Change is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Moving Slope
Rate of Change is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The MSROC crossed above zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The MSROC crossed below zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Moving Slope Rate of Change Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 997

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

998 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

MSROC Price and MSROC Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Moving Slope Rate of
Change.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 999

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.70 Parabolic SAR Reversal System

Overview

The Parabolic SAR Reversal System uses the Parabolic SAR to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the Parabolic SAR.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Parabolic SAR.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Parabolic SAR Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1000 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Parabolic SAR displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker blue dots.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Close price is
greater than the Parabolic SAR.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Close price is
less than the Parabolic SAR.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Close price crossed above the Parabolic SAR." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Close price crossed below the Parabolic SAR." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Parabolic SAR Reversal System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1001

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1002 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Parabolic SAR Step and Parabolic SAR Maximum

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Parabolic SAR.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1003

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.71 Percentage Price Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System

Overview

The Percentage Price Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System uses the Percentage Price Oscillator
(PPO) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the PPO crosses above the PPO's Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when the PPO crosses below the PPO's Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Percentage Price Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1004 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Percentage Price Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line.

The Percentage Price Oscillator Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark
red line.

The Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a green histogram.
Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background along with beginning/
ending vertical blue lines while the PPO is greater than the PPO's Signal Line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a red background along with beginning/ending
vertical red lines while the PPO is less than the PPO's Signal Line.

When a Long signal is generated a dark blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! PPO crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a dark red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! PPO crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Percentage Price Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1005

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1006 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

PPO Fast MA Price, PPO Fast MA Periods, and PPO Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO Slow MA Price, PPO Slow MA Periods, and PPO Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO Signal MA Periods and PPO Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the Percentage Price Oscillator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1007

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.72 Percentage Price Oscillator / Zero Cross System

Overview

The Percentage Price Oscillator / Zero Cross System uses the Percentage Price Oscillator (PPO) to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the PPO crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the PPO crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Percentage Price Oscillator / Zero Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1008 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Percentage Price Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line.

The Percentage Price Oscillator Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark
red line.

The Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a green histogram.
Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a dark blue background while the PPO is
greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a dark red background while the PPO is less
than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a dark blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! PPO crossed above zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a dark red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! PPO crossed below zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Percentage Price Oscillator / Zero Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1009

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1010 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

PPO Fast MA Price, PPO Fast MA Periods, and PPO Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO Slow MA Price, PPO Slow MA Periods, and PPO Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO Signal MA Periods and PPO Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the Percentage Price Oscillator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1011

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.73 Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram High / Low Breakout

System

Overview

The Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram High / Low Breakout System uses the Percentage
Price Oscillator (PPO) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the PPO Histogram crosses above its highest high value of the
previous n-bars. If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below)
is set to "Yes", the Long Entry signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of
the PPO Histogram highest high value breakout bar within the following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the PPO Histogram crosses below its lowest low value of the previous
n-bars. If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", the Short Entry signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the PPO
Histogram lowest low value breakout bar within the following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1012 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram High / Low Breakout System consists of the following
output variables and display parameters:

The Percentage Price Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line.

The Percentage Price Oscillator Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark
red line.

The Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a green histogram.
Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The highest high value of the PPO Histogram during the last n-bars displays in Additional Frame 1
as a thin, dashed, blue line.

The lowest low value of the PPO Histogram during the last n-bars displays in Additional Frame 1
as a thin, dashed, red line.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the PPO Histogram highest
high value breakout bar and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the
Low price of the PPO Histogram lowest low value breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! PPO Histogram has broken out above its HHV." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! PPO Histogram has broken out below its LLV." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram High / Low Breakout
System attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1013

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1014 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

PPO Fast MA Price, PPO Fast MA Periods, and PPO Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO Slow MA Price, PPO Slow MA Periods, and PPO Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO Signal MA Periods and PPO Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO High/Low Lookback Periods

This parameter defines the number of previous bars used to calculate the highest high value and
lowest low value of the PPO Histogram.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1015

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.74 Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal

System

Overview

The Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal System uses the Percentage
Price Oscillator (PPO) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1016 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the PPO Histogram forms a 5-bar Trough Fractal formation (i.e. a
lowest low value with 2 subsequent lower low values on each side of it). This formation can form while the
PPO Histogram is above or below zero. If it forms while below zero, it may be considered a potential
reversal signal; if forms while above zero it may be considered a potential continuation signal.

A Short signal is generated when the PPO Histogram forms a 5-bar Peak Fractal formation (i.e. a
highest high value with 2 subsequent lower high values on each side of it). This formation can form while
the PPO Histogram is above or below zero. If it forms while above zero, it may be considered a potential
reversal signal; if it forms while below zero it may be considered a potential continuation signal.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram Tops / Bottoms Reversal System consists of the
following output variables and display parameters:

The Percentage Price Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line.

The Percentage Price Oscillator Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark
red line.

The Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a histogram. The
histogram is blue if the current value is greater than the value 1 bar ago and it's red when the
current value is less than the value 1 bar ago. Its mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a
black dashed line.

When a Long signal is generated a dark blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! PPO Histogram completed a trough fractal formation." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a dark red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! PPO Histogram completed a peak fractal formation." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Percentage Price Oscillator Histogram Tops / Bottoms
Reversal System attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1017

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1018 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

PPO Fast MA Price, PPO Fast MA Periods, and PPO Fast MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the fast moving average used to
calculate the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO Slow MA Price, PPO Slow MA Periods, and PPO Slow MA Type

These parameters define price, number of periods, and type of the slow moving average used to
calculate the Percentage Price Oscillator.

PPO Signal MA Periods and PPO Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Signal Line of the Percentage Price Oscillator.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1019

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.75 Polarized Fractal Efficiency Cross System

Overview

The Polarized Fractal Efficiency Cross System uses the Polarized Fractal Efficiency (PFE) indicator
to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Polarized Fractal Efficiency crosses above its Long Entry Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Polarized Fractal Efficiency crosses below its Short Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1020 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Polarized Fractal Efficiency Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Polarized Fractal Efficiency displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid dark blue line. Its mid-
level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Polarized Fractal Efficiency's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in Additional
Frame 1 as dashed blue lines.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Polarized Fractal
Efficiency is greater than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a red background while the Polarized Fractal
Efficiency is less than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The Polarized Fractal Efficiency crossed above its Long
Entry Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade
mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy
output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the
Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! The Polarized Fractal Efficiency crossed below its Short
Entry Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade
mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell
output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the
Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Polarized Fractal Efficiency Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1021

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1022 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

PFE Price, Periods, and Smoothing Periods

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and number of smoothing periods used to
calculate the Polarized Fractal Efficiency.

PFE Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Polarized Fractal Efficiency-related conditions to
generate the Long signal.

PFE Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Polarized Fractal Efficiency-related conditions to
generate the Short signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1023

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.76 Quantitative Qualitative Estimation (QQE) Cross System

Overview

The Quantitative Qualitative Estimation (QQE) Cross System uses the Quantitative Qualitative
Estimation (QQE) indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities. The QQE indicator
consists of a smoothed Relative Strength Index (RSI) indicator and two volatility-based trailing levels
(fast and slow). The Fast Trailing Level (TL) and Slow TL are constructed by calculating the ATR of the
smoothed RSI over n-periods and then further smoothing the ATR using an additional n-periods Wilders
smoothing function. This smoothed ATR of RSI is then multiplied by the Fast and Slow ATR Multipliers
to calculate the final Fast and Slow Trailing Levels (TL's).

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated by your choice of: the QQE crossing above the Fast TL OR the QQE
crossing above the Slow TL OR the Fast TL crossing above the Slow TL.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1024 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

A Long Exit signal is generated by your choice of: the QQE crossing below the Fast TL OR the QQE
crossing below the Slow TL OR the Fast TL crossing below the Slow TL.

A Short Entry signal is generated by your choice of: the QQE crossing below the Fast TL OR the QQE
crossing below the Slow TL OR the Fast TL crossing below the Slow TL.

A Short Exit signal is generated by your choice of: the QQE crossing above the Fast TL OR the QQE
crossing above the Slow TL OR the Fast TL crossing above the Slow TL.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes",
supplemental QQE long and short alerts are provided.

Supplemental long signals are generated when either of the two conditions not chosen to generate the
Long Entry signal occur. For example, if the condition chosen for the Long Entry signal is "QQE crosses
above the Fast TL" then the supplemental long signals are generated when the QQE crosses above the
Slow TL OR the Fast TL crosses above the Slow TL.

Supplemental short signals are generated when either of the two conditions not chosen to generate the
Short Entry signal occur. For example, if the condition chosen for the Short Entry signal is "QQE
crosses below the Fast TL" then the supplemental short signals are generated when the QQE crosses
below the Slow TL OR the Fast TL crosses below the Slow TL.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the Long Entry, Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit
signals even if the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input selection is set to "Yes".

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Quantitative Qualitative Estimation (QQE) Cross System consists of the following output
variables and display parameters:

The QQE's Smoothed Relative Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker,
solid blue line. Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red
dashed lines.

The QQE's Fast Trailing Level displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed, dark blue line.

The QQE's Slow Trailing Level displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed, dark red line.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Your specified QQE condition has been met." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a green exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Your specified QQE condition has been met." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1025

defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! Your specified QQE condition has been met." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a pink exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Your specified QQE condition has been met." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "QQE crosses above the Fast TL" long signal is generated a small,
light blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "QQE crossed above Fast
ATR Trailing Level!" displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "QQE crosses above the Slow TL" long signal is generated a small,
blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "QQE crossed above Slow ATR
Trailing Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when when a supplemental "Fast TL crosses above the Slow TL" long signal is generated a
small, dark blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "QQE Fast ATR
Trailing Level crossed above QQE Slow ATR Trailing Level." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "QQE crosses below the Fast TL" short signal is generated a small,
light red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "QQE crossed above Fast
ATR Trailing Level!" displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "QQE crosses below the Slow TL" short signal is generated a small,
red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "QQE crossed below Slow
ATR Trailing Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "Fast TL crosses below the Slow TL" short signal is generated a
small, dark red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "QQE Fast ATR
Trailing Level crossed below QQE Slow ATR Trailing Level." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Quantitative Qualitative Estimation (QQE) Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1026 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1027

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

QQE RSI Price, RSI Periods, RSI Smoothing Periods, and RSI Smoothing Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, number of smoothing periods, type of moving
average used to calculate the smoothed RSI component of the QQE indicator.

QQE ATR Periods and QQE Wilders ATR Smoothing Periods

These parameters define the number of ATR periods and number of ATR smoothing periods used to
calculate the smoothed average true range (ATR) component of the QQE indicator that is then
further used to calculate the Fast Trailing Level and Slow Trailing level components.

QQE Fast ATR TL Multiplier

This parameter defines the average true range (ATR) multiplier value used to calculate the Fast
Trailing Level component of the QQE indicator.

QQE Slow ATR TL Multiplier

This parameter defines the average true range (ATR) multiplier value used to calculate the Slow
Trailing Level component of the QQE indicator.

Choose Long Entry Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Long Entry signal. Please refer to the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1028 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Overview section above for details.

Choose Long Exit Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Long Exit signal. Please refer to the
Overview section above for details.

Choose Short Entry Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Short Entry signal. Please refer to the
Overview section above for details.

Choose Short Exit Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Short Exit signal. Please refer to the
Overview section above for details.

Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?

This parameter defines if the trading system provides additional, supplemental QQE long and short
alerts. Please refer to the Overview and System Outputs and Signals Logic sections above for
details.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1029

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.77 Rate of Change (ROC) Cross System

Overview

The Rate of Change (ROC) Cross System uses the Rate of Change (ROC) to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Rate of Change crosses above zero.

A Short signal is generated when the Rate of Change crosses below zero.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Rate of Change (ROC) Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

Rate of Change displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, purple line. Its mid-level (0) displays
in the same frame as a dashed black line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while Momentum is greater
than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while Momentum is less
than zero.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The ROC crossed above zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The ROC crossed below zero." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output
variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters
tab.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1030 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Below is a screenshot that shows the Rate of Change (ROC) Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1031

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

ROC Price, Periods, Calculation Method

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and method used to calculate the Rate of
Change.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1032 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.78 Relative Momentum Index Cross System

Overview

The Relative Momentum Index Cross System uses the Relative Momentum Index to generate signals
for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Relative Momentum Index crosses above its Long Entry Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Relative Momentum Index crosses below its Short Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1033

The Relative Momentum Index Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Relative Momentum Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid green line.
Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Relative Momentum Index's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in Additional Frame
1 as dashed blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The RMI crossed above its Long Entry Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! The RMI crossed below its Short Entry Level." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Relative Momentum Index Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1034 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1035

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RMI Price, Periods, and Momentum Periods

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Relative Momentum Index.

RMI Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Relative Momentum Index-related conditions to
generate the Long signal.

RMI Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Relative Momentum Index-related conditions to
generate the Short signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1036 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.79 Relative Momentum Index Reversal System

Overview

The Relative Momentum Index Reversal System uses the Relative Momentum Index to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Relative Momentum Index crosses above its OverSold Level
from below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Relative Momentum Index crosses below its OverBought Level,
Mid-Level, or OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Relative Momentum Index crosses below its OverBought
Level from above.

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Relative Momentum Index crosses above its OverSold Level,

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1037

Mid-Level, or OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Relative Momentum Index Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Relative Momentum Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, green
line.

The Relative Momentum Index OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as
dashed red lines.

The Trend Frame displays a blue background while the Relative Momentum Index is less than its
OverSold Level.

The Trend Frame displays a red background while the Relative Momentum Index is greater than
its OverBought Level.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The RMI crossed above its OverSold Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The RMI crossed below its OverBought Level, Mid Level, or
OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The RMI crossed below its OverBought Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The RMI crossed above its OverSold Level, Mid Level, or
OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Relative Momentum Index Reversal System attached to a

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1038 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

chart window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1039

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RMI Price, Periods, and Momentum Periods

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Relative Momentum Index.

RMI OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Relative Momentum Index-related
conditions to generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

RMI OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Relative Momentum Index-related conditions
to generate the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1040 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.80 Relative Strength Index (RSI) Cross System

Overview

The Relative Strength Index (RSI) Cross System uses the Relative Strength Index (RSI) to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Relative Strength Index crosses above its Long Entry Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Relative Strength Index crosses below its Short Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1041

The Relative Strength Index (RSI) Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Relative Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid green line. Its
overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-level
(50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Relative Strength Index's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in Additional Frame 1
as dashed blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The RSI crossed above its Long Entry Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! The RSI crossed below its Short Entry Level." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Relative Strength Index (RSI) Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1042 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1043

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RSI Price and RSI Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Relative Strength
Index.

RSI Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Relative Strength Index-related conditions to generate
the Long signal.

RSI Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Relative Strength Index-related conditions to generate
the Short signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1044 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.81 Relative Strength Index (RSI) Reversal System

Overview

The Relative Strength Index (RSI) Reversal System uses the Relative Strength Index (RSI) to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Relative Strength Index crosses above its OverSold Level
from below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Relative Strength Index crosses below its OverBought Level,
Mid-Level, or OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Relative Strength Index crosses below its OverBought Level
from above.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1045

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Relative Strength Index crosses above its OverSold Level, Mid-
Level, or OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Relative Strength Index (RSI) Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Relative Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, green line.
Its mid-level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Relative Strength Index OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as
dashed red lines.

The Trend Frame displays a blue background while the Relative Strength Index is less than its
OverSold Level.

The Trend Frame displays a red background while the Relative Strength Index is greater than its
OverBought Level.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The RSI crossed above its OverSold Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The RSI crossed below its OverBought Level, Mid Level, or
OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The RSI crossed below its OverBought Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The RSI crossed above its OverSold Level, Mid Level, or
OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1046 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Below is a screenshot that shows the Relative Strength Index (RSI) Reversal System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1047

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RSI Price and RSI Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Relative Strength
Index.

RSI OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Relative Strength Index-related conditions
to generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

RSI OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Relative Strength Index-related conditions to
generate the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1048 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.82 Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Cross System

Overview

The Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Cross System uses the Relative Volatility Index (RVI) to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Relative Volatility Index crosses above its Long Entry Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Relative Volatility Index crosses below its Short Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1049

The Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Relative Volatility Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid purple line.
Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Relative Volatility Index's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in Additional Frame 1
as dashed blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The RVI crossed above its Long Entry Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! The RVI crossed below its Short Entry Level." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1050 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1051

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RVI Price, Std. Deviation Periods, and RVI Periods

These parameters define the price, number of standard deviation periods, and number of periods
used to calculate the Relative Volatility Index.

RVI Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Relative Volatility Index-related conditions to generate
the Long signal.

RVI Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Relative Volatility Index-related conditions to generate
the Short signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1052 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.83 Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Reversal System

Overview

The Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Reversal System uses the Relative Volatility Index (RVI) to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Relative Volatility Index crosses above its OverSold Level
from below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Relative Volatility Index crosses below its OverBought Level,
Mid-Level, or OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Relative Volatility Index crosses below its OverBought Level
from above.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1053

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Relative Volatility Index crosses above its OverSold Level,
Mid-Level, or OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Relative Volatility Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, purple line.
Its mid-level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Relative Volatility Index OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as
dashed red lines.

The Trend Frame displays a blue background while the Relative Volatility Index is less than its
OverSold Level.

The Trend Frame displays a red background while the Relative Volatility Index is greater than its
OverBought Level.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The RVI crossed above its OverSold Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The RVI crossed below its OverBought Level, Mid Level, or
OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The RVI crossed below its OverBought Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The RVI crossed above its OverSold Level, Mid Level, or
OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1054 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Below is a screenshot that shows the Relative Volatility Index (RVI) Reversal System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1055

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RVI Price, Std. Deviation Periods, and RVI Periods

These parameters define the price, number of standard deviation periods, and number of periods
used to calculate the Relative Volatility Index.

RVI OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Relative Volatility Index-related conditions
to generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

RVI OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Relative Volatility Index-related conditions to
generate the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1056 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.84 RSI Bollinger Bands Breakout System

Overview

The RSI Bollinger Bands Breakout System uses the Relative Strength Index (RSI) and Bollinger
Bands based on the RSI to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the RSI crosses above its upper Bollinger Band. If the "Require
RSI Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Long Entry
signal is generated when the RSI is above its upper Bollinger Band AND the RSI is greater than its value
of one bar ago AND the RSI crossed above its upper Bollinger Band one bar ago.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the RSI crosses below its middle Bollinger Band.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the RSI crosses below its lower Bollinger Band. If the "Require
RSI Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Short Entry
signal is generated when the RSI is below its lower Bollinger Band AND the RSI is less than its value of
one bar ago AND the RSI crossed below its lower Bollinger Band one bar ago.

A Short Exit signal is geneated when the RSI crossed above its middle Bollinger Band.

If the "Provide Supplemental Entry Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1057

"Yes", supplemental RSI Bollinger Bands long entry and short entry alerts are provided.

Supplemental long entry signals are generated using the same conditions as the Long Entry signal.
However, these supplemental long entry signals are only generated after the initial Long Entry signal is
generated and before its corresponding Long Exit signal is generated.

Supplemental short entry signals are generated using the same conditions as the Short Entry signal.
However, these supplemental short entry signals are only generated after the initial Short Entry signal is
generated and before its corresponding Short Exit signal is generated.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the Long Entry, Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit
signals even if the "Provide Supplemental Entry Alert Signals?" input selection is set to "Yes".

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The RSI Bollinger Bands Breakout System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Relative Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid purple line.
Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The upper and lower RSI Bollinger Bands display in Additional Frame 1 as thin, solid, green lines.
The middle RSI Bollinger Band displays in the same as a thin, dashed, green line.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! RSI has broken out above its Upper Bollinger Band."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a green exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! RSI crossed below its Middle Bollinger Band." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short signal detected! RSI has broken out below its Lower Bollinger Band."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a pink exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! RSI has crossed above its Middle Bollinger Band." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1058 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

If the "Provide Supplemental Entry Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set
to "Yes", when a supplemental long entry signal is generated a small, green up arrow graphic
displays in the chart window, the message "Additional long entry signal detected! RSI has broken
out above its Upper Bollinger Band again." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio
sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Entry Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set
to "Yes", when a supplemental short entry signal is generated a small, pink down arrow graphic
displays in the chart window, the message "Additional short entry signal detected! RSI has broken
out below its Lower Bollinger Band again." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio
sound file plays.

Below is a screenshot that shows the RSI Bollinger Bands Breakout System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1059

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RSI Price and RSI Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Relative Strength
Index.

Bollinger Bands Periods, MA Type, and Std. Deviations

These parameters define the number of periods, MA Type, and number of standard deviations used
to calculate the Bollinger Bands based on the Relative Strength Index.

Require RSI Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long Entry and Short Entry
signals. Please refer to the Overview section above for details.

Provide Supplemental Entry Alert Signals?

This parameter defines if the trading system provides additional, supplemental RSI Bollinger Bands
long entry and short entry alerts. Please refer to the Overview and System Outputs and Signals
Logic sections above for details.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1060 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.85 RSI Bollinger Bands Reversal System

Overview

The RSI Bollinger Bands Reversal System uses the Relative Strength Index (RSI) and Bollinger
Bands based on the RSI to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the RSI crosses above its lower Bollinger Band from below.

A Short signal is generated when the RSI crosses below its upper Bollinger Band from above.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1061

always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The RSI Bollinger Bands Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Relative Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid purple line.
Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The upper and lower RSI Bollinger Bands display in Additional Frame 1 as thin, solid, green lines.
The middle RSI Bollinger Band displays in the same as a thin, dashed, green line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! RSI is potentially reversing from Lower Bollinger Band." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! RSI is potentially reversing from the Upper Bollinger Band."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the RSI Bollinger Bands Reversal System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1062 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1063

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RSI Price and RSI Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Relative Strength
Index.

Bollinger Bands Periods, MA Type, and Std. Deviations

These parameters define the number of periods, MA Type, and number of standard deviations used
to calculate the Bollinger Bands based on the Relative Strength Index.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1064 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.86 RSI Moving Averages Cross System

Overview

The RSI Moving Averages Cross System uses the Relative Strength Index (RSI) indicator along with
fast and slow moving averages of the RSI indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated by your choice of: the RSI crossing above the Fast RSI Moving Average
OR the RSI crossing above the Slow RSI Moving Average OR the Fast RSI Moving Average crossing
above the Slow RSI Moving Average.

A Long Exit signal is generated by your choice of: the RSI crossing below the Fast RSI Moving Average
OR the RSI crossing below the Slow RSI Moving Average OR the Fast RSI Moving Average crossing
below the Slow RSI Moving Average.

A Short Entry signal is generated by your choice of: the RSI crossing below the Fast RSI Moving
Average OR the RSI crossing below the Slow RSI Moving Average OR the Fast RSI Moving Average
crossing below the Slow RSI Moving Average.

A Short Exit signal is generated by your choice of: the RSI crossing above the Fast RSI Moving Average
OR the RSI crossing above the Slow RSI Moving Average OR the Fast RSI Moving Average crossing

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1065

above the Slow RSI Moving Average.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes",
supplemental long and short alerts are provided.

Supplemental long signals are generated when either of the two conditions not chosen to generate the
Long Entry signal occur. For example, if the condition chosen for the Long Entry signal is "RSI crosses
above the Fast RSI Moving Average" then the supplemental long signals are generated when the RSI
crosses above the Slow RSI Moving Average OR the Fast RSI Moving Average crosses above the Slow
RSI Moving Average.

Supplemental short signals are generated when either of the two conditions not chosen to generate the
Short Entry signal occur. For example, if the condition chosen for the Short Entry signal is "RSI crosses
below the Fast RSI Moving Average" then the supplemental short signals are generated when the RSI
crosses below the Slow RSI Moving Average OR the Fast RSI Moving Average crosses below the Slow
RSI Moving Average.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the Long Entry, Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit
signals even if the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input selection is set to "Yes".

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The RSI Moving Averages Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Relative Strength Index (RSI) displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid green
line. Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its
mid-level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Fast RSI Moving Average displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid blue line.

The Slow RSI Moving Average displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background along with beginning/
ending vertical blue lines while a simulated long (buy) trade is in progress.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background along with beginning/
ending vertical red lines while a simulated short (sell) trade is in progress.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Your specified RSI Moving Averages condition has been
met." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a green exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Your specified RSI Moving Averages condition has been

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1066 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

met." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable
and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! Your specified RSI Moving Averages condition has
been met." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade
mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell
output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the
Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a pink exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Your specified RSI Moving Averages condition has been
met." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "RSI crosses above the Fast RSI Moving Average" long signal is
generated a small, light blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "RSI
crossed above Fast RSI MA." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file
plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "RSI crosses above the Slow RSI Moving Average" long signal is
generated a small, blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "RSI crossed
above Slow RSI MA." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when when a supplemental "Fast RSI Moving Average crosses above the Slow RSI Moving
Average" long signal is generated a small, dark blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart
window, the message "Fast RSI MA crossed above Slow RSI MA." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "RSI crosses below the Fast RSI Moving Average" short signal is
generated a small, light red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "RSI
crossed above Fast RSI MA." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file
plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "RSI crosses below the Slow RSI Moving Average" short signal is
generated a small, red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the message "RSI
crossed below Slow RSI MA." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file
plays.

If the "Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?" input parameter (see description below) is set to
"Yes", when a supplemental "Fast RSI Moving Average crosses below the Slow RSI Moving
Average" short signal is generated a small, dark red down arrow graphic displays in the chart
window, the message "Fast RSI MA crossed below Slow RSI MA." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1067

Below is a screenshot that shows the RSI Moving Averages Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1068 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

RSI Price and RSI Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Relative Strength
Index (RSI) indicator.

Fast RSI MA Periods and Fast RSI MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of moving average used to calculate the
Fast RSI Moving Average.

Slow RSI MA Periods and Slow RSI MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of moving average used to calculate the
Slow RSI Moving Average.

Choose Long Entry Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Long Entry signal. Please refer to the
Overview section above for details.

Choose Long Exit Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Long Exit signal. Please refer to the
Overview section above for details.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1069

Choose Short Entry Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Short Entry signal. Please refer to the
Overview section above for details.

Choose Short Exit Condition...

This parameter defines the condition used to generate the Short Exit signal. Please refer to the
Overview section above for details.

Provide Supplemental Alert Signals?

This parameter defines if the trading system provides additional, supplemental long and short alerts.
Please refer to the Overview and System Outputs and Signals Logic sections above for details.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1070 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

7.87 Schaff Trend Cycle Double Reversal System

Overview

The Schaff Trend Cycle Double Reversal System uses the Schaff Trend Cycle and a Fast Schaff
Trend Cycle indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities. The Schaff Trend Cycle sets
its cycle length to 1/2 the Cycle Periods. The Fast Schaff Trend Cycle indicator sets its cycle length to
1/4 the Cycle Periods.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the (Fast Schaff TC is greater than its OverSold Level and the Fast
Schaff TC is less than its OverBought Level and the Fast Schaff TC crosses above the Schaff TC) OR
when the (Fast Schaff TC crosses above its OverSold Level and the Fast Schaff TC is greater than
Schaff TC and the Fast Schaff TC is less than its OverBought Level).

A Short signal is generated when the (Fast Schaff TC crosses below the Schaff TC and the Fast Schaff
TC is less than its OverBought Level and the Fast Schaff TC is greater than its OverSold Level) OR when
the (Fast Schaff TC crosses below its OverBought Level and the Fast Schaff TC is less than Shaff TC
and the Fast Schaff TC is greater than its OverSold Level).

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Schaff Trend Cycle Double Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Schaff Trend Cycle displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, dark red line.

The Fast Schaff Trend Cycle displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed dark red line.

The Schaff Trend Cycle OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as dashed
red lines.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Close price is
greater than the Parabolic SAR.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Close price is
less than the Parabolic SAR.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Schaff TC long trade conditions have been met." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1071

automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Schaff TC short trade conditions have been met." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Schaff Trend Cycle Double Reversal System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1072 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Schaff TC Price, Short-Term Periods, Long-Term Periods, and Cycle Periods

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Schaff Trend Cycle and Fast Schaff Trend
Cycle indicators.

Schaff TC OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the conditions to generate the Long and Short
signals.

Schaff TC OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the conditions to generate the Long and Short
signals.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1073

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.88 Schaff Trend Cycle Reversal System

Overview

The Schaff Trend Cycle Reversal System uses the Schaff Trend Cycle to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Schaff Trend Cycle crosses above its OverSold Level from
below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Schaff Trend Cycle crosses below its OverBought Level from
above OR the Schaff Trend Cycle crosses below its OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Schaff Trend Cycle crosses below its OverBought Level from
above.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1074 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Schaff Trend Cycle crosses above its OverSold Level from
below OR the Schaff Trend Cycle crosses above its OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Schaff Trend Cycle Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Schaff Trend Cycle displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, dark red line.

The Schaff Trend Cycle OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as dashed
red lines.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The Schaff TC crossed above its OverSold Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The Schaff TC crossed below its OverBought Level or
OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The Schaff TC crossed below its OverBought Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The Schaff TC crossed above its OverSold Level or
OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Schaff Trend Cycle Reversal System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1075

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1076 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Schaff TC Price, Short-Term Periods, Long-Term Periods, and Cycle Periods

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Schaff Trend Cycle.

Schaff TC OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Schaff Trend Cycle-related conditions to
generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

Schaff TC OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Schaff Trend Cycle-related conditions to
generate the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1077

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.89 Slow Stochastic Oscillator Cross System

Overview

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator Cross System uses the Slow Stochastic Oscillator to generate signals
for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Slow Stochastic Oscillator's %K line crosses above its %D Line.

A Short signal is generated when the Slow Stochastic Oscillator's %K line crosses below its %D Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1078 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator's %K displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line.
Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines.

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator's %D displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed, dark blue
line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Slow Stochastic Oscillator's %K line crossed above its %D
line." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Slow Stochastic Oscillator's %K line crossed below its %D
line." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Slow Stochastic Oscillator Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1079

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Slow Stochastic Osc. %K Periods, %K Slowing Periods, and %K Slow Method

These parameters define the number of periods, number of smoothing periods, and type of moving
average used to calculate the Slow Stochastic Oscillator's %K line.

Slow Stochastic Osc. %D Periods and %D Method

These parameters define the number of periods and type of moving average used to calculate the
Slow Stochastic Oscillator's %K line.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1080 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.90 Slow Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System

Overview

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System uses the Slow Stochastic Oscillator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Slow Stochastic Oscillator crosses above its Signal Line
while both are below the OverSold Level. If the "Require Bull Candle for Long Entry?" input parameter
(see description below) is set to "Yes", the Long Entry signal is only generated if the entry bar is a Bull
Candle (i.e. its Close price > its Open price).

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Slow Stochastic Oscillator crosses below its Signal Line.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Slow Stochastic Oscillator crosses below its Signal Line
while both are above the OverBought Level. If the "Require Bear Candle for Short Entry?" input
parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Short Entry signal is only generated if the entry
bar is a Bear Candle (i.e. its Close price < its Open price).

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Slow Stochastic Oscillator crosses above its Signal Line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1081

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a solid blue line.

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator's Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a dashed blue line.

The Slow Stochastic Oscillator's OverBought and OverSold Levels display in Additional Frame 1 as
dashed red lines.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! SSO %K crossed above SSO %D while both were below the
OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenBuy output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! SSO %K crossed below SSO %D." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in
the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! SSO %K crossed above SSO %D while both were above the
OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in
the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the message
"Short exit signal detected! SSO %K crossed above SSO %D." displays in the Trading Activity
window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions
request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the
Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Slow Stochastic Oscillator Reversal Cross System attached to
a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1082 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1083

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Slow Stochastic Osc. %K Periods, %K Slowing Periods, %K Slowing Method, %D Periods, and %
D Method

This parameter defines the values used calculate the Slow Stochastic Oscillator.

Slow Stochastic Osc. OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Slow Stochastic Oscillator-related
conditions to generate the Short Entry signal.

Slow Stochastic Osc. OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Slow Stochastic Oscillator-related conditions
to generate the Long Entry signal.

Require Bull Candle for Long Entry?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long Entry signal. Please refer to
the Overview section above for details.

Require Bear Candle for Short Entry?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Short Entry signal. Please refer to
the Overview section above for details.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1084 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.91 STARC Bands Reversal System

Overview

The STARC Bands Reversal System uses the Stoller Average Range Channels (STARC Bands) to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the price reverses from the lower STARC Band using either a 1-bar or
2-bar reversal formation.

Long 1-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower STARC Band AND
Low price <= Lower STARC Band

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1085

Long 2-Bar Formation = Close price > Open price AND Close price > Lower STARC Band AND
Close price > Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago < Open price 1 bar ago AND Low
price 1 bar ago <= Lower STARC Band 1 bar ago

A Short signal is generated when the price reverses from the upper STARC Band using either a 1-bar or
2-bar reversal formation.

Short 1-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper STARC Band AND
High price >= Upper STARC Band

Short 2-Bar Formation = Close price < Open price AND Close price < Upper STARC Band AND
Close price < Open price 1 bar ago AND Close price 1 bar ago > Open price 1 bar ago AND High
price 1 bar ago >= Upper STARC Band 1 bar ago

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The STARC Bands Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display parameters:

The upper and lower STARC Bands display in the Price Frame as thin, solid, purple lines. The
middle STARC Band displays in the Price Frame as a thin, dashed, dark blue line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from Lower STARC Band." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price is potentially reversing from the Upper STARC Band."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the STARC Bands Reversal System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1086 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1087

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

STARC Bands ATR Periods, ATR Multiplier, Price, Periods, and Type

These parameters define ATR periods and multiplier, price, number of periods, and MA Type used to
calculate the STARC Bands.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1088 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.92 Stochastic Momentum Index Cross System

Overview

The Stochastic Momentum Index Cross System uses the Stochastic Momentum Index to generate
signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Stochastic Momentum Index crosses above its Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when the Stochastic Momentum Index crosses below its Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Stochastic Momentum Index Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1089

The Stochastic Momentum Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, light
blue line. Its overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines.
Its mid-level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Stochastic Momentum Index Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed blue
line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The SMI crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The SMI crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Stochastic Momentum Index Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1090 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1091

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

SMI Lookback Periods, Smoothing Periods, and Double Smoothing Periods

These parameters define the values used to calculate the Stochastic Momentum Index.

SMI Signal Line Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Stochastic Momentum Index
Signal Line.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1092 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.93 Support and Resistance Breakout System

Overview

The Support and Resistance Breakout System uses the Support and Resistance indicator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the Resistance. If the "Require Price
Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Long signal is
generated when the Close price crosses above the High price of the Resistance breakout bar within the
following two bars.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Support. If the "Require Price
Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter (see description below) is set to "Yes", the Short signal is
generated when the Close price crosses below the Low price of the Support breakout bar within the
following two bars.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1093

selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Support and Resistance Breakout System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

Resistance levels display in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, blue dots.

Support levels display in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, red dots.

If the "Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?" input parameter is set to "Yes", medium-sized
green dots display in the Price Frame to designate the High price of the Resistance breakout bar
and medium-sized pink dots display in the Price Frame to designate the Low price of the Support
breakout bar.

When a Long signal is generated a green up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Price has broken out above Resistance." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a pink down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Price has broken out below Support." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Support and Resistance Breakout System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1094 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1095

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Support / Resistance Lookback Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Support and Resistance levels.

Require Price Confirmation of Breakout?

This parameter changes the conditions necessary to generate the Long and Short signals. Please
refer to the Overview section above for details.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1096 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.94 T3 Moving Average Cross System

Overview

The T3 Moving Average Cross System uses fast and slow T3 Moving Averages to generate signals for
potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast T3 moving average crosses above the Slow T3 moving
average.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast T3 moving average crosses below the Slow T3 moving
average.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The T3 Moving Average Cross System consists of the following output variables and display

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1097

parameters:

The Fast T3 moving average displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid blue line.

The Slow T3 moving average displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Fast T3 moving
average is greater than the Slow T3 moving average.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Fast T3 moving
average is less than the Slow T3 moving average.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast T3 MA crossed above Slow T3 MA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast T3 MA crossed below Slow T3 MA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the T3 Moving Average Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1098 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1099

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast T3 Price, Periods, MA Type, and Volume Factor

These parameters define the price, number of periods, type of moving average, and volume weighting
used to calculate the Fast T3 moving average.

Slow T3 Price, Periods, MA Type, Volume Factor

These parameters define the price, number of periods, type of moving average, and volume weighting
used to calculate the Slow T3 moving average.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1100 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.95 Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level Cross System

Overview

The Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level Cross System uses the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level
indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Close price crosses above the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Close price crosses below the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1101

The Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level displays in the Price Frame as thin, dashed red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while the Close price is
greater than the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while the Close price is
less than the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The Close price crossed above the TSRL." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The Close price crossed below the TSRL." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1102 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1103

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

TSRL Price

This parameter defines the price used to calculate the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level indicator.

TSRL Mode

This parameter defines the calculation mode used for the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level indicator;
the available choices are Volatility and Pips.

ATR Periods (If Mode = Volatility)

This parameter is only used if Volatility is chosen as the TSRL Mode, otherwise it has no affect on
the trading system. It defines the number of periods used to calculate the ATR indicator which is
used in the volatility calculations.

Wilders ATR Smoothing Periods (If Mode = Volatility)

This parameter is only used if Volatility is chosen as the TSRL Mode, otherwise it has no affect on
the trading system. It defines the number of periods used to smooth the ATR indicator's data.

ATR Multiplier (If Mode = Volatility)

This parameter is only used if Volatility is chosen as the TSRL Mode, otherwise it has no affect on
the trading system. It defines the multiplication factor of the ATR indicator's value. The resulting ATR

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1104 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

indicator's value is multiplied by this amount and the final multiplied ATR value is what actually
determines how far behind the price the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level indicator follows.

# of Pips to Trail (If Mode = Pips)

This parameter is only used if Pips is chosen as the TSRL Mode, otherwise it has no affect on the
trading system. It defines the number of pips that the Trailing Stoploss Reversal Level follows behind
the price.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.96 Trend Continuation Factor Cross System

Overview

The Trend Continuation Factor Cross System uses the Trend Continuation Factor indicator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1105

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when Plus TCF crosses above Minus TCF.

A Short signal is generated when Plus TCF crosses below Minus TCF.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Trend Continuation Factor Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

Plus TCF displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line.

Minus TCF displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while Plus TCF is greater
than Minus TCF.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while Plus TCF is less
than Minus TCF.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Plus TCF crossed above Minus TCF." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the
CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Plus TCF crossed below Minus TCF." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Trend Continuation Factor Cross System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1106 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1107

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

TCF Price and TCF Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Trend Continuation
Factor indicator.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1108 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.97 Trend Continuation Factor Strong Trend System

Overview

The Trend Continuation Factor Strong Trend System uses the Directional Movement Index to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when Plus TCF crosses above zero.

A Long Exit signal is generated when your choice of: Plus TCF crosses below zero OR Plus TCF
crosses below Minus TCF.

A Short Entry signal is generated when Minus TCF crosses above zero.

A Short Exit signal is generated when your choice of: Minus TCF crosses below zero or Minus TCF
crosses below Plus TCF.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1109

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Trend Continuation Factor Strong Trend System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

Plus TCF displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line.

Minus TCF displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, red line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background while Plus TCF is greater
than zero.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a red background while Minus TCF is
greater than zero.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Plus TCF crossed above Zero." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the parameters
defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Plus TCF crossed below Zero OR Plus TCF crossed below
Minus TCF." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade
mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! Minus TCF crossed above Zero." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the
CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Minus TCF crossed below Zero OR Plus TCF crossed above
Minus TCF." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade
mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell
output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Trend Continuation Factor Strong Trend System attached to
a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1110 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1111

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

TCF Price and TCF Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Trend Continuation
Factor indicator.

Choose Long Exit Condition...

This parameter defines the condition necessary to generate the Long Exit signal. Please refer to the
Overview section above for details.

Choose Short Exit Condition...

This parameter defines the condition necessary to generate the Short Exit signal. Please refer to
the Overview section above for details.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1112 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.98 Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) Reversal System

Overview

The Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) Reversal System uses the Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) indicator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Trend Trigger Factor crosses above its OverSold Level from
below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Trend Trigger Factor crosses below its OverBought Level from
above OR the Trend Trigger Factor crosses below its OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Trend Trigger Factor crosses below its OverBought Level
from above.

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Trend Trigger Factor crosses above its OverSold Level from
below OR the Trend Trigger Factor crosses above its OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1113

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) Reversal System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Trend Trigger Factor displays in Additional Frame 1 as a slightly thicker, solid, dark blue line.

The Trend Trigger Factor OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as dashed
red lines.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The TTF crossed above its OverSold Level." displays in the
Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated
trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and the
parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The TTF crossed below its OverBought Level or OverSold
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the CloseBuy variable
and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The TTF crossed below its OverBought Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The TTF crossed above its OverSold Level or OverBought
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) Reversal System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1114 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1115

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

TTF Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Trend Trigger Factor indicator.

TTF OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Trend Trigger Factor-related conditions to
generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

TTF OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Trend Trigger Factor-related conditions to
generate the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1116 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.99 Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) Cross System

Overview

The Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) Cross System uses the Triple Exponential Average (TRIX)
indicator to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the TRIX crosses above its Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when the TRIX crosses below its Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1117

The Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line. Its
mid-level (0) displays in the same frame as a black dashed line.

The Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed,
red line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The TRIX crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The TRIX crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) Cross System attached to
a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1118 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

TRIX Price and TRIX Periods

These parameters define the price and number of periods used to calculate the Triple Exponential
Average (TRIX).

TRIX Signal Line Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Triple Exponential Average
(TRIX) Signal Line.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1119

Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.100 Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) Cross System

Overview

The Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) Cross System uses fast and slow Triple
Exponential Moving Averages (TEMA's) to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Fast TEMA crosses above the Slow TEMA.

A Short signal is generated when the Fast TEMA crosses below the Slow TEMA.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) Cross System consists of the following output

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1120 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

variables and display parameters:

The Fast TEMA displays in the Price Frame as slightly thicker, solid green line.

The Slow TEMA displays in the Price Frame as a slightly thicker, solid purple line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a green background while the Fast TEMA is
greater than the Slow TEMA.

The Trend Frame displays a white down arrow against a purple background while the Fast TEMA is
less than the Slow TEMA.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! Fast TEMA crossed above Slow TEMA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! Fast TEMA crossed below Slow TEMA." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) Cross System
attached to a chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1121

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1122 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Fast TEMA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Fast Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA).

Slow TEMA Price, Periods, and MA Type

These parameters define the price, number of periods, and type of moving average used to calculate
the Slow Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA).

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1123

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.101 True Strength Index Cross System

Overview

The True Strength Index Cross System uses the True Strength Index to generate signals for potential
trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the True Strength Index crosses above its Signal Line.

A Short signal is generated when the True Strength Index crosses below its Signal Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The True Strength Index Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1124 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The True Strength Index displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, blue line.

The True Strength Index Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, red line.

The True Strength Index Histogram displays in Additional Frame 1 as a green histogram.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long signal detected! The TSI crossed above its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the logic of the CloseSell
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short signal detected! The TSI crossed below its Signal Line." displays in the Trading
Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading
actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the logic of the CloseBuy
output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the True Strength Index Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1125

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

TSI Price, Smoothing Periods, and Double Smoothing Periods

These parameters define the values used to calculate the True Strength Index.

TSI Signal Line Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the True Strength Index Signal Line.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1126 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.102 Ultimate Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System

Overview

The Ultimate Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System uses the Ultimate Oscillator and a moving
average of the Ultimate Oscillator (i.e. its Signal Line) to generate signals for potential trading
opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Ultimate Oscillator crosses above the Ultimate Oscillator's Signal
Line.

A Short signal is generated when the Ultimate Oscillator crosses below the Ultimate Oscillator's Signal
Line.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1127

The Ultimate Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System consists of the following output variables and
display parameters:

The Ultimate Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line. Its
overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Ultimate Oscillator Signal Line displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, dashed dark blue
line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a blue background along with beginning/
ending vertical blue lines while the Ultimate Oscillator is greater than the Ultimate Oscillator's
Signal Line.

The Trend Frame displays a white up arrow against a red background along with beginning/ending
vertical red lines while the Ultimate Oscillator is less than the Ultimate Oscillator's Signal Line.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The Ultimate Osc. crossed above its Signal Line." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! The Ultimate Osc. crossed below its Signal Line." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System
Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ultimate Oscillator / Signal Line Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1128 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1129

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Ultimate Osc. Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Ultimate Oscillator.

Ultimate Osc. Signal MA Periods and Ultimate Osc. Signal MA Type

These parameters define the number of periods and type of the moving average used to calculate the
Ultimate Oscillator's Signal Line.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1130 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.103 Ultimate Oscillator Cross System

Overview

The Ultimate Oscillator Cross System uses the Ultimate Oscillator to generate signals for potential
trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Ultimate Oscillator crosses above its Long Entry Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Ultimate Oscillator crosses below its Short Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1131

The Ultimate Oscillator Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Ultimate Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line. Its
overbought (70) and oversold (30) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

Ultimate Oscillator's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in Additional Frame 1 as
dashed blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The Ultimate Osc. crossed above its Long Entry Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable, the logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! The Ultimate Osc. crossed below its Short Entry Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ultimate Oscillator Cross System attached to a chart window
using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1132 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1133

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Ultimate Osc. Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Ultimate Oscillator.

Ultimate Osc. Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Ultimate Oscillator-related conditions to generate the
Long signal.

Ultimate Osc. Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Ultimate Oscillator-related conditions to generate the
Short signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1134 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.104 Ultimate Oscillator Reversal System

Overview

The Ultimate Oscillator Reversal System uses the Ultimate Oscillator to generate signals for potential
trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Ultimate Oscillator crosses above its OverSold Level from
below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Ultimate Oscillator crosses below its OverBought Level, Mid-
Level, or OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Ultimate Oscillator crosses below its OverBought Level from
above.

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Ultimate Oscillator crosses above its OverSold Level, Mid-

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1135

Level, or OverBought Level from below.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Ultimate Oscillator Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Ultimate Oscillator displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid, dark blue line. Its mid-level
(50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Ultimate Oscillator OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1 as dashed
red lines.

The Trend Frame displays a blue background while the Ultimate Oscillator is less than its
OverSold Level.

The Trend Frame displays a red background while the Ultimate Oscillator is greater than its
OverBought Level.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! The Ultimate Oscillator crossed above its OverSold Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output
variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! The Ultimate Oscillator crossed below its OverBought Level,
Mid Level, or OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file
plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic
of the CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! The Ultimate Oscillator crossed below its OverBought
Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode
is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! The Ultimate Oscillator crossed above its OverSold Level,
Mid Level, or OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file
plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic
of the OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1136 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ultimate Oscillator Reversal System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1137

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Ultimate Osc. Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Ultimate Oscillator.

Ultimate Osc. OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Ultimate Oscillator-related conditions to
generate the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

Ultimate Osc. OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Ultimate Oscillator-related conditions to
generate the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1138 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.105 Williams Percent Range (%R) Cross System

Overview

The Williams Percent Range (%R) Cross System uses the Williams Percent Range (%R) indicator to
generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long signal is generated when the Williams %R crosses above its Long Entry Level.

A Short signal is generated when the Williams %R crosses below its Short Entry Level.

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell). Note: This trading system's Auto-Trade mode
always attempts to request orders based on the "Always_in_the_Market" method of generating signals
to help ensure that only one position is open at any given time even if the "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" input
selection is chosen.

System Outputs and Signals Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1139

The Williams Percent Range (%R) Cross System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Williams Percent Range (%R) displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid dark blue line. Its
overbought (-20) and oversold (-80) levels display in the same frame as red dashed lines. Its mid-
level (-50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Williams %R's Long Entry Level and Short Entry Level display in Additional Frame 1 as dashed
blue lines.

When a Long signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Williams %R crossed above its Long Entry Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable, the
logic of the CloseSell output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short entry signal detected! Williams %R crossed below its Short Entry Level." displays
in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output variable, the
logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties
window's Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Williams Percent Range (%R) Cross System attached to a
chart window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1140 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1141

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Williams %R Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Williams Percent Range (%R).

Williams %R Long Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Williams %R-related conditions to generate the Long
signal.

Williams %R Short Entry Level

This parameter defines the value used in the Williams %R-related conditions to generate the Short
signal.

Method for Generating Signals

This parameter is a selection list with two choices. "Alert_for_ALL_Signals" allows the trading
system to provide alerts for all potential trading signals, including multiple consecutive long or short
signals. "Always_in_the_Market" forces the trading system to provide alerts for only the first signal
in a consecutive series of long or short signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1142 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

7.106 Williams Percent Range (%R) Reversal System

Overview

The Williams Percent Range (%R) Reversal System uses the Williams Percent Range (%R) indicator
to generate signals for potential trading opportunities.

The signals are generated using the following logic:

A Long Entry signal is generated when the Williams %R crosses above its OverSold Level from below.

A Long Exit signal is generated when the Williams %R crosses below its OverBought Level, Mid-Level,
or OverSold Level from above.

A Short Entry signal is generated when the Williams %R crosses below its OverBought Level from
above.

A Short Exit signal is generated when the Williams %R crosses above its OverSold Level, Mid-Level, or
OverBought Level from below.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1143

This trading system can be used in Recommendation Only mode to generate alerts and, if you choose,
in Auto-Trade mode to automatically request orders based on its signals and its Trading Enabled output
variables (OpenBuy, CloseBuy, OpenSell, and CloseSell).

System Outputs and Signals Logic

The Ultimate Oscillator Reversal System consists of the following output variables and display
parameters:

The Williams Percent Range (%R) displays in Additional Frame 1 as a thin, solid dark blue line.
Its mid-level (-50) displays in the same frame as a grey dashed line.

The Williams Percent Range (%R) OverBought and OverSold levels display in Additional Frame 1
as dashed red lines.

The Trend Frame displays a blue background while the Williams Percent Range (%R) is less than
its OverSold Level.

The Trend Frame displays a red background while the Williams Percent Range (%R) is greater
than its OverBought Level.

When a Long Entry signal is generated a blue up arrow graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long entry signal detected! Williams %R crossed above its OverSold Level." displays in
the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is enabled
automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenBuy output variable and
the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Long Exit signal is generated a blue exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Long exit signal detected! Williams %R crossed below its OverBought Level, Mid Level,
or OverSold Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-
Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
CloseBuy variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's Trading
Parameters tab.

When a Short Entry signal is generated a red down arrow graphic displays in the chart window,
the message "Short entry signal detected! Williams %R crossed below its OverBought Level."
displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If Auto-Trade mode is
enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the OpenSell output
variable, the logic of the CloseBuy output variable, and the parameters defined in the Trading
System Properties window's Trading Parameters tab.

When a Short Exit signal is generated a red exit graphic displays in the chart window, the
message "Short exit signal detected! Williams %R crossed above its OverSold Level, Mid Level,
or OverBought Level." displays in the Trading Activity window, and an audio sound file plays. If
Auto-Trade mode is enabled automated trading actions request orders based on the logic of the
OpenSell output variable and the parameters defined in the Trading System Properties window's
Trading Parameters tab.

Below is a screenshot that shows the Ultimate Oscillator Reversal System attached to a chart
window using its default parameters...

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1144 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

System Parameters

This trading system includes adjustable input parameters for added flexibility. You can make any
required changes from the System Parameters tab in its properties window.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Trading Systems 1145

The System Parameters tab contains the following input parameters:

Instrument, Interval, Bid/Ask

These parameters are "read only" values. They are the instrument, chart interval, and chart type the
trading system is (or will be) attached to.

Williams %R Periods

This parameter defines the number of periods used to calculate the Williams Percent Range (%R).

Williams %R OverBought Level

This parameter defines the OverBought value used in the Williams %R-related conditions to generate
the Long Exit, Short Entry, and Short Exit signals.

Williams %R OverSold Level

This parameter defines the OverSold value used in the Williams %R-related conditions to generate
the Long Entry, Long Exit, and Short Exit signals.

Auto-Trading Parameters

It is extremely important that you verify (and change, if necessary) the parameters in the Trading
Parameters tab if you intend to use this trading system in Auto-Trade mode. You must specify the
Amount (in Lots) that will be used for each order the trading system requests.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1146 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

For the trading system to auto-trade, it is necessary to start it in Auto-Trade mode; failure to do this will
result in no automated order requests being submitted. Auto-Trade mode may be started once the
trading system is properly configured and successfully attached to a chart.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

Automated Trading FAQ for Trading Systems

Part

VIII
 1148 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

8 Automated Trading FAQ for Trading Systems

Certain rules and restrictions apply to any trading system started in Auto-Trade mode. It is STRONGLY
recommended that you take a few minutes to read through these Auto-Trading FAQ. Please do not
attempt to use any trading system in VT Trader in Auto-Trade mode until you are absolutely certain that
you fully understand the rules and restrictions that govern trading systems' auto-trading functionality. For
the sake of brevity, all of the FAQs assume that a trading system is already attached to the chart and
running in Auto-Trade mode unless stated otherwise.

Q. Are there any limitations as to how many trading systems can be used in a single account
and/or on a single instrument?

You can use as many trading systems attached to as many different charts as your computer
hardware can handle when running the trading systems in Recommendation mode. However, there
are some restrictions when running one or more trading systems in Auto-Trade mode. There is a
maximum of one trading system running in Auto-Trade mode per instrument per account (* it is
possible to have more than one account assigned to a given platform login username). For example,
at of the time of this writing VT Trader supports 42 different instruments. If you have one account,
you can have up to 42 trading systems (all different trading systems, multiple copies of the same
trading system, or any combination thereof) each running in Auto-Trade mode if each trading system
is attached to a different instrument. If you have more than one account, each account can have a
maximum of one trading system per instrument running in Auto-Trade mode.

Q. What types of orders can be requested and/or managed by a trading system?

A trading system can only request Buy market orders and/or Sell market orders. A trading system
cannot request, manage, or remove the following order types: attached stop, attached limit, entry
stop buy, entry stop sell, entry limit buy, entry limit sell, One Cancels Other (OCO), If/Then Single,
and/or If/Then OCO.

Q. When does a trading system request its automated orders?

A trading system can generate alerts in real-time, tick-by-tick, as the chart interval (i.e. candle or
bar) progresses. However, a trading system can only perform automated trading requests on the first
price tick of the most current, newly forming chart interval (i.e. candle or bar) provided that the
condition needed to trigger the automated order request was valid when the previous chart interval (i.
e. candle or bar) completed. A real-time, tick-by-tick, automated trading method may be
implemented in the future, but Complete Bar mode is the only method currently available for
automated trading.

Q. Should I submit orders and continue to trade normally in the same instrument using the
same account as a trading system running in Auto-Trade mode is using? Will manual trading
interfere with the trading system's auto-trading?

If the trading system you are working with uses the EventCount() function to help control its
automated trading actions, you should not submit any orders of any type or perform any additional
trading actions in the same instrument using the same account as a trading system running in Auto-
Trade mode is using. Doing so could adversely affect a trading system's ability to auto-trade
properly. The internal "event count" logic is very limited and it cannot properly account for any
manual trading activities. A trading system has no knowledge of any actual open positions, pending
orders, or attached stop/limit orders in your account and therefore it cannot properly interact with

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Automated Trading FAQ for Trading Systems 1149

any such positions/orders or avoid potentially conflicting trading situations.

It is strongly recommended that a trading system use some combination of the PositionCount(),
BuyPositionCount(), and/or SellPositionCount() functions vs. the EventCount() function to help
control its automated trading actions while running in Auto-Trade mode.

Q. Can I start a trading system in Auto-Trade mode when I already have an open position in the
instrument using the same account that the trading system will be using? Will a trading system
continue auto-trading correctly if I stop its Auto-Trade mode while there is a position open and
then restart its Auto-Trade mode while the position is still open?

If the trading system you are working with uses the EventCount() function to help control its
automated trading actions, when you start (or restart) a trading system in Auto-Trade mode there
must be no existing open positions in the instrument using the same account that the trading
system will be using for its automated trading. A trading system using internal "event count" logic
cannot detect that an open position already exists when its Auto-Trade mode is started. Since the
trading system cannot detect an existing open position, its automated trading requests will not be
properly correlated to what the trading system assumes is the open position status of your account
for that instrument.

For example, lets assume that you already have a 1.0 lot Buy position open in the EUR/USD using
Account1. You attach a simple moving average crossover trading system to the EUR/USD, configure
it to request 1.0 lot Buy and Sell market orders using Account1, and start it in Auto-Trade mode.
The first alert the trading system generates is for a 1.0 lot Buy market order to enter the market
long. Since you already have an existing 1.0 lot Buy position, you now have 2.0 lots in Buy positions
(but the trading system's internal "event count" logic assumes there is only one 1.0 lot Buy position
open). The next alert the trading system generates is for two 1.0 lot Sell market orders; these orders
are to close out the existing 1.0 lot Buy position and enter the market short with 1.0 lot. The trading
system now assumes it is 1.0 lot short, but it is not. The trading system is actually "flat" (0.0 lots in
the mark et in either direction). Instead of closing out the existing 1.0 lot Buy position and entering
short with 1.0 lot, the trading system had to use both 1.0 lot Sell market orders to close out the
existing two 1.0 lot Buy positions. You are now in a predicament whereby the trading system is
requesting automated orders that are not properly correlated to its alerts or to what the trading
system assumes is the open position status in EUR/USD for Account1.

It is strongly recommended that a trading system use some combination of the PositionCount(),
BuyPositionCount(), and/or SellPositionCount() functions vs. the EventCount() function to help
control its automated trading actions while running in Auto-Trade mode.

Q. How does a trading system handle requotes and/or rejected orders?

Requoted orders and/or rejected orders cannot be properly accounted for by a trading system that
utilizes the EventCount() function to help control its automated trading actions while running in Auto-
Trade mode. This is an unfortunate limitation of the rudimentary "event count" logic used by many
trading systems (although none of the sample trading systems included in our trading platform use
"event count" logic any longer).

A trading system can utilize the Mark et Range parameter to help minimize the possibility of having
an automated order rejected. The Mark et Range parameter allows you to specify the maximum
number of pips of deviation (0-99) from the quoted price (in either direction) that you are willing to
accept without having to manually approve a requote request. The Mark et Range parameter can be
defined independently for each logical (trading enabled) variable included in a trading system. You
can adjust this parameter from the Trading Parameters tab of the Trading Systems Properties

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1150 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

window.

It is strongly recommended that you utilize the Mark et Range parameter and set its value high
enough to avoid requote requests and/or order rejections that could potentially occur during the
market conditions you expect to be trading in. In the event that you do receive a requote request and
do not approve it (or an order gets rejected for some reason) a trading system using "event count"
logic cannot account for this missed automated order and will assume that the order was
successfully requested, approved, and its position opened. Should that happen, you should
immediately stop the trading system's Auto-Trade mode and manage any open position(s)
manually.

It is strongly recommended that a trading system use some combination of the PositionCount(),
BuyPositionCount(), and/or SellPositionCount() functions vs. the EventCount() function to help
control its automated trading actions while running in Auto-Trade mode. The use of these functions
will not prohibit a trading system from experiencing a missed requoted or rejected order. However,
they can help prevent the trading system from assuming that an order was successfully requested,
approved, and its position opened when, in fact, that order was rejected and canceled.

Q. Will a trading system continue auto-trading if I shutdown VT Trader?

No. Your computer must remain powered on and connected to the Internet and VT Trader must
remain connected to your broker's services for a trading system to request automated orders while
running in Auto-Trade mode. If you exit VT Trader while there is one or more trading systems
running in Auto-Trade mode, when you restart VT Trader those trading systems will attempt to
automatically restart in Auto-Trade mode. When a trading system reloads, it recalculates its data
and alerts. If a trading system determines that no alerts were missed while VT Trader was
disconnected from your broker's services it will restart Auto-Trade mode and continue auto-trading
normally. However, if a trading system determines that it missed what would have been one or more
automated order requests while VT Trader was disconnected it will stop its Auto-Trade mode and
notify you of the missed alert(s). It will then be up to you to manage any existing open position(s)
and/or to manually restart the trading system in Auto-Trade mode.

Q. How does a trading system handle service interruptions or disconnection/reconnection

events?

Your computer must remain powered on and connected to the Internet and VT Trader must remain
connected to your broker's services for a trading system to request automated orders while running
in Auto-Trade mode. Should VT Trader experience a service interruption, no trading system(s)
running in Auto-Trade mode will not be able to request any automated orders while VT Trader
remains disconnected. When VT Trader regains its connection any trading system(s) previously
running in Auto-Trade mode (prior to the service interruption) will attempt to automatically restart in
Auto-Trade mode. When a trading system reloads, it recalculates its alerts. If a trading system
determines that no alerts were missed while VT Trader was disconnected from your broker's
services it will restart Auto-Trade mode and continue auto-trading normally. However, if a trading
system determines that it missed what would have been one or more automated order requests
while VT Trader was disconnected it will stop its Auto-Trade mode and notify you of the missed alert
(s). It will then be up to you to manage any existing open position(s).

Q. How can I determine if there is one or more trading systems currently in Auto-Trade mode?

VT Trader makes it very easy to determine if there are any trading systems running in Auto-Trade
mode. If there is one or more trading systems running in Auto-Trade mode in VT Trader the VT
Trader Notification Icon will display a green, flashing circular LED over top of the VT Trader logo.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Automated Trading FAQ for Trading Systems 1151

Additionally, you can quickly review a detailed list of all the trading systems currently attached to
chart windows (along with their status - Recommendation mode or Auto-Trade mode) using the
Active Trading Systems Summary window. Each chart window that has an attached trading system
running in Auto-Trade mode will display the text "(Trading System Running)" in its caption bar. You
can also check the status of a particular trading system in a chart window by positioning the cursor
over its chart label, clicking the right mouse button, and reviewing the Auto-Trade Mode command's
text. If a trading system is in Recommendation mode the command will read "Start Auto-Trade
Mode"; if a trading system is running in Auto-Trade mode, the command will read "Stop Auto-Trade
Mode".

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

Requesting Orders and Supported Order Types

Part

IX
 Requesting Orders and Supported Order Types 1153

9 Requesting Orders and Supported Order Types

Performing trading activities such as requesting orders is easy with VT Trader. You can request orders
using any of the following methods:

Quotes Board's Instrument Panel 90

Quote Board Instrument Panel's contextual menu 92
Advanced Rates window's contextual menu 97
A chart window's contextual menu 128
A chart window's Quote Panel 121
A chart window Quotes Panel's contextual menu 121

You can request Buy/Sell market orders 1153 , Entry Stop Buy/Sell entry orders 1153 , Entry Limit Buy/
Sell entry orders 1153 , One Cancels Other (OCO) 1154 , If/Then 1155 , and If/Then OCO orders 1155 .
Please click on the order type's name or continue reading to learn more about each type of order
available in VT Trader.

Market Orders

A Mark et Order is executed immediately at the currently quoted market price. The available market order
types include: Buy and Sell.

Entry Orders

An Entry Order is executed the moment the market price reaches the order’s specified price. The
available entry order types include: Entry Stop Buy, Entry Limit Buy, Entry Stop Sell, and Entry Limit Sell
.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1154 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

An Entry Stop Buy order is placed above current market price. A Buy position will be created when
the Ask price touches the order price.

An Entry Limit Buy is placed below the current market price. A Buy position will be created when
the Ask price touches the order price.

An Entry Stop Sell order is placed below current market price. A Sell position will be created when
the Bid price touches the order price.

An Entry Limit Sell is placed above the current market price. A Sell position will be created when
the Bid price touches the order price.

* The Trailing option is only available if your broker supports this functionality. The Trailing option can be
applied to Entry Stop Buy/Sell orders only. While enabled, this option allows an entry stop order to
automatically change its rate to “follow” behind price by predetermined number of pips (defined by the
distance between the entry stop’s Rate and the mark et price at the time the entry order is requested).
The entry stop order will follow behind price as the price moves away from the entry order; however, the
entry order will remain “fixed” as price approaches it. This process repeats until such time as the entry
stop order is executed or canceled.

One Cancels Other (OCO) Orders

A One Cancels Other (OCO) order is two separate entry orders “linked” together that are requested as a
single order. When either of the two orders is executed, the other order is canceled. OCO orders must
be requested using the same account on the same instrument (i.e. EUR/USD). The most common form
of a OCO order is an entry limit order and an entry stop order “linked” together. However, for more
advanced order control VT Trader allows any types of entry orders to be linked together to form a OCO
order. The only restriction is that the entry orders that form the OCO order must be on opposite sides of
the current market price.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Requesting Orders and Supported Order Types 1155

If/Then Orders

An If/Then Order is two separate entry orders “linked” together that are requested as a single order.
When the “If” order is executed, the “Then” order becomes an active entry order. If/Then orders must be
requested using the same account on the same instrument (i.e. EUR/USD).

If/Then OCO Orders

An If/Then OCO Order is three separate entry orders “linked” together that are requested as a single
order. When the “If” order is executed, the “Then” OCO order becomes an active entry order pair. If/Then

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1156 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

OCO orders must be requested using the same account on the same instrument (i.e. EUR/USD).

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

"How To" Tutorials

Part

X
 1158 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

10 "How To" Tutorials

10.1 How To Build An Indicator

I. Description of Indicator's Logic

Before we can create a technical indicator, we must define what we want our indicator to accomplish.
For this walk-through, let’s create a simple Moving Average Convergence Divergence (i.e. MACD)
indicator.

The MACD indicator must include the following functionality:

1. Calculate the MACD indicator, including the Fast Line, Signal Line, and Histogram ... and ...

2. Display the MACD indicator in the its own frame in the chart window

II. How to Construct the Indicator

You should be able to construct the MACD indicator if you follow these step-by-step instructions. Line-
by-line explanations of the code and input/output variables used will also be provided.

As you work your way through each of the steps below, it is recommended that you refer to the Indicator
Editor Window 184 section of this help manual for detailed explanations of each of the GUI tabs and
properties you will need to define while constructing your indicator.

Step 1: Create a New Indicator File

Create a new indicator file using VT Trader’s Ribbon -> Technical Analysis menu -> Indicators group ->
Indicators Builder command -> [New] button. This will open an indicator editor window so you can begin
constructing your new indicator.

Step 2: Define the Indicator's General Properties

In the editor window’s General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name:
Moving Average Convergence/Divergence (MACD)

Function Name Alias:

vt_MACD

Label Mask:
MACD (%FastPeriods%,%SlowPeriods%,%SigPeriods%)
Fast = %Fast%
Signal = %Signal%

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1159

Protect From Deletion:

disabled (no check mark)

Notes:
This is the MACD indicator.

Password:
leave text box empty

Confirm Password:
leave text box empty

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s General tab should look similar to this:

Step 3: Define the Indicator's Input Variables

Input variables are included in the indicator's properties window that is shown when you attach the
indicator to your chart. Input variables allow you to adjust the values of the variables without the need to
edit the indicator's programming code.

For our MACD indicator, we need to create input variables defining the data used to calculate the MACD

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1160 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

(i.e. the price data – close, high, low, close, etc.), the fast moving average’s periods, the slow moving
average’s periods, and the signal line’s periods.

In the editor window’s Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

Define the MACD Price Data:

Click the [New] button…

Read Only: disabled (no check mark)
Name: macd_price
Display Name: Price
Type: Price
Default: Close

Define the MACD Fast Moving Average’s Periods:

Click the [New] button…

Read Only: disabled (no check mark)
Name: macd_fast_periods
Display Name: Fast MA Periods
Type: Integer
Default: 12

Define the MACD Slow Moving Average’s Periods:

Click the [New] button…

Read Only: disabled (no check mark)
Name: macd_slow_periods
Display Name: Slow MA Periods
Type: Integer
Default: 26

Define the MACD Signal Line’s Periods:

Click the [New] button…

Read Only: disabled (no check mark)
Name: macd_signal_periods
Display Name: Signal Line Periods
Type: Integer
Default: 9

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s Input Variable(s) tab should look similar to this:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1161

Step 4: Define the Indicator's Output Variables and Horizontal Lines

Output variables allow you to display a variable’s data plot in the chart window. Horizontal lines allow you
to display reference lines, such as overbought and oversold levels, for the indicator's data plot(s) in the
chart window.

For our MACD indicator, we need to create output variables to display the MACD indicator’s Fast Line,
Signal Line, and Histogram and we need to create a horizontal line to reference the zero level.

In the editor window’s Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

Display the MACD Fast Line:

Click the [New] button…

Var Name: Fast
Name: (Fast Line)
Line Color: Blue
Line Width: 1
Line Style: Solid
Hide in Inspect: disabled (no check mark)

Display the MACD Signal Line:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1162 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Click the [New] button…

Var Name: Signal
Name: (Signal Line)
Line Color: Red
Line Width: 1
Line Style: Solid
Hide in Inspect: disabled (no check mark)

Display the MACD Histogram:

Click the [New] button…

Var Name: Histogram
Name: (Histogram)
Line Color: Dark Green
Line Width: 1
Line Style: Histogram
Hide in Inspect: disabled (no check mark)

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s Output Variable(s) tab should look similar to
this:

In the editor window’s Horizontal Line tab, create the following variables:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1163

Display the Zero Level:

Click the [New] button…

Value: 0
Line Color: Black
Line Width: 1
Line Style: Dashed

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s Horizontal Line tab should look similar to this:

Step 5: Create the Indicator's Formula Code

The formula code is the “meat and potatoes” of an indicator. The formula code is used to define the
indicator's calculation logic.

In the editor widow’s Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula script:

//Calculate the MACD Indicator

Fast:= Mov(macd_price,macd_fast_periods,E) - Mov(macd_price,macd_slow_periods,E);

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1164 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Signal:= Mov(Fast,macd_signal_periods,E);
Histogram:= Fast-Signal;

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s Formula tab should look similar to this:

Step 6: Save the MACD Indicator

Click the Save icon in the editor window’s toolbar to finish building your MACD indicator. If everything
has been done correctly you should receive no errors and the system should save.

Step 7: Attach the MACD Indicator to a Chart

To attach the indicator to a chart, select the Add Indicator option from the chart’s contextual menu,
select Moving Average Convergence/Divergence (MACD) from the indicators list, and click the [Add]
button. The indicator's properties window will be shown. You will be able to make any adjustments to the
input variables that you created for the indicator from the Indicator Constants, Color/Style, and Horizontal
Line tabs.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1165

Once you are satisfied with the values of the indicator's properties click the [OK] button to add the
indicator to your chart window. The MACD indicator should similar to the screenshot below when

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1166 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

attached to one of your chart windows:

III. Formula Code Line-by-Line Explanations

To gain a better understanding of how the MACD indicator works let’s examine its formula code line-by-
line. It is recommended that you refer to the Scripting Language 329 section of this help manual for
detailed explanations of the scripting language’s syntax and internal functions.

Line 1:

Fast:= Mov(macd_price,macd_fast_periods,E) - Mov(macd_price,macd_slow_periods,E);

Line 1 calculates the Fast Line of the MACD indicator. The MACD Fast Line is the difference between
the Fast variable’s value and the Signal variable’s value. It is calculated by subtracting the value of a slow
exponential moving average from the value of a fast exponential moving average. The resulting value is
returned and stored as the Fast variable.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1167

The fast exponential moving average is calculated using the internal mov(data array, periods, method)
function that requires the macd_price and macd_fast_periods input variables along with the exponential
moving average constant (E) as its arguments.

The slow exponential moving average is calculated using the internal mov(data array, periods, method)
function that requires the macd_price and macd_slow_periods input variables along with the exponential
moving average constant (E) as its arguments.

Line 2:

Signal:= Mov(Fast,macd_signal_periods,E);

Line 2 calculates the Signal Line of the MACD indicator. It is calculated by smoothing the Fast variable
with an exponential moving average. The resulting value is returned and stored as the Signal variable.

The moving average is calculated using the internal mov(data array, periods, method) function that
requires the Fast variable’s value and the macd_signal_periods input variable along with the exponential
moving average constant (E) as its arguments.

Line 3:

Histogram:= Fast-Signal;

Line 3 calculates the MACD Histogram. The MACD Histogram is the difference between the Fast
variable’s value and the Signal variable’s value. It is calculated by subtracting the Signal variable’s value
from the Fast variable’s value. The resulting value is returned and stored as the Histogram variable.

10.2 How To Build A Trading System

I. Description of Trading System’s Logic

Before we can create a trading system, we must define what we want our trading system to accomplish.
For this walk-through, let’s create a simple Moving Average Convergence Divergence (i.e. MACD) trading
system.

The MACD trading system must include the following functionality:

1. Calculate the MACD indicator, including the Fast Line, Signal Line, and Histogram

2. Display the MACD indicator in the its own frame in the chart window

3. Provide visual and audio alerts when the MACD Fast Line crosses above/below the MACD Signal
Line

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1168 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

4. Provide a visual status of the MACD trend direction (i.e. the Fast Line is above or below the
Signal Line)

5. Request buy/sell market orders at the close of each bar when the MACD Fast Line crosses
above/below the MACD Signal Line

II. How to Construct the Trading System

You should be able to construct the MACD trading system if you follow these step-by-step instructions.
Line-by-line explanations of the code and input/output variables used will also be provided.

As you work your way through each of the steps below, it is recommended that you refer to the Trading
System Editor Window 207 section of this help manual for detailed explanations of each of the GUI tabs
and properties you will need to define while constructing your trading system.

Step 1: Create a New Trading System File

Create a new trading system file using VT Trader’s Ribbon -> Technical Analysis menu -> Trading
Systems group -> Trading Systems Builder command -> [New] button. This will open a trading system
editor window so you can begin constructing your new trading system.

Step 2: Define the Trading System’s General Properties

In the editor window’s General tab, type the following text for each field:

Name:
MACD Fast / Signal Crossover System

Function Name Alias:

vttrs_MacdFastSignalCross

Label Mask:
MACD Fast / Signal Crossover System

Protect From Deletion:

disabled (no check mark)

Notes:
This is a MACD fast line / signal line cross over trading system.

Password:
leave text box empty

Confirm Password:
leave text box empty

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s General tab should look similar to this:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1169

Step 3: Define the Trading System’s Input Variables

Input variables are included in the trading system’s properties window that is shown when you attach the
trading system to your chart. Input variables allow you to adjust the values of the variables without the
need to edit the trading system’s programming code.

For our MACD trading system, we need to create input variables defining the data used to calculate the
MACD (i.e. the price data – close, high, low, close, etc.), the fast moving average’s periods, the slow
moving average’s periods, and the signal line’s periods.

In the editor window’s Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

Define the MACD Price Data:

Click the [New] button…

Read Only: disabled (no check mark)
Name: macd_price
Display Name: MACD Price
Type: Price
Default: Close

Define the MACD Fast Moving Average’s Periods:

Click the [New] button…

Read Only: disabled (no check mark)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1170 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Name: macd_fast_periods
Display Name: MACD Fast MA Periods
Type: Integer
Default: 12

Define the MACD Slow Moving Average’s Periods:

Click the [New] button…

Read Only: disabled (no check mark)
Name: macd_slow_periods
Display Name: MACD Slow MA Periods
Type: Integer
Default: 26

Define the MACD Signal Line’s Periods:

Click the [New] button…

Read Only: disabled (no check mark)
Name: macd_signal_periods
Display Name: MACD Signal Line Periods
Type: Integer
Default: 9

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s Input Variable(s) tab should look similar to this:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1171

Step 4: Define the Trading System’s Output Variables

Output variables allow you to display a variable’s data plot in the chart window, define visual/audio alerts
properties of the variable, and/or define the buy/sell market order request behavior.

For our MACD trading system, we need to create output variables to:

1. Display the MACD indicator’s Fast Line, Signal Line, and Histogram

2. Create visual and audio alerts when the MACD Fast Line crosses above/below the MACD Signal
Line

3. Display the MACD trend direction (i.e. the Fast Line is above or below the Signal Line)

4. Request buy/sell market orders at the close of each bar when the MACD Fast Line crosses
above/below the MACD Signal Line

In the editor window’s Input Variable(s) tab, create the following variables:

Display the MACD Fast Line:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: Fast
Name: MACD Fast Line
Description: MACD Fast Line
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: enabled (check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trading Enabled: disabled (no check mark)

In the Indicator Output tab, complete the options as follows:

Line Color: Blue
Line Width: 1
Line Style: Solid
Placement: Additional Frame 1
Click the [OK] button…

Display the MACD Signal Line:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: Signal
Name: MACD Signal Line
Description: MACD Signal Line
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: enabled (check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1172 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Trading Enabled: disabled (no check mark)

In the Indicator Output tab, complete the options as follows:

Line Color: Red
Line Width: 1
Line Style: Solid
Placement: Additional Frame 1
Click the [OK] button…

Display the MACD Histogram:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: Histogram
Name: MACD Histogram
Description: MACD Histogram
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: enabled (check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trading Enabled: disabled (no check mark)

In the Indicator Output tab, complete the options as follows:

Line Color: Dark Green
Line Width: 1
Line Style: Histogram
Placement: Additional Frame 1
Click the [OK] button…

Define MACD Fast Line Crosses Above MACD Signal Line Alert Properties:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: LongAlert
Name: Long Alert
Description: MACD Fast Line crosses above MACD Signal Line
Graphic Enabled: enabled (check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: enabled (check mark)
Alerts Enabled: enabled (check mark)
Trading Enabled: disabled (no check mark)

In the Graphic tab, complete the options as follows:

Symbol: Up Arrow
Size: Medium
Color: Blue
Symbol Position: Below Price Plot

In the Alerts tab, complete the options as follows:

Alert Message: Long Alert! MACD Fast Line crossed above MACD Signal Line.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1173

Alert Sound: ringin (*or any other sound you prefer)

Click the [OK] button…

Define MACD Fast Line Crosses Below MACD Signal Line Alert Properties:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: ShortAlert
Name: Short Alert
Description: MACD Fast Line crosses below MACD Signal Line
Graphic Enabled: enabled (check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: enabled (check mark)
Alerts Enabled: enabled (check mark)
Trading Enabled: disabled (no check mark)

In the Graphic tab, complete the options as follows:

Symbol: Down Arrow
Size: Medium
Color: Red
Symbol Position: Above Price Plot

In the Alerts tab, complete the options as follows:

Alert Message: Short Alert! MACD Fast Line crossed below MACD Signal Line.
Alert Sound: ringin (*or any other sound you prefer)
Click the [OK] button…

Define MACD Up Trend (i.e. Fast Line > Signal Line):

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: UpTrend
Name: MACD Up Trend
Description: MACD Fast Line > MACD Signal Line
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: enabled (check mark)
Indicator Output: disabled (no check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trading Enabled: disabled (no check mark)

In the Trends tab, complete the options as follows:

Display Vertical Lines: enabled (check mark)
Background: Blue
Pattern: Solid
Symbol: Up Arrow
Symbol Color: White
Click the [OK] button…

Define MACD Down Trend (i.e. Fast Line < Signal Line):

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1174 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: DownTrend
Name: MACD Down Trend
Description: MACD Fast Line < MACD Signal Line
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: enabled (check mark)
Indicator Output: disabled (no check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trading Enabled: disabled (no check mark)

In the Trends tab, complete the options as follows:

Display Vertical Lines: enabled (check mark)
Background: Red
Pattern: Solid
Symbol: Down Arrow
Symbol Color: White
Click the [OK] button…

Define Basic Automated Trading Logic to Open A Buy Trade:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: OpenBuy
Name: Open Buy
Description: In Auto-Trade Mode, it requests a BUY market order to open a BUY trade
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: disabled (no check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trading Enabled: enabled (check mark)

In the Trading tab, complete the options as follows:

Trading Action: Buy
Click the [OK] button…

Define Basic Automated Trading Logic to Close A Buy Trade:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: CloseBuy
Name: Close Buy
Description: In Auto-Trade Mode, it requests a SELL market order to close a BUY trade
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: disabled (no check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trading Enabled: enabled (check mark)

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1175

In the Trading tab, complete the options as follows:

Trading Action: Sell
Click the [OK] button…

Define Basic Automated Trading Logic to Open A Sell Trade:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: OpenSell
Name: Open Sell
Description: In Auto-Trade Mode, it requests a SELL market order to open a SELL trade
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: disabled (no check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trading Enabled: enabled (check mark)

In the Trading tab, complete the options as follows:

Trading Action: Sell
Click the [OK] button…

Define Basic Automated Trading Logic to Close A Sell Trade:

Click the [New] button…

In the Name tab, complete the options as follows:
Var Name: CloseSell
Name: Close Sell
Description: In Auto-Trade Mode, it requests a BUY market order to close a SELL trade
Graphic Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Highlights Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trends Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Indicator Output: disabled (no check mark)
Alerts Enabled: disabled (no check mark)
Trading Enabled: enabled (check mark)

In the Trading tab, complete the options as follows:

Trading Action: Buy
Click the [OK] button…

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s Output Variable(s) tab should look similar to
this:

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1176 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Step 5: Create the Trading System’s Formula Code

The formula code is the “meat and potatoes” of a trading system. The formula code is used to define the
trading system’s logic – including calculating any required indicators, conditional logic statements for
alerts/signals, and the basic automated trading logic.

In the editor widow’s Formula tab, copy and paste the following formula script:

//Calculate the MACD Indicator

Fast:= Mov(macd_price,macd_fast_periods,E) - Mov(macd_price,macd_slow_periods,E);

Signal:= Mov(Fast,macd_signal_periods,E);
Histogram:= Fast-Signal;

//Define Alert Conditions

LongAlert:= Cross(Fast,Signal);
ShortAlert:= Cross(Signal,Fast);

//Define MACD Fast/Signal Trend Direction

UpTrend:= Fast > Signal;

DownTrend:= Signal > Fast;

//Define Basic Automated Trading Logic

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1177

//* Only Used While System is in Auto-Trade Mode

OpenBuy:= BuyPositionCount()=0 AND LongAlert=1;

CloseBuy:= BuyPositionCount()>0 AND ShortAlert=1;

OpenSell:= SellPositionCount()=0 AND ShortAlert=1;

CloseSell:= SellPositionCount()>0 AND LongAlert=1;

If you have completed this step successfully, the editor’s Formula tab should look similar to this:

Step 6: Save the MACD Trading System

Click the Save icon in the editor window’s toolbar to finish building your MACD trading system. If
everything has been done correctly you should receive no errors and the system should save.

Step 7: Attach the MACD Trading System to a Chart

To attach the trading system to a chart, select the Add Trading System option from the chart’s
contextual menu, select MACD Fast / Signal Crossover System from the trading systems list, and click

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1178 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

the [Add] button. You’ll need to read and agree to the disclaimer before proceeding.

Once you’ve agreed to the disclaimer, the trading system’s properties window will be shown. You will be
able to make any adjustments to the input variables that you created for the trading system from the
System Parameters tab.

Before clicking the [OK] button, you should open the Trading Parameters tab and configure the Amount
property that will be used if/when you start the trading system in Auto-Trade mode.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1179

Once you are satisfied with the values of the trading systems properties click the [OK] button to add the
system to your chart window. The MACD trading system should similar to the screenshot below when
attached to one of your chart windows:

The MACD trading system is attached to the chart in Recommendation mode. This means it will provide
your alerts/signals, but it will not request any automated trading orders. You must enable the trading
system’s Auto-Trade mode if you want the system to perform automated trading actions.

To enable a trading system’s Auto-Trade mode, you must activate the trading system label’s contextual
menu by right-clicking with the mouse while the cursor is positioned over the trading system’s label and
choose Start Auto-Trade Mode. If Auto-Trade mode is successfully started, you will see the text
(Trading System Running) appear in the chart window’s top caption bar.

To stop a trading system’s Auto-Trade mode, you must activate the trading system label’s contextual
menu by right-clicking with the mouse while the cursor is positioned over the trading system’s label and
choose Stop Auto-Trade Mode. If Auto-Trade mode is successfully stopped, you will see the text
(Trading System Running) disappear from the chart window’s top caption bar.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1180 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

III. Formula Code Line-by-Line Explanations

To gain a better understanding of how the MACD trading system works let’s examine its formula code
line-by-line. It is recommended that you refer to the Scripting Language 329 section of this help manual
for detailed explanations of the scripting language’s syntax and internal functions.

Line 1:

Fast:= Mov(macd_price,macd_fast_periods,E) - Mov(macd_price,macd_slow_periods,E);

Line 1 calculates the Fast Line of the MACD indicator. The MACD Fast Line is the difference between
the Fast variable’s value and the Signal variable’s value. It is calculated by subtracting the value of a slow
exponential moving average from the value of a fast exponential moving average. The resulting value is
returned and stored as the Fast variable.

The fast exponential moving average is calculated using the internal mov(data array, periods, method)
function that requires the macd_price and macd_fast_periods input variables along with the exponential
moving average constant (E) as its arguments.

The slow exponential moving average is calculated using the internal mov(data array, periods, method)
function that requires the macd_price and macd_slow_periods input variables along with the exponential
moving average constant (E) as its arguments.

Line 2:

Signal:= Mov(Fast,macd_signal_periods,E);

Line 2 calculates the Signal Line of the MACD indicator. It is calculated by smoothing the Fast variable
with an exponential moving average. The resulting value is returned and stored as the Signal variable.

The moving average is calculated using the internal mov(data array, periods, method) function that
requires the Fast variable’s value and the macd_signal_periods input variable along with the exponential
moving average constant (E) as its arguments.

Line 3:

Histogram:= Fast-Signal;

Line 3 calculates the MACD Histogram. The MACD Histogram is the difference between the Fast
variable’s value and the Signal variable’s value. It is calculated by subtracting the Signal variable’s value
from the Fast variable’s value. The resulting value is returned and stored as the Histogram variable.

Line 4:

LongAlert:= Cross(Fast,Signal);

Line 4 defines the “MACD Fast Line crosses above MACD Signal Line” conditional logic. The internal
cross(data array 1, data array 2) function is used for this purpose. The cross() function returns a true (1)
value during/for each bar/candle when the data array 1 (i.e. MACD Fast Line) crosses above the data

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1181

array 2 (i.e. MACD Signal Line); it returns a false (0) value during/for all other bars/candles. The resulting
value is returned and stored as the LongAlert variable.

Line 5:

ShortAlert:= Cross(Signal,Fast);

Line 5 defines the “MACD Fast Line crosses below MACD Signal Line” conditional logic. The internal
cross(data array 1, data array 2) function is used for this purpose. The cross() function returns a true (1)
value during/for each bar/candle when the data array 1 (i.e. MACD Signal Line) crosses above the data
array 2 (i.e. MACD Fast Line); it returns a false (0) value during/for all other bars/candles. The resulting
value is returned and stored as the ShortAlert variable.

Line 6:

UpTrend:= Fast > Signal;

Line 6 defines the “MACD Up Trend” conditional logic. A simple comparison of the Fast variable’s value
to the Signal variable’s value using the “greater than” rational operator is used for this purpose. The result
of the comparison returns a true (1) value during/for each bar/candle when the Fast variable’s value is
greater than the Signal variable’s value; it returns a false (0) value during/for all other bars/candles. The
resulting value is returned and stored as the UpTrend variable.

Line 7:

DownTrend:= Signal > Fast;

Line 7 defines the “MACD Down Trend” conditional logic. A simple comparison of the Fast variable’s
value to the Signal variable’s value using the “greater than” rational operator is used for this purpose. The
result of the comparison returns a true (1) value during/for each bar/candle when the Signal variable’s
value is greater than the Fast variable’s value; it returns a false (0) value during/for all other bars/candles.
The resulting value is returned and stored as the DownTrend variable. * This line of formula code could
have also been written as…

DownTrend:= Fast < Signal;

… if it is a more comfortable format for you.

Line 8:

OpenBuy:= BuyPositionCount()=0 AND LongAlert=1;

Line 8 defines the condition logic necessary to generate and help control the number of automated order
requests used to open a buy trade.

The BuyPositionCount() function returns the number of open buy positions for the respective instrument
and account that the trading system is assigned to. If the BuyPositionCount()'s returned value is equal to
zero (indicating that there are no open buy positions) and the LongAlert variable’s value is equal to 1,
then the OpenBuy variable’s value will be equal to 1, otherwise it will be equal to 0.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

1182 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

The trading action (buy or sell mark et order) requested by the OpenBuy variable is defined in the trading
system editor’s UI.

Line 9:

CloseBuy:= BuyPositionCount()>0 AND ShortAlert=1;

Line 9 defines the condition logic necessary to generate and help control the number of automated order
requests used to close a buy trade.

The BuyPositionCount() function returns the number of open buy positions for the respective instrument
and account that the trading system is assigned to. If the BuyPositionCount()'s returned value is greater
than zero (indicating that there is at least one open buy position) and the ShortAlert variable’s value is
equal to 1, then the CloseBuy variable’s value will be equal to 1, otherwise it will be equal to 0.

The trading action (buy or sell mark et order) requested by the CloseBuy variable is defined in the trading
system editor’s UI.

Line 10:

OpenSell:= SellPositionCount()=0 AND ShortAlert=1;

Line 10 defines the condition logic necessary to generate and help control the number of automated
order requests used to open a sell trade.

The SellPositionCount() function returns the number of open sell positions for the respective instrument
and account that the trading system is assigned to. If the SellPositionCount()'s returned value is equal to
zero (indicating that there are no open sell positions) and the ShortAlert variable’s value is equal to 1,
then the OpenSell variable’s value will be equal to 1, otherwise it will be equal to 0.

The trading action (buy or sell mark et order) requested by the OpenSell variable is defined in the trading
system editor’s UI.

Line 11:

CloseSell:= SellPositionCount()>0 AND LongAlert=1;

Line 11 defines the condition logic necessary to generate and help control the number of automated
order requests used to close a sell trade.

The SellPositionCount() function returns the number of open sell positions for the respective instrument
and account that the trading system is assigned to. If the SellPositionCount()'s returned value is greater
than zero (indicating that there is at least one open sell position) and the LongAlert variable’s value is
equal to 1, then the CloseSell variable’s value will be equal to 1, otherwise it will be equal to 0.

The trading action (buy or sell mark et order) requested by the CloseSell variable is defined in the trading
system editor’s UI.

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 "How To" Tutorials 1183

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1184 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Edit 180

Index Instrument
Price 180
180

Active Trading Systems Summary Window

Bid/Ask 181
-A- Close 181
Delete 181
Account Group
Edit 181
Change Password... 35
Instrument 181
Fund Your Account 35
Interval 181
Login 35
Name 181
Logout 35
Params Enabled 181
Account Information Status Bar
Properties 181
Account Balance 79
Start/Stop 181
Margin Balance 79
Status 181
Realized Profit/Loss 79
View Events 181
Unrealized Profit/Loss 79
Advanced Rates Window
Account Information Window
Ask (Buy) 94
Account 74
Bid (Sell) 94
Balance 74
Contextual Menu 94
Contextual Menu 74
Daily High 94
Equity (Margin Balance) 74
Daily Low 94
Properties 74
Instrument 94
Realized P/L 74
Margin 94
Total Amount Open 74
Order Size 94
Total Lots Open 74
Pip Value 94
Unrealized P/L 74
Properties 94
Account Information Window Contextual Menu
Spread 94
Close All Positions 76
Time 94
Convert To 76
Trade Size 94
Properties 76
Advanced Rates Window Contextual Menu
Remove All Orders 76
Add/Remove Instruments 97
Reports 76
Buy 97
Restore Default 76
Conditional Buy 97
Account Summary Group
Conditional Sell 97
Account Information 36
New Price Alert 97
Account Profile 36
Open Chart 97
Currency Portfolio 36
Properties 97
Active Chart Group
Restore Default 97
Bid/Ask 42
Sell 97
Instrument 42
Alerts Activity Window
Interval 42
Contextual Menu 174
Type 42
Date/Time 174
Active Price Alerts Summary Window
Message 174
Add 180
Type 174
Bid/Ask 180
Alerts Activity Window Contextual Menu
Comment 180
Clear Log 176
Date/Time 180
Copy 176
Delete 180
© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC
 Index 1185

Alerts Activity Window Contextual Menu Save As... 41

Properties 176 Chart Templates Management Window
Restore Default 176 Clone 152
Save Log 176 Delete 152
Select All 176 Edit 152
Analysis Tools Group Export 152
Copy Prices 46 Import 152
Data Inspection 46 Rename 152
Selection Tool 46 Restore Default 152
Andrews Pitchfork Tool Set As Primary 152
Calc Properties 279 Chart Types
Color 279 Bars 142
Contextual Menu 279 Bars (O/H/L/C) 142
Drawing Properties 279 Chart Types 142
Font 279 Heikin-Ashi Candlesticks 142
High Fork Color 279 Japanese Candlesticks (Filled) 142
Line Style 279 Japanese Candlesticks (Hollow) 142
Line Width 279 Line 142
Low Fork Color 279 Point & Figure 142
Andrew's Pitchfork Tool Contextual Menu Renko 142
Delete 280 Chart Window
Properties 280 Caption Bar 121
Set to Default 280 Chart Window Toolbar 121
Axes Group Consolidated Viewing Mode 121
Auto-Size Y-Axis 45 Contextual Menu 121
Reset Axes 45 Current Rate Line 121
Reset X-Axis 45 Drawing Tools 121
Reset Y-Axis 45 Grid Lines 121
Hidden Labels 121
High/Low Zone 121
-B- Indicator Labels 121
Indicator Order Labels 121
BVisual Trading Language (VTL) Functions
Indicators 121
Absolute Value 334
Open Position Labels 121
Pending Orders Labels 121
-C- Position Viewing Mode
Price Alert Labels 121
121

Chart Properties Window 131 Price Frame 121

Appearance Section 131 Properties 121
Attached Indicators 131 Quotes Panel 121
Attached Trading Systems 131 Scroll Bar 121
Chart Types 131 Spread Band 121
Drawing Tools 131 Status Bar 121
Labels Section 131 Summary Viewing Mode 121
Layers Section 131 Technical Indicators Frame(s) 121
Chart Templates Group Trading System Labels 121
Load... 41 Trading Systems 121
Manage Chart Templates 41 X-Axis 121

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1186 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Chart Window Y-Axis Zoom In 124

Y-Axis 121 Y-Axis Zoom Out 124
Chart Window Contextual Menu Zoom (Magnify) 124
Add Indicator 128 Client Files Group
Add Trading System 128 Export Environment 34
Attached Indicators 128 Import Environment 34
Attached Trading Systems 128 Open Data Folder 34
Buy 128 Close Group
Chart Properties... 128 Close All Positions 38
Chart Template 128 Remove All Orders 38
Conditional Buy 128 Commentaries Window Contextual Menu
Entry Limit 128 Properties 163
Entry Stop 128 Restore Default 163
If/Then 128 Show Message in Separate Window 163
If/Then OCO 128 Comments Tool
Indicator Order Buy 128 Background Color 243
Indicator Order Sell 128 Contextual Menu 243
Indicators Quick List 128 Edit Comments 243
Load Template... 128 Float 243
Move Frame Down 128 Font Attributes 243
Move Frame Up 128 Font Color 243
One Cancels Other (OCO) 128 Font Size 243
Price Alert 128 Font Type 243
Save Template As... 128 Properties 243
Sell 128 Rotate Comments 243
Trading System QuickList 128 Comments Tool Contextual Menu
Chart Window Toolbar 124 Delete 245
Accounts/Position Viewing Mode 124 Delete All 245
Auot-Size Y-Axis 124 Properties 245
AutoScroll to Current Time 124 Set to Default 245
Bid/Ask 124 Contact Us Group
Chart Interval 124 Chat with Customer Support 53
Chart Type 124 Chat with Dealing Support 53
Clone Chart 124 Copy Prices Tool
Customize... 124 Close 241
Instruments 124 Date/Time 241
Margin Call Rates 124 High 241
Quotes Panel 124 Low 241
Reset Axes 124 Open 241
Reset X-Axis 124 Volume 241
Reset Y-Axis 124 Cross Hair
Set All Labels to Default Position 124 Measuring Function 240
Show Cross Hair 124 Properties 240
Show Grid 124 Currency Calculator 120
Tool Selector 124 Currency Portfolio Window
Undo Zoom 124 Contextual Menu 80
X-Axis Zoom In 124 Currency 80
X-Axis Zoom Out 124 Properties 80

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Index 1187

Currency Portfolio Window Comments 239

Total Buy Lots 80 Copy Prices 239
Total Net Exposure 80 Cross Hair 239
Total Sell Lots 80 Ellipse 239
Currency Portfolio Window Contextual Menu Equidistant Channel 239
Properties 82 Fibonacci Arc 239
Restore Default 82 Fibonacci Channel 239
Fibonacci Fan 239
Fibonacci Retracements 239
-D- Fibonacci Time Extensions 239
Gann Fan 239
Data Inspection Window 154
Gann Grid 239
Contextual Menu 154
Gann Line 239
Data 154
Horizontal Line 239
Properties 154
Linear Regression Line 239
Value 154
Raff Regression Channel 239
Data Inspection Window Contextual Menu
Rectangle 239
Auto-Size Columns to Fit 157
Standard Deviation Channel 239
Properties 157
Standard Error Channel 239
Restore Default 157
Symbols 239
Size Columns to Fit 157
Trend Line 239
Dealing Rates Group
Triangle 239
Advanced Rates Window 38
Vertical Line 239
Quotes Board Window 38
Drawing Tools Group
Desktop Workspaces Group
Channels 47
Manage Desktop Workspaces 33
Comments 47
Save 33
Delete 47
Save As... 33
Fibonacci 47
Switch 33
Gann 47
Desktop Workspaces Management Window
Lines 47
Clone 150
Shapes 47
Delete 150
Symbols 47
Export 150
Import 150
Rename
Restore
150
150
-E-
Switch 150 Economic Calendar Window
Docking... How It Works 27 Detailed Economic Indicator Data 172
Dow Jones News Window Next Week's Outlook 172
Contextual Menu 166 Previous Week's Recap 172
Date/Time 166 Select Archived Week 172
Properties 166 Theme of the Week 172
Title 166 Ellipse Contextual Menu
Dow Jones News Window Contextual Menu Set to Default 283
Properties 168 Ellipse Contextual Menu
Restore Default 168 Add Comment 283
Show Message in Separate Window 168 Delete 283
Drawing Tools Delete All 283
Andrew's Pitchfork 239 Properties 283
© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC
 1188 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Ellipse Contextual Menu Calc Properties 305

Symmetric by Max 283 Color 305
Symmetric by Min 283 Contextual Menu 305
Equidistant Channel Tool Display Underlying Trendline 305
Alerts 276 Drawing Properties 305
Begin Date 276 Font 305
Begin Value 276 Line Style 305
Color 276 Line Width 305
Contextual Menu 276 Show Percent Labels 305
Drawing Properties 276 Fibonacci Expansions Contextual Menu
End Date 276 Add Comment 299
End Value 276 Delete 299
Extend Begin 276 Delete All 299
Extend End 276 Properties 299
Line Style 276 Set to Default 299
Line Width 276 Fibonacci Expansions Tool
Equidistant Tool Contextual Menu Alerts 297
Add Comment 277 Calc Properties 297
Delete 277 Color 297
Delete All 277 Contextual Menu 297
Properties 277 Display Underlying Trendline 297
Set to Default 277 Drawing Properties 297
Extend Left 297
Extend Right 297
-F- Font 297
Line Style 297
Fibonacci Arc Contextual Menu
Line Width 297
Add Comment 315
Show Percent Labels (Left) 297
Delete 315
Show Percent Labels (Right) 297
Delete All 315
Show Price Labels (Left) 297
Properties 315
Show Price Labels (Right) 297
Set to Default 315
Fibonacci Fan Contextual Menu
Fibonacci Arc Tool
Add Comment 311
Calc Properties 313
Delete 311
Color 313
Delete All 311
Contextual Menu 313
Properties 311
Display Underlying Trendline 313
Set to Default 311
Drawing Properties 313
Font 313 Fibonacci Fan Tool
Calc Properties 309
Line Style 313
Color 309
Line Width 313
Contextual Menu 309
Show Percent Labels 313
Display Underlying Trendline 309
Fibonacci Channel Contextual Menu
Drawing Properties 309
Add Comment 307
Font 309
Delete 307
Line Style 309
Delete All 307
Line Width 309
Properties 307
Show Percent Labels 309
Set to Default 307
Fibonacci Retracements Contextual Menu
Fibonacci Channel Tool
© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC
 Index 1189

Fibonacci Retracements Contextual Menu Currency Calculator 51

Add Comment 294 FX Times 51
Delete 294 Market Analysis 51
Delete All 294 Pip Calculator 51
Properties 294
Set to Default 294
Fibonacci Retracements Tool -G-
Alerts 293
Gann Fan Tool
Calc Properties 293
Alerts 321
Color 293
Begin Date 321
Contextual Menu 293
Begin Value 321
Display Underlying Trendline 293
Color 321
Drawing Properties 293
Contextual Menu 321
Extend Left 293
Drawing Properties 321
Extend Right 293
Line Style 321
Font 293
Line Width 321
Line Style 293
Rise 321
Line Width 293
Run 321
Show Percent Labels (Left) 293
Gann Fan Tool Contextual Menu
Show Percent Labels (Right) 293
Add Comment 322
Show Price Labels (Left) 293
Delete 322
Show Price Labels (Right) 293
Delete All 322
Fibonacci Time Extensions Contextual Menu Properties 322
Add Comment 303
Set to Default 322
Delete 303
Gann Grid Tool
Delete All 303
Alerts 324
Properties 303
Begin Date 324
Set to Default 303
Begin Value 324
Fibonacci Time Extensions Tool Color 324
Calc Properties 301
Contextual Menu 324
Color 301
Drawing Properties 324
Contextual Menu 301
Line Style 324
Display Underlying Trendline 301
Line Width 324
Drawing Properties 301
Rise 324
Font 301
Run 324
Line Style 301
Gann Grid Tool Contextual Menu
Line Width 301
Add Comment 326
Show Percent Labels 301
Delete 326
Fluent UI Ribbon Delete All 326
Alerts Menu 30
Properties 326
Chart Menu 30
Set to Default 326
Environment Menu 30
Gann Line Tool
Fundamental Analysis Menu 30
Alerts 317
Help Menu 30
Begin Date 317
My Account Menu 30
Begin Value 317
Technical Analysis Menu 30
Color 317
Trading Menu 30
Contextual Menu 317
Forex Resources Group Drawing Properties 317
© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC
 1190 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Gann Line Tool

Extend Begin 317
Line Style 317 -I-
Line Width 317
Indicator Editor Options
Rise 317
Code Completion 186, 209
Run 317
Code Parameters 186
Gann Line Tool Contextual Menu Colors 186
Add Comment 319
Font 186
Delete 319
Indicator Editor Toolbar
Delete All 319
Close 184
Properties 319
Copy 184
Set to Default 319
Cut 184
Getting Started with VT Trader Editor Options 184
How To Install VT Trader 17
Paste 184
How To Login Into VT Trader 17
Redo 184
PC System Requirements 17
Replace 184
Save 184
-H- Search
Undo
184
184
Horizontal Lines Tool Indicator Editor Window
Alerts 253 Formula Tab 184
Color 253 General Tab 184
Contextual Menu 253 Horizontal Line(s) Tab 184
Drawing Properties 253 Indicator Editor Toolbar 184
Line Style 253 Input Variable(s) Tab 184
Line Width 253 Output Variable(s) Tab 184
Value 253 Indicator Editor Window - Formula Tab
Horizontal Lines Tool Contextual Menu Formula Editor Toolbar 204
Add Comment 255 Paste Function Window 204
Delete 255 Indicator Editor Window - General Tab
Delete All 255 Confirm Password 192
Properties 255 Data Inspection Alias 192
Set to Default 255 Function Name Alias 192
How to install VT Trader... Label Mask 192
Agree to End User License Agreement 17 Name 192
Choose Installation Location 17 Notes 192
Choose Installation Type 17 Password 192
Download VT Trader Setup File 17 Placement 192
Start Menu Folder 17 Protect from deletion 192
How to login to VT Trader Indicator Editor Window - Horizontal Line(s) Tab
Checking for updates... 23 Color 202
Dealing Desk 23 Style 202
Login 23 Value 202
Password 23 Width 202
Retry 23 Indicator Editor Window - Input Variable(s) Tab
Starting VT Trader 23 Default 195
Work Offline 23 Display Name 195
Name 195

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Index 1191

Indicator Editor Window - Input Variable(s) Tab Panel Size 92

Read Only 195 Sell 92
Type 195
Indicator Editor Window - Output Variable(s) Tab
Hide In Inspect 200 -L-
Line Color 200
Linear Regression Line Tool
Line Type 200
Color 263
Line Width 200
Contextual Menu 263
Name 200
Drawing Properties 263
Var Name 200
Line Style 263
Indicators Builder Price 263
Clone 182
Properties 263
Custom Indicators 182
Width 263
Delete 182
Linear Regression Line Tool Contextual Menu
Edit 182
Add Comment 264
Export 182
Delete 264
Import 182
Delete All 264
New 182
Properties 264
Standard Indicators 182
Set to Default 264
Indicators Group
Add Indicator... 49
Attached Indicators
Indicator Builder 49
49 -M-
Indicators Quick List 49 Market News Window
Indicators Quick List Contextual Menu 161
Configure 235 Date/Time 161
Instrument Panel (Quotes Board Window) Properties 161
Ask (Buy) 90 Title 161
Bid (Sell) 90 Messages Group
Contextual Menu 90 Broker Announcements Window 39
Daily High 90 Trading Activity Window 39
Daily Low 90
Instrument
Spread 90
90
-N-
Time 90 News Group
Trading Mode Indicator 90 Dow Jones News 51
Instrument Panel (Quotes Board Window) Contextual
Menu
Add/Remove Instruments 92 -O-
Always on Top 92
Buy 92 Open Chart Group
Close 92 Clone Chart 41
Conditional Buy 92 Open Chart 41
Conditional Sell 92 Recently Viewed 41
Detach 92 Open Positions Window
New Price Alert 92 B/S (Buy or Sell) 101
Opacity 92 Close (Current Market Price) 101
Open Chart 92 Contextual Menu 101
Currency 101
© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC
 1192 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Open Positions Window Reference Number 108

Date/Time 101 Trailing Pips 108
Instrument 101 Type 108
Limit 101 Pending Orders Window Contextual Menu
Lots 101 Change 111
Open (Open Price) 101 Properties 111
Pips P/L (Gross Profit/Loss in Pips) 101 Remove 111
Properties 101 Remove All 111
Stop 101 Restore Default 111
Total 101 Pip Calculator 120
Unrealized P/L (Unrealized Profit/Loss in Place New Order(s) Group
Currency) 101 Buy Market Order 37
Open Positions Window Contextual Menu Conditional Buy Order 37
Close All Positions 104 Conditional Sell Order 37
Close Deal 104 Sell Market Order 37
Close Position 104 Price Alert Window
Convert To 104 Bid/Ask 179
Limit 104 Comment 179
Properties 104 Condition 179
Restore Default 104 Instrument 179
Stop 104 Price 179
Options Group Sound 179
Language 34 Price Alerts Group
Options 34 Active Price Alerts Summary 40
Skin 34 New 40
Print Group

-P- Page Setup...

Preview 46
46

PC System Requirements Print 46

CPU (Processor) 17 Print Setup... 46
Hard Drive Capacity 17
Internet Connectivity
Minimum Requirements
17
17
-Q-
Monitor Resolution 17 Quick Access Toolbar
RAM (Memory) 17 About 55
Recommended Requirements 17 Login 55
Pending Orders Window Logout 55
Amount 108 Open New Chart 55
Associated 108 Options 55
Basis 108 Reference Guide 55
Buy/Sell 108 Switch (Desktop Workspace) 55
Contextual Menu 108 Switch Windows 55
Date/Time 108 Quotes_Board_Window
Expiry 108 Instrument Panels 89
Instrument 108
Lots 108
Properties 108
Rate 108

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Index 1193

Entry Stop Buy Order 1153

Entry Stop Sell Order 1153
-R- If/Then OCO Order 1153
If/Then Order 1153
Raff Regression Channel Tool
One Cancels Other (OCO) Order 1153
Alerts 272
Sell Market Order 1153
Calc Properties 272
Color 272 RTechnical Indicators
Accumulation/Distribution 404
Contextual Menu 272
Drawing Properties 272
Extend Left
Extend Right
272
272
-S-
Line Style 272 Show/Hide Group
Line Width 272 Auto-Scroll 43
Price 272 Chart Layers 43
Standard Deviations 272 Cross Hair 43
Raff Regression Channel Tool Contextual Menu Grid Lines 43
Add Comment 274 High/Low Zone 43
Delete 274 Quotes Panel 43
Delete All 274 Standard Deviation Channel Tool
Properties 274 Alerts 265
Set to Default 274 Calc Properties 265
Rectangle Contextual Menu Color 265
Add Comment 287 Contextual Menu 265
Delete 287 Drawing Properties 265
Delete All 287 Extend Left 265
Properties 287 Extend Right 265
Set to Default 287 Line Style 265
Symmetric by Max 287 Line Width 265
Symmetric by Min 287 Price 265
relational operators 332 Standard Deviations 265
Reports Standard Deviation Channel Tool Contextual Menu
Account Summary 89 Add Comment 267
Open Positions 89 Delete 267
Order History 89 Delete All 267
Realized Profit/Loss 89 Properties 267
Rollover History 89 Set to Default 267
Transaction History 89 Standard Error Channel Tool
Reports Group Alerts 269
Account Summary 36 Calc Properties 269
Open Positions 36 Color 269
Order History 36 Contextual Menu 269
Realized Profit/Loss 36 Drawing Properties 269
Rollover History 36 Extend Left 269
Transaction History 36 Extend Right 269
Requesting Orders and Supported Order Types Line Style 269
Buy Market Order 1153 Line Width 269
Entry Limit Buy Order 1153 Price 269
Entry Limit Sell Order 1153 Standard Errors 269
© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC
 1194 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Standard Error Channel Tool Contextual Menu DeMark's Range Expansion Index (REI) 404
Add Comment 270 Detrended Price Oscillator (DPO) 404
Delete 270 Directional Movement Index 404
Delete All 270 Directional Movement System 404
Properties 270 Donchian Channel 404
Set to Default 270 Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA)
Support Resources Group 404
Online Forums 52 Double Stochastic Oscillator 404
Reference Guide 52 Ehlers Fisher Transform 404
Video Tutorials 52 Ehlers Laguerre Relative Strength Index 404
Symbols Tool Ehlers MESA Adaptive Moving Average (MAMA
Contextual Menu 246 and FAMA) 404
Properties 246 Ehlers Relative Vigor Index (RVI) 404
Symbols Tool Contextual Menu Elliot Oscillator 404
Add Comment 249 Gann HiLo Activator 404
Delete 249 Gann Swing Oscillator 404
Delete All 249 Gann Trend Oscillator 404
Properties 249 Hull Moving Average 404
Set to Default 249 Ichimoku Kinko Huo 404
Inertia 404
Kase CD 404
-T- Kase DevStop II 404
Kase Peak Oscillator 404
Technical Indicators 404 Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average 404
Aroon Indicator 404
Keltner Bands - ATR 404
Aroon Oscillator 404
Keltner Channels 404
Average Directional Movement Index (ADX) 404
Linear Regression Acceleration 404
Average Directional Movement Index Rating
Linear Regression Indicator 404
(ADXR) 404
Linear Regression Slope 404
Average True Range (ATR) 404
MACD 404
Bollinger Bands 404
MACD-Histogram 404
Bollinger Bands - Fibonacci Ratios 404
MACD-Line 404
Chaikin's 404
Market Facilitation Index (MFI) 404
Chande's Dynamic Momentum Index 404
McClellan Histogram 404
Chande's Momentum Oscillator 404
McClellan Oscillator 404
Chande's QStick 404
Momentum 404
Chande's Range Action Verification Index (RAVI)
Money Flow Index (MFI) 404
404
Moving Average (MA) 404
Chande's TrendScore 404
Moving Average Convergence/Divergence 404
Chaos Accelerator Oscillator 404
Moving Average Envelope 404
Chaos Alligator Oscillator 404
Moving Averages of Relative Strength Index (MA's
Chaos Awesome Oscillator 404
of RSI) 404
Chaos Fractal 404
Moving Slope Rate of Change 404
Chaos Gator Oscillator 404
On Balance Volume (OBV) 404
Commodity Channel Index (CCI) 404
Parabolic SAR 404
Coppock Curve 404
Pivot Points - Daily 404
Darvas Box 404
Pivot Points - Daily - Fibonacci Ratios 404
DeMark's DeMarker I 404
Pivot Points - Monthly 404
DeMark's Projected Range 404

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 Index 1195

Technical Indicators 404 Trading Activity Window Contextual Menu

Pivot Points - Monthly - Fibonacci Ratios 404 Clear Log 117
Pivot Points - Weekly 404 Properties 117
Pivot Points - Weekly - Fibonacci Ratios 404 Restore Default 117
Polarized Fractal Efficiency 404 Save Log 117
Price Volume Trend 404 Trading System Editor Options
Quantitative Qualitative Estimation 404 Code Parameters 209
Rainbow Charts 404 Colors 209
Rainbow Oscillator 404 Font 209
Rator of Change (ROC) 404 Trading System Editor Toolbar
Relative Momentum Index (RMI) 404 Close 207
Relative Strength Index (RSI) 404 Copy 207
Schaff Trend Cycle 404 Cut 207
Stochastic Momentum Index 404 Editor Options 207
Stochastic Oscillator (Fast) 404 Paste 207
Stochastic Oscillator (Full) 404 Redo 207
Stochastic Oscillator (slow) 404 Replace 207
Stochastic RSI Oscillator 404 Save 207
SToller Average Range Channels (STARC) 404 Search 207
Support and Resistance 404 Undo 207
T3 Moving Average 404 Trading System Editor Window
Trailing Stop Loss - Level 404 Formula Tab 207
Trailing Stops - Volatility-Based 404 General Tab 207
Trend Continuation Factor (TCF) 404 Input Variable(s) Tab 207
Trend Intensity Index (TII) 404 Output Variable(s) Tab 207
Trend Trigger Factor (TTF) 404 Trading System Editor Toolbar 207
Triple Exponential Average (TRIX) 404 Trading System Editor Window - Formula Tab
Triple Exponential Moving Average (TEMA) 404 Formula Editor Toolbar 233
True Strength Index (TSI) 404 Paste Function Window 233
Ultimate Oscillator 404 Trading System Editor Window - General Tab
Volume 404 Confirm Password 214
Williams Percent Range (%R) 404 Data Inspection Alias 214
Trading Activity Window Function Name Alias 214
Action 114 Label Mask 214
Amount 114 Name 214
Basis 114 Notes 214
Buy/Sell 114 Password 214
Contextual Menu 114 Placement 214
Date/Time 114 Protect from deletion 214
Expiry 114 Trading System Editor Window - Input Variable(s) Tab
Instrument 114 216
Lots 114 Default 216
Message 114 Display Name 216
Properties 114 Name 216
Rate 114 Read Only 216
Reference Number 114 Type 216
Trailing Pips 114 Trading System Editor Window - Output Variable
Type 114 Editor Window

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1196 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Trading System Editor Window - Output Variable Extend Begin 256

Editor Window Extend End 256
Alerts Tab 223 Line Style 256
Graphic Tab 223 Line Width 256
Highlights Tab 223 Trend Line Tool Contextual Menu
Indicator Output Tab 223 Add Comment 258
Name Tab 223 Delete 258
Trading Tab 223 Delete All 258
Trends Tab 223 Draw Parallel Trend Line 258
Trading System Editor Window - Output Variable(s) Properties 258
Tab 221 Set to Default 258
Delete 221 Triangle Contextual Menu
Edit 221 Add Comment 291
Move Down 221 Delete 291
Move Up 221 Delete All 291
New 221 Properties 291
Trading Systems Builder Set to Default 291
Clone 205 Troubleshooting Group
Custom Trading Systems 205 Delete All Chart History 52
Delete 205
Edit 205
Export 205 -V-
Import 205
New 205 Version Group
About 53
Standard Trading Systems 205
Vertical Lines Tool
Trading Systems Group
Color 250
Active Trading Systems Summary 50
Contextual Menu 250
Add Trading System... 50
Date/Time 250
Attached Trading Systems 50
Line Style 250
Trading Systems Builder 50
Line Width 250
Trading Systems Quick List 50
Properties 250
Trading Systems Quick List
Configure 236 Vertical Lines Tool Contextual Menu
Delete 252
Trading Tools Group
Delete All 252
Currency Calculator 40
Properties 252
Pip Calculator 40
Set to Default 252
Trading Windows Group
Open Positions Window 39 Visual Trading Language (VTL)
Comments 329
Pending Orders Window 39
Constants 329
Trend Line Tool
Functions 329
Alerts 256
Functions (Reserved For Future Use) 329
Begin Date 256
Operators 329
Begin Value 256
Predefined Data Arrays 329
Color 256
Punctuators 329
Contextual Menu 256
Drawing Properties 256 Visual Trading Language (VTL) Comments
Multiple-line Comments 330
End Date 256
Single-line Comments 330
End Value 256
Visual Trading Language (VTL) Constants
© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC
 Index 1197

Visual Trading Language (VTL) Constants MAMA 334

Global 333 Maximum 334
Moving Average (MOV()) Function 333 Median Price 334
Rate of Change (ROC()) Function 333 Midpoint 334
Visual Trading Language (VTL) Functions 334 Minimum 334
Arc Tangent 334 Minute 334
Aroon Down 334 Modulus 334
Aroon Up 334 Month 334
Average True Range 334 Moving Average 334
Bar Count 334 Negative 334
Bar Index 334 Outside 334
Bars Since 334 Parabolic SAR 334
Bollinger Bands (Bottom Band) 334 Peak Value 334
Bollinger Bands (Top Band) 334 Power 334
Ceiling 334 Precision 334
Commodity Channel Index 334 Previous (PREV) 334
Cosine 334 Rally 334
Cross 334 Random 334
Cumulate 334 Rate of Change 334
Day of Month 334 Reaction 334
Day of Week 334 Reference 334
Detrended Price Oscillator 334 Relative Strength Index 334
Error 334 Round 334
Event Count 334 Signal Flag 334
Exponent 334 Signal Hold 334
Fama 334 Signal Remove 334
Floor 334 Signal Remove Span 334
Fraction 334 Sine 334
Gap Down 334 Square Root 334
Gap Up 334 Standard Deviation 334
Highest 334 Standard Error 334
Highest Bars Ago 334 Stochastic Momentum Oscillator 334
Highest High Value 334 Summation 334
Highest High Value Bars Ago 334 Symbol Digits 334
Highest Since 334 Symbol Point 334
Hour 334 Trough Value 334
If() 334 Typical Price 334
Inside 334 Ultimate Oscillator 334
Integer 334 Value When 334
IsDefined 334 Vertical Horizontal Filter 334
IsUndefined 334 Weighted Close 334
Linear Regression Indicator 334 Wilder's Smoothing 334
Linear Regression Slope 334 Williams' %R 334
Logarithm 334 Year 334
Lowest 334 Visual Trading Language (VTL) Operators
Lowest Bars Ago 334 Logical Operators 331
Lowest Low Value 334 Mathematical Operators 331
Lowest Since 334 Relational Operators 331

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC

 1198 VT Trader 2.0 Help Manual

Visual Trading Language (VTL) Predefined Data Dealing Desk Selection 58

Arrays VT Trader Version/Build Numbers 58
haClose (haC) 334
haHigh (haH) 334
haOpen (haO) 334 -W-
High (H) 334
Windows Group
Low (L) 334
Close All Windows 33
Median Price (MP) 334
Switch Windows 33
Open (O) 334
PREV 334
Typical Price (TP)
Volume 334
334 -Z-
Weighted Close (WC) 334 Zoom Group
Visual Trading Language (VTL) Predefined d Data Area Zoom 44
Arrays Undo Zoom 44
haLow (haL) 334 X-Axis Zoom In 44
Visual Trading Language (VTL) Predefined Data Arrays X-Axis Zoom Out 44
Close (C) 334 Y-Axis Zoom In 44
Visual Trading Language (VTL) Punctuators Y-Axis Zoom Out 44
Assignment 331
Comma 331
Parentheses 331
Semi-colon 331
VT programming language 332
VT Trader Button
Change Password... 54
Exit 54
Export Environment 54
Import Environment 54
Login 54
Logout 54
Options 54
VT Trader Interface
"Docked" Windows Concept 26
Docking... How It Works 26
Fluent UI Ribbon 26
Quick Access Toolbar 26
Status Bar 26
Task Windows 26
VT Trader Button 26
VT Trader Notification Icon 26
VT Trader Notification Icon
About 58
Exit 58
Help Manuals 58
VT Trader Status Bar
Connection Status Icons 58
Date/Time from Broker's Services 58

© 2011 Visual Trading Systems, LLC